192 54 87MB
English Pages 356 Year 2015
380 84 101MB Read more
181 75 51MB Read more
DECEMBER 2015
VOLUME 63
NUMBER 12
IETMAB
(ISSN 0018-9480)
PART I OF TWO PARTS PAPERS
EM Theory and Analysis Techniques Circular Mode Converter Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A Universal Solution to -to. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X. H. Yu, J. L. Deng, S. M. Li, W. P. Cao, X. Gao, and Y. N. Jiang Planar Distributed Full-Tensor Anisotropic Metamaterials for Transformation Electromagnetics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T. Nagayama and A. Sanada Integral-Equation Formulation for the Analysis of Capacitive Waveguide Filters Containing Dielectric and Metallic Arbitrarily Shaped Objects and Novel Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F. D. Quesada Pereira, A. Romera Perez, P. Vera Castejón, and A. Alvarez Melcon Devices and Modeling RF Linearity Performance Potential of Short-Channel Graphene Field-Effect Transistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. U. Alam, K. D. Holland, M. Wong, S. Ahmed, D. Kienle, and M. Vaidyanathan Consistent Modeling and Power Gain Analysis of Microwave SiGe HBTs in CE and CB Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G. Álvarez-Botero, R. Torres-Torres, and R. S. Murphy-Arteaga Passive Circuits Automated Design of Common-Mode Suppressed Balanced Wideband Bandpass Filters by Means of Aggressive Space Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M. Sans, J. Selga, P. Vélez, A. Rodríguez, J. Bonache, V. E. Boria, and F. Martín Compact Multi-Band Bandpass Filters With Mixed Electric and Magnetic Coupling Using Multiple-Mode Resonator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J. Xu, W. Wu, and G. Wei High Rejection, Self-Packaged Low-Pass Filter Using Multilayer Liquid Crystal Polymer Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F. Cervera and J. Hong Novel Coupling Matrix Synthesis for Single-Layer Substrate-Integrated Evanescent-Mode Cavity Tunable Bandstop Filter Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S. Saeedi, J. Lee, and H. H. Sigmarsson Mechanical Tuning of Substrate Integrated Waveguide Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F. Mira, J. Mateu, and C. Collado Triple-Mode Dielectric Resonator Diplexer for Base-Station Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S.-W. Wong, Z.-C. Zhang, S.-F. Feng, F.-C. Chen, L. Zhu, and Q.-X. Chu A Configurable Coupling Structure for Broadband Millimeter-Wave Split-Block Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. Koenen, U. Siart, T. F. Eibert, G. D. Conway, and U. Stroth
3845 3851 3862
3874 3888
3896 3909 3920 3929 3939 3947 3954
(Contents Continued on Back Cover)
(Contents Continued from Front Cover) Design of High-Directivity Wideband Microstrip Directional Coupler With Fragment-Type Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L. Wang, G. Wang, and J. Sidén Exact Synthesis of Full- and Half-Symmetric Rat-Race Ring Hybrids With or Without Impedance Transforming Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P.-J. Chou, Y.-W. Lin, and C.-Y. Chang Design of a Traveling-Wave Slot Array Power Divider Using the Method of Moments and a Genetic Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S. R. Rengarajan and J. J. Lynch An Isolated Radial Power Divider via Circular Waveguide -Mode Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q.-X. Chu, D.-Y. Mo, and Q.-S. Wu Reliability Analysis of Ku-Band 5-bit Phase Shifters Using MEMS SP4T and SPDT Switches . . . . S. Dey and S. K. Koul Wideband Balanced Network with High Isolation Using Double-Sided Parallel-Strip Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W. Feng, C. Zhao, W. Che, and Q. Xue Expedited Geometry Scaling of Compact Microwave Passives by Means of Inverse Surrogate Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S. Koziel and A. Bekasiewicz High-Performance Coplanar Waveguide to Empty Substrate Integrated Coaxial Line Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Belenguer, A. L. Borja, H. Esteban, and V. E. Boria Design and Validation of Microstrip Gap Waveguides and Their Transitions to Rectangular Waveguide, for Millimeter-Wave Applications . . . . . A. A. Brazález, E. Rajo-Iglesias, J.-L. Vázquez-Roy, A. Vosoogh, and P.-S. Kildal Hybrid and Monolithic RF Integrated Circuits Highly Efficient Concurrent Power Amplifier With Controllable Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y. Sun, X.-W. Zhu, J. Zhai, L. Zhang, and F. Meng A Post-Matching Doherty Power Amplifier Employing Low-Order Impedance Inverters for Broadband Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J. Pang, S. He, C. Huang, Z. Dai, J. Peng, and F. You Analysis of Far-Out Spurious Noise and its Reduction in Envelope-Tracking Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J. Kim, D. Kim, Y. Cho, D. Kang, B. Park, K. Moon, and B. Kim A 40-nm CMOS E-Band 4-Way Power Amplifier With Neutralized Bootstrapped Cascode Amplifier and Optimum Passive Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. Zhao and P. Reynaert A Prototype SAW-Less LTE Transmitter With a High-Linearity Modulator Using BPF-Based I/Q Summing and a Triple-Layer Marchand Balun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T. Nakamura, N. Kitazawa, K. Kohira, and H. Ishikuro A CMOS Spectrum Sensor Based on Quasi-Cyclostationary Feature Detection for Cognitive Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. Sepidband and K. Entesari Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques Investigating the Broadband Microwave Absorption of Nanodiamond Impurities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J. A. Cuenca, E. Thomas, S. Mandal, O. Williams, and A. Porch Load Modulation Measurements of X-Band Outphasing Power Amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M. Litchfield, T. Reveyrand, and Z. Popovi´c RF Systems and Applications Nonlinear Communication System With Harmonic Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. Cheong, K. Wu, and K.-W. Tam Passive Microwave Substrate Integrated Cavity Resonator for Humidity Sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H. El Matbouly, N. Boubekeur, and F. Domingue Wearable RF Sensor Array Implementing Coupling-Matrix Readout Extraction Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W.-T. S. Chen, K. M. E. Stewart, C. K. Yang, R. R. Mansour, J. Carroll, and A. Penlidis Active Detuning of MRI Receive Coils with GaN FETs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M. Twieg, M. A. de Rooij, and M. A. Griswold Low-Loss Ultrawideband Programmable RF Photonic Phase Filter for Spread Spectrum Pulse Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H.-J. Kim, A. Rashidinejad, and A. M. Weiner
3962 3971 3981 3988 3997 4013 4019 4027 4035
4051 4061 4072 4083 4090 4098
4110 4119 4130 4150 4157 4169 4178
LETTERS
Comments on “Fractional Derivative Based FDTD Modeling of Transient Wave Propagation in Havriliak–Negami Media” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I. T. Rekanos Authors’ Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L. Mescia, P. Bia, and D. Caratelli
4188 4191
IEEE MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES SOCIETY The Microwave Theory and Techniques Society is an organization, within the framework of the IEEE, of members with principal professional interests in the field of microwave theory and techniques. All members of the IEEE are eligible for membership in the Society upon payment of the annual Society membership fee of $17.00, plus an annual subscription fee of $25.00 per year for electronic media only or $46.00 per year for electronic and print media. For information on joining, write to the IEEE at the address below. Member copies of Transactions/Journals are for personal use only. ADMINISTRATIVE COMMITTEE T. LEE, President A. ABUNJAILEH S. BARBIN
R. HENDERSON, Secretary
K. WU, President Elect
T. BRAZIL M. GOUKER
R. GUPTA W. HONG
J. LASKAR G. LYONS
A. JACOB S. KOUL
M. MADIHIAN S. PACHECO
Honorary Life Members T. ITOH R. SPARKS
G. PONCHAK S. RAMAN
M. GOUKER, Treasurer J. RAUTIO S. REISING
M. SALAZAR-PALMA A. SANADA
D. SCHREURS J. WEILER
Distinguished Lecturers
P. STAECKER K. TOMIYASU
R. CAMERON R. H. CAVERLY G. CHATTOPADHYAY
T.-W. HUANG M. JARRAHI J. J. KOMIAK
E. MCCUNE A. MORTAZAWI T. OHIRA
D. WILLIAMS
Past Presidents J. PAWLAN J. C. PEDRO A. STELZER
J. YAO H. ZIRATH T. ZWICK
R. WEIGEL (2014) M. GUPTA (2013) N. KOLIAS (2012)
MTT-S Chapter Chairs Albuquerque: E. FARR Argentina: A. M. HENZE Atlanta: K. NAISHADHAM Austria: A. SPRINGER Baltimore: I. AHMAD Bangalore/India: K. VINOY Beijing: Z. FENG Belarus: S. MALYSHEV Benelux: G. VANDENBOSCH Boston: C. GALBRAITH Bombay/India: M. V. PITKE Brasilia: J. BEZERRA/ M. VINICIUS ALVES NUNES Buenaventura: C. SEABURY Buffalo: M. R. GILLETTE Bulgaria: K. ASPARUHOVA Canada, Atlantic: Z. CHEN Cedar Rapids/Central Iowa: C. G. XIE Central & South Italy: L. TARRICONE Central No. Carolina: Z. XIE Central Texas: J. PRUITT Centro-Norte Brasil: M. V. ALVES NUNES Chengdu: Z. NEI Chicago: D. ERRICOLO Cleveland: M. SCARDELLETTI Columbus: A. O’BRIEN Connecticut: C. BLAIR Croatia: D. BONEFACIC Czech/Slovakia: J. VOVES Dallas: R. SANTHAKUMAR Dayton: A. TERZUOLI Delhi/India: A. BASU
Denver: M. JANEZIC Eastern No. Carolina: T. NICHOLS Egypt: E. HASHEESH Finland: V. VIIKARI Florida West Coast: J. WANG Foothills: M. CHERUBIN France: D. BAJON Germany: G. BOECK Greece: R. MAKRI Gujarat/India: S. CHAKRABARTY Harbin: Q. WU Hawaii: K. MIYASHIRO Hong Kong: H. WONG Houston: S. A. LONG Houston, College Station: G. H. HUFF Hungary: L. NAGY Huntsville: H. SCHANTZ Hyderabad/India: S. R. NOOKALA India: D. BHATNAGER India/Kolkata: S. SANKARALINGAM Indonesia: E. T. RAHARDJO Israel: S. AUSTER Japan: N. SUEMATSU Kansai: T. ISHIZAKI Kingston: S. PODILCHAK Kitchener-Waterloo: R. R. MANSOUR Lebanon: E. NASSAR Lithuania: B. LEVITAS Long Island/New York: S. PADMANABHAN Los Angeles, Coastal: V. RADISIC Los Angeles, Metro/San Fernando: T. CISCO
Macau: C. C. PONG Madras/India: S. SALIVAHANAN Malaysia: M. K. M. SALLEH Malaysia, Penang: B. L. LIM Melbourne: R. BOTSFORD Mexican Council: R. M. RODRIGUEZ-DAGNINO Milwaukee: S. G. JOSHI Monterrey/Mexico: R. M. RODRIGUEZ-DAGNINO Morocco: M. ESSAAIDI Montreal: K. WU Morocco: M. ESSAAIDI Nagoya: J. BAE Nanjing: W. HONG Nanjing, Hangzhou: L. SUN New Hampshire: E. H. SCHENK New Jersey Coast: J. SINSKY New South Wales: Y. RANGA New Zealand: A. WILLIAMSON North Italy: G. OLIVERI North Jersey: A. K. PODDAR Northern Australia: J. MAZIERSKA Northern Canada: M. DANESHMAN Northern Nevada: B. S. RAWAT Norway: M. UBOSTAD Orange County: H. J. DE LOS SANTOS Oregon: K. MAYS Orlando: K. KARNATI Ottawa: Q. ZENG Philadelphia: A. S. DARYOUSH Phoenix: S. ROCKWELL
DOMINIQUE SCHREURS KU Leuven B-3001 Leuven, Belgium
Editorial Assistants MARCIA HENSLEY USA ENAS KANDIL Belgium
Sweden: A. RYDBERG Switzerland: M. MATTES Syracuse: D. MCPHERSON Taegu: Y.-H. JEONG Tainan: H.-H. CHEN Taipei: C. MENG Thailand: C. PHONGCHAROENPANICH Toronto: G. V. ELEFTHERIADES Tucson: H. XIN Tunisia: A. GHARSALLAH Turkey: B. SAKA Twin Cities: C. FULLER UK/RI: A. REZAZADEH Ukraine, East: N. K. SAKHNENKO Ukraine, Kiev: Y. PROKOPENKO Ukraine, Rep. of Georgia: K. TAVZARASHVILI Ukraine, Vinnitsya: V. M. DUBOVOY Ukraine, West: I. IVASENKO United Arab Emirates: N. K. MALLAT Uttar Pradesh/India: M. J. AKHTAR Vancouver: S. MCCLAIN Venezuela: J. B. PENA Victoria: K. GHORBANI Virginia Mountain: T. A. WINSLOW Washington DC/Northern Virginia: T. IVANOV Western Saudi Arabia: A. SHAMIM Winnipeg: P. MOJABI Xian: X. SHI
Associate Editors
Editors-In-Chief JENSHAN LIN Univ. of Florida Gainesville, FL32611-6130 USA
Pikes Peak: K. HU Poland: W. J. KRZYSZTOFIK Portugal: J. CALDINHAS VAZ Princeton/Central Jersey: W. CURTICE Queensland: K. BIALKOWSKI Rio de Janeiro: J. R. BERGMANN Rochester: M. SIDLEY Romania: T. PETRESCU Russia, Moscow: V. A. KALOSHIN Russia, Nizhny-Novgorad: G. L. PAKHOMOV Russia, Novosibirsk: A. YAROSLAVTSEV Russia, Saratov/Penza: M. D. PROKHOROV Russia, Saint Petersburg: S. P. ZUBKO Russia, Siberia: V. V. SUHOTIN Russia, Tomsk: D. ZYKOV San Diego: J. TWOMEY Santa Clara Valley/San Francisco: N. SHAMS Seattle: S. EBADI Seoul: C. SEO Serbia and Montenegro: B. MILOVANOVIĆ Shanghai: J. MAO Singapore: Z. YANG South Africa: A. LYSKO South Australia: T. KAUFMANN South Brazil: J. R. BERGMANN Southeastern Michigan: T. OZDEMIR Southern Alberta: E. FEAR Spain: J. I. ALONSO Springfield: P. R. SIQUEIRA Sri Lanka: A. U. A. W. GUNAWARDENA St. Louis: D. BARBOUR
NUNO BORGES CARVALHO Universidade de Aveiro Aveiro, Portugal
J.-C. CHIAO Univ. of Texas at Arlington Arlington, TX USA
JIASHENG HONG Heriot-Watt Univ. Edinburgh, UK
LUCA PERREGRINI Univ. of Pavia Pavia, Italy
OLGA BORIC-LUBECKE Univ. of Hawaii at Manoa Manoa, HIUSA
GILLES DAMBRINE Univ. of Lille Lille, France
T.-W. HUANG Nat. Taiwan Univ. Taipei, Taiwan
CARLOS SAAVEDRA Queen’s Univ. Kingston, ON, Canada
SHENG-FUH R. CHANG Nat. Chung Cheng Univ. Chiayi County, Taiwan
ROBERTO GOMEZ-GARCIA Univ. Alcala Madrid, Spain
JON MARTENS Anritsu Morgan Hill, CA USA
MARTIN VOSSIEK Friedrich-Alexander Univ. Erlangen-Nuremburg Erlangen, Germany
FRANCISCO MESA Universidad de Sevilla Seville, Spain
X. CHEN Nat. Univ. Singapore Singapore
A. RIDDLE, Editor-in-Chief, IEEE Microwave Magazine J. PAPAPOLYMEROU, Editor-in-Chief, IEEE Microwave and Wireless Component Letters HOWARD E. MICHEL, President BARRY L. SHOOP, President-Elect PARVIZ FAMOURI, Secretary JERRY L. HUDGINS, Treasurer ROBERTO DE MARCA, Past President
P. H. SIEGEL, Editor-in-Chief, IEEE Trans. Terahertz Science and Technology R. MIYAMOTO, Web Master
IEEE Officers
SAURABH SINHA, Vice President, Educational Activities SHEILA HEMAMI, Vice President, Publication Services and Products WAI-CHOONG WONG, Vice President, Member and Geographic Activities BRUCE P. KRAEMER, President, Standards Association VINCENZO PIURI, Vice President, Technical Activities JAMES A. JEFFRIES, President, IEEE-USA WILLIAM W. MOSES, Director, Division IV—Electromagnetics and Radiation
IEEE Executive Staff DR. E. JAMES PRENDERGAST, Executive Director & Chief Operating Officer THOMAS SIEGERT, Business Administration CHERIF AMIRAT, Information Technology ELENA GERSTMANN, Corporate Activities PATRICK MAHONEY, Marketing DOUGLAS GORHAM, Educational Activities CECELIA JANKOWSKI, Member and Geographic Activities EILEEN M. LACH, General Counsel & Corporate Compliance Officer MICHAEL FORSTER, Publications SHANNON JOHNSTON, Human Resources KONSTANTINOS KARACHALIOS, Standards Activities CHRIS BRANTLEY, IEEE-USA MARY WARD-CALLAN, Technical Activities
IEEE Periodicals Transactions/Journals Department
Senior Director: FRAN ZAPPULLA Editorial Director: DAWN MELLEY Production Director: PETER M. TUOHY Managing Editor: MONA MITTRA Senior Editor: CHRISTINA M. REZES IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES (ISSN 0018-9480) is published monthly by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. Responsibility for the contents rests upon the authors and not upon the IEEE, the Society/Council, or its members. IEEE Corporate Office: 3 Park Avenue, 17th Floor, New York, NY 10016-5997. IEEE Operations Center: 445 Hoes Lane, Piscataway, NJ 08854-4141. NJ Telephone: +1 732 981 0060. Price/Publication Information: Individual copies: IEEE Members $20.00 (first copy only), nonmember $160.00 per copy. (Note: Postage and handling charge not included.) Member and nonmember subscription prices available upon request. Copyright and Reprint Permissions: Abstracting is permitted with credit to the source. Libraries are permitted to photocopy for private use of patrons, provided the per-copy fee of $31.00 is paid through the Copyright Clearance Center, 222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923. For all other copying, reprint, or republication permission, write to Copyrights and Permissions Department, IEEE Publications Administration, 445 Hoes Lane, Piscataway, NJ 08854-4141. Copyright © 2015 by The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. All rights reserved. Periodicals Postage Paid at New York, NY and at additional mailing offices. Postmaster: Send address changes to IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, IEEE, 445 Hoes Lane, Piscataway, NJ 08854-4141. GST Registration No. 125634188. CPC Sales Agreement #40013087. Return undeliverable Canada addresses to: Pitney Bowes IMEX, P.O. Box 4332, Stanton Rd., Toronto, ON M5W 3J4, Canada. IEEE prohibits discrimination, harassment and bullying. For more information visit http://www.ieee.org/nondiscrimination. Printed in U.S.A.
Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/TMTT.2015.2503946
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
3845
A Universal Solution to -toCircular Mode Converter Design Xin Hua Yu, Ji Liang Deng, Si Min Li, Wei Ping Cao, Xi Gao, and Yan Nan Jiang
Abstract—A universal solution to -tomode converters in highly oversized circumferentially corrugated circular waveguides is proposed based on the nonuniform rational B-spline technique. A 35-GHz -tomode converter of radius 16 mm is designed by the method and predicted to have a conversion mode conversion efficiency is bandwidth of 7.9% when the over 98.5%. The output mode content is extremely close to that of the ideal mode. The hot and cold tests show good property of the mode converter. The method offers universal solutions to the problems of the corrugated circular waveguide mode converters design at arbitrary radius and frequency. Index Terms—High conversion, high power, mode content, nonuniform rational B-spline (NURBS) technique, -tomode converter.
I. INTRODUCTION
T
HE mode consists of approximately 85% mode and 15% mode in power, respectively, and there is a phase difference of approximately 180 between these two modes [1]. This hybrid mode is almost perfectly linearly polarized and gives an almost Gaussian-like radiation pattern [2]. Therefore, this mode is used in a variety of applications of high-power millimeter waves, such as deep-space millimeter-wave radar and electron cyclotron resonance multiply charged heavy ion sources (ECRISs) with high-power gyrotrons [3], [4]. However, a high-power microwave source cannot output the mode directly, thus the mode is usually transformed from gyrotron modes [5] by the following two mode conversion sequences [6], [7]: 1) and 2) . In the meantime, direct -tomode converters have been developed [8], [9], Manuscript received May 19, 2015; revised September 07, 2015; accepted September 13, 2015. Date of publication October 26, 2015; date of current version December 02, 2015. This work was supported in part by the National Natural Science Fund Committee of China under Grant 61161002, Grant 61561013, Grant 61361005, and Grant 61461016, by the Guangxi Natural Science Fund of China under Grant 2015GXNSFAA139305, Grant 2014GXNSFAA118283, and Grant 2014GXNSFAA118366, and by the Graduate Innovation Projects founded by the Guilin University of Electronic Technology under Grant GDYCSZ201463. X. H. Yu, J. L. Deng, W. P. Cao, X. Gao, Y. N. Jiang are with the Key Laboratory of Cognitive Radio and Information Processing, Guilin University of Electronic Technology, Ministry of Education, Guilin, Guangxi 541004, China (e-mail: [email protected]; [email protected]; [email protected]; [email protected]; [email protected]). S. M. Li is with the School of Electrical and Information Engineering, Guangxi University of Science and Technology, Liuzhou, Guangxi 545006, China (e-mail: [email protected]). Color versions of one or more of the figures in this paper are available online at http://ieeexplore.ieee.org. Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/TMTT.2015.2490680
but these mode converters did not indicate the ratio of and mode in power, and the output hybrid mode was not the ideal mode. Moreover, it is difficult to fabricate such mode converters because direct -tomode converters use corrugated waveguides with a serpentine axial profile. Until now, the first conversion sequence has been followed by most authors [10]–[12]. In the first sequence, the polarized transition mode is used, which allows all converters made without bends and results in easily altering the polarization plane just by spinning the serpentine mode converter around its axis. However, in the second scheme, the mode acts as the polarized intermediate mode, which makes efficient -toconverters made considerably shorter than the corresponding -tomode converters. Moreover, because the -toconverter bandwidth is inherently narrower than that of the -toconverter, the -toconverter bandwidth, in contrast to that of the -toconverter, is also reduced. At present, the designs of -tomode converters mostly use parabolic tapering of the slot depth in corrugated waveguides to achieve mode from mode [13], [14] (with different degrees of the parabola, depending on the grade that the converters were oversized). The converter in [7] with a parabolically tapered corrugation profile also has a conversion efficiency of 98.5%. However, mode converters with a parabolic varied profile have some shortages in certain radius and frequency, as a result of which the mode converters are long or the power ratio of the and mode cannot meet the requirements. In [15], at the end of the -tomode converter, the hybrid mode, with approximately 20% in the mode, and 80% in the mode, was obtained. This ratio is not the desirable characteristics of the mode. Mode contents are important for characterizing the mode conversion efficiency of a given geometry [16]. The purpose of this paper is to propose a method based on the nonuniform rational B-spline (NURBS) technique [17] for synthesis of a compact -tomode converter with high efficiency and wide bandwidth in an arbitrary radius and frequency. Meanwhile, the output mode content is close to that of the ideal mode. In this paper, Section II describes the structure characteristics of the -toconverter and the generation of the slotdepth profile by the NURBS technique. Section III expatiates optimization processes for designing the -tomode converter. The main ideas are as follows. 1) The NURBS representation of the slot-depth profile. 2) The commercial software CST Microwave Studio (CST MWS) is called to model and simulate the -to-
0018-9480 © 2015 IEEE. Personal use is permitted, but republication/redistribution requires IEEE permission. See http://www.ieee.org/publications_standards/publications/rights/index.html for more information.
3846
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
radius and frequency. Therefore, we propose the nonparabolic profile type. B. Constructing Profile of the Slot Depth by the NURBS Technology In order to get a nonparabolic curve, which acts as the varying slot depth profile of the mode converter inner wall, we employ the NURBS technique [17]. A th-degree NURBS curve can be defined as Fig. 1. Schematic drawing of the -tomode converter. The slot depth profile of the corrugation starts from zero at the input port and increases gradually to approximately one-quarter wavelength at the final port.
mode converter. CST MWS is used as a program to provide the optimal objective, which is the efficiency of -tomode. 3) The Nelder–Mead simplex optimization algorithm is employed to find the optimal slot-depth contour. Calculations and simulations are presented in Section IV. In addition, contrasting different results with different methods are given in this section. The fabrication and experimental results of the mode converter are shown in Sections V and VI, respectively. Conclusions are summarized in Section VII. II. DESIGN TECHNIQUES OF THE MODE CONVERTER A. Mode Converter From
-TO-
to
-tomode conversion can be obtained in straight circumferentially corrugated waveguides with a gradually increased depth of the annular slot [18]. The annular slot depth of the mode converter is successively augmented from a start value of zero to an end value of about one-quarter free-space wavelength, as depicted in Fig. 1, where and are the waveguide inner radius, length of the mode converter, slot depth, width, and corrugated period, respectively. When the diameter of a corrugated waveguide is much larger than the wavelength and the period of the annular slot is small as compared to the wavelength, space harmonics can be neglected. In this case, the resulting mode conversion can be analyzed through surface impedance formalism [19]. The surface reactance can be approximately expressed as [20] (1) where is the free-space wavenumber, the meaning of the other letters has been given in the above. These former designs of the -tomode converters mostly used parabolic tapering of the slot depth to achieve mode from mode (with a different degree of the parabola, depending on the grade that the converters were oversized). The slot depth profile distribution function can be described by the following expression: (2) where is the degree of the parabolic profile. However, as was mentioned in Section I, mode converters with a parabolic varying profile have some shortages in certain
(3) is the th control point, is the correwhere , sponding weight, and is the th degree b-spline basis function defined at the nonperiodic knot vector (4) From the NURBS theory, there is a unique NURBS function time continuation , which satisfies of the boundary conditions (5) (6) where (5) and (6) can be realized by -coordinates of the start and end control points meeting the requirement that the depth of the annular slots is increased gradually from 0 to 1 quarterwavelength. Herein, we will construct the corrugation profile with its two ends being at the -axis. This requires that the control points’ serial looks like
(7) where the control points must be limited to a certain value to ensure that the varied slot depth profile can be conform to surface impedance formalism. III. OPTIMIZATION OF
–
MODE CONVERTER
For optimization of the -tomode converter, control points of the slot depth profile and length of the converter are set as parameters to be optimized, and conversion efficiency of the mode is set as the object to be optimized. In our method, CST MWS is controlled by MATLAB, i.e., CST MWS acts as the server and MATLAB as the client. CST MWS is a fully featured software for electromagnetic analysis and design in the high-frequency range. In modeling, we have considered the ohmic losses of the mode converter. The flowchart of the optimization process is shown in Fig. 2. The main ideas are: in the MATLAB environment, 1) a set of control points is provided by the Nelder–Mead simplex optimization algorithm [21] and these are used to generate the slot depth profile along the converter’s guiding axis by the NURBS technique; 2) CST MWS is called to model the converter by the profile, and then to simulate the model; and 3) the – mode conversion efficiency is retrieved from the CST simulation, and then the optimization algorithm will judge whether the optimization value, i.e., the optimal conversion efficiency,
YU et al.: UNIVERSAL SOLUTION TO
-TO-
CIRCULAR MODE CONVERTER DESIGN
3847
Fig. 3. Optimum profile of the 35-GHz -tomode converter. Dashed line indicates the nonanalytical slot depth profile. Solid lines indicate the wall of the mode converter in which the inner radius is 16 mm, length of the converter is 415.5 mm, and corrugated period is 3 mm.
Fig. 4. Drawing of the mode converter. Dashed line and solid lines indicate the guiding axis and the wall of the mode converter design, respectively.
Fig. 2. Flowchart of the implemented optimization process in MATLAB environment.
is met. If yes, the optimization process ceases and the corresponding profile data set is the output. Otherwise, another set of control points is given by the optimization algorithm, and steps 1)–4) are repeated. Moreover, the initial control points are on a straight line whose starting and ending two control points are and , respectively, and the slope of the straight line is with being the length of the converter. IV. MODEL AND SIMULATION Based on Section III, a -tomode converter operating at 35 GHz is optimized. The optimum geometric parameters of the optimal converter are: 1) inner radius of 16 mm; 2) length of 415.5 mm; and 3) corrugated period of 3 mm. The optimum corrugated profile is shown in Fig. 3. Such a profile can be explained using the eigenvalue plot of the corresponding corrugated waveguide (35 GHz, radius mm, corrugation period mm) as shown in [7, Fig. 6]. Drawing of the optimal design of the -tomode converter is given in Fig. 4. The dashed line and the solid lines in the drawing indicate the guiding axis and the wall of the optimal converter design, respectively. The converter was modeled in CST MWS and HFSS for the purpose of verification after the optimal profile was obtained by the optimization. The relative power distributions of the and modes, and that of the mode as a function of frequency, are presented in Figs. 5 and 6, respectively. One can find from Fig. 5 that relative powers of the mode and the mode are held approximately 14.5% and 84.5%. From Fig. 6, one can then see that the simulated bandwidth of the mode
Fig. 5. Fractional power of and versus frequency at the output of -tomode converter with nonparabolic profile. Solid the 35-GHz mode and the lines and dashed line indicate the fractional power of the mode, respectively.
converter is about 7.9% when the conversion efficiency is kept over 98.5%. The mode conversion efficiency is as high as 99.1% at 35 GHz. Simulated results from CST agree well with HFSS. Furthermore, the simulated distributions (by CST MWS) of the electric fields at both the input and output ports of the mode converter are illustrated in Fig. 7(a) and (b), respectively. One can see from these two figures that the mode is transformed into a good mode pattern. In addition, the -tomode converter operating at 35 GHz is designed with a parabolic profile type. The degree and the length of the parabolic profile type are 1.6094 and 497 mm, respectively. One can find from Fig. 8 that the relative power of the mode is more than 86% and relative power of the mode is less than 13%. The power ratio of the and mode cannot meet the requirements. The results are compared with nonparabolic profile type results (see Table I). Table I lists the mode contents for the ideal mode and the output mode of the two type mode converter. The ideal
3848
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
TABLE I SIMULATION MODE CONTENTS OF TWO TYPE MODE CONVERTER ATTACHED. MODE COMPOSITION IS SHOWN IN THE SECOND ROW FOR THE IDEAL COMPARISON. ALL NUMBERS IN THIS TABLE ARE EXPRESSED AS PERCENTAGES
Case 1: The ideal mode. Case 2: The output modes of the parabolic profile type Case 3: The output modes of the non-parabolic profile type.
.
Fig. 6. mode conversion efficiency versus frequency of the 35-GHz -tomode converter. Solid line and dashed line indicate the mode fractional power of CST and HFSS, respectively.
Fig. 7. Simulated electric field distributions on the input and output ports of -tomode converter by the software CST. (a) Input port the mode. (b) Output port mode.
Fig. 9. Photograph of the machined parts of the -tomode converter. Letter A indicates a single slot tooth machined; B denotes all the slot teeth machined; C shows the cylindrical pipe used for holding all the slot teeth machined; D indicates one of the flanges used to fix the slot teeth in the pipe.
Fig. 8. Fractional power of and versus frequency at the output -tomode converter by parabolic profile type. Solid of the 35-GHz mode and the lines and dashed line indicate the fractional power of the mode, respectively.
mode can be expressed as a mixture of the TE and TM modes from smooth waveguide solutions comprising 84.496% , 14.606% , 0.082% , 0.613% , and 0.00358% , as shown in Table I. The output hybrid mode in the nonparabolic profile type is extremely close to an ideal mode, relative to that of the parabolic profile type. V. FABRICATION The 35-GHz -tomode converter design is fabricated by a numerically controlled machine tool. The machined parts, indicated by upper case letters A, B, C, and D of the -tomode converter are given in Fig. 9. In the figure, the letter A indicates a single slot tooth, B indicates all the slot teeth, C indicates the metallic cylindrical pipe used for holding these slot teeth, and D indicates one of the flanges that keeps the
Fig. 10. Photograph of the its machined parts.
-to-
mode converter assembled from
slot teeth all in the cavity of the cylindrical pipe. The mode converter assembled from all the needed parts is show in Fig. 10. VI. HOT TEST EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS A. Hot Test A hot test of the designed mode converter was done. The scenario photograph of the test is shown in Fig. 11. In the figure, all the key elements in the test are marked by the letters A, B, C, and D. Among them, the letter A indicates the output port of the klystron; B marks the -tomode converter, which transforms a mode into a mode; C indicates the -tomode converter designed here; and D stands for a piece of heat-sensitive paper. During the hot test, the port of the designed mode converter is connected to a -tomode converter whose port is mounted to the klystron, which outputs a mode. In front of the output port of the designed mode
YU et al.: UNIVERSAL SOLUTION TO
-TO-
CIRCULAR MODE CONVERTER DESIGN
3849
in Fig. 7(b). Therefore, the good property of mode conversion from the mode in the designed mode converter is verified. B. Cold Test After the hot test, a cold test of the -tomode converter was done. During the cold test, the port of the mode converter was mounted to a mode generator, which was fed by an analog signal generator through a piece of coaxial line. The - and -plane patterns of the output of the conversing chain are given in Fig. 13. One can see a good pattern. Thus the good property of the mode converter is verified. Fig. 11. Scenario photograph of the hot test. Letter A indicates the output port -tomode converter; C denotes the deof a klystron; B shows a -tomode converter; D points to a piece of heat-sensitive signed paper.
VII. CONCLUSION A universal method of synthesis of a -tomode converter has been proposed based on the NURBS technique. This method has been verified by design and testing of a – mode converter operating at 35 GHz. The -tomode converter designed by the proposed method, compared with the available method, has the advantages of high conversion efficiency and broad bandwidth, and moreover the output mode content of the mode converter is extremely close to that of the ideal mode. REFERENCES
Fig. 12. Photograph of the burned spot done by the radiation from the output -tomode converter. of the 35-GHz designed
Fig. 13. Tested pattern of the output of the
-to-
mode converter.
converter, a piece of heat-sensitive paper, which is 20 mm away from the port, is put. A burned spot done by the electromagnetic field from the port is given in Fig. 12. One can see a good agreement between the burned spot and the pattern
[1] D. Wagner, J. Pretterebner, and M. Thumm, “Eigenmode mixtures in circumferentially corrugated waveguides,” in Proc. 8th Joint Electron Cyclotron Emission/Electron Cyclotron Resonance Heating Workshop, 1992, pp. 575–585. [2] P. J. B. Clarricoats and A. D. Olver, “Corrugated horns for microwave antennas,” in IEE Waves Series 18. London, U.K.: Peregrinus, 1984. [3] M. Thumm, V. Erckmann, G. Janzen, and W. Kasparek, “Generation mode from gyrotron mode mixtures of the Gaussian-like at 70 GHz,” Int. J. Infrared Millim. Waves, vol. 6, no. 6, pp. 459–470, Jun. 1985. [4] M. Thumm, “Recent developments on high-power gyrotrons—Introduction to this special issue,” Int. J. Infrared Millim. Waves, vol. 32, no. 3, pp. 241–252, Mar. 2011. [5] C. Lyneis, J. Benitez, A. Hodgkinson, and B. Plaum, “A mode converter to generate a Gaussian-like mode for injection into the VENUS electron cyclotron resonance ion source,” Rev. Sci. Instrum., vol. 85, no. 2, pp. 1–5, Feb. 2014. (Gaussian-like) [6] J. L. Doane, “Mode converters for generating in a circular waveguides,” Int. J. Electron., vol. 53, mode from pp. 573–585, Dec. 1982. [7] M. Thumm, “High-power mode conversion for linearly polarized hybrid mode output,” Int. J. Electron., vol. 61, no. 6, pp. 1135–1153, Jun. 1986. [8] E. G. Henle, W. H. Kumric, H. Li, and M. Thumm, “Direct mode converters in corrugated circular waveguide with periodic curvature perturbations,” in 15th Int. Infrared Millim. Waves Conf., Orlando, FL, USA, 1990, pp. 440–442, SPIE 1514. [9] Y. Shiwen, L. Hongfu, and Q. Ji, “Study of 8 mm high power mode converter,” High Power Laser Part. Beams, vol. 8, no. 4, pp. 611–615, Nov. 1996. [10] J. L. Doane, “Polarization converters for circular waveguide mode,” Int. J. Electron., vol. 61, no. 6, pp. 1109–1133, Jun. 1986. [11] M. Thumm, “High-power millimeter-wave mode converters in overmoded circular waveguides using periodic wall perturbations,” Int. J. Electron., vol. 57, no. 6, pp. 1225–1246, Dec. 1984. [12] X. Yu, J. Deng, W. Cao, S. Li, X. Gao, and Y. Jiang, “Method for – mode converter for Gyrotron by the NURBS synthesis of technique,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 63, no. 2, pp. 326–330, Feb. 2015. [13] M. Thumm, “Computer-aided analysis and design of corrugated to mode converters in highly overmoded waveguides,” Int. J. Infrared Millim. Waves, vol. 6, no. 7, pp. 577–597, Jul. 1985.
3850
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
[14] G. L. James, “Analysis and design of -tocorrugated cylindrical waveguide mode converters,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. MTT-29, no. 10, pp. 1059–1066, Oct. 1981. – mode converter [15] J. L. Doane, “A 34.5 GHz 200 kW CW for gyrotron applications,” in IEEE AP-S Int. Symp., Oct. 1994, vol. 3, no. 10, pp. 20–24. [16] S. Liao, “Miter bend mirror design for corrugated waveguides,” Progr. Electromagn. Res. Lett., vol. 10, pp. 157–162, Nov. 2009. [17] L. Piegl and W. Tiller, “Rational B-spline curves and surface,” in The NURBS Book, 2nd ed. Berlin, Germany: Springer Verlag, 1997, pp. 118–127. [18] H. Li and M. Thumm, “Mode coupling in corrugated waveguides with varying wall impedance and diameter change,” Int. J. Electron., vol. 71, no. 5, pp. 827–844, May 1991. [19] N. P. Kerzhentseva, “Conversion of wave modes in a waveguide with smoothly varying impedance of the walls,” Radio Eng. Electron. Phys., vol. 16, no. 2, pp. 24–31, Jan. 1971. [20] M. Thumm, A. Jacobs, and M. Sorolla, “Design of short high-power – mode converters in highly overmoded corrugated waveguides,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 39, no. 2, pp. 301–309, Feb. 1991. [21] J. C. Lagarias and J. A. Reeds, “Convergence properties of the Nelder–Mead simplex method in low dimensions,” SIAM J. Optim., vol. 9, no. 1, pp. 112–147, Jan. 1998. Xin Hua Yu was born in Henan Province, China, in August 1969. He received the M.S. and Ph.D. degrees in physical electronics from the University of Electronic Science and Technology of China (UESTC), Chengdu, China, in 2005 and 2010, respectively. In 2010, he joined the Antenna and RF Center Group, School of Information and Communication, Guilin University of Electronic Technology (GUET), Guilin, China, where he is currently an Associate Professor. His current research interests include electromagnetic wave transmission lines and microwave antennas.
Ji Liang Deng was born in Guangxi Province, China, in August 1989. He received the B.S. degree from the Guilin University of Electronic Science and Technology, Guilin, China, in 2012, and is currently working toward the M.S. degree at the School of Information and Communication, Guilin University of Electronic Science and Technology. In 2011, he joined the Antenna and RF Center Group, School of Information and Communication, Guilin University of Electronic Technology. His current research interests include electromagnetic wave transmission and mode-conversion techniques.
Si Min Li received the B.S. degree in wireless communication engineering from the Nanjing University of Posts and Telecommunications, Jiangsu Province, China, in 1984, and the M.S. and Ph.D. degrees in electronics engineering from the University of Electronic Science and Technology of China, Chengdu, Sichuan Province, China, in 1989 and 2007, respectively. From 1984 to 1986, he was an Engineer Assistant with the Optical Communication Department, Wuhan Post-Telecommunications Science and
Research Institute. From 1989 to 2005, he was a Lecturer, Assistant Professor, and Professor with the School of Information and Communication respectively, Guilin University of Electronic Technology (GUET). He is currently the President and a Professor with the Guangxi University of Science and Technology (GUST), Liuzhou, Guangxi, China. His current research interests lie in the design of electrically small antennas, antenna arrays for HF communication systems, and wireless sensor networks (WSNs).
Wei Ping Cao received the B.S. degree from Hunan Normal University, Hunan Province, China, in 1995, and the M.Sc. and Ph.D. degrees in electromagnetic field and microwave technology from the University of Electronic Science and Technology of China (UESTC), Chengdu, China, in 2003 and 2012, respectively. From 1999 to 2002, he was an Assistant Professor with the Millimeter Wave Laboratory, 10th Research Institute, China Electronic Technology Group Corporation (CETC). From 2010 to 2011, he was a Visiting Professor with the Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, University of Manitoba. In 2002, he joined the Department of Communication and Information Engineering, Guilin University of Electronic Technology (GUET), Guangxi, China, where he is currently an Assistant Head and a Professor. His current research interests concern computational electromagnetics, broadband electrically small antennas, smart antennas, and RF/microwave circuits.
Xi Gao was born in Hunan Province, China, in October 1976. He received the M.S. and Ph.D. degrees from the University of Electronic Science and Technology of China (UESTC), Chengdu, China, in 2006 and 2009, respectively. Since 2010, he has been with the Guilin University of Electronic Technology (GUET), Guangxi, China. He is an Associate Professor with GUET, and also a Visiting Scholar with Southeast University, Nanjing, China. His research interests include antennas and artificial electromagnetic materials.
Yan Nan Jiang was born in Henan Province, China, in September 1982. He received the M.S. degrees in earth exploration and information technique from the Chengdu University of Technology (CDUT), Chengdu, China, in 2005, and the Ph.D. degree in radio physics from Xidian University, Xi’an, China, in 2009. Since 2009, he has been an Associate Professor with the School of Information and Communication, Guilin University of Electronic Technology (GUET), Guilin, China. His current research interests include antennas, electromagnetic radiation and scattering, and the finite-difference time-domain (FDTD) method.
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
3851
Planar Distributed Full-Tensor Anisotropic Metamaterials for Transformation Electromagnetics Tsutomu Nagayama, Student Member, IEEE, and Atsushi Sanada, Member, IEEE
Abstract—Planar distributed full-tensor anisotropic metamaterials for cloaks of invisibility based on transformation electromagnetics are proposed. The proposed metamaterials are composed of nonresonant transmission lines and are advantageous in full control of the off-diagonal components of the permeability tensor as well as broadband and low-loss characteristics. The explicit design formulas for the metamaterials are given based on the equivalent circuit derived directly from Maxwell's equations. A carpet cloak of invisibility is designed and the validity of the design theory is confirmed by circuit simulations. In addition, the carpet cloak is implemented in microstrip line technology and its performance is demonstrated experimentally at microwave frequencies. Index Terms—Carpet cloaks of invisibility, metamaterials, transformation electromagnetics.
I. INTRODUCTION
C
ONCEPTS to realize cloaks of invisibility have been presented based on transformation electromagnetics [1]–[23], surface cloaks [24]–[29], and the like [30]–[33] by using metamaterials composed of small constituents compared with the wavelength of operation. A cylindrical cloak of invisibility based on the transformation electromagnetics has been implemented by using split-ring resonators (SRRs) and its operation has been first demonstrated at microwave frequencies [3]. However, the cloak exhibits narrow-band and high-loss characteristics due to its intrinsic resonant property. On the other hand, non-resonant wideband and low-loss carpet cloaks [5] to conceal an object under the curved reflecting surface have been implemented based on quasi-conformal coordinate transformation [6]–[12]. However, the cloaks cannot fully control the off-diagonal components of the permittivity tensor, and the implementation technique is limited to the quasi-conformal transformation. Therefore, the cloaks can hide only small objects with gentle variation in shape. In contrast, the transmission-line approach [34]–[38] has been introduced in cloak implementation for easy design feasibility as well as wideband and low-loss characteristics Manuscript received February 19, 2015; revised May 11, 2015; accepted September 28, 2015. Date of publication November 02, 2015; date of current version December 02, 2015. This work was supported in part by MEXT KAKENHI Grant-in-Aid for Scientific Research on Innovative Areas under Grant 22109002. The authors are with the Department of Electrical and Electronic Engineering, Yamaguchi University, Yamaguchi 755-8611, Japan (e-mail: t-nagayama@ieee. org; [email protected]). Color versions of one or more of the figures in this paper are available online at http://ieeexplore.ieee.org. Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/TMTT.2015.2487275
[13]–[17]. The approach has been extended, and equivalent circuit models for full-tensor anisotropic materials are proposed [18]–[20]. The circuit models are the direct projection of Maxwell's equations and provide physical insight and a rigorous design formula with perfect control of anisotropy. The validity of the circuit models has been confirmed by various circuit simulations [18]–[23]. However, the circuit models have not been implemented and their performance has not been experimentally demonstrated so far due to their complex circuit configurations. In this paper, an implementation method of the equivalent circuit model for full-tensor anisotropic metamaterials based on transformation electromagnetics presented in [20] is proposed. The implemented unit cell is a simple network of transmission-line sections whose characteristic impedances and electrical lengths can be obtained directly from the lumped element values in the original equivalent circuit model without any constraints on individual control of anisotropic tensor parameters. In the following, theory of the implemented distributed anisotropic metamaterial is presented and its performance is demonstrated. In Section II, the circuit model in [20] is first recalled concisely for completion of the paper. In Section III, the proposed distributed anisotropic metamaterials are introduced, and the equivalence of the proposed metamaterials to the circuit model is shown. Rigorous design formulas are also derived theoretically. Then, in order to investigate the validity of the theory, a carpet cloak is designed with the proposed metamaterials in Section IV. In Section V, the operation of the carpet cloak is verified by circuit simulations. Finally, the designed carpet cloak is implemented in microstrip-line technology and its cloaking operation of invisibility is experimentally demonstrated in Section VI. II. EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT MODEL For completion of the paper, we recall the equivalent circuit model presented in [20] which is the basis of the proposed distributed full-tensor anisotropic metamaterials. Fig. 1 shows the equivalent circuit models for full-tensor anisotropic materials. For simplicity, a square unit cell is assumed. Here, and branches have the self-inductances and , respectively, and these branches are magnetically coupled with a mutual inductance ( is assumed). Note that Fig. 1(a) and (b) are isomer circuits depending on the magnetic coupling methods between the branches in the - and -directions. is the capacitance to the ground. Defining the node voltages ( , , , and ) and the currents ( , , , and ) as in Fig. 1, we can obtain the
0018-9480 © 2015 IEEE. Translations and content mining are permitted for academic research only. Personal use is also permitted, but republication/ redistribution requires IEEE permission. See http://www.ieee.org/publications_standards/publications/rights/index.html for more information.
3852
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
B. Equivalence to the Circuit Model Let us first consider the -parameters of the transmission-line network of Fig. 3(a). Defining the voltage vector as ] and the current vector as ], we can obtain the -parameters and
Fig. 1. Equivalent circuit models for full-tensor anisotropic materials [20]. case. (b) For the case. (a) For the
relation among the currents and the voltages by Kirchhoff's laws. The relations are summarized in the left column in Table I. In the table, ( ) denotes per-unit-length quantities in the model, i.e., , , , and . On the other hand, Maxwell’s equations for -polarized TE waves in an anisotropic material can be written as in the right column in Table I. Comparing these equations with the infinitesimal limit , the relations among the circuit parameters and the material parameters are obtained as
(3)
theoretically by Kirchhoff's voltage and current laws. Note that all of the directions of the currents in the vector are defined as the directions flowing into the network. From the network analysis, we can find the following identities:
(4)
(5) The concrete formulas for the matrix elements are summarized in the Appendix. On the other hand, obtaining the -parameters of the circuit model of Fig. 1(a) as
(1) and
(2) Here, the upper and lower signs of the double signs are for Fig. 1(a) and (b), respectively. These formulas reveal the physical insight of the circuit model, i.e., the diagonal permeability tensor components, and , correspond to the self-inductances per-unit-length and , respectively, and more importantly, the off-diagonal permeability tensor components, and , correspond to the mutual inductance per-unit-length . In addition, permittivity corresponds to the capacitance per-unit-length .
(6)
we can also find the following identities (see the Appendix):
(7) (8) It is noted that (4) and (7) are consistently equivalent for any network parameters in Fig. 3(a), whereas (5) and (8) are not. However, if the condition
III. PROPOSED DISTRIBUTED ANISOTROPIC METAMATERIALS (9) A. Distributed Anisotropic Metamaterials In order to implement the anisotropic metamaterial models of Fig. 1(a) and (b), we first rigorously transform the models into Fig. 2(a) and (b) by using a T-circuit expression of an ideal transformer. Then, we introduce the transmission line networks of Fig. 3(a) and (b) by replacing the inductance elements with transmission-line sections. We will refer to these networks as distributed anisotropic metamaterials in the following. Here, , , and are the characteristic impedances, and , , and are the electrical lengths of the transmissionline sections (see Fig. 3 for the definition). Obviously, the transmission-line networks in Fig. 3 do not always fully correspond to the equivalent circuits in Fig. 1 just by replacing the inductance elements with the transmission line sections. Therefore, the equivalence will be discussed in the following subsection.
is given, all of the parameters in (5) become identical, i.e., , and (5) and (8) become equivalent. In this case, holds, and equivalence of the transmission-line network of Fig. 3(a) to the circuit model of Fig. 1(a) can be guaranteed, i.e., under the condition of (9), the transmission-line network can be definitely expressed by the equivalent circuit model. Similarly, the equivalence between the other isomer transmission-line network of Fig. 3(b) and the circuit model of Fig. 1(b) can also be shown with the same manner. C. Design Formula Under the condition of (9), we can safely obtain the design formulas for determining the transmission-line parameters of the proposed distributed anisotropic metamaterials. By equating
NAGAYAMA AND SANADA: PLANAR DISTRIBUTED FULL-TENSOR ANISOTROPIC METAMATERIALS FOR TRANSFORMATION ELECTROMAGNETICS
3853
TABLE I CIRCUIT EQUATIONS AND MAXWELL’S EQUATIONS
Fig. 2. Transformed equivalent circuits by using T-circuits. (a) For the case. (b) For the case.
Fig. 3. Proposed distributed anisotropic metamaterials. (a) For the case. (b) For the case.
(4) to (7) and (5) to (8), the relations between the circuit parameters , , , and and the transmission-line parameters , , , , and can be obtained as
(10) (11)
of freedom, i.e., one of the transmission-line parameters can be chosen arbitrary. It is noted that these design formulas can be applied to both cases of and by choosing an appropriate isomer network of either Fig. 3(a) or (b), i.e., if , Fig. 3(a) with ( ) should be used, and if , Fig. 3(b) with ( ) should be used. It is also noted that the transmission-line networks in Fig. 3 essentially operate as the lumped element circuits in Fig. 1 at lower frequencies down to dc . For instance, when the frequency approaches to zero in (10), by approximating , it can be shown that approaches to the frequency independent value as
(12) (14)
(13)
where and are the equivalent inductance and capacitance of the transmission line section with the characteristic impedance in Fig. 3. Similarly, by approximating and in (11)–(13), it can also be shown that , , and approach to frequency independent values as: (15)
By solving (10)–(13) simultaneously, the transmission-line parameters of , , , , and are determined from given circuit parameters of , , , and with one degree
(16) (17)
3854
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 4. Concept of a carpet cloak of invisibility. (a) Carpet cloak mimicking specular reflections by a flat floor. (b) Scattering by a bump to be suppressed. (c) Specular reflection by a flat floor to be mimicked.
Fig. 5. Coordinate transformation for the carpet cloak design. (a) Original coordinate system. (b) Transformed non-conformal coordinate system.
where and are the inductance and capacitance values of the corresponding transmission line sections with the characteristic impedance of and , respectively, in Fig. 3. Equations (14)–(17) imply that the transmission-line networks in Fig. 3 equivalently operate as the original lumped element circuits in Fig. 1 as the frequency becomes lower. As a result, the bandwidth is limited only by the upper frequency of operation.
Fig. 6. Transmission-line parameters of the distributed anisotropic metamaterials in Fig. 3 for the carpet cloak design. The unit cell of Fig. 3(a) is used , and Fig. 3(b) is used for the half area of . for the half area of . (b) Normalized characteristic (a) Normalized characteristic impedance . (c) Normalized electrical length . (d) Normalized impedance . electrical length
B. Distributed Anisotropic Metamaterial Parameters We first calculate the material parameters according to the material interpretation [1], [2], [5], i.e., the coordinate transformation can be mimicked by an inhomogeneous anisotropic material with the tensor parameters
(20) (21)
IV. CARPET CLOAK DESIGN In order to confirm the validity of the design theory of the proposed distributed anisotropic metamaterials, we design a 2-D carpet cloak of invisibility [5]–[12] hiding objects under the carpet (see Fig. 4). The design consists of two stages: the coordinate transformation determination and the distributed anisotropic metamaterial parameter calculation.
First, we determine an appropriate coordinate transformation. Let us consider the area with height and width shown in Fig. 5(a) including a bump with height to be hidden. We will now transform the area of Fig. 5(a) in the Cartesian coordinate system into the area of Fig. 5(b) in the non-conformal coordinate system with the relations
(18) (19) and and
(22) , , Then, the equivalent circuit parameters Fig. 1 are readily determined by (1) and (2) as
A. Coordinate Transformation
where and cloak with
where and are the permeability and permittivity of the area to be transformed, and is the metric given with the Jacobian transformation matrix as
, therefore, . In the following, we design the .
, and
in
(23) (24) (25) (26) ( is the Choosing the parameter wave impedance in the original area) as a degree of freedom, we determine the other transmission line parameters of , , , and in Fig. 3 from the calculated circuit parameters, , , , and by solving (10)–(13) simultaneously. Fig. 6(a) and (b) show obtained and normalized by , and Fig. 6(c) and (d) show and normalized by , respectively, where is the wavenumber in the original area. Here, for the half area of , the unit cell of Fig. 3(a) is used since according to (20). Similarly, for the other half area of , Fig. 3(b) is used, since .
NAGAYAMA AND SANADA: PLANAR DISTRIBUTED FULL-TENSOR ANISOTROPIC METAMATERIALS FOR TRANSFORMATION ELECTROMAGNETICS
3855
Fig. 8. Unit cell for the isotropic area.
Fig. 9. Isotropic area with 20 10 cells to be placed into the cloak area in Fig. 7(b) for the flat floor simulation. Fig. 7. Configuration of circuit simulations. (a) Cloak area of 20 10 cells 50 mm). (b) Configuration for the normal incidence case ( ( ). The number of cells is , . Fifty in-phase voltage ) are connected at the nodes in the center of the top row. sources (
Incidentally, the permittivity of the values in Fig. 6.
is implicitly determined by all
V. CIRCUIT SIMULATIONS In order to validate the cloak design, circuit simulations are carried out using a SPICE simulator. We first prepare a node list of 20 10 cells for the cloak area shown in Fig. 7(a). Transmission line parameters for each unit cell are given according to the values in Fig. 6(a)–(d). The transmission line is dealt as an ideal transmission line in the node list. Then, we put the cloak at the bottom center of a uniform isotropic area discretized with 150 cells as shown in Fig. 7(b). The refractive index and the wave impedance of the isotropic area are chosen to be ( is the wavenumber in vacuum) and 63.6 , respectively. In the node list, the outside isotropic area is expressed by the periodic array of the unit cells shown in Fig. 8. The characteristic impedance and the electrical length for both the - and -branches are and , respectively, taking into account the effect of 2-D transmission-line networks [35], [36], [38]. Fifty in-phase voltage sources ( ) with the internal impedance of 62 ,which is reasonably close to the wave impedance 63.6 ,are connected at the nodes in the center of the top row so that the sources illuminate the bump with a normal incident beam ( 0 deg). The amplitudes of the voltage sources are set to form the Gaussian beam with the beam waist of . Nodes on the bottom boundary of Fig. 7(b) are short-circuited including the bump area. The other nodes on the top row and the side columns are terminated by resistors with 62 that will be used in experiments. The
complex voltage distributions of the center nodes in the unit cells are computed in the calculation. For comparison, two additional simulations are also carried out for: 1) a similar configuration as Fig. 7(b) except for the situation where the cloak area is replaced by a square isotropic area shown in Fig. 9 and 2) another similar configuration as Fig. 7(b) except for the situation where the cloak interior is replaced by isotropic unit cells with the same parameters as those of the outside area. The former corresponds to a simulation for a flat floor, and the latter corresponds to a simulation for a bump without the carpet cloak. Fig. 10 shows calculated complex voltage distributions for the simulation results for (a) the carpet cloak, (b) a flat floor, and (c) a bump without the carpet cloak. The wavelength is chosen as in the calculation. By comparing Fig. 10(a) and (b), it is seen that the carpet cloak mimics the flat floor well. Besides, by comparing Fig. 10(a) and (c), it is clearly seen that scattered waves by the bump are suppressed considerably by the carpet cloak. Fig. 11(a)–(c) show similar results with the shorter wavelength, . From these results, it is also seen that the carpet cloak mimics the flat floor, though the level of scattered waves is slightly increased (compare Fig. 11(a) with Fig. 10(a)). Incidentally, it is expected for the cloak to work also at lower frequencies down to DC as discussed in Section III-C. In order to further confirm the operation of the carpet cloak, circuit simulations with the oblique incident waves 30, 45, and 60 deg are carried out. Fig. 12 shows the scheme for the simulations for the case with 45 deg, for instance. In this case, the calculated area is 300 150 cells, and a hundred in-phase voltage sources ( ) with the Gaussian amplitude distribution are connected at the nodes of the staircase boundary in the top-right corner. For the cases with 30 and 60 deg, the calculated areas are chosen as 172 120 cells and 240 86 cells, respectively, and the sources are
3856
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 12. Configuration of circuit simulations for the oblique incidence case 45 deg). The number of cells is , . One hun( ) are connected at the nodes of the dred in-phase voltage sources ( staircase boundary in the top-right corner.
Fig. 10. Calculated complex voltage distributions ( ). (a) Carpet cloak. (b) Flat floor. (c) Bump without the carpet cloak. Left: amplitude. Right: phase.
cloak are shown from the top to bottom. The wavelength is chosen as . It is clearly seen from all of these figures that the carpet cloak well suppresses the scattered waves and mimics the flat floor even with the oblique incident angles. From these results, the validity of the design theory is confirmed. VI. EXPERIMENTS Here, the carpet cloak designed in Section IV is implemented with microstrip-line technology, and its cloaking operation of invisibility is verified by near-field measurements. A. Microstrip-Line Implementation
Fig. 11. Calculated complex voltage distributions ( ). (a) Carpet cloak. (b) Flat floor. (c) Bump without the carpet cloak. Left: amplitude. Right: phase.
configured with similar staircase approximations to illuminate the cloak centers. Fig. 13 shows the calculated complex voltage distributions for the cases of (a) 30 deg, (b) 45 deg, and (c) 60 rm deg. In the figure, the cases with the carpet cloak, with a flat floor, and with the bump without the carpet
With the designed transmission line parameters of Fig. 6(a)–(d), the carpet cloak is implemented with microstrip-line technology. The schematics of the anisotropic unit cells for the implementation are shown in Fig. 14. Fig. 14(a) and (b) are for and , respectively. Each of the cells consists of five transmission-line sections of three different kinds of parameters , , and . The length of each line section is controlled by the curvature of the right angle sector. The total lengths , , and are defined along the line center. The substrate is backed by a metallic ground plane. An ARLON DiClad880 with permittivity , thickness 0.254 mm, and dielectric loss is chosen as a substrate. The width and the height of the cloak area are set to 100 mm and 50 mm, respectively. The cloak is discretized with 5 mm. The total number of unit cells in the cloak area is, therefore, 20 10 unit cells. Then, we carefully choose the effective impedance 63.6 and the phase velocity ( is the speed of light and ) of the medium in the original coordinate system to be mimicked considering the fabrication constraints in which the minimum line width is 0.1 mm and all of the lines have to be accommodated in the unit cell. The parameters of , , , , and are calculated from the impedances and the electrical lengths of Fig. 6 by assuming . Fig. 15(a)–(d) show the calculated , , , and . Here, for the half areas of and , the
NAGAYAMA AND SANADA: PLANAR DISTRIBUTED FULL-TENSOR ANISOTROPIC METAMATERIALS FOR TRANSFORMATION ELECTROMAGNETICS
Fig. 13. Calculated complex voltage distributions for oblique incidence cases ( Amplitude. Right: Phase.
). (a)
30 deg. (b)
45 deg. (c)
3857
60 deg. Left:
Fig. 16. Implemented carpet cloak. Fig. 14. Schematics of the unit cells of the anisotropic metamaterials implemented on a dielectric substrate with the microstrip-line technology. (a) For the case. (b) For the case. h
h
0.4
0p
0 x (m)
p
h
0.2
(mm)
0p
p
h
y (m)
0p
0 x (m)
p
4.5
0.1
2.2
(mm) ( ) y (m)
6.7
0 x (m)
(mm)
y (m)
(mm) y (m)
0.8
0p
0 x (m)
p
0
Fig. 15. Line widths and lengths of the implemented anisotropic unit cells in Fig. 14 for the carpet cloak design. The unit cell of Fig. 14(a) is used for the half , and Fig. 14(b) is used for the half area of . (a) Line width area of . (b) Line width . (c) Line length . (d) Line length .
unit cells of Fig. 14(a) and (b) are used, respectively. The parameter 0.231 mm is determined from .
Fig. 17. Schematic for the prototype.
Fig. 16 shows the implemented carpet cloak. As seen in Fig. 16, the cloak is symmetrical with the center of . At the interface on , the branches of the unit cells are connected smoothly maintaining the electrical length. B. Prototypes Fig. 17 shows the schematic of the carpet cloak for fabrication. The carpet cloak area designed in Fig. 16 is placed at the bottom center of a uniform isotropic area consisting of an array
3858
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 18. Unit cells of the isotropic area outside of the cloak area. (a) For the left-half area of Fig. 17. (b) For the right-half area of Fig. 17.
of unit cells shown in Fig. 18. Although Fig. 18(a) and (b) are electrically identical, they are used in the left- and right-half of the isotropic area, respectively, to match the cloak geometry. The unit cell parameters for the outside isotropic area are chosen as 0.264 mm and 5.75 mm to have the refractive index of and the wave impedance of 63.6 . The total area of Fig. 17 is 280 200 mm ( 56 40 cells). Fig. 19(a) shows the fabricated prototype for the carpet cloak. For comparison, another two prototypes with a flat floor [Fig. 19(b)] and with a bump without the carpet cloak [Fig. 19(c)] are also fabricated, as introduced in the simulations in Section V. For all the prototypes in Fig. 19, the nodes on the bottom boundary including the bump area is short-circuited by throughhole vias with the diameter of 0.3 mm. The other boundaries are terminated by chip resistors with 62 through metallic lands with 0.8 0.5 mm . C. Measurement System Fig. 20 shows the near-field measurement system used in the experiments. A prototype is fixed with an adhesive sheet on an aluminum plate to avoid warp. The prototype is excited by a coaxial cable soldered at the center node on the top row, and distributions of the -component of the electric near-field approximately 0.5 mm above the prototype surface are measured by using a coaxial probe with a computer controlled -stage. The total measured area is 275 190 mm . The complex electric field data are acquired in every 1.25 mm both in the - and -directions, and the total number of the measurement points is 221 153. In order to suppress the direct coupling between the excitation coaxial cable and the electric probe, the differential measurement technique is used, in which the complex field distributions on two slightly different planes are differentiated. The distance between the two planes is chosen as 1.5 mm. D. Measured Near-Field Distributions Fig. 21 shows the measured amplitude and phase distributions at 2.20 GHz ( ) for (a) the carpet cloak, (b) a flat floor, and (c) a bump without the carpet cloak. It is seen from Fig. 21(a) for the carpet cloak that the wave front of the reflected wave by the cloak is flattened outside the cloak area
Fig. 19. Prototypes. (a) Carpet cloak. (b) Flat floor. (c) Bump without the carpet cloak.
Fig. 20. Near-field measurement system.
and the total field distribution reflects well the scattered field by the flat floor shown in Fig. 21(b). In contrast, in Fig. 21(c) for a bump without the coordinate transformation, the incident wave
NAGAYAMA AND SANADA: PLANAR DISTRIBUTED FULL-TENSOR ANISOTROPIC METAMATERIALS FOR TRANSFORMATION ELECTROMAGNETICS
Fig. 21. Measured complex electric near-field distributions ( at 2.20 GHz). (a) Carpet cloak. (b) Flat floor. (c) Bump without the carpet cloak. Left: amplitude. Right: phase.
Fig. 22. Calculated complex voltage distributions ( at 2.20 GHz). (a) Carpet cloak. (b) Flat floor. (c) Bump without the carpet cloak. Left: amplitude. Right: phase.
is scattered by the bump to the left and right and the wave front is bent according to the bump shape. For comparison, circuit simulations for the same configurations as the experiments are carried out with the same manner as in Section V. The results for (a) the carpet cloak, (b) a flat floor, and (c) a bump without the carpet cloak are shown in Fig. 22. By comparing Fig. 22 with the measured results of Fig. 21, they
3859
Fig. 23. Measured complex electric near-field distributions ( at 4.55 GHz). (a) Carpet cloak. (b) Flat floor. (c) Bump without the carpet cloak. Left: amplitude. Right: phase.
Fig. 24. Calculated complex voltage distributions ( at 4.55 GHz). (a) Carpet cloak. (b) Flat floor. (c) Bump without the carpet cloak. Left: Amplitude. Right: Phase.
agree well with each other reflecting the fact that the carpet cloak well suppresses the scattered waves by the bump. Fig. 23 shows measured electric field distributions at a higher frequency 4.55 GHz ( ) for (a) the carpet cloak, (b) a flat floor, and (c) a bump without the carpet cloak. By comparing Fig. 23(a) and (b), it is seen that the carpet cloak sufficiently suppresses the scattered waves by the bump and mimics the flat floor. In contrast, in Fig. 23(c), it is clearly seen that the incident wave is strongly scattered by the bump in the oblique
3860
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
directions with the angles of approximately 30 deg, which is distinct from Fig. 23(a) for the case with the carpet cloak. Fig. 24 shows similar circuit simulation results at 4.55 GHz ( ) for (a) the carpet cloak, (b) a flat floor, and (c) a bump without the carpet cloak. It is seen from the figure that the simulated results agree well with the corresponding measured results in Fig. 23(a)–(c), and the validity of the measured results are confirmed. From these results, it can be concluded that the validity of the theory of the proposed distributed full-tensor anisotropic metamaterials as well as the operations of the carpet cloak are confirmed experimentally.
and
(A2)
VII. CONCLUSION Distributed full-tensor anisotropic metamaterials for transformation electromagnetics have been proposed. First, equivalence of the proposed metamaterials to the circuit models for the full-tensor anisotropic material has been shown, and the design formulas have been derived. Then, a carpet cloak has been designed. Circuit simulations have revealed the validity of the design as well as the broadband operation. In addition, the designed carpet cloak has been implemented on a dielectric substrate with microstrip-line technology. By the near-field measurements, it has been experimentally shown that the carpet cloak well suppresses scattered waves by the bump and mimics the flat floor. Therefore, the validity of the theory of the proposed distributed full-tensor anisotropic metamaterials has been confirmed. This approach can be useful for implementing novel planar circuit devices based on the transformation electromagnetics. For instance, the idea can be applied to a coordinate transformed 2-D resonator whose resonant frequencies are exactly the same as those of the original resonator including higher harmonics regardless of its physical shape. The concept and implementation could also be exploited to Rotman lenses or other novel devices and circuits based on 2-D wave propagation. Although the proposed implementation method is limited to 2-D cases, 3-D extensions will be demanded for the next stage. A possible approach is extending the proposed transmission line network in the symmetrical condensed node presented in the 3-D TLM approach.
(A3) (A4) (A5)
(A6) where
(A7) The -parameter components of (6) for the equivalent circuit model in Fig. 1(a) are given as
APPENDIX
(A8)
The -parameter components of (3) for the transmission-line network in Fig. 3(a) are given as
(A9) (A10)
(A11) REFERENCES
(A1)
[1] J. B. Pendry, D. Schurig, and D. R. Smith, “Controlling electromagnetic fields,” Science, vol. 312, no. 5781, pp. 1780–1782, Jun. 2006. [2] D. Schurig, J. B. Pendry, and D. R. Smith, “Calculation of material properties and ray tracing in transformation media,” Opt. Exp., vol. 14, no. 21, pp. 9794–9804, Oct. 2006.
NAGAYAMA AND SANADA: PLANAR DISTRIBUTED FULL-TENSOR ANISOTROPIC METAMATERIALS FOR TRANSFORMATION ELECTROMAGNETICS
[3] D. Schurig, J. J. Mock, B. J. Justice, S. A. Cummer, J. B. Pendry, A. F. Starr, and D. R. Smith, “Metamaterial electromagnetic cloak at microwave frequencies,” Science, vol. 314, no. 5801, pp. 977–980, Nov. 2006. [4] B. Kanté, D. Germain, and A. de Lustrac, “Experimental demonstration of a nonmagnetic metamaterial cloak at microwave frequencies,” Phys. Rev. B., vol. 80, no. 20, Nov. 2009, Art. ID 201104. [5] J. Li and J. B. Pendry, “Hiding under the carpet: A new strategy for cloaking,” Phys. Rev. Lett., vol. 101, no. 20, Nov. 2008, Art. ID 203901. [6] J. Valentine, J. Li, T. Zentgraf, G. Bartal, and X. Zhang, “An optical cloak made of dielectrics,” Nature Mater., vol. 8, pp. 568–571, Apr. 2009. [7] R. Liu, C. Ji, J. J. Mock, J. Y. Chin, T. J. Cui, and D. R. Smith, “Broadband ground-plane cloak,” Science, vol. 323, no. 5912, pp. 366–369, Jan. 2009. [8] J. H. Lee, J. Blair, V. A. Tamma, Q. Wu, S. J. Rhee, C. J. Summers, and W. Park, “Direct visualization of optical frequency invisibility cloak based on silicon nanorod array,” Opt. Exp., vol. 17, no. 15, pp. 12922–12928, Jul. 2009. [9] L. H. Gabrielli, J. Cardenas, C. B. Poitras, and M. Lipson, “Silicon nanostructure cloak operating at optical frequencies,” Nature Photon., vol. 3, pp. 461–463, Aug. 2009. [10] T. Ergin, N. Stenger, P. Brenner, J. B. Pendry, and M. Wegener, “Threedimensional invisibility cloak at optical wavelengths,” Science, vol. 328, no. 5976, pp. 337–339, Apr. 2010. [11] H. F. Ma and T. J. Cui, “Three-dimensional broadband ground-plane cloak made of metamaterials,” Nature Commun., vol. 1, p. 21, Feb. 2011. [12] D. Shin, Y. Urzhumov, Y. Jung, G. Kang, S. Baek, M. Choi, H. Park, K. Kim, and D. R. Smith, “Broadband electromagnetic cloaking with smart metamaterials,” Nature Commun., vol. 3, p. 1213, Nov. 2012. [13] P. Alitalo, O. Luukkonen, L. Jylhä, J. Venermo, and S. Tretyakov, “Transmission-line networks cloaking objects from electromagnetic fields,” IEEE Trans. Antennas Propagat., vol. 56, no. 2, pp. 416–424, Feb. 2008. [14] P. Alitalo and S. Tretyakov, “Broadband microwave cloaking with periodic networks of transmission lines,” in Proc. Metamaterials, Sep. 2008, pp. 392–394. [15] P. Alitalo, F. Bongard, J.-F. Zürcher, J. Mosig, and S. Tretyakov, “Experimental verification of broadband cloaking using a volumetric cloak composed of periodically stacked cylindrical transmission-line networks,” Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 94, no. 1, Jan. 2009, Art. ID 014103. [16] P. Alitalo, F. Bongard, J.-F. Zürcher, J. Mosig, and S. Tretyakov, “Broadband electromagnetic cloaking of long cylindrical objects,” Phys. Rev. Lett., vol. 103, no. 10, Sep. 2009, Art. ID 103905. [17] X. Liu, C. Li, K. Yao, X. Meng, W. Feng, B. Wu, and F. Li, “Experimental verification of broadband invisibility using a cloak based on inductor-capacitor networks,” Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 95, no. 19, Nov. 2009, Art. ID 191107. [18] M. Zedler and G. V. Eleftheriades, “2D transformation optics using anisotropic transmission-line metamaterials,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig., May 2010, pp. 33–36. [19] A. Sanada and T. Nagayama, “Transmission line approach for transformation electromagnetics,” in Proc. URSI Int. Symp. Electromagn. Theory, May 2013, pp. 336–337. [20] T. Nagayama and A. Sanada, “Physical equivalent circuit model for 2D full-tensor anisotropic metamaterials,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig., Jun. 2013, pp. 1–3. [21] T. Nagayama and A. Sanada, “Specular reflection from a sinusoidal periodic boundary by a carpet cloak of invisibility,” in Proc. Asia–Pacific Microw, Conf., Nov. 2013, pp. 1209–1211. [22] A. Sanada and T. Nagayama, “Transmission line approach to 2D full-tensor anisotropic metamaterials for transformation electromagnetics,” in Proc. Int. Conf. Electromagn. Advanced Appl., Aug. 2014, pp. 804–805. [23] A. Sanada and T. Nagayama, “Transmission line metamaterials for transformation electromagnetics,” in Proc. Eur. Microw. Conf., Oct. 2014, pp. 965–967. [24] A. Alù, “Mantle cloak: Invisibility induced by a surface,” Phys. Rev. B., vol. 80, no. 24, Oct. 2009, Art. ID 245115. [25] Y. R. Padooru, A. B. Yakovlev, P.-Y. Chen, and A. Alù, “Analytical modeling of conformal mantle cloaks for cylindrical objects using subwavelength printed and slotted arrays,” Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 112, no. 3, Aug. 2012, Art. ID 034907.
3861
[26] M. Selvanayagam and G. Eleftheriades, “An active electromagnetic cloak based on the equivalence principle,” IEEE Antennas Microw. Wireless Propag. Lett., vol. 11, no. 10, pp. 1226–1229, Oct. 2012. [27] M. Selvanayagam and G. Eleftheriades, “Discontinuous electromagnetic fields using orthogonal electric and magnetic currents for wavefront manipulation,” Opt. Exp., vol. 21, no. 12, pp. 14409–14429, Jun. 2013. [28] M. Selvanayagam and G. Eleftheriades, “Experimental demonstration of active electromagnetic cloaking,” Phys. Rev. X, vol. 3, no. 4, Jun. 2013, Art. ID 041011. [29] R. S. Schofield, J. C. Soric, D. Rainwater, A. Kerkhoff, and A. Alù, “Scattering suppression and wideband tenability of a flexible mantle cloak for finite-length conducting rods,” New J. Phys., vol. 16, no. 6, Jun. 2014, Art. ID 063063. [30] U. Leonhardt, “Optical conformal mapping,” Science, vol. 312, no. 5781, pp. 1777–1780, Jun. 2006. [31] M. G. Silveirinha, A. Alù, and N. Engheta, “Parallel-plate metamaterials for cloaking structures,” Phys. Rev. E, vol. 75, no. 3, Mar. 2007, Art. ID 036603. [32] B. Edwards, A. Alù, M. G. Silveirinha, and N. Engheta, “Experimental verification of plasmonic cloaking at microwave frequencies with metamaterials,” Phys. Rev. Lett., vol. 103, no. 15, Oct. 2009, Art. ID 153901. [33] R. Schittny, M. Kadie, T. Biickmann, and M. Wegener, “Invisibility cloaking in a diffusive light scattering medium,” Science, vol. 345, no. 6195, pp. 427–429, Jul. 2014. [34] G. Kron, “Equivalent circuit of the field equations of Maxwell-I,” Proc. IRE, vol. 32, no. 5, pp. 289–299, May 1944. [35] P. B. Johns and R. L. Beurle, “Numerical solution of 2-dimensional scattering problems using a transmission-line matrix,” Proc. Inst. Electr. Eng., vol. 118, no. 9, pp. 1203–1208, Sep. 1971. [36] W. J. R. Hoefer, “The transmission-line matrix method–theory and applications,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. MTT-33, no. 10, pp. 882–893, Oct. 1985. [37] P. B. Johns, “A symmetrical condensed node for the TLM method,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. MTT-35, no. 4, pp. 370–377, Apr. 1987. [38] C. Christopoulos, The Transmission-Line Modeling Method: TLM. New York, NY, USA: IEEE, 1995.
Tsutomu Nagayama (S’13) received the B. E. and M. E. degrees in electrical and electronics engineering from Yamaguchi University, Yamaguchi, Japan, in 2011 and 2013, respectively, where he is currently working toward the Ph.D. degree at the Graduate School of Science and Engineering. His research is concerned with transformation electromagnetics and metamaterials. Mr. Nagayama is a student member of the Institute of Electronics, Information and Communication Engineers (IEICE).
Atsushi Sanada (M’95) received the B. E., M.E., and Ph.D. degrees in electrical engineering from Okayama University, Okayama, Japan, in 1989, 1991, and 1994, respectively. In 1999, he joined the Faculty of Engineering, Yamaguchi University, Yamaguchi, Japan, where he is now a Professor. He was a Visiting Scholar with the University of California at Los Angeles in 1994–1995 and 2002–2003. He was also a Visiting Scholar with the Advanced Telecommunications Research Institute International in 2004–2005 and the Japan Broadcasting Corporation in 2005. His research is concerned with material science and technologies including transformation electromagnetics and metamaterials, high- superconducting and magnetic materials. Dr. Sanada is a member of the European Microwave Association (EuMA) and the Institute of Electronics, Information and Communication Engineers (IEICE). He is currently serving as an IEEE Microwave Theory and Techniques Society (MTT-S) AdCom member.
3862
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Integral-Equation Formulation for the Analysis of Capacitive Waveguide Filters Containing Dielectric and Metallic Arbitrarily Shaped Objects and Novel Applications Fernando D. Quesada Pereira, Member, IEEE, Antonio Romera Perez, Pedro Vera Castejón, and Alejandro Alvarez Melcon, Senior Member, IEEE
Abstract—This paper presents an integral-equation formulation specialized for the analysis of capacitive waveguide circuits, which include arbitrarily shaped conducting and homogeneous magnetic/dielectric objects. The technique benefits from the symmetry of the structure by formulating a 2-D scattering problem with oblique angle of incidence, combined with the use of the parallel-plate Green’s functions. As practical applications, the paper proposes novel low-pass filter designs loaded or coated with dielectric and magnetic homogeneous materials. If the filter is properly designed, the use of these materials could improve the filter response, selectivity, or out-of-band performance, and power-handling capabilities. Some novel filter design implementations, showing these kinds of benefits, are presented for the first time in this paper. For validation, a commercial full-wave simulator is employed, showing the validity, accuracy, and computational efficiency of the novel software tool. Index Terms—Dielectrics, Green’s functions, integral equations, low-pass filters, method of moments (MoM), microwave filters.
I. INTRODUCTION
T
HE electromagnetic modeling of RF circuits remains a very important activity in microwave engineering. The development of powerful software tools that can predict the electrical behavior of complex microwave circuits is very desirable. With these tools it is possible to explore new properties of devices and circuits, for instance, by adding new elements and functionalities to existing components. In addition, efficiency is also a very important issue in the modeling activity. With high efficiency, analysis tools could be used for the design of complex components, eliminating or at least reducing the experimental work at the laboratory. Consequently, these tools can effectively reduce time and cost associated to the development of complex microwave subsystems.
Manuscript received February 27, 2015; revised May 21, 2015 and September 18, 2015; accepted September 28, 2015. Date of publication October 16, 2015; date of current version December 02, 2015. This work was supported by CICYT Project TEC2013-47037-C5-5-R, by European Feder fundings, and by Fundacion Seneca 19494/PI/14. The authors are with the Information and Communications Technology Department, Technical University of Cartagena, E-30202 Cartagena, Spain (e-mail: [email protected]; [email protected]). Color versions of one or more of the figures in this paper are available online at http://ieeexplore.ieee.org. Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/TMTT.2015.2490073
A very useful class of microwave components is based on waveguide technology. Although these components are bulky, they are still often used in high-power applications, or when low losses are needed. Two very popular examples are in the front-ends of satellite and radar systems. Among the waveguide components for these applications, low-pass filters based on capacitive discontinuities are very desirable to reject interferences and harmonic bands of bandpass filters [1], [2]. Important considerations for these devices that need to be improved are the power-handling capability and the spurious-free range [3]–[5]. In the above context, this paper focuses on the development of an efficient software tool for the analysis of waveguide components based on capacitive discontinuities including dielectric and magnetic homogeneous objects, and on the use of this tool to explore new microwave devices with enhanced capabilities. A very comprehensive review of analysis techniques that can be applied to this class of microwave components can be found in [6]. Among the useful available numerical methods, this paper uses an integral-equation formulation to develop a new software tool for the efficient analysis of this class of components. Recently, an integral-equation formulation for this purpose was proposed in [7] and [8]. The efficiency of the method relies on the reduction of the structure to a 2-D scattering problem with an oblique angle of incidence. Consequently, the analysis of full 3-D structures is avoided. Note that other techniques based on the finite-element method (FEM) could also avoid the analysis of complete 3-D structures, by applying similar transformations to reduce the geometry to a 2.5-D problem [9]. With respect to these previous works [7], [8], this paper proposes the extension of the formulation to treat arbitrarily shaped dielectric and/or magnetic objects inside capacitive waveguide structures. Once the software tool is built, it is used to explore new low-pass filter structures with enhanced capabilities by introducing dielectric or magnetic objects as integral parts of the components. Preliminary ideas on how to improve the responses of waveguide low-pass filters using magnetic materials were reported in [6]. In this paper we extend the initial results reported in [6]. In particular, different low-pass filter designs including dielectric coated conducting posts are proposed for the first time as an alternative for improving the performance of traditional filters used in space communication applications [3], [4], [10].
0018-9480 © 2015 IEEE. Personal use is permitted, but republication/redistribution requires IEEE permission. See http://www.ieee.org/publications_standards/publications/rights/index.html for more information.
QUESADA PEREIRA et al.: INTEGRAL-EQUATION FORMULATION FOR THE ANALYSIS OF CAPACITIVE WAVEGUIDE FILTERS
This paper is organized as follows. First, for the sake of simplicity, Section II-A presents the proposed novel surface integral-equation technique theory for a generic problem containing two isolated material and conducting capacitive posts inside a rectangular waveguide. After that, Section II-B explains the application particularities of the integral-equation technique for the analysis of dielectric coated metallic posts for two different situations: a coating dielectric material separated from the top and bottom waveguide sidewalls, and second when the dielectric is touching both waveguide walls. Once the relevant theory is exposed, three different novel low-pass filter designs are presented in Section III. The first one is a low-pass filter composed of separated conducting irises next to separated magnetic rectangular posts. The proper combination of these different kinds of posts allows the implementation of transmission zeros in the insertion-loss response of the low-pass filter. In fact, the magnetic material makes the capacitive irises become resonant, thus introducing the additional transmission zeros. This can be used to improve the selectivity of the filter. The second design example is a low-pass filter including dielectric coated elliptical conducting posts with the intention of improving the multipactor power threshold for space applications by increasing the critical gaps that are usually present in this type of structures. Finally, the last example is another low-pass filter where rectangular conducting posts have been completely covered by a homogeneous dielectric of rectangular shape that is touching the top and bottom rectangular waveguide walls. In this way, the free electron movement in the critical gaps is completely avoided, thus reducing the multipactor phenomenon risk to the less likely one-sided multipactor case. This paper concludes with two Appendices, which provide important information on how to compute the method of moments (MoM) matrix elements [11] and the Green’s functions employed in the integral-equation kernel. II. THEORY In this section we present the basic integral-equation formulation. First, the formulation will be introduced for a generic structure containing one metallic and one dielectric post. Second, how to deal with special cases when metallic posts are coated by dielectric objects will be explained. A. Formulation for Isolated Posts The basic generic structure to be studied in this paper is shown in Fig. 1, where one metallic post and one dielectric/magnetic post are considered inside a rectangular waveguide. The structure is excited with the fundamental mode of the waveguide, giving rise to the exciting electric and magnetic fields . The geometry is considered to be invariant along the -axis. However, the problem is not 2-D due to the dependence of the excitation field with this coordinate. The process to reduce the structure to a 2-D scattering problem with oblique angle of incidence was reported in [7] and [8]. With respect to those works, we introduce now the treatment of dielectric and magnetic materials through the use of the surface equivalence principle [12]–[14]. The chosen formulation
3863
Fig. 1. Structure studied in this paper. It is composed of capacitive metallic and dielectric or magnetic material posts inside a rectangular waveguide.
Fig. 2. External equivalent problem. The homogeneous material body has been replaced by equivalent magnetic and electric surface current densities oriented along the transverse and longitudinal axes. The conducting post is characterized by only an electric current surface density with and longitudinal components. Equivalent currents are both transverse inside a parallel-plate waveguide region modeling the rectangular waveguide.
for the imposition of the boundary conditions for the fields is the so called Poggio–Miller–Chang–Harrington–Wu–Tsai (PCHMWHT) integral-equation formulation [15], [16]. This formulation is free from the internal resonance problem associated with some integral-equation operators used for the analysis of material bodies, such as the ( -field) or ( -field) formulations [17], [18], at or close to certain frequencies. When the internal resonance phenomenon occurs, the direct solution by the MoM yields to ill-conditioned systems of linear equations. For the conducting posts, an electric field integral equation (EFIE) or a combined field integral equation (CFIE) is used depending on the frequency range where the response of the microwave device is evaluated, and on the geometry of the discontinuity. For open and closed conducting posts, an EFIE can be used within the frequency range of the fundamental mode propagation of the rectangular waveguide employed for most practical microwave devices. To obtain the out-of-band response, a CFIE is preferred for the analysis of closed conducting posts in order to avoid the internal resonance problem [18], whereas an EFIE is the only possible choice for open conducting discontinuities. The use of auxiliary electric and magnetic current densities defined on the surface of the material body allows to formulate two simpler equivalent problems, as illustrated in Figs. 2 and 3. In this case, the electric and magnetic current surface densities have transverse and longitudinal
3864
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 3. Internal equivalent problem. Auxiliary currents are in an infinite homo. geneous medium with constitutive parameters
Hankel functions (see Appendix A for details). Also, note that the modeling of the excitation is more complex if free-space Green’s functions are used in the external problem. This is because the connection with the waveguide ports has to be done with additional auxiliary electric and magnetic currents at the corresponding interfaces. The situation is different in the internal problem shown in Fig. 3. This problem is formulated inside the material body, considering an infinite unbounded medium. Only the auxiliary surface currents defined on the material body are present , leading to total electromagnetic fields in this problem of the form (2a)
components. This situation is more complex than the integral-equation analysis of inductive microwave circuits presented in [19], where only the transverse component of the equivalent magnetic current surface density and the longitudinal component of the equivalent electric current surface density are needed. This circumstance represents a higher computational effort for the analysis of capacitive circuits as compared to the inductive counterpart in spite of being able to reduce the numerical solution to a 2-D problem. In fact, the number of unknowns needed in the resulting integral equation is twice for the capacitive problem as compared to the inductive counterpart. Also, the metallic body is replaced by the induced electric current . This induced electric current surface density also has transverse and longitudinal components. The total electromagnetic fields in the external equivalent problem shown in Fig. 2 are due to all these auxiliary currents, plus the excitation fields associated to the incident dominant mode, obtaining (1a) (1b) Note that, in the external problem, the currents are inside a parallel-plate region modeling the rectangular waveguide. Consequently, an interesting choice for the formulation of the integral equation is to select the 2-D Green’s functions of a line source inside a parallel-plate waveguide (details are included in Appendix A). In this way a waveguide with infinite walls is modeled, and the walls need not be discretized in the final numerical solution of the problem. If this approach is followed, it is important to compute the parallel-plate Green’s functions in an efficient way. Otherwise the numerical solution of the problem through the application of the MoM may become very slow. In order to keep efficiency, the parallel-plate Green’s functions are evaluated with the techniques reported in [19], including combinations of the Kummer and Ewald methods. Note that there are other possible valid choices that could be used to formulate this external problem. An obvious choice is to select the free-space Green’s functions. In this case, however, the induced currents on the walls of the waveguide need also to be considered in the formulation. Consequently, this approach will lead to more unknowns during the numerical solution of the problem. On the contrary, the calculation of the Green’s functions will be very fast since they are formulated as simple
(2b) For the interior problem the natural choice of Green’s functions is the one corresponding to a 2-D infinite line source in a homogeneous medium, which are formulated with Hankel functions [18] (see also Appendix A). The solution of the problem is completed through the imposition of the boundary conditions for the electromagnetic fields in the structure. In this way, three coupled integral equations are formulated in terms of the equivalent surface electric and magnetic currents on the dielectric body contour, of the induced surface electric current on the metallic conductor, and using the corresponding parallel-plate or homogeneous medium Green’s functions, as explained before. The first integral equation in (3) enforces the continuity of the tangential electric field component on the dielectric post surface , whereas the second one (4) imposes the continuity of the tangential magnetic field components on the surface of the same dielectric object. Finally, the third integral (5) corresponds to the nullity of the tangential electric field on the surface of the perfect conducting post ,
on (3)
QUESADA PEREIRA et al.: INTEGRAL-EQUATION FORMULATION FOR THE ANALYSIS OF CAPACITIVE WAVEGUIDE FILTERS
3865
the expansion of the unknown currents in basis functions leads to
(6a) (6b)
(6c)
on (4)
on (5) Note that the separation of the problem in a transverse plane and in a longitudinal direction can be used to express the unknown currents also in terms of transverse (along the contour of the object -direction, as shown in Figs. 2 and 3) and longitudinal ( -direction) components. According to this notation,
As already mentioned, in the problem at hand all these components of the induced currents play an important role in the analysis. This requires more computational effort as compared to inductive waveguide problems, where only longitudinal for electric or transverse for magnetic components of the currents are present [19]. The other difficulty associated with integral-equation formulations is the appropriate treatment of the Green’s functions singularities. In the proposed implementation we need to take care of weak singularities due to the use of mixed potentials combined with the PCHMWHT formulation [20]. In this context, the weak singularities of logarithmic type are extracted and analytically integrated following standard procedures [18]. In addition, the hyper-singularities due to the curl operators are solved using the Cauchy principal values of the corresponding integrals [18]. The final current expansions are expressed in terms of subsectional triangular basis functions defined on the dielectric and conductor contours. In this case, and are the basis functions for the equivalent electric current surface density along the longitudinal and transverse axes, respectively, whereas and are the corresponding basis functions for the magnetic current surface density. On the other hand, and are the basis functions for longitudinal and transverse components of the induced electric current surface density on the conducting posts. The application of the MoM algorithm [11] using this discretization scheme leads to the linear system presented in (7) at the bottom of this page. In this notation, superscripts denote the electric or magnetic field, indicates the electric or magnetic current, and denotes a field or current directed along the longitudinal -axis or along the object contour ( direction). When they are used in between brackets ,
(7)
3866
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
, , or , they represent, respectively, the position of the observation and the source (conductor or dielectric/magnetic body). Finally, represent the known term vector of the linear system, which can be computed using the electromagnetic fields associated to the exciting of the rectangular waveguide. The different submatrices in (7) represent the coupling between different current components on the same object (self-interactions) or between components on separate objects (mutual interactions). The final expressions of these submatrices and of the known term vector, are presented in Appendix B. It is worth mentioning that the coupled integral equations finally solved by the MoM in (7) are written in the spectral domain corresponding to the spatial frequencies . These spatial frequencies are those corresponding to the decomposition of the mode exciting the structure into two different plane waves. These plane waves propagate with oblique mirrored incident angles with respect to the reference rectangular waveguide, as described in [8]. The integral equation only need to be solved for one of the spatial frequencies since the unknown expansion coefficients are directly related for the two harmonics. Full details of this treatment can be found in [8]. Note that an alternative approach would be to combine directly the two plane waves into a sine or cosine variation for each component of the unknown currents. However, this may be less intuitive since one has to take care of the correct variation (sine or cosine) for each component of the equivalent currents to fulfill the right boundary conditions at the waveguide walls. Once the integral equation is solved, the electrical response can be obtained for the input and output ports defined in Fig. 1, following a similar procedure to that described in [21]. Moreover, the electromagnetic fields inside the structure can be computed by means of mixed potentials expressions [20], written in the spectral domain for each harmonic . Once more, it is only necessary to compute the electromagnetic fields for one of the spatial frequencies since the results are directly related for both harmonics [8]. B. Dielectric Coated Metallic Posts In this section two different useful special dielectric and conducting bodies configurations are characterized in terms of their coupled equivalent problems. The first situation corresponds to a perfect conducting post coated by a dielectric or magnetic material, which does not touch the upper or lower rectangular waveguide walls, as can be observed in Fig. 4. In this case, the outer equivalent problem is modeled by surface electric and magnetic currents on the dielectric body contour . This outer problem is excited by the rectangular waveguide fundamental mode, whereas the electromagnetic fields in the region inside the dielectric are assumed to be null. The whole waveguide is filled with the external constitutive parameters , taking into account the rectangular waveguide influence by means of the parallel-plate Green’s functions (see Fig. 5). For the internal equivalent problem, the equivalent magnetic and electric surface currents on the dielectric contour and
Fig. 4. Conducting post coated by a dielectric/magnetic homogeneous material.
Fig. 5. Equivalent external problem for the structure in Fig. 4.
Fig. 6. Equivalent internal problem for the structure in Fig. 4.
the induced surface electric current on the conductor radiate within an homogeneous infinite medium filled with constitutive parameters (see Fig. 6). The electromagnetic fields outside the original dielectric body and inside the conductor are null ( , ). Both equivalent problems are coupled by enforcing the continuity of the tangential electric and magnetic fields on the boundary contours. A second special case, very interesting for microwave circuit design, is composed of a dielectric material rod touching the rectangular waveguide walls, while at the same time entirely covering a metallic post (see Fig. 7). The equivalent problems for formulating the final coupled integral equations are similar to those explained for the first configuration in this section, but some important differences must be taken into account for a proper electromagnetic characterization. The resulting structures are shown in Figs. 8 and 9 for the external and internal problems, respectively. One of the main differences with respect to the previous analysis is that in this second structure the Green’s functions corresponding to a parallel-plate waveguide are used for both the internal and
QUESADA PEREIRA et al.: INTEGRAL-EQUATION FORMULATION FOR THE ANALYSIS OF CAPACITIVE WAVEGUIDE FILTERS
Fig. 7. Conducting post coated by a dielectric homogeneous material touching the waveguide upper and bottom sidewalls. Terminations of the different basis functions components touching the rectangular waveguide walls are also shown.
Fig. 8. Equivalent external problem for the structure in Fig. 7.
Fig. 9. Equivalent internal problem for the structure in Fig. 7.
external problems. The only difference is that for the external problem the medium filling the parallel-plate region is the vacuum , while for the internal problem it is the one corresponding to the homogeneous medium with constitutive parameters . Note that the situation is notably different as compared to the previous geometries, where the free-space Green’s functions were used for the internal problem. The use of the parallel-plate Green’s functions, also for the internal problem in this case, is needed in order to automatically impose the boundary conditions for the fields at the edges of the material body touching the waveguide walls. An alternative to the described approach would be to use the unbounded homogeneous medium Green’s functions for the internal problem. In this case all sides of the material body will have to be discretized, including the sides touching the waveguide walls. Authors have verified that this approach leads to illconditioned MoM systems. The problem is that the unknowns
3867
defined on the sides touching the waveguide walls are short circuited in the external problem by the parallel-plate Green’s functions employed there. Full details of these issues can be found in [22] in the context of the analysis of inductive waveguide circuits. The second important difference is the procedure for expanding the equivalent electric and magnetic surface currents when the object touches the upper and lower waveguide walls. In this case, a procedure similar to that discussed in [22] for an inductive dielectric post placed on a rectangular waveguide wall has been followed. In this work we present the extension of that procedure for the analysis of capacitive circuits. The oriented equivalent electric current component on the dielectric rod contour is short circuited by its electrical image on the conducting waveguide top and bottom walls. The nullity of this component is imposed by terminating the mesh of the corresponding segment by a full triangular basis function that imposes zero current at the extremes, as can be seen in Fig. 7. On the contrary, if the -oriented component is considered, the image with respect to the wall introduces an additive contribution, which models a current flow from the dielectric rod contour to the waveguide walls. In this case, this effect is modeled by means of additional special half-triangle basis functions defined on the mesh segments touching the waveguide walls (see Fig. 7). A dual reasoning can be followed for the equivalent magnetic surface current, which only requires additional half-triangle basis functions for its -components. It is interesting to observe that the same strategy could be applied to consider a coating material object touching the waveguide walls not perpendicularly. In this case the image theory applied still holds so the mesh of the segments should be terminated in the same way as described for perpendicular segments. Also, the case of a material object touching only one of the waveguide walls can be easily considered. In this case the internal problem is characterized with the Green’s functions of an unbounded medium with a perfect electric wall replacing the waveguide wall touching the object. The Green’s functions for this problem can be easily calculated using image theory. More details about this approach can be found in [22]. III. RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS In this section we propose to explore new capacitive low-pass filters in waveguide technology by incorporating dielectric or magnetic elements to their basic structure. For this purpose we have used a software tool that implements the theory presented in Section II. Whenever appropriate, results obtained with the new software tool will be compared with the commercial software HFSS to serve as validation. Also, computational time needed for the analysis of the different examples will be given to show the efficiency of the proposed technique. A. Iris Containing Magnetic Posts The first proposed example is the design of a sixth-order lowpass filter, where the traditional metallic inverters of the structure are modified by placing adjacent rectangular posts made of magnetic material, as shown in Fig. 10. The filter has been designed with the technique reported in [5] using impedance
3868
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
TABLE I SIMULATION TIMES NEEDED FOR THE ANALYSIS OF THE STRUCTURE IN FIG. 10 FOR A DIFFERENT NUMBER OF BASIS FUNCTIONS. THE TOTAL TIME IS DIVIDED IN FILLING TIME, INVERSION TIME, AND POST-PROCESSING TIME
Fig. 10. Sixth-order low-pass filter composed of seven mixed conducting-magnetic material impedance inverters. The filter has been designed in a WR-187 , mm). The dimensions of its waveguide ( , , , conducting irises in millimeters are , and . The distances between irises in millime, , and . On the other hand, the ters are , magnetic material rectangular posts dimensions in millimeters are . The relative permeability of these posts is and are mm. separated from the conducting irises
Fig. 11. Scattering parameters of a sixth-order low-pass filter shown in Fig. 10 composed of rectangular irises with adjacent rectangular magnetic material posts. The integral-equation results are compared to those provided by HFSS.
inverters composed of the mixed metallic and magnetic posts shown in Fig. 10. It has been observed that the interactions between the magnetic bodies and the metallic capacitive posts make the irises resonant at certain frequencies. At these resonant frequencies, all energy is reflected back, therefore producing transmission zeros in the insertion-loss response of the filter. The location of these transmission zeros can be adjusted to improve the selectivity or even the out-of-band response of the structure. These features are illustrated with the response of the structure, shown in Fig. 11. Two transmission zeros close to the passband can be observed, which are produced by the resonant irises created due to the interaction between the magnetic posts placed near the metallic capacitive posts. These transmission zeros could be used to improve the filter selectivity, as compared to other filters composed only of metallic irises, where transmission zeros are not present [1]. The behavior of this novel structure, calculated with the integral equation presented in this paper, is confirmed by the results obtained with the commercial tool HFSS.
In order to check the convergence behavior of the software tool, we have performed a detailed study for this structure with varying number of basis functions used in the discretization of the unknown currents. We have observed that good numerical convergence is achieved when the segments of the structure are discretized using from 10 to 15 segments . Here, for the metallic posts, and for the magnetic posts. Another important aspect is the efficiency of the developed software tool. When evaluating the efficiency it is important to differentiate between the different simulation times involved in the integral-equation solver. The most important parameters are the time needed to fill the MoM matrix, the time needed to invert the linear system, and the post-processing time (which is the time needed to compute the scattering parameters of the device). In Table I, we detail all these computational times when the number of basis functions is increased. The test was done in an HP-Z600 workstation having Intel Xeon processors of 2.13 GHz. As expected all times grow with the number of basis functions. However, the time needed to invert the system grows more rapidly than the filling time, when the number of basis functions increases. The time needed to fill the matrix is larger than the time needed to invert the system when a medium number of basis functions is used in the analysis (in this case, 2576). While the use of the parallel-plate Green’s functions slows down the matrix filling time, the overhead is not dramatic, due to the use of the acceleration techniques reported in [19]. We have observed that the number of modes needed in the modal series used in the calculation of the parallel-plate Green’s functions is very small to achieve convergence (typically 5–10 modes), when these acceleration techniques are employed. In fact, convergence is faster than in the inductive case since the height of the waveguide involved in this analysis is usually half of the width (used in the analysis of inductive circuits). B. Dielectric Coated Metallic Posts The second example is a sixth-order low-pass filter composed of seven elliptical metallic capacitive posts coated by a dielectric elliptical layer with relative permittivity , as shown in Fig. 12. The design of the structure is again carried out with the technique described in [5], which can handle impedance inverters of arbitrary shapes. The response of this structure is shown in Fig. 13, together with validations obtained with the FEM code HFSS. We can observe very good agreement between the developed integral equation and the commercial HFSS software tool. The number of unknowns employed in the integral-
QUESADA PEREIRA et al.: INTEGRAL-EQUATION FORMULATION FOR THE ANALYSIS OF CAPACITIVE WAVEGUIDE FILTERS
Fig. 12. Sixth-order low-pass filter composed of seven elliptic conducting mm elliptic dielectric layer. posts coated by a constant thickness mm, The filter has been designed in a WR-75 waveguide ( mm). The dimensions of the elliptic posts major axes in millimeters , , , and . The are mm . The distances minor axes width is the same for all the posts , , and between their centers are in millimeters: . The relative permittivity of all coating layers is .
3869
Fig. 14. Sixth-order low-pass filter composed of seven conducting rectangular posts coated by rectangular dielectric sections touching the waveguide walls. , The filter has been designed in a WR-187 waveguide ( mm). The dimensions of the conducting and dielectric posts in , , , , millimeters are , and . The distances between sections are: , , and . The relative permittivity of all coating dieletric . rectangular layers is
C. Metallic Posts Covered by Dielectric Material
Fig. 13. Sixth-order dielectric coated low-pass filter response including validation with the commercial software HFSS. Comparison with a fully conducting low-pass filter implementation based on metallic elliptical posts is also included.
equation solver was 800 with a CPU time of 2.1 s for each frequency point in the same HP-Z600 workstation. To assess the performance of this filter, a similar filter with only metallic elliptical posts was designed with the same spurious-free range. The response of this filter is also shown in Fig. 13. We can observe from the results that both filters have very similar responses, both inside the passband and in terms of the spurious free range. From the point of view of power handling, the most convenient filter will have larger critical gaps along the structure. We have verified that the dielectric coated structure exhibits slightly larger critical gaps as compared to the all-metallic filter. In this example, the dielectric coated structure has a critical gap of mm, while in the all-metallic filter the critical gap is of mm. This slight improvement in the critical gap of the dielectric coated structure could be combined with dielectric materials of appropriate secondary emission yield (SEY) characteristics [23] to improve power breakdown thresholds. In fact, the possibility of using new coating materials in the filter design process, as shown in this example, brings new degrees of freedom in the development of space hardware for high-power applications.
In spite of the obtained improvement in the previous example, a more adequate solution for improving the power-handling capability would be to cover whole metallic posts of the filter with a dielectric material touching the waveguide walls. In this case, free electron movement is completely eliminated in the critical gaps of the structure. This idea is illustrated with the filter shown in Fig. 14. It is important to note that by using this structure, the electrons movement inside small gaps is completely eliminated. As already discussed, these small gaps normally appear in conventional capacitive low-pass filters, especially when wide spurious-free ranges are required, and represent a considerable limitation for power handling. In spite of this advantage of the dielectric coated filter, it should be mentioned that multipactor can still occur in the transmission-line regions connecting two adjacent inverters. However, the gaps in these regions are usually larger as compared to the gaps produced in the inverters themselves. Also, fringing fields responsible for the multipactor are only strong close to the discontinuities, and they are much weaker along the transmission-line regions. Therefore, multipactor risk is expected to be lower in these areas. As before, the synthesis of the filter has been carried out following the procedure described in [5]. The response for this structure, including validation with the commercial software HFSS, is shown in Fig. 15. As can be seen in Fig. 15, the agreement obtained by both techniques is again very good. The number of unknowns employed in the integral-equation solver was 1108, with a CPU time of 5.1 s for each frequency point in the same HP-Z600 workstation. As has been shown in the previous sections, the addition of dielectric and magnetic materials to traditional fully metallic low-pass filter implementations could improve several characteristics such as the power-handling capabilities for space communication applications, the selectivity, or even the out-of-band response (for instance, by using additional transmission zeros to reject harmonic bands). These filter examples include complex materials, and fabrication procedures and practical implementations should be the subject of future research activities. However, this paper has
3870
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
TABLE II GREEN’S FUNCTIONS COMPONENTS NEEDED IN THE ANALYSIS OF THE CAPACITIVE WAVEGUIDE PROBLEM. SINCE ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC SOURCES ARE EMPLOYED TO REPRESENT MATERIAL BODIES, WE NEED BOTH TYPES OF GREEN’S FUNCTIONS
Fig. 15. Scattering parameters of the sixth-order low-pass filter shown in Fig. 14 composed of rectangular metallic posts completely covered by rectangular dielectric material layers. The integral-equation results are validated with the software HFSS.
used to formulate the external problem of Fig. 2. In the spectral domain, the following series of modal functions are obtained:
(8a) shown interesting validations using the worldwide accepted commercial software tool HFSS. This tool implements a completely different numerical technique based on finite elements, and yet the agreement obtained is good. This should provide strong evidence for the correctness of the theory and numerical implementation performed in the new analysis tool. IV. CONCLUSIONS This paper has presented an integral-equation formulation for the analysis of capacitive waveguide circuits. The main advance with respect to previous works is in the treatment of arbitrarily shaped dielectric and magnetic posts inside these structures. Different useful combinations of dielectric and conducting posts and their equivalent electromagnetic problems have been discussed. A new software tool implementing the theory presented has been developed. This has allowed to investigate for the first time new low-pass filter configurations incorporating dielectric and magnetic posts as integral parts of the components. In particular, the use of magnetic materials can be incorporated to implement transmission zeros in the insertion loss response of low-pass filters. The utilization of conducting posts coated by dielectric materials could increase the power thresholds for triggering high-power phenomena in low-pass filters for space communication applications. In all cases, the theory has been extensively validated by comparison of simulated results to those provided by a commercial FEM code (the worldwide well-accepted HFSS software). Validations include structures that incorporate conductors and dielectric and magnetic materials. In all cases very good agreement was obtained, maintaining good computational efficiency. APPENDIX A GREEN’S FUNCTIONS FOR THE CAPACITIVE PROBLEM In this appendix, we collect the expressions of the 2-D Green’s functions produced by a line source inside a parallel-plate waveguide, including an oblique angle of incidence along the longitudinal -axis. The basic Green’s function is
and (8b) where
,
, and
are trigonometric
functions, and is a constant depending on the constitutive parameters of the medium. Details on how the longitudinal wavenumber is defined can be found in [8]. The Green’s functions components needed in the analysis of metallic posts are given in [8]. In Table II, we list all Green’s functions components needed in the analysis of dielectric or magnetic posts. The Green’s functions for the internal problem are those corresponding to a free-space 2-D problem filled with the constitutive parameters of the material body and taking into account the spatial harmonic . Therefore, these Green’s functions are written in terms of second-kind zeroth-order Hankel functions in the following way: (9) where
and
for
for , for . APPENDIX B MoM SUBMATRICES
for
,
, and
This appendix presents the expressions of the elements of the MoM submatrices presented in (7). These submatrices are obtained after replacing the integral-equation unknown current densities, by their corresponding expansions [see (6)], and the application of the testing procedure with the same set of functions employed for the expansion, following a Galerkin approach. These equations are particularized for the general problem of a dielectric/magnetic post isolated from a conducting post inside the parallel-plate region, as described in Section II-A (see Fig. 1). It is to be noted that the expressions are written in the spectral domain for harmonic . For the special cases presented in Section II-B (see Figs. 4 and 7), these
QUESADA PEREIRA et al.: INTEGRAL-EQUATION FORMULATION FOR THE ANALYSIS OF CAPACITIVE WAVEGUIDE FILTERS
expressions can easily be adapted by taking into account different external and internal Green’s functions for the equivalent problems discussed in this paper. In the following relations, and represents the tangential unit vectors to the discretization source and observation segments. On the other hand, and are the observation and source integration domains on the material body or the conducting post contour where the triangular test and basis functions are defined. These functions are defined on two adjacent discretization segments. Two different kinds of Green’s functions are used for computing the submatrices elements. First, the parallel-plate Green’s functions corresponding to the external problem (see Fig. 2), and second, the free-space Green’s functions with constitutive parameters . The first submatrices (10) are those corresponding to self interactions in the dieletric, considering the -electric field component produced by an -oriented electric current density, and the -magnetic field component produced by an -oriented magnetic current density
3871
, , and have the Submatrices same form as (11), but only considering the Green’s functions of the parallel-plate external problem and changing the source and observation domains. The meaning of the next submatrix (12) can be easily deduced following the previously explained notation (12) and are also null, but Next, submatrices again with different observation and source regions. The next element in the MoM matrix takes the following form:
(13) and have the same exSubmatrices pression as (13), but only considering the parallel-plate Green’s functions of the external problem and taking into account the different source and observation domains. The meaning of (14) can be easily inferred by applying the same notation as previously explained,
(10) , , and have the Submatrices same expression as (10), but in this case only the Green’s functions of the external problem (parallel-plate GFs) are taken into account for the mutual interactions and for the conducting post self-interaction. Moreover, for the first submatrix, the source is on the conductor and the observation on the dielectric, while for the second one the source and observation are reversed. Finally, for the last one, the source and observation are on the conductor. The next submatrices represent the self interaction in the dielectric for an -electric field component produced by a -oriented electric current or an -magnetic field component radiated by a -oriented magnetic current density
(11)
(14) , , and In this case, submatrices possess the same form as (14), but only considering the parallel-plate Green’s functions of the external problem, and taking into account the different source and observation domains. The next elements in the MoM matrix are
3872
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
global excitation array and represents the projection with the different electric and magnetic fields components. The first subarray corresponds to the electric and magnetic field excitation oriented along on the dielectric/magnetic post or on the conducting post (15)
(18)
Again, in this case, , , and have the same form as (15), but only with parallel-plate Green’s functions of the external problem, whereas the source and observation domains are in different regions. The next element in the MoM matrix is
The second submatrix represents the exciting magnetic field -oriented component on the dielectric/magnetic post surface (19) The last submatrix is also due to the magnetic field excitation on the dielectric/magnetic post surface, but this time for the oriented component (20)
REFERENCES (16)
The submatrices and possess the same expression as (16), but only with the parallel-plate Green’s functions of the external problem, and taking into account the different source and observation domains. The next element in the MoM matrix is
(17)
and have the same form as Submatrices (17) with only the parallel-plate Green’s functions of the external problem and taking into account the different source and observation domains. This completes all needed entries of the MoM matrix. The last step is the calculation of the excitation vector. This is obtained from the rectangular waveguide fundamental mode assuming amplitude . The mode is split in two plane waves, and is integrated with the test functions on the dielectric and conducting post contour ( , , and ). The next subarrays are part of the
[1] R. Levy, “Tapered corrugated waveguide low-pass filters,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. MTT-21, no. 8, pp. 526–532, Aug. 1973. [2] R. J. Cameron, C. M. Kudsia, and R. R. Mansour, Microwave Filters for Communication Systems. New York, NY, USA: Wiley, 2007, pp. 379–386. [3] I. Arregui et al., “A compact design of high-power spurious-free low-pass waveguide filter,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. MTT-20, no. 11, pp. 595–597, Nov. 1972. [4] I. Arregui et al., “High-power low-pass harmonic filters with higherorder and non-mode suppression: Design method and multipactor characterization,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 61, no. 12, pp. 4376–4386, Dec. 2013. [5] P. Vera Castejon, D. Correas Serrano, F. D. Quesada Pereira, J. Hinojosa Jimenez, and A. Alvarez Melcon, “A novel low-pass filter based on rounded posts designed by an alternative full-wave analysis technique,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 62, no. 10, pp. 2300–2307, Oct. 2014. [6] P. Vera Castejón, F. D. Quesada Pereira, A. Martinez Ros, J. L. Gomez Tornero, and A. Alvarez Melcon, “Novel integral equation formulation for the analysis of capacitive waveguide filters containing dielectric objects,” in IEEE AP-S Int. Symp., Spokane, WA, USA, Jul. 3–8, 2011. [7] F. D. Quesada Pereira, P. Vera Castejón, A. Alvarez Melcon, B. Gimeno Martínez, and V. E. Boria Esbert, “An efficient integral equation technique for the analysis of arbitrarily shaped capacitive waveguide circuits,” in Eur. Microw. Conf., Paris, France, Sep. 2010, pp. 236–239. [8] F. D. Quesada Pereira, P. Vera Castejón, A. Alvarez Melcon, B. Gimeno Martínez, and V. E. Boria Esbert, “An efficient integral equation technique for the analysis of arbitrarily shaped capacitive waveguide circuits,” Radio Sci., vol. 46, no. RS2017, pp. 1–11, Apr. 2011. [9] G. G. Gentili and L. Accatino, “A 2.5D FEM analysis of E-plane structures,” in Int. Numer. Electromagn. Modeling Optim. RF, Microw. THz Appl. Conf., Pavia, Italy, May 14–16, 2014, pp. 1–3. [10] I. Arregui et al., “Multipactor prediction in novel high-power low-pass filters with wide rejection band,” in Eur. Microw. Conf., Rome, Italy, Sep. 2009, pp. 675–678. [11] R. F. Harrington, Field Computation by the Moment Methods. New York, NY, USA: IEEE Press, 1968, p. 44. [12] R. F. Harrington, Time–Harmonic Electromagnetic Fields. New York, NY, USA: McGraw-Hill, 1961. [13] C. A. Balanis, Advanced Engineering Electromagnetics. New York, NY, USA: Wiley, 1989. [14] K.-M. Chen, “A mathematical formulation of the equivalence principle,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 37, no. 10, pp. 1576–1581, Oct. 1989. [15] A. J. Poggio and E. K. Miller, Integral Equation Solutions of Threedimensional Scattering Problems. Oxford, U.K.: Pergamon, 1973.
QUESADA PEREIRA et al.: INTEGRAL-EQUATION FORMULATION FOR THE ANALYSIS OF CAPACITIVE WAVEGUIDE FILTERS
[16] S. Yan, J.-M. Jin, and Z. Nie, “A comparative study of Calderon preconditioners for PMCHWT equations,” IEEE Trans. Antennas Propag., vol. 58, no. 7, pp. 2375–2383, Jul. 2010. [17] J. R. Mautz and R. F. Harrington, “Electromagnetic scattering from a homogeneous body of revolution,” Syracuse Univ., Syracuse, NY, USA, Tech. Rep. TR-77-10, Nov. 1977. [18] A. F. Peterson, S. L. Ray, and R. Mittra, Computational Methods for Electromagnetics. Piscataway, NJ, USA: IEEE Press, 1998, p. 451. [19] F. Q. Pereira et al., “Efficient analysis of arbitrarily shaped inductive obstacles in rectangular waveguides using a surface integral equation formulation,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 55, no. 4, pp. 715–721, Apr. 2007. [20] J. R. Mosig, “Arbitrarily shaped microstrip structures and their analysis with a mixed potential integral equation,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 36, no. 2, pp. 314–323, Feb. 1988. [21] Y. Leviatan, P. G. Li, A. T. Adams, and J. Perini, “Single post inductive obstacle in rectangular waveguide,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. MTT-31, no. 10, pp. 806–812, Oct. 1983. [22] F. J. Perez Soler, F. D. Quesada Pereira, D. Canete Rebenaque, J. Pascual Garcia, and A. Alvarez Melcon, “Efficient integral equation formulation for inductive waveguide components with posts touching the waveguide walls,” Radio Sci., vol. 42, pp. 1–9, Nov. 2007. [23] J. Vaughan, “A new formula for secondary emission yield,” IEEE Trans. Electron Devices, vol. 36, no. 9, pp. 1963–1967, Sep. 1989. Fernando D. Quesada Pereira (S’05–M’08) was born in Murcia, Spain, in 1974. He received the Telecommunications Engineer degree from the Technical University of Valencia (UPV), Valencia, Spain, in 2000, and the Ph.D. degree from the Technical University of Cartagena (UPCT), Cartagena, Spain in 2007. In 1999, he joined the Radiocommunications Department, UPV, as a Research Assistant, where he was involved in the development of numerical methods for the analysis of anechoic chambers and tag antennas. In 2001, he joined the Communications and Information Technologies Department, UPCT, initially as a Research Assistant, and then as an Assistant Professor. In 2005, he spent six months as a Visiting Scientist with the University of Pavia, Pavia, Italy. In 2009, he was an Invited Researcher for five months with the Technival University of Valencia (iTeam), Valencia, Spain. In 2011, he became an Associate Professor with UPCT. His current scientific interests include integral equation (IE) numerical methods for the analysis of antennas and microwave devices.
Antonio Romera Perez was born in Lorca, Spain, in 1989. He received the Telecommunications Engineer degree from the Technical University of Cartagena (UPCT), Cartagena, Spain, in 2014, and is currently working toward the Ph.D. degree at UPCT. In 2014, he joined the Telecommunication and Electromagnetic Group, UPCT, as a Research Assistant. He is involved in the development of new filtering structures for satellite systems. His current scientific interest include the design of microwave circuits for space applications.
3873
Pedro Vera Castejón was born in Murcia, Spain, in 1968. He received the Telecommunication Engineer degree from the Technical University of Valencia, Valencia, Spain, and is currently working towards the Ph.D. degree at the Technical University of Cartagena (UPCT), Cartagena, Spain. Since 2000, he has been an Associate Professor with the UPCT. He then joined the Research Group of Electromagnetism Associated to Telecommunications (GEAT), UPCT. His interests are focused on the resolution of electromagnetic problems inside cavities and waveguides.
Alejandro Alvarez Melcon (M’99–SM’07) was born in Madrid, Spain, in 1965. He received the Telecommunications Engineer degree from the Technical University of Madrid (UPM), Madrid, Spain, in 1991, and the Ph.D. degree in electrical engineering from the Swiss Federal Institute of Technology, Lausanne, Switzerland, in 1998. In 1988, he joined the Signal, Systems and Radiocommunications Department, UPM, as a Research Student, where he was involved in the design, testing, and measurement of broadband spiral antennas for electromagnetic measurements support (EMS) equipment. From 1991 to 1993, he was with the Radio Frequency Systems Division, European Space Agency (ESA/ESTEC), Noordwijk, The Netherlands, where he was involved in the development of analytical and numerical tools for the study of waveguide discontinuities, planar transmission lines, and microwave filters. From 1993 to 1995, he was with the Space Division, Industry Alcatel Espacio, Madrid, Spain, and was also with the ESA, where he collaborated on several ESA/European Space Research and Technology Centre (ESTEC) contracts. From 1995 to 1999, he was with the Swiss Federal Institute of Technology, École Polytechnique Fédérale de Lausanne (EPFL), Lausanne, Switzerland, where he was involved with microstrip antennas and printed circuits for space applications. In 2000, he joined the Technical University of Cartagena, Cartagena, Spain, where he currently develops his teaching and research activities. Dr. Alvarez Melcón was the recipient of the Journée Internationales de Nice Sur les Antennes (JINA) Best Paper Award for the best contribution to the JINA’98 International Symposium on Antennas and the Colegio Oficial de Ingenieros de Telecomunicación (COIT/AEIT) Award for the best Ph.D. thesis in basic information and communication technologies.
3874
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
RF Linearity Performance Potential of Short-Channel Graphene Field-Effect Transistors Ahsan Ul Alam, Kyle David Holland, Michael Wong, Sabbir Ahmed, Diego Kienle, and Mani Vaidyanathan, Member, IEEE
Abstract—The radio-frequency (RF) linearity performance potential of short-channel graphene field-effect transistors (GFETs) is assessed by using a nonlinear small-signal circuit model under the first approximation of ballistic transport. An intrinsic GFET is examined to reveal the key features of GFET linearity, and extrinsic parasitics are then included to assess the overall RF linearity. It is shown that short-channel GFETs can be expected to have a signature behavior versus gate bias that includes a constant-linearity region at low gate bias, sweet spots of high linearity before and after the gate bias for peak cutoff frequency, and poor linearity at the gate bias corresponding to the peak cutoff frequency. It is otherwise found that a GFET offers overall linearity that is comparable to a MOSFET and a CNFET, with the exception that the amount of intermodulation distortion in a GFET is dominated by the drain-injected carriers, a unique outcome of graphene's lack of a bandgap. Qualitative agreement with experiment in the signature behavior of GFET linearity supports the approach and conclusions. Index Terms—Contact resistance, device modeling, device physics, FET devices and circuits, FET modeling, GFET, graphene, graphene transistor, harmonic balance, intermodulation distortion, linearity, nanoelectronics, nonlinear device modeling, radio-frequency performance, solid state devices, third-order input-intercept point, transistor modeling.
I. INTRODUCTION
G
RAPHENE is a two-dimensional sheet of carbon, in which the atoms are arranged in a honeycomb lattice. The unique electrical and physical properties of graphene have sparked much interest in determining its potential uses in electronics. Although the lack of a bandgap has been problematic for the use of graphene in digital applications, the high values of unity-current-gain frequency and unity-power-gain frequency , combined with a high carrier mobility, continue to make graphene a promising candidate for analog high-frequency, or radio-frequency (RF), electronics. A key figure-of-merit for RF applications is linearity, which measures Manuscript received December 28, 2014; revised May 12, 2015 and August 17, 2015; accepted October 11, 2015. Date of publication November 11, 2015; date of current version December 02, 2015. This work was supported in part by the Natural Sciences and Engineering Research Council of Canada, in part by the Queen Elizabeth II Graduate Scholarship, in part by Alberta Innovates, and in part by Alberta Advanced Education and Technology. A. U. Alam, K. D. Holland, M. Wong, S. Ahmed, and M. Vaidyanathan are with the Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, University of Alberta, Edmonton, AB T6G 2V4, Canada (e-mail: [email protected]). D. Kienle is with the Theoretische Physik I, Universität Bayreuth, 95440 Bayreuth, Germany. Color versions of one or more of the figures in this paper are available online at http://ieeexplore.ieee.org. Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/TMTT.2015.2496295
the degree of distortion generated by the nonlinear mixing of the input signal with jammers. This paper probes the performance potential of graphene in terms of RF linearity. The strong interest in graphene has resulted in many theoretical and experimental studies on graphene field-effect transistors (GFETs). These studies have largely focused on cut-off frequencies [1]–[3], mobility [4]–[6], the effect of the lack of a bandgap [7], and ways to introduce a bandgap to improve performance [8]–[10]. GFETs operating at promisingly high frequencies have already been demonstrated [11]. Furthermore, great progress has been made in the pursuit of graphene-based integrated circuits [12]–[14]. On the topic of graphene linearity, however, there has been limited experimental work, which can be summarized as follows. Wang et al.[15] investigated the linearity of a 2long single transistor RF mixer at 10 MHz and reported a third-order input-intercept-point (IIP3) of 13.8 dBm; however, the reported conversion loss was between 30 to 40 dB. Habibpour et al.[16] reported a mixer based on a 500-nm long multichannel GFET operating at 30 GHz, with IIP3 values as high as 12.8 dBm and a conversion loss of 19 dB. Andersson et al.[17] reported the linearity of subharmonic mixers based on resistive GFETs having a channel length of 1 ; they obtained an IIP3 of 4.9 dBm and a conversion loss of 20–22 dB. The shortest channel GFET investigated for RF linearity thus far is a 250-nm epitaxially grown graphene FET used as a mixer, reported by Moon et al.[18] with an IIP3 of 22 dBm and conversion loss 15 dB; they also reported a similar but longer channel (2 ) device with higher IIP3 ( 27 dBm) and conversion loss of 10 dB. Madan et al.studied the linearity of an RF mixer [19] and LNA [20] based on a 750-nm long graphene FET and reported third-order output-intercept point (OIP3) values in the range of 19 dBm at an operating frequency of 2 GHz; the gain of the LNA for a 50- load termination was 5 dB. Jenkins et al.[21] also reported relatively good linearity for graphene FETs containing channels grown both by chemical vapor deposition and epitaxy and having lengths above 500 nm, with IIP3 values as high as 20 dBm but a power gain of 15 dB for a 50- load at 300 MHz. In a recent study, Han et al.[14] fabricated a graphene RF receiver integrated circuit with promising linearity figures of merit. Operating at a frequency of 4.3 GHz, the receiver produced very low RF harmonic distortion, with the output power of the second harmonic recorded to be 30 dB lower than the output power of the fundamental tone for an input power of 0 dBm; the conversion loss of the receiver was 10 dB. Common trends in the results cited above are a long channel length ( 250 nm) for the devices and promising values of IIP3
0018-9480 © 2015 IEEE. Personal use is permitted, but republication/redistribution requires IEEE permission. See http://www.ieee.org/publications_standards/publications/rights/index.html for more information.
ALAM et al.: RF LINEARITY PERFORMANCE POTENTIAL OF SHORT-CHANNEL GRAPHENE FIELD-EFFECT TRANSISTORS
that are accompanied by very low power gains. Further investigation is thus necessary to fully understand the RF linearity potential of GFETs, particularly the linearity that could be realized at short channel lengths. Given the present difficulty of fabricating GFETs with channel lengths at or below those for current CMOS technology nodes, studying the linearity of GFETs with short channels, i.e., 20 nm, which is 10 to 100 times smaller than the reported experimental devices cited above, calls for a modeling approach. To date, there have been only a few modeling studies that explore GFET linearity, and these have also focused on longer channel devices ( 440 nm). Chauhan et al.[22] used a semi-classical model incorporating the effects of inelastic phonon scattering and reported “excellent” linearity; however, the claim was based solely on the fact that the transconductance of their (1long) GFET was observed to remain nearly constant over a wide range of gate bias. Parrish et al.[23] performed an analytical study that shows that the contact resistances can severely degrade GFET transconductance linearity; working on a 2.4long device, they showed that the IIP3 of a GFET can improve by as much as 17 dB if the contact resistances are made small enough to be neglected. Very recently, Rodriguez et al.[24] used a static (low-frequency) analytical model to investigate the transconductance linearity of a 440-nm long GFET and reported a peak IIP3 value of 13.8 dBm. None of these modeling studies accounted for all sources of nonlinearity relevant for RF performance. In particular, both transport and capacitive nonlinearities can be expected to play a role [25]. A detailed and more comprehensive study of the RF linearity mechanisms in short-channel GFETs is thus warranted. In this work, we provide insight into the linearity mechanisms of an 18-nm GFET, chosen for demonstration purposes and representative of current CMOS technology nodes [26]. As in [27], we assume ballistic transport, a reasonable first approximation for graphene at small channel lengths ( 20 nm) for the purposes of assessing performance potential, especially since the reported electron mean-free path in graphene is much larger ( 100 nm) [28]. We also consider a doped MOSFET-like device, as done in recent studies to assess the performance potential of carbonbased electronics [27], [29]; short-channel MOSFET-like devices can be expected to outperform the long-channel Schottkybarrier devices prevalent today [30] and are a suitable choice to gauge performance potential. Although graphene's ambipolar transport has been exploited in RF applications [15], [19], in this study, we consider a unipolar configuration in which the device is biased away from the point of minimum conduction. We start our analysis by using an already developed nonlinear small-signal circuit [25]. The intrinsic components of the circuit are first extracted based on a modified top-of-the-barrier model (MTBM) [31]. The MTBM is an extension of the conventional top-of-the-barrier model [27], [29], with additional features to account for physical effects arising from the lack of a bandgap in graphene; for further details, the reader is referred to [31]. The external parasitics are then calculated with the aid of COMSOL [32] and added to obtain a complete extrinsic nonlinear circuit, an approach which has already been shown [31] to capture the nonlinear voltage dependencies of key device parameters determined from a more detailed simulator [7]. The Harmonic Bal-
3875
Fig. 1. Schematic of the GFET used in this paper. The dotted intrinsic region is modeled using a modified top-of-the-barrier method [31]. The external parasitic capacitances used to model the extrinsic device are shown at the top of the schematic.
ance solver in Microwave Office (MWO) [33] is then used to simulate the developed nonlinear circuit. Based on an examination of IIP3 values for intermodulation distortion under a two-tone input, our study reveals that GFETs offer linearity performance comparable to MOSFETs and CNFETs. They also exhibit a unique linearity signature, the features of which can be explained by an in-depth examination of the sources of nonlinearity in the device. We further find that, unlike MOSFETs and CNFETs, carrier injection from the drain dominates the nonlinear behavior of GFETs. We also examine the effects of drain bias, load resistance, and external parasitics. Finally, we perform a qualitative comparison with recent experiments [21] to validate our work. Section II of this paper outlines the device structure and simulation methodologies. The results of our simulation are presented and discussed in Section III, and a qualitative comparison of these results with experiment is provided in Section IV. The conclusions of our study are summarized in Section V. II. APPROACH A. Device Structure Fig. 1 shows the schematic of the GFET under investigation, with key device dimensions marked. The dotted region indicates the intrinsic portion of the device. The gate oxide is a 2-nm layer of (with a relative permittivity ). has been demonstrated as a promising high- dielectric suitable for graphene in recent experiments [34], [35]. The channel is intrinsic graphene, while the source and drain regions are -doped, with an effective doping concentration of . The source and drain geometries are symmetric with respect to the channel/gate regions. Fig. 2 plots the current-voltage characteristics of the GFET calculated using the MTBM [31] and a fully quantum-mechanical solver based on NEGF [7]. The results from the MTBM are in excellent agreement with those from NEGF, except for the
3876
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
equivalent circuit, where the elements are as follows: , , and are the linear electrostatic capacitances of the GFET; and are the nonlinear source and drain quantum capacitances; and and are the nonlinear current sources modeling the quasi-static transport currents of the device. The interested reader can find further details on these elements in [29]. Although [29] is developed for CNFETs, the methodology can, in principle, be used to model any ballistic MOSFET-like device. By accounting for both band-to-band tunneling and the unique density of states of graphene, as done in the MTBM, we can adapt this method to model GFETs [31]. Each of the nonlinear components are represented by a Taylor-series expansion up to third order, which is sufficient to capture their nonlinearity under small perturbation [36]: Fig. 2. Simulated current-voltage characteristics of the GFET under investigation from MTBM and NEGF.
(1) (2) (3) (4) and are the small-signal (ac) parts of the charges where held by the quantum capacitances and , respectively; and are the small-signal parts of the source and drain voltages, respectively; and is the small-signal part of the (self-consistent) channel potential. The steps described in [25] were followed to determine the values of the linear and nonlinear components from the MTBM [31].
Fig. 3. Complete nonlinear small-signal equivalent circuit of a ballistic GFET.
combination of very low gate bias and high drain bias ; however, this study focuses on operation at a drain bias of 0.5 V, where the MTBM clearly provides a sufficiently accurate picture of device behavior at all gate biases. It should also be noted that Fig. 2 shows drain current values for an intrinsic device considering ballistic transport, and therefore depicts a “best-case scenario” for current. In an actual device, the measured current density would be significantly reduced due to contact resistances, scattering due to phonons and interface states, and other nonidealities. Other important parameters such as transconductance , output conductance (or ), and unity-current-gain (cutoff) frequency of the device were reported in [31]; plots of these quantities versus gate bias are also available in figures (4 and 11) discussed further below. B. Intrinsic Equivalent Circuit Our focus in this work is the small-signal nonlinear operation of GFETs. We hence use Taylor-series expansions for all the components in the small-signal equivalent circuit. The coefficients of the series are specified by derivatives [evaluated at corresponding bias (dc operating) point] of the charge-voltage and current-voltage relationships from the MTBM [31]. The dotted portion of Fig. 3 represents the intrinsic nonlinear small-signal
C. Extrinsic Equivalent Circuit The performance of a practical GFET is also impacted by the parasitic elements in the device due to the metallic contacts at the gate, source, and drain. In order to fully assess the linearity of these devices, the effects of these parasitics must be incorporated. We therefore add the extrinsic capacitances , , and , labeled in Fig. 1 along with the contact resistances of the gate, drain, and source, , , and , respectively. All the parasitic components were calculated following the method described in [25]with the aid of COMSOL [32], and by using the contact dimensions specified below in Section III-D. The resulting extrinsic nonlinear smallsignal equivalent circuit is the overall circuit in Fig. 3, where , , and are the internal node voltages of the GFET and , , and are the external terminal voltages of the overall device. The component values (both intrinsic and extrinsic) are listed in Table II in Section III-D for the device under investigation. III. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION We used the Harmonic Balance solver in MWO [33] to simulate the nonlinear small-signal equivalent circuit, and we extracted the IIP3 corresponding to the mixing frequency , under excitation from two input tones at the fundamental frequencies and , as the small-signal linearity figure of
ALAM et al.: RF LINEARITY PERFORMANCE POTENTIAL OF SHORT-CHANNEL GRAPHENE FIELD-EFFECT TRANSISTORS
merit of the device. The transistor was deployed in a simple common-source configuration. The load and source impedances were set at 50 , the usual characteristic impedance for RF applications. A two-tone source with an impedance of 50 and an operating frequency of 24 GHz—which is a frequency of interest in RF electronics according to the 2012 ITRS [26]—and a difference of 100 MHz between the two tones was used ( , ). The input power was swept from 50 dBm to 40 dBm to keep the perturbation sufficiently small. The source was grounded, the drain bias was fixed at , and the gate bias was varied over a wide range, from 0 to 1 V (except for the results in Figs. 6 and 10, where the upper limits are 1.2 V and 1.4 V, respectively, and Fig. 19, where the range is from 0.1 V to 1.5 V, to aid the discussion). The IIP3 values in this paper are quoted in terms of the corresponding available power from the source, . Due to the large mismatch at the input, it should be noted that a significant amount of reflection loss occurs at the input of the device, which means the IIP3 values quoted in terms of will be significantly higher than the actual input power at the intercept point. However, the aim of this study is to examine the qualitative nature of a GFET's RF linearity and to investigate the mechanisms behind high-frequency distortion in this device. Our use of as the reference for quoting IIP3 is hence sufficient for the qualitative purposes of this study. In order to remain in the small-signal regime, was kept small ( 50 to 40 dBm). In this range, the IM3relation showed a slope of three as expected, with no variation.
3877
Fig. 4. Simulation results for intrinsic IIP3 and unity-current-gain frequency versus gate bias for the GFET under investigation.
A. Key Features of GFET Linearity To reveal the key features of GFET linearity, we first investigated the intrinsic RF linearity of a GFET, i.e., the linearity determined by the dotted portion of Fig. 3 and excluding external parasitics. The resulting IIP3 was plotted against variations in gate bias and is shown in Fig. 4. The IIP3 curve has a very distinct shape (signature), with a constant linearity region (region 1), two sharp peaks at points 2 and 4, and a large dip around point 3. The presence of the peaks at points 2 and 4 mean that bias sweet spots may exist where a GFET will behave very linearly. Fig. 4 also shows the unity-current-gain frequency versus gate bias. is defined as the operating frequency at which the small-signal current gain of the transistor in a common-source configuration drops to unity. It is a commonly used figure-of-merit in evaluating the amplification ability of a transistor. Note that the peak coincides with point 3, which means the GFET is most nonlinear at peak . 1) Constant IIP3 Region (Region 1): From the small-signal equivalent circuit in Fig. 3, it is clear that the distortion in a GFET arises from the nonlinear quantum capacitances and current sources, labeled , , , and . More precisely, intermodulation distortion at the third-order mixing frequency , which is of principal interest in this paper, arises due to the nonzero second- and third-order coefficients of the corresponding Taylor series expansions (1)–(4) for these elements; the second-order coefficients contribute by creating second-order distortion and then re-mixing it with the fundamental frequencies, and the third-order terms contribute by directly mixing the fundamental frequencies. We hence focus
Fig. 5. Simulated (a) quantum capacitance and (b) transconductance versus the dc part of the channel potential for the GFET under investigation. The gate bias voltages for a few points are indicated for reference.
our attention on the behavior of both the second- and third-order coefficients. Fig. 5 plots the quantum capacitances and quantum transconductances with respect to the bias (dc) part of the channel potential , where the capacitances
3878
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 6. Effects of the second and third-order coefficients on the overall linearity of the GFET from simulation.
are defined as the derivatives of the source- and drain-injected charge with respect to the channel potential, respectively, and the quantum transconductances are similarly defined but involving derivatives of currents [29]. The values of gate bias voltage that apply are also indicated for a few points on the plots. Since the curves were obtained with constant source and drain voltages, then by definition, the values of the capacitances and transconductances on the plots are the first-order coefficients , , , and appearing in (1)–(4). The second- and third-order coefficients in (1)–(4) are therefore determined by the first and second derivatives of the curves in Fig. 5. It can be seen that in region 1 , the curves vary linearly with voltage, which means that the third-order coefficients (determined by the second derivatives) are almost zero, while the second-order coefficients (first derivatives) are constant, thereby yielding a steady amount of distortion in the device over region 1. The linear behavior of the capacitances and transconductances in region 1, and hence the constant IIP3 in region 1, arise from the linear density of states (DOS) of graphene; the connection between the DOS and the expected behavior is explained for and when discussing Fig. 8, and similar reasoning applies for and . 2) Sharp Peaks at Points 2 and 4: The distortion in a GFET can arise from multiple sources, and the distortion generated from these sources can act upon each other constructively or destructively. In the discussion to follow, we show that the peaks at points 2 and 4 arise due to the destructive combination of distortion from two different sources. Using appropriate biasing, it may therefore be possible to make the GFET behave very linearly. To identify how the GFET's linearity is affected by the contributions from the second and third-order coefficients in (1)–(4), we turn them on and off selectively in the intrinsic equivalent circuit of Fig. 3. Fig. 6 shows the IIP3 of the GFET due to the two types of coefficients. It is evident that over particular bias points, the GFET linearity is determined by one of the two types of coefficients. At low and high gate biases ( and ),
Fig. 7. Distortion components at in the simulated drain current at a gate bias of 0.63 V (point 2 in Fig. 6). A destructive combination of the distortion from the two types of sources results in a diminished overall distortion.
Fig. 8. The dc part of the simulated channel potential versus (fixed by the constant drain voltage of 0.5 gate bias. The drain Fermi level (not shown) is taken to be the V) is also shown. The source Fermi level . reference
the device linearity is limited by the distortion generated by the second-order coefficients. However, for the moderate bias range , the device linearity is limited by distortion generated by the third-order coefficients. The peaks at points 2 and 4 appear when the device linearity mechanism switches from one type to the other. These results strongly suggest that at the transition regions, distortion contributions from the two mechanisms are combining in such a way that they cancel each other, making the device extremely linear. To illustrate the cancellation, MWO was used to generate the distortion components of the small-signal output current , at the mixing frequency , in the transition regions; Fig. 7 shows the results at a gate bias of 0.63 V (point 2). It is seen that the distortion due to the two mechanisms (second and third-order coefficients) are indeed 180 out of phase. Similar behavior is observed at the gate bias of 0.96 V (point 4). 3) Dip at Point 3: The dip in GFET IIP3 at point 3 occurs where device linearity is limited by the third-order coefficients, as shown by the results in Fig. 6. An inspection of Fig. 5 shows
ALAM et al.: RF LINEARITY PERFORMANCE POTENTIAL OF SHORT-CHANNEL GRAPHENE FIELD-EFFECT TRANSISTORS
that the source components and [solid lines in parts (a) and (b) of Fig. 5] behave linearly over all gate biases of interest, meaning their third-order coefficients (determined by the second derivatives) are zero, but the drain components and [dashed lines in parts (a) and (b) of Fig. 5] both show minima at point 3 , which leads to large thirdorder coefficients (determined by the second derivatives). The nonlinear elements and associated with the drain can hence be expected to contribute substantial distortion around point 3, which limits the device linearity, as illustrated in Fig. 6. The origin of the minima in and can be explained by observing what happens to the drain transport in this bias region. Fig. 8 shows the dc channel potential , equivalent to the position of the Dirac point in the channel of a GFET, as a function of gate bias. As illustrated, the channel potential (Dirac point) decreases with an increasing gate bias and crosses the drain Fermi level at point 3, i.e., for . The insets in Fig. 8 are provided as visualization aids and show the position of the Dirac point and channel DOS with respect to the drain Fermi level at a few gate biases. It can be seen that at lower gate biases , is positioned below the channel potential and a large number of states are available in the channel at the drain Fermi level. As the gate bias increases, the available DOS at starts to decrease and becomes zero at point 3, where the channel Dirac point aligns with the drain Fermi level . Beyond point 3 , is positioned above the channel potential, and the number of states available at the drain Fermi level increases with gate bias. Since the drain quantum capacitance depends directly on the available DOS at the drain Fermi level [37], it follows the same trend, i.e., decreases linearly with gate bias before reaching point 3, becomes a minimum at point 3, and increases linearly after point 3. The (energy-independent) constant velocity of electrons (and holes) in graphene means that in Fig. 3 and its first derivative behave in the same way as and its first derivative , respectively, which can be discerned by their governing equations [29]. Thus, both and show minima at (Fig. 5), i.e., at point 3 (Fig. 6). B. Drain Dominance in GFET Linearity To further investigate the role of the drain in determining the linearity of a GFET, we selectively turned on and off the distortions from the source and drain components, by setting the appropriate higher-order coefficients in (1)–(4) to zero. The results are shown in Fig. 9. For all gate voltages, the linearity of the device is found to be dominated by distortion coming from the drain. This result is significantly different from a conventional field-effect transistor in which the channel material has a finite bandgap (MOSFET or CNFET), where the distortion primarily comes from the source components [25]. The reason behind this unique drain dependency of the GFET linearity is two-fold: i) The zero bandgap of graphene means that the drain always contributes to the transport. Consequently, the drain quantum capacitance and quantum transconductance of the GFET [dashed curves in Figs. 5(a) and 5(b)] are always large enough to impact the overall device behavior.
3879
Fig. 9. Effect of distortion from the source and drain on simulated IIP3. Linearity due only to the source was found by setting the higher-order coefficients in (2) and (4) to zero; similarly, linearity due only to the drain was found by setting the higher-order coefficients in (1) and (3) to zero.
Fig. 5 shows that the drain components and of quantum capacitance and quantum transconductance are relatively large, i.e., of the same order as the source components, and that they are nonlinear in a GFET, unlike a conventional MOSFET (where and are essentially zero [25]). Comparing the capacitance-voltage and transconductance-voltage relationships of the source and drain components in Fig. 5, it is evident that the resulting second-order coefficients in (1)–(4), determined by the first derivatives of the curves, would be comparable. On the other hand, the minima in and make the third-order coefficients (determined by the second derivatives) of the drain components much larger than the almost zero third-order coefficients of the source components. The drain components can thus be expected to produce more distortion than the source components in a GFET. ii) The common-source configuration of the device makes the small-signal gain negative, which means that the small-signal drain voltage is 180 out of phase with the small-signal gate voltage , and hence with the small-signal channel potential (which will tend to follow ). This phase difference makes the control voltage for the drain components of Fig. 3, governed by (2) and (4), bigger than the corresponding control voltage for the source components, governed by (1) and (3). The larger control voltage enhances the distortion coming from the drain components. The following discussion highlights some of the outcomes of this unique drain dominance in GFET linearity. 1) Effect of Drain Bias on Linearity: One obvious outcome of the drain dominance on GFET linearity is an expected drainbias dependency of the overall linearity. Fig. 10 shows the IIP3 of the GFET versus gate bias, at a few different values of drain bias. As can be seen from the figure, in region 1 (constant linearity), a larger drain bias makes the device more linear. This outcome can be explained with the help of Fig. 11, which shows
3880
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 10. Simulated IIP3 versus gate bias, at a few different values of drain bias.
Fig. 11. Simulation results for (a) transconductance and (b) output conductance versus gate bias for varying drain bias.
that in this region, a larger drain bias reduces the transconductance and increases the output conductance . Since the available small-signal voltage gain of the GFET depends on the ratio , the larger drain bias results in a smaller small-signal voltage gain and, hence, a smaller . A reduced
Fig. 12. Effect of load resistance ulation.
on GFET IIP3 values obtained from sim-
means that the control voltage for the drain components is also reduced, which can be expected to reduce the distortion from the drain components in Fig. 3 [according to (2) and (4)] and make the GFET more linear. A larger drain bias also stretches the IIP3 curve, pushing the peaks at points 2 and 4, along with the dip at point 3, toward higher gate biases. The straightforward reason for this outcome is that a larger gate bias is required to push the dc channel potential (Dirac point on a band diagram) down to the lower drain Fermi level at higher drain bias. 2) Effect of Load Resistance on Linearity: Another outcome of the drain dominance on GFET linearity is the effect of the load resistance . A larger results in a larger swing in the drain voltage , which enhances the amount of distortion from the drain components through a larger control voltage in (2) and (4). On the other hand, a smaller results in a smaller swing in and the distortion becomes smaller. Fig. 12 shows the effect of on IIP3, while the source resistance is held at 50 . As anticipated, reducing the load from 50 to 12.5 dramatically increases the GFET IIP3 by almost 10 dB. Similarly, increasing the value of degrades linearity. The unique zero bandgap of graphene (the reason behind the drain dominance) thus makes it possible to improve the linearity, by reducing the load resistance. However, before reducing to improve the linearity, one must consider its implications on the voltage and power gains of the device, two desirable properties of any FET operating at RF frequencies. a) Voltage gain: The large output conductance of a GFET limits the voltage gain achievable from these devices. For example, Fig. 11 shows that for a drain bias of 0.5 V, the maximum (open-circuit) voltage gain available from the GFET is at a gate bias of 0.5 V. The voltage gain becomes even smaller when the device is loaded with a finite . Table I shows that the small of 12.5 that makes the GFET very linear in Fig. 12 also reduces the voltage gain to a mere 0.1 V/V. An attempt to improve linearity by reducing thus reduces the voltage gain considerably. b) Power gain: Even though the voltage gain of graphene is poor, a sufficiently wide device can still provide enough power gain (through increased current drive). For example,
ALAM et al.: RF LINEARITY PERFORMANCE POTENTIAL OF SHORT-CHANNEL GRAPHENE FIELD-EFFECT TRANSISTORS
3881
TABLE I EFFECT OF CHANNEL WIDTH AND LOAD IMPEDANCE ON LINEARITY AND GAIN @ 24 GHZ AND 0.5 V OF GATE AND DRAIN BIAS
TABLE II INTRINSIC AND EXTRINSIC CIRCUIT COMPONENTS OF THE GFET Fig. 13. Simulated intrinsic linearity performance potential comparison of a GFET with its MOSFET and CNFET counterparts. The region 1 and points 2-4 from Fig. 4 for the GFET curve are marked. We have also indicated that the , peak IIP3 for a CNFET and MOSFET occur at the same gate bias as peak whereas for a GFET, the minimum IIP3 occurs at the gate bias for peak . The curve is available in Fig. 4; the MOSFET and CNFET curves are GFET not shown.
C. Linearity of a GFET versus a MOSFET and a CNFET
Table I shows that the 1wide device has a power gain of 3.77 dB with a resistively matched load of 100 , but a 10wide device has a power gain of 6.23 dB with a resistively matched load of 10 , where the degree of matching is indicated by the product . The gain of the device can thus be increased by making the device wider and setting . For simplicity, here we are discussing the power gain simply as , where is the power delivered to the load and is the power available from the source, under the condition of purely resistive terminations for which we have been examining the IIP3; substantially more gain is available, as indicated, for example, by the maximum available gain (MAG), which is 30 dB for the 1device [7]. Our conclusions on the behavior of IIP3 are unaffected by device width (Table I), as long as we compare IIP3 values for the same . Hence, we can now consider a wider device, providing more power gain, and consider again the tradeoff between load resistance and linearity. For example, for the 10wide device, reducing the load from 10 to 1.25 will improve the IIP3 from 1.08 dBm to 12.78 dBm, but will decrease the power gain from 6.23 dB to 2.35 dB. While admittedly examined under highly simplified conditions (resistive terminations and for an intrinsic device), the key point from this discussion is that the results in Fig. 12 and Table I demonstrate that a reduction in does have the potential to improve linearity in a GFET, unlike conventional FETs, subject to the caveats of reduced voltage and power gain. We will re-examine this issue when external parasitics are introduced (Section III-D below).
1) Third-Order Intermodulation Distortion: In order to determine if a GFET holds any promise in RF electronics in terms of linearity, we need to benchmark its performance against its competitors. As a basis for comparison, we simulated the linearity of a silicon MOSFET and an array-based CNFET with , channel width identical channel length , and gate capacitance; these are the devices illustrated in [Fig. 1, 25]. The CNFET had 100 tubes in the channel to obtain a drive current comparable to the other devices. All three devices (including the GFET) were tested with 50- two-tone sources and 50- load terminations and the IIP3 values were recorded against gate bias. For the comparison, we retain the focus on the linearity of the intrinsic transistor so that the emphasis in our comparison is on differences arising from the channel material. Fig. 13 shows that the GFET offers linearity that is, overall, comparable to its MOSFET and CNFET counterparts under this scenario. However, two differences can be flagged. First, as already discussed, the drain dependence of the GFET offers us with an opportunity to enhance or by lowering , its linearity by increasing the drain bias which is not possible in the other devices. Second, the GFET's linearity offers a sweet spot prior to and after peak ; these are the points 2 and 4 discussed earlier in conjunction with Fig. 4. In fact, the GFET offers its worst IIP3 at peak , unlike the MOSFET and the CNFET, both of which offer their best IIP3 at peak . 2) Second-Order Distortion: While we have focused on third-order distortion, second-order distortion can also be important in certain RF applications [38]. For example, two out-of-band jammers can mix via a second-order intermodulation product, creating undesired components at the sum and difference frequencies, each of which could land on the fundamental frequency. We will focus on the sum frequency for the sake of this discussion.
3882
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 14. Simulated intrinsic IIP2 versus gate bias of a GFET compared with its MOSFET and CNFET counterparts.
For the second-order distortion at the mixing frequency , the GFET suffers from poor linearity when compared to its MOSFET and CNFET counterparts (Fig. 14). This outcome is primarily because of the linear DOS and zero bandgap of graphene, which cause all four quantum capacitances and transconductances of the GFET (source and drain components) to contribute to the distortion. Fig. 15 shows the relevant quantum capacitances and transconductances for the three devices. Fig. 15(a) shows for all three devices, as well as for the GFET, noting for the CNFET and MOSFET; similarly, Fig. 15(b) shows for all three devices, as well as for the GFET, noting for the CNFET and MOSFET. As illustrated in Fig. 15(a), for the CNFET and MOSFET tend to flatten out with bias, which results in small values of the second-order coefficients (determined by the first derivatives of the shown curves) in the Taylor-series expansion (1) for these devices; the coefficients in (2) are zero since in a CNFET and MOSFET, due to the existence of a bandgap in the corresponding channel materials. On the other hand, both and show significant slope over most bias values for the GFET, causing the coefficients in both (1) and (2) to be pronounced for the GFET. Similar results follow from inspection of Fig. 15(b), which suggests pronounced distortion from (3) and (4) for the GFET, but only (3) for the MOSFET and neither for the CNFET. Overall, the GFET will hence have second-order distortion contributions from all four nonlinear elements in Fig. 3, whereas only one or two of the components will play a role for the CNFET and MOSFET; the GFET thus exhibits the worst IIP2. One subtle point about the GFET's IIP2 curve should be noted. Unlike the GFET's IIP3, its IIP2 peaks (sharply) at the gate bias for peak . This outcome can be attributed to the minima in the drain components and at that bias point (as shown in Fig. 15 and earlier in Fig. 5), which makes the second-order coefficients determined by the first derivatives very small.
Fig. 15. (a) Relevant quantum capacitances and (b) transconductances versus channel potential for a GFET, MOSFET, and CNFET. The curves are plotted from simulations under an applied gate bias of 0.2 V to 1 V.
D. Extrinsic Linearity of GFET 1) Calculation of Parasitics: To calculate the extrinsic parasitics, the gate contact was assumed to be made of tungsten with dimensions of . Tungsten was chosen due to its closely matched work-function with graphene. From the resistivity of tungsten, the total resistance of the gate contact was calculated to be 220 . The distributed gate resistance was then modeled as a lumped resistance, . The source and drain contact resis, near the theotances were taken to be retical minimum for graphene [39], [40]. The extrinsic capacitances were measured to be , , by simulating the open-pad structure in and COMSOL [32]. Table II lists the intrinsic and extrinsic circuit component values of the 1wide GFET studied in this work; the bias-dependent values were calculated for gate and drain voltages both equal to 0.5 V, and only the first-order coefficients are listed for the nonlinear elements. 2) Extrinsic Linearity Features of a GFET: Once developed, the final extrinsic equivalent circuit was simulated in MWO [33]and the resulting IIP3 values are plotted versus gate bias in
3883
ALAM et al.: RF LINEARITY PERFORMANCE POTENTIAL OF SHORT-CHANNEL GRAPHENE FIELD-EFFECT TRANSISTORS
Fig. 16. Simulated intrinsic and extrinsic IIP3 versus gate bias.
Fig. 16. For the 1wide device, the external parasitics were found to slightly degrade the device linearity, but the signature shape identified from the intrinsic device remains, as demonstrated in Fig. 16. By selectively removing the parasitics one by one from the circuit in Fig. 3 and solving in MWO, we found that the extrinsic capacitances do not affect the RF linearity of GFETs; rather, it is the contact resistances. The following discussion identifies the contribution of the contact resistances to GFET linearity. 3) Impact of Drain Contact Resistance: Our investigation showed that the drain contact resistance is primarily responsible for degrading the overall RF linearity of the GFET. The potential drop across the drain contact resistance added to the output voltage results in a larger intrinsic drain voltage in the circuit of Fig. 3. As discussed in Section III-B, a larger increases the distortion from the nonlinear drain components in Fig. 3, a phenomenon unique to GFETs, and makes the device more nonlinear, by increasing the control voltage in (2) and (4). It should be mentioned that the source contact resistance will tend to improve the linearity of the device slightly due to its well-known feedback effect in the common-source configuration [41, p. 101], but any such improvement is dominated by the degrading effect of the drain resistance. The gate contact resistance is small enough in the 1wide device that it does not affect the linearity; we will shortly consider a wider device to isolate its effect. Simulating the extrinsic circuit with zero while retaining the parasitic capacitances results in identical linearity between the extrinsic and intrinsic devices, as shown in Fig. 16. A small drain resistance is hence essential to making a GFET as linear as possible. One other note should be made about the impact of the drain resistance. In Section III-B, it was shown that a small has the potential to improve the GFET linearity by reducing the swing of the drain voltage (Fig. 12). However, the presence of the drain contact resistance makes it impossible to lower the swing of enough to improve linearity significantly. Fig. 17 shows the effect of variation in on linearity for the extrinsic GFET. that improved the linearity by almost 10 dB The reduction in
Fig. 17. Effect of load resistance on GFET extrinsic IIP3. The improveis less pronounced than in the intrinsic case ment in IIP3 with a reduction in shown in Fig. 12. The IIP3 values were obtained from simulation.
Fig. 18. Simulated intrinsic and extrinsic IIP3 versus gate bias for a 10wide GFET.
in the intrinsic circuit only improves the linearity by 2.2 dB in the extrinsic circuit. Keeping the drain contact resistance low is hence also important to allow for potential linearity improvement by adjusting . 4) Effect of Gate Contact Resistance: To examine the impact of , a wider device must be considered, is appreciable. Fig. 18 shows that the linearity of where the 10wide device improves significantly when the effects of the external parasitics are included. The drain contact resistance still degrades the linearity, but the degradation is canceled by an even greater improvement in linearity due to the gate contact resistance . As device width increases, the gate contact resistance can hence improve linearity, but this would, of course, come at the expense of reduced power gain. IV. QUALITATIVE COMPARISON RESULTS
WITH
EXPERIMENTAL
Finally, we compare our IIP3 values with experimental results. As discussed in Section I, most experimental studies have considered the linearity of graphene in RF mixers or circuits [14]–[20]. However, Jenkins et al.[21, Fig. 4(a)] measured the
3884
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
linearity of an individual epitaxially grown -type GFET in a manner that is consistent with our study. Microscopy images of a similar device are shown in [42]. Note that the fabricated device has a much longer channel than our device, which makes a direct comparison with our simulation results impossible. However, a qualitative comparison with the reported IIP3 values, as shown in Fig. 19 [parts (a) and (b)], demonstrates that the key signature of the GFET IIP3 (regions 1 to 4), as identified in Section III-A, is present even in a long-channel fabricated device. In comparing the predicted and experimental data in parts (a) and (b) of Fig. 19, two points should be borne in mind. First, the actual gate bias and IIP3 values should not be expected to overlap, as the two devices involved have different channel lengths; of relevance are the relative positions of the identified regions and points with respect to gate bias, and the resulting signature in the IIP3 behavior. Second, to assign our identified regions to the experimental plot without ambiguity, we have used points 6 and 3 as anchors; point 6 corresponds to the minimum in power gain, and point 3 corresponds to the maximum in power gain. With these two points noted, Fig. 19 shows good overall qualitative agreement between the predicted signature [part (a)] and experimental results [part (b)]. Extending the gate bias values beyond the 0.2 V to 1 V range used throughout our study thus far shows that our approach is capable of capturing most features present in the experimental IIP3 curve [21]. Regions 5, 6, 7, and 8 in the extended plot in Fig. 19(a) clearly mirror the corresponding regions in Fig. 19(b). The mechanism behind these regions can be revealed by examining our developed nonlinear model. • Regions 5 and 8 are similar to region 1, in which the IIP3 values are relatively insensitive to gate bias. In these regions, we found that the source and drain quantum capacitances and transconductances vary linearly with voltage (consistent with extrapolating the curves in Fig. 5). Therefore, the IIP3 remains almost constant. • Point 6 occurs at the point of minimum conduction, such that the small-signal transconductance is zero. This zero transconductance results in a small-signal voltage gain of zero. The output of the device therefore contains distortion due to the nonlinear circuit components, but the fundamental frequency component is absent. This makes the device extremely nonlinear at this bias point. • Point 7 shows another peak in IIP3. By separately examining the nonlinearity of the source and drain components in the small-signal circuit, we found that the contributions to distortion from the source and drain components at point 7 are of equal magnitude and opposite phase. This results in a destructive combination of distortion components, resulting in an IIP3 peak. However, a few discrepancies do exist. • Region 1 has a much smaller span in the experiment versus the simulation [Fig. 19(a)], but it should be noted that this region appears between the peaks at 7 and 2, and that its extent depends strongly on the drain bias, as discussed in Section III-B in conjunction with Fig. 10. This drainbias dependence of the extent of region 1 is confirmed by
Fig. 19. Qualitative comparison of simulated (extrinsic) IIP3 values of the GFET under investigation in this paper at drain biases of (a) 0.5 V and (c) 0.3 V with (b) experimental data [21, Fig. 4(a)]. We have also shown the power gain in each case for reference.
comparing the simulation results in Figs. 19(a) and 19(c), where a narrower region 1 can be observed in the simulation of Fig. 19(c) [corresponding to ] vs. Fig. 19(a) [corresponding to ].
ALAM et al.: RF LINEARITY PERFORMANCE POTENTIAL OF SHORT-CHANNEL GRAPHENE FIELD-EFFECT TRANSISTORS
• fThe peaks at points 2 and 4 are diminished in the experimental IIP3, and the dip around point 3 is also less prominent. The differences between the experimental data and the numerical results are most likely due to the nonidealities in the practical device that our model does not consider, such as scattering. The fabricated GFET in [21] is a long-channel device with a channel length of 700 nm. The transport in this device is therefore subject to scattering, which is neglected in the short-channel GFET considered in this study. As discussed in Section III-A, the formation of the peaks at points 2 and 4 is dependent on the phase relationship of the distortion generated by the second- and third-order coefficients of the drain components and . The presence of scattering in the long-channel device may change this phase relationship by requiring a modification of the circuit in Fig. 3, which is strictly valid only for ballistic transport, thereby diminishing the peaks. • Lasy, while both our model and the experiment show a slightly increasing IIP3 moving out toward very high gate bias in region 9, the experimental IIP3 additionally shows a pronounced dip following region 8 that is barely perceptible in the numerical results of Fig. 19(a) and absent in the numerical results of Fig. 19(c). We attribute this difference to a breakdown of our ballistic model in the high bias regime of region 9, as phonon scattering is much more prominent at large gate biases [43], [44]. The similarity of the experimental and theoretical curves in Fig. 19 provides qualitative validation of our modeling approach and resulting observations on the linearity of GFETs. However, this similarity calls for a more detailed investigation and discussion that clarifies why the signature behavior of linearity, which is apparently present at all channel lengths, is governed (for graphene) by features of a ballistic transport model. This investigation and discussion will be pursued separately; here, the most important outcome is that the similarity of experiment and simulations supports our approach and conclusions. Finally, we observe that the experimental curves shown in Fig. 19(b) show power gain values comparable to our simulation results, but notably higher IIP3 values. Although we should be careful about making quantitative comparisons due to the differences between the two devices, the increased IIP3 in the experimental device suggests that the presence of scattering may improve the linearity of GFETs. One reason may be that scattering linearizes the current-voltage behavior. As seen in Fig. 2, the ballistic device in our study shows no saturation in the current-voltage characteristics, whereas experimental devices will likely exhibit stronger saturation due to phonon scattering [45], and therefore better linearity. Confirming this hypothesis would require a careful inclusion of the effects of scattering in our nonlinear model (e.g., via the method outlined in [46]), which is beyond the scope of our present study. V. CONCLUSIONS The following conclusions can be drawn regarding the RF linearity potential of GFETs. 1) The IIP3 versus gate bias curve of the GFET has four distinct features. A constant linearity region, two sharp peaks, and a large dip.
3885
2) The linear DOS of graphene results in a linear quantum capacitance and transconductance versus voltage relationship in GFETs at low gate bias , which is responsible for the constant linearity region. 3) Depending on the gate bias, the GFET linearity is dictated either by distortion generated by second-order coefficients or by third-order coefficients in the Taylor-series expansions of the nonlinear components. A destructive combination of distortion from the two mechanisms in the transition regions creates sharp peaks in the IIP3 curve. 4) The GFET offers its worst linearity at peak . 5) Over all gate bias values, the distortion generated in the nonlinear drain components dictate the GFET linearity. This is an outcome of the zero bandgap of graphene. It also makes the RF linearity highly sensitive to variations in drain bias and potentially load resistance. 6) In terms of third-order distortion, the GFET's performance is comparable to its MOSFET and CNFET counterparts, with the distinguishing feature that the peak IIP3 does not occur at peak . 7) Due to its linear DOS and lack of a bandgap, the secondorder distortion is much worse in a GFET than in its competitors. 8) The extrinsic IIP3 retains the key features (signatures) of the intrinsic IIP3. 9) Parasitic capacitances have a minimal impact on GFET linearity. 10) The drain contact resistance degrades the linearity of a GFET, while the source resistance has minimal impact; this occurs due to the drain dominance of GFET linearity (conclusion 5). In wide devices , the gate contact resistance can make the device more linear but will degrade the power gain. 11) Qualitative agreement between our results and published experimental data [21] supports our approach and conclusions. Overall, the most important outcomes of this work are the identification of the signature behavior and the drain dependence of graphene linearity. We also showed that graphene has the potential to offer third-order linearity at least comparable to CNFETs and MOSFETs, but suffers from worse second-order linearity. The load-resistance dependency creates a unique opportunity to improve the linearity in GFETs by using smaller loads, but at the cost of reduced voltage and power gain. All these key outcomes are intimately tied to the lack of a bandgap and linear DOS of graphene. ACKNOWLEDGMENT The authors would like to thank Dr. Prasad Gudem, Qualcomm, Inc., San Diego, for sharing his invaluable insights, and AWR Corporation for providing Microwave Office and valuable technical support. REFERENCES [1] K. S. Novoselov, A. K. Geim, S. V. Morozov, D. Jiang, Y. Zhang, S. V. Dubonos, I. V. Grigorieva, and A. A. Firsov, “Electric field effect in atomically thin carbon films,” Science, vol. 306, pp. 666–669, Oct. 2004.
3886
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
[2] Y. Wu, Y. Lin, A. A. Bol, K. A. Jenkins, F. Xia, D. B. Farmer, Y. Zhu, and P. Avouris, “High-frequency, scaled graphene transistors on diamond-like carbon,” Nature, vol. 472, pp. 74–78, Apr. 2011. [3] L. Liao, Y. Lin, M. Bao, R. Cheng, J. Bai, Y. Liu, Y. Qu, K. L. Wang, Y. Huang, and X. Duan, “High-speed graphene transistors with a selfaligned nanowire gate,” Nature, vol. 467, pp. 305–308, Sep. 2010. [4] K. I. Bolotin, K. J. Sikes, Z. Jiang, M. Klima, G. Fudenberg, J. Hone, P. Kim, and H. L. Stormer, “Ultrahigh electron mobility in suspended graphene,” Solid State Comm., vol. 146, pp. 351–355, Jun. 2008. [5] Y.-M. Lin, C. Dimitrakopoulos, K. A. Jenkins, D. B. Farmer, H.-Y. Chiu, A. Grill, and P. Avouris, “100-GHz transistors from wafer-scale epitaxial graphene,” Science, vol. 327, p. 662, Feb. 2010. [6] M. C. Lemme, T. J. Echtermeyer, M. Baus, and H. Kurz, “A graphene field-effect device,” IEEE Electron Device Lett., vol. 28, pp. 282–284, Apr. 2007. [7] K. D. Holland, N. Paydavosi, N. Neophytou, D. Kienle, and M. Vaidyanathan, “RF performance limits and operating physics arising from the lack of a bandgap in graphene transistors,” IEEE Trans. Nanotechnol., vol. 12, pp. 566–577, Jul. 2013. [8] Z. Chen, Y.-M. Lin, M. J. Rooks, and P. Avouris, “Graphene nanoribbon electronics,” Physica E: Low-Dimensional Systems and Nanostructures, vol. 40, pp. 228–232, Dec. 2007. [9] T. G. Pedersen, C. Flindt, J. Pedersen, N. A. Mortensen, A.-P. Jauho, and K. Pedersen, “Graphene antidot lattices: Designed defects and spin qubits,” Phys. Rev. Lett., vol. 100, pp. 136804-1–136804-4, Apr. 2008. [10] T. Ohta, A. Bostwick, T. Seyller, K. Horn, and E. Rotenberg, “Controlling the electronic structure of bilayer graphene,” Science, vol. 313, pp. 951–954, Aug. 2006. [11] Y. Wu, K. A. Jenkins, A. Valdes-Garcia, D. B. Farmer, Y. Zhu, A. A. Bol, C. Dimitrakopoulos, W. Zhu, F. Xia, P. Avouris, and Y. Lin, “State-of-the-art graphene high-frequency electronics,” Nano Lett., vol. 12, pp. 3062–3067, May 2012. [12] Y.-M. Lin, A. Valdes-Garcia, S. Han, D. B. Farmer, I. Meric, Y. Sun, Y. Wu, C. Dimitrakopoulos, A. Grill, P. Avouris, and K. A. Jenkins, “Wafer-scale graphene integrated circuit,” Science, vol. 332, pp. 1294–1297, Jun. 2011. [13] J. Kang, D. Sarkar, Y. Khatami, and K. Banerjee, “Proposal for allgraphene monolithic logic circuits,” Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 103, no. 8, pp. 083113-1–083113-5, Aug. 2013. [14] S. Han, A. Valdes-Garcia, S. Oida, K. A. Jenkins, and W. Haensch, “Graphene radio frequency receiver integrated circuit,” Nat. Commun., vol. 5, pp. 3086-1–3086-6, Jan. 2014. [15] H. Wang, A. Hsu, J. Wu, J. Kong, and T. Palacios, “Graphene-based ambipolar RF mixers,” IEEE Electron Device Lett., vol. 31, pp. 906–908, Sep. 2010. [16] O. Habibpour, J. Vukusic, and J. Stake, “A 30-GHz integrated subharmonic mixer based on a multichannel graphene FET,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 61, pp. 841–847, Feb. 2013. [17] M. A. Andersson, O. Habibpour, J. Vukusic, and J. Stake, “Resistive graphene FET subharmonic mixers: Noise and linearity assessment,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 60, pp. 4035–4042, Dec. 2012. [18] J. S. Moon, H.-C. Seo, M. Antcliffe, D. Le, C. McGuire, A. Schmitz, L. O. Nyakiti, D. K. Gaskill, P. M. Campbell, K.-M. Lee, and P. Asbeck, “Graphene FETs for zero-bias linear resistive FET mixers,” IEEE Electron Device Lett., vol. 34, pp. 465–467, Mar. 2013. [19] H. Madan, M. J. Hollander, M. LaBella, R. Cavalero, D. Snyder, J. A. Robinson, and S. Datta, “Record high conversion gain ambipolar graphene mixer at 10 GHz using scaled gate oxide,” in IEEE Int. Electron Devices Meeting, USA, Dec. 2012, pp. 4.3.1–4.3.4. [20] H. Madan, M. J. Hollander, J. A. Robinson, and S. Datta, “Analysis and benchmarking of graphene based RF low noise amplifiers,” in Proc. Device Res. Conf., USA, Jun. 2013, pp. 41–42. [21] K. A. Jenkins, D. B. Farmer, S.-J. Han, C. Dimitrakopoulos, S. Oida, and A. Valdes-Garcia, “Linearity of graphene field-effect transistors,” Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 103, no. 17, pp. 173115-1–173115-4, Oct. 2013. [22] J. Chauhan and J. Guo, “Inelastic phonon scattering in graphene FETs,” IEEE Trans. Electron Devices, vol. 58, no. 11, pp. 3997–4003, Nov. 2011. [23] K. N. Parrish and D. Akinwande, “Impact of contact resistance on the transconductance and linearity of graphene transistors,” Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 98, no. 18, pp. 183505-1–183505-3, May 2011.
[24] S. Rodriguez, A. Smith, S. Vaziri, M. Ostling, M. C. Lemme, and A. Rusu, “Static nonlinearity in graphene field effect transistors,” IEEE Trans. Electron Devices, vol. 61, no. 8, pp. 3001–3003, Aug. 2014. [25] A. U. Alam, C. M. S. Rogers, N. Paydavosi, K. D. Holland, S. Ahmed, and M. Vaidyanathan, “RF linearity potential of carbon-nanotube transistors versus MOSFETs,” IEEE Trans. Nanotechnol., vol. 12, pp. 340–351, May 2013. [26] “Radio frequency and analog/mixed-signal technologies for wireless communications,” Int. Technol. Roadmap for Semiconductors 2012. [27] S. O. Koswatta, A. Valdes-Garcia, M. B. Steiner, Y.-M. Lin, and P. Avouris, “Ultimate RF performance potential of carbon electronics,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 59, no. 10, pp. 2739–2750, Oct. 2011. [28] E. Pop, V. Varshney, and A. K. Roy, “Thermal properties of graphene: Fundamentals and applications,” MRS Bull., vol. 37, pp. 1273–1281, Dec. 2012. [29] S. Hasan, S. Salahuddin, M. Vaidyanathan, and M. A. Alam, “High-frequency performance projections for ballistic carbon-nanotube transistors,” IEEE Trans. Nanotechnol., vol. 5, pp. 14–22, Jan. 2006. [30] Y. Yoon, G. Fiori, G. Iannaccone, and J. Guo, “Performance comparison of graphene nanoribbon FETs with Schottky contacts and doped reservoirs,” IEEE Trans. Electron Devices, vol. 55, no. 9, pp. 2314–2323, Sep. 2008. [31] A. U. Alam, K. D. Holland, S. Ahmed, D. Kienle, and M. Vaidyanathan, “A modified top-of-the-barrier model for graphene and its application to predict RF linearity,” in Proc. Int. Conf. Simulation of Semiconductor Processes and Devices, Scotland, UK, Sep. 2013, pp. 155–158. [32] COMSOL, Inc.. Stockholm, Sweden, COMSOL Multiphysics Version 3.5a 2007. [33] AWR Corporation, Microwave Office Version 10.04r. El Segundo, CA, USA, 2012. [34] S. Kim, J. Nah, I. Jo, D. Shahrjerdi, L. Colombo, Z. Yao, E. Tutuc, and S. K. Banerjee, “Realization of a high mobility dual-gated graphene field-effect transistor with dielectric,” Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 94, no. 6, pp. 062107-1–062107-3, Feb. 2009. [35] D. B. Farmer, Y. Lin, and P. Avouris, “Graphene field-effect transistors with self-aligned gates,” Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 97, no. 1, pp. 0131031–013103-3, Jul. 2010. [36] S. A. Maas, Nonlinear Microwave and RF Circuits, 2nd ed. Boston: Artech House, Inc., 2003. [37] S. Datta, Quantum Transport: Atom to Transistor, 1st ed. New York: Cambridge Univ. Press, 2005. [38] D. Im, I. Nam, and K. Lee, “A CMOS active feedback balun-LNA with high IIP2 for wideband digital TV receivers,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 58, no. 12, pp. 3566–3579, Dec. 2010. [39] F. Xia, V. Perebeinos, Y. Lin, Y. Wu, and P. Avouris, “The origins and limits of metal-graphene junction resistance,” Nature Nanotechnol., vol. 6, no. 6, pp. 179–184, Mar. 2011. [40] J. S. Moon, M. Antcliffe, H. C. Seo, D. Curtis, S. Lin, A. Schmitz, I. Milosavljevic, A. A. Kiselev, R. S. Ross, D. K. Gaskill, P. M. Campbell, R. C. Fitch, K.-M. Lee, and P. Asbeck, “Ultra-low resistance ohmic contacts in graphene field effect transistors,” Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 100, no. 20, pp. 203512-1–203512-3, May 2012. [41] D. O. Pederson and K. Mayaram, Analog Integrated Circuit for Communication: Principles, Simulation and Design, 2nd ed. New York, USA: Springer, 2008. [42] Y. Lin, D. Farmer, K. Jenkins, Y. Wu, J. Tedesco, R. L. Myers-Ward, C. R. Eddy, D. Gaskill, C. Dimitrakopoulos, and P. Avouris, “Enhanced performance in epitaxial graphene FETs with optimized channel morphology,” IEEE Electron Device Lett., vol. 32, no. 10, pp. 1343–1345, Oct. 2011. [43] J. Chauhan and J. Guo, “Inelastic phonon scattering in graphene FETs,” IEEE Trans. Electron Devices, vol. 58, no. 11, pp. 3997–4003, Nov. 2011. [44] T. Fang, A. Konar, H. Xing, and D. Jena, “High-field transport in twodimensional graphene,” Phys. Rev. B, vol. 84, no. 12, pp. 1254501–125450-7, Sep. 2011. [45] V. Perebeinos and P. Avouris, “Inelastic scattering and current saturation in graphene,” Phys. Rev. B, vol. 81, no. 19, pp. 195442-1–195442-8, May 2010. [46] G. Vincenzi, G. Deligeorgis, F. Coccetti, M. Dragoman, L. Pierantoni, D. Mencarelli, and R. Plana, “Extending ballistic graphene FET lumped element models to diffusive devices,” Solid-State Electron., vol. 76, pp. 8–12, Oct. 2012.
ALAM et al.: RF LINEARITY PERFORMANCE POTENTIAL OF SHORT-CHANNEL GRAPHENE FIELD-EFFECT TRANSISTORS
Ahsan Ul Alam received the Ph.D. degree in electrical engineering from the University of Alberta, Edmonton, AB, Canada, in 2015. He is currently an Applications Engineer at Lumerical Solutions, Inc., Vancouver, BC, Canada. His research interests include the modeling and simulation of micro- and nanoscale electronic and optoelectronic devices for current and future technologies. Dr. Alam received the George Walker Award as the top Ph.D. student convocating from the electrical and computer engineering department in the 2015 Spring convocation. He was also nominated for the Governor General's Gold Medal for his accomplishments as a Ph.D. student.
Kyle David Holland received the B.Sc. degree in 2009 in engineering physics (nanoengineering option) from the University of Alberta, Edmonton, AB, Canada, where he is currently working toward the Ph.D. degree in electrical engineering. His research interests are in the quantum simulation of carbon-based nanoelectronics, with an emphasis on modeling the high-frequency performance of graphene devices. Mr. Holland currently holds an NSERC Alexander Graham Bell Canada Graduate Scholarship and an Alberta Innovates Graduate Student Scholarship, and he was a recipient of the Ralph Steinhauer Award of Distinction.
Michael Wong received the B.Sc. degree in computer engineering in 2013 from the University of Alberta, Edmonton, AB, Canada, where he is currently working toward the Ph.D. degree in electrical engineering. His current research interests include modeling and simulation of nanoscale devices, including FinFETs and 2D FETs. Mr. Wong currently holds the Natural Sciences and Engineering Research Council of Canada Alexander Graham Bell Canada Graduate Scholarship and the Alberta Innovates Graduate Student Scholarship. He has also received The Rt. Hon. C. D. Howe Memorial Fellowship at the University of Alberta.
3887
Sabbir Ahmed received the B.Sc. and M.Sc. degrees in electrical and electronic engineering (EEE) from the Bangladesh University of Engineering and Technology (BUET), Dhaka, Bangladesh, in 2005 and 2007, respectively and the Ph.D. degree in electrical and computer engineering from the University of Alberta, Edmonton, AB, Canada in 2014. He is currently an Electrical & Control System Design Engineer with Stantec Consulting Ltd., Calgary, AB, Canada. From 2005 to 2008, he was a Lecturer with the Department of EEE of BUET. His research interests include the theory, modeling, and simulation of nanoscale electronic devices, with an emphasis on the high-frequency and circuit-level performance of III-V high-electron-mobility transistors, carbon-based transistors, and solarcell devices. Dr. Ahmed received the F. S. Chia Doctoral Scholarship in 2008 and 2009, and the Queen Elizabeth II Graduate Scholarship in 2010, 2011, and 2012 at the University of Alberta.
Diego Kienle received the B.S. (Vordiplom) and M.S. (Diplom) degree from the University of Bayreuth, and his PhD (Dr.rer.nat.) from the Research Center Jülich and the University of Saarland, Germany, in theoretical physics. After appointments with the Electrical and Computer Engineering Department at Purdue University and the Material Science Department at Sandia National Laboratories in California, he is currently with the Institute of Theoretical Physics at the University of Bayreuth. His research interests are in the theory, modeling, and simulation of ac quantum electronic transport in nanoscale materials and devices with a focus on the understanding of the quantum dynamic processes in low-dimensional materials and their potential application in solidstate-based terahertz devices. His past research interests are in the theory and modeling of complex fluids by means of Brownian dynamics with a focus on many-body hydrodynamic interaction effects in diluted polymer solutions.
Mani Vaidyanathan (S'95–M'99) received the Ph.D. degree in electrical engineering from the University of British Columbia, Vancouver, BC, Canada. He is currently an Associate Professor with the Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering at the University of Alberta, Edmonton, AB, Canada. His research interests include the modeling, simulation, and understanding of electronic devices for future electronics, with a present focus on the radio-frequency performance of FinFETs and 2D materials. Dr. Vaidyanathan is a recipient of the University of Alberta's Provost's Award and the University of Alberta's Alexander Rutherford Award for excellence in teaching.
3888
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Consistent Modeling and Power Gain Analysis of Microwave SiGe HBTs in CE and CB Configurations Germán Álvarez-Botero, Member, IEEE, Reydezel Torres-Torres, Senior Member, IEEE, and Roberto S. Murphy-Arteaga, Senior Member, IEEE
Abstract—This paper presents a methodology to model SiGe HBTs biased in common-emitter and in common-base configurations including the bias-dependent substrate parasitics, which allows determining the more suitable configuration to achieve maximum power gain at different frequency ranges. Model–experiment correlations up to 100 GHz for different bias conditions verify the validity of the proposed circuit representations using the same values for the parameters in both configurations. Index Terms—CB configuration, CE configuration, equivalent circuit modeling, power gain, SiGe-HBT, substrate parasitics determination.
I. INTRODUCTION
S
IGE heterojunction bipolar transistors (HBTs) exhibit attractive characteristics for power amplification at microwave frequencies [1], [2]. In this regard, common-emitter (CE) and common-base (CB) configurations have been analyzed [3], [4], showing that HBTs in CB may provide higher power gain than in CE beyond certain frequency. Work in this direction has been previously carried out [5], which allowed determining the more suitable configuration for particular applications to reduce the amplification stages and improving the efficiency of power amplifiers. Unfortunately, the substrate effects and other extrinsic effects, which are important at microwave frequencies, were not considered. However, since HBTs operating in different configurations might be present in the same IC, designers require models that consistently represent the device in both cases while considering the intrinsic, extrinsic, and substrate elements interacting in the device [6], [7]. Motivated by the need to represent both CB and CE configurations, an analytical modeling and parameter extraction methodology is proposed here. From this, the HBT's maximum available power gain (MAG) is calculated, obtaining excellent model-experiment correlations in both configurations. Moreover, the frequency range for better power amplification for each configuration as a function of important design parameters Manuscript received February 24, 2015; revised May 22, 2015; accepted October 20, 2015. Date of publication November 12, 2015; date of current version December 02, 2015. G. Álvarez-Botero is with the Radio Frequency Research Group, Federal University of Santa Catarina, 88040-900 Florianópolis, SC, Brazil, (e-mail: [email protected]). R. Torres-Torres and R. S. Murphy-Arteaga are with the Department of Electronics, National Institute for Astrophysics, Optics and Electronics, Puebla 72840, Mexico (e-mail: [email protected]; [email protected]). Color versions of one or more of the figures in this paper are available online at http://ieeexplore.ieee.org. Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/TMTT.2015.2496375
Fig. 1. Experimental setup used to perform high-frequency measurements illustrating the VNA, coplanar probes and device-under-test (DUT).
is determined, which is very helpful as a guide for microwave HBT-IC design. II. EXPERIMENT npn SiGe HBTs were fabricated in a 0.13 BiCMOS tech, and an emitter nology with an emitter width , and number of emitter fingers and length 12. Afterwards, -parameters were measured on these devices in both CE and CB configurations up to 100 GHz using a vector network analyzer (VNA) and ground-signal-ground coplanar pitch, as shown in Fig. 1. The equipment probes with a 100was calibrated up to the probe tips using the line-reflect-match procedure and an impedance-standard-substrate, establishing a reference impedance of 50 for the measurements. In addition, the pad parasitics were de-embedded using on-wafer structures as in[8]. For characterization purposes, the measurements were performed at different bias conditions, according to the requirements described in subsequent sections. These data, together with the equivalent circuits in Fig. 2 were used to develop the proposed methodology. In this regard, Fig. 2(a) shows the conventional model for a SiGe HBT in CE configuration, whereas Fig. 2(b) shows an alternative circuit that is convenient for anaas the parallel conlyzing the CB configuration considering and . nection of III. PARAMETER EXTRACTION METHODOLOGY A. Determination of the Substrate Parasitics The parameters associated with the substrate parasitics have to be determined to implement an accurate high-frequency
0018-9480 © 2015 IEEE. Personal use is permitted, but republication/redistribution requires IEEE permission. See http://www.ieee.org/publications_standards/publications/rights/index.html for more information.
ÁLVAREZ-BOTERO et al.: CONSISTENT MODELING AND POWER GAIN ANALYSIS OF MICROWAVE SIGE HBTS
3889
Fig. 2. Small-signal models for a SiGe HBT: (a) conventional circuit in CE configuration, and (b) alternative representation in CB configuration.
Fig. 4. Linear regressions used to determine
,
and
.
Fig. 3. Simplified small-signal equivalent circuit for an HBT in CE configuraand . tion biased at
model. Typically, this can be achieved by characterizing the ) and then considering HBT at zero bias (i.e., so a negligible bias dependence of these parasitics on that the corresponding effect can be removed at other bias conditions [9], [10]. It is necessary to bear in mind, however, , that the substrate elements exhibit a strong dependence on which requires a careful parameter extraction to account for this dependence as shown hereafter. Fig. 2(a) and (b) show the substrate effects represented by the ), and the subcollector-substrate depletion capacitance ( ) and capacitance ( ). For an HBT bistrate resistance ( , it is valid to assume that: i) no signifiased at cant current is flowing through base, ii) all the dynamic resistances present large values (i.e., junctions are turned-off), and . In this case, the extrinsic and dynamic resistances, iii) as well as the current source can be neglected in the equivalent circuit, resulting in the model shown in Fig. 3. Then, the de-embedded -parameters are converted to -parameters and the admittances , , and in Fig. 3 can be determined from the experimental data using
(1)
forming a linear regression of versus . and are obtained using (3) and (4), respectively. The determination of the admittances , , and , allows to obtain experimental data associated with the substrate admit. In fact, in accordance to Fig. 3, this admittance can tance be used to define the following equations that include equivalent circuit elements: (5) (6) Notice from these equations that , , and can be obtained from the slopes and intercepts with the ordinates and of the regressions of the experimental versus data, as shown in Fig. 4. Moreover, the substrate is represented using the same network in the CE and CB configurations, which implies that this extraction method is valid in both cases provided that ; the latter is a reasonable assumption in typical HBTs presents a weak [12]. An important remark is the fact that bias dependence since only a small portion of this resistance is affected by the change in the width of the collector-substrate depletion region, which allows an effective value to be used. According to Fig. 4, the substrate parameters can be obtained as
(2)
(3) (7)
(4) Once that has been determined using (1), and can be extracted from the corresponding intercept and slope per-
Also, Fig. 5 shows that the versus CE-HBT are well correlated by
data obtained for a
(8)
3890
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
data, allowing to represent the intrinsic HBT as in Fig. 6(a). In order to obtain the parameters in this model, the - transformation illustrated in Fig. 6(b) is applied [13]. Thus, since the intrinsic transistor is represented in this case using a -topology, -parameters are preferred to determine the unknown elements. Hence, it is possible to write Fig. 5.
(9)
determined from -parameters for an HBT in CE configuration.
(10) (11) (12) where (13) By simultaneously solving (9) to (12), obtained as
,
,
, and
are (14)
Fig. 6. (a) Equivalent circuit for the intrinsic part of a CE-configured HBT. (b) - transformation allowing to obtain c) a simplified model.
(15) (16) (17) Now, (14) and (15) can be rearranged to define the time con) associated with the intrinsic base; this is stant ( (18) is calculated from the known impedances and , Since can be obtained from the slope of the regression of the exversus data, as shown in Fig. 7(a). perimental Furthermore, (14) can be rearranged as
Fig. 7. Linear regressions used to determine the equivalent circuit for the inand . trinsic part of a CE-configured HBT biased at
(19) where:
which is the equation that describes a - junction consid, a built-in voltage , and ering a zero-bias capacitance a grading exponent . This good correlation between the physically-based model and the data extracted points out that the deon were adequately considered here. In pendence of fact, notice in Fig. 5 that this parameter suffers a change of about 50% within the considered voltage range, which points out povalue tential errors introduced when assuming a constant extracted at zero-bias conditions. B. Modeling the HBT in the Active Region Once that the substrate effects and the extrinsic resistances , , and have been determined using (1) to (4), the corresponding effect can also be removed from the experimental
(20) (21) Thus, from (19) the following expression can be written: (22) This equation indicates that the base-emitter time constant ) can be calculated from the slope and intercept ( with the ordinates of the linear regression of the experimental versus data, as shown in Fig. 7(b). On the other
ÁLVAREZ-BOTERO et al.: CONSISTENT MODELING AND POWER GAIN ANALYSIS OF MICROWAVE SIGE HBTS
3891
Fig. 8. Simplified sketch showing the cross section view of the measured devices illustrating its relevant (a) geometrical characteristics, (b) base resistance components; (c) base capacitive components and (d) multi-finger layout.
hand, and of equations:
are obtained by solving the following system (23) (24)
It is also possible to demonstrate that can be obtained versus data regression, from the slope of the , , , , which is shown in Fig. 7(c). At this point, are known, allowing to obtain the base-collector capacand from the data shown in itance Fig. 7(d). with the -parameters, an expression can Now, to relate be written by combining (13) and (17), this is Fig. 9. Linear regression used to determine the lateral and vertical components of the base-emitter capacitance.
(25) is the transconductance at low frequencies, and where related to the phase delay.
is
Thus, in order to separate intrinsic and the extrinsic components (26) can be rewritten as of (27)
C. Modeling the Total Base-Emitter Capacitance in Multifinger HBTs In the case of SiGe HBTs, because the emitter polysilicon and metal layers overhang the oxide above the base, the emitter-base isolation capacitance, , which is proportional the emitter perimeter, must be also considered. In this case, lateral and vertical contributions to the total base-emitter capacitance are in, that is cluded in (26) where, and are the emitter area and perimeter, respectively, is the emitter capacitance which is proportional to the and emitter area. emitter In accordance with Fig. 8(d), for a transistor with fingers the effective area and perimeter can be expressed as: , and .
or written in an alternative form as (28) denotes the aspect ratio of the tranwhere versus sistor. Then, performing a linear regression of using the extracted values of from , the contributions of extrinsic and transistors with different intrinsic base-emitter capacitances can be obtained, as shown in Fig. 9. From measurements in the CE configuration at and , the following values are obtained when applying the proposal: , , , , , , , , , , , , , , and .
3892
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
imental and simulated -parameters. In this case, the following equations are applied (29) where is the maximum stable gain, and is Rollet's stability factor [14], given as: (30) Fig. 10. MAG versus frequency for CE and CB-configured HBTs showing the model-experiment correlation using the proposed methodology and indicating .
Fig. 11. MAG versus frequency for CE and CB-configured HBTs showing the . effect of neglecting the bias dependence of
As mentioned before, one of the advantages of the proposed extraction method is the feasibility of using the same values for the model parameters in both the CE and CB configurations to describe the HBT frequency operation. This allows to ease and simplify the model implementation using parameters obtained from measurements performed to a device in only one configuration. Nonetheless, as an additional advantage, the analysis of the transistor's figures of merit can also be performed in a systematic way as shown hereafter. Regarding the figures of merit to assess the device performance at high-frequencies, the extracted parameters were used to implement the models in Fig. 1 and determine MAG. As shown in Fig. 10, excellent simulation-experiment correlation is obtained for both configurations using the same values for the model parameters. Furthermore, in order to demonstrate the error introduced in the modeling when the bias dependence of is neglected as in previous approaches, Fig. 11 shows the discrepancy when this effect is not adequately considered. In this case, the transistor model predicts a potentially unstable behavior at low frequencies, which may introduce significant errors in the determination of the transistor's figures of merit; this is shown hereafter. IV. POWER GAIN IN CE AND CB CONFIGURATION In order to define the frequency ranges of applicability of the CB and CE configurations, MAG was determined using exper-
Fig. 10 also shows the crossover frequency ( ) above which MAG for the CB configuration is higher than that for the CE is smaller than configuration. Observe in this figure that ). This indicates the maximum frequency of oscillation ( that operating the device in the CB configuration rather than in the CE configuration is preferable within a considerable fre, still obtaining power amplification. quency range beyond was proposed in In this regard, an expression to determine [5]. However, this expression involves the approximation of the , which considers only cutoff frequency the intrinsic part of the device and provides no information on the impact of the extrinsic parameters on the HBT's high-frequency performance. Fig. 11 exhibits the impact of the substrate , which in turn influences the extraction of impedance on . in the modNotice that neglecting the bias dependence of eling of the HBT translates into large errors when determining the MAG. Its origin is related to the correct representation of the output parameters of HBT, which are directly affected with the substrate network. This is most clearly seen when evaluating (29); notice that S22 and S21 are dependent of the substrate network, directly affecting the MAG for CE and MSG for CB calis higher culations. Thus, the frequency range were can be accurately predicted using the improved than model implementation proposed here. A. Determining the Crossover Frequency (
)
After adequately removing the substrate effects, the circuit in Fig. 2 can be simplified to the one shown in Fig. 12. Thus, involving the -parameters associated with this model, a simplified expression for MAG is obtained
(31) represents the parallel connection of and . Nowhere tice from (31) that for (i.e., when MAG becomes to unity), the base-collector time constant can be written as , and can be expressed as (32) In this case, considers the total delay time from emitter to collector [i.e., , including the extrinsic base-collector capacitance.
ÁLVAREZ-BOTERO et al.: CONSISTENT MODELING AND POWER GAIN ANALYSIS OF MICROWAVE SIGE HBTS
3893
Fig. 12. Small-signal models for a SiGe HBT after removing the substrate effect for: (a) CE configuration, and (b) CB configuration.
Now, in order to obtain an expression for , it is mandatory to determine MSG for the CB configuration, which is possible becomes using the model shown in Fig. 12(b), where
Fig. 13. Experimental and simulated power gain for a SiGe HBT obtaining by extending the simulation range.
(33) Thus, equating (31) and (33) and substituting
yields
(34) which can be written in an alternative form as (35) Then, solving (27) for (36) This expression presents an improvement with respect to the one proposed in [5] because it includes both intrinsic and extrinsic elements interacting on the HBT operation to determine the better range of power amplification; this is due to the fact . that (31) involves is typically extracted by either a direct obIn this case, servation of the MAG versus frequency curve, or performing . However, due to the a data extrapolation to non-linear trend in the MAG curve of the transistor at high frequencies, or for limitations on the high frequency equipment, is not easy. Therefore, a methodology accurately obtaining from data measured at relatively to accurate determining low frequencies is proposed Determining the maximum oscillation frequency ( ) can be obtained by applying (29) and (30) Theoretically, to experimental -parameters obtained up to a frequency high . However, as shown in Fig. 13, enough to observe even when data measured up to 100 GHz are available, cannot be determined in this fashion for modern high-performance HBTs [15]–[17]. This motivates the development of the following alternative methodology. Assuming that at low frequencies the parasitic coupling between the HBTs output terminals is weak, (29) can be rearranged in the following way: (37)
Fig. 14. Linear regressions of a) MAG as function of function of .
Also, expressing
; and b)
as
as a linear function of frequency (38)
and respectively represent the slope and inwhere tercept of the linear regression. Fig. 14(a) and (b) show the curves obtained after applying (37) and (38) to experimental , , and . data. This allows the determination of Afterwards, (29), (37) and (38) can be combined as follows:
(39)
3894
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
where is the permittivity of the substrate and an effective base-collector value for the junction depletion region width under the STI and SIC regions. Therefore, combining (31) and with the (36), it is possible to relate the crossover frequency geometrical parameters, this is
(41) In fact, (41) provides the IC designer with a useful tool to esfrom layout parameters defining the better HBT timate the configuration to use, and optimize power consumption for the whole circuit. Fig. 15. Comparison between extracted using the proposed method and simulations using the model in Fig. 2.
which allows to analytically calculate , avoiding possible high frequency uncertainties. For the experiments performed was determined. This value is consistent here, with the one obtained extending the simulation range, shown Fig. 13, which also points out the consistency of the proposed model and methodology. For completeness, the methodology shown above was apas function of the applied to obtain the corresponding and compared against of simulation results using the plied model shown in Fig. 2. As shown in Fig. 15, a good correlation is obtained when the HBT is operating in low, moderated and high injection regions. is accurately obtained, it can be used in (36) Once that for determining the operation range of interest for a CE or CB configuration. In the next section, (36) can be related to the geometrical parameters of the HBT. V. DEPENDENCE OF POWER GAIN FOR MULTIFINGERED HBTS Multifingered structures have been widely used for RF/Microwave HBTs because their convenience to maintain thermal stability without significantly increasing the device area, also allowing to get a better performance on frequency operation. Thus, going further into the analysis, this work proposes to exincluding the geometry-dependent tend a quantification for effects, paying particular attention to multifingered structures. Fig. 8(a) shows the principal geometrical characteristics for , the collector the base region, the connections width , and the finger length . In addition, stripe width and are the distances between the base and emitter, and between the base and collector regions, respectively. Fig. 8(d) shows layout sketch of a multifingered HBT composed emitter fingers, considering the emitter finger width . of Notice that it is possible to relate the effective base-collector time constant in (31), consistently with the model in Fig. 2, with the geometrical characteristics of the HBT by
(40)
VI. CONCLUSION A methodology to model consistently the high-frequency performance of SiGe HBTs in both common emitter and common base configuration has been proposed. During the analysis, the errors introduced in the modeling of the MAG when ignoring the bias dependence of the collector-substrate depletion capacitance have been evidenced. Furthermore, this methodology allows modeling CE and CB-configured SiGe HBTs in a consistent and physically based fashion, simplifying the model implementation using a set of -parameters obtained in either configuration. Excellent model–experiment correlations are obtained for devices operating in the active region up to 100 GHz, which is fundamental in identifying the optimal configuration for power amplification at a given frequency. In this regard, a simple and analytical expression was also proposed for the calculation of the frequency at which the CE and CB MAG curves crossover. ACKNOWLEDGMENT The authors acknowledge IMEC, Leuven, Belgium, for supplying the test structures. In addition, they would like to thank Dr. F. R. de Sousa for his helpful comments. REFERENCES [1] J. D. Cressler, “A retrospective on the SiGe HBT: What we do know, what we don't know, and what we would like to know better,” in Proc. Silicon Monolithic Integr. Circuits RF Syst. Conf., 2013, pp. 81–83. [2] J. D. Cressler, “SiGe HBT technology: A new contender for Si-based RF and microwave circuit applications,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 46, no. 5, pp. 572–589, May, 1998. [3] G. Qin, G. Wang, N. Jiang, and Z. Ma, “Tradeoff between CE and CB SiGe HBTs for power amplification in terms of frequency-dependent linearity and power-gain characteristics,” in Proc. Silicon Monolithic Integrated Circuits RF Systems Conf., 2007, pp. 1–4. [4] G. Qin, N. Jiang, G. Wang, and Z. Ma, “Configuration dependence of SiGe HBT linearity characteristics,” in Proc. Eur. Microw. Integr. Circuits Conf., 2006, pp. 107–110. [5] Z. Ma and N. Jiang, “On the operation configuration of SiGe HBTs based on power gain analysis,” IEEE Trans. Electron. Devices, vol. 52, no. 2, pp. 248–255, Feb., 2005. [6] T. K. Johansen, V. Krozer, J. Vidkjaer, and T. Djurhuus, “Substrate effects in wideband SiGe HBT mixer circuits,” in Proc. Gallium Arsenide Other Semiconductor App. Symp., 2005, pp. 469–472. [7] N. Jiang, Z. Ma, P. Ma, V. Reddy, and M. Racanelli, “SiGe power HBT design considerations for IEEE 802.11 applications,” in Proc. Eur. Microw. Conf., 2005, vol. 3, pp. 1431–1434. [8] R. Torres-Torres, R. Murphy-Arteaga, and J. A. Reynoso-Hernández, “Analytical model and parameter extraction to account for the pad parasitics in RF-CMOS,” IEEE Trans. Electron. Devices, vol. 52, no. 7, pp. 1335–1342, 2005.
ÁLVAREZ-BOTERO et al.: CONSISTENT MODELING AND POWER GAIN ANALYSIS OF MICROWAVE SIGE HBTS
[9] T. K. Johansen, J. Vidkj, and V. Krozer, “Substrate effects in SiGe HBT modeling,” in Proc. Gallium Arsenide Other Semiconductor Appl. Symp., 2005, pp. 445–448. [10] M. Pfost, P. Brenner, T. Huttner, and A. Romanyuk, “An experimental study on substrate coupling in bipolar/BiCMOS technologies,” IEEE J. Solid-State Circuits, vol. 39, no. 10, pp. 1755–1763, Oct. 2004. [11] H. Y. Chen, K. M. Chen, G. W. Huang, and C. Y. Chang, “An improved parameter extraction method of SiGe HBTs' substrate network,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 16, no. 6, pp. 321–323, 2006. [12] U. Basaran, N. Wieser, G. Feiler, and M. Berroth, “Small-signal and high-frequency noise modeling of SiGe HBTs,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 53, no. 3, pp. 919–928, Mar. 2005. [13] L. Degachi and F. M. Ghannouchi, “An augmented small-signal HBT model with its analytical based parameter extraction technique,” IEEE Trans. Electron. Devices, vol. 55, no. 4, pp. 968–972, 2008. [14] J. Rollett, “Stability and power-gain invariants of linear twoports,” IRE Trans. Circuit Theory, vol. 9, no. 1, pp. 29–32, 1962. [15] N. Sarmah, B. Heinemann, and U. R. Pfeiffer, “A 135–170 GHz power amplifier in an advanced SiGe HBT technology,” in Proc. IEEE Radio Freq. Integr. Circuits Symp., 2013, pp. 287–290. [16] P. S. Chakraborty, A. S. Cardoso, B. R. Wier, A. P. Omprakash, J. D. SiGe HBT Cressler, M. Kaynak, and B. Tillack, “A 0.8 THz operating at 4.3 K,” IEEE Electron Device Lett., vol. 35, no. 2, pp. 151–153, 2014. [17] T. Hashimoto, K. Tokunaga, K. Fukumoto, Y. Yoshida, H. Satoh, M. Kubo, A. Shima, and K. Oda, “SiGe HBT technology based on a 0.13 process featuring an fmax of 325 GHz,” IEEE J. Electron Devices Soc., vol. 2, no. 4, pp. 50–58, 2014. Germán Álvarez-Botero (S'03–M'14) received the Ph.D. degree from the National Institute for Research on Astrophysics, Optics and Electronics (INAOE), Puebla, México. In 2014, he was with the RF Research Group, Federal University of Santa Catarina (UFSC), Florianópolis, Brazil, as a Postdoctoral Researcher. His research interests are physics, modeling, and characterization of high-speed devices, circuits and interconnects for high-frequency applications; RF/microwave instrumentation electronics.
3895
Currently, he is researcher with the High-Frequency Electronics and Telecommunications Research Group, National University of Colombia, Bogotá, Colombia.
Reydezel Torres-Torres (S'01–M'06–SM'15) received the Ph.D. degree from National Institute for Research on Astrophysics, Optics and Electronics (INAOE), Puebla, México. He has worked for Intel Laboratories in Mexico and IMEC in Belgium. He is a Senior Researcher in the Electronics Department of INAOE in Mexico. He has authored more than 70 journal and conference papers and directed 6 Ph.D. and 15 M.S. theses, all in experimental high-frequency characterization and modeling of materials, interconnects, and devices for microwave applications. .
Roberto S. Murphy-Arteaga (M'92–SM'02) received the B.Sc. degree in physics from St. John's University, MN, USA, and received the M.Sc. and Ph.D. degrees from the National Institute for Research on Astrophysics, Optics and Electronics (INAOE), Puebla, México. He has taught graduate courses at the INAOE since 1988, totaling over 100 taught undergrad and graduate courses. He has given over 80 talks at scientific conferences and directed seven Ph.D. theses, 13 M.Sc. and 2 B.Sc. theses. He has published more than 120 articles in scientific journals, conference proceedings and newspapers, and is the author of a text book on Electromagnetic Theory. He is currently a Senior Researcher with the Microelectronics Laboratory, and the Director of Research of the INAOE. His research interests are the physics, modeling and characterization of the MOS Transistor and passive components for high frequency applications, especially for CMOS wireless circuits, and antenna design. Dr. Murphy is the President of ISTEC, a member of the Mexican Academy of Sciences, and a member of the Mexican National System of Researchers (SNI).
3896
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Automated Design of Common-Mode Suppressed Balanced Wideband Bandpass Filters by Means of Aggressive Space Mapping Marc Sans, Student Member, IEEE, Jordi Selga, Member, IEEE, Paris Vélez, Member, IEEE, Ana Rodríguez, Member, IEEE, Jordi Bonache, Member, IEEE, Vicente E. Boria, Senior Member, IEEE, and Ferran Martín, Fellow, IEEE
Abstract—The automated and unattended design of balanced microstrip wideband bandpass filters by means of aggressive space mapping (ASM) optimization is reported in this paper. The proposed filters are based on multisection mirrored stepped impedance resonators (SIRs) coupled through quarter-wavelength transmission lines, acting as admittance inverters. Such resonant elements provide transmission zeros useful for the suppression of the common mode in the region of interest (differential filter pass band) and for the improvement of the differential-mode stopband (rejection level and selectivity). Due to the limited functionality of the inverters, related to the wide fractional bandwidths, the automated filter design requires a two-step process. With the first ASM, the filter schematic satisfying the required specifications (optimum filter schematic) is determined. Then, the layout is synthesized by means of a second ASM algorithm. Both algorithms are explained in detail and are applied to the synthesis of two filters, as illustrative (and representative) examples. With this paper, it is demonstrated that the two-step ASM optimization scheme (first providing the optimum schematic and then the layout), previously applied by the authors to wideband single-ended filters, can be extended (conveniently modified) to common-mode suppressed differential-mode bandpass filters. Thus, the value of this two-step ASM approach is enhanced by demonstrating its potential for the unattended design of complex filters, as those considered in this paper. Index Terms—Balanced filters, bandpass filters, circuit synthesis, microstrip technology, optimization, space mapping (SM), stepped impedance resonators (SIRs).
I. INTRODUCTION
I
N recent years, many efforts have been dedicated to the design of compact common-mode suppressed balanced wideband and ultrawideband (UWB) bandpass filters [1]–[16]. Manuscript received May 29, 2015; revised August 30, 2015; accepted October 05, 2015. Date of publication November 05, 2015; date of current version December 02, 2015. This work was supported by MINECO-Spain (projects TEC2013-47037-C5-1-R, TEC2013-40600-R, TEC2013-49221-EXP), Generalitat de Catalunya (project 2014SGR-157), Institució Catalana de Recerca i Estudis Avançats (who awarded Ferran Martín), and by FEDER funds. M. Sans, J. Selga, P. Vélez, J. Bonache, and F. Martín are with GEMMA/ CIMITEC, Departament d’Enginyeria Electrònica, Universitat Autònoma de Barcelona, 08193 Bellaterra, Spain (e-mail: [email protected]). A. Rodríguez and V. E. Boria are with Departamento de ComunicacionesiTEAM, Universitat Politècnica de València, 46022 Valencia, Spain (e-mail: [email protected]). Color versions of one or more of the figures in this paper are available online at http://ieeexplore.ieee.org. Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/TMTT.2015.2495180
This interest is justified by the increasing demand of balanced circuits and systems (e.g., high-speed digital circuits), related to their inherent high immunity to noise, electromagnetic interference (EMI), and crosstalk. In some reported balanced filters, efficient common-mode suppression in the region of interest (differential-mode pass band) is achieved at the expense of filter size, by cascading additional stages specifically designed to reject the common mode [17], [18]. To reduce the device size, filter topologies able to intrinsically reject the common mode, and simultaneously providing the filtering functionality for the differential mode, are needed. This is indeed the case of most of the reported wideband and UWB balanced filters. However, frequency selectivity and stopband rejection level and bandwidth for the differential mode are typically limited in such filters. Exceptions are the filters reported in [10], [13], and [16], where good stopband behavior for the differential mode above the passband of interest, mainly due to the presence of transmission zeros for that mode, is demonstrated. Nevertheless, the filters reported in [13] are implemented by means of three metal layers (i.e., increasing fabrication complexity), whereas the design and synthesis of the filters presented in [10] is not straightforward, since open split-ring resonators (OSRRs) in microstrip technology cannot be described by a simple circuit model. This paper is focused on the balanced filters first reported in [16]. These filters exhibit good performance (i.e., wide differential-mode bandwidth, good stopband rejection level, bandwidth and selectivity, and intrinsic common-mode suppression), small size, and simple fabrication process (two metal levels and via free), and they can be accurately described through a circuit schematic that combines lumped and distributed elements (important for design purposes). Specifically, the considered filters are inspired by the highly selective single-ended filters reported in [19]. By mirroring such single-ended filters and by adding central capacitive patches in the bisecting symmetry plane, a highly selective wideband bandpass response for the differential-mode and common-mode suppression over a wide band are simultaneously achieved [16]. As compared with [16], in this paper, we provide a systematic design procedure of these filters, able to provide the filter layout following a completely unattended scheme. Moreover, we report two design examples, a comparison to many other wideband balanced filters, and a discussion on bandwidth limitations for the differential mode.
0018-9480 © 2015 IEEE. Personal use is permitted, but republication/redistribution requires IEEE permission. See http://www.ieee.org/publications_standards/publications/rights/index.html for more information.
SANS et al.: AUTOMATED DESIGN OF COMMON-MODE SUPPRESSED BALANCED WIDEBAND BANDPASS FILTERS BY MEANS OF ASM
The resulting filters are thus composed of transverse multisection stepped impedance resonators (SIRs) [20] coupled through admittance inverters (implemented by means of quarter wavelength transmission lines). As it is well known, these lines are not able to provide the inverter functionality over wide bands. Thus, to compensate for the bandwidth degradation associated to the limited functionality of the inverters, a design method based on aggressive space mapping (ASM) optimization [21]–[24] is reported here. Several efficient methods have been developed since ASM, such as response correction techniques [25], manifold mapping [26] feature-based optimization [27], or faster techniques based on SM [28]. However, the ASM optimization technique has been chosen to develop the design method presented due to the good results obtained in previous works [29]–[31]. This method provides the filter schematic (optimum schematic) able to satisfy the specifications for the differential-mode and common-mode responses. Then, once the schematic is determined, a second ASM algorithm is applied to the determination of the filter layout. Hence, the proposed unattended design tool follows a two-step ASM process, similar to the one reported in [32] for the design of the single-ended counterparts. However, the balanced (symmetric) topologies considered force us to substantially modify the two-step ASM algorithm reported in [32]. The details of such algorithm are the essential part of this paper. The paper is organized as follows. The topology and general circuit schematic of the considered balanced filters, including the schematics for the differential and common modes, are presented in Section II. Section III is devoted to give the details of the first ASM algorithm, providing the optimum filter schematic. A succinct review of the general formulation of ASM, necessary for coherence and completeness, is also included in this section. The next section (Section IV) is focused on the second ASM, where the details to generate the filter layout are provided. Sections III and IV include a conducting case example of an order-5 balanced filter, for better understanding of the proposed two-step ASM algorithm. Nevertheless, an additional synthesis example (an order-7 filter) is reported in Section V, in order to demonstrate the potential and versatility of the approach. A comparative analysis of the proposed filters, in the context of other solutions for balanced filters reported in the literature, is presented in Section VI. Section VII is devoted to discuss the bandwidth limitations of the reported filters. Finally, the main conclusions are highlighted in Section VIII. II. TOPOLOGY AND CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC The proposed balanced wideband bandpass filters are implemented by combining semi-lumped and distributed elements [Fig. 1(a)]. The semi-lumped elements are transverse multisection mirrored SIRs, described by means of a combination of capacitances and inductances, as indicated in Fig. 1(b). The distributed elements are quarter-wavelength differential transmission lines acting as admittance inverters. The circuit schematic of these filters is depicted in Fig. 1(b). The symmetry plane is an electric wall for the differential mode. Hence, the capacitances do not play an active role for that mode since they are grounded. Thus, the equivalent
3897
Fig. 1. Topology (order-5) of the considered (a) balanced wideband bandpass filters, (b) circuit schematic, and circuit schematic for the (c) differential and (d) common modes.
circuit schematic for the differential mode is the one depicted in Fig. 1(c). Conversely, the symmetry plane for the common mode is a magnetic wall (open circuit), and the equivalent circuit schematic is the one depicted in Fig. 1(d). The resonators provide transmission zeros that are useful for the suppression of the common mode in the region of interest (differential filter passband). According to the schematics of Fig. 1(c) and (d), the position of the common-mode transmission zeros does not affect the differential-mode response. Similarly, the resonators provide transmission zeros for both the differential and common modes. By allocating these transmission zeros above the differential-mode passband, frequency selectivity and stopband rejection for the differential mode can be enhanced. III. DETERMINATION OF THE OPTIMUM FILTER SCHEMATIC As indicated in the introduction, wideband bandpass filters based on resonant elements coupled through admittance inverters (in practice, quarter-wavelength transmission line sections), designed by means of the classical formulas [33] from the lowpass filter prototype, are subjected to a fundamental limitation related to the narrowband functionality of the real inverters: bandwidth reduction (as compared with the nominal value). It is obvious that by overdimensioning the bandwidth, such inherent bandwidth degradation can be compensated. However, the in-band return loss level (or ripple) is also modified as a consequence of the limited functionality of the inverters. Thus, a systematic procedure to guarantee that the required filter specifications (central frequency , fractional bandwidth (FBW), and ripple ) can be satisfied is needed.
3898
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Such a procedure was reported in [32], where it was successfully applied to the automated design of wideband single-ended filters. In this paper, the method is adapted for its application to the unattended design of common-mode suppressed balanced wideband bandpass filters of the type depicted in Fig. 1. The main hypothesis of the method is that there exists a set of filter specifications ( , FWB, and ), different than the target, that provide a filter response (after application of the synthesis formulas and replacement of the inverters with quarter wavelength transmission lines) satisfying the target specifications. If these specifications (different than the target) are known, the resulting filter schematic (composed of lumped elements, i.e., the resonators, plus distributed elements, namely, the quarter-wavelength transmission lines) is the one that must be synthesized by the considered layout. Thus, filter design is a two-step process, where first the filter schematic providing the required specifications (optimum filter schematic) is determined, and then the layout is generated. For the two design steps, an ASM algorithm is developed. The first one is detailed in this section, whereas the second one is left for Section IV. Nevertheless, the general formulation of ASM is first reported for completeness and for better comprehension of the reported ASM algorithms. A. General Formulation of ASM Space mapping (SM) [21]–[24] uses two simulation spaces: i) the optimization space , where the variables are linked to a coarse model, which is simple and computationally efficient, although not accurate, and ii) the validation space , where the variables are linked to a fine model, typically more complex and CPU intensive, but significantly more precise. In each space, a vector containing the different model parameters can be defined. Such vectors are denoted as and for the fine and coarse model spaces, respectively, and their corresponding responses are and . In a typical SM optimization algorithm involving a planar microwave circuit described by a lumped element model, the variables of the optimization space are the set of lumped elements, and the response in this space is inferred from the circuit simulation of the lumped element model. The variables of the validation space are the set of dimensions that define the circuit layout (the substrate parameters are usually fixed and hence they are not optimization variables), and the response in this space is obtained from the electromagnetic simulation of the layout. In this paper, we consider the so-called ASM [22], where the goal is to find a solution of the following system of nonlinear equations where (1) and is the coarse model solution that gives the target response, , and is a parameter transformation mapping the fine model parameter space to the coarse model parameter space. In reference to the two spaces considered above, provides the coarse model parameters from the fine model parameters typically by means of a parameter extraction procedure [34], [35].
Let us assume that is the th approximation to the solution in the validation space, and the error function cor. The next vector of the iterative process responding to is obtained by a quasi-Newton iteration according to (2) where
is given by (3)
is an approach to the Jacobian matrix, which is updated and according to the Broyden formula [22] (4) is obtained by evaluating (1), and the super-index In (4), stands for transpose. B. ASM Applied to the Synthesis of the Optimum Filter Schematic The differential-mode response of the proposed filters is described by a circuit schematic consisting of shunt resonators coupled through admittance inverters [Fig. 1(c)]. The circuit is identical to the one reported in [32], in reference to the single-ended balanced filters of that work. Thus, a similar ASM approach to the one reported in [32] to determine the optimum filter schematic has been developed. Note that the capacitances [Fig. 1(d)] do not have any influence on the differential-mode response. Indeed, the first ASM applies only to the schematic corresponding to the differential mode. Thus, the capacitances are independently determined in order to set the common-mode transmission zeros to the required values, and thus achieve an efficient common-mode suppression in the region of interest (differential-mode pass band). Nevertheless, the second ASM involves the whole filter cell, hence including the patches corresponding to the capacitances . There is, however, an important difference between the filter schematic (differential-mode) of this work, and the one considered in [32] for the single-ended counterparts. In [32], the admittance of the inverters (quarter wavelength transmission line sections) were forced to be identical (0.02 S), resulting in different resonators from stage to stage. In this paper, we have considered identical resonators and different admittances of the inverters [note that this is the case of the topology shown in Fig. 1(a)]. The reason is that by considering identical resonators, the synthesis of the layout is simpler since it is guaranteed that the distance between the pair of lines is uniform along the whole filter. Otherwise, if we deal with different resonators, the inductances may be different, resulting in different lengths if the widths are considered identical, as is the case (see Section IV-A). Note that these widths are identical in order to reduce the number of geometrical parameters in the second ASM. Hence, different length means that the distance between the bi-section plane and the lines is not uniform unless meanders are used, which is not considered to be the optimum solution. Considering that the filter order is set to a certain value that suffices to achieve the required filter selectivity, the filter specifications (differential-mode) are the central frequency
SANS et al.: AUTOMATED DESIGN OF COMMON-MODE SUPPRESSED BALANCED WIDEBAND BANDPASS FILTERS BY MEANS OF ASM
3899
, the fractional bandwidth (FBW), and the in-band ripple level (or minimum return loss level). The transmission zero frequencies provided by the resonators are set to , since this provides spurious suppression, and good filter selectivity above the upper band edge [32]. From the well-known impedance and frequency transformations from the lowpass filter prototype [33], and assuming a Chebyshev response, the reactive elements of the shunt resonators ( , , and ), identical for all stages for the explained reasons, can be easily inferred. The three conditions to unequivocally determine , , and are i) the filter central frequency, given by (5) and ii) the transmission zero frequency (6) and iii) the susceptance slope at
Fig. 2. Differential-mode quasi-Chebyshev response of the filter that results by using the element values indicated in the text and ideal admittance inverters with the indicated admittances, compared with the ideal Chebyshev (target) response and the response of the optimum filter schematic. The response of the optimum filter schematic to the common mode is also included.
(7) ChebyConsidering that the target is an order-5 shev response with 2.4 GHz, FBW = 40% (corresponding to a 43.91% 3-dB fractional bandwidth) and 0.2 dB, and setting the susceptance slope to 0.067 S, the element values of the shunt resonators are found to be 0.4401 nH, 2.4983 pF, and 1.3202 nH, and the admittance of the inverters 0.0200 S, 0.0200 S, and 0.0157 S. This susceptance slope value has been chosen in order to obtain an admittance value of 0.02 S for the inverters of the extremes of the device. It is worth to mention that for Chebyshev bandpass filters the fractional bandwidth is given by the ripple level and is hence smaller than the 3-dB fractional bandwidth. However, in this paper we will deal with the 3-dB fractional bandwidth since the ripple level is not constant in the optimization process (to be described). From now on, this 3-dB fractional bandwidth is designated as FBW, rather than FBW (as usual), for simplicity, and to avoid an excess of subscripts in the formulation. The quasi-Chebyshev filter response (i.e., the one inferred from the schematic of Fig. 1(c), but with ideal admittance inverters), depicted in Fig. 2, is similar to the ideal (target) Chebyshev response in the pass band region, and it progressively deviates from it as frequency approaches , as expected. The discrepancies are due to the fact that the shunt resonator is actually a combination of a grounded series resonator (providing the transmission zero) and a grounded inductor. The quasi-Chebyshev response satisfies the specifications to a rough approximation. Hence, the target is considered to be the ideal Chebyshev response (except for the transmission zero frequency), also included in the figure. If the ideal admittance inverters are replaced with quarter wavelength transmission lines, the response is further modified. Thus, our aim is to find the filter schematic for the differential-mode [Fig. 1(c)] able to satisfy the specifications. To this end, an ASM algorithm, similar to the one reported in [32], that carries out the optimization at the schematic level has been developed.
As mentioned before, the key point in the development of this first iterative ASM algorithm is to assume that there is a set of filter specifications, different from the target, that leads to a filter schematic (inferred by substituting the ideal admittance inverters with quarter wavelength transmission lines), whose response satisfies the target specifications. In brief, the optimization (coarse model) space is constituted by the set of specifications, , FBW, , being its response the ideal Chebyshev response(target response) depicted in Fig. 2. The validation space is constituted by the same variables, but their response is inferred from the schematic of Fig. 1(c), with element values calculated as specified above, and quarter-wavelength transmission lines at , where is the considered value of this element in the validation space (not necessarily the target filter central frequency). The variables of each space are differentiated by a subscript. Thus, the corresponding vectors in the coarse and fine models are written as FBW , and FBW , respectively. The coarse model solution (target specifications) is expressed as FBW . The transmission zero frequency, set to , as indicated before, is not a variable in the optimization process. As it was done in [32], the first vector in the validation space is set to . From , the response of the fine model space is obtained (using the schematic with quarter wavelength transmission lines), and from it, we directly extract the parameters of the coarse model by direct inspection of that response, i.e., . Applying (1), we can thus obtain the first error function. The Jacobian matrix is initiated by slightly perturbing the parameters of the fine model, , FBW , and , and inferring the effects of such perturbations on the coarse model parameters, , FBW , and . Thus, the first Jacobian matrix is given by (8)
3900
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
capacitances need to be determined. As mentioned before, such capacitances are determined by the position of the transmission zeros for the common mode according to (10)
Fig. 3. Evolution of the error function of the first ASM algorithm for the considered example.
Once the first Jacobian matrix is obtained, the process is iterfrom (2), using (3), and so on] until converated [obtaining gence is obtained. At each iteration, the elements of the coarse space vector are compared with the target (filter specifications), , and the error function is obtained according to
(9) The flow diagram of this first ASM algorithm, able to provide the optimum filter schematic, can be found in [32], and, hence, it is not reproduced here. Applying the developed ASM algorithm to the considered example FBW 2.4 GHz 43.91 0.2 , we have found that the error function rapidly decreases, with the error being smaller than 0.02% after 3 iterations. The evolution of the error function is depicted in Fig. 3. The fine model parameters for the last iteration are FBW 2.4703 GHz 65.3 0.2786 dB , and FBW the coarse model parameters are 2.400 GHz 43.91 0.199987 dB . Note that is appreciably different than . The optimum filter schematic is the one that gives the last fine model response (which provides an error below a predefined value). The elements of the shunt resonators for this optimum filter schematic are 0.5935 nH, 1.7486 pF, and 1.7804 nH, whereas the admittances of the inverters (quarter-wavelength transmission line sections at 2.4703 GHz are 0.02 S, 0.0211 S, 0.0168 S. The response of the optimum schematic is compared with the target response in Fig. 2. The agreement in terms of central frequency, bandwidth, and in-band ripple is very good, as expected on account of the small error function that has been obtained after 3 iterations. However, the position of the reflection zero frequencies are different in both responses, since we have not considered these frequency positions as goals in the optimization process. Nevertheless, the synthesized circuit fulfills the target specifications for the differential mode. To complete the circuit schematic of Fig. 1(b), valid for both modes, the
where the superindex indicates that these transmission zeros correspond to the common mode, and the subindex indicates the filter stage. Note that there is no reason, a priori, to set the transmission zeros to the same value. Nevertheless, for the considered example, all the transmission zeros have been set to 2.717 GHz (i.e., 1.1 ), and, hence, 1.9268 pF (the resulting response for the common mode is also depicted in Fig. 2). Thus, the schematic resulting from this first ASM process, including , is the optimum filter schematic used as the starting point in the ASM algorithm developed to obtain the filter layout, to be described in the next section. IV. LAYOUT SYNTHESIS The layout synthesis involves the determination of i) the dimensions of the resonant elements (multi-section mirrored SIRs), ii) the width of the transmission line sections (inverters), and iii) their lengths. Hence, three specific ASM subprocesses are developed for the automated synthesis of the filter layout, following a scheme similar to that reported in [32] for the synthesis of single-ended filters. However, there are important differences, mainly relative to the synthesis of the resonant elements, since these elements are made of multisection SIRs. Nevertheless, the resonant elements are all identical (for the reasons explained before), and, hence, the ASM devoted to the determination of resonator dimensions is applied only once. Let us now discuss in detail these three independent ASM subprocesses. A. Resonator Synthesis In the ASM process devoted to the resonator synthesis, the variables in the optimization space are the resonator elements, i.e., , and the coarse model response is obtained through circuit simulation. The validation space is constituted by a set of four geometrical variables. The other geometrical variables necessary to completely define the resonator layout are set to fixed values and are not variables of the optimization process. By this means, we deal with the same number of variables in both spaces, necessary for the inversion of the Jacobian matrix. Specifically, the variables in the validation space are the lengths of the narrow (inductive) and wide (capacitive) sections of the multisection mirrored SIRs, i.e., . The fine model response is obtained through electromagnetic simulation of the layout, inferred from the fine model variables plus the fixed dimensions, namely the widths of the narrow and wide sections of the mirrored SIRs, and substrate parameters. The Agilent Momentum commercial software has been used to obtain the electromagnetic response of the structures, and the considered substrate parameters are those of the Rogers RO3010 with thickness 635 m and dielectric constant . Concerning the fixed dimensions, the values are set to 0.2 mm, and there are two bounded values (i.e., a square shaped
SANS et al.: AUTOMATED DESIGN OF COMMON-MODE SUPPRESSED BALANCED WIDEBAND BANDPASS FILTERS BY MEANS OF ASM
geometry for the external patch capacitors is chosen), and 4 mm, where is the guided wavelength at the central frequency of the optimum filter schematic. The value of 0.2 mm for the narrow inductive strips is slightly above the critical dimensions that are realizable with the available technology (LPKF HF100 milling machine). Concerning the square geometry of the external capacitive patches, with this shape factor the patches are described by a lumped capacitance to a very good approximation. Finally, the width of the central patches has been chosen with the above criterion in order to avoid overlapping between adjacent patches. In order to initiate the ASM algorithm it is necessary to obtain an initial layout for the multisection SIR. This is obtained from the following approximate formulas [36], [37]: (11a) (11b) (11c) (11d) where and are the phase velocities of the high- and lowimpedance transmission lines sections, respectively, and and the corresponding characteristic impedances. ) is determined, the four Once the initial layout (i.e., circuit elements can be extracted from the electromagnetic response using (5)–(7) and (10). The specific procedure is as follows: the four-port S-parameters (considering 50 ports) of the multisection SIR is obtained by means of the Agilent Momentum electromagnetic solver. From these results, the S-parameters corresponding to the differential and common mode are inferred from well-known formulas [38]. Then, from , , and [expressions (5)–(7)] of the differential-mode response, the element values , , and are extracted, whereas is determined from the transmission zero (expression 10) corresponding to the common-mode response. This provides , and using (1), the first error function can be inferred. To iterate the process using (2), with derived from (3), a first approximation of the Jacobian matrix is needed. Following a similar approach to the one explained in Section III-B, we have slightly perturbed the lengths , and we have obtained the values of resulting after each perturbation from parameter extraction. This provides the first order-4 Jacobian matrix. By means of this procedure, the layouts of the multisection mirrored SIRs are determined. B. Determination of the Line Width The widths of the quarter-wavelength (at ) transmission lines are determined through the one-variable ASM procedure explained in [32], where the fine model variable is the linewidth , whereas the variable of the coarse model is the characteristic impedance (the details of this simple ASM procedure are given in [32]). However, it has to be taken into account that this ASM must be repeated as many times as different admittance inverters are present in the filter. It is also important to bear in mind that
3901
the pair of differential lines are widely separated so that the differential- and common-mode impedances take the same value, i.e., identical to that of the isolated line. C. Optimization of the Line Length (Filter Cell Synthesis) To determine the length of the inverters, the procedure is to consider the whole filter cell, consisting of the resonator cascaded in between the inverter halves (not necessarily of the same width, or admittance). As it was pointed out in [32], optimization of the whole filter cell is necessary since the resonators may introduce some (although small) phase shift. In [32], the whole filter cell was forced to exhibit a phase shift of 90 at the central frequency of the optimum schematic. However, the fact that the inverters at both sides of the resonator have different admittance means that the phase of is no longer 90 at the central frequency of the optimum schematic. Nevertheless, the phase shift of the cell can be easily inferred from circuit simulation, and the resulting value is the goal of this third ASM subprocess. Thus, the ASM optimization consists of varying the length of the lines cascaded to the resonator until the required phase per filter cell is achieved (the other geometrical parameters of the cell are kept unaltered). The phase is directly inferred from the frequency response of the cell obtained from electromagnetic simulation at each iteration step. Once each filter cell is synthesized, the cells are cascaded, and no further optimization is required. The flow diagram of the complete ASM process able to automatically provide the layout from the optimum filter schematic, consisting of the three independent quasi-Newton iterative algorithms described, is very similar to the one presented in [32], and, hence, it is not reproduced here. Using the mirrored SIR element values and inverter admittances corresponding to the optimum filter schematic of the example reported in Section III, we have applied the developed ASM algorithm to automatically generate the filter layout (depicted in Fig. 4). Resonator dimensions are 0.9075 mm, 2.4136 mm, 2.5262 mm and 1.0986 mm, and the lengths of the filter cells give admittance inverter lengths of 11.4 mm for all the inverters (the slight variations take place at the third decimal) and the widths are 0.6015 mm, 0.6704 mm, and 0.4087 mm [see Fig. 4(a)] for inverters , , and , respectively. The electromagnetic simulations (excluding losses) of the differential and common modes of the synthesized filter are compared with the response of the optimum filter schematic (also for the differential and common modes) in Fig. 4(b) and (c). The agreement between the lossless electromagnetic simulations and the responses of the optimum filter schematic (where losses are excluded) is very good, pointing out the validity of the proposed design method. The filter has been fabricated by means of the LPKF H100 drilling machine [see Fig. 5(a)], and the measured frequency responses [Fig. 5(b) and (c)] have been obtained by means of an Agilent N5211A PNA microwave network analyzer. The measured responses are in reasonable agreement with the lossy electromagnetic simulations and reveal that filter specifications are satisfied to a good approximation. Notice that effects such as
3902
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 4. Layout of the (a) synthesized order-5 filter, (b) differential-mode response, and (c) common-mode response. In (b) and (c), the lossless electromagnetic simulations of the synthesized layout are compared to the circuit simulations of the optimum filter schematic. The relevant dimensions in (a) are 63 mm and 15 mm.
inaccuracies in the dielectric constant provided by the substrate supplier, fabrication related tolerances, substrate anisotropy and foil roughness, among others, may be the cause of the slight discrepancies between the measured responses and the lossy electromagnetic simulations. Nevertheless, the objective of synthesizing the layout of the considered differential-mode bandpass filters subjected to given specifications, following a completely unattended scheme, has been achieved. V. SYNTHESIS OF A SEVENTH-ORDER FILTER Let us now consider the synthesis of a seventh-order filter with significantly wider (as compared with the previous case
Fig. 5. (a) Photograph of the fabricated order-5 filter, (b) differential-mode response, and (c) common-mode response. In (b) and (c), the measured responses are compared to the lossy electromagnetic simulations of the synthesized layout.
example) differential-mode bandwidth. In this case, the specifications (differential mode) are 3 GHz, FBW 60 (corresponding to 63.43% 3-dB fractional bandwidth) and 0.15 dB. Since the differential-mode bandwidth is wide, a single common-mode transmission zero does not suffice to completely reject this mode over the differential filter passband. Thus, in this case, several transmission zeros for the common mode are generated. Such transmission zeros must be (roughly) uniformly distributed along the differential-mode passband for an efficient common-mode rejection over that band. The fact that several
SANS et al.: AUTOMATED DESIGN OF COMMON-MODE SUPPRESSED BALANCED WIDEBAND BANDPASS FILTERS BY MEANS OF ASM
TABLE I FREQUENCIES AND CAPACITANCES OF THE COMMON-MODE TRANSMISSION ZEROS OF THE SYNTHESIZED ORDER-7 DIFFERENTIAL FILTER
common-mode transmission zeros are considered does not affect the first ASM algorithm. However, as many different capacitances as transmission zeros must be calculated by means of expression (10) to completely determine the elements of the optimum filter schematic. Since the capacitances determine the area of the central patches, it follows that the second ASM, for the determination of the layout, must be slightly modified (i.e., the mirrored SIRs are not identical in this case). However, the procedure is very simple (to be described next). First of all, the layout of the mirrored SIR providing the lower common-mode transmission zero is determined according to the procedure explained in Section IV-A. For the determination of the layout of the other resonant elements, we apply the ASM subprocess described in Section IV-A, but considering as optimization variables of the validation space the widths for the inner sections (the ones between the pair of transmission lines), and the lengths for the outer sections. By this means, the distance between the pair of lines is kept unaltered. Notice that since the element values of the resonators are all identical (except ), we do not expect significant variations in the widths from cell to cell, except for the central patch. Indeed, for the optimization of resonator dimensions (layout determination) by applying the ASM, we consider as layout of the first iteration the one corresponding to the synthesis of the first resonator. It has been found that this provides faster convergence. The other two ASM sub-processes (described in Section IV-B and IV-C) are identical. Application of the first ASM algorithm (optimum filter schematic) has provided the following element and admittance values: 0.8836 nH, 2.6507 nH, 0.7114 pF, and 0.02 S, 0.0199 S, 0.0154 S, 0.0148 S with 3.1739 GHz. Convergence has been achieved after 5 iterations, with an error function as small as 0.021%. On the other hand, by considering seven common-mode transmission zeros distributed in order to cover the bandwidth, the corresponding patch capacitances take the values given in Table I. Application of the second ASM algorithm, considering the substrate used for the seventh-order filter (Rogers RO3010 with thickness 635 m and dielectric constant ), provides the filter geometry indicated in Table II (where all dimensions are given in mm). Note that the lengths and widths of the inverters ( and ) are those corresponding to the inverter to the right of the resonant element (the inverter to the left of the first resonator is identical to the last one). Moreover, the following dimensions in the mirrored SIRs are all identical: 3.58 mm, 1.2 mm and 2.92 mm. On the other hand, . Note that the optimization variables are those of Table II.
3903
TABLE II GEOMETRY PARAMETERS OF THE SYNTHESIZED ORDER-7 DIFFERENTIAL FILTER
Fig. 6 shows the layout of the designed filter and the lossless electromagnetic simulation, compared to the optimum filter schematic and target responses (differential and common-modes). The fabricated differential-mode filter is depicted in Fig. 7, together with the measured response and the lossy electromagnetic simulation. Very good agreement between the different responses can be observed, and it is found that the filter responses satisfy the considered specifications, including an efficient common-mode rejection over the differential filter passband, with a common-mode rejection ratio better than CMRR 30 dB in the whole the differential filter passband. Note that the agreement between the lossless electromagnetic simulation and the response of the optimum filter schematic for both the differential and common modes is excellent in this order-7 filter (Fig. 6). For the order-5 filter reported before, there is also very good agreement between these responses for the differential mode, but the agreement is not so good for the common-mode (Fig. 4). The reason is that parameter extraction uses three conditions for the differential mode [expressions (5)–(7)], whereas only one for the common mode (expression (10)). However, for the seventh-order filter, seven different common-mode transmission zeros are set in order to efficiently cover the (wider) differential filter passband, i.e., much more conditions as compared to the fifth-order filter (where only one common-mode transmission zero was considered). The synthesis method guarantees that the common-mode transmission zeros are identical for the lossless electromagnetic simulation and for the response of the optimum schematic, and, hence, one expects a very good agreement if the number of transmission zero is high (as it actually occurs with the order-7 filter). Nevertheless, the aim of the paper is to satisfy the specifications for the differential mode and reject the common mode over the differential filter passband, and this objective has been reached in both examples. VI. COMPARISON TO OTHER APPROACHES In order to appreciate the competitiveness, in terms of performance and dimensions, of the proposed filters, a comparison to other wideband differential bandpass filters (with comparable FBW) is summarized in Table III. In this table, the commonmode rejection ratio (CMRR) is the ratio between for the common mode and the differential mode at , expressed in decibels, and are the lower and upper differentialmode cutoff frequencies, respectively, and and are the 3-dB common-mode cutoff frequencies. The filters reported in
3904
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 6. (a) Layout of the synthesized order-7 balanced filter, and lossless electromagnetic simulation compared to the response of the optimum filter schematic and target response for the (b) differential and (c) common mode.
this work exhibit a common-mode rejection comparable to that of the filters reported in [4], [10], [12], [16], [40], [42], and [43]. However, the rejection level at for the differential mode is larger in our filters, with the exception of the filter of [16], which is indeed the same order-5 filter as the one reported here (same specifications) although the layout was not inferred automatically in [16]. Thus, Table III reveals that our filters are competitive in terms of CMRR and out-of-band rejection level (specifically at ) for the differential mode. Despite the fact that the CMRR at is a figure of merit, it is interesting to compare the filters proposed in this work with other filters with regard to the worst CMRR within the differential filter passband. This makes sense if the differential-mode passbands are comparable. Thus, the comparison is made between the filters reported
Fig. 7. (a) Photograph of the fabricated order-7 filter and measured response compared to the lossy electromagnetic simulation for the (b) differential and (c) common mode.
in [10] and [12] and the filter of Fig. 5 (with comparable fractional bandwidth). The worst CMRR in the whole differential filter passband is 18 and 63 dB for the filters of [10] and [12], respectively. In our approach, the measurement shows a CMRR better than 35 dB in the differential filter passband. Moreover, the filter of Fig. 5 has better differential out-of-band rejection (58 dB at ), as compared with the filters of references [10] and [12]. The filters reported in [1] and [39], with comparable fractional bandwidth to the filter of Fig. 7, have a CMRR in the whole differential passband better than 22 and 14.5 dB, respectively. In our approach, the measurement shows a CMRR better
SANS et al.: AUTOMATED DESIGN OF COMMON-MODE SUPPRESSED BALANCED WIDEBAND BANDPASS FILTERS BY MEANS OF ASM
3905
TABLE III COMPARISON OF VARIOUS DIFFERENTIAL WIDEBAND BANDPASS FILTERS
Fig. 8. Comparison between the order-7 Chebyshev response with fractional bandwidth, ripple level, and central frequency indicated in the text, and the response of the resulting optimum schematic, after applying the first ASM algorithm.
than 30 dB in the differential filter passband. Moreover, the filter of Fig. 7 has better differential out-of-band rejection (63 dB at ) as compared with the filters of references [1] and [39]. Concerning size, the filters reported in references [10], [14], [39], [41], [44] are smaller than our filters, but at the expense of obtaining a lower CMRR and rejection level for the differential mode (at ). From the fabrication point of view, the filters reported here are very simple since only two metal levels are needed and vias are not present. Additionally, the considered filter topologies, consisting of multi-section mirrored SIRs coupled through quarter wavelength differential lines, are accurately described by a mixed distributed-lumped model (schematic) over a wide frequency band, and this is very important for design purposes, as has been demonstrated in this paper. VII. DISCUSSION ON BANDWIDTH LIMITATIONS The synthesis technique presented in Sections III and IV is able to provide the filter layout able to satisfy the specifications, as demonstrated by the guide example (order-5 differential filter) and by the example reported in Section V, corresponding to a seventh-order balanced filter. The bandwidth for the differential mode in this second example is quite wide (i.e., the filter exhibits a 3-dB fractional bandwidth of 63.43%), and an efficient rejection of the common mode over that band has been achieved. Thus, it is clear that wideband balanced filters with common-mode suppression are achievable with this approach, and filter design is simple since the determination of the filter layout does not need any external aid during the whole synthesis process. However, it does not mean that any combination of bandwidth and in-band ripple level (or return loss level) for the differential mode can be achieved. Indeed, it has been found that for a bandwidth as wide as FBW 120 , ripple level of 0.45 dB (corresponding to a very reasonable 10-dB in-band return loss level), central frequency 3 GHz, and order , the first ASM converges. The response of the optimum filter schematic (differential mode), compared with the target Chebyshev response, is depicted in Fig. 8. Note that
the return loss level of the optimum schematic is better than 10 dB, and the central frequency and bandwidth are very close to the target values. Typically, the frequency selectivity of the optimum schematic is somehow better than the one of the Chebyshev response at the upper transition band (due to the transmission zero), but it is worst at the lower transition band (see also Fig. 2). This occurs because the selectivity is not a variable in the optimization process, but, certainly, the discrepancies at the lower band edge increase as bandwidths widens. It may be accepted that a response like the one of the optimum filter schematic of Fig. 8 is reasonable. However, it has been found that the second ASM algorithm does not converge, at least by considering the same substrate used in the two reported examples. The reason is that the element values of the resonators (capacitances) are so small that the resulting impedance contrast of the mirrored SIRs (by considering square shaped capacitors) is small, and the model is not valid (note that the impedance contrast in the example of Fig. 7 is lower than the one of Fig. 5). Moreover, it should be also taken into account that for wide bandwidths, the lumped element approximation of the patch capacitors and narrow inductive strips is not necessarily valid over the whole differential band, and more complex models are required for an accurate description of the structures [45]. Thus, with the present approach, bandwidth is limited by layout generation, rather than by the schematic. Nevertheless, significant bandwidths have been demonstrated in the reported examples. Work is in progress in order to modify the second ASM algorithm, particularly the square shaped geometry of the external capacitors, and try to design wider differential-mode bandpass filters with common-mode suppression. VIII. CONCLUSION In conclusion, a design tool for the unattended synthesis of common-mode suppressed differential-mode bandpass filters based on multisection mirrored SIRs coupled through admittance inverters has been proposed. The tool consists of a two-step ASM algorithm, where the filter schematic satisfying the specifications is first determined, and then the layout of
3906
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
the filter is automatically generated. It has been demonstrated that for moderate differential-mode bandwidths, a single common-mode transmission zero suffices to achieve efficient common-mode suppression over the differential filter pass band. However, for wideband balanced bandpass filters implemented by this approach, several common-mode transmission zeros distributed along the differential-mode pass band are necessary. Two case examples, namely, an order-5 balanced filter with a single common-mode transmission zero, and a seventh-order filter with several common-mode transmission zeros, have been reported. In both cases, the two-step ASM algorithm has provided the filter layouts after few iterative steps, and the synthesized filter layouts provide the filter specifications to a good approximation. The measured responses of the fabricated filters are also in good agreement with the electromagnetic simulations and with the circuit simulations of the optimum schematics, and the measured common-mode rejection ratios at the central filter frequency are as high as 65 and 50 dB for the order-5 and order-7 balanced filters, respectively. Finally, by comparing the proposed filter with other approaches, it has been found that the combination of size, performance, and easy fabrication (vias are not present and only two metal levels are required) makes the approach very competitive. This fact is worth highlighting since the reported filters can be automatically synthesized by means of a completely unattended ASM process.
REFERENCES [1] T. B. Lim and L. Zhu, “A differential-mode wideband bandpass filter on microstrip line for UWB applications,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 19, pp. 632–634, Oct. 2009. [2] T. B. Lim and L. Zhu, “Differential-mode ultra-wideband bandpass filter on microstrip line,” Electron. Lett., vol. 45, no. 22, pp. 1124–1125, Oct. 2009. [3] X. H. Wang, Q. Xue, and W. W. Choi, “A novel ultra-wideband differential filter based on double-sided parallel-strip line,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 20, no. 8, pp. 471–473, Aug. 2010. [4] T. B. Li and L. Zhu, “Highly selective differential-mode wideband bandpass filter for UWB application,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 21, no. 3, pp. 133–135, Mar. 2011. [5] A. M. Abbosh, “Ultrawideband balanced bandpass filter,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 21, pp. 480–482, Sep. 2011. [6] H. T. Zhu, W. J. Feng, W. Q. Che, and Q. Xue, “Ultra-wideband differential bandpass filter based on transversal signal-interference concept,” Electron. Lett., vol. 47, no. 18, pp. 1033–1035, Sep. 2011. [7] S. Shi, W.-W. Choi, W. Che, K.-W. Tam, and Q. Xue, “Ultra-wideband differential bandpass filter with narrow notched band and improved common-mode suppression by DGS,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 22, no. 4, pp. 185–187, Apr. 2012. [8] C.-H. Lee, C.-I. G. Hsu, and C.-J. Chen, “Band-notched balanced UWB BPF with stepped-impedance slotline multi-mode resonator,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 22, no. 4, pp. 182–184, Apr. 2012. [9] X.-H. Wu and Q.-X. Chu, “Compact differential ultra-wideband bandpass filter with common-mode suppression,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 22, pp. 456–458, Sep. 2012. [10] P. Vélez, J. Naqui, A. Fernández-Prieto, M. Durán-Sindreu, J. Bonache, and J. Martel et al., “Differential bandpass filter with common mode suppression based on open split ring resonators and open complementary split ring resonators,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 23, no. 1, pp. 22–24, Jan. 2013.
[11] X.-H. Wang, H. Zhang, and B.-Z. Wang, “A novel ultra-wideband differential filter based on microstrip line structures,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 23, pp. 128–130, March 2013. [12] P. Vélez, J. Naqui, M. Durán-Sindreu, J. Bonache, A. F. Prieto, and J. Martel et al., “Differential bandpass filters with common-mode suppression based on stepped impedance resonators (SIRs),” presented at the IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp., Seattle, WA, USA, Jun. 2013. [13] J. Shi, C. Shao, J.-X. Chen, Q.-Y. Lu, Y. Peng, and Z.-H. Bao, “Compact low-loss wideband differential bandpass filter with high commonmode suppression,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 23, no. 9, pp. 480–482, Sep. 2013. [14] A. K. Horestani, M. Durán-Sindreu, J. Naqui, C. Fumeaux, and F. Martín, “S-shaped complementary split ring resonators and application to compact differential bandpass filters with common-mode suppression,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 24, no. 3, pp. 150–152, Mar. 2014. [15] X.-H. Wang and H. Zhang, “Novel balanced wideband filters using microstrip coupled lines,” Microw. Opt. Technol. Lett., vol. 56, pp. 1139–1141, May 2014. [16] P. Velez, J. Selga, M. Sans, J. Bonache, and F. Martin, “Design of differential-mode wideband bandpass filters with wide stop band and common-mode suppression by means of multisection mirrored stepped impedance resonators (SIRs),” presented at the IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp., Phoenix, AZ, USA, May 2015. [17] J. Naqui, A. Fernández-Prieto, M. Durán-Sindreu, F. Mesa, J. Martel, and F. Medina et al., “Common mode suppression in microstrip differential lines by means of complementary split ring resonators: Theory and applications,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 60, pp. 3023–3034, Oct. 2012. [18] A. Fernandez-Prieto, J. Martel-Villagrán, F. Medina, F. Mesa, S. Qian, and J.-S. Hong et al., “Dual-band differential filter using broadband common-mode rejection artificial transmission line,” Progr. Electromagn. Res. (PIER), vol. 139, pp. 779–797, 2013. [19] J. Bonache, I. Gil, J. García-García, and F. Martín, “Compact microstrip band-pass filters based on semi-lumped resonators,” IET Microw. Antennas Propag., vol. 1, pp. 932–936, Aug. 2007. [20] M. Makimoto and S. Yamashita, “Compact bandpass filters using stepped impedance resonators,” Proc. IEEE, vol. 67, no. 1, pp. 16–19, Jan. 1979. [21] J. W. Bandler, R. M. Biernacki, S. H. Chen, P. A. Grobelny, and R. H. Hemmers, “Space mapping technique for electromagnetic optimization,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 42, pp. 2536–2544, Dec. 1994. [22] J. W. Bandler, R. M. Biernacki, S. H. Chen, R. H. Hemmers, and K. Madsen, “Electromagnetic optimization exploiting aggressive space mapping,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 43, pp. 2874–2882, Dec. 1995. [23] S. Koziel, Q. S. Cheng, and J. W. Bandler, “Space mapping,” IEEE Microw. Mag., vol. 9, pp. 105–122, Dec. 2008. [24] S. Koziel, L. Leifsson, and S. Ogurtsov, “Space mapping for electromagnetic-simulation-driven design optimization,” in Surrogate-Based Modeling and Optimization. New York, NY, USA: Springer, 2013, pp. 1–25. [25] S. Koziel and L. Leifsson, “Response correction techniques for surrogate-based design optimization of microwave structures,” Int. J. RF Microw. Comput.-Aided Eng., vol. 22, no. 2, pp. 211–223, Mar. 2012. [26] S. Koziel, L. Leifsson, and S. Ogurtsov, “Reliable EM-driven microwave design optimization using manifold mapping and adjoint sensitivity,” Microw. Opt. Technol. Lett., vol. 55, no. 4, pp. 809–813, April 2013. [27] S. Koziel and J. W. Bandler, “Rapid yield estimation and optimization of microwave structures exploiting feature-based statistical analysis,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 63, no. 1, pp. 107–114, Jan. 2015. [28] A. Khalatpour, R. K. Amineh, Q. S. Cheng, M. H. Bakr, N. K. Nikolova, and J. W. Bandler, “Accelerating input space mapping optimization with adjoint sensitivities,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 21, no. 6, pp. 280–282, Jun. 2011. [29] L. J. Rogla, J. E. Rayas-Sanchez, V. E. Boria, and J. Carbonell, “EMbased space mapping optimization of left-handed coplanar waveguide filters with split ring resonators,” in Proc. IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp., Honolulu, HI, USA, Jun. 3–8, 2007, pp. 111, 114.
SANS et al.: AUTOMATED DESIGN OF COMMON-MODE SUPPRESSED BALANCED WIDEBAND BANDPASS FILTERS BY MEANS OF ASM
3907
[30] J. Selga, A. Rodriguez, V. E. Boria, and F. Martin, “Synthesis of splitrings-based artificial transmission lines through a new two-step, fast converging, robust aggressive space mapping (ASM) algorithm,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 61, no. 6, pp. 2295–2308, Jun. 2013. [31] A. Rodríguez, V. E. Boria, J. Selga, M. Sans, and F. Martín, “Synthesis of open complementary split ring resonators (OCSRRs) through aggressive space mapping (ASM) and application to bandpass filters,” in Proc. 44th Eur. Microw. Conf. (EuMC), Rome, Italy, Oct. 6–9, 2014, pp. 323–326. [32] M. Sans, J. Selga, A. Rodríguez, J. Bonache, V. E. Boria, and F. Martín, “Design of planar wideband bandpass filters from specifications using a two-step aggressive space mapping (ASM) optimization algorithm,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 62, pp. 3341–3350, Dec. 2014. [33] J. S. Hong and M. J. Lancaster, Microstrip Filters for RF/Microwave Applications. New York, NY, USA: Wiley, 2001. [34] J. Bonache, M. Gil, I. Gil, J. Garcia-García, and F. Martín, “On the electrical characteristics of complementary metamaterial resonators,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 16, pp. 543–545, Oct. 2006. [35] F. Aznar, M. Gil, J. Bonache, J. D. Baena, L. Jelinek, and R. Marqués et al., “Characterization of miniaturized metamaterial resonators coupled to planar transmission lines,” J. Appl. Phys., vol. 104, Dec. 2008, paper 114501-1-8. [36] D. M. Pozar, Microwave Engineering. Reading, MA, USA: AddisonWesley, 1990. [37] I. Bahl and P. Barthia, Microwave Solid State Circuit Design. New York, NY, USA: Wiley, 1998. [38] W. R. Eisenstadt, B. Stengel, and B. M. Thompson, Microwave Differential Circuit Desing Using Mixed Mode S-Parameters. Norwood, MA, USA: Artech House, 2006. [39] L. Li, J. Bao, J.-J. Du, and Y.-M. Wang, “Compact differential wideband bandpass filters with wide common-mode suppression,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 24, no. 3, pp. 164–166, March 2014. [40] H. Wang, L.-M. Gao, K.-W. Tam, W. Kang, and W. Wu, “A wideband differential BPF with multiple differential- and common-mode transmission zeros using cross-shaped resonator,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 24, no. 12, pp. 854–856, Oct. 2014. [41] W. Feng, W. Che, and Q. Xue, “High selectivity wideband differential bandpass filter with wideband common mode suppression using marchand balun,” presented at the IEEE Int. Wireless Symp., Xian, China, Mar. 2014. [42] L. Li, J. Bao, J.-J. Du, and Y.-M. Wang, “Differential wideband bandpass filters with enhanced common-mode suppression using internal coupling technique,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 24, no. 5, pp. 300–302, May 2014. [43] J. G. Zhou, Y.-C. Chiang, and W. Che, “Compact wideband balanced bandpass filter with high common-mode suppression based on cascade parallel coupled lines,” IET Microw., Antennas, Propag., vol. 8, no. 8, pp. 564–570, Jun. 2014. [44] W. Feng, W. Che, Y. Ma, and Q. Xue, “Compact wideband differential bandpass filters using half-wavelength ring resonator,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 23, no. 2, pp. 81–83, Feb. 2013. [45] P. Vélez, J. Naqui, A. Fernández-Prieto, J. Bonache, J. Mata-Contr) differential-mode eras, and J. Martel et al., “Ultra-compact (80 ultra-wideband (UWB) bandpass filters with common-mode noise suppression,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 63, no. 4, pp. 1272–1280, Apr. 2015.
at CIMITEC-UAB in the synthesis of microwave devices based on EM optimization techniques.
Marc Sans (S’15) was born in Terrassa, Barcelona, Spain, in 1982. He received the B.S. degree in telecommunications engineering—electronic systems, the M.S. degree in telecommunications engineering, and the M.S. degree in electronics engineering, all from the Universitat Autònoma de Barcelona (UAB), in 2006, 2008, and 2013, respectively. In 2008, he started his professional career as a RF Engineer at Sony-FTVE, developing the RF stage of TV receivers. In 2010, he moved to Mier Comunicaciones S.A. to carry out the design of passive and active devices for VHF–UHF broadcasting units. Since 2014, he has been working towards the Ph.D. degree
Jordi Bonache (S’05–M’07) was born in Barcelona, Spain, in 1976. He received the Physics degree, the Electronics Engineering degree, and Ph.D. degree in electronics engineering, all from the Universitat Autònoma de Barcelona (UAB), Barcelona, Spain, in 1999, 2001, and 2007, respectively. In 2000, he joined the High Energy Physics Institute of Barcelona (IFAE), Spain, where he was involved in the design and implementation of the control and monitoring system of the MAGIC telescope. In 2001, he joined the Department of Electronics Engineering of the Universitat Autònoma de Barcelona, where he is currently Lecturer. In addition, he worked as Executive Manager of CIMITEC, UAB, from
Jordi Selga (S’11–M’14) was born in Barcelona, Spain, in 1982. He received the B.S. degree in telecommunications engineering—electronic systems, the M.S. degree in electronics engineering, and the Ph.D. degree in electronics engineering, all from the Universitat Autònoma de Barcelona (UAB), Barcelona, Spain, in 2006, 2008, and 2013, respectively. Since 2008, he has been a member of CIMITECUAB, a research center on metamaterials supported by TECNIO (Catalan Government). He was holder of a national research fellowship from the Formación de Profesorado Universitario Program of the Education and Science Ministry (Reference AP2008-4707). He is currently working in subjects related to metamaterials, CAD design of microwave devices, EM optimization methods, and automated synthesis of planar microwave components at the UAB.
Paris Vélez (S’10–M’15) was born in Barcelona, Spain, in 1982. He received the Telecommunications Engineering degree, specializing in electronics, and the Electronics Engineering degree from the Universitat Autònoma de Barcelona (UAB), Barcelona, Spain, in 2008 and 2010, respectively, and the Ph.D. degree in electrical engineering from UAB in 2014, with a thesis entitled “Common Mode Suppression Differential Microwave Circuits Based on Metamaterial Concepts and Semilumped Resonators.” During the Ph.D. studies, he was awarded with a predoctoral teaching and research fellowship by the Spanish Government from 2011 to 2014. Currently, his scientific activity is focused on the miniaturization of passive circuits RF/microwave-based metamaterials at CIMITEC-UAB. Dr. Vélez is a reviewer of the IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES among other journals.
Ana Rodríguez (S’10–M’15) was born in Lugo, Spain. She received the Telecommunications Engineering degree from the Universidade de Vigo (UV), Spain, in 2008. As a student, she participated in the Erasmus exchange program, developing the Master’s thesis at the University of Oulu, Finland. At the end of 2008, she joined the Institute of Telecommunications and Multimedia Applications (iTEAM), which is part of the scientific park at the Universitat Politècnica de València (UPV), València, Spain. She received the Master en Tecnología, Sistemas y Redes de Comunicaciones and the Ph.D. degree from UPV in 2010 and 2014, respectively. She currently works at iTEAM-UPV. Her main research interests include CAD design of microwave devices, EM optimization methods, and metamaterials.
3908
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
2006 to 2009 and currently is leading the research in RFID and antennas in CIMITEC. His research interests include active and passive microwave devices, metamaterials, antennas, and RFID.
Vicente E. Boria (S’91–A‘99–SM’02) was born in Valencia, Spain, on May 18, 1970. He received the Ingeniero de Telecomunicación degree (First-Class Hons.) and the Doctor Ingeniero de Telecomunicación degree from the Universidad Politécnica de Valencia, Valencia, Spain, in 1993 and 1997, respectively. In 1993, he joined the Departamento de Comunicaciones, Universidad Politécnica de Valencia, where he has been Full Professor since 2003. In 1995 and 1996, he was holding a Spanish Trainee position with the European Space Research and Technology Centre, European Space Agency (ESTEC-ESA), Noordwijk, The Netherlands, where he was involved in the area of EM analysis and design of passive waveguide devices. He has authored or coauthored ten chapters in technical textbooks, 135 papers in refereed international technical journals, and over 185 papers in international conference proceedings. His current research interests are focused on the analysis and automated design of passive components, left-handed and periodic structures, as well as on the simulation and measurement of power effects in passive waveguide systems. Dr. Boria has been a member of the IEEE Microwave Theory and Techniques Society (IEEE MTT-S) and the IEEE Antennas and Propagation Society (IEEE AP-S) since 1992. He is reviewer of the IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, Proceeding of the IET (Microwaves, Antennas and Propagation) and IET Electronics Letters. Since 2013, he has served as Associate Editor of the IEEE MICROWAVE AND WIRELESS COMPONENTS LETTERS. He is also a member of the Technical Committees of the IEEE-MTT International Microwave Symposium and of the European Microwave Conference.
Ferran Martín (M’04–SM’08–F’12) was born in Barakaldo, Vizcaya, Spain, in 1965. He received the B.S. Degree in physics and the Ph.D. degree from the Universitat Autònoma de Barcelona (UAB), Barcelona, Spain, in 1988 and 1992, respectively. From 1994 up to 2006, he was Associate Professor in electronics at the Departament d’Enginyeria Electrònica (Universitat Autònoma de Barcelona), and since 2007, he has been a Full Professor of electronics. In recent years, he has been involved in different research activities, including modeling and simulation of electron devices for high-frequency applications, millimeter wave, and THz generation systems, and the application of electromagnetic bandgaps to microwave and millimeter-wave circuits. He is now very active in the field of metamaterials and their application to the miniaturization and optimization of microwave circuits and antennas. He is the head of the Microwave Engineering, Metamaterials and Antennas Group (GEMMA Group) at UAB, and Director of CIMITEC, a research center on metamaterials supported by TECNIO (Generalitat de Catalunya).He has authored and coauthored more than 450 technical conference, letter, journal papers, and book chapters; he is coauthor of the book on metamaterials titled Metamaterials With Negative Parameters: Theory, Design and Microwave Applications (Wiley, 2008); he has generated 15 Ph.D.s; and he has filed several patents on metamaterials and has headed several development contracts Prof. Martín is a member of the IEEE Microwave Theory and Techniques Society (IEEE MTT-S). He has organized several international events related to metamaterials, including Workshops at the IEEE International Microwave Symposium in 2005 and 2007 and the European Microwave Conference in 2009, and the Fifth International Congress on Advanced Electromagnetic Materials in Microwaves and Optics (Metamaterials 2011), where he acted as Chair of the Local Organizing Committee. He has acted as Guest Editor for three Special Issues on Metamaterials in three international journals. He is reviewer of the IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES and IEEE MICROWAVE AND WIRELESS COMPONENTS LETTERS, among many other journals, and he serves as member of the Editorial Board of the IET Microwaves, Antennas and Propagation and the International Journal of RF and Microwave Computer-Aided Engineering. He is also a member of the Technical Committees of the European Microwave Conference (EuMC) and International Congress on Advanced Electromagnetic Materials in Microwaves and Optics (Metamaterials). Among his distinctions, he has received the 2006 Duran Farell Prize for Technological Research, he holds the Parc de Recerca UAB—Santander Technology Transfer Chair, and he has been the recipient of two ICREA ACADEMIA Awards (calls 2008 and 2013).
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
3909
Compact Multi-Band Bandpass Filters With Mixed Electric and Magnetic Coupling Using Multiple-Mode Resonator Jin Xu (许进) , Wen Wu, Senior Member, IEEE, and Gao Wei
Abstract—In this paper, a multiple stubs loaded ring resonator (MSLRR) is proposed to design directly coupled multi-band bandpass filters (BPFs) with mixed electric and magnetic coupling (MEMC). The proposed MSLRR exhibits multiple-mode resonant behavior. The increased number of loaded stubs excite many more useful resonant modes, but these resonant modes can be still independently controlled. As examples, a dual-band BPF, a tri-band BPF, a quad-band BPF, and a quint-band BPF using different types of MSLRRs are designed and fabricated. The passband frequencies and return losses (RLs) of these multi-band BPFs can be independently controlled. A dual-mode open loop resonator is then introduced in the quint-band BPF to enhance the sixth resonant mode of the MSLRR to produce the sixth passband so that a sext-band BPF is also presented. Multiple transmission zeros due to the cancelling effect of MEMC and virtual grounds in the MSLRR can be observed around the passbands resulting in sharp passband selectivity and high band-to-band isolation. Moreover, all of the fabricated multi-band BPFs have compact sizes, good RLs, and low insertion losses. Good agreements are observed between the simulated and measured results. Index Terms—Bandpass filter (BPF), dual-band, mixed electric and magnetic coupling (MEMC), multiple-mode resonator (MMR), quad-band, quint-band, sext-band, tri-band.
I. INTRODUCTION
P
LANAR microstrip multi-band bandpass filters (BPFs) with compact size, low insertion loss (IL), and good passband selectivity are in great demand in modern multi-service multi-standard communication systems. Up to now, many multi-band BPF design approaches have been reported. One of
Manuscript received June 09, 2015; revised August 09, 2015; accepted October 05, 2015. Date of publication October 26, 2015; date of current version December 02, 2015. This work was supported in part by the National Natural Science Foundation of China under Grant 61401358, in part by the Fundamental Research Funds for Central Universities under Grant 3102014JCQ01058 and Grant 30920140122005, and in part by the State Key Laboratory of Millimeter Waves open research program under Grant K201614. J. Xu is with the School of Electronics and Information, Northwestern Polytechnical University, 710072 Xi’an, China, the Ministerial Key Laboratory of JGMT, Nanjing University of Science and Technology, Nanjing 210094, China, and also with the State Key Laboratory of Millimeter Waves, Southeast University, Nanjing 210018, China (e-mail: [email protected]). W. Wu is with the Ministerial Key Laboratory of JGMT, Nanjing University of Science and Technology, Nanjing 210094, China (e-mail: wuwen@mail. njust.edu.cn). G. Wei is with the School of Electronics and Information, Northwestern Polytechnical University, 710072 Xi’an, China (e-mail: [email protected]). Color versions of one or more of the figures in this paper are available online at http://ieeexplore.ieee.org. Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/TMTT.2015.2488643
the attractive approaches is to use a multiple mode resonator (MMR), such as a stepped-impedance resonator (SIR) [1]–[4], stub loaded resonator [5]–[11], ring resonator [12]–[14], patch resonator [15], and quad-mode resonator [16]–[19] since the MMR multi-band BPF has the great merits of low IL, wide bandwidth, and especially compact size. Nevertheless, the passband numbers of most of these reported works are limited to four or less. In [20], a quint-band BPF is formed by five tri-mode stub loaded SIRs. In [21], two sext-band BPFs are presented by using six pairs of SIRs. Six pairs of semi-lumped resonators are utilized in [22] to design a sext-band BPF. These works exhibit good electrical performance, but more than two resonators are used, which may lead to relatively large circuit sizes. The quint- and sext-band BPFs reported in [20]–[22] also have greater than 2-dB IL. To our best knowledge, quint-band or more passband BPFs using only two MMRs have not been presented in past literature thus far. Moreover, it is difficult to achieve the desired passband frequencies and return losses (RLs) for all the designed passbands simultaneously since the resonant modes of most of MMRs are often dependent on each other. Therefore, it is significant to solve these problems in the MMR multi-band BPF design. To improve the filter performance such as passband selectivity, band-to-band isolation, and stopband depth or width, it is always necessary to introduce the transmission zeros (TZs) around the passbands. The MMR multi-band BPF has another merit in this respect. Ring resonators with perturbation structure [13], [14] and some other MMRs with multipath propagation configuration [10], [11], [19] or transversal interference configuration [12], [17] or cascaded by alternative and inverters [2] have the ability to generate multiple TZs around passbands. Moreover, most of the reported MMR multi-band BPFs employ a capacitively coupled configuration, and source–load coupling between the input and output high-impedance microstrip lines is a usual method to generate a pair of TZs around each passband to improve filter performance [1], [3], [16], [18]. Actually, the directly coupled configuration or directly coupled 0 feeding structure are also able to introduce TZs [6]–[9]. Compared with the capacitively coupled configuration, the multiband BPFs with a directly coupled configuration often have a relatively low IL, which can be known from the results of our previous works [8], [9]. However, these TZs due to a directly coupled configuration cannot be tuned freely because the tapped point is prior to meeting the required external quality factor . In addition, the cancelling effect of mixed electric
0018-9480 © 2015 IEEE. Personal use is permitted, but republication/redistribution requires IEEE permission. See http://www.ieee.org/publications_standards/publications/rights/index.html for more information.
3910
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
and magnetic coupling (MEMC) has been recently reported by some of the literature to introduce TZs in single-band BPF design [23], [24]. Also, some of the literature has reported upon the multi-band BPF with MEMC. In this paper, a new series of multiple stubs loaded ring resonators (MSLRRs) are firstly proposed to design the dual-, tri-, quad-, and quint-band BPFs. The resonant modes of MSLRRs can be independently controlled. Since the surface current at every resonant modes is strong at the corresponding physical sections and weak at other sections, the RLs of passbands can also be tuned separately. In addition, a sext-band BPF is also proposed by introducing a dual-mode open loop resonator (DMOLR) in the quint-band BPF to enhance the sixth resonant mode of the MSLRR to produce the sixth passband. The TZs due to the cancelling effect of MEMC and virtual grounds in the MSLRR improve the multi-band BPF’s performance significantly. All of the multi-band BPFs in this paper are fabricated on the substrate Rogers RT/Duroid 5880 or ARlon DiClad 880 ( , mm, and ). Detailed designs and measured results are discussed in the following sections.
Fig. 1. (a) Transmission line model of proposed MSLRR. (b) Different loads.
II. PROPOSED MSLRR AND GENERAL COUPLING ROUTING SCHEME OF MULTI-BAND BPFS Fig. 2. Coupling routing scheme of MSLRR multi-band BPFs.
A. Proposed MSLRR The transmission line model of the MSLRR is shown in Fig. 1(a), which consists of a ring resonator with impedance of and length of at the designing frequency , a shorted stub with impedance of and length of at , a load loaded on the ring resonator, and a load loaded on the shorted stub at the point . The input admittance seen from point can be derived as (1)
B. General Coupling Routing Scheme of Multi-Band BPFs Fig. 2 gives the coupling routing scheme of MSLRR multiband BPFs. The th passband is realized by using a pair of resonant modes of MSLRRs with MEMC. The actual coupling coefficients between the mode and , and the external quality factor can be computed from the un-normalized coupling matrix using the following equations [25]: (2a)
where
and the equation shown at the bottom of this page. The resonant modes of the proposed MSLRR are determined by . When the different loads shown in Fig. 1(b) are used, the proposed MSLRR can be used to design dual-, tri-, quad-, quint-, and sext-band BPFs, which will be discussed in Section II-B. When , the proposed MSLRR has virtual grounds resulting in TZs for filter design [9].
(2b) where represents the ripple fractional bandwidth, represents the un-normalized coupling coefficients between the mode and , and represents the un-normalized coupling coefficients between the source and mode . Since MEMC is used between two MSLRRs, is also determined by [24] (3) and represent the electric and magnetic couwhere pling coefficients between two modes and , respectively.
XU et al.: COMPACT MULTI-BAND BPFs WITH MEMC USING MMR
3911
The cancelling effect of MEMC will result in a TZ, and the frequency of this TZ is determined by (4) and represent the self-resonant frequency of the where mode and the mode , respectively [24]. This TZ is located at the upper sideband if , otherwise it is located at the lower sideband. The multi-band BPF with numbers of passbands with MEMC should have numbers of TZs due to the cancelling of MEMC.
Fig. 3. Variation of fixed) and (b) (
and
against different values of: (a) fixed).
(
III. MULTI-BAND BPFs DESIGN In this section, the different loads and shown in Fig. 1(b) are applied to design dual-, tri-, quad-, quint-, and sext-band BPFs with MEMC. A. Second-Order Dual-Band BPF Design It is known that the proposed MSLRR in Fig. 1(a) is actually a SIR if and are open-circuited. Also, its first two resonant modes can be used to design a dual-band BPF, but these two resonant modes cannot be independently tuned. To solve this problem, and are set as (open stub) Dual-band Case (open-circuited) (5) in the dual-band BPF design. Under preselected and at GHz, Fig. 3 shows the variation of the first two resonant modes and of the MSLRR with a dual-band case against different values of , , and . The frequency ratio is defined as
Fig. 4. (a) Layout of MSLRR with dual-band case. (b) Current distribution at and . (c) Layout of proposed MSLRR dual-band BPF.
TABLE I DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS OF MULTI-BAND BPFs
(6) and represent the maximum and minimum where frequency of every curves. A larger value of represents a more obvious variation. In Fig. 3(a), , , and are simulated for . In Fig. 3(b), , , and are simulated for . If and are used to independently tune and , respectively, we hope that the variation of and keep constant or do not change dramatically. Therefore, a large should be selected. However, has too low impedance to be fabricated if the very large is selected. In this design, is set. for in Fig. 3(a) and for in Fig. 3(b) are also simulated, which means that and indeed can be independently controlled by and , respectively. According to the above design rules, for the specified GHz and GHz, the designing parameters of the MSLRR with a dual-band case are optimized as , , , , and at GHz. Fig. 4(a) gives the layout of the MSLRR with a dual-band case. Its initial physical dimensions
can be calculated by using ADS LineCalc Tool, and optimized in the full-wave 3-D electromagnetic (EM) simulator HFSS to consider the impact of impedance discontinuities, bends, and open and shorted ends. Its final physical dimensions are also labeled in Fig. 4(a). Fig. 4(b) shows the current distribution of the MSLRR with a dual-band case at two resonant modes and . The surface current is very strong at the impedance section and the impedance section when the MSLRR with a dual-band case resonates at and , respectively, which also validate the above analysis. The design specification of the MSLRR DB-BPF is given in Table I, where “CF” represents central frequency. Since the fractional bandwidths (FBWs) of two passbands are not independent, the FBW of the 2nd passband is not given, as done in [3]. The synthesis of the ideal coupling matrix of the 1st passbands can be optimized by using the technique in [26] as
3912
Fig. 5. (a) Extracted and and against different values of
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
of dual-band BPF. (b) Variation of .
, , and the remaining terms are zero. and are calculated by using (2). The layout of the proposed MSLRR dual-band BPF with MEMC is shown in Fig. 4(c). Two 50microstrip lines directly connected to the impedance section at the tapped point serve as I/O ports. The gaps and provide the electric coupling paths, and the conducting pin with a width of mm provides the magnetic coupling path [24]. As shown in Fig. 4(b), the surface currents at and are relatively weak on the ring resonator. Therefore, the gap will provide extremely weak electric coupling, and the different values of will have a minor effect on electric coupling. mm is set in the dual-band BPF design. The design procedures of MSLRR dual-band BPF are summarized as follows. 1) The tapped position is tuned to meet the required firstly. Fig. 5(a) plots the extracted with the corresponding by using the technique introduced in [25]. mm is set in this design. 2) Since is fixed in this design, is then tuned to change so as to meet the required . By using the extraction method reported in [23], Fig. 5(a) also plots the variation of against different values of . Therefore, mm is set in this design. 3) After and are fixed for meeting the requirement of st the 1 passband, and are also determined. is the only physical dimension that can be used to tune to meet the required better than 18-dB RL of 2nd passband. Fig. 5(b) plots the variation of and against different values of . As increases from 0.5 to 0.7 mm, the variation of is relatively weak, but the variation of is very apparent, which means that the in-band RLs of two passbands can be independently controlled. Here, denotes the RL of the th passband. mm is set in this design. Fig. 6 plots the simulated and measured -parameters of fabricated MSLRR dual-band BPF. The inset in Fig. 6 shows the photograph of the fabricated dual-band BPF, which occupies a circuit area of , where represents the guided wavelength of a 50- microstrip line on the used substrate at 0.9 GHz. The measured CF, 3-dB FBW, IL, and RL of two passbands are 0.895/2.42 GHz, 12%/4.1%, 0.9/1.76 dB, and 17/16 dB, respectively. Four TZs around two passbands are measured at GHz, GHz, GHz, and GHz. Two TZs, TZ1 and TZ3, are due to the cancelling effect of MEMC, and another two TZs, TZ2 and TZ4, are owing to virtual grounds that existed in
Fig. 6. Simulated and measured results of fabricated dual-band BPF. The inset is the photograph of fabricated dual-band BPF.
TABLE II PERFORMANCE COMPARISON WITH REPORTED DUAL-BAND BPFs
the MSLRR , as discussed in [9]. is seen in Fig. 4(a) so that the TZ1 is located at the upper sideband of 1st passband. The extracted is smaller than zero so that the TZ3 is located at the lower sideband of 2nd passband. The band-to-band isolation between the 1st passband and the 2nd passband is better than 17 dB. The upper stopband rejection is better than 15 dB from 2.55 to 3.54 GHz. Table II gives a performance comparison with some reported works, which shows that the proposed MSLRR dual-band BPF has some merits of compact size, low IL, and good band-to-band isolation. B. Second-Order Tri-Band BPF Design Two loads
and
of the MSLRR are set as (open stub) Tri-band Case (open stub)
(7)
for the tri-band BPF design. For analysis simplicity, , , , , and at GHz are set. Fig. 7 shows the variation of the first three resonant modes , , and of the MSLRR with the tri-band case against different values of , , , and . of three resonant modes given in Fig. 7(a)–(c) indicates that , , and can be independently tuned by , , and , respectively. It is interestingly found in Fig. 7(d) that , , and almost keep unchanged as varies. If the loaded position is also selected as the tapped position of I/O ports, tuning to meet the required will
XU et al.: COMPACT MULTI-BAND BPFs WITH MEMC USING MMR
Fig. 7. Variation of , , and against different values of: (a) ( , , and fixed), (b) ( , , and fixed), (c) ( , , and fixed), and (d) ( , , and fixed).
3913
Fig. 9. (a) Extracted and of tri-band BPF. (b) Variation of , , and against different values of . (c) Variation of , , and against different values of . (d) Typical frequency response of tri-band mm and mm). BPF (
2)
Fig. 8. (a) Layout of MSLRR with tri-band case. (b) Surface current distribu, , and . (c) Layout of proposed MSLRR tri-band BPF. tion at
have a minor effect on three resonant modes. According to the design rule given in Fig. 7, for the specified GHz, GHz, and GHz, the designing parameters , , and at GHz are finally optimized. is preset in the above optimization. Fig. 8(a) gives the layout of the proposed MSLRR with a tri-band case. The optimized physical dimensions are also labeled in Fig. 8(a). Fig. 8(b) shows the surface current distribution at , , and . It can be seen that the surface currents are strong on the impedance section, the impedance section, and the impedance section when the resonator resonates at , , and , respectively. This result validates the above analysis. Fig. 8(c) shows the layout of the proposed MSLRR tri-band BPF with MEMC. Its design specification is also given in Table I. The actual coupling coefficients and the external quality factor of the 1st passband are synthesized as and , respectively. mm and mm are set in this design so that is still fixed in this design. The design procedures of the MSLRR tri-band BPF are summarized as follows. 1) The physical dimension is tuned to meet the required firstly. Fig. 9(a) plots the extracted with the corresponding mm and is set in this design.
is then tuned to change so as to meet the required . Fig. 9(a) plots the variation of against different values of . Therefore, mm is set in this design. 3) After and are fixed for meeting the requirement of the 1st passband, , , , and are also determined in the tri-band BPF. and can then be used to tune and to meet the required and , respectively. Fig. 9(b) and (c) plot the variation of , , and against different values of and , respectively. As increases from 0.4 to 0.7 mm in Fig. 9(c), the variation of and are relatively weak, but the variation of is very apparent. As increases from 0.2 to 0.5 mm in Fig. 9(b), the variation of and are relatively weak, but the variation of is very apparent. This means that the in-band RLs of three passbands can be independently tuned by , , and , respectively. mm and mm are finally optimized. The simulated and measured results of the fabricated MSLRR tri-band BPF is plotted in Fig. 10. The inset in Fig. 10 shows a photograph of the fabricated tri-band BPF, which occupies a circuit area of , where represents the guided wavelength of a 50- microstrip line on the used substrate at 1.9 GHz. The measured CF, 3-dB FBW, IL, and RL of three passbands are 1.875/3.54/5.91 GHz, 19.9%/14%/4.6%, 0.6/0.75/1.65 dB, and 14/22/25 dB, respectively. Theoretically, the designed tri-band BPF should have six TZs, as shown in Fig. 9(d). In Fig. 9(d), three TZs, TZ1, TZ3, and TZ5, are due to the cancelling effect of MEMC ( , , and ), and another three TZs, TZ2, TZ4, and TZ6, are due to virtual grounds existed in the MSLRR . However, two TZs, TZ2 and TZ3, are not obvious in the final simulated and measured results. The strong making the frequency location of TZ3 lower than TZ2 may result in this phenomenon. Another four TZs located at 2.23, 4.98, 5.68, and 6.88 GHz can be obviously observed in Fig. 10. The fabricated tri-BPF also exhibits a 15-dB rejection upper stopband from 6.36 to 8.2 GHz.
3914
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 10. Simulated and measured results of fabricated tri-BPF. The inset is the photograph of fabricated tri-BPF.
TABLE III PERFORMANCE COMPARISON WITH REPORTED TRI-BAND BPFs
Fig. 11. Variation of: (a) and and (b) and . (c) Variation of , , values of values of .
The isolation between the 1st passband and the 2nd passband is better than 27 dB, and the isolation between the 2nd passband and the 3rd passband is better than 20 dB. Table III gives a performance comparison with some reported works, which shows that the proposed MSLRR tri-band BPF has some merits of compact size, low IL, and good band-to-band isolation. Moreover, three CFs and RLs of our proposed tri-band BPF can be separately controlled. C. Second-Order Quad-Band BPF Design A one-end shorted stepped-impedance resonator (SSIR) is used to replace the open stub at loaded point so as to design the quad-band BPF. Two loads, and , of the MSLRR with a quad-band case are set as (8), shown at the bottom of this page. , , , and are the first four resonant modes
and , and
against different against different
of the MSLRR with a quad-band case. According to the experiment results given in Sections III-A and III-B, we assume that two resonant modes and can be independently controlled by the impedance section and impedance section, respectively. Another two resonant modes, and , are excited by the newly loaded SSIR. For analysis simplicity, , , , , , and at GHz are set in the quad-band BPF design. After , , and at GHz are preset, and at GHz are optimized for the specified GHz and GHz according to the design rules given in Figs. 3 and 7. Fig. 11(a) plots the variation of and against different values of and . Fig. 11(b) shows the variation of and against different values of and , which shows that the variation of and have a minor effect on and (the value of close to 1). and are finally optimized for the specified GHz and GHz according to the design rule given in Fig. 11(a) and (b). Under the above optimized values, Fig. 11(c) shows the variation of , , , and against different values of . As shown in Fig. 11(c), still has a minor effect on , , , and if it is tuned to meet the required . Fig. 12(a) gives the layout of the proposed MSLRR with a quad-band case, and its optimized physical dimensions are also labeled in Fig. 12(a). Fig. 12(b) shows the
(open stub) (SSIR)
Q-band Case
(8)
XU et al.: COMPACT MULTI-BAND BPFs WITH MEMC USING MMR
Fig. 12. (a) Layout of MSLRR with quad-band case. (b) Surface current dis, , , and . (c) Layout of proposed MSLRR quad-band tribution at BPF.
3915
Fig. 14. Simulated and measured results of the fabricated MSLRR quad-band BPF. The inset is the photograph of the fabricated quad-band BPF.
4) After
Fig. 13. (a) Extracted and of quad-band BPF. (b) Variation of , , , and against different values of . (c) Variation of , , , and against different values of .
surface current distribution of the MSLRR with a quad-band case at , , , and . The surface currents are strong on the impedance section and impedance section when it resonates at and , respectively. The surface currents are strong on the SSIR when it resonates at and . This results validate the above analysis. The layout of the proposed MSLRR quad-band BPF with MEMC is shown in Fig. 12(c). Its design specification is also given in Table I. and are calculated, respectively. mm and mm are set in this design. The design procedures of the MSLRR quad-band BPF are summarized as follows. 1) The physical dimension is tuned to meet the required firstly. Fig. 13(a) plots the extracted with the corresponding mm and is set in this design. 2) is then tuned to change so as to meet the required . Fig. 13(a) also plots the variation of against different values of . Therefore, mm is set in this design. 3) After and are fixed for meeting the requirement of the 1st passband, and is also determined in the quad-band BPF. is then used to tune to meet the required . Fig. 13(b) plots the variation of , , , and against different values of . As shown in Fig. 13(b), has a major effect on . In quad-band BPF design, mm is set.
is fixed, and are also determined. and provided by the gaps and are very weak, and the gap provides the magnetic coupling. Therefore, is built in the quad-band BPF. Therefore, there will be no TZs due to the cancelling effect of MEMC around the 2nd and is used to tune and 4th passbands. to meet the required and . Fig. 13(c) shows the variation of , , , and against different values of . Obviously, has a minor effect on and . Since and are dependent of each other, a tradeoff between the performance of and should be made. mm is set in this design so that and are better than 12 dB. Fig. 14 plots the simulated and measured results of the fabricated MSLRR quad-band BPF. The inset in Fig. 14 shows a photograph of the fabricated quad-band BPF, which occupies a circuit area of . The measured CF, 3-dB FBW, IL, and RL of four passbands are 1.91/3.55/5.36/ 6.92 GHz, 16.5%/6.9%/7.4%/5.4%, 0.6/1.65/1.05/1.85 dB, and 13/15/16/11 dB, respectively. The fabricated quad-band BPF has four TZs measured at 2.2, 2.76, 5.06, and 6.17 GHz. Two TZs, TZ1 and TZ3, are due to the virtual grounds that existed in the MSLRR with a quad-band case, and another two TZs are due to the cancelling effect of MEMC. Its upper stopband rejection is better than 10 dB from 7.3 to 8.52 GHz. The isolation between the 1st passband and the 2nd passband is better than 25, the isolation between the 2nd passband and the 3rd passband is better than 13 dB, and the isolation between the 3rd passband and the 4th passband is better than 20 dB. Table IV gives a performance comparison with some reported works, which shows that the MSLRR quad-band BPF has some merits of compact size, low IL, and good band-to-band isolation. Moreover, four CFs of our proposed quad-band BPF can be separately controlled. D. Second-Order Quint- and Sext-Band BPFs Design Three open stubs are used to replace a single open stub in the tri-band BPF so as to design quint- and sext-band BPFs. Two loads, and , of the MSLRR with quint- and sext-band cases are set as (9), shown at the bottom of the following page. The electrical lengths of the newly loaded three open stubs are set as . , , , , , and are the first six resonant modes of the MSLRR with a quint- and sext-band case, and the first five resonant modes are specified as 0.63, 1.33,
3916
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
TABLE IV PERFORMANCE COMPARISON WITH REPORTED QUAD-BAND BPFs
2.03, 2.73, and 3.43 GHz, respectively. According to the experiment results given in Section III-B and regardless of the sixth , , , and are arranged to be resonant mode, , , , , and sections, reexcited by the impedance , spectively. This arrangement can be easily met when is satisfied according to the experiment in Sections III-B and III-C. We assume that these five resonant modes can be independently controlled by these five sections, respectively, and we call these five resonant modes the controlled resonant mode. It and is worth mentioning that the other relation of is not recommended for this resonator since the uncontrolled in this design) is most likely located resonant mode (i.e., among the controlled resonant modes, which is not conducive to the subsequent quint- and sext-band design. For analysis sim, plicity, at GHz are set in the quint-band and , , , BPF design. Fig. 15(a)–(e) plots the variation of against different values of , , , , and , , and which validates the above assumption. Fig. 15(f) shows that the still has a minor effect on these five resonant variation of , , , , and modes. at GHz are optimized according to the design rules given in Fig. 15. Under the above designing parameters, GHz is also simulated. The layout of the proposed MSLRR with a quint- and sextband case is shown in Fig. 16(a). The optimized physical dimensions are labeled in Fig. 17(a). Under these physical dimensions, GHz is extracted from the HFSS simulated result. Fig. 16(b) shows the surface current distributions of the MSLRR
Fig. 15. Variation of , , , , and , (b) , (c) , (d) , (e) , and (f) . , , and at varies, the others remain unchanged.
against different values of: (a) , , , GHz. When one parameter
Fig. 16. (a) Layout of proposed MSLRR with quint- and sext-band case. (b) Surface current distributions of MSLRR at six resonant frequencies.
with a quint- and sext-band case at its first six resonant modes. The surface currents are relatively strong at the impedance , , , , and sections when it resonates at , , , , and , respectively. This results validate the above analysis. The surface current at is strong at impedance , , and sections, and thus, is dependent on other resonant
(open stubs) (open stub)
Quint- and Sext-band Case
(9)
XU et al.: COMPACT MULTI-BAND BPFs WITH MEMC USING MMR
3917
Fig. 19. Simulated and measured results of fabricated quint-band BPF.
Fig. 17. Physical layout of: (a) quint-band BPF and (b) sext-band BPF.
Fig. 18. Extracted
and
of quint-band BPF.
modes and cannot be tuned freely. Actually, in the authors’ experience, is mainly caused by the impedance section. Nevertheless, is frequency far away from so that all of the first five resonant modes of the MSLRR are the controlled resonant modes. Fig. 17(a) shows the layout of the proposed MSLRR quintband BPF with MEMC. mm and mm are set in this design. Its design specification is also given in Table I. and are calculated, respectively. The design procedures of the MSLRR quint-band BPF are summarized as follows. 1) is tuned to meet the required firstly. Fig. 18 plots the extracted with the corresponding mm and is set in this design. 2) is then tuned to change so as to meet the required . Fig. 18 also plots the variation of against different values of . Therefore, mm is set in this design. 3) After and are fixed, , , , , , , , and are also determined. According to the experiment results in Figs. 5(b), 9(b), 9(c), 13(b), and 13(c), , , , and should be mainly controlled by , , , and , respectively. Therefore, , , , and are used to tune , , , and to meet the requirement of , , , and , respectively. mm,
mm, mm, and mm are finally optimized. Fig. 19 plots the simulated and measured results of the fabricated quint-band BPF. The inset in Fig. 19 shows the photograph of the fabricated quint-band BPF, which occupies a compact area of , where represents the guided wavelength of a 50- microstrip line on the used substrate at 0.63 GHz. The quint-band BPF operates at 0.63/1. 33/2.03/2.74/3.45 GHz with 3-dB FBW of 28.8%/9.4%/2.7%/ 5.3%/5.5% and measured minimal ILs of 0.47/1.14/1.8/1.39/ 1.26 dB, respectively. The measured in-band RLs within five passbands are better than 23/13.5/13.6/15/14.1 dB, respectively. Four band-to-band isolations among five passbands are better than 31, 28, 18, and 17 dB, respectively. Ten TZs around five passbands can be also observed in Fig. 4, which can improve the passband selectivity. Five TZs, TZ1, TZ3, TZ5, TZ7, and TZ9, are due to the cancelling effect of MEMC, and another five TZs, TZ2, TZ4, TZ6, TZ8, and TZ10, are due to the virtual grounds that existed in the MSLRR with the quint- and sext-band cases. The magnetic coupling is stronger than the electric coupling for the 1st passband so that TZ1 is located at the upper sideband of the 1st passband. The electric coupling is dominant for the remaining four passbands so that TZ3, TZ5, TZ7, and TZ9 are located at the lower sideband of the 2nd , 3rd , 4th , and 5th passbands, respectively. As shown in Fig. 19, the uncontrolled resonant mode failed to produce a passband around 3.98 GHz. To use this uncontrolled resonant mode to produce the 6th passband, a mm is introduced to enDMOLR with a width of hance the performance of the sixth passband. Fig. 17(b) shows the physical layout of the proposed sext-band BPF, and the DMOLR is embedded into the above quint-band BPF. The line length is approximately equal to the quarter guided wavelength at 3.98 GHz, and the estimated calculated by the ADS LineCalc Tool is 14.2 mm. For the preset mm, the parameters and are used to tune its even mode, and is tuned to acquire the desired external quality factor [27]. The physical dimensions of the above quint-band BPF are slightly modified so as to consider the loading effect of the DMOLR. The optimized physical dimensions of the sext-band BPF are labeled in Fig. 17(b), and mm, mm, mm, mm, mm, , and mm are also optimized according to the above discussion. To verify the above design result, Fig. 20 shows the surface current distribution of the designed sext-band BPF at
3918
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 20. Surface current distribution of sext-band BPF at the 6th passband.
Fig. 21. Simulated and measured results of fabricated sext-band BPF.
TABLE V PERFORMANCE COMPARISON WITH SOME REPORTED QUINT- AND SEXT-BAND BPFs
passbands are measured better than 20.6/15.9/12.3/20/22.8/13.4 dB, respectively. Five band-to-band isolations among five passbands are better than 31, 28, 17, 16, and 20 dB, respectively. Compared with the quint-band BPF shown in Fig. 19, another two new TZs, TZ11 and TZ12, can be observed in the simulated result of the sext-band BPF. TZ11 is due to the DMOLR since its even mode resonant frequency is lower than its odd-mode resonant frequency, and is actually due to the MEMC. TZ12 is also due to the virtual grounds that existed in the MSLRR with quint- and sext-band cases. Owing to the fabrication error, TZ10 and TZ11 merge into a single TZ in the measured result. Moreover, two visible transmission poles in the 6th passbands are mainly due to the DMOLR since the coupling between two uncontrolled resonant modes are weak in this design. Nevertheless, compared with the BPF with 3-dB FBW of 5% based on the DMOLR in [27], a wider 3-dB FBW and a flatter passband are acquired in the sixth passband of the sext-band BPF, mainly attributed to these two uncontrolled resonant modes. The performance comparison with some reported quint- and sext-band BPFs is listed in Table V. Obviously, the proposed quint- and sext-band BPFs have the merits of lower ILs, wider passbands, and more compact circuit size. IV. CONCLUSION In this paper, the MSLRR with different loads has been proposed to design dual-, tri-, quad-, and quint-band BPFs with MEMC. The frequency locations and RLs of all of the passbands in these multi-band BPFs can be separately controlled. A DMOLR has been embedded in the quint-band BPF to enhance its 6th resonant mode to produce the 6th passband so that a sext-band BPF is also designed. The step-by-step design procedures of all multi-band BPFs have been discussed to validate our design approach. The great merits of good RLs, low ILs, high band-to-band isolations, wide upper stopbands, and compact sizes make the newly proposed planar multi-band BPFs attractive in the modern multi-service multi-standard communication system. REFERENCES
the 6th passband. Its surface current distribution is very strong on the DMOLR, and there is also surface current on both the impedance and sections. The simulated and measured results of the fabricated sextband BPF are depicted in Fig. 21. The inset in Fig. 21 shows a photograph of the fabricated sext-band BPF, which also occupies a circuit area of . Six passbands centered at 0.63/1.335/2.03/2.73/3.44/3.99 GHz with 3-dB FBW of 29.7%/8.5%/2.7%/5.4%/6.2%/9% and minimal ILs of 0.49/ 1.26/1.88/1.38/1.19/1.09 dB are measured. The RLs within six
[1] S.-C. Lin, “Microstrip dual/quad-band filters with coupled lines and quasi-lumped impedance inverters based on parallel-path transmission,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 59, no. 8, pp. 1937–1946, Aug. 2011. [2] S. Zhang and L. Zhu, “Synthesis design of dual-band bandpass filstepped-impedance resonators,” IEEE Trans. Microw. ters with Theory Techn., vol. 61, no. 5, pp. 1812–1819, May 2013. [3] S.-J. Sun, T. Su, K. Deng, B. Wu, and C.-H. Liang, “Shorted-ended stepped-impedance dual-resonance resonator and its application to bandpass filters,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 61, no. 9, pp. 3209–3215, Sep. 2013. [4] K.-W. Hsu and W.-H. Tu, “Sharp-rejection quad-band bandpass filter using meandering structure,” Electron. Lett., vol. 48, no. 15, pp. 935–937, Jul. 2012. [5] C. H. Lee, C. I. G. Hsu, and H. K. Jhuang, “Design of a new tri-band microstrip BPF using combined quarter- wavelength SIRs,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 16, no. 11, pp. 594–596, Nov. 2006. [6] W.-Y. Chen, M.-H. Weng, and S.-J. Chang, “A new tri-band bandpass filter based on stub-loaded step-impedance resonator,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 22, no. 4, pp. 179–181, Apr. 2012. [7] N. Kumar and Y. K. Singh, “Compact tri-band bandpass filter using three stub-loaded open-loop resonator with wide stopband and improved bandwidth response,” Electron. Lett., vol. 50, no. 25, pp. 1950–1952, Dec. 2014.
XU et al.: COMPACT MULTI-BAND BPFs WITH MEMC USING MMR
[8] J. Xu, Y.-X. Ji, C. Miao, and W. Wu, “Compact single-/dual-wideband BPF using stubs loaded SIR (SsLSIR),” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 23, no. 7, pp. 338–340, Jul. 2013. [9] J. Xu, W. Wu, and C. Miao, “Compact microstrip dual-/tri-/quad-band bandpass filter using open stubs loaded shorted stepped-impedance resonator,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 61, no. 9, pp. 3187–3199, Sep. 2013. [10] H.-W. Wu, G.-S. Chen, and Y.-W. Chen, “New compact triple-passband bandpass filter using multipath-embedded stepped impedance resonators,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 24, no. 3, pp. 158–160, Mar. 2014. [11] J.-Y. Wu and W.-H. Tu, “Design of quad-band bandpass filter with multiple transmission zeros,” Electron. Lett., vol. 47, no. 8, pp. 502–503, Apr. 2011. [12] S. Sun, “A dual-band bandpass filter using a single dual-mode ring resonator,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 21, no. 6, pp. 298–300, Jun. 2011. [13] J. Shi, L. Lin, J.-X. Chen, H. Chu, and X. Wu, “Dual-band bandpass filter with wide stopband using one stepped-impedance ring resonator with shorted stubs,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 24, no. 7, pp. 442–444, Jul. 2014. [14] S. Luo, L. Zhu, and S. Sun, “Compact dual-mode triple-band bandpass filters using three pairs of degenerate modes in a ring resonator,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 59, no. 5, pp. 1222–1229, May 2011. [15] Y. C. Li, H. Wong, and Q. Xue, “Dual-mode dual-band filter based on a stub-loaded patch resonator,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 21, no. 10, pp. 525–527, Oct. 2011. [16] J. Xu, W. Wu, and C. Miao, “Compact and sharp skirts microstrip dual-mode dual-band bandpass filter using a single quadruple-mode resonator,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 61, no. 3, pp. 1104–1113, Mar. 2013. [17] H. Liu, B. Ren, X. Guan, J. Lei, and S. Li, “Compact dual-band bandpass filter using quadruple-mode square ring loaded resonator (SRLR),” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 23, no. 4, pp. 181–183, Apr. 2013. [18] L. Gao and X.-Y. Zhang, “High-selectivity dual-band bandpass filter using a quad-mode resonator with source-load coupling,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 23, no. 9, pp. 474–476, Sep. 2013. [19] J. Xu, C. Miao, L. Cui, Y.-X. Ji, and W. Wu, “Compact high isolation quad-band bandpass filter using quad-mode resonator,” Electron. Lett., vol. 48, no. 1, pp. 28–30, Jan. 2012. [20] C.-F. Chen, “Design of a compact microstrip quint-band filter based on the tri-mode stub-loaded stepped-impedance resonators,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 22, no. 7, pp. 357–359, Jul. 2012. [21] K.-W. Hsu, J.-H. Lin, and W.-H. Tu, “Compact sext-band bandpass filter with sharp rejection response,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 24, no. 9, pp. 593–595, Sep. 2014. [22] W.-H. Tu and K.-W. Hsu, “Design of sext-band bandpass filter and sextaplexer using semilumped resonators for system in a package,” IEEE Trans. Compon., Packag., Manuf. Technol., vol. 5, no. 2, pp. 265–273, Feb. 2015. [23] Q.-X. Chu and H. Wang, “A compact open-loop filter with mixed electric and magnetic coupling,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 56, no. 2, pp. 431–439, Feb. 2008. [24] F. Zhu, W. Hong, J.-X. Chen, and K. Wu, “Quarter-wavelength stepped-impedance resonator filter with mixed electric and magnetic coupling,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 24, no. 2, pp. 90–92, Feb. 2014. [25] J.-S. Hong and M. J. Lancaster, Microstrip Filters for RF/Microwave Applications. New York, NY, USA: Wiley, 2001. [26] R. J. Cameron, “Advanced coupling matrix synthesis techniques for microwave filters,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 51, no. 1, pp. 1–10, Jan. 2003.
3919
[27] L. Athukorala and D. Budimir, “Compact dual-mode open loop microstrip resonators and filters,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 19, no. 11, pp. 698–700, Nov. 2009.
Jin Xu was born in AnHui, China, in 1987. He received the B.Sc. degree in information countermeasure technology and Ph.D. degree in information and communication engineering from the Nanjing University of Science and Technology (NUST), Nanjing, China, in 2009 and 2014, respectively. From February 2011 to September 2011, he was a Ph.D. student with the Institute of Microelectronics, Singapore. From October 2011 to September 2012, he was with the MicroArray Technologies Corporation Limited, Chengdu, China, where he was an Integrated Circuit (IC) Research and Development Engineer. He is currently an Associate Professor with the School of Electronics and Information, Northwestern Polytechnical University (NWPU), Xi’an, China. His research interests include microwave/millimeter-wave circuits and systems. Dr. Xu has been a reviewer for the IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES and IEEE MICROWAVE WIRELESS COMPONENT LETTERS.
Wen Wu (SM’10) received the Ph.D. degree in electromagnetic field and microwave technology from Southeast University, Nangjing, China, in 1997. He is currently a Professor with the School of Electronic Engineering and Optoelectronic Technology and an Associate Director with the Ministerial Key Laboratory of JGMT, Nanjing University of Science and Technology, Nanjing, China. He has authored or coauthored over 120 journal and conference papers. He has five patents pending. His current research interests include microwave and millimeter-wave theories and technologies, microwave and millimeter-wave detection and multi-mode compound detection. Prof. Wu was a six-time recipient of the Ministerial and Provincial-Level Science and Technology Award.
Gao Wei was born in Xi’an, China, in 1963. He received the B.Sc. and M.Sc. degrees in electromagnetic theory and microwave technology and Ph.D. degree in circuits and systems from Northwestern Polytechnical University (NWPU), Xi’an, China. Since 1985, he has been with the School of Electronics and Informatics, NWPU, where he is currently a Professor and also Head of the Research Laboratory of Air-Borne Radar Systems. His research interests mainly include microwave measurement, antenna theory and designs, and radar systems. Dr. Wei was the recipient of many awards from the Ministry of Aerospace Technology, China.
3920
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
High Rejection, Self-Packaged Low-Pass Filter Using Multilayer Liquid Crystal Polymer Technology Francisco Cervera, Student Member, IEEE, and Jiasheng Hong, Fellow, IEEE
Abstract—A compact low-pass filter based on the principle of destructive interference is proposed and analyzed, followed by an improved design demonstrating very high rejection levels better than 40 dB over a wide frequency span. Both filters, fabricated using liquid crystal polymer (LCP) multilayer techniques, are selfpackaged, with small footprint and profile, and also very lightweight. Simulation and measured results are presented, showing good agreement. Index Terms—Low-pass filters, clean-up, liquid crystal polymer, microwave filters, self-packaged filters, high rejection, destructive interference.
I. INTRODUCTION
L
OW-PASS FILTERS (LPF) are a key element in order to eliminate spurious resonances and unwanted passbands originated by intermodulation or the intrinsic nature of distributed resonators. Often they are chained to some other filters and, hence, a very low insertion loss (IL) over a desired passband, together with a deep stopband rejection, is commonly required for practical applications. One of the main concerns when designing a LPF is the suppression of higher harmonics and providing a wide stopband. Extensive research has been carried towards this aim using different approaches. A popular approach is cascading successive LPFs with different cutoff frequencies [1]–[5]. A different method is employed in [6]–[10], where several transmission zeroes (TZs) are inserted in the stopband by including resonating elements, cancelling spurious harmonics. Furthermore, defected ground structures (DGS) are also investigated [11]–[13] to produce a wide stopband. However, the latter have the inconvenience of breaking the ground plane, and potentially increasing the radiation of the filter. Even though the aforementioned LPFs provide a wide stopband, most of them are in the region of 20 dB for the rejection level, which would not meet the requirements for a more demanding clean-up filter. Work reported in [5], [13], and [14] achieves deeper rejection levels, the latter being highly demanding in terms of fabrication technology.
Manuscript received March 11, 2015; revised June 29, 2015, August 18, 2015, and October 08, 2015; accepted October 23, 2015. Date of publication November 13, 2015; date of current version December 02, 2015. This work was supported in part by a U.K. EPSRC Industrial CASE Award in association with BSC Filters Ltd, U.K. The authors are with the Institute of Signal, Sensors, and Systems (ISSS), School of Engineering and Physical Sciences, Heriot-Watt University, Edinburgh EH14 4AS, U.K. (e-mail: [email protected]; [email protected]). Color versions of one or more of the figures in this paper are available online at http://ieeexplore.ieee.org. Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/TMTT.2015.2496219
Fig. 1. Proposed self-packaged low-pass filter structure (see Fig. 16 for a 2D representation).
Also key to a LPF is the selectivity, or how short in frequency is the transition from the passband to the stopband. Previously referenced works provide very sharp transitions [5]–[8], [10], [12], [15], at the cost of lower performance on some other aspects like return loss (RL), rejection level, or stopband bandwidth. Despite being desirable, a sharp cutoff is not crucial in a clean-up filter. Furthermore, a packaged filter with small size and weight is desired for a highly integrated system to minimize unwanted crosstalking as well as to accommodate the system restraint in size/weight. As such, the aim of this work is to design a compact, inexpensive, self-packaged LPF as shown in Fig. 1, focusing on the rejection levels of the stopband while maintaining a low IL. For this purpose, a structure based on the principle of destructive interference [1], [3], [16] is applied, and a second identical structure is cascaded in order to increase the rejection levels. The basic unit for the low pass is a structure with two broadside coupled lines and an extra line (loop line) connecting alternate ends of the coupled lines section [Fig. 2(a)]. This kind of structure has been investigated as an impedance transformer [17] replacing the loop line for a two-section stepped impedance line. Additionally, a similar structure has been reported in [3], using different outputs from the coupled lines. Both structures are based on the principle of destructive interference and are capable of producing up to TZs [3], being the electrical length ratio between the loop line and the coupled section . In this work, a modified structure is investigated where the loop line is replaced by a three-section stepped impedance line, with two of the sections being equal in length and impedance [Fig. 2(b)]. It will also be shown how, under certain conditions, the same number of TZs can be excited with lower values of
0018-9480 © 2015 IEEE. Personal use is permitted, but republication/redistribution requires IEEE permission. See http://www.ieee.org/publications_standards/publications/rights/index.html for more information.
CERVERA AND HONG: HIGH REJECTION, SELF-PACKAGED LOW-PASS FILTER USING MULTILAYER LIQUID CRYSTAL POLYMER TECHNOLOGY
3921
Fig. 2. Transmission line model. (a) Uniform line. (b) Stepped-impedance line.
. Additionally, the use of multilayer technology allows for the use of broadside-coupled lines, rather than edge-coupled lines, leading to higher coupling ratios, as well as different layouts than those achieved with single-layer configurations. The remainder of this paper is organized as follows. Section II covers the theory and concepts of the structure for a generic loop line. Sections III and IV cover the analysis of the structure when the generic line is replaced by an uniform-line [Fig. 2(a)] and a stepped-impedance line [Fig. 2(b)], respectively. Two design examples are discussed in Sections VII and VIII, finalizing with conclusions in Section IX.
Fig. 3. S-parameters when
where . The scattering parameters (S-parameters) can be obtained from the Z-parameters using the well-known formulas: (4a) (4b) where
II. GENERIC LOOP STRUCTURE The structure is based on a pair of broadside coupled lines plus an additional section joining alternate ends (Fig. 2). The coupled lines can be described in terms of the characteristic impedance , coupling coefficient , and electrical length as follows:
for different values of . .
is the reference impedance. III. UNIFORM LOOP LINE
Following the discussion from the previous section, a uniform transmission line is used as a loop line [Fig. 2(a)], defined by its Z-parameters:
(1a) (1b) and are the even- and odd-mode impedances, where respectively. The additional section producing the interference is defined as a two-port network by its Z-parameters (see dashed boxes in Fig. 2). Given this structure is reciprocal and symmetrical ( and ), and lossless, nondispersive propagation, the Z-parameters of the complete 2-port structure are derived as
(2)
(3)
(5) is the electrical length of the line and where teristic impedance.
, its charac-
A. Transmission Zeros From (4b), the condition for a transmission zero is . Applying this to (3), and including (5), the condition for the TZs is calculated as: (6) is the ratio between the lengths of the loop where line and the pair of coupled lines. It is direct to show the symmetry of the response for integer values of around . Moreover, if is odd, the response will also be symmetric around . From (6), an interesting property is derived: if , i.e., matching the line impedance to the coupled-lines characteristic impedance, two TZs are generated in and their position depends exclusively on , rather than , (Fig. 3) as demonstrated in (7)
3922
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 7. TZ variation for different values of Fig. 4. S-parameters when
.
for several length ratios. .
paper, is assumed unless stated. The condition for TZs in such conditions can be obtained from (6) as follows:
(8) with being the ratio between the line and the coupled-lines characteristic impedances. By solving (8) for , the location of the four TZs is found as
Fig. 5. Different regions depending on the number of TZs. region correspond to plots in Figs. 6 and 7.
in the 4-TZs
(9) , and The position of the TZs are determined by and depending on their values, they could be real or imaginary. Attending to this, and considering the number of TZs within the range, three different working regions are found (Fig. 5): • 4-TZ region, when
Fig. 6. TZ variation for different values of
.
(10) This pair of TZs are real for . The high value of required to fulfill this condition makes this structure more suitable for broadside coupled lines using multilayer techniques, where higher coupling coefficients can be obtained. Since the position of the TZs is not affected by the length of the loop line, this structure has possible applications as a phase-shifter. A representation of the aforementioned property is depicted in Fig. 4. Different symmetries depending on the value of can also be appreciated. If the value of is fixed to 3, a compact structure with up to four TZs is obtained. From this point and for the rest of the
• 2-TZ region, when (11) • no real TZs, if the previous conditions are not met. Note how the location of TZs is independent from . However, variations in this parameter would affect the rejection levels. Lower values of would increase the rejection between the first and last pair of TZs, while reducing it between the second and third TZ.
CERVERA AND HONG: HIGH REJECTION, SELF-PACKAGED LOW-PASS FILTER USING MULTILAYER LIQUID CRYSTAL POLYMER TECHNOLOGY
3923
In order to obtain a wide and deep rejection band, the 4-TZs region is the most interesting one. Several pairs of and within it are plotted in Figs. 6 and 7 (also marked on Fig. 5). It can be appreciated how variations of would equally affect all the TZs, while variations of would mainly affect the first and fourth TZ, having a negligible effect on the inner pair of TZs. As a rule of thumb, higher values of increase the stopband width and selectivity, reducing the rejection level. B. Transmission Poles From (4a), the transmission pole (TP) condition is (12) This expression can be rewritten as (13) The right-hand side of the expression only depends on and (assuming independent from ), so the TP condition is dominated by . By using algebraic transformations, it can be demonstrated that for values of in the passbands, a maximum of two poles can be obtained, with one of them located at . Reducing will approximate the second TP to the cutoff frequency. Taking the limit when , TP's are located at the roots of . On the other end, taking the limit when , makes the two TPs meet at . C. Cutoff Frequency , In order to determine the 3 dB cutoff frequency , and are the key parameters. Fig. 8 shows different design curves, based on numerical solutions of (4b) for 3 dB, for these parameters. According to the figures, both and have similar effects on the cutoff frequency, when working on the 4-TZs region, i.e., . Moreover, they both can be combined to obtain the desired cutoff. As is fixed to 3, the response of the filter is symmetric around . With this, we can determine the stopband bandwidth (BW) depending on as (14) or, as a function of
, as
Fig. 8. 3 dB cutoff frequency: (a) for different values of . (b) for different values of
;
where is the impedance of the line section parallel to the coupled lines, and is the impedance of the remaining two sections. Following the convention for the uniform-line case, is defined now as . In this way, the response from the coupled-line loop unit can be initially determined by the coupled lines parameters and the loop-line parameters . The modification is particularly interesting when the length ratio is fixed to 3, i.e., fixing , as will be discussed in this section. Under this conditions, the Z-parameters for the loop line are
(15)
IV. STEPPED-IMPEDANCE LOOP STRUCTURE Likewise the previous section, the uniform loop line is now replaced by a three-section impedance line [Fig. 2(b)]. For simplicity, the length of the middle section is equal to the length of the coupled lines . The other two sections have the same length . Furthermore, we can define the impedance ratio of the loop line as (16)
(17) A. Transmission Zeros As previously discussed, the structure is capable of producing up to four TZs in the stopband and the response will be symmetric. The advantage introduced by this configuration is a better control over the response in the stopband as the position
3924
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
B. Transmission Poles Using a similar derivation as in Section III-B, the right-hand side of (13) in the case of a stepped-impedance line, depends on , and . The position of the second TP may be controlled by ratio, ranging from to the first root of . C. Cutoff Frequency
Fig. 9. TZ regions for different values of . Dotted lines correspond to . equal-ripple stopband with the labelled rejection for Section VII design Section VIII design .
could In the case of a uniform-line, the cutoff frequency be determined based on the set of parameters. For a stepped-impedance line, also has to be included in this group. Variations of this parameter have a similar effect to variations of . From (2) and (3) it can be found that the most relevant term is . In order to establish a relationship between the cutoff frequencies in the uniform- and the stepped-line cases, the mentioned term may be matched at cutoff frequency, obtaining the following relationship: (19) , at the where is the electrical length of the coupled lines matched cutoff frequency, and are the for the uniform- and stepped-line cases, and is the impedance ratio of the stepped-line. Since we are matching both cases for the passband, would be a small value. Therefore, (19) can be simplified to (20)
Fig. 10. S-parameters for different values of .
of the two inner TZs can be adjusted with without having too much impact on the outer ones, thus enabling the possibility of obtaining an equal-ripple stopband (Fig. 10). Following the procedure described in the previous section, replacing for the stepped-line in (3), and making , the condition for TZ is found as
By establishing this relationship, the return loss for the stepped-line can match that of the uniform-line for a given pair . As such, Fig. 8 can be used for estimating the cutoff frequency. D. Equal Ripple By modifying , a wide stopband with equal ripple can be obtained. The condition for equal-ripple can be determined by equating the values of in the cases of and , being the frequency between the first two TZs with the maximum value of , defined as (21)
(18) (22) As in the previous section, the different working regions are plotted in Fig. 9. It can be observed how they are similar to the uniform-line case, but the position is shifted over . This effect suggests that similar responses can be obtained with lower when this is compensated with higher values of . Moreover, variations of for fixed values of , and are depicted in Fig. 10. Further variations of and have a similar effect as in the uniform line case. As an example, design values for the fabricated filters are marked. Note how the effect of makes the design in Section VII have four TZs instead of the expected two in the uniform-line case.
This expression needs to be solved numerically, as a simple solution is not available. However, as a rule of thumb, increasing will bring the pair of inner TZs closer to , hence reducing the transmission power at the center frequency . Adjusting will lead to equal ripple. E. Footprint Reduction Initially, the structures depicted in Fig. 2 can be physically realised by feeding the coupled lines from the side edges. However, if the tapping point of the feeding lines are shifted (Fig. 11),
CERVERA AND HONG: HIGH REJECTION, SELF-PACKAGED LOW-PASS FILTER USING MULTILAYER LIQUID CRYSTAL POLYMER TECHNOLOGY
3925
The simplest form of matching network for this purpose is a uniform transmission line of a determined length and characteristic impedance . Designing these parameters accordingly, at least the first TZ can be matched by using (25)
Fig. 11. Modified loop-line structure represent the I/O ports.
. P1 and P2
The rest of the possible resonances have to be matched by optimizing the structure. V. DESIGN METHOD Even though different parameters involved in the design are closely related and influence each other, the following design process may be used as a guide. It is composed of five steps: • Determine required cutoff frequency in terms of , i.e., , that fulfills the requirements for fractional bandwidth (FBW), and find using:
Fig. 12. Cascaded model (uniform-line case).
(26) equivalent responses can be obtained with a reduced length of the loop line. Shifting the feeding lines reduces the effective length of the coupled-line section, therefore, in order to achieve the same , the length of the coupled-lines section will have to be increased. However, the reduction of the length of the loop line would be more significant, obtaining an overall size reduction when combined. The pair of coupled lines act as a half-wavelength resonator, so the limitation for increasing the length comes when the resonant mode is within the stopband. Footprint reduction will be demonstrated with an example in Section VIII.
• Design coupled lines and for the uniform-line case, i.e., , that provides the required , with the help of Fig. 8. • Using Fig. 9 as a reference, estimate a new , i.e., , that meet the requirements for stopband rejection for the chosen . • Calculate from (19) for the previously found and . • Check the design parameters meet the conditions to work in the 4-TZs region and fulfill the requirements for bandwidth and rejection. If any of these restrictions is not met, the coupled lines must be redesigned.
F. Cascading Even though the stopband achieved with a single unit can be in the region of 20–30 dB for a reasonable bandwidth, this is not enough for many practical applications. One way of increasing the level of rejection without affecting the BW would be cascading to filters with identical characteristics. In this case, the order of the filter is doubled, and so is the level of rejection, while keeping the position of the TZs intact. When cascading two filters together with a section of transmission line, some resonances may appear. These resonances have two different origins: first, matching of the input impedance , looking into the filter from the interconnection point (Fig. 12), and second, the loop-structure self-resonance, located at when . The proposed idea for avoiding these resonances is matching them with the TZs. In other words, making at the frequencies with TZ . is defined in terms of Z-parameters as (23) Since
at TZ, it is immediate to demonstrate: (24)
VI. PACKAGING Following the work carried out in [18], the filter structure is enclosed within two ground planes in a stripline configuration. Additionally, a conductive paste is applied in the surrounding walls in order to achieve a full electromagnetic shielding. Filters are connected to the outer environment by means of a coplanar waveguide (CPW), printed on one of the ground planes, and via transition (Fig. 1). In order to adapt the designs to this packaging, feed lines may need to be extended with lines matching port impedances, so the filter accommodates to the CPW layout [Fig. 16(c)]. This kind of packaging allows easy interconnection of the device to a hosting board in a flip-chip manner, as well as allowing easy matching of the input impedance by modifying the width and gap in the CPW. VII. DESIGN EXAMPLE In order to demonstrate the theory previously discussed, a design example will be introduced in this section. Requirements for this filter are: • cutoff frequency: 2 GHz; • stopband up to , equivalent to 160% FBW; • equal ripple with 20 dB rejection.
3926
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 15. Measured results vs. EM simulation, including packaging
.
Fig. 13. Design details: (a) top view (dimensions in mm); (b) layer distribution m, mm). (
Fig. 14. Theoretical model vs. EM simulation
.
Following the design method previously described, at the first step, and from (14), 18 for a 160% FBW is found. With this value, that maps to 2 GHz, from (26), is 4.33 mm. Each of the three sections of the stepped-impedance loop line have the same length as the coupled lines . In the second step, coupled-lines parameters have to be designed, as well as the corresponding . In this case, the coupler is designed with and . With these values, that provides the required cutoff is 1.32. The next step is to find an (Fig. 9) that provides equal ripple and required rejection for the chosen and . Note that equal-ripple curves in Fig. 9 are based on a , so it can only be used as an approximation. Different values of would shift these curves slightly while keeping a similar tendency. The required value for is 1.4. By replacing it and in (20), is obtained. With the help of a EM simulator, some parameters are tuned to match the requirements. Final design values are plotted in Fig. 13. EM simulation results are plotted against the ideal model in Fig. 14. Mismatches, mainly in the fourth TZ, are produced by the corners in the loop line, which are not included in the theoretical model. Spurious coupling and the via transition also contribute to the mismatch. Measured results are plotted against EM simulation in Fig. 15, including the packaging. Even though they show a good correlation, some differences are found. These are due
Fig. 16. Basic unit design details: (a) top view (dimensions in mm); (b) layer m, mm); (c) final layout. Ground vias in black. distribution (
to fabrication tolerances, i.e., substrate thickness and etching. In order to achieve the tight coupling required, the coupled lines are etched on a 25- m-thick film [Fig. 13(b)]. Its thinness magnifies the error introduced by misalignment and overcompression, explaining the mismatch in the results. VIII. IMPROVED REJECTION FILTER DESIGN In this design, we aim at designing a low-pass filter with improved rejection. Initial requirements are: • cutoff frequency: 3 GHz; • stopband up to , equivalent to 155% FBW; • equal ripple with, at least, 40 dB rejection. Such requirements cannot be fulfilled by a single loop structure. Instead, two of them with identical parameters are cascaded. As cascading two identical filters doubles the rejection
CERVERA AND HONG: HIGH REJECTION, SELF-PACKAGED LOW-PASS FILTER USING MULTILAYER LIQUID CRYSTAL POLYMER TECHNOLOGY
3927
level, each of these filters need to be designed for a 20 dB rejection, while keeping the rest of the requirements. A. Basic Cell Initial design is based on the procedure described in Section V. For a 155% FBW, the required , resulting in mm. Coupled lines are designed with and , and the that provides the required cutoff (Fig. 8) is 1.56. Furthermore, values for obtaining a 20 dB equal ripple in the stopband are and (Fig. 9). B. Footprint Reduction Based on optimization, the new values for the impedance and , and . Thus, ratios are the length of the coupled lines is increased by 22%, being the new mm. With these values, a similar response with the same is obtained, as well as same rejection levels, with slightly reduced stopband width. These modifications lead to a 25% footprint reduction.
Fig. 17. Basic unit vs. cascaded. Scattering parameters, EM simulated results .
C. Cascading The basic unit was designed for a 3 GHz cutoff frequency. This will need to be adjusted for a 1.5 dB, 3 GHz so the cascaded filter results in a 3 GHz at 3 dB. Therefore, needs to be adjusted to 3.42 mm. As discussed in previous sections, the two filtering units are connected by a uniform transmission line. The length and impedance of this line is designed to match at the first TZ. At this frequency, . By fixing and using (7), the matching value of is 54 . In order to match the rest of the singularities with the remaining three TZs, two parameters are optimized: the width of the via patch, and its shifting from the center of the line section parallel to the coupled lines. Finally, the feed lines are designed to optimize the return loss, following the discussion in Section III-B with an impedance of 32 . The impedance of the feed lines relates to (13). Additionally, an optimization process is carried out with the help of a full EM simulator. After this process, final design values are , , , , and . A pair of vias connecting both ground planes are included within each loop to prevent propagation of waveguide modes. Corresponding layout dimensions are plotted in Fig. 16. Simulations for the complete design are plotted in Fig. 17, including the simulation for the optimized single unit. It can be appreciated how the singularities are matched with the TZs. Also, it can be noticed how the first three TZs are slightly misplaced with respect to the single-unit response. This is produced by the induced coupling between the two loops due to their proximity. The coupling splits TZs into two, affecting differently depending on the frequency. A comparison between the full EM simulation and the measured results is shown in Fig. 18. Even though is not perfectly matched due to the mutual coupling, expected resonances are effectively attenuated without compromising the equal-ripple response. Differences in the location of TPs are due to the effects of the packaging in the simulation.
Fig. 18. Measured results vs. EM simulation (including packaging) . (a) Wideband response. Picture of the fabricated prototype (16.4 6.6 mm ). (b) Insertion loss and group delay.
IX. CONCLUSION In this paper, a compact, inexpensive, self-packaged low-pass structure has been presented, while discussing its theoretical principles and demonstrating them through two different examples. A way of improving the rejection in the stopband by cascading two loop units is also discussed, including the matters related to the interconnection between them. In the first example, a single loop demonstrating the discussed theoretical principles is covered, followed by a cascaded filter, showing very deep, wide stopband with a flat rejection better than 42 dB. Its very low insertion loss makes the filter suitable for clean-up applications. A performance comparison table (Table I) summarizes its main characteristics compared to some other filters found in the literature, showing how this type of filter is capable of
3928
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
TABLE I PERFORMANCE COMPARISON AMONG PUBLISHED FILTERS
matching performance characteristics, with a considerably reduced footprint, also with the advantage of being self-packaged. Covered filters, including packaging, have a footprint of 14.4 7 mm and 16.4 6.6 mm , respectively, with very low profile (0.45 mm). ACKNOWLEDGMENT The authors would like to thank Dr. Neil Thomson at BSC Filters Ltd. for his support and encouragement throughout this research work. REFERENCES [1] R. Gomez-Garcia, M.-A. Sanchez-Soriano, M. Sanchez-Renedo, G. Torregrosa-Penalva, and E. Bronchalo, “Low-pass and bandpass filters with ultra-broad stopband bandwidth based on directional couplers,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 61, no. 12, pp. 4365–4375, Dec. 2013. [2] S. Luo, L. Zhu, and S. Sun, “Stopband-expanded low-pass filters using microstrip coupled-line hairpin units,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 18, no. 8, pp. 506–508, Aug. 2008. [3] M. Sanchez-Soriano, G. Torregrosa-Penalva, and E. Bronchalo, “Compact filtering structure with four transmission zeros for extended stopband performance,” in Eur. Microwave Conf. (EuMC), 2010, Sep. 2010, pp. 13–16. [4] V. Velidi and S. Sanyal, “Sharp roll-off lowpass filter with wide stopband using stub-loaded coupled-line hairpin unit,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 21, no. 6, pp. 301–303, Jun. 2011. [5] K. Ma and K. Yeo, “Novel low cost compact size planar low pass filters with deep skirt selectivity and wide stopband rejection,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microwave Symp. Dig. (MTT) 2010, May 2010, pp. 1–1.
[6] M. Hayati, H. Asadbeigi, and A. Sheikhi, “Microstrip lowpass filter with high and wide rejection band,” Electron. Lett., vol. 48, no. 19, pp. 1217–1219, Sep. 2012. [7] M. Hayati, A. Sheikhi, and A. Lotfi, “Compact lowpass filter with wide stopband using modified semi-elliptic and semi-circular microstrip patch resonator,” Electron. Lett., vol. 46, no. 22, pp. 1507–1509, Oct. 2010. [8] M. Mirzaee and B. Virdee, “Realisation of highly compact planar lowpass filter for UWB RFID applications,” Electron. Lett., vol. 49, no. 22, pp. 1396–1398, Oct. 2013. [9] J. Wang, H. Cui, and G. Zhang, “Design of compact microstrip lowpass filter with ultra-wide stopband,” Electron. Lett., vol. 48, no. 14, pp. 854–856, Jul. 2012. [10] J. Xu, Y.-X. Ji, W. Wu, and C. Miao, “Design of miniaturized microstrip LPF and wideband BPF with ultra-wide stopband,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 23, no. 8, pp. 397–399, Aug. 2013. [11] A. Balalem, A. Ali, J. Machac, and A. Omar, “Quasi-elliptic microstrip low-pass filters using an interdigital DGS slot,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 17, no. 8, pp. 586–588, Aug. 2007. [12] H. Cao, W. Guan, S. He, and L. Yang, “Compact lowpass filter with high selectivity using G-shaped defected microstrip structure,” Progr. Electromagn. Res. Lett., vol. 33, pp. 55–62, 2012. [13] M. Kufa and Z. Raida, “Lowpass filter with reduced fractal defected ground structure,” Electron. Lett., vol. 49, no. 3, pp. 199–201, Jan. 2013. [14] K. Samanta and I. Robertson, “Characterisation and application of embedded lumped elements in multilayer advanced thick-film multichipmodule technology,” IET Microw. Antennas Propag., vol. 6, no. 1, pp. 52–59, Jan. 2012. [15] G. Karimi, A. Lalbakhsh, and H. Siahkamari, “Design of sharp roll-off lowpass filter with ultra wide stopband,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 23, no. 6, pp. 303–305, Jun. 2013. [16] J.-M. Muoz-Ferreras and R. Gomez-Garcia, “A digital interpretation of frequency-periodic signal-interference microwave passive filters,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 62, no. 11, pp. 2633–2640, Nov. 2014. [17] T. Jensen, V. Zhurbenko, V. Krozer, and P. Meincke, “Coupled transmission lines as impedance transformer,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 55, no. 12, pp. 2957–2965, Dec. 2007. [18] F. Cervera, J. Hong, and N. Thomson, “Development of packaged UWB passive devices using LCP multilayer circuit technology,” in Proc. 7th Eur. Microwave Integrated Circuits Conf. (EuMIC), Oct. 2012, pp. 770–773. Francisco Cervera (S'10) received the B.Eng. degree in telecommunications engineering from Universidad Europea de Madrid, Madrid, Spain, in 2007, and the M.Sc. degree in mobile communications from Heriot-Watt University, Edinburgh, U.K., where he is currently working towards the Ph.D. degree. His research interests include miniature, self-packaged, multilayer RF/microwave filters using LCP materials, and integration for wireless communication and radar systems. Jiasheng Hong (M’94–SM’05–F’12) received the D.Phil. degree in engineering science from the University of Oxford, Oxford, U.K., in 1994. His doctoral dissertation concerned EM theory and applications. In 1994, he joined the University of Birmingham, Birmingham, U.K., where he was involved with microwave applications of high-temperature superconductors, EM modeling, and circuit optimization. In 2001, he joined the Department of Electrical, Electronic and Computer Engineering, Heriot-Watt University, Edinburgh, U.K., and is currently a Professor leading a team for research into advanced RF/microwave device technologies. He has authored and coauthored over 200 journal and conference papers, and two books, Microstrip Filters for RF/Microwave Applications (Wiley, 1st ed., 2001, 2nd ed., 2011) and RF and Microwave Coupled-Line Circuits (Artech House, 2nd ed., 2007). His current interests involve RF/microwave devices, such as antennas and filters, for wireless communications and radar systems, as well as novel material and device technologies including multilayer circuit technologies using package materials such as liquid crystal polymer, RF MEMS, ferroelectric and high-temperature superconducting devices.
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES
1
Novel Coupling Matrix Synthesis for Single-Layer Substrate-Integrated Evanescent-Mode Cavity Tunable Bandstop Filter Design Shahrokh Saeedi, Student Member, IEEE, Juseop Lee, Member, IEEE, and Hjalti H. Sigmarsson, Member, IEEE
Abstract—A new technique for designing tunable bandstop filters is presented. A novel coupling matrix synthesis method for this type of bandstop filter is shown. Phase cancellation, through combining two bandpass filters, is used to derive the coupling matrix. Therefore, classical coupling mechanisms utilized to implement bandpass filters can be used to design and realize bandstop filters. Using this method, bandstop filters can be designed without source-to-load coupling. This eliminates the need for a second substrate when compared to previously reported bandstop filters implemented using substrate-integrated evanescent-mode cavity technology, though the method itself is quite general. Finally, examples of tunable bandstop filters in the range from 3.0 to 3.6 GHz are demonstrated to verify the proposed method. Index Terms—Bandstop filter, coupling matrix synthesis, phase cancellation, source-to-load coupling, tunable.
I. INTRODUCTION
F
UTURE microwave systems operating in an evercrowded spectrum will require agile front-ends. Agility enables cognitive frequency response control suitable for dynamic spectral environments. Therefore, such sophisticated systems are not bound to single front-end architectures in contrast to past and current systems [1], [2]. Reconfigurable microwave filters will play an important role in such high-performance systems enabling different system architectures for future software-based radios, satellite communication systems, and multi-band/multi-functional radars. Consequently, extensive research has been conducted over the past decade on the synthesis, design, and implementation of reconfigurable microwave filters [3]. An electronically fully controllable filter with tunable center frequency, bandwidth, and phase performance along with reconfigurable frequency response, order, and location/number of poles is the ultimate goal of filter designers. Such an optimum filter can be field programmed to Manuscript received June 01, 2015; revised September 16, 2015; accepted October 05, 2015. This work was supported by the Agency for Defense Development (ADD) Daejeon, Korea under Contract UD120046FD. S. Saeedi and H. H. Sigmarsson are with the Advanced Radar Research Center (ARRC), School of Electrical and Computer Engineering, The University of Oklahoma, Norman, OK 73019 USA (e-mail: [email protected]; [email protected]). J. Lee is with the College of Information and Communications, Korea University, Seoul 136-701, Korea (e-mail: [email protected]). Color versions of one or more of the figures in this paper are available online at http://ieeexplore.ieee.org. Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/TMTT.2015.2490075
adaptively process RF signals with arbitrary frequency content for any given application in any dynamic spectral environment. From a system point of view, noncognitive microwave systems with single front-end architectures need to filter the input signals using a bandpass filter, as knowledge of the spectral environment is unavailable. This requirement is the base of fearbased front-end architecture in which all input frequencies, except the range of interest, are attenuated [1], [2]. These architectures with tunable bandpass filters have been shown to be promising for mitigating interference in an environment containing multiple interfering signals. However, the added insertion loss of such filters causes an increase in noise figure, resulting in degraded system sensitivity and thus reduced overall system performance [4]. In contrast, future cognitive microwave systems will be capable of operating in the following modes: 1) no filtering when no significant interfering signal are present; 2) bandpass filtering when there are multiple interfering signals; or 3) bandstop filtering when strong adjacent interference is encountered. Many systems would benefit greatly from the last mode, which can be referred to as a bandstop-based front-end architecture. This configuration exhibits a reduced system noise figure, as the insertion loss of bandstop filters can be kept low, and at the same time used to protect the system from receiver nonlinearities resulting from suppression of the interfering signals [2]. Dynamic spectral access and concurrent transmit–receive radars, broadband radios in the presence of co-site interference, ultra-high-sensitivity receivers, and spectrum-sensing cognitive radios are examples of such systems. Therefore, tunable bandstop filters are going to be utilized in conjunction with tunable bandpass filters in high-performance reconfigurable filters to add such flexibility to future systems. This is a new application added to the previous tasks of bandstop filters in attenuating harmonic frequencies at the output of a nonlinear power amplifier or suppressing local oscillator re-radiation. Although a lot of progress has been made in bandpass and bandstop filter design, different techniques for bandstop filter design and implementation still need to be investigated. Conventionally, microwave bandstop filters have been designed using a transmission line between the source and load ports coupled at quarter wavelength (or odd multiples of that) intervals to bandstop resonators (anti-resonators), both for static and tunable filters [5]–[7]. Bandstop filters designed using this method can be implemented via different technologies including coaxial lines, waveguides, and substrate integrated
0018-9480 © 2015 IEEE. Personal use is permitted, but republication/redistribution requires IEEE permission. See http://www.ieee.org/publications_standards/publications/rights/index.html for more information.
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. 2
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES
waveguides (SIWs) [8], [9]. Although many scholars have contributed to the design of bandstop filters, direct synthesis of bandstop filters was first presented in [10]. It was shown that Chebyshev bandstop filters can be designed using the same folded fully canonical topology used for the synthesis of generalized Chebyshev (pseudoelliptic) and elliptic bandpass filters [11], [12]. Based on the method presented in [10], and due to the use of a folded canonical structure in the design of bandstop filter, successive placement of the resonators coupled to a main transmission line is not required. Therefore, bandstop filters can be implemented more compactly. Using this method, it is possible to realize up to reflection zeros for a bandstop filter with resonators because the folded canonical structure includes direct source-to-load coupling. The tunable bandstop filter with variable attenuation introduced in [13] also utilizes direct source-to-load coupling. A design method for bandstop filters without source-to-load coupling based on dual-band combline filter transformation was demonstrated in [14]. However, the provided design formulas have been derived for combline structures without showing the synthesis procedure for realizing the coupling matrix. More recently, evanescent-mode cavity filters were used to design and implement tunable reconfigurable bandstop filters as well as bandpass–bandstop filter cascades [2], [4], [15]–[24]. The benefits of evanescent-mode cavity filters include high- , multi-octave tuning ranges, and low-power consumption in actuation circuitry. For these reasons, extensive research has been devoted to the design and development of reconfigurable evanescent-mode cavity filters. The aforementioned bandstop filters also utilize source-to-load coupling. This source-to-load coupling is implemented using a microstrip transmission line between the filter ports, fabricated on a separate layer and laminated to the back of the cavity substrate, to which the resonators are coupled in a shunt configuration. However, in the bandpass filters implemented using the same technology, a series feed was used [15]. Therefore, although the resonators are identical for both bandpass and bandstop filters, due to different coupling schemes the physical implementation of each filter is different. Thus their integration increases the complexity of the fabrication process and reduces yield. This paper presents a new coupling matrix synthesis method for designing bandstop filters without source-to-load coupling. To this end, phase cancellation is used to provide the notch in the frequency response of the filter. The presented method provides the option of designing and implementing bandstop filters using the same coupling scheme that is used for bandpass filters. For demonstration, a coupling matrix for a second-order bandstop filter is derived and examples of single substrate evanescent-mode cavity bandstop filters with different bandwidths are provided to prove the concept. The proposed design method is quite general and can be applied to higher order filters and implemented in any filter technology. II. THEORY
BANDSTOP FILTER DESIGN USING PHASE CANCELLATION
OF
A. Bandstop Filter Topology In order to design a bandstop filter using phase cancellation, two different signal paths with 180 phase shift must be pro-
Fig. 1. Coupling routing diagram for a second-order bandstop filter designed using phase cancellation.
Fig. 2. Coupling routing diagram for an th-order bandstop filter designed using the: (a) method presented in [14] and (b) proposed method in this paper.
vided between the source and load. The second path behaves like the source-to-load coupling; however, it should not be between the source and load ports. This idea is shown in Fig. 1 for a second-order bandstop filter. Since every coupling provides a 90 phase shift, the second signal path must pass through two more couplings so that the two signal samples are added out-ofphase at the filter output to suppress the signal at the stopband region of the filter response. In addition, the coupling values must be designed in such a way that the two signal samples have the same magnitude at the filter output to cancel out each other perfectly. The benefit of using this technique is that bandstop filters can be designed and implemented using two bandpass filters. Therefore, the internal and external coupling between the ports and resonators are realized using the same methods used in bandpass filters. The direct path in the bandstop filter should be a broadband bandpass filter while the indirect path is a narrowband bandpass filter. This idea can be extended to any filter order as long as the conditions for the phase and magnitude of two signal samples are met. Since the indirect signal path has two resonators and couplings in common with the direct path, the synthesis method must take this into account. Similar to the implementation in [14], designing an th-order bandstop filter resonators although they using phase cancellation requires use different coupling routing diagrams. Fig. 2 shows the coupling routing diagram for each case.
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. SAEEDI et al.: NOVEL COUPLING MATRIX SYNTHESIS FOR TUNABLE BANDSTOP FILTER DESIGN
3
(6)
Fig. 3. Decomposition of a second-order bandstop filter into two bandpass filters.
B. Coupling Matrix
and in the When these two filters are recombined, coupling matrices cannot retain their original values. They are forced to be either 0.8409 or 1.1430. This means that either of these filters can be synthesized directly to have the desired response while the other one must be re-synthesized with two predefined external couplings. Otherwise, the response of the filter is distorted. If, for example, the second-order bandpass filter is designed independently, the coupling matrix of the fourth-order bandpass filter must be rewritten as
To synthesize the coupling values for the bandstop filter, it is first decomposed into two bandpass filters. Fig. 3 shows the coupling routing diagram for the two bandpass filters resulting from the decomposition of the second-order bandstop filter. Each bandpass filter has only inline coupling and therefore can be designed easily. For such a filter, the coupling values are calculated using (1)
(7)
where (8)
where represents the low-pass normalized prototype element value. Therefore, the coupling matrix of the second- and fourthorder bandpass filters can be found, respectively, as
of this filter can be presented using its new coupling matrix [25] as (9)
(2)
where of and
and
(10)
(3)
Assuming symmetric frequency responses for the bandpass filters, and
where is the coupling matrix, is similar to the identity matrix, except that , is the matrix with all entries zeros, except for , and is the frequency variable of the low-pass prototype . From general filter theory, the transmission and reflection functions of a two-port lossless filter network can be written using characteristic polynomials and as [26]
(4)
The low-pass normalized prototype can be obtained from any common filter synthesis approximation. In the case of maximally flat filters, for instance, the coupling matrices can be written as
(5) and
is the element of the inverse matrix is the order of the filter. Matrix is defined as
(11) and (12) where is a constant used to normalize the highest degree coefficients of the polynomials to one. The characteristic polynomials are related to each other due to the conservation of energy,
(13)
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. 4
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES
Therefore, in the case of a fourth-order maximally flat lowpass prototype filter with the corner frequency of rad/s, the transmission function is given as (14) cannot Constructing (9) using (7) and (10) shows that generate a transmission response similar to (14) unless frequency scaling is introduced to (14). Applying frequency scaling, (15) to (14), equating (14) and (9), and finally solving the equations simultaneously will result in (16) (17) (18) Enforcing a predefined external coupling gives the value of , and hence, the rest of the coupling values. For example, according to (5) for , (16)–(18) will give (19)
Fig. 4. Frequency response of the bandstop filter using the proposed topology.
width of 0.505 rad/s, and it will be embedded in the passband of a bandpass filter with 3-dB bandwidth of 2.28 rad/s. The coupling matrix of such a bandstop filter is identical to , except that instead of zero. Applying an additional frequency scaling to the resulting coupling matrices can be used to normalize their corner frequencies. The interesting observation is that both methods give the same normalized coupling matrix as
(20) and (21) Therefore, the coupling matrix of the fourth-order maximally flat bandpass filter with corner frequency of rad/s is written as
(24) The frequency response of the final bandstop filter with a normalized 3-dB bandwidth is shown in Fig. 4. C. Higher Order Bandstop Filter and Bandpass Filter Synthesis With Predefined Coupling
(22) Finally, combining (5) and (22) gives the bandstop filter coupling matrix
Extension of the bandstop filter synthesis using phase cancellation through combing two bandpass filters requires the synthesis of a bandpass filter with predefined external coupling. Applying a similar procedure to a general bandpass filter of order results in (25)
(26)
(23) The matrix has an embedded notch with 3-dB bandwidth of 0.273 rad/s in the passband of a bandpass filter with a 3-dB bandwidth of 1.236 rad/s. It is worth mentioning that if the fourth-order bandpass filter is synthesized directly and two predefined external couplings are forced on the second-order bandpass filter, the resulting bandstop filter will have a 3-dB band-
where the prime has been used to express the filter’s coupling after the frequency scaling and represents the poles of the filter. For maximally flat and equal-ripple filters, the poles are expressed, respectively, as (27) and (28)
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. SAEEDI et al.: NOVEL COUPLING MATRIX SYNTHESIS FOR TUNABLE BANDSTOP FILTER DESIGN
where
5
is defined as for
(29)
For the equal-ripple filters, (30) where is called the ripple factor and is related to the filter passband return loss, in dB, as (31) In [27], it was shown that, for both filter approximations, (32)
Fig. 5. Frequency response of a fourth-order bandpass filter. (solid line) Max, (dashed line) nonimally flat, (dotted line) nonmaximally flat with . maximally flat with
for
Therefore, (25) is written as
and will be
(33) which shows how the new corner frequency can be found from the predefined external coupling and the first coefficient of the low-pass prototype. The remaining new coupling coefficients can then be found using (26). It is worth noting that (26) and (33) can also be used to re-calculate the coupling coefficients for a bandpass filter either in the case of enforcing a predefined internal coupling or frequency scaling of the corner frequency. It is possible to combine (26) and (33) in order to eliminate the corner frequency. This results in a relationship between the new coupling coefficients that is independent of the frequency scaling factor. For example, in the case of a fourth-order bandpass filter, it can be shown that (34) where, for a maximally flat filter (with simplified into
), (34) can be (35)
This suggests that when is forced to have a specific value, can be chosen arbitrarily and can be found from (35). This provides another degree of freedom to the design that allows for enforcing freely in addition to . However, such a selection will result in a nonmaximally flat bandpass filter. For instance, using (35) in the previous example, the coupling matrix of the fourth-order bandpass filter with enforced will be
(36)
(37) . However, as shown in (23), the conventional for coupling matrix of a fourth-order maximally flat bandpass filter with requires to have . The frequency responses of these filters, after being scaled to have normalized corner frequency, are compared in Fig. 5. The nonmaximally flat bandpass filters have a slightly wider (for the case of ) or narrower bandwidth (for the case of ) and the reflection zeros are not all at rad/s, which means that the passband ripple for the nonmaximally flat bandpass filters is nonzero. However, this ripple would be quite acceptable for many practical applications. III. BANDSTOP FILTER DESIGN AND FABRICATION In order to verify the theory presented in Section II, two prototype bandstop filters were designed and fabricated using substrate integrated evanescent-mode cavity filter technology. Fig. 6 shows the structure of a typical cylindrical integrated evanescent-mode cavity resonator. The resonator consists of an electrically short coaxial cavity that is heavily loaded with an air-filled capacitor. The loading capacitor is formed using a movable conductive diaphragm on top of the cavity post. Therefore, the cavity resonates at frequencies with much longer wavelength than the cavity height [28]. The filter is tuned across the desired tuning frequency range by displacement of the diaphragm, which results in the change in the loading capacitance. The majority of the electric field in the resonator is confined in the gap above the post. Therefore, the dielectric losses are kept to a minimum with the only contribution coming from the fringing fields around the loading capacitor. This results in a resonator with a very high quality factor. The other benefit of heavily loading the resonator is the increased sensitivity of filter
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. 6
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES
Fig. 6. Physical structure of a typical coaxial substrate integrated evanescentmode cavity resonator with plated vias forming the coaxial cavity post and exterior wall.
Fig. 7. Simulated results for compensation of insertion loss in the bandstop filter passband using asynchronous tuning mode. (solid line) After compensation and (dotted line) before compensation.
tuning to diaphragm deflections. When combined with external piezoelectric actuation the result is a wide frequency tuning range without compromising the quality factor. In general, the cavity and gap dimensions are designed based on the required quality factor, tuning frequency range, and tuning sensitivity of the resonator. More details on the design of evanescent-mode cavity resonators can be found in [28] and [29]. Both prototype filters are second-order frequency-tunable bandstop filters in the band of 3.0–3.6 GHz. They are designed to provide low passband insertion loss in the tuning range, 10% away from the center frequency. Therefore, the passband is from 3.0 to 3.6 GHz and the bandstop filter can be tuned anywhere within this range. The first filter is an extremely narrowband bandstop filter with 10-dB fractional bandwidth of 0.2% and the second one is a narrowband bandstop filter with 10-dB fractional bandwidth of 2.0%. The filters were implemented in 3.175-mm-thick Rogers TMM3 microwave substrate ( at 10 GHz). The structure of the filters is similar to what is shown in [30]. Each cavity has a 13.7-mm diameter and a 3.8-mm post formed using 0.8-mm copper-plated vias. The initial air gap was designed to be 51 m at 3.3 GHz. In order to tune the filters from 3.0 to 3.6 GHz, the gap needs to be changed from 40 to 70 m, respectively. Piezoelectric actuators (with a diameter of 12.7 mm, a thickness of 0.41 mm, and 19- m unloaded vertical movement) from Piezo Systems Inc. are attached using conductive epoxy to the diaphragm external to the cavity above the posts. They are used to provide the required physical displacement. As mentioned in Section II, the bandstop filter consists of two bandpass filters; a wideband bandpass filter (direct path) that functions like a transmission line between the filter ports and a narrowband bandpass filter that embeds the notch inside the wideband filter response. Again, similar to [14], the bandwidth of the wide bandpass filter determines the passband of the bandstop filter. Therefore, when a bandstop filter with a very wide passband is required, the bandwidth of the bandpass filter in the direct path must be increased. This limitation can be overcome by tuning of the resonators 1 and 4 to achieve lower insertion loss in the passband of the bandstop filter. Therefore, using asynchronous tuning mode, tuning of resonators 1 and 4 can be used to compensate for the insertion loss of the bandstop filter in
the desired passband even if the wideband bandpass filter does not have enough bandwidth to create a low-loss path between the ports in the desired tuning range. Fig. 7 shows the 2% bandstop filter response tuned at 3.6 GHz while the passband insertion loss at 3.0 GHz has been compensated using asynchronous tuning of the resonators in the direct path by a 300-MHz offset from the center frequency. The center frequency of the notch in the bandstop filter is controlled using resonators 2 and 3. An interesting observation in this response is that due to the use of four resonators in the bandstop filter design, four reflection zeros are incorporated in the return loss of the filter. Asynchronous tuning of the resonators can split and change the position of these reflection zeros. This results in sharper transition from the stopband to the passband of filter on one side of the stopband. By controlling the location of the poles, a bandstop filter with either constant absolute bandwidth or constant fractional bandwidth is achievable. Constant absolute bandwidth was previously reported in [14]. To design the wideband bandpass filter, a mixed electricand magnetic-field coupling technique was used [30]. For both fabricated prototypes, a bandpass filter with 3-dB bandwidth of 1.25 GHz at 3.3 GHz was used. The 2-D and 3-D electromagnetic (EM) models of the bandstop filter, simulated in ANSYS HFSS, along with the definition of primary dimensions for the case of 2.0%-fractional-bandwidth prototype are shown in Fig. 8. Table I summarizes the primary dimensions for this filter. A photograph of the fabricated prototype for the 2.0%-fractional-bandwidth case is shown in Fig. 9. All coupling mechanisms, except the one between resonators 2 and 3, have been implemented using mixed electric- and magnetic-field coupling. The 0.2%-fractional-bandwidth bandstop filter was also designed and fabricated similarly, except that in this filter, in addition to the coupling between resonators 2 and 3, the coupling between resonators 1 and 2 and also between resonator 3 and 4 were implemented only using magnetic-field coupling. The fabricated 0.2%-fractional-bandwidth prototype is shown in Fig. 10. Different coupling mechanisms between the resonators can be seen by comparing Figs. 9 and 10. Additionally, these figures also represent two stages in the fabrication process: 1) prior to attaching the piezoelectric actuators with the laminated
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. SAEEDI et al.: NOVEL COUPLING MATRIX SYNTHESIS FOR TUNABLE BANDSTOP FILTER DESIGN
7
Fig. 9. Fabricated prototype bandstop filter with 10-dB fractional bandwidth of 2.0% at 3.3 GHz. Filter shown prior to piezoelectric actuator attachment.
Fig. 10. Fabricated prototype bandstop filter with 10-dB fractional bandwidth of 0.2% at 3.3 GHz. Filter shown after piezoelectric actuator attachment.
(38) Fig. 8. Simulated model for the bandstop filter with 10-dB fractional bandwidth of 2.0% at 3.3 GHz. (a) 3-D view, (b) 2-D top view, and (c) 2-D bottom view. TABLE I 2.0%-FRACTIONAL-BANDWIDTH FABRICATED FILTER PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
and for the 2.0% filter, (39) Weakly coupled cavity resonators were included in the fabrication run in order to characterize the unloaded quality factor. This can be used to include the impact of processing conditions in the EM bandstop filter simulations. IV. MEASURED RESULTS
copper diaphragm visible and 2) after the piezoelectric actuators attachment. The coupling matrices for both prototypes were obtained using (35) for a nonmaximally flat filter. For the 0.2% filter,
The prototype filters were measured using an Agilent Technologies N5222A PNA. Keithley 2400 Sourcemeters were used to bias the piezoelectric actuators. An unloaded quality factor of 620 at 3.3 GHz was extracted by measuring the transmission response of the weakly coupled cavity resonators. This quality factor value was used to characterize the conductivity of the plated copper, which was then used in all circuit and full-wave simulations. Fig. 11 shows the measured result for the 0.2% bandstop filter tuned between 3.0 and 3.6 GHz. When the filter is tuned at 3.0 GHz, the insertion loss from 3.3 to 3.6 GHz ranges from 0.67 to 0.95 dB, respectively. Also when the filter is tuned at 3.6 GHz, the insertion loss from 3.0 to 3.3 GHz ranges from 0.42 to 0.32 dB, respectively. A broader view of the bandstop filter response tuned at 3.3 GHz showing the wideband bandpass filter response is also depicted in Fig. 12. Due to limited bandwidth of the wideband bandpass filter, when the bandstop notch is tuned to one end of the tuning range, the insertion loss of bandstop filter in the other end of the tuning range is increased. Such a case, along with the asynchronous tuning compensation solution, is shown in Fig. 13. The filter has been tuned to 3.0 GHz and the insertion loss at 3.6 GHz has been compensated. This reduces the insertion loss of the filter from 0.95 to 0.29 dB. All the measurements include the loss of two SMA end-launch connectors.
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. 8
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES
Fig. 11. Measured response of the 0.2% bandstop filter tuned between 3.0 and 3.6 GHz.
Fig. 14. Measured response of the 2% bandstop filter tuned between 3.0 and 3.6 GHz.
Fig. 12. Measured versus EM simulated response of the 0.2% bandstop filter tuned at 3.3 GHz. (solid line) Measurement and (dotted line) simulation.
Fig. 15. Measured versus EM simulated 10-dB bandwidth of the 2% bandstop filter. (solid line) Measurement and (dotted line) simulation.
Fig. 13. Measured result for asynchronous tuning of the 0.2% bandstop filter tuned at 3.0 GHz to compensate insertion loss at 3.6 GHz. (solid line) After compensation and (dotted line) before compensation.
Fig. 16. Measured versus EM simulated insertion loss of the 2% bandstop filter at 10% away from the center frequency. (solid line) Measurement and (dotted line) simulation.
The measured response of the 2% bandstop filter tuned between 3.0 and 3.6 GHz is shown in Fig. 14. During this measurement, resonators 1 and 4 were synchronously tuned. Fig. 15 illustrates a comparison between the measured and simulated 10-dB bandwidth of the filter. The measurement exhibits 10-dB bandwidths ranging from 1.92% at 3.0 GHz to 2.04% at 3.6 GHz. Measured and simulated insertion loss of the bandstop filter in the passband, 10% away from (above and below) the center frequency of the filter in the desired frequency range (i.e.,
3.0–3.6 GHz), are also shown in Fig. 16. In Fig. 16, the horizontal axis shows the bandstop center frequency , while the vertical axes are showing the insertion loss of the filter at 0.9 and 1.1 . A passband insertion loss of less than 0.6 dB is guaranteed across the entire range. In general, there is a good agreement between the measurements and simulations. The slightly higher insertion loss in the measurement can be attributed to the SMA connectors. Also, nonplanar movement of the copper membrane on top of cavities and finally fabrication imperfections and tolerances contribute
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. SAEEDI et al.: NOVEL COUPLING MATRIX SYNTHESIS FOR TUNABLE BANDSTOP FILTER DESIGN
to the slightly narrower bandwidth in comparison to the simulation. V. CONCLUSION The theory for a new and elegant synthesis method for bandstop filters has been presented in this paper. The proposed method utilizes phase cancellation to realize the coupling matrix without source-to-load coupling. Therefore, the same coupling implementation methods used for bandpass filters can be used for designing and implementing bandstop filters. In fact, through the application of this design method, a bandstop filter notch is embedded in the passband of a wideband bandpass filter. The procedure utilizes bandpass filter frequency scaling. This scaling is equivalent to re-synthesis of the coupling matrix when a predefined coupling value is forced into the matrix. The appropriate expressions for calculating the new coupling values are provided. In general, this method can be utilized for scaling coupling matrices with forced values in order to realize filters with practical limitations. To verify the theory, examples of second-order bandstop filters with 0.2% and 2.0% fractional bandwidths in the range of 3.0–3.6 GHz were provided. The prototypes were implemented in single-layer substrate-integrated evanescent-mode cavity technology. The proposed design technique eliminates the extra substrate used, in previously reported substrate-integrated evanescent-mode cavity bandstop filters, to form the source-to-load coupling. Good agreement between simulations and measurements was observed. To the authors’ best knowledge, this is the first time that a bandstop filter design without source-to-load coupling using phase cancellation has been reported. REFERENCES [1] W. J. Chappell, E. J. Naglich, C. Maxey, and A. C. Guyette, “Putting the radio in ‘software-defined radio’: Harware developments for adaptable RF systems,” Proc. IEEE, vol. 102, no. 3, pp. 307–320, Mar. 2014. [2] E. J. Naglich, J. Lee, D. Peroulis, and W. J. Chappell, “Switchless tunable bandstop-to-all-pass reconfigurable filter,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 60, no. 5, pp. 1258–1265, May 2012. [3] R. Gomez-Garcia, M.-A. Sanchez-Soriano, K.-W. Tam, and Q. Xue, “Flexible filters,” IEEE Microw. Mag., vol. 15, no. 5, pp. 43–54, Jul./ Aug. 2014. [4] J. Lee, E. J. Naglich, H. H. Sigmarsson, D. Peroulis, and W. J. Chappell, “New bandstop filter circuit topology and its application to design of a bandstop-to-bandpass switchable filter,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 61, no. 3, pp. 1114–1123, Mar. 2013. [5] G. L. Matthaei, L. Young, and E. Jones, Microwave Filters, Impedance Matching Networks and Coupling Structures. New York, NY, USA: McGraw-Hill, 1964. [6] J. D. Rhodes, “Waveguide bandstop elliptic function filters,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. MTT-20, no. 11, pp. 715–718, Nov. 1972. [7] I. C. Hunter and J. D. Rhodes, “Electronically tunable microwave bandstop filters,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. MTT-30, no. 9, pp. 1361–1367, Sep. 1982. [8] S. Han, X.-L. Wang, and Y. Fan, “Analysis and design of multipleband bandstop filters,” Progr. Electromagn. Res., vol. 70, pp. 297–306, 2007. [9] A. B. Hisham and I. C. Hunter, “Design and fabrication of a substrate integrated waveguide bandstop filter,” in IEEE 38th Eur. Microw. Conf., 2008, pp. 40–42. [10] S. Amari and U. Rosenberg, “Direct synthesis of a new class of bandstop filters,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 52, no. 2, pp. 607–616, Feb. 2004.
9
[11] R. J. Cameron, “Advanced coupling matrix synthesis techniques for microwave filters,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 51, no. 1, pp. 1–10, Jan. 2003. [12] R. J. Cameron, “General prototype network synthesis for microwave filters,” ESA J., vol. 6, pp. 193–206, 1982. [13] D. R. Jachowski, “Frequency-agile bandstop filter with tunable attenuation,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig., 2009. [14] A. I. Abunjaileh and I. C. Hunter, “Tunable bandpass and bandstop filters based on dual-band combline structures,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 58, no. 12, pp. 3710–3719, Dec. 2010. [15] E. J. Naglich, J. Lee, D. Peroulis, and W. J. Chappell, “Tunable, substrate integrated, high Q filter cascade for high isolation,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig., 2010. [16] J. Lee, E. J. Naglich, and W. J. Chappell, “Frequency response control in frequency-tunable bandstop filters,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 20, no. 12, pp. 669–671, Dec. 2010. [17] E. J. Naglich, J. Lee, D. Peroulis, and W. J. Chappell, “Bandpass-bandstop filter cascade performance over wide frequency tuning ranges,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 58, no. 12, pp. 3945–3953, Dec. 2010. [18] E. J. Naglich, J. Lee, D. Peroulis, and W. J. Chappell, “High-Q tunable bandstop filters with adaptable bandwidth and pole allocation,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig., 2011. [19] E. J. Naglich, J. Lee, D. Peroulis, and W. J. Chappell, “Extended passband bandstop filter cascade with continuous 0.85–6.6-GHz coverage,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 60, no. 1, pp. 21–30, Jan. 2012. [20] E. J. Naglich, J. Lee, and D. Peroulis, “Tunable bandstop filter with a 17-to-1 upper passband,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig., 2012. [21] T. Snow, J. Lee, and W. J. Chappell, “Tunable high quality-factor absorptive bandstop filter design,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig., 2012. [22] T.-H. Lee, C.-S. Ahn, Y.-S. Kim, and J. Lee, “Extension of bandstop filter topology with inter-resonator coupling structures to higherorder filters,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 23, no. 8, pp. 403–405, Aug. 2013. [23] E. J. Naglich, A. C. Guyette, and D. Peroulis, “High-Q intrinsically-switched quasi-absorptive tunable bandstop filter with electrically-short resonators,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig., 2014. [24] K. Lee, T.-H. Lee, C.-S. Ahn, Y.-S. Kim, and J. Lee, “Reconfigurable dual-stopband filters with reduced number of couplings between a transmission line and resonators,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 25, no. 2, pp. 106–108, Feb. 2015. [25] J.-S. Hong, Microstrip Filters for RF/Microwave Applications, 2nd ed. New York, NY, USA: Wiley, 2011. [26] R. J. Cameron, C. M. Kudsia, and R. R. Mansour, Microwave Filters for Communication Systems: Fundamentals, Design, and Applications. New York, NY, USA: Wiley, 2007. [27] S. Saeedi, J. Lee, and H. H. Sigmarsson, “A new property of the maximally-flat lowpass filter prototype coefficients with application in dissipative loss calculations,” Int. J. Circuit Theory Appl., Aug. 2015, submitted for publication. [28] H. Joshi, H. H. Sigmarsson, and W. J. Chappell, “Analytical modeling of highly loaded evanescent-mode cavity resonators for widely tunable high-Q filter applications,” in Proc. Union Radio Sci. Int. (URSI) Gen. Assembly, Chicago, IL, USA, Aug. 2008, Session D09, 4 pp. [29] X. Liu, L. P. Katehi, W. J. Chappell, and D. Peroulis, “High-Q tunable microwave cavity resonators and filters using SOI-based RF MEMS tuners,” J. Microelectromech. Syst., vol. 19, no. 4, pp. 774–784, Aug. 2010. [30] S. Saeedi, J. Lee, and H. H. Sigmarsson, “Broadband implementation of tunable, substrate-integrated, evanescent-mode, cavity bandpass filters,” in IEEE 44th Eur. Microw. Conf., 2014, pp. 849–852. Shahrokh Saeedi (S’12) received the B.Sc. and M.Sc. degrees (with honors) in electrical engineering from the Iran University of Science and Technology, Tehran, Iran, in 1999 and 2002, respectively, and is currently working toward the Ph.D. degree in electrical and computer engineering at The University of Oklahoma, Norman, OK, USA. From 2002 to 2004, he was with the SAMA Company, Tehran, Iran, as an RF Design Engineer, where he developed various RF circuits and systems such as microwave up/down converters, filter banks, power amplifiers, and digital microwave radios. From 2004 to 2011, he was with the
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. 10
SAER Engineering Company, Tehran, Iran, as a Senior Research and Development Engineer and Project Manager, where he was involved in RF/microwave sub-system and system design such as ultra-wideband receivers, RF channelizers, phase-locked oscillators, and fixed/tunable filters from high-frequency (HF) to Ku-band. His research is focused on filter synthesis and fabrication for widely adaptable RF front-ends in cognitive radios and radar systems. Mr. Saeedi is a Member of the IEEE Microwave Theory and Techniques Society (IEEE MTT-S) and the International Microelectronics and Packaging Society (IMAPS). He is a co-founder and chair of the IEEE MTT-S Student Branch Chapter, The University of Oklahoma.
Juseop Lee (S’02–M’03) received the B.E. and M.E. degrees in radio science and engineering from Korea University, Seoul, Korea, in 1997 and 1999, respectively, and the Ph.D. degree in electrical engineering from The University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI, USA, in 2009. In 1999, he joined LG Information and Communications (now LG Electronics) in Korea, where his activities included design and reliability analysis of RF components for code-division multiple-access (CDMA) cellular systems. In 2001, he joined the Electronics and Telecommunications Research Institute (ETRI), Daejeon, Korea, where he was involved in the design of passive microwave equipment for Ku- and Ka-band communications satellites. In 2005, he joined The University of Michigan, where he was a Research Assistant and Graduate Student Instructor with the Radiation Laboratory, and where his research activities were focused on millimeter-wave radars and synthesis techniques for multiple passband microwave filters. In 2009, he joined Purdue University, West Lafayette, IN, USA, where he was a Post-Doctoral Research Associate, and his activities included the design of adaptable RF systems. In 2012, he
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES
joined Korea University, Seoul, Korea, where he is currently an Associate Professor. His research interests include RF and microwave components, satellite transponders, wireless power transfer, and electromagnetic theories. Prof. Lee was a recipient of the Graduate Fellowship presented by the Korea Science and Engineering Foundation (KOSEF) and the Rackham Predoctoral Fellowship presented by the Rackham Graduate School, The University of Michigan. He was also the recipient of the IEEE Microwave Theory and Techniques Society (IEEE MTT-S) Graduate Fellowship.
Hjalti H. Sigmarsson (S’01–M’10) received the B.S.E.C.E. degree from the University of Iceland, Reykjavik, Iceland, in 2003, and the M.S.E.C.E. and Ph.D. degrees in electrical and computer engineering from Purdue University, West Lafayette, IN, USA, in 2005 and 2010, respectively. He is currently with the School of Electrical and Computer Engineering and the Advanced Radar Research Center (ARRC), The University of Oklahoma, Norman, OK, USA, where he is an Assistant Professor. His current research is focused on reconfigurable RF and microwave hardware for agile communications, measurement and radar systems. His research interests also include spectral management schemes for cognitive radio architectures and advanced packaging utilizing heterogeneous integration techniques. Dr. Sigmarsson is a Member of the IEEE Microwave Theory and Techniques Society (IEEE MTT-S), Eta Kappa Nu, and the International Microelectronics and Packaging Society (IMAPS). He was the recipient of the Best Paper Award of the IMAPS 2008 41st International Symposium on Microelectronics. He was also the recipient of the 2015 Air Force Office of Scientific Research Young Investigator Research Program (YIP) Award to support his research on reconfigurable high-frequency components using phase-change materials.
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES
1
Mechanical Tuning of Substrate Integrated Waveguide Filters Fermín Mira, Member, IEEE, Jordi Mateu, Senior Member, IEEE, and Carlos Collado, Senior Member, IEEE
Abstract—This paper presents a novel approach for tuning substrate integrated waveguide resonators, realized by placing an additional metallized via-hole on the waveguide cavity. The approach presented here can be applied as a trimming technique, as well as to develop filter designs with tunable center frequencies and tunable bandwidths. Three different filters are designed and implemented, demonstrating excellent trimming, 10% tuning of the center frequency, and 100% tuning of the bandwidth, respectively. Index Terms—Filters, open-loop slot, resonator, substrate integrated waveguide (SIW), tuning.
I. INTRODUCTION
T
HE development of substrate integrated waveguide (SIW) technology has presented new opportunities for circuits and systems in the microwave and millimeter-wave frequency range. SIW structures are based on a synthesized waveguide in a planar dielectric substrate with two rows of metallic vias [1], and exhibit a number of advantages, including easy fabrication, compact size, low loss, complete shielding, and easy integration with active devices [2], [3]. Among the wide class of SIW components proposed in the literature, SIW filters have received particular attention due to the possibility of achieving higher quality factor [4], compared to classical planar filters in microstrip and coplanar-waveguide technology. This technology also allows for the inclusion of transmission zeros to improve the selectivity at the band edges [5]. SIW filters are conceptually very similar to filters implemented with waveguide technology, which are conventionally tuned by introducing screws into the resonant cavities and into the coupling apertures. Although the design of a SIW
Manuscript received January 16, 2015; revised June 04, 2015; accepted October 03, 2015. This work was supported in part by the Spanish Government under Grant TEC- 2012-13897-C03-01 and Grant MAT2011-29269-C03-02, in part by the Generalitat de Catalunya under Grant 2014 SGR 1551, and in part by the Cluster of Application and Technology Research in Europe on Nanoelectronics (CATRENE) under the CORTIF CA116- Coexistence of Radio Frequency Transmission in the Future project. F. Mira is with the Centre Tecnológic de Telecomunicacions de Catalunya (CTTC), 08860 Castelldefels, Barcelona, Spain (e-mail: [email protected]). J. Mateu is with the Department of Signal Theory and Communications, Universitat Politècnica de Catalunya (UPC), Barcelona 08034, Spain, and also with the Centre Tecnológic de Telecomunicacions de Catalunya (CTTC), 08860 Castelldefels, Barcelona, Spain (e-mail: [email protected]) C. Collado is with the Department of Signal Theory and Communications, Universitat Politècnica de Catalunya (UPC), Barcelona 08034, Spain (e-mail: [email protected]). Color versions of one or more of the figures in this paper are available online at http://ieeexplore.ieee.org. Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/TMTT.2015.2490144
and waveguide filters is quite similar, this simple mechanical tuning method is not applicable for SIW technology due to the compact physical structure. In addition, for SIW technology, mechanical tolerances are typically higher, and variations in the dielectric permittivity and thickness of the substrate can introduce additional perturbation in the electromagnetic response. For this reason, tuning of SIW filters is crucial to compensate for variations in manufacturing and material properties. Moreover, tuning capability could be applied as a convenient method to change the central frequency and bandwidth of the filter. Electrically tunable resonators have been proposed in [6] where a SIW cavity resonator is combined with a surface mounted varactor to achieve a measured continuous tuning range of 1.2%. In [7], the authors proposed the inclusion of p-i-n diodes to obtain discrete electrical tuning. Discrete mechanical tuning is proposed in [8] by opening or short circuiting a capacitive circular slot with a tuning range of 5% or by using microelectromechanical systems (MEMS) devices [9] with a tuning range of 7%. A more complex system is presented in [10], which uses a cylinder of plasma in the resonator, but presents only simulated results. This paper uses the tuning concept for SIW resonators described in [11] to create SIW tunable filters for the first time. In [11], we developed a new concept to tune SIW resonators by including a slot in the top layer and an additional metallized via-hole in the SIW cavity. The dimension of the slot is mechanically controlled by an external metallic flap. Experimental results were presented in a single resonator showing tuning ranges up to 8%. This concept was also later successfully applied for designing tunable oscillators [12]. This work is novel in at least the following four different respects. • First, we prove that the same concept used for tunable resonators is applicable to the design of tunable filters. • Second, we use the same tuning mechanism to control the coupling between resonators as well as the input and output couplings. This allows one to tune the filter bandwidth and also to improve the matching. • Third, we improve the tuning element performance with the design of a new slot configuration, which provides more accurate control of the resonant frequencies. • Fourth, new flap configurations are used in different parts of the filter network to control either the filter center frequency or the couplings between resonators. These new flaps also provide a means for better control over a continuous tuning range, as detailed in Section II. The application of the tunable mechanism is demonstrated in Section III, which presents the designs and full-wave simulations along with experimental results of three fourth-order SIW
0018-9480 © 2015 IEEE. Personal use is permitted, but republication/redistribution requires IEEE permission. See http://www.ieee.org/publications_standards/publications/rights/index.html for more information.
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. 2
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES
Fig. 1. (a) Details on the dimensions of the tuning element. (b) SIW cavity with tuning element.
tunable filters. The first filter uses the tuning elements as trimming elements to adjust the filter response. The second filter provides a tunable bandwidth of 100% and the third filter offers a central frequency tunability of up to a 10% range. Note as well that the tunable center frequency and tunable bandwidth can be combined together in a single filter design. This is illustrated in the design of the second filter, which is intended to demonstrate a tunable bandwidth, but which also demonstrates a tunable center frequency of up to 4%. II. TUNABLE SIW RESONATOR This section describes the tunable mechanism concept [11] and describes the tuning elements to be used in the following section for the design of tunable filters. A. Tunable SIW: Concept Fig. 1(b) outlines a single resonating SIW cavity fed by microstrip lines. It consists of a conventional SIW resonator with an additional via-hole inside of the cavity. Details of the via-hole can be seen in Fig. 1(a). The via-hole is partially enclosed by a circular slot connected to the top layer through a metallic contact placed at the angle . The via-hole is located in the middle of the cavity and displaced from the center by a distance . The existence of this via-hole perturbs the electromagnetic field distribution from the one in a uniform SIW resonator and this variation gives rise to a change of the resonant frequency. Details in the field distribution for both the side view and bottom view are outlined in Fig. 2. Note that the fundamental resonant frequency of the bare SIW cavity (without a via-hole) it is essentially defined by its width . The inclusion of the via-hole results in a reduced effective width of the cavity, which results in a higher resonant frequency. The position of the via-hole and the orientation of the metallic contact modifies the field distribution and affects the effective width of the cavity, therefore changing the resonant frequency. In absence of metallic contact, only with the slot, the magnetic wall provides an electric field distribution similar to that of a bare cavity [see Fig. 2(a)], whereas with only the via-hole in the absence of a slot, the electric field is compressed and the resonant frequency is increased [see Fig. 2(c)]. From the side view field distribution we can see how, in the case of absence of metallic contact, the field propagates through the slot as in a capacitance coupling [see Fig. 2(a)], whereas in [see
Fig. 2. Electric field distribution on the SIW resonator for both bottom view . (c) Only via-hole and side view. (a) Only slot. (b) Contact placed at . without slot. (d) Contact placed at
Fig. 2(c)], the boundary conditions of an electric wall forces the field drop to zero, and therefore compacting the field as if it was a narrower SIW cavity. The inclusion of the metallic contact with angle provides field distributions and resonant frequencies between both the two states previously described. For , the contact is far from the maximum of the electric field, in this case being more similar to the cavity with only the slot [see Fig. 2(b)]. On the other hand, for , the metallic contact is closer to the maximum of the electric field and the field distribution is similar to the cavity without a slot [see Fig. 2(d)]. As concluded in [11], the tuning frequency range essentially depends on four parameters that define the tuning element. Those parameters are as follows. • The position of the tuning element in the cavity. Indicated by in Fig. 1(b). • The position of the metallic contact between the via-hole and the upper (or lower) metallic wall of the cavity. Represented by the angle in Fig. 1(b). • The width of the metallic contact [see Fig. 1(a)]. • The dimensions of the slot, defined by inner and outer diameters, and [see Fig. 1(a)], respectively [11]. Additionally, and as pointed out in [11], the dimensions of the via-hole of the tuning element [ in Fig. 1(a)] also has an effect on the tuning range. As in [11], the metallic contact will be performed by a metallic flap attached to the tuning screw, which will be mechanically controlled. The orientation of the flap, , will therefore be the tuning parameter once having been determined
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. MIRA et al.: MECHANICAL TUNING OF SIW FILTERS
Fig. 3. Outline of the proposed tuning mechanism. (left) Top view. (right) Side view.
Fig. 4. Basic structure for simulating the tuning mechanisms in filters.
all other dimensions of each tuning element (position of the tuning element, , dimension of the slot, and , and via-hole dimensions, ). Also, the width of the flap must be considered as part of the definition of the tuning element. This concept is presented in Fig. 3, and a similar approach is used in this paper. B. Tuning Elements in SIW Filters In order to design a tunable filter one also needs to control the coupling between resonators either because we may desire a variable bandwidth filter or because the coupling between resonators deviates when the resonant frequencies change and we need to recover the initial bandwidth. To do that we introduce a tuning element such as the one in Fig. 1 into the coupling path between resonators, as shown in Fig. 4. Dimensions of the slot and configuration of the metallic flap need to be considered as part of the tunable filter design. In what follows, an assessment of the slot in a two coupled resonator structure is presented. Details of the metallic flaps to be used are also reported in this section. 1) Slot: Fig. 4 shows the basic structure used for the design of tunable filters. Two identical resonators (Resonator 1 and Resonator 2) are separated by an inductive coupling window. The two tuning elements placed into the resonators mainly change the resonant frequency, whereas the tuning element placed in the coupling windows mainly modifies the coupling between the two resonant modes. The configuration of Fig. 4 has been simulated with the same material parameters used in [11], and later used in the filter designs. This is a Rogers RO4003 substrate, with relative permittivity of and 0.813-mm thickness . The loss tangent used for simulation is .
3
The dimensions of the cavities in Fig. 4 are set to resonate around 10 GHz when they are isolated. Then the two identical cavities are coupled together through a coupling window. The dimensions of the overall structure result in mm, mm, and mm. This results in a coupling coefficient of 0.155, without the tuning screws, due to a two-mode resonating structure with GHz and GHz. The frequencies of the two modes have been obtained through eigenmode analysis. Note that the coupling window affects not only the coupling, but also the central frequency of the two-mode structure . This is expected since both cavities are no longer isolated and therefore have different boundary conditions, causing the two cavities to load one another in such a manner as to cause the originally identical mode to split into two different modes [13]. To evaluate the tunable performance of the basic structure of Fig. 4, the central frequency tuning elements ( and ) are introduced in the middle of the cavity at mm from the sidewall and at mm. The dimensions of the slot are chosen to be 1.7 mm for the inner diameter and 2.2 mm for the outer diameter . The width of the metallic contact ( in the top inset of Fig. 1) and the diameter of the via-hole are set to 1 mm. Recall that the settings above on the central frequency tuning screw position and its dimensions affect the ultimate tuning range. A coupling tuning element is then introduced in the middle of the coupling window ( in Fig. 4). The presence of the tuning element in the coupling window affects the field coupled between the two cavities. In turn, the coupling tuning element modifies the boundary conditions of the resonators and thus also affects the central frequency. In spite of that, we can fairly consider that the angle would tailor the central frequency of the resonators and would control the coupling between them. The effects of and are summarized in Table I for two values of the angles 0 and 180 , two different diameters of the via-hole , and two different positions . Note that with these angles we consider the whole range of tuning, and all the values in between can be achieved continuously. The table indicates the values of the two fundamental frequencies and for each combination of and and the resulting coupling coefficients . The value of has been calculated following the well-known expression [13] and ranges from 0.044 to 0.163. From the table we can generally confirm that for any of the tuning element dimensions and positions, when the angle of the coupling flap is fixed the value of the coupling coefficient barely changes, and only the central frequency is affected. According to the results of Table I, the range of tuning is higher as increases and when the coupling tuning element moves out from the center of the coupling window . For mm, the coupling range is larger than 30%, and for mm, it can be increased up to 90%. Thus, depending on the application, we chose the diameter of the via-hole and its position in order to get the required tuning range. This demonstrates the usefulness of this tuning approach also for controlling the coupling between resonators. Note that modification of this configuration, as two tuning elements in the coupling window
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. 4
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES
TABLE I AND RESONANT FREQUENCIES FOR THE BASIC STRUCTURES OF FIG. 4
COUPLING
Fig. 6. Flaps used for tuning the filters.
of the tuning element for a desired range of tunability. From this assessment, it might be also concluded that for a given via-hole , slot ( and ) and metallic flap dimensions of the coupling tuning element of the tuning range (difference between the maximum and minimum coupling values) barely changes and the achievable coupling is controlled by the position of the coupling tuning element . 2) Flap: In contrast to our previous work, where a simple screw with a single straight metallic flap was used (see details in Fig. 3), in this work several flaps have been considered in order to offer a better control of the tuning requirements for a filter implementation. Fig. 6 shows three different configurations of the flap. The flaps would be attached to the tuning screw and to the top layer of the SIW cavity, therefore defining the length of the slot (or width of the metallic contact ). These flaps will be used in the filters presented in the following section. Although further details will be given, the main differences between the flaps of Fig. 6 are the width of the flap and position. The first flap on the left is designed for half slots and short tuning range, where the slot progressively covers all the slot. The third flap, in contrast, has a small metallic part, covering a small part of the slot, and then resulting in a wide tuning range. Finally, the flap in the middle is designed to produce a symmetrical coverage of the slot, which shows to be convenient when a symmetrical input and output reflection coefficients are required. Fig. 5. Coupling between the two cavities of Fig. 4 for several positions of the tuning element and as a function of the angle position of the metallic contact.
III. TUNABLE SIW FILTER or two tuning elements in the cavity, would also be used for further controlling the tuning performance. In order to further illustrate the design and placement of the coupling tuning element on the coupling window , Fig. 5 depicts the value of the coupling coefficient for several positions of the tuning element ranging from mm to mm as a function of the angle of the metallic contact. For this parameterization, the width of the metallic contact and the diameter of the via-hole are fixed to 1 mm. The results in Fig. 5 show how, for positions where the tuning element is closer to the lateral wall ( small), the coupling decreases when the angle of the metallic flap increases. This has the effect of making the coupling window narrower. On the other hand, when the position of the coupling tuning element gets closer to the coupling wall, the coupling window is narrower for smaller angles. Note that this type of parameterization is very useful in a design process since it sets the position
This section uses the tuning elements above for further development of the tuning concept. To do that, several tuning effects have been applied into three filter designs. Initially, all filters (without tuning elements) consist of conventional four-pole Chebyshev filters centered at 10 GHz with 8% of fractional bandwidth (FBW) with targered return losses of 20 dB. This sets the required coupling between resonators and the coupling between the input/output ports to the first/last resonators by means of the coupling matrix. For a fourth-order Chebyshev filter with 20 dB of return losses, the resulting normalized coupling matrix is
(1)
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. MIRA et al.: MECHANICAL TUNING OF SIW FILTERS
5
Fig. 7. Tunable filter without the tuning screws.
which is then used to obtain the coupling coefficients by multiplying for the FBW. This results in the required coupling coefficients ranging from 0.09 to 0.06. Note that those values are similar to the ones outlined in Fig. 5. It should also be mentioned that they do not have to be equal since the coupling window is not the same as in the filter designs. The dimensions of the coupling windows on the resonator topologies have been designed to achieve the couplings obtained from the synthesis. Tuning elements for the central frequency of each resonators, for couplings between each pair of consecutive resonators, and also for the input and output coupling, have then been included into the filter configurations. To illustrate this we can see a photograph of the filter in Fig. 7. This photograph numbers each cavity (1–4), with their corresponding frequency tuning elements, , the coupling element between cavities and , , and also between the source and the first cavity, , and the coupling element between the last cavity and the load, . Dimensions and positions of these elements have been selected for the desired functionality. This is for trimming purposes, bandwidth tunability, and central frequency tunability. Details on the three designs appear below. A. Trimmed Filter In the first example the tuning approach is used as a trimming technique in order to recover the desired filter performance, initially deviated due to fabrication tolerances. Since the expected deviation is small, the placement and design of the tuning screws are set for a short turning range, enough for small adjustments. Note that, as stated in [11], small tuning range results in fairly constant values, which ensures the flatness and selectivity of the filter. Fig. 7 shows the fabricated filter without the tuning screws. The half slots combined with the flaps of Fig. 6 (first on the left) allows for a small tuning while preserving most of the factor. Those tuning elements are placed close to the metallic wall, also for the purpose of barely affecting the initial field distribution, and therefore with a small effect on the resonant frequency. The tuning elements in this case are all equal, except for the one in the middle, . The first and last tuning elements ( and ) control the input and output couplings of the filter and are highly related with the reflective coefficients. The tuning element controlling the coupling between resonators 2 and 3 is set in the middle of the filter and has been chosen to be different just for preserving the symmetry on the structure. For the same reason this slot is using the second flap in Fig. 6 (the flap in the middle). The diameter of the via-hole of the tuning elements , and the inner and outer diameter of the slot ( and ) are 1, 1.7, and 2.2 mm, respectively.
Fig. 8. Simulated and measured results of the tunable filter.
Fig. 8 shows the response of the filter before and after the trimming process. The dashed line shows the full-wave simulated response (Ansys HFSS v15) of the initial filter (without tuning elements), and therefore the expected from the measured response. In grey we show the measured response of the filter when the tuning elements are set to cover half the slots on Fig. 7. Note that this should result in the design response (denoted via the dash), however, some disagreement can be observed in the reflective response. The trimming process then starts by moving the tuning screws (see details in the inset of Fig. 8) and uncover part of the slot. The resulting response after the trimming process is depicted via the black solid line in Fig. 8. We can see a fairly good agreement between the simulated and measured filter response after trimming. Note as well that the input and output reflection coefficients reveal symmetry, as expected from the initial design, and ensured from the slot and flap distribution and configuration along to the filter topology. B. Bandwidth Tunable Filter The second filter configuration is outlined in Fig. 9 with tuning screws of 1-mm diameter to obtain a medium tuning range both on bandwidth and/or on the central frequency. In contrast with the previous case where only half slots were employed, in this case full slots are used in order to increase the tuning range. As stated above it also consists of a four-pole order filter centered at approximately 10 GHz. In contrast from the previous filter of Fig. 7, the coupling windows between resonators have been arranged differently only for a better location of the tuning elements. The slots corresponding to these central frequency tuning elements are placed in the middle along the cavity and close to the metallic wall and in the side where the coupling wall exists. This is convenient to reduce the effect of these tuning elements to the coupling between resonators. On the other hand, the coupling tuning elements are located along the coupling wall, as outlined in Fig. 4. For the input and output coupling ( and ) and for the coupling between the first and second resonators and for the coupling between the third and fourth resonators , a single tuning element is used to control the coupling. Whereas for the coupling between the second and
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. 6
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES
TABLE II ANGLES FOR THE FILTERS
Fig. 9. Filter with and without the tuning screws.
Fig. 10. Fabricated filter with tuning screws for bandwidth variation (simulated and measured).
third resonators , two tuning elements are symmetrically located for the control of such coupling. Note also that they are half slots. The main reason for that, as in the previous case, is preserving the symmetry of the whole structure, even when tuning elements are inserted. The tuning elements are then finalized by the inclusion of the metallic flaps. In this case and in order to obtain a wider tuning range, the flap configuration shown on the right side of Fig. 6 is used. The width of the flap is chosen to be mm, equal to the diameter of the tuning screws in order to optimize the tuning range. The inner and outer diameters of the slot ( and ) are chosen as in the previous filter. The tuning screws are then used to prove a variable bandwidth. Fig. 10 shows the simulated and measured responses for the case where the maximum bandwidth can be achieved (grey traces in Fig. 10) and with the minimum bandwidth (black traces in Fig. 10). At this point it is worth mentioning that due to the symmetry of filter configuration the position and angle of the tuning elements are set to also be symmetrical. This is , , , and . Table II shows the angle of the tuning elements for both configurations, where 0 is for the flap pointing outside the filter and
turns towards the nearest port, thus preserving the symmetry. The terms and indicate the rotation angle of the central frequency tuning screws of resonators 1 and 2, respectively. On the other hand, the term corresponds to the rotation angle of the tuning element setting the input external coupling. Finally, the terms and give the angle of the tuning elements for the coupling between the first and second resonators and between the second and third resonators, respectively. Note that the structure includes two tuning elements in the center for coupling between the second and third resonators, pointing in opposite directions in order to preserve the symmetry. The position of the metallic flaps have been marked on the top part of the tuning screw in order to know their positions while tuning. From this view we can confirm the symmetry between the position of the tuning screws. The values detailed in Table II, for the tunable bandwidth filter (second and third rows), indicate that for the narrower bandwidth filter the coupling window should be narrower, whereas for the broader bandwidth filter the window should be wider. Values of the table also reveal that the tuning elements corresponding to the central frequency of the resonators are barely moved and only for sake of preserving the central frequency and good reflection coefficient. According to simulations and measured results the filter bandwidth can be tuned up to a 100% so the bandwidth of the filter could be doubled. Simulated and measured responses agree fairly well in both case. As an illustrative example, we use this filter to evaluate the possibility of applying both functionalities’ central frequency and bandwidth tunability in a single design. Fig. 11 shows simulated results of how the central frequency can be shifted starting from the filter with higher bandwidth. With this layout a tuning range of the central frequency of 4% could be obtained. For higher tuning ranges we would need to introduce larger tuning screws in the resonators. C. Frequency Tuned Filter The last filter has been designed to offer a wider tuning range of the central frequency. As indicated in the example above this requires larger tuning elements for the central frequency of each resonator. This new filter configuration is outlined in Fig. 12. In this case we preserve the same topology and dimension of the previous filter (Fig. 9), except the diameter of central frequency tuning screws. The diameter of the via-hole is mm with an inner and outer slot radius of mm and mm, respectively. The objective of this configuration is to shift the central frequency up to 10%. Fig. 13 shows the simulated and measured filter responses of two stages of the tunable filter. The passband of the filter has
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. MIRA et al.: MECHANICAL TUNING OF SIW FILTERS
7
has been mainly obtained by shifting the position of the central frequency tuning screws, additional adjustment of the coupling tuning screws is required in order to preserve the bandwidth and good matching throughout the whole bandpass of the filter. Note that, although only two stages have been shown, in the previous two examples a continuous tunability is possible. IV. CONCLUSION
Fig. 11. Variation of the central frequency for the filter of Fig. 9.
Fig. 12. Filter with and without the tuning screws for central frequency variation.
The paper has demonstrated the use of open slots and tuning screws as a useful approach for the tunability of SIW structures. Accurate analysis of the role of each tuning element in coupled resonator structures has been reported. Several examples of filters have then been presented to demonstrate the usefulness of the approach in a trimming problem in a tunable bandwidth filter and in a tunable central frequency filter. The designs presented in the paper show up to a 100% of bandwidth increment and a 10% of tunability of the central frequency. A single filtering structure has also been used to demonstrate the three functionalities, and at the same time achieving a filter with a bandwidth tunability up to a 100% and a central frequency tuning of 4%. Additionally and taking into account that the tolerances in the dielectric constant and fabrication process may produce lack of accuracy in the measured response, the inclusion of these tuning screws have also been proven to be useful as a trimming element to obtain an improved performance of the filters. In this way, we avoid the repetition in the fabrication of filters to comply with the desired response or the necessity of very accurate and expensive fabrication technologies. Note moreover that the same concept could be directly applied to a more compact and integrated configuration such as MEMS as a mechanical tuning component. ACKNOWLEDGMENT The authors would like to thank Dr. J. C. Booth, National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), for his help on the revision of this paper. REFERENCES
Fig. 13. Fabricated filter with tuning screws for central frequency variation (simulated and measured).
been shifted up to a 10% in this case, from 9.5 to 10.5 GHz. Measured and simulated responses show the same range of tunability and both responses agree fairly well in both tuning stages. The values of the rotating angles for both stages are detailed in rows 4 and 5 of Table II. These values reveal that the frequency tuning
[1] U. Hiroshi, T. Takeshi, and M. Fujii, “Development of a laminated waveguide,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 46, no. 12, pp. 2438–2443, Dec. 1998. [2] D. Deslandes and K. Wu, “Accurate modeling, wave mechanisms, design considerations of a substrate integrated waveguide,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 54, no. 6, pp. 2516–2526, Jun. 2006. [3] M. Bozzi, L. Perregrini, and K. Wu, “Modeling of conductor, dielectric and radiation losses in substrate integrated waveguide by the boundary integral-resonant mode expansion method,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 56, no. 12, pp. 3153–3161, Dec. 2008. [4] M. Bozzi, M. Pasian, L. Perregrini, and K. Wu, “On the losses in substrate integrated waveguides and cavities,” Int. J. Microw. Wireless Technol., vol. 1, no. 5, pp. 395–401, Oct. 2009. [5] X. P. Chen and K. Wu, “Substrate integrated waveguide cross-coupled filter with negative coupling structure,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 56, no. 1, pp. 142–149, Jan. 2008. [6] F. He, X. Chen, K. Wu, and W. Hong, “Electrically tunable substrate integrated waveguide reflective cavity resonator,” in Asia–Pacific Conf., Dec. 2009, pp. 119–122. [7] M. Armendariz, V. Sekar, and K. Entesari, “Tunable SIW bandpass filters with PIN diodes,” in Proc. 40th Eur. Microw. Conf., Paris, France, Sep. 2010, pp. 830–833. [8] J. C. Bohorquez et al., “Reconfigurable planar SIW cavity resonator and filter,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig., San Francisco, CA, USA, Jun. 2006, pp. 947–950.
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. 8
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES
[9] W. Gautier, A. Stehle, B. Schoenlinner, V. Ziegler, U. Prechtel, and W. Menzel, “RF-MEMS tunable filters on low-loss LTCC substrate for UAV data-link,” in Proc. 39th Eur. Microw. Conf., Rome, Italy, Sep. 2009, pp. 1700–1703. [10] A. Djermoun, G. Prigent, N. Raveu, and T. Callegari, “Widely tunable high-Q SIW filter using plasma material,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig., Anaheim, CA, USA, May 2010, pp. 1484–1486. [11] F. Mira, J. Mateu, and C. Collado, “Mechanical tuning of substrate integrated waveguide resonators,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 22, no. 9, pp. 447–449, Sep. 2012. [12] A. Collado, F. Mira, and A. Georgiadis, “Mechanically tunable substrate integrated waveguide (SIW) cavity based oscillator,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 23, no. 9, pp. 489–491, Sep. 2013. [13] J. S. Hong and M. J. Lancaster, Microstrip Filters for RF/Microwave Applications. New York, NY, USA: Wiley, 2001. Fermín Mira (M’14) received the Telecommunications Engineering degree and Ph.D. degree in telecommunications from the Universidad Politecnica de Valencia, Valencia, Spain, in 2000 and 2005, respectively. In 2001, he joined the Department of Electronics, Universita degli Studi di Pavia, Italy, where he was a Pre-Doctoral Fellow (2001–2004) involved with a research project financed by the European Community under the framework of a Maricurie Action of the 5th Program Marco “Millimeter-Wave and Microwave Components Design Framework for Ground and Space Multimedia Network (MMCODEF),” which concerned the development of a computeraided design (CAD) tools for the design of passive microwave components with the participation of the European Space Agency. In May 2004, he joined the Department of Communications, Universidad Politecnica de Valencia. In January 2006, he joined the Centre Tecnologic de Telecomunicacions de Catalunya (CTTC), as Researcher with the Division of Communication Technologies. His current research interests include numerical methods for electromagnetic modeling of microwave components and the design and fabrication of microwave devices and systems, especially in substrate integrated waveguide (SIW) technology.
Jordi Mateu (M’03–SM’10) received the Telecommunication Engineering and Ph.D. degrees from the Universitat Politecnica de Catalunya (UPC), Barcelona, Spain, in 1999 and 2003, respectively. He is currently an Associate professor with the Signal Theory and Communications Department, UPC, and a Senior Researcher Associate with the Centre Tecnol`ogic de Telecomunicacions de Catalunya (CTTC), Barcelona, Spain. From May to August 2001, he was a Visiting Researcher with Superconductor Technologies Inc., Santa Barbara, CA,
USA. From October 2002 to August 2005, he was a Member of Research Staff and Coordinator of Communication Subsystems with CTTC. Since September 2004, he has been a Guest Researcher appointments with the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), Boulder, CO, USA, where, from 2005 to 2006, he was a Fulbright Research Fellow. In July 2006, he was a Visiting Researcher with the Lincoln Laboratory, Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT). From September 2003 to August 2005, he was a Part-Time Assistant Professor with the Universitat Autonoma de Barcelona. In Summer 1999, after graduation, he was a Trainee Engineer with the Investment Technology Department, Gillette, London, U.K. He has authored or coauthored more than 45 papers in international journals, more than 60 contributions in international conferences, and 3 book chapters. He holds 2 patents. From February 2011 to June 2012, he was Vice-Dean with the Telecommunication and Aerospace Engineering School, UPC. He is a reviewer of several journals and international conferences. He has collaborated and has led several research projects for national and international public and private organizations and companies. His primary research interest includes microwave devices and systems and characterization and modeling of new electronic materials, including ferroelectrics, magnetoelectric, superconductors, and acoustic devices. His recent research includes the synthesis, design, and development of novel microwave filtering structures. Dr. Mateu was the recipient of the 2004 Prize for the Best Doctoral Thesis in Fundamental and Basic Technologies for Information and Communications awarded by the Colegio Oficial de Ingenieros de Telecomunicacion (COIT) and the Asociacion Espanola de Ingenieros de Telecomunicacion (AEIT). He was also the recipient of a Postdoctoral Fulbright Research Fellowship and an Occasional Lecturer Award for visiting MIT. He was second ranked in a Ramon y Cajal Contract (2005) in the area of electrical and communication technologies, a National Program for promoting outstanding young researchers.
Carlos Collado (A’02–M’03–SM’10) received the Telecommunication Engineering and Ph.D. degrees from the Universitat Politecnica de Catalunya (UPC), Barcelona, Spain, in 1995 and 2001, respectively, and the M.S. degree in biomedical engineering from the Centre de Recerca en Enginyeria Biomèdica, UPC, in 2002. In 1998, he joined the faculty of UPC, and in 2005, he became an Associate Professor. From November 2005 to January 2008, he was Vice-Dean of the Technical School of Castelldefels (EPSC), UPC, where he was responsible for the telecommunication and aeronautic engineering degrees. In 2004, he was a Visiting Researcher with the University of California at Irvine. From 2009 to 2010, he was a Guest Researcher with the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), Boulder, CO, USA. He has authored or coauthored more than 50 scientific and technical journal papers and more than 60 contributions to international conferences. His primary research interests include microwave devices and systems, superconducting devices, the study of efficient methods for the analysis of nonlinear effects in communication systems, and the characterization of nonlinear behavior of electroacoustic devices.
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
3947
Triple-Mode Dielectric Resonator Diplexer for Base-Station Applications Sai-Wai Wong, Senior Member, IEEE, Zhi-Chong Zhang, Shi-Fen Feng, Student Member, IEEE, Fu-Chang Chen, Member, IEEE, Lei Zhu, Fellow, IEEE, and Qing-Xin Chu, Senior Member, IEEE
Abstract—This paper proposes a novel diplexer based on triplemode dielectric-loaded cylindrical cavities. Such two metal cavities are designed to achieve two different frequency bands, while three resonant modes of a single cavity are classified as a TM mode and a pair of hybrid (HE) degeneration modes. An off-centered dielectric resonator instead of a traditional corner cuts perturbation or screws perturbation properly perturbs the two degenerate modes in the same cavity. Extensive study is then conducted to design this proposed diplexer. Finally, a diplexer prototype is fabricated using a brass cavity and it is tested for experimental verification of the predicted results. Good agreement between measurement and simulation is achieved. Index Terms—Dielectric resonator (DR), diplexer, off-centered perturbation, triple-mode resonator.
I. INTRODUCTION
H
IGH-PERFORMANCE, compact-size, and low-cost diplexers are highly demanded in advanced dual-band microwave transmitter and receiver systems. There are several types of diplexers using different approaches. A microstrip line diplexer using compact hybrid resonators [1], waveguide diplexer employing connected bi-omega particles [2], and slotline diplexer using stepped-impedance resonators (SIRs) [3] have been reported thus far. However, to the authors’ knowledge, there has been very few reported work [4], [5] that designed the dielectric resonator (DR) diplexers with low in-band insertion loss. As is known, the DR has many attractive features, e.g., high-temperature stability, high unloaded factor, high dielectric constant permittivity, and low thermal expansion coefficient. Thus, DR diplexers are definitely useful for application in modern microwave communication systems, e.g., mobile phone base-stations. Furthermore, the incentive Manuscript received February 09, 2015; revised June 25, 2015 and September 28, 2015; accepted October 04, 2015. Date of publication October 26, 2015; date of current version December 02, 2015. This work was supported by the Program for New Century Excellent Talents in University (NCET-13-0214), by the National Engineering Technology Research Center for Mobile Ultrasonic Detection, and by the Fundamental Research Funds for the Central University (2014ZZ0029). S.-W. Wong, Z.-C. Zhang, S.-F. Feng, F.-C. Chen, and Q.-X. Chu are with the School of Electronic and Information Engineering, South China University of Technology, Guangzhou City 510640, China (e-mail: [email protected]; [email protected]). L. Zhu is with the Faculty of Science and Technology, Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, University of Macau, Macau SAR, China. Color versions of one or more of the figures in this paper are available online at http://ieeexplore.ieee.org. Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/TMTT.2015.2488658
of dual- or triple-mode operation has the unparalleled benefit in size reduction against those reported single-mode resonator diplexers. The concept of a DR dual-mode bandpass filter (BPF) was firstly presented in 1980 [6]. Later on, a vast variety of dual- and triple-mode structures were reported in [7]–[13]. They can be primarily classified into three categories using screws [7]–[9], irises [10], [11], and corner cuts [12], [13] for exciting three resonant modes within a single metal cavity. However, each of them has their intrinsic shortcomings. First, the screws may lead to a high insertion loss, lower the quality factor, and increase the complexity in tuning. Second, very sensitive tolerance on fabrication of the iris may bring out a major cost factor. Finally, the structure with corner cuts may raise the problem of the high die-sinking cost. In this paper, triple-mode dielectric-loaded cylindrical cavities are proposed and employed for design of a novel diplexer. The whole diplexer does not consist of any screws, irises, or corner cuts, and it can precisely achieve predicted performance, simple tuning capability, and low processing cost. The metal cavity and DR are commonly formed as a cylindrical shape and no corner cuts and extra defects are required. To explain the working principle, the coupling scheme with four coupling paths is proposed. The implementation of the triple-mode dielectric-loaded cavities as discussed here provides a useful alternative for the low-cost and compact design of this class of filter and diplexer.
II. TRIPLE-MODE RESONATOR FILTER Fig. 1(a) depicts the configuration of the proposed diplexer. It consists of two triple-mode DR BPFs. Before the entire diplexer is designed, a triple-mode DR BPF is firstly studied as a basic unit in this section. The two filters are identical in the geometrical structure in such a way that the cylindrical metal waveguide cavity is embedded with a dielectric cylinder with high permittivity . This cylinder is supported by an additional dielectric with low permittivity fixed on the bottom of the intra-cavity. In this context, the lower and higher frequency band filters, namely, Filter-I and Filter-II, are individually designed using the same filter structure, but with different operating center frequencies, namely, 2.55 and 2.66 GHz, respectively. To characterize this triple-mode resonator, by studying the field distribution at the different resonant frequencies, as done in [14], we can figure out that the three corresponding resonant modes are the two orthogonal
0018-9480 © 2015 IEEE. Personal use is permitted, but republication/redistribution requires IEEE permission. See http://www.ieee.org/publications_standards/publications/rights/index.html for more information.
3948
Fig. 1. 3-D view of the proposed diplexer ( mm, mm, mm, mm, mm, and
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
mm, mm,
mm, mm,
mm).
hybrid (HE) modes (degenerated modes: HE mode and HE mode) and one TM mode. Next, the three resonant modes are analyzed using the electric and magnetic field distribution as displayed in Fig. 2. Fig. 2(a) indicates the three cutting planes, namely, A–A , B–B , and C–C , for displaying the field distribution with resorting to the three resonant modes of our concern. Fig. 2(b) and (c) illustrates the typical TM mode electric ( -field) and magnetic field ( -field) distribution in the A–A plane. Fig. 2(d) and (e) shows the electric field distribution of the HE mode in the B–B and A–A planes, respectively. The electric field has both a nonzero longitudinal component in -direction and a nonzero transversal component in the – direction. Fig. 2(f) and (g) shows the magnetic field distribution of the HE mode in the C–C and A–A planes, respectively. Since the magnetic field is perpendicular to the electric field, the C–C plane is chosen instead of the B–B plane. In this context, the magnetic field shows the existence of nonzero longitudinal and transversal components as well. Fig. 2(h) and (i) illustrates the electric field distribution of the HE mode in the C–C and A–A plane, whereas Fig. 2(j) and (k) shows the magnetic field distribution of the HE mode in the B–B and A–A plane. Comparing the two HE degenerate modes, we can see that the electric and magnetic field distribution are exactly the same to each other, but they are orthogonal with each other. In the BPFs, coupling discs are employed to replace the probes for providing enough coupling strength [see Fig. 3(a)]. Moreover, the coupling probe length, , and the offset distance, , are the two key parameters in design of these proposed BPFs. Fig. 3(a) shows the top view of the composed triple-mode resonator BPF with an off-centered DR intra-cavity. To analyze the first four excited modes, the mode chart [15] is derived in Fig. 3(b) to provide graphical demonstration on the variation of resonant frequencies, normalized to the TM mode, as a function of with mm. When the offset value is close to zero, the two degenerate modes, HE and HE modes, are combined in final. The two degenerate modes are separated
Fig. 2. (a) Three cutting planes for displaying the field distribution. (e)–(k) Field distribution of three resonant modes in the single cavity.
apart when increases. By choosing the vertical a–a plane with mm in Fig. 3(b), the mode chart of four normalized resonant frequencies against the varied length of the coupling probes, , is depicted in Fig. 3(c). When is increasing, the two degenerate modes are separated apart again. In this way, we can use the first three resonant modes to design a triple-mode
WONG et al.: TRIPLE-MODE DR DIPLEXER FOR BASE-STATION APPLICATIONS
3949
Fig. 4. Variation of external quality factors of three modes against .
Fig. 5. Coupling scheme of triple-mode filter.
Fig. 3. (a) Top view of proposed triple-mode cavity with off-centered DR , , , , , ; unit: ( millimeters). (b) Resonant frequencies as a function of the offset of DR. (c) Resonant frequencies as a function of the length of coupling probe.
BPF by evenly distributing three resonant modes within the desired passband, e.g., the a–a plane, as shown in Fig. 3. As a result, the DR filter with a triple-mode characteristic can be constituted by properly choosing this offset distance towards excitation of the triple resonant modes inside one single DR. Fig. 4 shows the external quality factors, , against the offset distance (parameter ). When is increasing, the of the TM mode increases rapidly and its value is much larger than the value of the two degenerate HE modes. This can be interpreted that the TM mode has very weak coupling with the external ports. By choosing the highest external quality factor
for the TM mode in Fig. 4, e.g., mm, we can reduce the complexity of coupling topology and thus to reduce the element values in the coupling matrix. Hence, Fig. 5 depicts the coupling scheme of this type of filter by creating proper coupling among them. The shaded circles (marked 1–3) represent the three resonance modes, i.e., two even modes (HE mode and TM mode) and one odd mode (HE mode). The dotted-line rectangle, inclusive of three shaded circles, indicates the entire triple-mode DR cavity. The source and load with the white circles in Fig. 5 are coupled with two degenerate HE modes represented by the solid lines. In addition, the source and load are weakly coupled to each other, as denoted by the dashed line. The “ ” and “ ” sign along the coupling lines correspond to the sign in the coupling matrix . Therefore, with this coupling topology we can derive the corresponding coupling matrix as discussed in [16]. Now, let us apply the coupling topology shown in Fig. 5 for filter design, thus yielding the formulation of the following coupling matrix to quantitatively verify the coupling scheme:
3950
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 8. Top view of proposed diplexer with two cavities ( , , , , , , and millimeters).
, ; unit:
Fig. 6. EM simulated (solid line) and synthesized (dashed line) reflection and transmission coefficients of Filter-I.
Fig. 9. Real and imaginary parts of input impedance against .
III. GEOMETRY OF PROPOSED DIPLEXER Fig. 7. Variation in transmission zeros against the value of
.
Fig. 6 plots the electromagnetic (EM) simulated and -matrix of Filter-I. Both of them are in good agreement with each other, thus proving that the coupling scheme via the -matrix precisely describes the frequency response of the triple-mode DR filter. The plotted curves show that the reflection zeros and transmission zeros are reasonably matched in both the in-band and out-of-band frequency ranges. From Fig. 6, it is clearly seen that three transmission zeros emerge within the range of 2.4–2.8 GHz. Fig. 7 exhibits that three transmission zeros can ). When be controlled by the height of the cavity (parameter is increasing, three transmission zeros move closely to the desired passband. A pair of transmission zeros are generated by the TM mode resonator (resonator 1 in Fig. 5) and they are resulted by multiple cross-couplings between the source and load. The other transmission zero is generated by the two orthogonal sign, as indiHE modes (resonator 2 and resonator 3 with a cated in Fig. 5). As such, the two transmission paths with equal magnitude, but out-of-phase, are cancelled with each other, thus creating a transmission zero at a certain frequency. The three external quality factors of three resonant modes are calculated: , , and .
In this section, the previously reported filter is designed at two different desired frequency bands, e.g., 2.52–2.57 and 2.64–2.69 GHz, respectively. Filter-I and Filter-II are employed to constitute a high-performance and low-loss diplexer. In physical implementation, a coaxial-line cross-shaped junction is formed to connect the two BPFs and a coaxial short-circuited stub with the common input port, as shown in Fig. 8. The coaxial short-circuited stub is used to achieve impedance matching and mechanical support of the inner conductor of the coaxial line. Due to the fact that the connection of the two filters leads to extra loading to each individual BPF cavity, the impedance-matching condition in the concerned operating bands may be deteriorated. To cancel this additional loading effect, a short-circuited stub is properly introduced in the cross-shaped junction of port 1, as shown in Fig. 8. By adjusting the length of this coaxial shortcircuited stub, a better impedance matching can be achieved within two concerned operating frequency bands, as shown in Fig. 9. For good impedance matching, the real and imaginary parts of the input impedance should be equal to 50 and 0 , respectively. We can see that the imaginary parts at and tend to approach zero when mm. Meanwhile, the real parts are equal to 40 at and 45 at . This is the primary reason why the higher band has a better return loss than the lower band, as shown in Fig. 11(a). Thus, by properly choosing
WONG et al.: TRIPLE-MODE DR DIPLEXER FOR BASE-STATION APPLICATIONS
3951
Fig. 10. Smith chart of the proposed diplexer: (a) without the short-circuited coaxial line and (b) with the short-circuited coaxial line.
the length of the short-circuited coaxial line , a good impedance match is achieved for both frequencies with dB. Fig. 10(a) and (b) illustrates the Smith chart of the simulated input matching condition at Port 1 for the diplexer without and with the short-circuited coaxial line, respectively. As can be seen in Fig. 10(b), the normalized impedance curve gets closer to the center of the Smith chart than in Fig. 10(a). Thus, the presented diplexer exhibits a better impedance matching when the short-circuited coaxial line is installed. IV. EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS Following the discussion in Sections II and III, a compact size diplexer is fabricated and measured. Notice that each filter can be operated individually to yield the desired passband before combining the two filters into a diplexer. For base-station applications, the center frequencies of Filter-I and Filter-II are 2.55 and 2.66 GHz, respectively. In this study, the proposed diplexer is simulated by CST Studio (EM simulation software) and the diplexer is fabricated using brass material for metal cavities. The
Fig. 11. Simulated (dashed line) and measured (solid line) results of the proat port 1. (b) and . (c) , , and posed diplexer. (a) .
DRs are designed using dielectric material with a high permittivity of 40. This designed diplexer occupies an overall size of , where is the wavelength in free space. The simulated and measured results are plotted in Fig. 11. The diplexer has been confirmed to operate in two prescribed bands with the central frequencies of 2.55 and 2.66 GHz, and each passband has an absolute bandwidth of about 80 MHz. The measured minimum insertion losses ( and ) are found as 0.63 and 1.10 dB in the two passbands as compared to the simulated minimum insertion losses of 0.25 and 0.31 dB. The
3952
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
fabricated. Measured results with the insertion loss (0.63 and 1.14 dB in two bands), return loss ( 11.5 dB), and isolation performances (better than 20 dB) are demonstrated. As attractive features, the proposed diplexer has no screws, irises, or corner cuts. Due to its simple design, low-cost, compact size, and easy fabrication, it is our belief that the proposed diplexer is useful for base-station applications. REFERENCES
Fig. 12. Photographs of proposed diplexer. (a) External view. (b) Internal view.
discrepancy between the measured and simulated results may be caused by an extra loss from the SMA connectors in experiment and also the soldering of the probes with SMA connectors. Measured return losses in both two channels are better than 11.5 dB. Fig. 11(b) demonstrates that the measured suppression at 2.66 GHz for Filter-I and at 2.55 GHz for Filter-II are both better than 20 dB. For the first passband, a lower stopband rejection is greater than 24 dB beyond 2.45 GHz and a higher stopband rejection greater than 34 dB in a frequency range from 2.61 to 2.69 GHz. For the second passband, a lower stopband rejection is greater than 20 dB beyond 2.58 GHz and a higher stopband rejection is greater than 34 dB beyond 2.74 GHz. The output isolation is also measured, and it is better than 18 dB from 2.4 to 2.7 GHz, as illustrated in Fig. 11(c). It is noteworthy that there is spurious response at around 2.7 GHz in the upper stopband of Filter-I, which is mainly due to the fourth resonant mode of Filter-I, as shown in Fig. 3. This spurious response can be intuitively suppressed by making use of the third transmission zero of the filter and such a spurious response can be theoretically suppressed with the attenuation higher than 30 dB. However, due to the unexpected fabrication tolerance, the spurious response and the third transmission zero are not exactly located at the same frequency, so the suppression could only achieve up to 25 dB in our measurement. For the readers’ information, three photographs of the fabricated diplexer are provided in Fig. 12. Fig. 12(a) displays the external view of the installed diplexer and Fig. 12(b) shows the internal view of two separated lower and upper parts of the fabricated diplexer. V. CONCLUSIONS A novel diplexer based on off-centered DR-loaded cavity structures has been proposed. After two individual BPFs are designed, a compact diplexer is constructed, designed, and
[1] T. Yang, P.-L. Chi, and T. Itoh, “High isolation and compact diplexer using the hybrid resonators,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 20, no. 10, pp. 551–553, Oct. 2010. [2] L. Palma, F. Bilotti, A. Toscano, and L. Vegni, “Design of a waveguide diplexer based on connected bi-omega particles,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 22, no. 3, pp. 126–128, Mar. 2012. [3] H.-W. Liu, W.-Y. Xu, and Z.-C. Zhang, “Compact diplexer using slotline stepped impedance resonator,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 23, no. 2, pp. 75–77, Feb. 2013. [4] K. Wakino, T. Nishikawa, Y. Ishikawa, and H. Matsumoto, “400 MHz band elliptic function type miniaturized diplexer using dielectric resonators,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig., 1982, pp. 303–305. [5] T. Hiratsuka, T. Sonoda, and S. Mikami, “A Ka-band diplexer using planar TE mode dielectric resonators with plastic package,” in Proc. Eur. Microw. Conf., Munich, Germany, 1999, pp. 99–102. [6] P. Guillon and Y. Garault, “Dielectric resonator dual modes filters,” IET Electron. Lett., vol. 16, no. 17, pp. 646–647, 1980. dual-mode dielectric resonator filter [7] H. Hu and K.-L. Wu, “A with planar coupling configuration,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 61, no. 1, pp. 131–138, Jan. 2013. [8] K. A. Zaki, C.-M. Chen, and A. E. Atia, “A circuit model of probes in dual-mode cavities,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 36, no. 12, pp. 1740–1746, Dec. 1988. [9] L. H. Chua and D. M. Syahkal, “Analysis of dielectric loaded cubical cavity for triple mode filter design,” IET Microw., Antennas, Propag., vol. 151, no. 1, pp. 61–66, Feb. 2004. resonator [10] V. Walker and I. C. Hunter, “Design of triple mode transmission filters,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 12, no. 6, pp. 215–217, Jun. 2002. [11] S. Amari and M. Bekheit, “New dual-mode dielectric resonator filers,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 15, no. 3, pp. 162–164, Mar. 2005. [12] M. M. Rahman, W.-L. Wang, and W. D. Wilber, “A compact triplemode plated ceramic block based hybrid filter for base-station applications,” in 34th Eur. Microw. Conf., Amsterdam, The Netherlands, 2004, pp. 1001–1004. [13] H. Salehi, T. Bernhardt, and T. Lukkarila, “Analysis, design and applications of the triple-mode conductor-loaded cavity filter,” IET Microw. Antennas Propag., vol. 5, no. 10, pp. 1136–1142, Jan. 2010. [14] S. J. Fiedziuszko and S. Holme, “Dielectric resonators raise your high-Q,” IEEE Microw. Mag., vol. 2, no. 3, pp. 51–60, Sep. 2001. [15] S. W. Wong and L. Zhu, “Quadruple-mode UWB bandpass filter with improved out-of-band rejection,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 19, no. 4, pp. 152–154, Apr. 2009. [16] R. J. Cameron, “Advanced coupling matrix synthesis techniques for microwave filters,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 51, no. 1, pp. 1–10, Jan. 2003. Sai-Wai Wong (S’06–M’09–SM’14) received the B.S degree in electronic engineering from the Hong Kong University of Science and Technology, Hong Kong, in 2003, and the M.Sc and Ph.D. degrees in communication engineering from Nanyang Technological University, Singapore, in 2006 and 2009, respectively. From July 2003 to July 2005, he was an Electronic Engineer with two Hong Kong manufacturing companies. From May 2009 to October 2010, he was a Research Fellow with the Institute for Infocomm Research, Singapore. From 2010 to 2014, he was an Associate Professor, and since 2014, a Professor with the School of Electronic and Information Engineering, South China University of Technology, Guangzhou, Guangdong Province, China. His research interests include RF/microwave circuit and wideband antenna design.
WONG et al.: TRIPLE-MODE DR DIPLEXER FOR BASE-STATION APPLICATIONS
3953
Dr. Wong is a reviewer for IEEE MICROWAVE AND WIRELESS COMPONENTS LETTERS, the IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, and the IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON COMPONENTS, PACKAGING AND MANUFACTURING. He was the guest editor for the “Special Issue on LTE Technology: Antenna, RF Front-Ends and Channel Modeling” of the International Journal of Antennas and Propagation. He was the recipient of the New Century Excellent Talents in University (NCET) Award in 2013.
de Montréal, Montréal, QC, Canada. From 2000 to 2013, he was an Associate Professor with the School of Electrical and Electronic Engineering, Nanyang Technological University, Singapore. Since August 2013, he has been a Professor with the Faculty of Science and Technology, University of Macau, Macau, China. Since September 2014, he has been the Head of the Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, University of Macau. He has authored or coauthored over 260 papers in peer-reviewed journals and conference proceedings. His papers have been cited more than 3200 times with an H-index of 31 (source: ISI Web of Science). His research interests include microwave circuits, guided-wave periodic structures, antennas, and computational electromagnetic techniques. Dr. Zhu was an associate editor for the IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES (2010–2013) and IEEE MICROWAVE AND WIRELESS COMPONENTS LETTERS (2006–2012). He was a general chair of the 2008 IEEE Microwave Theory and Techniques Society (IEEE MTT-S) International Microwave Workshop Series on the Art of Miniaturizing RF and Microwave Passive Components, Chengdu, China, and a Technical Program Committee co-chair of the 2009 Asia–Pacific Microwave Conference, Singapore. He was the recipient of the 1997 Asia–Pacific Microwave Prize Award, the 1996 Silver Award of Excellent Invention from Matsushita–Kotobuki Electronics Industries Ltd., and the 1993 First-Order Achievement Award in Science and Technology from the National Education Committee, China.
Zhi-Chong Zhang was born in Ji’an, Jiangxi Province, China, in March 1988. He received the B.S. degree in communication engineering from Nanchang University, Nanchang, Jiangxi, China, in 2008, the M.E. degree in communication and information system from East China of Jiaotong University, Nanchang, Jiangxi, China, in 2012, and is currently working toward the Ph.D. degree in electromagnetic fields and microwave technology at the South China University of Technology, Guangzhou, China. His research interests include the design of microwave filters and associated RF modules for microwave and millimeter-wave applications.
Shi-Fen Feng (S’15) was born in Jiujiang, Jiangxi Province, China, in September 1991. He received the B.S. degree in information engineering from the South China Agricultural University, Guangdong, China, in 2014, and is currently working toward the M.S. degree at the School of Electronic and Information Engineering, South China University of Technology, Guangzhou, China. His current research interests include cavity microwave filters and diplexers design.
Fu-Chang Chen (M’12) received the Ph.D. degree from the South China University of Technology, Guangzhou, Guangdong, China, in 2010. He is currently an Associate Professor with the School of Electronic and Information Engineering, South China University of Technology. His research interests include the synthesis theory and design of microwave filters and associated RF modules for microwave and millimeter-wave applications.
Lei Zhu (S’91–M’93–SM’00–F’12) received the B.Eng. and M.Eng. degrees in radio engineering from the Nanjing Institute of Technology (now Southeast University), Nanjing, China, in 1985 and 1988, respectively, and the Ph.D. degree in electronic engineering from the University of Electro-Communications, Tokyo, Japan, in 1993. From 1993 to 1996, he was a Research Engineer with Matsushita-Kotobuki Electronics Industries Ltd., Tokyo, Japan. From 1996 to 2000, he was a Research Fellow with the École Polytechnique
Qing-Xin Chu (M’99–SM’11) received the B.S, M.E., and Ph.D. degrees in electronic engineering from Xidian University, Xi’an, Shaanxi, China, in 1982, 1987, and 1994, respectively. He is currently a Full Professor with the School of Electronic and Information Engineering, South China University of Technology, Guangzhou, Guangdong, China. He is also the Director of the Research Institute of Antennas and RF Techniques, South China University of Technology. From January 1982 to January 2004, he was with the School of Electronic Engineering, Xidian University. From 1997 to 2004, he was a Professor and then Vice-Dean with the School of Electronic Engineering, Xidian University. From July 1995 to September 1998 and July to October 2002, he was a Research Associate and Visiting Professor with the Department of Electronic Engineering, Chinese University of Hong Kong, respectively. From February to May 2001 and December 2002 to March 2003, he was a Research Fellow and Visiting Professor with the Department of Electronic Engineering, City University of Hong Kong, respectively. From July to October 2004, he visited the School of Electrical and Electronic Engineering, Nanyang Technological University, Singapore. From January to March 2005, he visited the Department of Electrical and Electronic Engineering, Okayama University. From June to July 2008, he was also a Visiting Professor with the Ecole Polytechnique de I’Universite de Nantes, Nantes, France. He has authored or coauthored over 300 papers in journals and conferences. His current research interests include antennas in mobile communication, microwave filters, spatial power-combining arrays, and numerical techniques in electromagnetics. Prof. Chu is a Senior Member of the China Electronic Institute (CEI). He was the recipient of the Tan Chin Tuan Exchange Fellowship Award, a Japan Society for Promotion of Science (JSPS) Fellowship, the 2002 and 2008 TopClass Science Award of the Education Ministry of China, and the 2003 FirstClass Educational Award of Shanxi Province.
3954
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
A Configurable Coupling Structure for Broadband Millimeter-Wave Split-Block Networks Christian Koenen, Student Member, IEEE, Uwe Siart, Member, IEEE, Thomas F. Eibert, Senior Member, IEEE, Garrard D. Conway, and Ulrich Stroth
Abstract—In order to realize series-fed millimeter-wave hollow waveguide array antennas, small slots or holes can be used to couple a defined amount of power from the main feed line to the radiating elements. Due to the small size of these structures, they are challenging to manufacture. Moreover, if the size of the required slots or holes are smaller than the available drill, they are not realizable at all. This paper describes a coupling structure, which uses laser-cutting to realize a small slot, while all the other parts of the waveguide circuit can be milled in split-block technology. A deployment in harsh environments such as fusion experiments is feasible, as the whole structure can be built from metal. By design, it is possible to configure the coupling slots, and thus, adjust or modify the tapering of the array antenna. A theoretical model of -band the proposed structure is given and measurements of prototypes are presented. The manufactured slots achieve coupling factors ranging from 24.2 dB to 9.4 dB. Measurements prove the applicability of the proposed design in broadband feed networks as the coupling values are nearly frequency independent with a deviation from the mean coupling ranging from 0.6 dB to 0.9 dB in the whole -band. The maximum phase variability between the evaluated slots is 10 . Index Terms—Antenna arrays, fusion hardware, millimeter-wave passive components, modular hollow waveguide components, waveguide structures.
I. INTRODUCTION
I
N environments with very specific constraints such as nuclear fusion experiments, where microwave and millimeterwave networks have to comply with the requirements introduced by the ultrahigh vacuum, strong magnetic fields, and the presence of neutron radiation, circuits and antennas are usually realized by hollow waveguides as these can be manufactured purely out of metal. An actively steered phased-array antenna is currently being developed for a Doppler reflectometry system [1] on the ASDEX Upgrade Tokamak in Garching, Germany, similar to the frequency steered phased-array antenna presented in [2]. This Doppler reflectometer requires a steered Gaussian
Manuscript received May 16, 2015; accepted October 03, 2015. Date of publication November 05, 2015; date of current version December 02, 2015. This work has been partly funded by the Helmholtz Association of German Research Centers within the Helmholtz Virtual Institute “Plasma Dynamical Processes and Turbulence Studies using Advanced Microwave Diagnostics” under grant VH-VI-526. C. Koenen, U. Siart and T. F. Eibert are with the Chair of High-Frequency Engineering, Technical University of Munich, 80290 München, Germany (e-mail: [email protected]). G. D. Conway and U. Stroth are with the Max-Planck-Institut für Plasmaphysik, 85748 Garching bei München, Germany. Color versions of one or more of the figures in this paper are available online at http://ieeexplore.ieee.org. Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/TMTT.2015.2495189
beam with well-defined beam waist and focal plane position over nearly the whole -band (75 to 105 GHz). Currently, this beam is realized by an optimized smooth-bore horn and a steerable elliptic mirror [3]. As the projected phase shifters require a 90 -hybrid, the actively steered phased-array antenna is built in split-block technology, where the rectangular waveguide is cut through the middle of the broader wall. Each half is milled separately, and both halves are finally screwed together. Following this approach, complex networks with several layers can be realized (e.g., [4]), where the smallest possible slot is given by the smallest available drill. The desired feed network is serial in order to reduce the number of moving objects inside the vessel. In addition, the desired Gaussian beam properties require the aperture amplitude distribution to be constant over almost the whole -band. For this purpose, a structure is required to tap off a specific amount of power from the main feedline to the radiating elements. One possibility is to bore holes or slots in the waveguide walls, as described in [5] or [6]. However, a bore in the broad wall of a millimeter-wave split-block network is not possible, and those in the narrow wall require a multiple layer split-block network. Also, it is not guaranteed that the coupling coefficients are invariant over the whole frequency band [2]. A possibility to implement nearly constant coupling factors are branch-guide directional couplers like [7] or [8]. However, for small coupling values (as they are required at the input side of the series feed), the width of the branches are very small, and no drill will be available to manufacture the device. Metal-only -plane T-junctions have also been used as series power dividers [9], but this realization makes it difficult to place phase-shifters in between the coupling sections as the main and stub waveguide heights vary throughout the feed. This contribution provides a broadband coupling structure for millimeter-wave split-block networks that can be manufactured solely in metal and keeps the main and stub waveguide heights constant. In brief, an aperture slot is manufactured by means of laser-cutting from a stainless steel plate. The smallest possible slot is therefore given by the diameter of the laser which in our case is 40 m (in comparison, the smallest available drill at our workshop for a slot depth of 1.27 mm is 200 m). The resulting aperture is then inserted into a groove in the split-block network. Due to this design, the coupling factors are configurable as one aperture can be replaced by another one without milling the whole network again. This is advantageous in series-fed antenna arrays, as deviations from the desired amplitude tapering can be eliminated by adjusting the slots of the apertures. A -band prototype of the structure for a series-fed array antenna with 2-mm element spacing has been manufactured
0018-9480 © 2015 IEEE. Personal use is permitted, but republication/redistribution requires IEEE permission. See http://www.ieee.org/publications_standards/publications/rights/index.html for more information.
KOENEN et al.: A CONFIGURABLE COUPLING STRUCTURE FOR BROADBAND MILLIMETER-WAVE SPLIT-BLOCK NETWORKS
Fig. 1. Cross-sectional view of the proposed hollow waveguide coupling strucfinite ture. It is implemented as an -plane (series) T-junction with a thickness coupling slot.
and tested. Measurements show that the coupling factors are in the range from 24.2 to 9.4 dB. Furthermore, they are almost constant over the whole -band with a deviation from the mean coupling ranging from 0.6 to 0.9 dB. The maximum phase error between the evaluated slots is 10 and is due to the stub waveguide height dependent reference planes of the T-junction. A frequency scanning series feed, employing the proposed structure for amplitude tapering, is presented in [10]. In the following, an equivalent circuit of this coupling structure for better understanding is given and analyzed. The manufactured prototype for the -band is described, and full-wave simulations as well as measurements of different aperture slot sizes are presented and discussed. II. THE IDEAL MODEL OF THE COUPLING STRUCTURE The ideal waveguide circuit of the coupling structure is depicted in Fig. 1. It is an -plane T-junction where the intersecting waveguide from port 3, i.e., the stub waveguide, is connected to the junction via an additional waveguide. The broad wall width of all waveguides is constant for the whole structure. The height of the additional section is and the height of the remaining network is . If only the -mode is propagating and its cutoff frequency is constant in the whole network. The length of the additional section is at the design frequency, with being the wavelength of the guided wave. In principle, the described structure is a T-junction, where the coupling strength of the branch-off can be controlled by varying the height of the section. To analyze this structure, an equivalent circuit is given in Fig. 2 which employs the characteristic impedance of the waveguide [11], [12]. The proposed equivalent circuit is based on the equivalent circuits given in the Waveguide Handbook [13, p. 337] for the T-junction and [13, p. 307] for the discontinuity change of the waveguide height. The T-junction equivalent circuit is valid for and or and [13, p. 339] and that of the discontinuity for
3955
Fig. 2. Equivalent circuit of the ideal structure using the characteristic impedance of each waveguide section, the equivalent circuit of a T-junction and of the discontinuity change in waveguide height from [13].
and [13, p. 308]. Their accuracy is good for small slot width. For slots larger than , higher order mode effects must be considered and the proposed equivalent circuit is not valid anymore [9], [13]. More accurate methods may be used in this case [14]. Using the “modified power-voltage definition,” the characteristic impedance of a rectangular waveguide is [12] (1) and are the relative permeability and permittivity, where respectively, is the free-space wavelength, and is the free-space wave-impedance. In the equivalent circuit of Fig. 2, the characteristic impedance of the waveguide with height is denoted as , and the characteristic impedance of the section with height is denoted as . All three ports have a characteristic impedance of . The length of the slot is composed of the slot’s physical length and a factor , which accounts for the reference plane shift of the T-junction from its characteristic terminals [13, pp. 120, 338]. With the same reason, waveguides with characteristic impedance and length are added to ports 1 and 2 to shift the characteristic reference planes to the imaginary intersection of the stub waveguide walls with width and the main waveguide (see Fig. 1). The formulas to compute and are given in [13, p. 338]. To calculate the input reflection of the equivalent circuit in Fig. 2 of port 1, the impedance of the characteristic impedance of port 3 in parallel to the discontinuity capacitance is transformed through the transmission line of length with impedance . Also consider the ideal transformer yields an equivalent impedance (2) where is the propagation constant in the waveguide and is the ideal transformer’s transfer ratio. The reflection
3956
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
at port 1 follows from considering the remaining impedances connected to the T-junction as
Including the phase shift of the waveguide with length in
(3)
(15)
results
To verify the correctness of the derived set of scattering parameters, they are compared with the full-wave simulation results of the ideal model from CST Microwave Studio (2015.02) (Computer Simulation Technology, Darmstadt, Germany) for slot heights up to ( 0.635 mm). To get the required physical length of the section, the length has to be subtracted from the desired slot length according to . As the parameter is dependent on the slot height, the length of the coupling slot can be optimized for a certain slot height only. We decided to take 0.8 mm as a good compromise between the performance over the whole frequency band of the larger slot heights (higher coupling values occur more often), considering also the manufacturability of the apertures (i.e., availability of metal sheets with thickness ). The parameters and are depicted in Fig. 3, and the and are shown in Fig. 4. For smaller slots, the agreement of the equivalent circuit model with the full-wave simulation results is very good. The relative error of is always below 3%. The relative error of the is below 2% for the 0.090- and 0.280-mm slots, but increases up to 18% for the 0.635-mm slot in the upper part of the frequency band. The relative error between the equivalent circuit model and full-wave simulated and is always below 1.5% and 1%, respectively. The influence of on the transformer section length can be seen in in Fig. 3, where the point of minimum reflection moves to the center of the band for larger slot heights. In summary, the accuracy of the equivalent circuit is better than the uncertainty introduced by manufacturing tolerances (see Section III-B), and it can be used for fast computations and optimizations of the feed network. To verify the feasibility of the proposed structure, a -band prototype network was designed and manufactured. The following section deals with its realization and the obtained measurement results.
(4) and due to symmetry is (5) The transmission from port 1 towards port 2 can be calculated from the voltage divider composed of the port impedance , the equivalent impedance representing the stub waveguide, and as (6) Considering the reference plane shift yields (7) and from reciprocity it follows (8) The transmission from port 1 to port 3 is calculated from the voltage ratios , and and the extra phase shift due to the waveguide at port 1 as (9) where is voltage at port 3, is the voltage across the equivalent impedance and is the source voltage at port 1. Calculating through the transmission line of the slot and the ideal transformer gives the relation (10) The voltage divider of the source voltage
above
The reflection at port 3 follows as
yields (11)
can be calculated using (9) together with (10) and and the (11). Due to reciprocity it is (12) The transmission from port 2 to port 3 equals due to symmetry except for a minus sign that accounts for the opposite direction of the voltage or the electric-field lines in the stub waveguide. From this and reciprocity, it follows that (13) To calculate , the series impedances is transformed through the ideal transformer and the transmission line towards port 3 as (14)
III. THE MANUFACTURED MODEL A. Description of the Model The prototype has been designed for the -band, where the waveguide width is 2.54 mm, and the height is 1.27 mm. At these dimensions, the coupling structure as described in the previous section cannot be manufactured in plain split-block technology as there is a certain limit for the smallest millable slot due to the available drills. At our workshop, the smallest possible slot is 200 m for a groove depth of 1.27 mm, which is required for the fundamental waveguide. The accuracy for milling at our workshop is 10 m. For lower frequency bands, it might be possible to fully mill the ideal model, depending on the required coupling coefficients and the resulting slot heights. To overcome the manufacturing limits, the transformer section of the proposed design is realized by laser-cutting a slot into a metal sheet. The thickness of this sheet is 0.8 mm, which represents the length of the
KOENEN et al.: A CONFIGURABLE COUPLING STRUCTURE FOR BROADBAND MILLIMETER-WAVE SPLIT-BLOCK NETWORKS
3957
Fig. 6. Simulation model of the manufactured structure in CST Microwave Studio (2015.02). Background material is brass and that of the coupling aperture is stainless steel. Waveguides are modeled with vacuum. The radius of 1.536 mm and the radius of the outer ones is inner bend is 4.909 mm (measured from the center of the smaller wall). The angular extent 229.5 and 24.75 , respecof the inner and outer bend is tively. Fig. 3. Comparison between theoretical and simulated and of the ideal model for the slot heights 0.090, 0.280, and 0.635 mm, with a relative error below 3% and of below 2% for both smaller slots and below 18% of for the 0.635-mm slot.
Fig. 4. Comparison between theoretical and simulated and of the ideal model for the slot heights 0.090, 0.280, and 0.635 mm, with a relative error below 1.5% and of below 1%. of
Fig. 5. These coupling apertures were manufactured using laser-cutting. The slot width is 2.54 mm for all prototypes and their slot heights from left to right is 40 , 60, 100, 170, 280, and 400 m. The material is stainless steel (1.4310) with a thickness of 0.8 mm.
slot. A sample of the laser-cut plates with different slot heights is depicted in Fig. 5. The benefit of laser-cutting is the higher contour accuracy of 5 m and the smaller possible slot size of 40 m compared
with milling. Nevertheless, there are also drawbacks. The laser has a certain opening angle that leads to slightly trapezoidal slots. Moreover, the laser-cut surface is very rough, and a span may seal a part of the slot. The harder the material, the better those spans can be removed afterwards by means of brushing and an ultrasonic bath. Therefore, the chosen material of the apertures is stainless steel (1.4310). The laser-cut apertures are placed in a groove within the splitblock network. The waveguides to the ports 1 and 2 of the ideal model are bent to provide a wall to fix the aperture (see Figs. 6 and 7). Apart from the chosen fixture by means of plain bends, for example, miter bends are also possible. In either case, as a consequence of the bending, the field distribution is modified at the slot, and the coupling and reflection coefficients differ slightly from those of the ideal model. The bends of the manufactured model are chosen such that a placement of two coupling structures 4 mm apart is possible. A frequency-scanning array that employs the proposed coupling structure is shown in [10]. The full-wave simulation model of the prototype is depicted in Fig. 6 and the manufactured prototype in Fig. 7. The radius of the inner bend is 1.536 mm, and the radius of the outer ones is 4.909 mm, each measured from the center of their arc to the middle of the waveguide. The angular extent of the inner and outer bend is 229.5 and 24.75 , respectively. The material of the manufactured prototype network is brass. Due to surfaces roughness and manufacturing tolerances, there is no perfect connection between the laser-cut aperture and the split-block network. To minimize this effect, the transitions between waveguide and aperture slot are modeled similar to a choke flange. That is, the distance between the waveguide intersection edge and the radii of the groove (indicated in Fig. 7) is at the design frequency. The depth of the groove is 2 mm on each side of the split-block due to the maximum depth of the used 0.8-mm drill. The aperture is fixed in the groove by the upper and lower part of the split-block network as well as the radii at the left and right. Therefore, the height of the apertures is a critical parameter. If it is too large, the two blocks will have no contact and the overall performance decreases, and if it is too small, the slot is not positioned correctly. In Fig. 8, an aperture is placed in the groove
3958
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
TABLE I MANUFACTURING ACCURACY AND DEVIATION FROM MEAN COUPLING VALUES FOR DIFFERENT SLOT HEIGHTS
Fig. 7. Detail picture of the -band prototype coupling structure. The network was manufactured in brass using a mill. The ridge ensures a good electrical connection between upper and lower split-block.
Fig. 8. Manufactured -band prototype network with a coupling aperture placed in the groove. The additional waveguide sections are required to connect the coupling structure to the measurement equipment via standard flanges.
of the split-block network of the prototype. The waveguides to port 1 and port 2 are extended to allow the placement of two flanges next to each other for measurement purposes. The ridge between waveguide and split-block (see Fig. 7) is 0.8 mm thick and should ensure a good electrical contact between the upper and lower block. To reconfigure the coupling coefficient of the structure, the laser-cut aperture is replaced by another aperture with a different slot height. The proposed model has been simulated using CST Microwave Studio, and the results are compared with measurements of the manufactured prototype. In the simulation, it was assumed that there are no slits between the split-blocks and that the aperture fits perfectly into the groove. Furthermore, the slot was modeled with a constant height (neglecting the impact from laser-cutting). Measurements were made with a HP8510C network analyzer with millimeter-wave extension. The effective directivity after calibration was obtained by means of time gating and achieved at least 47.5 dB over the whole frequency band. B. Results To verify the proposed design, several apertures have been manufactured and tested. Representatively for the whole dy-
namic range, six coupling apertures with slot heights of 60, 90, 120, 170, 280, and 400 m are presented and discussed in this section. In Table I, the desired and achieved slot heights with the corresponding mean simulated and measured coupling factors are given. The simulated values have been computed with the desired slot heights. Due to the thickness of the metal plate and the finite cutting time, there is a certain minimum amount of material that has to be degraded in order to ensure the cut through of the laser beam. As a consequence, the laser-cut results of a desired slot height in the range from 40 to 70 m are approximately all the same. The 90- and 120- m apertures have a larger ratio of the slot heights between smaller and larger aperture face (see second column in Table I). For all higher slots, this was not the case. The consequence of this is a stronger difference of the -parameters compared with that of the full-wave simulation where a rectangular slot was assumed. However, comparing the mean coupling values of the other apertures yields an overall good compliance between the simulated and manufactured structures. Reflection and transmission of the analyzed apertures are plotted versus frequency in Figs. 9–14. In nearly every plot (except those of the large slot heights), the reflection coefficient has two minima at about 87 and 97 GHz, which are due to the bent structure. In principle, the of the small slots 100 m is mainly affected by the bends as the reflection of the ideal -plane T-junction is much smaller. For larger slot heights, the impact of the junction strengthens and the reflection coefficient consequently increases (see Fig. 15 for the two limiting cases and ). The small ripples in the -parameters are most likely caused by multiple reflections (sharp edges at the intersection plane between bent waveguide and aperture have a finite thickness) and the long waveguides of the prototype network. All coupling values are nearly constant over the whole -band with a maximum deviation from the mean of 0.9 dB for the largest slot. The smallest branch off is achieved by the 60- m slot. Its mean value is around 24.2 dB, and it deviates from it in the whole -band by 0.7 dB. The strongest coupling is achieved by the 400- m slot as 9.7 dB and a deviation of 0.9 dB. However, there is no upper manufacturing limit, and only the larger reflections may make a certain slot height impractical.
KOENEN et al.: A CONFIGURABLE COUPLING STRUCTURE FOR BROADBAND MILLIMETER-WAVE SPLIT-BLOCK NETWORKS
Fig. 9. Measurement and simulation results of the 60- m slot.
3959
Fig. 12. Measurement and simulation results of the 170- m slot.
Fig. 10. Measurement and simulation results of the 90- m slot. Fig. 13. Measurement and simulation results of the 280- m slot.
Fig. 11. Measurement and simulation results of the 120- m slot. Fig. 14. Measurement and simulation results of the 400- m slot.
The differences between the simulations and the measurements of the manufactured prototypes is mostly due to the trapezoidal slots caused by the laser manufacturing process. This results in a slightly shifted coupling value. In addition, the manufactured waveguide has higher losses (see Fig. 16), which is caused by manufacturing imperfections also observed in [15]. Moreover, the manufacturing of the smallest slots is challenging. Two of three 40- m slots were clogged by a span
that could not be removed, and the third had a large aspect ratio such that its coupling was stronger than that of the 60- m slot. The deviation of measurement and full-wave simulation from the mean coupling for slots heights greater than 170 m is in the range from 0.6 to 0.3 dB (see Table I). The measured deviations from the mean almost always agree with that of the simulation. However, as the apertures are exchangeable
3960
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
are dependent on the slot height . As a consequence, the electrical length of the coupling structure is also depending on this height. In Fig. 17, the phase difference of the of the 400- m slot with reference to the 60- m slot is plotted. As larger slot height distinctions lead to larger phase errors, this plot represents the worst case for all manufactured apertures. Measurements, full-wave simulations and the equivalent circuit model yield approximately the same behavior. The phase of is only slightly affected by changing the slot height. The maximum phase difference occurs again for the 400- m slot and is 5 – 0 , while the slope is similar to the one in Fig. 17. In brief, this phase error is systematic and due to the slot height dependent reference planes of the T-junction. Fig. 15. Measured and simulated
Fig. 16. Measured and simulated
of the 0- and 1.27-mm slot.
of the 0- and 1.27-mm slot.
Fig. 17. Measured, simulated and computed phase difference between the of the 400- m slot and the 60- m slot, which represents the worst-case for all evaluated slot heights. This phase error is systematic and due to the slot height dependent reference planes of the T-junction.
and relatively cheap compared with the split-block network, a finetuning towards the desired coupling value is possible. As discussed in the theoretical part, the reference planes are dependent on the parameters of the T-junction and , which
IV. CONCLUSION A configurable coupling structure for millimeter-wave splitblock networks to branch off a small portion of power from a rectangular waveguide has been proposed. The theoretical principle of the coupling structure was given in terms of an equivalent circuit model, and it was verified by means of full-wave simulations. Simulations and measurements were performed for a bent prototype coupling section with different slot heights. The achieved coupling factors range from 24.2 to 9.4 dB while their deviation from the mean in the whole -band is between 0.6 and 0.9 dB. If higher accuracy and smaller slot heights are needed, micromachining techniques as described in [16] or the use of substrates with metallized apertures for the realization of the required slots may help. The reflection for slot heights below 100 m is mainly affected by the bent hollow waveguide and are always below 25 dB. For larger slots, the discontinuity of the junction gets more and more noticeable, and the reflection increases up to a maximum level of 16 dB for a coupling factor of 9 dB. The worst phase mismatch between the manufactured apertures is 10 . Its cause is the slot height-dependent reference planes of the T-junction. It is possible to use the proposed structure in a broadband series feed network of an array antenna to provide the required amplitude tapering, as the coupling factors are nearly constant over the whole -band [10]. Moreover, the stronger coupling values are required at the end of the feed where the somewhat larger reflection is less relevant due to the low power level in the feed line. Care has to be taken concerning the phase difference between the apertures, and an additional waveguide structure may be required to compensate it. The aperture plates can be exchanged after the split-block network has been manufactured, and, thus, an adjustment of each coupling value is possible. REFERENCES [1] M. Hirsch, E. Holzhauer, J. Baldzuhn, B. Kurzan, and B. Scott, “Doppler reflectometry for the investigation of propagating density perturbations,” Plasma Phys. Controlled Fusion, vol. 43, no. 12, pp. 1641–1660, 2001. [2] P. Rohmann, S. Wolf, W. Kasparek, B. Plaum, and J. Hesselbarth, “A 32-element frequency-steered array antenna for reflectometry in W-band,” in Proc. IEEE Int. Symp. Phased Array Syst. Technol., Waltham, MA, USA, Oct. 2013, pp. 559–563. [3] T. Happel et al., “Design of a new Doppler reflectometer frontend for the ASDEX Upgrade Tokamak,” presented at the 10th Int. Reflectometry Workshop, Padova, Italy, May 2011.
KOENEN et al.: A CONFIGURABLE COUPLING STRUCTURE FOR BROADBAND MILLIMETER-WAVE SPLIT-BLOCK NETWORKS
[4] M. Schneider, C. Hartwanger, E. Sommer, and H. Wolf, “The multiple spot beam antenna project ‘Medusa’,” presented at the 3rd Eur. Conf. Antennas Propag., Berlin, Germany, Mar. 2009. [5] A. F. Stevenson, “Theory of slots in rectangular wave-guides,” J. Appl. Phys., vol. 19, no. 1, p. 24, 1948. [6] R. S. Elliott and L. Kurtz, “The design of small slot arrays,” IEEE Trans. Antennas Propag., vol. 26, no. 2, pp. 214–219, 1978. [7] J. Reed, “The multiple branch waveguide coupler,” IRE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 6, no. 4, pp. 398–403, 1958. [8] R. Levy and L. F. Lind, “Synthesis of symmetrical branch-guide directional couplers,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 16, no. 2, pp. 80–89, 1968. [9] F. Arndt, I. Ahrens, U. Papziner, U. Wiechmann, and R. Wilkeit, “Optimized -plane T-junction series power dividers,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 35, no. 11, pp. 1052–1059, 1987. [10] C. Koenen, U. Siart, T. F. Eibert, G. D. Conway, and U. Stroth, “Broadband amplitude tapering for a linear W-band array antenna for Gaussian beam-shaping,” presented at the German Microw. Conf., Nuremberg, Germany, Mar. 2015. [11] C. G. Montgomery, R. H. Dicke, and E. M. Purcell, Principles of Microwave Circuits, ser. Radiation Laboratory Series. New York, NY, USA: McGraw-Hill, 1948, vol. 8. [12] P. A. Rizzi, Microwave Engineering: Passive Circuits. Englewood Cliffs, NJ, USA: Prentice-Hall, 1988. [13] N. Marcuvitz, Waveguide Handbook, ser. Radiation Laboratory Series. New York, NY, USA: McGraw-Hill, 1951, vol. 10. [14] E. D. Sharp, “An exact calculation for a T-junction of rectangular waveguides having arbitrary cross sections,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 15, no. 2, pp. 109–116, 1967. [15] I. Stil, A. L. Fontana, B. Lefranc, A. Navarrini, P. Serres, and K. F. Schuster, “Loss of WR10 waveguide across 70–116 GHz,” presented at the 23nd Int. Symp. Space Terahertz Technol., Tokyo, Japan, Apr. 2012. [16] V. M. Lubecke, K. Mizuno, and G. M. Rebeiz, “Micromachining for terahertz applications,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 46, no. 11, pp. 1821–1831, 1998.
Christian Koenen (S’15) received the B.Eng. degree from the Hochschule Ravensburg-Weingarten, Weingarten, Germany, in 2011 and the M.Sc. degree from the Technical University of Munich, Munich, Germany, in 2013, both in electrical engineering and information technology. He is currently working towards the Dr.-Ing. degree at the Chair of High-Frequency Engineering, Technical University of Munich, where he is working on steerable millimeter-wave array antennas for fusion plasma diagnostics.
Uwe Siart (M’08) was born in Bayreuth, Germany, in 1969. He received the Dipl.-Ing. degree from the University of Erlangen-Nürnberg, Erlangen, Germany, in 1996 and the Dr.-Ing. degree from the Technical University of Munich, Munich, Germany, in 2005. He has been with the Chair of High-Frequency Engineering, Technical University of Munich, since 1996. In 2005, he became a Senior Research Associate. His research interests are in the fields of signal processing and model-based parameter estimation for millimeter-wave radar signal processing and high-frequency measurements. Currently, he holds the Associate Professorship for EMC and wave propagation where he is working on statistical electromagnetic wave propagation, remote sensing of the atmosphere, low-power radar sensors, and millimeter-wave components for fusion plasma diagnostics.
3961
Thomas F. Eibert (S’93–M’97–SM’09) received the Dipl.-Ing.(FH) degree from Fachhochschule Nürnberg, Nuremberg, Germany; the Dipl.-Ing. degree from Ruhr-Universität Bochum, Bochum, Germany; and the Dr.-Ing. degree from Bergische Universität Wuppertal, Wuppertal, Germany, in 1989, 1992, and 1997, all in electrical engineering. From 1997 to 1998, he was with the Radiation Laboratory, Electrical Engineering and Computer Science Department at the University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI, USA; from 1998 to 2002, he was with Deutsche Telekom, Darmstadt, Germany; and from 2002 to 2005, he was with the Institute for High-Frequency Physics and Radar Techniques of FGAN e.V., Wachtberg, Germany, where he was Head of the Department Antennas and Scattering. From 2005 to 2008, he was a Professor of radio frequency technology at Universität Stuttgart, Stuttgart, Germany. Since October 2008, he has been a Professor of high-frequency engineering at the Technical University of Munich, Munich, Germany. His major areas of interest are numerical electromagnetics, wave propagation, measurement techniques for antennas and scattering as well as all kinds of antenna and microwave circuit technologies for sensors and communications. Dr. Eibert is currently an Associate Editor of the IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON ANTENNAS AND PROPAGATION.
Garrard D. Conway received the B.Sc. (Hons.) degree in pure and applied physics and the Ph.D. degree in plasma physics, both from the University of Manchester, U.K., in 1982 and 1986, respectively. From 1986 to 1987, he was with the Radio Propagation Laboratory, Leicester University, U.K. From 1987 to 1990, he was with the Plasma Research Laboratory, Australian National University, Canberra, Australia. From 1990 to 1999, he was a Research Associate and Adjunct Professor with the Plasma Physics Laboratory (PRL), Physics Department, University of Saskatchewan, Saskatoon, Canada. During 1996, he was a Visiting Fellow at the PRL, Australian National University, and from 1996 to 1999, a Visiting Scientist at the Joint European Torus project in Abingdon, U.K. Since late 1999, he has been a Senior Staff Scientist with the Max-Plank-Institute for Plasma Physics, Garching, Germany. His research interests include plasma turbulence in fusion devices, development of microwave and radar techniques for diagnosing high-temperature plasmas, as well as electromagnetic wave propagation in general. Dr. Conway has chaired many committees, working groups, and led task forces and projects on microwave diagnostics and turbulence studies.
Ulrich Stroth studied physics at the Technische Hochschule Darmstadt (TH Darmstadt), Germany. He prepared the Ph.D. in theoretical nuclear physics at Institute Laue-Langevin, Grenoble, France, and received the Ph.D. degree from TH Darmstadt in 1986. From 1986 to 1998, he was at the Max Planck Institute for Plasma Physics, Garching, Germany, where he studied magnetic confinement of fusion plasmas in stellarators and tokomaks. He was a Visiting Research at General Atomics, San Diego, CA, USA, at Princeton University, Princeton, NJ, USA, and Oak Ridge National Laboratories, Oakridge, TN, USA, and at the National Institute for Fusion Science, Toki, Japan. In 1996, he habilitated at the University of Heidelberg where he held courses on plasma physics. In 1999, he was appointed professor for experimental plasma physics at University of Kiel, Germany, and led an experimental group exploring plasma turbulence in a small stellarator experiment. From 2004 to 2010, he was Professor and Director of the Institute for Plasma Research at University Stuttgart, Germany, and since 2010, he has been a Max-Planck Director at MPI for Plasma Physics and Full Professor at the Physics Department of the Technical University of Munich. His research interests include magnetic plasma confinement, turbulent transport, micro-waves in plasmas and plasmawall interaction.
3962
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Design of High-Directivity Wideband Microstrip Directional Coupler With Fragment-Type Structure Lu Wang, Gang Wang, Member, IEEE, and Johan Sidén, Member, IEEE
Abstract—A novel design for a microstrip wideband directional coupler is proposed by using fragment-type structures. The use of a fragment-type structure may provide satisfactory flexibility and excellent performance. For a given design space, a fragment-type wideband coupler can be designed by first gridding the space into fragment cells and then metallizing the fragment cells selected by a multi-objective optimization searching algorithm, such as a multi-objective evolutionary algorithm based on decomposition combined with enhanced genetic operators. For demonstration, a 20-dB wideband microstrip directional coupler is designed and verified by test. A 45% bandwidth centered at 2 GHz has been measured in terms of maximum variation of 0.5 dB in the 20-dB coupling level. In the operation band, the designed coupler has directivity above 37 dB, and a maximum directivity of 48 dB at 2 GHz. In addition, some technique aspects related to multi-objective optimization searching, such as effects of design space, control of coupling level, and efficiency consideration for optimization searching, are further discussed. Fragment-type structures may also be used to design high-performance wideband directional couplers of tight coupling level. Index Terms—Fragment-type structure, microstrip directional coupler wideband design, multi-objective evolutionary algorithm based on decomposition combined with enhanced genetic operators (MOEA/D-GO).
I. INTRODUCTION
M
ICROSTRIP directional couplers are widely used in designs of various balanced power amplifiers, mixers, modulators, measurement systems, circularly polarized antennas, beam-forming array antennas, etc. However, microstrip directional couplers suffer from poor directivity due to the difference in the phase velocities of even and odd modes on coupled microstrip lines [1]. In order to increase directivity of microstrip directional couplers, several effective methods have been reported. In [2] and [3], a single capacitive or inductive element was proposed for
Manuscript received July 04, 2015; revised September 17, 2015; accepted October 10, 2015. Date of publication October 26, 2015; date of current version December 02, 2015. This work was supported in part by the National Natural Science Foundation of China under Grant 61272471 and Grant 61331020. L. Wang is with the Department of Electronic Engineering and Information Science, University of Science and Technology of China, Hefei 230027, China. G. Wang is with the Department of Electronic Engineering and Information Science, University of Science and Technology of China, Hefei 230027, China, and also with the Key Laboratory of Electromagnetic Space Information, Chinese Academy of Sciences, Hefei 230027, China (e-mail: [email protected]. cn). J. Sidén is with the Department of Electronics Design, Mid Sweden University, SE-851 70 Sundsvall, Sweden. Color versions of one or more of the figures in this paper are available online at http://ieeexplore.ieee.org. Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/TMTT.2015.2490671
Fig. 1. Fragment-type structure for microstrip directional coupler design.
compensation of phase velocities of even and odd modes, and directivity up to 28 dB can be acquired. By properly selecting dielectric layers [4] and coupled-line geometry [5], [6], satisfactory equalization of coupling level and directivity up to 32 dB can be achieved. In [7], an epsilon negative transmission line is used to equalize the even and odd mode phase velocities, and the directivity can be enhanced at a desired frequency. In addition, directivity can also be enhanced by using inductive or capacitive loading [8], [9]. Both high directivity and tight coupling can be achieved by cascading couplers with loading inductors. Although directivity of the microstrip directional coupler has been improved significantly in these designs, it is still interesting to design a wideband microstrip directional coupler of higher directivity. In addition, operation bandwidth of the reported designs is quite narrow. For instance, designs in [2], [3], and [7] with compensation or equalization of even and odd mode phase velocities are only effective at the center frequency so that bandwidth of directivity above 20 dB is approximately 28%. In [8] and [9], simple inductive or capacitive loading does not provide enough flexibility in adjusting coupling bandwidth and directivity bandwidth. Therefore, to improve directivity and bandwidth of a directional coupler requires new design techniques. In this paper, a novel design for a high-directivity wideband microstrip directional coupler is proposed by using a fragmenttype structure, as shown in Fig. 1, where gray cells represent metal fragments. Since any canonical structure for planar directional coupler can be defined by using the fragment cells, design of the microstrip directional coupler with a fragment-type structure has the possibility for achieving coupler performance as good as possible. Fragment-type structures have found applications in antenna design [10]–[12], multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) antenna isolation design [13], RF identification (RFID) tag antenna design [14], and bandpass filter design [15]. However,
0018-9480 © 2015 IEEE. Personal use is permitted, but republication/redistribution requires IEEE permission. See http://www.ieee.org/publications_standards/publications/rights/index.html for more information.
WANG et al.: DESIGN OF HIGH-DIRECTIVITY WIDEBAND MICROSTRIP DIRECTIONAL COUPLER WITH FRAGMENT-TYPE STRUCTURE
in design of a high-performance directional coupler with fragment-type structures, some coupler characteristics such as isolation, coupling level, and operation bandwidth require specific design consideration. Design of a high-directivity wideband directional coupler is still challenging even with fragment-type coupling structures. By laying stress on key coupler characteristics, a multi-objective optimization problem is usually defined. Design of a fragment-type coupling structure for multiple objectives requires a special optimization searching technique. An optimization searching scheme such as a multi-objective evolutionary algorithm based on decomposition combined with enhanced genetic operators (MOEA/D-GO) [12] can be applied. This paper is organized as follows. Section II introduces the design scheme for a high-directivity directional coupler based on MOEA/D-GO, including the description of fragment-type structures with a design matrix, MOEA/D-GO framework, and formation of multiple objective functions. In Section III, a wideband 20-dB microstrip directional coupler with a fragment-type structure is designed and verified by a prototype test. Performance comparison with other designs and analysis about wideband operation of the fragment-type structure are also provided. In Section IV, some technique aspects related to MOEA/D-GO optimization searching for fragment-type coupler design, such as effects of design space, control of coupling level, and efficiency consideration are further discussed. In Section V, the potential of fragment-type structures in tight coupling design is also investigated. It is shown that fragment-type structures can be used for both loose- and tight-coupling high-performance directional couplers.
3963
Fig. 2. Flowchart of MOEA/D-GO [12].
II. MOEA/D-GO FOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE MICROSTRIP DIRECTIONAL COUPLER DESIGN For design of the fragment-type microstrip directional coupler shown in Fig. 1, the space left for the fragment-type structure can be gridded into cells, and the cells can be assigned with either “1” or “0.” A fragment-type coupling structure can be constructed by assigning “1” and “0” to the metal cell and nonmetal cell, respectively. As for which fragment cells should be assigned with “1,” we may use the MOEA/D-GO to make the decision by optimization searching. The setting of objective functions for the MOEA/D-GO is very important.
Fig. 3. Enhanced crossover and mutation in MOEA/D-GO. (a) Best chromosome matrix in the neighborhood. (b) Chromosome matrix in current subproblem. (c) Chromosome matrix from the neighborhood. (d) New chromosome matrix by using crossover. (e) New chromosome matrix by using mutation.
A. Design Matrix for Fragment-Type Directional Coupler Design space in Fig. 1 gives the region for the coupling structure of a directional coupler. For any distribution of “1” and “0” filling the design space to form a fragment-type structure, a design matrix of elements of “1” and “0” can be constructed to denote the fragment-type structure. Once a design matrix is constructed, the design of the wideband microstrip directional coupler in the design space is transformed to seek a proper design matrix to achieve coupler performance as high as possible in the desired operation frequency bandwidth. Obviously, the large design matrix will lead to much computation cost because the proper design matrix will have to be searched in a large decision space. In order to reduce the computation cost, a symmetrical coupling structure can be considered.
B. MOEA/D-GO Framework The MOEA/D-GO was proposed to solve multi-objective optimization problems in discrete searching space such as that defined by fragment-type structures [12]. In the MOEA/D-GO, enhanced genetic operators are introduced into the MOEA/D [16] to generate a new solution. Therefore, the MOEA/D-GO carries forward all advantages of the MOEA/D and genetic algorithm. A detailed algorithm and performance verification of the MOEA/D-GO can be found in [12]. A flowchart of the MOEA/D-GO is shown in Fig. 2. In the MOEA/D-GO, the searching convergence is sped up by defining an enhanced crossover operator based on the concept of neighborhood and employing a mutation operator, as shown in Fig. 3.
3964
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
In the enhanced genetic operator in Fig. 2, the enhanced crossover operator is implemented in two steps, as shown in Fig. 3. 1) Select two parents from the neighborhood, as shown in Fig. 3(a) and (c), where (a) is the best in the neighborhood and (c) is randomly selected, and perform crossover on the two selected individuals and the one (b) in the current subproblem. 2) Select a row in the matrix randomly and reverse the genes above and below the selected row with equal probability to form a new individual (d). The mutation in Fig. 3 is then implemented in the following two steps. 1) Determine mutation times and perform mutation on the new offspring after the above enhanced crossover. 2) For each mutation, select a row or column in the matrix randomly, and change the gene value between “1” and “0” in the selected row or column with designated probability. In the MOEA/D-GO, it is the best individual in the neighborhood that guides the global search, which leads to a faster convergence. The enhanced crossover among three individuals reinforces the diversity. Therefore, the MOEA/D-GO is expected to generate a global optimum with better convergence and diversity than the original MOEA/D. C. Multi-Objective Optimization Problem for Fragment-Type Coupler In order to design a high-performance directional coupler, we should lay stress on every one of the coupler characteristics such as isolation, coupling level, operation bandwidth, and return loss in the optimization searching. Merging them together by different weights and performing ordinary single-objective optimization will not ensure high performance. Multi-objective optimization is especially suitable for design of the high-performance wideband microstrip directional coupler because some of the directional coupler characteristics may be conflicted. For instance, center frequency of the operation band defined by the coupling level may deviate from the center frequency of the operation band defined by directivity, which will result in narrow operation bandwidth and poor stability of the coupling level. In general, it could be very difficult for ordinary single-objective optimization to make a better tradeoff between the coupling bandwidth and directivity bandwidth even if fragment-type coupling structures are applied. Multi-objective optimization may provide a satisfactory solution. For microstrip directional coupler design, the multi-objective optimization problem can be defined as minimize subject to
(1)
represent different dewhere functions sign objectives for the directional coupler such as isolation, coupling level, stability in coupling, return loss, bandwidth, etc. is a decision space and is a decision variable that defines a fragment-type structure. For such a multi-objective optimization problem, the best tradeoff for all objectives can be achieved by optimal vectors distributed in a Pareto front [16].
To achieve an -dB directional coupler, typical objective functions can be specified as
(2) (3)
(4) (5) where defines the operation bandwidth of the microstrip directional coupler, (in dB) indicates the coupling level, (in dB) indicates the isolation, and (in dB) indicates the return loss. The objective function guarantees the required coupling level of dB in the operation bandwidth. For a 20-dB directional coupler, . The objective function controls the isolation where indicates the desired isolation in dB. Directivity of the coupler can be obtained by the difference between the coupling level and isolation . If we set the value of being unusually large in (3), implementing MOEA/D-GO optimization will give the process of pursuing directivity as high as possible for the required coupling level. The objective function is defined to guarantee stability of the coupling level in the operation bandwidth, where is introduced to defined an allowable fluctuation of the coupling level. Small indicates small variation in the coupling level, which is an important characteristic for the high-performance directional coupler. The objective function is defined to guarantee a small reflection in terms of a 40-dB return loss. Although operation bandwidth can be controlled and optimized by specifying in the above objective functions, operation bandwidth can also be defined as an objective function as (6) where denotes the center frequency in the operation band and denotes a desired fractional bandwidth. To explore the maximum operation bandwidth, we may assign a large interval to or a large value to in the case that we have no idea about the maximum operation bandwidth. It should be remarked that too small and too large or may lead to endless optimization searching in the MOEA/ D-GO. In practice, we may check the output stability of the coupling level, isolation of MOEA/D-GO, or the operation bandwidth to see if there is a need to terminate the searching manually. Equations (1)–(5) define a four-objective optimization problem. In general, optimization searching could be quite time consuming to solve the four-objective problem. A high-efficiency multi-objective optimization algorithm is highly appreciated. The MOEA/D-GO has been proven to be a high-efficiency multi-objective optimization algorithm [12].
WANG et al.: DESIGN OF HIGH-DIRECTIVITY WIDEBAND MICROSTRIP DIRECTIONAL COUPLER WITH FRAGMENT-TYPE STRUCTURE
3965
Fig. 5. Layout of the designed 20-dB microstrip directional coupler with fragment-type structure. Fig. 4. Lateral and vertical symmetry in coupling structure.
III. DESIGN OF A 20-dB MICROSTRIP DIRECTIONAL COUPLER For demonstration, we design a fragment-type wideband 20-dB microstrip directional coupler. For such a weakly coupled directional coupler, directivity enhancement is a much more difficult task [9]. We will show the superiority of the design scheme introduced in Section II. To acquire a high-performance design, we set in (2), in (3), and in (4) for the 20-dB directional coupler. The operation bandwidth is set to be GHz and GHz, which define a 40% operation bandwidth and a center frequency of 2 GHz.
Fig. 6. Prototype of the designed 20-dB directional coupler with fragment-type structure.
A. Design and Test In the design simulation, we use a printed circuit board (PCB) of an FR4 substrate with a thickness of 1.6 mm, relative dielec, and a loss tangent of 0.02. Thickness tric constant of of copper cladding on the substrate is set to be 35 m. Design space for the fragment-type coupler is supposed to be 10.3 mm 16.4 mm, which is an ordinary design space for a conventional directional coupler at this frequency band. The design space is gridded into 24 22 cells of dimension 0.44 mm 0.8 mm. It should be remarked that the fragment cell assigned with “1” is set to have dimension of 0.54 mm 0.9 mm in practical simulation design. By using this cell size, it is guaranteed that the adjacent metal cells can be connected. In order to reduce the size of the design matrix for the MOEA/ D-GO, both lateral symmetry and vertical symmetry are adopted for the coupling structure, as shown in Fig. 4. After implementing the MOEA/D-GO optimization for the four optimization objectives defined in (2) to (5) with , , and , two candidate fragment-type structures are obtained in terms of maximum directivity higher than 45 dB and variation in the coupling level smaller than 0.5 dB. Layout of one of the fragment-type structures is shown in Fig. 5. A prototype of the fragment-type directional coupler is fabricated as shown in Fig. 6. Simulated and measured -parameters and phase difference of the designed fragment-type directional coupler are depicted in Fig. 7. From Fig. 7(a), we find that both the measured and simulated return losses are better than 40 dB, which indicates very good matching at the four ports. From Fig. 7(b), we find that
the measured isolation is slightly different from the simulation result at the high-frequency end, and the measured phase difference between the phase at the transmitted port and the phase at the coupled port is approximately 90.5 2 . Directivity of the coupler can be calculated from the coupling and isolation levels in Fig. 7(b). Fig. 8 shows the calculated directivity and coupling level of the designed coupler. For comparison, simulated directivity and coupling of a conventional 20-dB directional coupler with a coupled-line structure are also depicted. From Fig. 8, we find that the designed fragment-type coupler has directivity above 37 dB in the operation band, and a maximum directivity of 48 dB at 2 GHz. Compared to conventional 20-dB directional couplers, the designed fragment-type coupler has enhanced the directivity by approximately 42 dB at the center frequency. Following the conventional definition of operation bandwidth in terms of 0.5-dB coupling level variation, we find in Fig. 8 that the designed coupler has a 45% bandwidth centered at 2 GHz, while the conventional 20-dB directional coupler has a bandwidth of 35%. If 20-dB return loss and 20-dB directivity are included in the bandwidth definition for the high-performance coupler, we find the coupler designed with a fragment-type structure improves the bandwidth significantly. B. Performance Comparison To evaluate the proposed design with fragment-type structures, Table I lists characteristics of the proposed directional
3966
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
bandwidth is defined in terms of 0.5-dB coupling level variation 20-dB return loss and 20-dB directivity. We remark that a 10-dB directional coupler with fragment-type coupling structures designed in Section V is also included in Table I as work #2 for fair comparison between 10-dB directional couplers. It is shown in Table I that the fragment-type directional coupler possesses the widest bandwidth of approximately 45%, and the largest minimum directivity of 37 dB in the operation band. From Table I, we find that designs in [4], [7], [9], and [18] have very narrow bandwidth, although some may have pleasant maximum directivities, Designs in [3], [5], and [17] have relatively wider bandwidth, but they have small maximum directivities. In addition, the fragment-type directional coupler has a moderate coupling structure area of approximately , where is the guided wavelength at the center frequency. Therefore, the proposed design with a fragment-type coupling structure can provide the highest overall performance. C. Bandwidth Enhancement With Fragment-Type Structure
Fig. 7. Simulated and measured S-parameters and phase difference of the and 20-dB microstrip directional coupler with fragment-type structure. (a) parameters. (b) and parameters and phase difference.
Compared to a directional coupler with a conventional microstrip structure, the designed coupler with a fragment-type structure tends to provide higher directivity in a wide bandwidth. Judging from the structures, irregularity and discontinuity in fragment-type structure play important roles. In general, the fragment-type structure supports nonuniform current distribution, multiple electromagnetic field modes, and complicated coupling. Due to the irregularity of the structure, the fragment-type coupler suffers from more loss, which has been verified by numerical analysis. Analysis of effects of loss will help us to know more about the bandwidth enhancement of the fragment-type microstrip directional coupler. With symmetry in Fig. 4, the scattering matrix of a directional coupler can be expressed as
(7) where defines return loss, defines the transmission coefficient, defines the coupling coefficient, and denotes isolation. For an ideal lossless directional coupler, and , which gives an infinity directivity [19]. However, losses cannot be avoided in a practical coupler, i.e., in general we have Fig. 8. Simulated and measured directivity and coupling level for the designed directional coupler. For comparison, the curves of a conventional 20-dB directional coupler are also depicted.
coupler and several previously designed high-performance directional couplers. For high-performance directional couplers,
(8) where should be positive and can be referred to as a loss index solely determined by the directional coupler. Different directional couplers have different values of .
WANG et al.: DESIGN OF HIGH-DIRECTIVITY WIDEBAND MICROSTRIP DIRECTIONAL COUPLER WITH FRAGMENT-TYPE STRUCTURE
3967
TABLE I COMPARISON BETWEEN PROPOSED COUPLER AND PREVIOUSLY PUBLISHED DESIGNS WITH MICROSTRIP STRUCTURE
For a practical coupler, it is well known that the difference between the total incident power and the total scattered power can be calculate as (9) (10) denotes the incident power waves at every port, dewhere notes complex conjugate transpose, and denotes the unit matrix. Obviously, is a positive definite Hermite quadratic matrix, which should have a positive principal minor determinant, i.e., and
(11)
From (11), an inequality about S-parameters for a practical directional coupler can be obtained as
(12) Isolation of the directional coupler is defined by , whose modulus and phase angle are included in the first term on the left side of (12). Coupling of the directional coupler is defined by , whose modulus and phase angle are included in the second term. Therefore, bandwidth for isolation can be derived from dynamic range of the first term, and bandwidth for coupling can be derived from dynamic range of the second term. However, there is a conflict to some extent between the coupling bandwidth. Due to the inequality constrain in (12), a larger dynamic range of the second term, and vice versa. Such a conflict cannot be readily conciliated by using a conventional coupling structure. It is the fragment-type structure that offers the possibility to seek structures that may provide a high isolation in a wide bandwidth of coupling.
IV. FURTHER DISCUSSION High directivity, a stable coupling level, and wider bandwidth can be acquired by using fragment-type structure in the microstrip directional coupler. For fragment-type structure design, an optimization searching scheme plays a key role. Some technique aspects related to the optimization searching, such as effects of design space, control of coupling level, and efficiency consideration for optimization searching, deserve further discussion. In addition, the tight coupling design with a fragment-type structure has also been discussed. A. Effects of Design Space In the design in Section III, design space for a conventional directional coupler at a center frequency of 2 GHz is set as standard design space for the fragment-type coupler, which is 10.3 mm 16.4 mm. When the fragment-type structure is applied, different equivalent electrical length may be obtained. Therefore, it is not necessary for a directional coupler with a fragment-type structure to occupy exactly the standard design space. Table II lists the major characteristics of 20-dB directional couplers with a fragment-type structure taking several design space, viz. different in Fig. 5. The characteristics are acquired by setting the listed design space in the four-objective MOEA/D-GO optimization in Section III. We remark that, in these designs, we take the same fragment cell size as defined in Section III. From Table II, we find that although smaller design space can also guarantee high directivity, the operation bandwidth becomes narrower. For design space of mm or design space of mm, no bandwidth defined in terms of 0.5-dB coupling level variation, 20-dB return loss, and directivity at 2 GHz can be measured. Thus we conclude that for fragment-type high-performance directional coupler design, the design space must be larger than 6.3 mm 12.4 mm for fragment cell size defined in Section III. For other fragment cell size, there
3968
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
TABLE II OPTIMIZATION RESULTS FOR DIFFERENT DESIGN SPACE
Fig. 10. Simulated coupling levels for the designed and conventional directional couplers of various slot width .
Fig. 11. Preset an initial slot in design to speed up the MOEA/D-GO. Fig. 9. Principle for slot forming in fragment-type structure.
may be a slightly different requirement on design space dimensions. Although the smallest design space, 6.3 mm 12.4 mm, will cause the overall performance degradation, the performance is still better than the conventional coupler under the comprehensive consideration of bandwidth and directivity, which shows the potential for miniaturization design with fragment-type structures. B. Effects of Width of the Coupling Slot It is interesting to note that in the optimized fragment-type coupler searched by using the MOEA/D-GO, there tends to be a slot, as shown in Fig. 5, which has a width of 1.3 mm. This is a coupling slot similar to that in a conventional coupled-line structure. For the conventional directional coupler, it is the width of the coupling slot between two parallel microstrip lines that controls the coupling level. Due to the irregularity in both the transmission structure and slot of the fragment-type coupler, the effects of slot width , as illustrated in Fig. 9, could be somewhat complicated. In order to show effects of the slot, we may manually adjust the width of the slot in the optimized fragment-type coupler in Fig. 5, and calculate the coupling level without re-optimization. Fig. 10 shows the simulated coupling levels for the optimized fragment-type coupler in Fig. 5 of different slot width . For
comparison, coupling levels of conventional directional couplers of the corresponding slot width are also depicted. We find from Fig. 10 that the coupling gets stronger as slot width gets smaller. This variation characteristic is similar to the conventional coupled-line directional coupler. Therefore, the slot width in the conventional directional coupler can be used as an initial slot width in MOEA/D-GO optimization searching, as will be discussed in Section IV-C. C. Efficiency Consideration Efficiency is the major concern when a multi-objective optimization searching algorithm such as the MOEA/D-GO is used for design of the fragment-type directional coupler. It is well known that some prior knowledge about the design may improve efficiency of optimization searching. Now that Fig. 10 tells us that couplers with a different slot width may have a different coupling level, we may preset an initial slot width in the design space to speed up the stochastic searching of the MOEA/D-GO, as shown in Fig. 11. Fig. 12 shows the increase of isolation in the MOEA/D-GO searching for the 20-dB microstrip directional coupler with respect to the number of iterations for several preset initial slot widths . For MOEA/D-GO optimization searching, the number of iteration can be used to indicate the searching time. From Fig. 12, we find that searching with mm, i.e., no preset initial slot, is the most time consuming because it takes 75 iterations (about 13 days) to acquire isolation of 65 dB. Searching with initial slot of mm seems to be the fastest because it takes 25 iterations (about five days) to
WANG et al.: DESIGN OF HIGH-DIRECTIVITY WIDEBAND MICROSTRIP DIRECTIONAL COUPLER WITH FRAGMENT-TYPE STRUCTURE
Fig. 12. Isolation increases with searching iteration of MOEA/D-GO for different initial slot width .
acquire isolation of 65 dB. All the designs with MOEA/D-GO optimization ran on a computer with Intel Core I5-4670 @3.4 GHz. It should be remarked that a too-wide initial slot width preset in the design space will be detrimental to optimization searching. The reason is that a too-wide slot will give a too-weak coupling so that the 20-dB coupling level cannot be guaranteed by any fragment-type structure. The coupling slot width for the conventional microstrip directional coupler can be used as a useful reference to preset the initial slot width.
3969
Fig. 13. Simulated directivity and coupling level for the fragment-type direcmm. tional coupler and conventional coupler with slot width
TABLE III DESIGNED PERFORMANCES OF CONVENTIONAL COUPLER AND FRAGMENT-TYPE COUPLER WITH DIFFERENT SLOT WIDTH
V. TIGHT COUPLING COUPLER DESIGN WITH FRAGMENT-TYPE STRUCTURES Fragment-type coupling structures have found successful applications in design of a 20-dB high-directivity wideband coupler, which belongs to loose coupling couplers. Judging from the appearance, fragment-type structures hold more irregularity and discontinuity than the conventional coupled-line structure. Therefore, it is quite reasonable to doubt the design of tight coupling directional couplers with fragment-type structures. With the discussion about presetting coupling slot in the fragment-type coupling structures, especially the results presented in Fig. 10, there is growing doubt. However, Fig. 10 does not imply that the coupling level of fragment-type directional coupler is always lower than that of the conventional directional coupler when they have the same slot width . The reason is that the coupling level of the fragment-type coupler shown in Fig. 10 for an adjusted slot width is not the coupling level of a fragment-type coupler optimized for this slot width. For each slot width, there should be its own optimized fragment-type couplers, which can be obtained by setting the slot width in the fragment-type coupler model, and running the MOEA/D-GO optimization. To make it clear, Fig. 13 shows the key characteristics of the conventional directional coupler and fragment-type directional coupler optimized for slot width mm. It is observed that the conventional directional coupler of mm has a coupling level of 21 dB, while the fragment-type directional coupler of mm has a coupling level of 20 dB. Therefore,
the optimized fragment-type direction coupler may provide a little bit tighter coupling than that of conventional directional coupler when they have the same coupling slot. To demonstrate tight coupling direction couplers with fragment-type structures, we design 10- and 3-dB driectional couplers with MOEA/D-GO optimization searching. Both of the two fragment-type couplers are designed on the same PCB as used in Section III. With no loss of generality, the 10-dB (or 3-dB) fragment-type coupler takes a design space same as that required by a conventional 10-dB (or 3-dB) coupled line coupler. In both the designs, fragment cells have the same dimensions of 0.4 mm 1 mm. The two designs have also preset a coupling slot to improve the design efficiency. Maximum coupling slot width for 10- and 3-dB conventional coupled line couplers are set as an initial slot width for 10- and 3-dB fragment-type couplers, respectively. Table III lists the major characteristics of conventional coupler and fragment-type coupler with different maximum slot width. From Table III, we find that for both 10- and 3-dB tight coupling levels, fragment-type couplers can achieve better performance such as higher directivity and wider bandwidth, even with a little bit wider slot.
3970
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Therefore, the fragment-type structure can also be used to design high-performance directional couplers with a tight coupling level. VI. CONCLUSION With a fragment-type coupling structure, the wideband microstrip directional coupler can be designed with high directivity. Multi-objective optimization searching with the MOEA/ D-GO is used to implement the high-performance design. Judging from theoretical analysis, we find that there may be a conflict between the coupling bandwidth and isolation bandwidth in a directional coupler. For the microstrip directional coupler with a conventional structure, it is hard to make a better tradeoff between the coupling bandwidth and directivity bandwidth. It is the fragment-type structure that offers the possibility to seek such a balance, and the multi-objective optimization searching to find the most suitable fragment-type structure for high performance. Due to its flexibility, the fragment-type structure can also be used in design of the directional coupler with the asymmetrical coupling structure in an irregular design space. Design of the fragment-type coupling structure in a large design space could be quite time consuming. Some specific techniques such as using nonuniform fragment cells and combining the median filtering operator have been demonstrated effective for antenna design [20]. To find an effective optimization searching technique for the design of the fragment-type directional coupler will be the subject of further work.
[12] D. Ding and G. Wang, “MOEA/D-GO for fragmented antenna design,” Progr. Electromagn. Res., M, vol. 33, pp. 1–15, 2013. [13] L. Wang, G. Wang, and J. Sidén, “Design of fragment-type isolation structures for MIMO antennas,” Progr. Electromagen. Res., C, vol. 52, pp. 71–82, 2014. [14] J. Han, G. Wang, and J. Sidén, “Fragment-type UHF RFID tag embedded in QR barcode label,” Electron. Lett., vol. 51, no. 4, pp. 313–315, Feb. 2015. [15] Q. Zhao, G. Wang, and D. Ding, “Compact microstrip bandpass filter with fragment-loaded resonators,” Microw. Opt. Technol. Lett., vol. 56, no. 12, pp. 2896–2899, Dec. 2014. [16] Q. Zhang and H. Li, “MOEA/D: A multi-objective evolutionary algorithm based on decomposition,” IEEE Trans. Evol. Comput., vol. 11, no. 6, pp. 712–731, Dec. 2007. [17] J. Muller and A. F. Jacob, “Advanced characterization and design of compensated high directivity quafrature coupler,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig., 2010, pp. 724–727. [18] A. Hirota, Y. Tahara, and N. Yoneda, “A wide band forward coupler with balanced composite right/left-handed transmission lines,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig., Jun. 2011, pp. 1–4. [19] R. K. Mongia, I. J. Bahl, P. Bhartia, and J. Hong, RF and Microwave Coupled-Line Circuits, 2nd ed. Norwood, MA, USA: Artech House, 2007. [20] D. Ding, G. Wang, and L. Wang, “High-efficiency scheme and optimization technique for design of fragment-type isolation structure between multiple-input and multiple-output antennas,” IET Microw. Antennas Propag., vol. 9, no. 9, pp. 933–939, 2015.
Lu Wang received the B.S. degree from the University of Science and Technology of China, Hefei, China, in 2013, and is currently working toward the Ph.D. degree in electrical engineering at the University of Science and Technology of China. His research interests involve isolation structures design for multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) antennas, fragment-type microwave circuits, and antenna design.
REFERENCES [1] S. L. March, “Phase velocity compensation in parallel-coupled microstrip,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig., Jun. 1982, pp. 410–412. [2] M. Dydyk, “Microstrip directional couplers with ideal performance via single-element compensatin,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 47, no. 6, pp. 956–964, Jun. 1999. [3] R. Phromloungsri, M. Chongcheawchamnan, and I. D. Robertson, “Inductively compensated parallel coupled microstrip lines and their applications,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 54, no. 9, pp. 3571–3582, Sep. 2006. [4] D. Jaisson, “Multilayer microstrip directional coupler with discrete coupling,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 48, no. 9, pp. 1591–1595, Sep. 2000. [5] S.-F. Chang, J.-L. Chen, Y.-H. Jeng, and C.-T. Wu, “New high-directivity coupler design with coupled spurlines,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 14, no. 2, pp. 65–67, Feb. 2004. [6] J. Shi, X. Y. Zhang, K. W. Lau, J. X. Chen, and Q. Xue, “Directional coupler with high directivity using metallic cylinders on microstrip line,” Electron. Lett., vol. 45, no. 8, pp. 415–417, Apr. 2009. [7] A. Pourzadi, A. R. Attari, and M. S. Majedi, “A directivity-enhanced directional coupler using epsilon negative transmission line,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 60, no. 11, pp. 3395–3401, Nov. 2012. [8] S. Lee and Y. Lee, “An inductor-loaded microstrip directional coupler for directivity enhancement,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 19, no. 6, pp. 362–364, Jun. 2009. [9] S. Lee and Y. Lee, “A design method for microstrip directional couplers loaded with shunt inductors for directivity enhancement,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 58, no. 4, pp. 994–1002, Apr. 2010. [10] B. Thors, H. Steyskal, and H. Holter, “Broad-band fragmented aperture phased array element design using genetic algorithms,” IEEE Trans. Antennas Propag., vol. 53, no. 10, pp. 3280–3287, Oct. 2005. [11] N. Herscovici, J. Ginn, T. Donisi, and B. Tomasic, “A fragmented aperture-coupled microstrip antenna,” in Proc. IEEE Antennas Propag. Soc. Int. Symp., San Diego, CA, USA, Jul. 2008, pp. 1–4.
Gang Wang (M’98) received the B.S. degree from the University of Science and Technology of China, Hefei, China, in 1988, and the M.S. and Ph.D. degrees in electrical engineering from Xidian University, Xi’an, China, in 1991 and 1996, respectively. From 1996 to 1998, he was with Xi’an Jiaotong University, as a Postdoctoral Research Fellow, during which time he was supported by the Chinese Government. From 1998 to 2000, he was an Associate Professor with Xi’an Jiaotong University. In 2001, he was a Visiting Researcher with the ITM Department, Mid-Sweden University. From 2002 to 2003, he was a Postdoctoral Research Associate with the Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, University of Florida. From 2003 to 2010, he was with Jiangsu University, Zhenjiang, China, as a Chair Professor. He is currently a Full Professor with the University of Science and Technology of China. His research interests include ultra-wideband electromagnetics, passive RF identification (RFID)/sensors, metamaterials, and modern optimization techniques for microwave circuits and antenna design. Dr. Wang is a Senior Member of the Chinese Institute of Electronics.
Johan Sidén (M’00) received the M.Sc. degree in telecommunication, Licentiate of Technology degree in electronics, and Ph.D. degree in electronics from Mid-Sweden University, Sundsvall, Sweden, in 2000, 2004, and 2007, respectively. He is currently an Associate Professor with Mid Sweden University. His research interests include RF identification (RFID) technology, wireless sensor networks, antenna technology, and printed passive electronic systems.
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
3971
Exact Synthesis of Full- and Half-Symmetric Rat-Race Ring Hybrids With or Without Impedance Transforming Characteristics Po-Jung Chou, Yun-Wei Lin, and Chi-Yang Chang, Member, IEEE
Abstract—Novel full- and half-symmetric rat-race ring hybrid structures are proposed, in which the impedance transforming property can be implemented. Impedance transformation implies that the impedances of the input and output ports can be different. The conventional even- and odd-mode partition and analysis method cannot be applied to the proposed half-symmetric circuits; therefore, an analysis method is developed. The rat-race ring is exactly synthesized on the basis of a newly deduced high-pass prototype that is based on Richards theorem, which allows the user-defined specifications to be satisfied. Three hybrids are synthesized as examples—a sixth-order full-symmetric hybrid with a bandwidth of 116% and a return loss of 20 dB, a fifth-order half-symmetric hybrid with a 100% bandwidth and 25-dB return loss, and a fifth-order impedance-transforming half-symmetric hybrid with an output port impedance of 70 , a 100% bandwidth, and 20-dB return loss. The first and second hybrids are implemented to verify the method. A comparison of the measured and simulation results indicates good agreement. Index Terms—High-pass prototype, planar structure, rat-race ring hybrid, S-domain, synthesis method.
I. INTRODUCTION
T
HE proposed rat-race ring hybrid comprises a core circuit [Fig. 1(a)], which consists of four identical quarter-wave lines connected as a ring; one of the lines includes an ideal phase inverter. Four identical short-circuit stubs connect to the ring at the junctions. In contrast, the conventional rat-race ring includes three quarter-wave lines and one 3/4 wavelength line. Two types of subcircuits, A and B, are added at the output node of the core circuit, as depicted in Fig. 1(b). The circuits comprise S-domain high-pass elements such as series open-circuit stubs, shunt short-circuit stubs, and unit elements (UEs). The rat-race ring is full-symmetric if the subcircuits A and B are identical, and otherwise half-symmetric. The circuits in
Manuscript received March 09, 2015; revised July 12, 2015, August 24, 2015; accepted September 15, 2015. Date of publication October 26, 2015; date of current version December 02, 2015. This work was supported in part by the National Science Councilunder Grant NSC 102-2221-E-009-025-MY3. P.-J. Chou and C.-Y. Chang are with the Graduate Institute of Communication Engineering, National Chiao-Tung University, Hsinchu, Taiwan (e-mail: [email protected]; [email protected]). Y.-W. Lin is with the Measurement/Calibration Technology Department, Electronics Testing Center, Taoyuan, Taiwan (e-mail: [email protected]). Color versions of one or more of the figures in this paper are available online at http://ieeexplore.ieee.org. Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/TMTT.2015.2486278
Fig. 1. Proposed rat-race ring hybrid. (a) Core circuit. (b) Whole circuit.
[1]–[9] can be categorized as full-symmetric rat-race ring hybrids. The circuits in [1], [3]–[5], [7], and [8] have no subcircuits A and B, and the short-circuit stubs in the core circuit have finite ([1], [8]) and infinite ([1], [3]–[5]) impedances. In [2], [6], and [9], the subcircuits A and B are identical and comprise only S-domain unit elements. There are other circuits in [1] that contains subcircuit A and B which are identical and comprises S-domain series capacitors and shunt inductors. All of these full-symmetric circuits can be analyzed by conventional even- and odd-mode partitions, i.e., the even- and odd-mode signals excited at port 1 and port 3, as shown in Fig. 1(b).
0018-9480 © 2015 IEEE. Personal use is permitted, but republication/redistribution requires IEEE permission. See http://www.ieee.org/publications_standards/publications/rights/index.html for more information.
3972
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 3. S-domain equivalent circuit of Fig. 2(c) and (d).
Fig. 2. Equivalent circuits of Fig. 1 (a) under even-mode excitation, (b) under odd-mode excitation, (c) the two-port equivalent circuit of (a), and (d) the twoport equivalent circuit of (b). Note that the ports are renumbered in (c) and (d).
These circuits can be synthesized through analytical methods in low-order circuits (e.g., [3]–[5], [7], and [8]) or numerical methods in high-order circuits (e.g., [2], [6], and [9]). However, the conventional even- and odd-mode partition is not applicable to the half-symmetric circuits because the circuits become asymmetric under conventional even- and odd-mode excitations. Therefore, the excitation method in [10] is applied here to synthesize the proposed rat-race ring hybrid. In this method, the modal signals are excited at ports 1 and 4 or at ports 2 and 3 instead of the conventional method of excitation at ports 1 and 3. Under this excitation, the even- and odd-mode modal networks are the same, and they are a commensurate network that can be synthesized with user-defined responses using Richards transformation in the S-domain. An important characteristic of the half-symmetric rat-race ring hybrid is that during the synthesis process, impedance transformation between the input and output ports can be easily achieved.
Fig. 4. Phase inverter circuits. (a) Short-ended coupled lines and (b) the twisted balanced line where their equivalent circuits are also shown.
B. S-Domain Equivalent Circuit As shown in Fig. 2(c) and (d), the equivalent two-port networks of even- and odd-mode excitations are similar except that the input and output ports are interchanged. For convenience, port 1 is termed the sum-port ( -port) and port 4 the difference-port ( -port). The circuit can be transformed to an S-domain equivalent circuit, as shown in Fig. 3, by using the following Richards variable: (1) where is the frequency variable in Richards domain, is the real frequency variable, and is the center frequency of the passband. The transformed core rat-race ring part satisfies the following relation:
II. ANALYSIS OF THE FULL- AND HALF-SYMMETRIC RAT-RACE RING HYBRID A. Circuit Model Fig. 1 shows the proposed full- and half-symmetric rat-race hybrid. Under even-mode signal excitation at ports 2 and 3, the output signal arrives at port 1, while no signal is outputted from port 4 because subcircuit A at this port is connected at node B, thus it becomes a short-circuit. Fig. 2(a) shows the equivalent circuit under even-mode excitation. The phase inverter can be eliminated because it has no influence on the S-domain response. On the other hand, under odd-mode signal excitation at ports 2 and 3, the output signal arrives at port 4, and no signal is outputted from port 1 because subcircuit A at this port is connected at the short-circuited node A. The equivalent circuit under odd-mode excitation is shown in Fig. 2(b). Fig. 2(c) and (d) depict the two-port equivalent circuits corresponding to even- and odd-mode excitations, respectively. The impedance values in subcircuit B should be half of that in subcircuit B.
(2) C. Phase Inverter In this paper, to implement the phase inverter, the circuits shown in Fig. 4(a) and the twist line structure [11] shown in Fig. 4(b) are used. Examples corresponding to Fig. 4(a) and (b) are implemented in Sections IV-A and IV-B, respectively. III. SYNTHESIS OF THE FULL- AND HALF-SYMMETRIC RAT-RACE RING HYBRID The core circuit is now presented as S-domain high-pass elements as shown in Fig. 3. Subcircuits A and B are also composed of S-domain high-pass elements so that the whole equivalent circuit can be synthesized in the S-domain. According to
CHOU et al.: EXACT SYNTHESIS OF FULL- AND HALF-SYMMETRIC RAT-RACE RING HYBRIDS
3973
Fig. 5. Sixth-order full-symmetric rat-race ring hybrid.
[16] and [17], the S-domain high-pass prototype can be transformed to a nonredundant equivalent circuit and be synthesized exactly by the Chebyshev function
(3) Fig. 6. Equivalent circuit of Fig. 5 under (a) even-mode excitation. (b) The parallel-connected two-port equivalent circuit of (a). (c) The equivalent circuit of subcircuit A and B.
(4) , where is the filter cutoff where frequency used to determine the bandwidth of the equivalent two-port network, specifies the equal-ripple value, is the th degree Chebyshev polynomial of the first kind, is the th degree unnormalized Chebyshev polynomial of the second kind, and and denote the number of high-pass ladder elements and unit elements, respectively. The input impedance with a normalized source resistance of 1 can be determined as follows:
Fig. 7. (a) S-domain equivalent circuit of Fig. 6(b). (b) Non-redundant circuit of (a).
and B. The equivalent circuit for the short-ended coupled-line section is shown in Fig. 4(a); here, the impedance is given by (6) (5) The S-domain unit element can be determined by Richards theorem [12] and the S-domain LC-value can be found by pole removal techniques [13]–[15]. A. Design Example: Sixth-Order Full-Symmetric Rat-Race Ring Hybrid To maximize the number of nonredundant elements in the S-domain prototype circuit with minimum size, an open-ended coupled-line section is a good choice for subcircuits A and B. Fig. 5 shows a sixth-order full-symmetric rat-race ring hybrid with open-ended coupled-line sections for both subcircuits A
Fig. 6(a) depicts the equivalent circuit under even-mode excitation, and Fig. 6(b) is the parallel connected two-port circuit of the circuit shown in Fig. 6(a). The odd-mode two-port equivalent circuit is the same as the circuit shown in Fig. 6(b). The equivalent circuit of an open-circuited parallel-coupled-line section is shown in Fig. 6(c). The S-domain equivalent circuit is shown in Fig. 7(a); it satisfies the following equations: (7) (8) (9)
3974
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
TABLE I CALCULATED VALUES OF THE EXAMPLE IN FIG. 7(B) (IN
TABLE II CALCULATED VALUES OF THE EXAMPLE IN FIG. 5 (IN
)
)
Fig. 9. Fifth-order half-symmetric rat-race ring hybrid.
Fig. 8. Frequency response of the sixth-order full-symmetric rat-race ring hybrid.
Fig. 10. Parallel-connected two-port equivalent circuit of the fifth-order halfsymmetric rat-race ring hybrid.
To synthesize each element, the circuit has to be transformed into a non-redundant network, as shown in Fig. 7(b). The transformation equations are as follows: (10) (11)
Fig. 11. (a) S-domain equivalent circuit of Fig. 10. (b) Nonredundant circuit of (a).
(12) (13) The sixth-order full-symmetric rat-race ring is designed with a center frequency of 2 GHz, a bandwidth of 116%, and a return loss level of 20 dB. Substituting the specifications into (3)–(5) yields the input impedance of the S-domain equivalent circuit as
B. Design Example: Fifth-Order Half-Symmetric Rat-Race Ring Hybrid Fig. 9 shows a fifth-order half-symmetric rat-race ring hybrid with a center frequency of 2 GHz, a bandwidth of 100%, and a return loss level of 25 dB. The synthesis process is similar to that of the sixth-order circuit. The subcircuit A is an openended coupled-line section, while subcircuit B is a transmission line. The two-port equivalent circuit is shown in Fig. 10. The S-domain equivalent circuit and the non-redundant network are shown in Fig. 11(a) and (b), respectively. The input impedance of the S-domain equivalent circuit is given by
(14) The synthesized values of the circuit shown in Fig. 7(b) with a normalized source resistance of 1 are illustrated in Table I. By substituting the calculated values into (6)–(13) and de-normalizing to 50 , the element values of the circuit shown in Fig. 5 are obtained and are listed in Table II. The synthesized response is shown in Fig. 8.
(15) Table III lists the synthesized values of the circuit shown in Fig. 10 with a normalized source resistance of 1 , and Table IV lists the element values of the circuit shown in
CHOU et al.: EXACT SYNTHESIS OF FULL- AND HALF-SYMMETRIC RAT-RACE RING HYBRIDS
TABLE III CALCULATED VALUES OF THE EXAMPLE IN FIG. 7(B) (IN
TABLE IV CALCULATED VALUES OF THE EXAMPLE IN FIG. 9 (IN
3975
)
)
Fig. 14. Cross-sectional views of (a) conventional coupled microstrip line, (b) six-line coupled line with ground plane aperture, and (c) the enhanced coupling structure [23].
Fig. 12. Frequency response of the fifth-order half-symmetric rat-race ring hybrid.
TABLE V CALCULATED VALUES OF THE FIFTH-ORDER HALF-SYMMETRIC RAT-RACE RING HYBRID WITH 70 OUTPUT IMPEDANCE (IN )
Fig. 13. Frequency response of the fifth-order half-symmetric rat-race ring hybrid with output impedance 70 .
Fig. 9 obtained by de-normalizing to 50 response is shown in Fig. 12.
. The synthesized
C. Design Example: Fifth-Order Half-Symmetric Rat-Race Ring Hybrid With 70- Output Impedance A fifth-order half-symmetric rat-race ring hybrid with an output impedance of 70 , a center frequency of 2 GHz, a bandwidth of 100%, and a return loss level of 20 dB is synthesized. The circuit structure, the two-port equivalent circuit, and the non-redundant network are all similar to those of the second example, as shown in Figs. 9, 10, and 11(b), except the impedance of the output ports (ports 2 and 3) in Fig. 9 changes from to and the impedance of the output port (port 2) in Figs. 10 and 11(a) changes from to . The synthesis process is also similar to that of the sixth-order circuit, but in this case, the desired output impedance value is
Fig. 15. Layout of the sixth-order full-symmetric rat-race ring hybrid. (a) Top layer. (b) Bottom layer.
set before the pole removal stage. The synthesized values with a normalized source resistance of 1 and the element values obtained by denormalizing to 50 are shown in Table V. The synthesized response is shown in Fig. 13.
3976
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
TABLE VI PHYSICAL DIMENSION OF THE SIXTH-ORDER FULL-SYMMETRIC RAT-RACE RING HYBRID
Fig. 16. (a) Top view and (b) bottom view of the fabricated sixth-order fullsymmetric rat-race ring hybrid.
IV. IMPLEMENTATION AND RESULTS Circuits having the same input and output port impedances are considered for ease of measurement; that is, examples A and B in Section V are chosen for the verification of the proposed circuits. The example circuits are implemented on a Rogers RO4003 substrate with a thickness of 0.504 mm and a dielectric constant of 3.58. HFSS (3D electromagnetic simulation software) is used to obtain the physical dimensions of the coupled-line and phase inverter sections shown in Figs. 5 and 9, according to the calculated values in Tables II and IV. The conventional microstrip sections can be easily obtained. After obtaining the physical dimensions of each section, the whole circuit is constructed in the HFSS environment. Finally, fine-tuning of the coupled-line and phase inverter sections may be required. A. Sixth-Order Full-Symmetric Rat-Race Ring Hybrid Fig. 14(a) shows the cross-sectional view of the conventional microstrip coupled-line section. However, the calculated evenand odd-mode characteristic impedance values cannot be realized by this structure alone. For the short-ended coupled-line section in the core circuit, the six-line Lange coupler structure [18], [19] is adopted, which will decrease the odd-mode impedance. To further increase the even-mode impedance, the ground plane aperture technique, also called the defected ground structure [20]–[22], is used. Fig. 14(b) shows the six-line coupledline section with a ground plane aperture where the strips A1, A2, and A3 are connected together and B1, B2, and B3 are connected together. For the open-ended coupled-line section in subcircuits A and B, the enhanced coupling structure proposed by Liang et al. [23] is used. Fig. 14(c) shows the cross-sectional
Fig. 17. Response of the sixth-order full-symmetric rat-race ring hybrid when port 1 (the -port) excited. (a) Insertion gain and return gain. (b) Amplitude imbalance and phase difference.
view of the coupling structure, where strip A1 is connected to A2 and B1 is connected to B2. The circuit layout is shown in Fig. 15. All of the physical parameters corresponding to the circuit shown in Fig. 15 are listed in Table VI. Fig. 16 shows the fabricated circuit. Fig. 17(a) and (b) shows the simulated and measured results when port 1 ( -port) is excited. The measured input return loss and the typical insertion loss in the passband are approximately 16.5–25 and 3.410 dB, respectively. The measured in-band amplitude imbalance is within 1 dB and the phase difference is within . Fig. 18(a) and (b) shows the simulated and measured results when port 4 ( -port) is excited. The measured input return loss in the passband is approximately 15–25 dB, while the measured typical insertion loss in the passband is 3.463 dB. The measured in-band amplitude imbalance is within 1 dB and the phase difference is within . The measured data and the theoretical results agree well with each other. Fig. 19 shows that ports 1–4 and ports 2–3 have good isolation, which is measured to be less than 25 dB over the whole passband. B. Fifth-Order Half-Symmetric Rat-Race Ring Hybrid As shown in Fig. 9, the twist line structure shown in Fig. 4(b) is adopted to implement the ideal phase inverter. For implementing the phase inverter, double-sided parallel-strip lines (DSPSL) [24], [25] are used. Fig. 20(c) shows the twist-line structure, which is formed by twisting the signal
CHOU et al.: EXACT SYNTHESIS OF FULL- AND HALF-SYMMETRIC RAT-RACE RING HYBRIDS
3977
Fig. 18. Response of the sixth-order full-symmetric rat-race ring hybrid when port 4 (the -port) excited. (a) Insertion gain and return gain. (b) Amplitude imbalance and phase difference.
Fig. 19. Isolation of the sixth-order full-symmetric rat-race ring hybrid.
and the ground strip of the DSPSL [11], and the layout of twist-line phase inverter. As calculated in Section III-B, both the even-mode impedance and coupling factor of the open-circuited coupled-line sections are high. Again, the enhanced coupling structure proposed by Liang et al. [23] is adopted. The complete layout is shown in Fig. 20, and Table VII lists all the physical parameters corresponding to the circuit shown in Fig. 20. Fig. 21 shows the fabricated circuit. Fig. 22(a) and (b), respectively, show the measured and simulated results when port 1 ( -port) is excited. The measured input return loss and the measured typical insertion loss in the passband are approximately 19–22 and 3.350 dB, respectively. The
Fig. 20. Layout of the fifth-order half-symmetric rat-race ring hybrid. (a) Top layer. (b) Bottom layer. (c) Phase inverter part.
measured in-band amplitude imbalance is within 1 dB and the phase difference is within . Fig. 23(a) and (b) shows the measured and simulated results when port 4 ( -port) is excited. The measured input return loss and the measured typical insertion loss in the passband are approximately 19.5–22
3978
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 21. (a) Top view and (b) bottom view of the fabricated fifth-order halfsymmetric rat-race ring hybrid.
TABLE VII PHYSICAL DIMENSION OF THE FIFTH-ORDER HALF-SYMMETRIC RAT-RACE RING HYBRID
Fig. 22. Response of the fifth-order half-symmetric rat-race ring hybrid when port 1 (the -port) excited. (a) Insertion gain and return gain. (b) Amplitude imbalance and phase difference.
and 3.300 dB, respectively. The measured in-band amplitude imbalance is within 1 dB and the phase difference is within . The measured data match theoretical results well. Fig. 24 shows that ports 1–4 and ports 2–3 have good isolation, which is measured to be less than 25 dB over the whole passband. V. DISCUSSION Table VIII compares the proposed rat-race ring hybrids and other similar or identical designs. Two different size scales are used for the comparison: the physical dimension in millimeters and the electrical length , which is related to the center frequency and substrate parameter. Although size reduction is not the focus of this study, the proposed circuits are not too large. In addition, the synthesis method has two vital properties. 1) The bandwidth and the return loss level can be independently selected. In [4] and [6], design graphs of the relationship between bandwidth and return loss level were given. In [7] and [8], the relationship between bandwidth and return loss level was not elucidated. In [9], a design table was provided to determine the return loss level, but bandwidth and return loss were interdependent. 2) None of the rat-race ring hybrids in the table are practical for impedance transformation, unless they are half-symmetric structures. In a past study where impedance
Fig. 23. Response of the fifth-order half-symmetric rat-race ring hybrid when port 1 (the -port) excited. (a) Insertion gain and return gain. (b) Amplitude imbalance and phase difference.
CHOU et al.: EXACT SYNTHESIS OF FULL- AND HALF-SYMMETRIC RAT-RACE RING HYBRIDS
3979
TABLE VIII COMPARISION OF THE ELECTRCIAL PARAMETER AND SOME PROPERTIES BETWEEN PROPOSED RAT-RACE RING HYBRIDS WITH SIMILAR DESIGNS
Fig. 24. Isolation of the fifth-order half-symmetric rat-race ring hybrid.
transformation was realized, two extra impedance transformers were added at the input and/or output ports [26], which can lead to deterioration of frequency response. The impedance transformation characteristic could not be analyzed because of its asymmetrical properties under conventional even- or odd-mode excitation. Fig. 25 shows a design flowchart for full- and half-symmetric rat-race ring hybrids. The proposed hybrids are implemented on a low-dielectric-constant Rogers RO4003 substrate. The coupled-line section and the phase inverter section are the most difficult parts to realize, because a ground plane pattern is usually needed. The circuit with a ground plane pattern has drawbacks such as substrate suspension and a limited operating frequency. The substrate suspension can largely restrict the hybrid application scenarios as properly designed metallic housings are essential. The simulated results show that the distance between the metal housing and the substrate should be greater than half of the largest ground slot width. The problem of limited operation frequency can be overcome by using a finite-ground-width CPW,
Fig. 25. Design flowchart of full- and half-symmetric rat-race ring hybrid.
a high-dielectric-constant substrate with a Lange coupler, or a vertically installed planar circuit. In [27], a finite-ground-width CPW rat-race hybrid was realized and it attained an operating frequency up to 110 GHz. VI. CONCLUSION Full- and half-symmetric rat-race ring hybrids were proposed and an S-domain synthesis method was successfully derived for the proposed rat-race ring hybrids. The half-symmetric hybrid can realize impedance transformation. Three hybrids were
3980
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
synthesized: sixth-order full-symmetric, fifth-order half-symmetric, and fifth-order half-symmetric with impedance transformation characteristics. The first two circuits were implemented and the feasibility of the proposed method was confirmed by comparing the measured and simulated data. ACKNOWLEDGMENT The authors would like to thank every one of the reviewers who provided very helpful information that made this paper more complete. REFERENCES [1] A. F. Podell, “Some magic tees with 2 to 3 octaves bandwidth,” in Proc. G-MTT Int. Microw. Symp., May 1969, pp. 317–319. [2] S. Rehnmark, “Wide-band balanced line microwave hybrids,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. MTT-25, no. 10, pp. 825–830, Oct. 1977. [3] M.-H. Murgulescu, E. Penard, and I. Zaquine, “Design formulas for generalised 180 hybrid ring couplers,” Electron. Lett., vol. 30, no. 7, pp. 573–574, Mar. 1994. [4] T. Wang and K. Wu, “Size-reduction and band-broadening design technique of uniplanar hybrid ring coupler using phase inverter for M(H)MIC's,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 47, no. 2, pp. 198–206, Feb. 1999. [5] C.-Y. Chang, C.-C. Yang, and D.-C. Niu, “A multioctave bandwidth rat-race singly balanced mixer,” IEEE Microw. Wirel. Compon. Lett., vol. 9, no. 1, pp. 37–39, Jan. 1999. [6] C.-Y. Chang and C.-C. Yang, “A novel broad-band Chebyshev-response rat-race ring coupler,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 47, no. 4, pp. 455–462, Apr. 1999. [7] T. T. Mo, Q. Xue, and C. H. Chan, “A broadband compact microstrip rat-race hybrid using a novel CPW inverter,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 55, no. 1, pp. 161–167, Jan. 2007. [8] W. S. Chang, C. H. Liang, and C. Y. Chang, “Wideband high-isolation and perfect-balance microstrip rat-race coupler,” Electron. Lett., vol. 48, no. 7, pp. 382–384, Mar. 2012. [9] S. Gruszczynski and K. Wincza, “Broadband rat-race couplers with coupled-line section and impedance transformers,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 22, no. 1, pp. 22–24, Jan. 2012. [10] K. S. Ang and Y. C. Leong, “Converting baluns into broadband impedance-transforming 180 hybrids,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 50, no. 8, pp. 1990–1995, Aug. 2002. [11] Y.-W. Lin, Y.-C. Chou, and C.-Y. Chang, “A balanced digital phase shifter by a novel switching-mode topology,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 61, no. 6, pp. 2361–2370, June 2013. [12] P. I. Richard, “General impedance-function theory,” Quart. Appl. Math, vol. 6, pp. 21–29, 1948. [13] M. W. Medley, Microwave and RF Circuit: Analysis, Synthesis and Design. Boston, MA, USA: Artech House, 1992. [14] L. Weinberg, Network Analysis and Synthesis. New York, NY, USA: McGraw-Hill, 1962. [15] E. A. Guillemin, Synthesis of Passive Networks. New York, NY, USA: Wiley, 1957. [16] J.-C. Lu, C.-C. Lin, and C.-Y. Chang, “Exact synthesis and implementation of new high-order wideband marchand baluns,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 59, no. 1, pp. 80–86, Jan. 2011. [17] M. C. Horton and R. J. Wenzel, “General theory and design of optimum quarter-wave TEM filters,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. MTT-13, no. 3, pp. 316–327, May 1965. [18] J. Lange, “Interdigitated stripline quadrature hybrid,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. MTT-17, no. 12, pp. 1150–1151, Dec. 1969. [19] R. Waugh and D. Lacombe, “Unfolding the lange coupler,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. MTT-20, no. 11, pp. 777–779, Nov. 1972. [20] L. Zhu and K. Wu, “Multilayered coupled-microstrip lines technique with aperture compensation for innovative planar filter design,” in Proc. Asia–Pacific Microw. Conf., Nov. 1999, vol. 2, pp. 303–306.
[21] S. Im, C. Seo, J. Kim, Y. Kim, and N. Kim, “Improvement of microstrip open loop resonator filter using aperture,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig., Jun. 2002, vol. 3, pp. 1801–1804, vol 3. [22] M. C. Velazquez-Ahumada, J. Martel, and F. Medina, “Parallel coupled microstrip filters with ground-plane aperture for spurious band suppression and enhanced coupling,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 52, no. 3, pp. 1082–1086, Mar. 2004. [23] C.-H. Liang, W.-S. Chang, and C.-Y. Chang, “Enhanced coupling structures for tight couplers and wideband filters,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 59, no. 3, pp. 574–583, Mar. 2011. [24] S.-G. Kim and K. Chang, “Ultrawide-band transitions and new microwave components using double-sided parallel-strip lines,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 52, no. 9, pp. 2148–2152, Sep. 2004. [25] K.-W. Wong, L. Chiu, and Q. Xue, “Wideband parallel-strip bandpass filter using phase inverter,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 18, no. 8, pp. 503–505, Aug. 2008. [26] K. S. Ang and I. D. Robertson, “Analysis and design of impedance transforming planar Marchand baluns,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 49, pp. 402–406, Feb. 2001. [27] C. H. Chi, C. H. Wu, W. T. Wang, C. H. Lai, D. C. Niu, and C. Y. Chang, “A 10–110 GHz fundamental/harmonic rat-race mixer,” in Proc. Eur. Microw. Conf., Oct. 2007, pp. 652–655. Po-Jung Chou was born in Taipei, Taiwan, on September 11, 1990. He received the B.S. degree in electrical and computer engineering from National Chaio-Tung University, Hsinchu, Taiwan, in 2012, where he is currently working toward the Ph.D. degree in communications engineering. His research interests include the design and analysis of microwave circuits.
Yun-Wei Lin was born in Taipei, Taiwan, on May 3, 1985. He received the B.S. and Ph.D. degrees in communication engineering from National Chiao-Tung University, Hsinchu, Taiwan, in 2007 and 2013, respectively. In 2013, he joined the Electronics Testing Center, Taoyuan, Taiwan, where he is currently with the Measurement/Calibration Technology Department. His research interests include the design and analysis of microwave circuits and testing/certification about the conformance and interoperability of the Smart Grid communication protocols.
Chi-Yang Chang (S'88–M'95) was born in Taipei, Taiwan. He received the B.S. degree in physics and M.S. degree in electrical engineering from National Taiwan University, Taipei, Taiwan, in 1977 and 1982, respectively, and the Ph.D. degree in electrical engineering from University of Texas at Austin, Autstin, TX, USA, in 1990. From 1979 to 1980, he was with the Department of Physics, National Taiwan University, as a Teaching Assistant. From 1982 to 1988, he was with the Chung-Shan Institute of Science and Technology (CSIST), as an Assistant Researcher, where he was in charge of development of microwave integrated circuits (MICs), microwave subsystems, and millimeter-wave waveguide E-plane circuits. From 1990 to 1995, he returned to CSIST as an Associate Researcher in charge of development of uniplaner circuits, ultra-broadband circuits, and millimeter-wave planar circuits. In 1995, he joined the faculty of the Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, National Chaio-Tung University, Hsinchu, Taiwan, as an Associate Professor and became a Professor in 2002. His research interest include microwave and millimeter-wave passive and active circuit design, and planar miniaturized filter design.
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
3981
Design of a Traveling-Wave Slot Array Power Divider Using the Method of Moments and a Genetic Algorithm Sembiam R. Rengarajan, Life Fellow, IEEE, and Jonathan J. Lynch, Member, IEEE
Abstract—A 1-to-25-way uniform amplitude and linear phase power divider, using slotted rectangular waveguides in the traveling-wave mode, is designed to cover the 71–77-GHz band. The design employs the scattering parameters of three-port couplers computed from the method of moments (MoM) solution to the integral equation of the slot aperture field. Subsequent genetic algorithm (GA) optimization is aimed at maximizing the return loss and combining efficiency and flatness of coupling amplitudes in the whole frequency band. GA utilizes the MoM solution to the coupled integral equations of slot apertures in the entire power divider structure. Simulations indicate the optimized power divider yielding better than 26-dB return loss and greater than 86% efficiency in the 71–77-GHz band for the power divider combiner connected back to back. Computed MoM results have been validated by the commercial code HFSS and also by experimentally measured results. The measured insertion loss of two back-to-back divider–combiners is about 2 dB. Index Terms—Genetic algorithm optimization, method of moments, power combiner, power divider, slot array, slotted waveguide, traveling wave.
I. INTRODUCTION
A
T microwave and optical frequencies, distributed amplifiers are commonly employed along with power dividers and combiners. DeLisio and York published an excellent review article on quasi-optical and spatial power dividers and combiners [1]. The reciprocity principle may be invoked to show that a power divider may also be used as a power combiner. Waveguide power dividers have been investigated extensively in the standing-wave as well as traveling-wave modes because of high efficiencies. Bashirullah and Mortazawi presented an eight-element slotted waveguide power divider–combiner in the standing-wave mode at 10 GHz [2]. They achieved a peak combining efficiency of 88% and a 10-dB return loss bandwidth of about 4%. The combining efficiency was better than 80% over a bandwidth of 3% but dropped rapidly outside that band. -band proA similar device designed and operated in the duced a maximum combining efficiency of 72% [3]. In addiManuscript received April 16, 2015; revised August 05, 2015; accepted October 04, 2015. Date of publication November 05, 2015; date of current version December 02, 2015. S. R. Rengarajan is with the California State University, Northridge, CA 91330 USA (e-mail: [email protected]). J. J. Lynch is with HRL Laboratories, LLC, Malibu, CA 90265 USA (e-mail: [email protected]). Color versions of one or more of the figures in this paper are available online at http://ieeexplore.ieee.org. Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/TMTT.2015.2495099
tion, the coupled amplitudes varied over as much as 8 dB in the frequency range of interest. A four-element slotted waveguide power divider–combiner operating at 28 GHz yielded a combining efficiency of 80% [4]. The variation of efficiency with frequency was not reported in [4]. Standing-wave power dividers–combiners are efficient but have limited bandwidth. In order to realize a reasonable bandwidth in such a system, the array has to be divided into many subarrays, thereby resulting in a complicated feed network. Traveling-wave arrays provide greater return loss bandwidth with a small sacrifice in efficiency because of the power dissipated in the load. Traveling-wave antenna arrays suffer from beam squint with frequency, whereas power dividers–combiners do not have such a limitation. An eight-element traveling-wave slotted waveguide array power divider–combiner was designed to provide a combining efficiency of 80% in -band [5]. Song et al. describe a four-way power divider in a substrate integrated rectangular waveguide with probe coupling [6]. They did not present data on coupling phase or combining efficiency. Xie et al. discuss four-probe coupled -band rectangular waveguide combiner with combining efficiency in the range 72% to 82% [7]. A four-way coaxial broadband combiner has been presented by Song et al. [8]. They did not discuss the combining efficiency. Jia et al. have implemented scalable finline array combiners with about 85% combining efficiency in -band [9]. Recently, Schellenberg et al. demonstrated a 12-way radial line power divider combiner at -band with an overall combining efficiency of 87.5% [10]. The bandwidth of operation was 4.7%. In this paper, we present the design, analysis, optimization, and experimental validation of a 1-to-25-way traveling-wave slotted waveguide power divider operating in the 71–77-GHz frequency band. This band was chosen due to strong interest in -band communication systems for wide bandwidth, high capacity networks such as point-to-point wireless backhaul links. The objective is to maximize the return loss and combining efficiency in the whole frequency band. In addition, it is desired to keep the amplitudes of waves in the coupled waveguides as close to uniform as possible so as to avoid the saturation of amplifiers. In Section II, the design of the traveling-wave power divider using the scattering parameter representation of three port couplers is discussed. Subsequently, a genetic algorithm optimization of the power divider to maximize the return loss, combining efficiency and flatness of coupling amplitudes, is presented. The results achieved, discussed in Section IV, are significant considering the frequency range and size of the power
0018-9480 © 2015 IEEE. Personal use is permitted, but republication/redistribution requires IEEE permission. See http://www.ieee.org/publications_standards/publications/rights/index.html for more information.
3982
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 1. Geometry of the 1-to-25-way power divider.
Fig. 2. Three-port coupler consisting of the main waveguide and a coupled waveguide.
divider. Section V discusses the experimental fixture made up of a power divider–combiner connected back to back, including the measured results. Finally, the findings of this paper are summarized in the conclusion. This work was presented recently with only an abstract published in the proceedings of the conference [11]. II. DESIGN OF POWER DIVIDER Fig. 1 shows an HFSS model of the internal geometry of the power divider consisting of a rectangular waveguide called main waveguide with an input port A, and a second port B terminated in a matched load. There are 25 coupled output waveguides with port numbers 1 through 25 that are placed vertically on the broad wall of the main waveguide with uniform spacing in the axial direction of the main waveguide. The coupled waveguides are excited by longitudinal offset slots in the broad wall of the main waveguide such that each slot is centered in the coupled-waveguide face. Fig. 2 shows the main waveguide with ports 1 and 2 and one of the coupled waveguides with port 3. The main waveguide interior dimensions have been chosen as 2.8 mm 0.711 mm, while the coupled waveguides are 3.1 mm 1.55 mm. The width of the coupling slot is 0.254 mm, and the slot (wall) thickness is 0.178 mm. All longitudinal coupling slots are offset on one side of the broad wall center line in the main waveguide. It is desired to have uniform values for all coupled amplitudes. In the traveling-wave mode design, couplers near the feed port A in Fig. 1 will have very small amounts of coupling since the power in the traveling wave is higher in this region and, hence, the offsets from the center line of those coupling slots are expected to be small. Therefore, power cou-
Fig. 3. Three-port coupler consisting of the main waveguide and a coupled waveguide with a quarter-wave step transition.
pled into these waveguides is sensitive to manufacturing tolerances for these slots. The tolerance problem may be obviated by choosing smaller values of “b” dimensions for coupled waveguides near the feed port and by including a quarter-wave step transition to the standard value of 1.55 mm at the output port of each coupled waveguide, as shown in Fig. 3. With the use of quarter-wave steps, the coupled waveguides near the input port need only a “b” value of 0.61 mm, while the rest have “b” values of 1.02 or 1.55 mm. The initial design based on scattering parameters and the later GA optimization of the power divider employ these three “b” values only. This also allows all of the output waveguides to have equal heights, facilitating transition to output circuitry, such as power amplifiers. The initial design uses all resonant slot couplers, with resonance for each three-port coupler defined as arg 180 when port 1 is referenced to the plane passing through the center of the slot in Fig. 3. Before designing the power divider, we generate the S-parameters of ports 1 and 2 and the coupled-wave amplitude and phase in port 3 for the resonant coupler shown in Fig. 3 for a range of values of slot offsets, and for all three b values of coupled waveguides mentioned above at the center frequency of the band, 74 GHz. Port 3 is assumed to be match terminated. In a power amplifier system, each of the coupled ports will have a waveguide-to-microstrip transition and an MMIC amplifier followed by a microstrip-to-waveguide transition with a power combiner (power divider in the reverse). The two-port scattering parameters and may be expressed approximately in terms of for a resonant coupler, with a corresponding value for the slot offset from the center line of the broad wall of the main waveguide in the three-port coupler. The analysis of the three-port coupler uses the method of moments (MoM) solution to the coupled integral equations of slot apertures, taking wall thickness into account, along with the mode-matching technique at the step waveguide discontinuity [12]–[14]. In the MoM program described in [12], the waveguide Green’s functions for the vertical waveguide given in [13] are used in place of those of the branch waveguide. From the two-port scattering matrix, we obtain the transmission matrix that relates the complex amplitudes of the incident and reflected waves at port 1 to the corresponding wave amplitudes at port 2 by (1). Because of reciprocity (1)
RENGARAJAN AND LYNCH: DESIGN OF A TRAVELING-WAVE SLOT ARRAY POWER DIVIDER USING THE MoM AND A GA
Fig. 4. Amplitude of coupling relative to the uniform at the center frequency and band edges.
where (2) (3) (4) (5) In the design procedure, we start with the coupler closest to port B in Fig. 1. Since it is match-terminated, and is assigned a reference value 1. The second subscript in and denotes the coupler number. The reflection coefficient of the resonant coupler , , is estimated. This estimate is not critical since it will be changed in subsequent iterations. We then determine the value of for slot by minimizing the error in (6), noting that and . (6) where (7) is the phase constant of the mode in the main waveguide, is the spacing between adjacent couplers along the main waveguide axis, and or . Computed values of scattering parameters of three-port couplers are used with an interpolation scheme to determine . The nominal values of coupling phases are given by the phase of the traveling wave in the main waveguide, and they exhibit a linear variation along the main waveguide. The coupled amplitudes may not be equal because of the presence of reflected waves in the main waveguide. This process of determining the scattering parameters continues one coupler at a time until we get to the input port. Then, we determine the input reflection coefficient from , and the relative power dissipated in the load . A larger value of will dissipate a smaller amount of relative power in the load but will produce a greater reflection coefficient at the input port. In subsequent iterations, is changed so as to adjust the load power and input reflection coefficient and we repeat the above-mentioned procedure until we obtain acceptable results for the input return loss, the load power, and the coupling amplitude and phase. Designs were carried out for a coupler spacing of 3.6, 4.0, and 4.4 mm. The best results were obtained for a
3983
Fig. 5. Coupling phase.
spacing of 4.0 mm. MoM analysis of this power divider showed that the return loss is better than 27 dB in the 71–77-GHz band, while the maximum load power relative to the power input to port A is 7.4%. However, the coupling amplitude varied over 5 dB in the frequency range, as shown in Fig. 4. Combining efficiency: If we have a back-to-back power divider and combiner connected such that the coupled port of the power divider is connected to the coupled port in the combiner with ideal, perfectly matched, unit gain buffer amplifiers in between, then the combining efficiency of the back-to-back connected system is given by (8) Reflections and variations of the amplitude and phase response of the amplifiers will change the efficiency from the value given in (8). The combining efficiency of the back-to-back connected power divider–combiner computed by the MoM program yielded better than 84.3% over the frequency range 71–77 GHz. This means that the efficiency of a divider or combiner alone is 92%. The MoM analysis assumes that the waveguides are made of perfect conductors, and therefore the efficiency of a practical system is expected to be less. Fig. 5 shows the coupling phase at the coupled-waveguide ports at the center frequency and band edges. It is nearly linear, which is the main reason for achieving a high value of combining efficiency in (8). The only limitation to power divider performance is the amplitude variation across the array. We further optimized performance using a genetic algorithm and a full-wave MoM analysis of the entire 25-way power divider. The MoM code has been validated previously. We will provide further validation of our results using the commercial code HFSS and from experimental measurements. III. GENETIC ALGORITHM OPTIMIZATION The previous design using scattering data computed by MoM for the three-port coupler with step transitions is generally accurate. However, it does not include the higher order mode coupling between adjacent coupling slots [15]. Therefore, the use of MoM analysis of the entire power divider structure along with a global optimization technique, such as a genetic algorithm (GA), is expected to yield substantially better results, especially for the amplitude flatness. It is well known that GA is a powerful global optimization technique to find optimum solutions
3984
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
without getting stuck in local maxima or minima [16]. Since GA uses probabilistic transition rules, it is a robust computational process to search a large solution space efficiently, and it has been used in numerous optimization exercises successfully in the prior literature. Our previous work on GA investigated the design of an antenna array that is less sensitive to manufacturing tolerances [17]. There are 50 parameters in our optimization exercise, offset, and length for each of the 25 slots, since we allow the slots to be nonresonant. Slot offsets and lengths are allowed to vary within 10% and 6% of the initial values, respectively. We use binary GA with 7 bits for each parameter so that the length of each chromosome is 350. This allows us to have a resolution in the variable size to be less than the machine tolerance. GA uses a population size of 10, tournament selection, mutation probability of 0.1, probability of crossover of 0.5 with uniform crossover, and the best individual is replicated into the next generation. In order to optimize the design over the frequency band, for each element of the population (chromosome), GA performs the moment method analysis of the traveling-wave array of couplers at 71, 73, 75, and 77 GHz. The fitness parameter that is maximized in the optimization process is a weighted sum of combining efficiency, input return loss, and the amplitude flatness. GA optimizes the worst case values of the fitness parameter among the four frequencies in the band. Optimum solutions are achieved generally between 300 and 500 generations. The computer time for each GA execution for about 300 generations is about one day on a dedicated PC employing Intel core i7-2760QM CPU @ 2.4 GHz with 8 GB of RAM.
TABLE I OFFSETS
AND LENGTHS OF COUPLING SLOTS AND THE DIMENSION OF COUPLED WAVEGUIDES
“b”
IV. OPTIMIZED POWER DIVIDER: RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Table I shows the optimized values of offsets and lengths of longitudinal coupling slots and the “b” dimension of the coupled waveguide. The first 16 coupled waveguides have 0.61 mm, the next eight have 1.02 mm, and the last one is a full height waveguide. All the reduced height waveguides are quarter guide wavelength long at 74 GHz before transitioning to a full height guide with a step. Figs. 6 and 7 illustrate the amplitude of coupling relative to ideal in the GA optimized power divider. A substantial improvement in the amplitude flatness of coupling has been achieved over the results shown in Fig. 4 for the original design. MoM results are found to be in good agreement with those obtained from HFSS. In both cases, the waveguide walls are assumed to be perfect conductors. Fig. 8 shows a comparison of coupling phase computed by MoM and HFSS at 73 and 75 GHz. The phase deviation between MoM and HFSS is generally less than 10 in most of the elements, with slightly larger values found for the few elements near the match termination. Similar results were found at other frequencies as well. Fig. 9 shows that the input reflection coefficient is lower than 25 dB in the entire frequency band. HFSS results are in very good agreement with those of MoM. The discrepancy at 76 GHz may be attributed to imperfections in MoM and HFSS. Fig. 10 shows that the load power is no more than 7% in the frequency band of interest. The efficiency of back-to-back connected power divider–combiner is better than 86%, whereas this figure translates to an efficiency of 93% for the power divider or combiner alone. Clearly,
Fig. 6. Amplitude of coupling in the GA optimized design at 71 and 73 GHz.
the load power is the main contributor to efficiency reduction. While it is possible to increase the efficiency, emphasis is placed on achieving amplitude flatness as well. In order to reduce the amplitude variations, some compromise in efficiency is warranted. Thus, the GA design produces nearly the same efficiency and return loss as the initial design with a substantial improvement in amplitude flatness. V. EXPERIMENTAL FIXTURE AND MEASUREMENTS Two back-to-back 1–25 divider–combiner structures described above were machined from aluminum followed by gold plating. A photograph of the structure is shown in Fig. 12. For the purpose of characterization, it would be preferable to fabricate and test a single-divider structure, terminating all but one of the coupled ports and performing a series of scattering (coupling) measurements. However, the close spacing of the ports makes this extremely difficult. Instead, two identical structures were fabricated and assembled with the output ports
RENGARAJAN AND LYNCH: DESIGN OF A TRAVELING-WAVE SLOT ARRAY POWER DIVIDER USING THE MoM AND A GA
Fig. 7. Amplitude of coupling in the GA optimized design at 75 and 77 GHz.
3985
Fig. 11. Efficiency of the power divider and combiner connected back to back.
Fig. 8. Phase of coupling in the GA optimized design at 73 and 75 GHz.
Fig. 12. Photo of back-to-back divider–combiner. Two of the four ports are terminated in matched loads.
Fig. 9. Input reflection coefficient of the optimized design.
Fig. 10. Amount of load power relative to the input power for the optimized design.
of the divider connecting to the input ports of the combiner in reverse order, forming a structure that first divides and then recombines. A total of four -band waveguide ports (WR-12) were provided, two of which were match-terminated with the other two, providing input and output for a two-port measurement. Although the back-to-back structure permits only a two-port measurement, it does provide a reasonable measure of the
overall performance. For a power amplifier application, two such structures would be assembled in a back-to-back arrangement with power amplifiers inserted between the connected junctions, so the performance of the back-to-back structure is directly relevant. The lack of isolation between coupled junctions that is inherent in any passive divider–combiner structure without dissipating elements tends to exacerbate manufacturing errors, thereby providing worst case test data. Because the inputs and outputs of power amplifiers are usually reasonably well matched and provide reverse isolation, the dividing–combining performance of a traveling-wave amplifier will generally be superior to that measured in this direct back-to-back structure, although with additional insertion loss due to transitions between the waveguide and the amplifiers. A two-port measurement was made on the back-to-back structure using a vector network analyzer with extension heads for WR-10 waveguide connection (test equipment for measurement over -band was not available, so measurements were limited to the -band). WR-10 to WR-12 adaptors were then used to connect to the device under test (DUT). WR-10 to WR-12 adaptors connected back to back were also measured and they presented 0.25 dB of insertion loss, which was subtracted from the measurement of the DUT to compensate for the adaptors. The magnitudes of and are shown plotted in Fig. 13, along with the values from an HFSS simulation for comparison. This HFSS simulation included metallic losses using a value of conductivity of S/m, half the value of bulk gold to account for surface roughness.
3986
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
combiner alone. Very good agreement between results computed by MoM and HFSS were found. Measured results for a back-to-back power divider–combiner produced better than 60% combining efficiency, resulting in nearly 80% efficiency for a single unit of power divider or combiner. The discrepancy between theory and experiment is attributed to metallic and surface roughness losses not accounted for in the models.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT The authors would like to thank Dr. D. Hoppe of the Jet Propulsion Laboratory, California Institute of Technology, for the computer program on mode matching and Dr. R. Pogorzelski for his help in reviewing this paper.
REFERENCES
Fig. 13. Measured versus simulated transmission and reflection coefficient magnitudes for the back-to-back 25/1 divider–combiner: (a) transmission coefficient and (b) reflection coefficient.
The agreement from 75 to 77 GHz is reasonably good, with about 0.5-dB additional loss over the simulation and similar shape. For a power amplifier application, half the divider–combiner loss resides on the input side and half on the output side, so the power dissipation is almost entirely confined to the output side (post amplification). Thus, assuming the 2-dB insertion loss is equally split between the two sides, the efficiency of the combining structure is estimated to be about 80% (1-dB loss).
VI. CONCLUSION This paper has presented the design of a 1-to-25-way traveling-wave power divider using the slotted rectangular waveguide technology in the 71–77-GHz frequency band. The initial design used computed values of the scattering parameters of three-port couplers consisting of quarter-wave step transitions. Subsequently, a genetic algorithm optimization was carried out using the MoM solution to the coupled integral equations of the slot apertures of the entire power divider structure. Excellent results were obtained for the optimum power divider design with better than 86% simulated combining efficiency for a back-to-back power divider–combiner, better than 26-dB return loss and very good amplitude flatness. This corresponds to 93% simulated efficiency for a power divider or
[1] M. P. DeLisio and R. A. York, “Quasi-optical and spatial power combining,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 50, pp. 929–936, Mar. 2002. [2] R. Bashirullah and A. Mortazawi, “A slotted-waveguide power amplifier for spatial power-combining applications,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 48, pp. 1142–1147, Jul. 2000. [3] X. Jiang, L. Liu, S. C. Ortiz, R. Bashirullah, and A. Mortazawi, “A Ka-band power amplifier based on a low profile slotted-waveguide power combining/dividing circuit,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 51, pp. 144–147, Jan. 2003. [4] C. Eswarappa, T. Hongsmatip, N. Kinyaman, R. Anderson, and B. Ziegner, “A compact millimeter-wave slotted waveguide spatial array power combiner,” in IEEE MTT-S Dig., 2003, pp. 1439–1442. [5] X. Jiang, S. C. Ortiz, and A. Mortazawi, “A Ka-band power amplifier based on the traveling-wave power-dividing/combining slotted waveguide circuit,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 52, pp. 633–639, Feb. 2004. [6] K. Song, Y. Fan, and X. Zhou, “X-band broadband substrate integrated rectangular waveguide power divider,” Electron. Lett., vol. 44, pp. 211–213, 2008. [7] X. Xie, H. Chen, and Y. Tian, “Millimetre-wave broadband waveguide-based spatial power-combining amplifier,” Electron. Lett., vol. 47, pp. 194–195, 2011. [8] K. Song, Y. Fan, and X. Zhou, “Broadband millimetre-wave passive spatial combiner based on coaxial waveguide,” IET Microw., Antennas, Propag., vol. 3, pp. 607–613, 2009. [9] P. Jia, L.-Y. Chen, N.-S. Cheng, and R. A. York, “Design of waveguide finline arrays for spatial power combining,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 49, pp. 609–614, Apr. 2001. [10] J. Schellenberg, E. Watkins, M. Micovic, B. Kim, and K. Han, “W-band, 5 W solid-state power amplifier/combiner,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig., 2010, pp. 240–243. [11] S. R. Rengarajan and J. J. Lynch, “Traveling wave slot array power combiner at 74 GHz,” presented at the 1st Atlantic Radio Science Conf., Gran Canaria, Spain, May 2015. [12] S. R. Rengarajan, “Characteristics of a longitudinal/transverse coupling slot in crossed rectangular waveguides,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 37, pp. 1171–1177, 1989. [13] S. R. Rengarajan and G. M. Shaw, “Accurate characterization of coupling junctions in waveguide-fed planar slot arrays,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 42, no. 12, pp. 2239–2248, Dec. 1994. [14] A. Wexler, “Solution of waveguide discontinuities by modal analysis,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 17, no. 9, pp. 508–517, Sep. 1967. [15] S. R. Rengarajan, “Higher order mode coupling effects in the feeding waveguide of a planar slot array,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 39, pp. 1219–1223, 1991. [16] D. E. Goldberg, Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine Learning. Reading, MA, USA: Addison-Wesley, 1989. [17] S. R. Rengarajan, “Genetic algorithm optimization of a planar slot array using full wave method of moments analysis,” Int. J. Comput. Aid. RF Microw. Eng., vol. 23, no. 4, pp. 430–436, Jul. 2013.
RENGARAJAN AND LYNCH: DESIGN OF A TRAVELING-WAVE SLOT ARRAY POWER DIVIDER USING THE MoM AND A GA
Sembiam R. Rengarajan (LF’14) received the Ph.D. degree in electrical engineering from the University of New Brunswick, Canada, in 1980. Since then he has been with the Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, California State University, Northridge (CSUN), CA, USA, where he currently serves as a Professor. He has held visiting professorships at UCLA; Chalmers University of Technology, Sweden; Universidade de Santiago de Compostela, Spain; the University of Pretoria, South Africa; and the Technical University of Denmark. He received an honorary Adjunct Professorship at the Electromagnetics Academy of Zhejiang University, China in 2005. He has been a consultant to government and industry in the U.S. and abroad. His research interests include application of electromagnetics to antennas, scattering, and passive microwave components. He has published more than 230 journal articles and conference papers. Dr. Rengarajan has served as an Associate Editor of the IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON ANTENNAS AND PROPAGATION (2000–2003) and as the Chair of the Education Committee of the IEEE Antennas and Propagation Society (APS). He received the Preeminent Scholarly Publication Award from CSUN in 2005, the CSUN Research Fellow Award in 2010, a Distinguished Engineering Educator of the Year Award from the Engineers’ Council of California in 1995, and 20 awards from the National Aeronautics and Space Administration for his in-
3987
novative research and technical contributions to Jet Propulsion Laboratory. In 2011, he was appointed as a Distinguished Lecturer for the IEEE APS. He was the Chair of the Commission B (Waves and Fields) of the United States National Committee of the International Union of Radio Science (USNC-URSI) during 2012–2014. Currently, he serves as the Secretary and Chair-Elect of USNC-URSI.
Jonathan J. Lynch (M’11) received the B.S. , M.S., and Ph.D. degrees from the University of California, Santa Barbara, CA, USA, in 1987, 1992, and 1995, respectively, in the area of quasi-optical power combining for continuous-wave and pulsed millimeterwave sources. Since 1995, he has been employed at HRL Laboratories, LLC, Malibu, CA, USA, where he is Senior Scientist in the Microelectronic Laboratory. His areas of expertise include microwave and millimeterwave antennas, filters, waveguide circuits, radiometers, and coded aperture radar sensors, as well as nonlinear components and subsystems, such as synchronized microwave oscillators and quasi-optical power combining.
3988
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
An Isolated Radial Power Divider via Circular Waveguide -Mode Transducer Qing-Xin Chu, Senior Member, IEEE, Da-Yi Mo, and Qiong-Sen Wu
Abstract—A -band isolated radial power divider via circular waveguide -mode converter is presented in this paper. By redesigning and using the circular waveguide -mode transducer to feed the 20-way radial power divider–combiner, the overall structure is miniaturized. Moreover, the resistive septum is inserted into the waveguide to improve the return loss and the isolation of the output ports. A measured return loss at the output port has improved by around 15 dB, while the worst case isolation is more than 12 dB over 28–36 GHz after using the resistive septum. Index Terms—Mode transducer, power divider, resistive septum, waveguide.
I. INTRODUCTION
A
T microwave and millimeter-wave frequency, an individual solid-state device does not have enough output power capability [1]. Therefore, it is necessary to combine power from multiple devices to obtain the desired power level. Compared with the binary combiner, the radial power combiner combines signals from all ports in a single level, which may achieve low loss structure when is large. In addition, due to the symmetrical structure, the radial power combiner has advantages in magnitude and phase balance. Radial power combiners have been used extensively. A 16-way radial combiner with rectangular waveguide in the base oriented was proposed in [2], where the waveguide’s E-plane is parallel to the cylindrical base axis; the input rectangular waveguide-to-coaxial line transition is required to route the input signal to the power divider. A -band 10-way planar probe power combiner–divider was proposed in [3]; however, the power-handling capability is limited by the microstrip probe and the coaxial line. Another 19-way radial divider with the waveguide’s E-plane orientation, which is normal to the base axis, was proposed in [4]. Therefore, an analogous 24-way Manuscript received February 18, 2015; revised July 14, 2015; accepted October 04, 2015. Date of publication November 11, 2015; date of current version December 02, 2015. This work was supported by the National Natural Science Foundation of China(61171029). Q.-X. Chu is with the School of Electronic and Information Engineering, South China University of Technology, Guangzhou, Guangdong 510641, China, and also with Shanxi Hundred-Talent Program, Xidian University, Xi’an, China (e-mail: [email protected]). D.-Y. Mo and Q.-S. Wu are with the School of Electronic and Information Engineering, South China University of Technology, Guangzhou, Guangdong 510641, China (e-mail: [email protected]; [email protected]. cn). Color versions of one or more of the figures in this paper are available online at http://ieeexplore.ieee.org. Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/TMTT.2015.2495204
radial combiner was proposed in [5], in which the driver and power amplifier modules are mounted on a baseplate to enable effective heat removal. For such types of radial power combiners in [4] and [5], a circular-to-rectangular waveguide mode transducer is required. Based on the concept of [6], the Marie-mode transducer is often long in length [7], making it unwieldy for some applications. Another widely used transducer, the flower-petal transducer [8], has the drawback of narrow bandwidth and high insertion loss. Another vital issue to be considered is the isolation among the output ports when designing the radial power diver. The approach of using the resistive septum has been presented in some previous work. The E-plane T-junction with a resistive septum is used as the waveguide binary combiner in [9]–[11]. Such film resistive septum can also be used in the travelingwave power divider–combiner [12]. The goal of this paper is to propose a radial power divider–combiner with good isolation and compact size. This structure consists of two elements: the mode converter and the 20-way radial power divider. To reduce the size, a compact mode transducer based on the concept of [13] is designed to convert the input rectangular-waveguide –mode to the circular-waveguide -mode. Next, the power in the circular waveguide is divided into 20 half-height rectangular waveguides with circular symmetry. Finally, the half-height rectangular waveguides are broadband matched to the full-height waveguides by using the tapered-impedance transformers. Moreover, to achieve good isolation among the output ports, the resistive septum is inserted into the waveguide radially, and the fabrication method of the septum has also been improved in this paper. II. A. Principle of the
-MODE TRANSDUCER -Mode Transducer
-mode is considered At millimeter-wave frequency, the as a low-loss propagation mode, which is suitable to work as the transmission mode. Without the longitudinal surface current, the electric-field vector of -mode assumes the circular closed lines; such a feature can be applied to design a -mode transducer. In order to explain the principle of the proposed mode transducer, the lines of electric intensity are drawn in Fig. 1(a). The four-way signals are injected along the circumference of the circular-waveguide sidewall, and the orientation is adjusted at 90 . The rectangular waveguides are set to feed the four-way signals. As there is only one-direction vector of the rectangular-waveguide -mode electric field, when such a wavefront enters into the circular waveguide, only the electric-
0018-9480 © 2015 IEEE. Personal use is permitted, but republication/redistribution requires IEEE permission. See http://www.ieee.org/publications_standards/publications/rights/index.html for more information.
CHU et al.: AN ISOLATED RADIAL POWER DIVIDER VIA CIRCULAR WAVEGUIDE
-MODE TRANSDUCER
3989
Fig. 3. Longitudinal section view of the electric field in the transducer.
Fig. 1. (a) Four-way wavefront spread into the mode-converting section. (b) Spreading wave front into the E-plane T-junction from port 1.
Fig. 4. (a) E-plane T-junction. (b) Top view of the structure.
Fig. 2. Three-dimensional structure of the
-mode transducer.
Fig. 2, while the longitudinal section view of the electric field in the transducer is shown in Fig. 3. B. Realization of the Power-Dividing Section
field vector of the -mode will be excited. Moreover, the undesired modes, such as the , , and , and the polarization degenerated modes are attenuated. For example, the -mode will not be excited since the electric-field lines of the –mode distributed radially, which are normal to . Another issue is that the four-way signal should have equal magnitude, while each adjacent signals should be out-of-phase. Otherwise, the electric-field lines are cancelled, and the wave will not be excited. The power divider based on the E-plane T-junction can meet all these requirement. As shown in Fig. 1(b), when power enters from port 1, equal intensities appear at port 2 and port 3 with a 180 phase difference. Finally, the -mode transducer is achieved. This transducer consists of two parts: the power-dividing section and the mode-converting section. The overall structure is shown in
The E-plane T-junction is the basic unit of the two-stage cascaded binary power divider, which is shown in Fig. 4(a). Since a standard waveguide WR-28 ( 7.12 mm, 3.56 mm) is used as the transmission line, the full-height rectangular waveguide of port 2 and port 3 are broadband matched to the half-height waveguide via the stepped-impedance transformer. The Ansoft Corporation commercial software High Frequency Structure Simulator (HFSS) was used to provide the scattering parameters. The optimized dimensions of the stepped-impedance transformer are as follows: 1.65 mm, 3.11 mm, 2.67 mm, and 2.21 mm. In addition, the corner cut is used to absorb the discontinuity field; the dimensions are also optimized as follows: 1.6 mm, 3.2 mm, and 1 mm, as shown in Fig. 4(b).
3990
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
TABLE I FIELD LINES AND CUTOFF WAVELENGTH FOR THE LOWER ORDER MODES
Fig. 5. Mode-converting section.
Three E-plane T-junction units were cascaded to form the power divider network. Then, the waveguide transmission lines were bent to cooperate with the mode-converting section. C. Realization of the Mode-Converting Section The mode-converting section shown in Fig. 5 consists of a circular waveguide, the over-mode waveguides, and the rectangular waveguides. Four-way signals with equal magnitude and 180 phase difference between each adjacent ways, where the orientations assuming a cross form, enter into the circular waveguide from four ports, respectively. The over-mode waveguide is the transition from the standard rectangular waveguides to the circular waveguide, which can minimize the return loss effectively. The electric lines and the cutoff wavelength of the first few lower order modes (including the polarization degenerate mode) of the circular waveguide are listed in Table I. Therefore, the radius of the circular waveguide can be given by (1) where is the cutoff frequency of -mode as 26 GHz, indicating a radius of 6.9 mm. In addition, to absorb the undesired propagation mode caused by the discontinuity, a matching column is included with optimized dimensions: 1.9 mm and 5.2 mm.
Fig. 6. Simulated results of a single-mode converter.
D. Simulation, Fabrication, and Measurement Finally, the two sections are joined, as illustrated in Fig. 2. The simulation tool HFSS is applied to analyze this structure. The simulated results of a single-mode converter are illustrated in Fig. 6. It can be seen that the return loss of the input port is less than 12 dB, while the transmission coefficient from the -mode to the -mode is flat ranged from 0.01 to 0.3 dB over the full frequency band, with no spurious effect that may affect the group delay. According to what we have discussed above, such a transducer should propagate the desired -mode and attenuate those undesired modes. As shown in Fig. 7, the attenuation coefficient of the -mode and -mode is lower than 40 dB. Considering the scattered electric field orientation varies with the polarization degenerated mode, rather than a perfect magnetic wall, the attenuation coefficient of some modes may be slightly
Fig. 7. Simulated results for the mode purity of a transducer.
worse. However, the attenuation coefficients of the useless modes are better than 25 dB, while the transmission coefficient of the -mode is less than 0.3 dB, which is a remarkable value for such a compact mode converter. The prototype of the proposed transducer is illustrated in Fig. 8(a), which is made of aluminum with a gilded inner wall. The input port is the standard rectangular waveguide port, while
CHU et al.: AN ISOLATED RADIAL POWER DIVIDER VIA CIRCULAR WAVEGUIDE
-MODE TRANSDUCER
3991
Fig. 9. Simulated and measured results of the back-to-back transducer.
Fig. 8. (a) Prototype of the
-mode transducer. (b) Back-to-back structure.
the output port is the circular waveguide port. The dimensions are 6.8 cm length 5.5 cm width 2.0 cm height . To measure via a vector network analyzer, two transducers are joined back-to-back, as shown in Fig. 8(b). The simulated and measured result are shown in Fig. 9. It can be seen that the experimental results agree well with the simulation; even the worst measured return loss is still greater than 10 dB over the bandwidth range of 27.5–36 GHz. On average, the return loss is around 18 dB, while the insertion loss is less than 1.1 dB. Considering the back-to-back configuration, the insertion loss and the converting efficiency of a single -mode transducer are 0.55 dB and 88%, respectively. Compared with the back-to-back mode transducer proposed in [13] based on Y-shaped T-junctions, which achieves the insertion loss of 1 dB in a bandwidth of 5.8 GHz, the transducer in this paper based on E-plane T-junction has achieved the insertion loss of less than 1.1 dB in a bandwidth of over 8.5 GHz. The superiority in broadband feature is likely to be a result of the optimized matching parameter, since the principle of these two structures is analogous. However, one of the purposes of this paper is to present the application of combining the two techniques: the mode transducer and the radial power divider, instead of presenting a brand new concept. III. THE TWENTY-WAY POWER DIVIDER A. Realization and Analysis -mode wave from the input circular waveguide The is equally divided into 20 half-height rectangular waveguides.
Fig. 10. Three-dimensional structure of the 20-way power divider.
Then, the divided power is transformed into the full-height rectangular waveguide via the tapered-impedance transformer. The overview is illustrated in Fig. 10. A greater number of ports than 20 can be achieved by reducing the height of the waveguides, instead of the half-height rectangular waveguides. However, the number of ports is limited by the finite thickness of waveguide walls. Taking into account the radial symmetry of the 20-way power divider, this structure can be simplified into a triple-port component ( th, th output ports, and one common sector port where 36 ), as shown in Fig. 11. In order to match the half-height waveguide to the full-height waveguide, the taperedimpedance transformer is an essential element with a length of 12.5 mm. A matching column is also needed to cancel the discontinuity on the baseplate; by optimizing the dimension, a low return-loss at the input circular waveguide port can be achieved, which are listed as follows: 3.3 mm, and 2.8 mm. Therefore, to improve the output port matching and isolation, the application of the resistive septum in radial power divider is a vital method proposed in this paper. The septum with an optimized dimensions 7.12 mm and 2.4 mm
3992
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 12. Simulated -parameters of the simplified model.
Fig. 11. (a) Simplified three-port component. (b) Simulated field distributions. (c) Side view of the structure. (d) Top view of the structure.
is installed symmetrically along the radial line between the two waveguide ports, where the dimension from the axis to the edge of the septum is 4.3 mm. The operation principle can be simplified as follows: for the odd mode, the symmetrical plane (resistive septum) acts as an electric wall. The odd mode current counteracts each other as the resistive septum is rather thin. For the even mode, the resistive septum acts as a magnetic wall. When the septum is ideally thin with zero thickness and is placed accurately on the symmetrical plane, most spurious power caused by the unbalanced field or inverting wave will be absorbed by the resistor, while the odd mode wave will not be disturbed, which means that the reflection and isolation performance can be improved with small insertion loss. The simulated -parameter of the simplified triple-port component is then plotted in Fig. 12. It can be seen that the isolation between port 1 and port 2 is better than 12 dB where the return loss is better than 9 dB. However, to evaluate the 20-way power divider, this simplified model is not accurate as the influence from other output ports is not included in the simplified model; in addition, the spurious mode wave will also produce an effect on the simulation. Actually, the main function of the simplified model is to explain the principle and verify the effect of the resistive septum qualitatively. As we have discussed above, the septum should be as thin as possible. However, it is not practicable to fabricate such a zero-thickness septum. Simulation of the full model illustrated in Fig. 10 sweeps with variable (the thickness of the septum) are carried out in order to analyze the impact on the performance, and the result is shown in Fig. 13. It can be seen that,
Fig. 13. Simulated return loss
of the full model sweeps with variable
.
for a more asymmetrical case, corresponding to a larger value of , the return loss becomes worse. The same is true for the isolation of the output ports. B. Fabrication and Assembly of the Resistive Septum An existing method of fabricating the resistive septum can be described as follows: The septum is implemented by stacking two rather thin low-loss dielectric substrates, and the mating surface of one substrate is coated with TaN film, as illustrated in Fig. 14(a). A benefit of such a method is that the resistive film is accurately inserted on the symmetrical plane, which ensures proper amplitude and phase balance. However, it is difficult to stack two substrates into one card with a rather tiny thickness. Therefore, to facilitate the manufacture and assembly, an easier solution is proposed in this paper. As shown in Fig. 14(b), the septum consists of a single alumina substrate with both surfaces designed for 220 TaN films. With a certain accuracy of manufacturing, the thickness of the septum can be reduced using the improved method. The drawback is that the resistive sheet is not perfectly on the symmetrical plane. However, in this paper, the thickness of the alumina substrate is 0.254 mm, corresponding to an average as 19 dB, which is an acceptable value by observing the data in Fig. 13.
CHU et al.: AN ISOLATED RADIAL POWER DIVIDER VIA CIRCULAR WAVEGUIDE
Fig. 14. (a) Existing fabrication method of septum. (b) Improved solution proposed in this paper.
-MODE TRANSDUCER
Fig. 15. Simulated return loss
3993
with deviation of the sheet resistance.
The placement of the septum is another challenge. To offer the solution, the grooves are slotted on the bottom of the waveguide wall to hold the septum in place. Therefore, a cover plate is used for capping the slot in case of power leakage. C. Discussion Regarding the Power Handling Capability For the conventional radial power divider–combiner based on the TEM transmission mode, the power capacity is limited by the components, such as the microstrip or coaxial lines. The full-metal waveguide structure has a greater power capacity. However, the power capacity of the septum radial power divider–combiner is limited by the amount of power that can be dissipated by the resistive septum without causing damage. With ideally symmetrical distribution, the output ports are under equal excitation while very little power is dissipated in the resistive element. However, the asymmetrical case is a more common case, which may be caused by the fabrication and assembly error. In addition, when one or more output ports are mismatched due to the amplifier failures, the imbalanced power is absorbed by the resistive septum. Therefore, the RF heating may change the features of the resistive elements. The sheet resistance shift is one of the most significant variation, which may be caused by the RF heating. To evaluate the performance when the resistance fluctuation happens, the simulation of the return loss sweeps with approximately 50% sheet resistance deviation (the designed value is 220 ) is carried out. The result is shown in Fig. 15; it can be seen that the output match is a weak function of the sheet resistance within a certain range, indicating a good error tolerance since the standard tolerance of sheet resistance is approximately 10%. The radial septum power divider in this paper was not tested under high-power excitation due to limitation of the measurement condition. However, some reference data is given as follows: the 32-way septum binary power combiner proposed in [10] has achieved the output power 50 W, while even higher power 120 W is also possible. Another measurement of a dual-way septum power combiner is carried out in [9], while the performance of the return loss shows a gradual degradation until the drive power increased to over 23 W.
Fig. 16. Prototype of the 20-way power divider.
Fig. 17. Overall structure proposed in this paper.
Moreover, it should be claimed that the thermal dissipation can also improve the power-handling capability, which is an effective solution to avoid overheating of the resistive elements.
3994
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 18. Simulated and measured results of the overall power divider. (a) Magnitude of measured transmission coefficient for all 20 ways . (b) Phase data . (c) Simulated and measured . (d) Simulated and measured . (e) Comparison of and of the case before and after using the septum. of
IV. SIMULATION AND MEASURED RESULT A prototype of the proposed 20-way power divider with the septum installed was carried out, as shown in Fig. 16. The
output circular-waveguide port of the proposed transducer in Section II and the input port of the twenty-way radial power divider in Section III was connected. The photograph is shown in Fig. 17. The overall structure has one input port and 20 output
CHU et al.: AN ISOLATED RADIAL POWER DIVIDER VIA CIRCULAR WAVEGUIDE
ports, which are all in standard rectangular-waveguide form. This structure is also compact in size where the dimension of the baseplate is only 117 mm 117 mm. The simulated and measured results are shown in Fig. 18. From 28 to 36 GHz, the transmission coefficient is around 14 dB, since the ideal value with zero insertion loss is 13 dB, which means that the average insertion loss is approximately 1 dB, including the insertion loss of the mode transducer and the power divider for 0.35 and 0.65 dB, respectively. A maximum amplitude imbalance of 0.45 dB and a phase imbalance of 6 are observed in Fig. 18(a) and (b). Good agreement between the simulated and measured return losses are demonstrated in Fig. 18(c) and (d). The return loss at port 0 is better than 10 dB. Since the power divider is symmetric with respect to the cylindrical axis, only the return loss at port 1 (one of the 20 output ports) is given, the value is better than 13 dB over the frequency band. To analyze the impact by the resistive septum, the measurement was taken before and after the resistive septum is inserted into the waveguide; the results are shown in Fig. 18(e). It can be seen that, after inserting the resistive septum, the average value of has improved by more than 15 dB, from approximately 5 dB (before) to 20 dB (after). Moreover, the isolation among the output ports ( , the value of is from 2 to 11) is also improved. The curves of are much more flat across the aimed frequency band. For example, the worst value of from 28 to 36 GHz is 7 dB without the septum; while this value increases to 12 dB after using the septum, the average value has increased from 10 dB to around 15.5 dB. The curves of , , , , , , , , and are not plotted, since they are the same as , , , , , , , , and due to the symmetry. The worst isolation is observed between the adjacent ports. In conclusion, except for , , and , the measured isolation is better than 20 dB, which is competitive comparing with other radial power divider. V. CONCLUSION An isolated 20-way radial power divider via circular waveguide -mode transducer has been analyzed, fabricated, and measured. This paper mainly focuses on achieving a radial power divider with good isolation, compact size, and featuring ease of fabrication by combining the technique of mode converter and radial power divider–combiner. Therefore, some novel solution has been proposed. First, a -mode transducer is carried out and applied. The function of such mode transducer is to transform the -mode in rectangular waveguide to the -mode in circular waveguide. The back-to-back transducer is fabricated and tested, which demonstrates good agreement between the simulated and measured results. Moreover, the transducer has shown great advantages in size and mode purity. Second, a 20-way power divider is achieved, and the resistive septum is inserted to improve the matching and isolation of the output ports. The following measurement on the scattering parameters shows that the application of the septum has greatly improved the performance, just as we expected. Also, since it is challenging to fabricate and assemble the septum,
-MODE TRANSDUCER
3995
the improved solution has been proposed. All these features have shown that this structure is suitable for a millimeter-wave multi-ways power divider. REFERENCES [1] K. Chang and C. Sun, “Millimeter-wave power-combining techniques,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. MTT-31, no. 2, pp. 91–107, Feb. 1983. [2] T. I. Hsu and M. Simonutti, “A wideband 60 GHz 16-way power divider/combiner network,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig., May 1984, vol. 84, no. 1, pp. 175–177. [3] K. Song and Q. Xue, “Planar probe coaxial-waveguide power combiner/divider,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 57, no. 11, pp. 2761–2767, Nov. 2009. [4] M. H. Chen, “A 19-way isolated power divider via the TE01 circular waveguide mode transition,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig., Jun. 2, 1986, vol. 86, no. 1, pp. 511–513. [5] P. Khan, L. Epp, and A. Silva, “A Ka-band wide-bandgap solid-state power amplifier: Architecture performance estimates,” Jet Propulsion Lab., Pasadena, CA, USA, Interplanetary Network Progress Rep., Nov. 15, 2005, vol. 42–163. [6] S. S. Saad, J. B. Davies, and O. J. Davies, “Analysis and design of a mode transducer,” Microw., Opt., Acoust., vol. 1, pp. circular 58–62, Jan. 1977. [7] L. Epp, P. Khan, and A. Silva, “A Ka-band wide-bandgap solid-state power amplifier: Hardware validation,” Jet Propulsion Lab., Pasadena, CA, USA, Interplanetary Network Progress Rep., Nov. 15, 2005, pp. 1–22. [8] H. A. Hoag, S. G. Tantawi, R. Callin, H. Deruyter, Z. D. Farkas, K. Ko, N. Kroll, R. L. Lavine, A. Menegat, and A. E. Vlieks, “Flower-petal mode converter for NLC,” in Proc. Particle Accelerator Conf., May 17–20, 1993, vol. 2, pp. 1121–1123. [9] P. Khan, L. Epp, and A. Silva, “Ka-band wide-bandgap solid-state power amplifier: Prototype combiner spurious mode suppression and power constraints,” Jet Propulsion Lab., Pasadena, CA, USA, Interplanetary Network Progress Rep., Feb. 15, 2006, vol. 42–164, pp. 1–18. [10] L. W. Epp, D. J. Hoppe, A. R. Khan, and S. L. Stride, “A high-power Ka-band (31–36 GHz) solid-state amplifier based on low-loss corporate waveguide combining,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 56, no. 8, pp. 1899–1908, Aug. 2008. [11] F. Takeda, O. Ishida, and Y. Isoda, “Waveguide power divider using metallic septum with resistive coupling slot,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig., Aug. 1982, pp. 527–528. [12] Q. X. Chu, Z. Y. Kang, Q. S. Wu, and D. Y. Mo, “An in-phase output Ka-band traveling-wave power divider/combiner using double ridgewaveguide couplers,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 61, no. 9, pp. 3247–3253, Sep. 2013. -mode [13] C. F. Yu and T. H. Chang, “High-performance circular converter,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 53, no. 12, pp. 3794–3798, Dec. 2005. Qing-Xin Chu (M’99–SM’11) received the B.S., M.E., and Ph.D. degrees in electronic engineering from Xidian University, Xi’an, Shaanxi, China, in 1982, 1987, and 1994, respectively. From January 1982 to January 2004, he was with the School of Electronic Engineering, Xidian University, and since 1997, he was a Professor and the Vice Dean of the School of Electronic Engineering, Xidian University. He is currently a Chair Professor with the School of Electronic and Information Engineering, South China University of Technology, Guanzhou, China, where he is also the Director of the Research Institute of Antennas and RF Techniques of the university, the Chair of the Engineering Center of Antennas and RF Techniques of Guangdong Province. He is also with Xidian University, where he has been a Distinguished Professor in the Shaanxi Hundred-Talent Program since 2011. He has authorized more than 30 Chinese invention patents. His current research interests include antennas in mobile communication, microwave filters, spatial power combining array, and numerical techniques in electromagnetics. Dr. Chu is the Foundation Chair of IEEE Guangzhou AP/MTT Chapter and Senior Members of the China Electronic Institute (CEI). He has published over 300 papers in journals and conferences, which were indexed in SCI more than
3996
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
1500 times. One of his papers published in IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON ANTENNAS AND PROPAGATIONS in 2008 became the top ESI (Essential Science Indicators) paper within ten years in the field of antenna (SCI indexed self-excluded in the antenna field ranged top 1%). In 2014, he was elected as the Highly Cited Scholar by Elsevier in the field of electrical and electronic engineering. He was the recipient of the Science Awards by the Education Mnistry of China in 2002 and 2008, the Educational Award by Shaanxi Province in 2003, the Singapore Tan Chin Tuan Exchange Fellowship Award in 2003, the Fellowship Award by Japan Society for Promotion of Science (JSPS) in 2004, and the Science Award by Guangdong Province in 2013.
Da-Yi Mo was born in Shaoguan, Guangdong, China, on May 3, 1990. He received the B.S. and M.E. degrees from South China University of Technology, Guangzhou, China, in 2012 and 2015, respectively. He is currently working as an RF Engineer in Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Company, Limited, Shenzhen, China. His research interests include millimeter-wave power-combining circuits, RF circuit, and wireless communication techniques.
Qiong-Sen Wu was born in Maoming, Guangdong, China, on July 6, 1989. He received the B.S. and M.E. degrees from South China University of Technology, Guangzhou, China, in 2011 and 2014, respectively. He is currently working toward the Ph.D. degree at the University of Macau. His research interests include millimeter-wave power-combining circuits, periodic guided-wave structures, and impedance transformers.
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
3997
Reliability Analysis of Ku-Band 5-bit Phase Shifters Using MEMS SP4T and SPDT Switches Sukomal Dey, Student Member, IEEE, and Shiban K. Koul, Fellow, IEEE
Abstract—This work presents a Ku-band microelectromechanical systems (MEMS) based 5-bit phase shifter using dc contact single-pole-four-throw (SP4T) and single-pole-double-throw switches. The design is implemented using a coplanar waveguide transmission line. Two individual 2-bit phase shifters and one 1-bit phase shifter are cascaded to develop the complete 5-bit phase shifter. The phase shifters are fabricated on 635- m alumina substrate using a surface micromachining process. The 5-bit phase shifter demonstrates an average insertion loss of 2.65 dB in the 13–18-GHz band with a return loss better than 22 dB and average phase error less than 0.68 at 17 GHz. Total area of the fabricated 5-bit phase shifter is 4.7 2.8 mm . The reliability of the single-pole-single-throw and SP4T switches show more than 10 million cycles with an RF power of 0.1–2 W. Furthermore, reliability of the MEMS phase shifter is extensively investigated and presented with cold and hot switched conditions. To the best of our knowledge, this is the first reported MEMS 5-bit phase shifter in the literature that has undergone different reliability and qualification testing including 3-axis vibrations. Index Terms—Contact resistance, dc contact, phase shifter, RF microelectromechanical system (RF MEMS).
I. INTRODUCTION
A
LOW-LOSS and miniature microwave phase shifter is a critical component of a transmit/receive (T/R) module in passive electronically scanned arrays (ESAs) used widely in military and commercial applications [1]. Utilizing low-loss phase shifters in a T/R module lowers the power requirements, and hence, lower component count, smaller size, and lower costs [2]. The T/R module operating at Ku-band frequencies enable the use of ESA antennas for wide-swath high-resolution synthetic aperture radar (SAR) and imaging of terrestrial snow covers [3]. The module was designed to operate over the full frequency range of 13–18 GHz, although typically 17 GHz is used in SAR radar application. The module size allows four T/R modules to feed the 16 16 element sub-array on an antenna panel. A 5-bit phase shifter is an essential component in each channel out of four transmits channels and eight receiver channels.
Manuscript received January 13, 2015; revised June 25, 2015, September 17, 2015, and September 24, 2015; accepted October 05, 2015. Date of publication October 27, 2015; date of current version December 02, 2015. This work was supported by the Synergy Microwave Corporation, Paterson, NJ, USA. The authors are with the Centre for Applied Research in Electronics (CARE), Indian Institute of Technology (IIT) Delhi, New Delhi 110016, India (e-mail: [email protected]; [email protected]). Color versions of one or more of the figures in this paper are available online at http://ieeexplore.ieee.org. Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/TMTT.2015.2491938
Different types of digital phase shifters are implemented in the last seven years using monolithic microwave integrated circuit (MMIC) and CMOS technologies [4]–[9]. Although CMOS based phase shifters are compact in size, to compensate for the loss and noise such active phase shifters require a T/R module at each antenna element. This greatly increases the cost of such phased arrays. On the other hand, one T/R module connected to multiple low-loss phase shifters in phased arrays always gives lower component count, and thus is less expensive. The RF MEMS based digital phase shifter has advanced significantly over the past seven years with its high linearity, low loss, and excellent phase accuracy within a compact size [10]. RF MEMS digital phase shifters have been reported up to 6 bits using switched-line, reflect-line, low-pass/high-pass type, and distributed MEMS transmission line (DMTL) topology in different frequency bands [12]–[18]. A 4-bit MEMS phase shifter with four single-pole-four-throw (SP4T) switches with 21 mm area reported by Tan et al. provides an average insertion loss of 1.1 dB and phase accuracy of 2.3 at 10 GHz [12]. The switched line based 5-bit phase shifter provides an average insertion loss of 3.6 dB at 10 GHz within a 28-mm area [13]. A 6-bit phase shifter was demonstrated in [14] with 2.8-dB loss at 18 GHz over a 40-mm area. A packaged X-band 5-bit low-pass/high-pass phase shifter provides an average insertion loss of 4.5 dB at 12 GHz in a 9.2-mm area [15]. A DMTL based 4-bit phase shifter has been reported with 1.7 dB of average loss at 15 GHz with 7 of average phase error [16]. A triple-stub topology based DMTL phase shifter recently reported an average loss of 3.6 dB over the 15–22.5-GHz band in a 63.7-mm area [17]. A 5-bit switched line phase shifter was recently reported with 5.4-dB loss at 17.2 GHz over a 36-mm area [18] and 4.7-dB loss from a DMTL type 5-bit phase shifter over a 19.4-mm area at 10 GHz [19]. Major challenges of these phase shifters are to achieve low loss with desirable phase shift and with good repeatability within a small area. These challenges become very critical with higher bit configurations at lower microwave frequency ( 20 GHz). The DMTL is one of the choices for good insertion-loss performance, but its operation become nonlinear with variation of phase delay over the band once it crosses the Bragg frequency [20]. Moreover, area (along the length) of the DMTL phase shifter will also become large with higher bit ( 3-bit) configurations at lower frequency. Almost all the higher bit ( 4-bit) phase shifters reported so far have experienced a challenge to achieve low loss and good matching simultaneously within a small area. Furthermore, all MEMS based digital phase shifters reported so far have not had their reliability performance addressed over large cycles
0018-9480 © 2015 IEEE. Personal use is permitted, but republication/redistribution requires IEEE permission. See http://www.ieee.org/publications_standards/publications/rights/index.html for more information.
3998
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 1. Schematic diagram of the 5-bit MEMS switched-line phase shifter based on SP4T and SPDT switches.
of operations. The work reported here attempts to address all these points with thorough detailed analysis and experimental investigation. This work is primarily focused on the development of the 5-bit switched-line phase shifter using four SP4T and two single-pole-double-throw (SPDT) switches with minimum insertion loss and good phase accuracy within the smallest possible area at 17 GHz. Although the phase shifter is primarily required to be operated over the frequency band of 16.75–17.25 GHz, its performance in the entire Ku-band is presented. The phase shifter was encapsulated within a module and its reliability was observed. Moreover, reliability of the reported phase shifter was extensively investigated with cold and hot switched conditions up to large cycles of operations for end-user applications. Finally, the performances of the phase shifter are compared with the present-state-of-the-art MMIC, CMOS, and MEMS phase shifters. II. PROPOSED DESIGN TOPOLOGY OF 5-bit PHASE SHIFTER
THE
Ku-BAND
Different topology of 5-bit phase shifters have been designed and optimized with four SP4T and two SPDT switches using different delay and reference lines combinations. The final schematic of the 5-bit TTD phase-shifter model proposed for the present work is shown in Fig. 1. Compared with the conventional switched line phase shifter, in which a minimum of ten switches are actuated at a time [18], the present design requires only six switches to be actuated at a time to activate one phase state for 5-bit operation. Small and simple cantilever beam structures are used for switching in the proposed design, which introduces a few sealant features such as the following. 1) The switch is less sensitive to stress due to its small size and with a fast switching time. 2) A single-contact cantilever switch is less sensitive to planarity and stress, which significantly improves the overall contact force and equal division of electrostatic force over all different paths in phase shifter. 3) A multi-contact cantilever switch is very prone to single contact failure (one contact permanently stuck down) or an actuator failure (permanent up). Single switch failure can completely damage the overall phase-shifter performance for long-range operations. 4) Multi-contact and complex designs of cantilever switches are sensitive to stress gradient. The residual stress effects uneven distribution of tip deflection between all identical structures. Hence, most of the cases’ different blocks need different voltages to actuate. It decreases overall yield of the device where, at a time, six switches are actuating.
5) A simple cantilever beam can easily be placed on the coplanar waveguide (CPW) line, which substantially improves the compactness in the SP4T and SPDT structures. 6) Due to its small thickness (2 m), it can also be easily packaged using a thin-film package, which is very compatible with the CMOS process. The complete work is divided into two stages: phase 1 and phase 2. Phase 1 primarily focuses on detailed analysis and experimental observations at different stages of a 5-bit phase shifter. Finally, phase 2 provides a more reliable and improved version of a 5-bit phase shifter. III. SP4T SWITCH DESIGN AND CHARACTERIZATION: PHASE 1 A. Design and Simulation of the MEMS SP4T Switch To improve the simplicity, repeatability, and compactness, four cantilever based in-line MEMS switches are used at four different paths in SP4T. The equivalent circuit model of the single-pole single-throw (SPST) switch is shown in Fig. 2(a). The top view of the SP4T switch layout and dimensions are shown in Fig. 2(b). In order to make compact size of the SP4T switch, all adjacent CPW ground planes are connected together. The signal linewidth is 50 m and the optimal simulated performance was observed with a spoke width of 22 m. Moreover, in order to achieve desired performance bandwidth up to Ku-band, spoke length is optimized to be 34 m from the center of the central junction where switches are closely packed without causing problems in fabrication. As a result, the area of the SP4T switch is 0.74 mm . To equalize the voltages on the two ground planes, saw-shaped air-bridge structures were introduced at each discontinuity to short out the parasitic slot line modes. As shown in Fig. 2(b), , , and t-line elements are used to represent different sections. To overcome the off-path resonance and to compensate for the impedance mismatch at the central junction, a capacitance fF was introduced with 20- m beamwidth and 50 m away from central junction and the effect of its matching ( and ) was also investigated until up to 18 GHz using the High Frequency Structure Simulator (HFSS), as shown in Fig. 3(a). To investigate the near-port (port 2 and port 5) and far-port (port 3 and port 4) performances with the effect of coupling between lines in the SP4T switch with bias lines (20-k bias resistance) and dc pads 50 50 m , a full-wave simulation was carried out using HFSS. The Advanced Design System (ADS) model is very useful to look inside through the equivalent circuit model, but it does not differentiate the difference between near- and far-ports with the coupling between lines within the SP4T switch. Moreover, for far-port return loss, full-wave simulations reasonably match with the circuit model, as depicted in Fig. 3(b). It reveals that the SP4T switch delivers outstanding matching up to 18 GHz with a return loss of better than 27 dB and worst case insertion loss of 0.36 dB. Moreover, impedance matching between inputs to near-port (port 2) is 2.7 dB better than the far-port (port 3) response. Although, near-port is at an acute angle to the input port, but it is also believed that coupling between input and near-port improves the impedance matching
DEY AND KOUL: RELIABILITY ANALYSIS OF KU-BAND 5-bit PHASE SHIFTERS
3999
Fig. 4. Fabrication process steps of MEMS SPST switch.
and the resistivity of the bias lines. Furthermore, little deviation between the near-port and far-port in terms of return loss and isolation are mostly due to the small upstate capacitance (3.5 fF) and topology difference between the ports, which also agrees well with the circuit model up to a reasonable extent. B. Fabrication Process The device is fabricated on a 635- m alumina substrate after the RCA cleaning of the wafer using the process reported in [18]. First, 70 nm titanium–tungsten (TiW) is deposited and patterned using the lift-off technique to form the bias lines [see Fig. 4(a)]. A 0.7- m SiO layer is then deposited and patterned on the last layer (TiW) [see Fig. 4(b)]. 2- m gold is electroplated to form fixed electrode and CPW transmission line [see Fig. 4(c)]. 0.7 m of SiO is then deposited as a dielectric layer on the fixed electrode [see Fig. 4(d)]. Spin-coated polyimide (PI) is coated to a thickness of 2.5 m [see Fig. 4(e)] to form the sacrificial layer. Next, anchor holes and dimples openings (with 1 m) are performed in the PI layer. A 2- m gold layer is electroplated on the PI, which will be the structural layer for the devices [see Fig. 4(f)] and the switch is then released by an oxygen plasma dry etch process [see Fig. 4(g)]. The fabrication process steps are drawn in Fig. 4. Fig. 2. (a) Equivalent circuit model of the SPST switch. (b) Schematic and equivalent circuit representation of SP4T switch (P1–P2 connected).
Fig. 3. (a) Simulated input and output return loss of the SP4T switch with dif. (b) Simulated return and insertion loss of ferent junction capacitances SP4T switch using equivalent circuit model and HFSS simulation.
at near-port compared to the far-port. Hence, the far-port exhibits a narrower return-loss bandwidth than the near-port in the SP4T switch. A little influence on isolation response with added parasitic (30-k bias resistance instead of 20 k , which was initially taken) was observed with a connection between port 1 to port 2 and it is better than 30 dB up to Ku-band. The isolation and matching responses are mostly dominated by the input and output transmission lines, SP4T switch, spoke length,
C. Measurements of the SPST and SP4T Switches The SP4T switch performance is mostly dominated by the SPST switch and its proximity near to the central junction. Thus, prior to the SP4T switch, SPST switch performances were critically evaluated. Switch deflection was found to be 0.4 m [see Fig. 5(a)] with 2.8 MPa m of stress gradient along the length of the cantilever. The CV profile shows the measured pull-in and release voltages of 30–43 V, as depicted in Fig. 5(b). The measured mechanical resonance frequency of the switch is 38.8 kHz, as shown in Fig. 5(c). Measured ON–OFF times of the switch are 28 and 21 s, respectively. RF measurement was done using an Agilent PNA series E8361C vector network analyzer using cascade dc probes and calibrated using the short-open-load-through. No package was placed on top of the measured switch. The measured characteristic from 33 to 29.5 dB at 13–18 GHz [see Fig. 5(d)] indicates that the fabricated MEMS switch has a good isolation characteristic with 3.8 fF . The measured return and insertion loss are 19–25 and 0.56–0.27 dB, respectively up to 18 GHz with an applied voltage of 43–53 V. It is mostly attributed to the reduction of contact resistance as the applied voltage and contact force are increased [25]. 2.8 of was extracted
4000
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 5. (a) Measured profile of cantilever beam after release. Measured: (b) pull-in and release voltages, (c) mechanical resonance frequency, and (d) S-parameter performances of the SPST switch.
Fig. 8. Microscopic images of the individual sections of 5-bit phase shifter.
Fig. 6. (a) Microscopic image of the fabricated SP4T RFMEMS switch. (b) S-parameter performances of SP4T RF MEMS switch [22].
Fig. 7. Measured IIP3 of the SPST and SP4T switches.
using the measured data. An of 57–60 pH and of 11–14 fF are obtained, respectively, up to 18 GHz. The microscopic image of the fabricated SP4T switch is shown in Fig. 6(a) [22]. The SP4T switch demonstrates 0.38 dB of worst case insertion loss, better than 24 dB of return losses, and isolation of 29.7 dB (at one ON-port condition) over 13–18 GHz, as shown in Fig. 6(b). Although the S-parameter response of this SP4T switch can be found in [22], this study is greatly expanded upon with more measurement results and will be presented in detail in subsequent sections. The third-order intermodulation intercept point (IIP3) values were measured for SPST and SP4T switches using a two-tone test at GHz and GHz, respectively. SPST and SP4T switches show an IIP3 of 43 and 45 dBm, respectively, as shown in Fig. 7. Here, switch passive intermodulation is mostly limited by the contact resistance of the ground–signal–ground (GSG) probe and input, output CPW transmission lines on the ceramic substrate [26]. IV. INDIVIDUAL 2-, 1-, AND COMPLETE 5-bit PHASE-SHIFTERS DESIGN AND CHARACTERIZATION: PHASE 1 A. Design and Measurements of 2- and 1-bit Phase Shifters A Ku-band 2-bit phase shifter is fabricated using four delay lines and two SP4T switches connected to the input and output transmission line. Design details and measurement results of the proposed 2- and 1-bit phase shifters were reported in
[23]. The primary aim of the design was to achieve an optimum performance with low loss over the compact size from two different fine-bit (11.25 /22.5 /33.75 ) and coarse-bit (45 /90 /135 ) sections. Design scheme of the reported phase shifter is motivated by the work reported in [12] and [24]. Electrical length of the different bits was designed with respect to the reference line at 17 GHz [23]. All three delay lines from the fine and coarse-bit sections contain a section equal to the reference line plus an additional delay line to obtain the desired phase shift. Coupling between various delay lines were also checked using an eight-port simulation in HFSS and results were presented in [23]. Inductive and 90 CPW bends were used in design to overcome the exitation of coupled slotline modes at CPW discontinuities and to achieve little transmission distortion caused by intra-coupling in the line. The microscopic images of the two 2-bit and one 1-bit section are shown in Fig. 8. The overall size of the fine-bit section is 3.84 mm and coarse-bit section is 6.45 mm . An optical profilometer shows from 0.4- to 0.57- m variation in tip deflection of the switch along the length of the cantilever. It leads to 3.97–5.3-fF variation in (at zero bias) and 2.8–3.7- variation in (applied bias) throughout different delay lines with 53-V actuation voltage. The fine-bit section gives measured return loss of better than 21 dB and worst case insertion loss of 0.82 dB over 13–18 GHz [23], whereas the coarse-bit section provides a return loss of better than 24 dB and worst case loss of 0.92 dB (135 ) over 16–18 GHz [23]. Maximum phase error of 0.7 was obtained experimentally at 17 GHz from both sections. The 1-bit bit section demonstrates measured return loss of better than 27 dB, maximum loss of 1.16 dB, and phase error of 0.58 at 17 GHz [23]. B. Design and Measurement of 5-bit Phase Shifter The microscopic image of the complete 5-bit phase shifter is shown in Fig. 9. The complete area of the phase shifter is 15.8 mm . All three sections were cascaded together and simulated using HFSS and verified in ADS for completeness. An unwanted off-path resonance was observed in full-wave simulation at 11 GHz and it was removed completely using
DEY AND KOUL: RELIABILITY ANALYSIS OF KU-BAND 5-bit PHASE SHIFTERS
4001
Fig. 10. Measured and voltage versus: (a) temperature and (b) incident power at three different temperatures.
Fig. 9. Microscopic image of the fabricated Ku-band 5-bit phase shifter [23].
383- m lengths between the fine-bit to coarse-bit section and 34- m lengths between the coarse-bit to 1-bit section [23]. The S-parameters performance of the 5-bit phase shifter was measured systematically over the band. The results show that matching is better than 19 dB over 0.1–18 GHz and average loss is 3.89 dB within 13–18 GHz [23]. The maximum phase error is 1.14 at 17 GHz in a 258.75 phase state. The is maximum (4.3 ) in the 258.75 state and minimum (2.4 ) at the 0 state. The maximum measured group delay of 182 ps with the delay step of 4.67 ps was obtained at 17 GHz. Finally, the present phase shifter demonstrates figure-of-merit (FOM) (dB/bit) of 0.9 at 17 GHz [23]. V. RELIABILITY MEASUREMENT OF THE SPST SP4T SWITCHES: PHASE 1
AND
To ensure the optimum phase-shifter performance where all six switches are performing at a time, an extensive measurement process was adopted. Reliability and power-handling measurements were performed on the switches at 2 GHz with various levels of RF power. As a matter of fact, RF frequency is not a primary parameter to measure a dc contact switch reliability or power-handling capability. Initially, switch actuation voltage was measured with different incident power levels. Later, switch contact resistance variations were critically observed at different power and temperature scales and will be reported in subsequent sections. A. Temperature Stability of the MEMS Switch The temperature stability of the MEMS switch was observed by measuring the change in and voltages as a function of temperature. The 3-D measured profile of the switch shows 270-nm downward deformation from a 130- m-long cantilever beam from 25 C to 85 C temperature scales. It indicates the presence of thermomechanical behavior. A temperature controller (Temptronic Corporation, Mansfield, MA, USA) was attached to the chuck of the probe station. It was used to set a stable operating temperature during the measurement. The chuck temperature was increased from 25 C up to 85 C and then again decreased to room temperature. The
switch voltage changes 7 V in their and over the period, as depicted in Fig. 10(a). Beam in-plane stress turns into compressive stress with high temperature due to different thermal coefficient of expansions between gold and alumina substrate . It deflects the beam downwards and decreases and , respectively. It is also proven analytically for any tilted cantilever structure using (1)–(4). The pull-in voltage of the cantilever switch with the tilted tip is expressed by (1), as given in [31] where
(1)
where is the spring constant, is the electrode area, is the vacuum dielectric permittivity, is the gap height or anchor height, is the dielectric thickness, is dielectric permittivity, is the beam length, and is the tip deflection. The spring constant of a cantilever structure do not have a stress dominating region, whereas cantilever tip deflection is a function of stress or stress gradient and it is represented by (2), (2) (for mathematical simwhere plicity) is the linear stress gradient due to a different deposition condition and is the Poisson ratio. The variation of inertial stress due to temperature or thermally induced stress is defined by (3), as given in [20]
(3) where and are the coefficient of thermal expansion of the cantilever beam and substrate, respectively. As temperature is increased there is a relaxation of existed residual stress in the suspended cantilever structure [27]. Here, combining (1)–(3) yields a fundamental relationship of the switch over temperature for a cantilever beam, (4) This equation reveals that the change in or voltage with temperature is solely due to the different thermal expansion coefficient between the alumina substrate and gold beam. For, GPa (gold), m m K , m m K (for worst case), and C, the calculated variation of
4002
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
the inertial stress is 38 MPa, which results in 5-V reduction in the and voltages. The same process was repeated on 20 identical MEMS switches and their average response is also plotted in Fig. 10(a). The primary reason of this deviation ( 2.5 V) between all identical switch results is due to different electroplating thickness (1.9–2.4 m) of the gold cantilever beam that was found from the scanning electron microscope (SEM) and also validated under the optical profilometer. Nonuniform tip deflections (from 0.4 m to 0.54 m) were also observed over 20 identical switches under an optical profilometer. It leads to the and variation with the same bias voltage level (53 V).
Fig. 11. Simulated heat dissipations on the dc contact switch at 2- and 17-GHz frequencies.
RF power level and at higher temperature. The effective actuation voltage or change in switch actuation voltage is calculated using (9) as a function of ,
B. Power-Handling Measurement on the MEMS Switch and voltages Measurement starts with the variation of with the incident power at 2 GHz. A power amplifier was used during this process. Test setup of this measurement was reported in [19]. Fig. 10(b) presents the power-handling capability of the switch at three different temperatures. The results show that switch voltage decreases by 4 V after 1 W, 8 V after 2 W, and 15 V after 3 W of the incident power at 25 C. At incident power of 3–4-W switch lose, its control and enters into the failure zone with 15–18-V change in voltage. The result also shows that the switch can withstand a maximum of up to 2 W of power with V from 25 C to 70 C. During this process, maximum changes from 43 to 27 V, but an abrupt change in was observed. It is mostly due to the dielectric charging with incident power due to an increase in temperature and also due to contact point degradation and contaminations with additional attractive force from the RF power [27]. For clean metal contact, the incident RF power and contact voltage are represented by (5) and (6), respectively, as a function of temperature, where , (5) (6) where is the incident RF power, is the root mean square (rms) value of the RF current, is the contact temperature, is the ambient temperature, and is the Lorenz number V/K . For contaminated contacts, and are expressed by
(7) (8) where is the thermal conductivity of the gold contact [(318 W/(m K)], is gold hardness (1.63 GPa), and is the contact force. From the above analysis, it is evident that is decreased with higher and it simultaneously increases the that also increases the . During this process, beam is reduced periodically with the effect from spring softening at higher incident
(9) where is the RF signal amplitude. For the present case, the incident RF power is limited to 1.8–2 W (at 70 C) with 0.16–0.28 mN of contact force before softening the temperature of gold is reached (370 K). In this work, power-handling measurement of the dc contact switches was performed at 2 GHz. Sensitivity of the S-parameters is affected at higher frequency and even at a higher incident power level. This is mostly due to self biasing and self heating at higher RF power at high frequency. This fact is justified with full-wave simulation in CST Microwave Studio. The maximum simulated heat dissipation at 2 GHz and at 17 GHz are 277 and 289 K, respectively, in the ON-state, at 0.5 W of RF power, as shown in Fig. 11. This variation was observed up to 2 W of RF power and maximum temperature rise was found to be 337 K at 17 GHz (291 K at 2 GHz). The rise in temperature or self heating at higher RF power level changes the S-parameter performances of the dc contact switch. The results show from 0.13- to 0.32-dB variation in insertion loss from 0.1 to 2 W of RF power at 17 GHz, as shown in Fig. 12(a). Results also show a negligible variation of loss (0.03–0.09 dB) over 0.1–2 W of power at 2 GHz. Moreover, the variation of switch loss was also observed at three different boundary temperatures (273, 300, and 325 K) over 0.5–2 W of RF power with a 0.5-W step. Fig. 12(b) shows variation of loss is higher at high frequency and at higher temperatures. The maximum variation of loss of 0.55 dB was obtained from the simulation at 17 GHz (0.15 dB at 2 GHz) with 2 W of RF power and with 325-K temperature. Practically, these variations will be more due to additional contact heating and contaminations, which were difficult to consider in full-wave simulation. At higher incident power level ( 2 W), sensitivity of loss and matching characteristics will be affected more and probability of RF latching increases. Nevertheless, switch OFF-state performance is also affected due to the reduction in switch effective spring contact as well as initial contact gap height at a higher incident RF power level. It changes sensitivity of the switch isolation with higher . The temperature distribution on the beam follows the standard steady-state heat equation [10] and it is also equivalent to the power loss per unit volume. Fig. 13 shows the change in surface current at 2 and 17 GHz, respectively. The current spreads nearly evenly throughout the beam at 2 GHz
DEY AND KOUL: RELIABILITY ANALYSIS OF KU-BAND 5-bit PHASE SHIFTERS
4003
Fig. 12. Simulated variation of switch insertion loss with: (a) 0.1–2 W of RF power and (b) with 0.5–2 W of power at three different temperatures.
Fig. 15. Measured: (a) SPST and (b) SP4T switch reliability under different incident RF powers at 2 GHz.
Fig. 13. Simulated current distributions on the SP4T switch at 2 and 17 GHz with 0.1 W of incident RF power at 273-K temperature.
Fig. 14. Measured contact resistance versus applied voltage for the switch.
with ideally constant current density, whereas current spreads mostly outside the edges of the beam at 17 GHz with no current on the beam interior due to skin effect. As a result, the effective cross-sectional area of the beam decreases and resistance increases more at 17 GHz compared to at 2 GHz. It leads to more heat dissipation on the beam at 17 GHz. C. Cold Switched Reliability Measurement on the Switches Before starting with the cold switched reliability process, switch versus applied voltage was measured using a four-point probe method. The was varying from 3.9 to 2.84 at 43–55 V of applied bias with a standard deviation of 0.34 , as shown in Fig. 14. The measurement was repeated on 20 identical MEMS switches. Performance was also validated by fitting the measured two-port S-parameters to a transmission-line capacitance–inductance–resistance (CLR) model [see Fig. 2(a)] and was plotted simultaneously from the measured data at different bias voltages (Fig. 14). Switch resistances were measured periodically for several identical MEMS switches during the cycling test. The cold switched reliability was done at a 20-kHz switching rate with 0.5, 1, 1.5, and 2 W at 2 GHz, as shown in Fig. 15(a). Bias was given to the MEMS switch using a graphical user interface (GUI) from a local PC and a driver circuit. The bias tee and all cable losses were normalized out from the measurement. During this process, was measured after every 100 cycles
Fig. 16. (a) Test setup for the reliability measurement of MEMS switch and phase shifter and (b) 5-bit digital TTD phase shifter mounted on a test jig.
to ensure that no stiction occurs during the cycling process. The SPST switch can handle 0.5–1.5 W of RF power with 50 V of bias without failure or stiction. An abrupt change in was observed between 1.5–2 W of RF power after 10 cycles of operations. Again, it is mostly due to contaminants with excessive temperature rise in contact at a high power level in non-hermetic conditions [27]. The similar measurement was repeated on the SP4T switch and the switch was found to handle less RF power since each arm was actuated independently. The SP4T switch can withstand an RF power of 1 W up to 10-M cycles and 1.5 W for 300-k cycles. Fig. 15(b) shows the performance of one arm of the SP4T switch although other arms performed with the same response at 0.5–1 W of RF power. To ensure the optimum switch performance, both of the SPST and SP4T switches were tested at 0.1 to 0.5 W until up to 100-M cycles and the test was stopped with no switch failures. VI. RELIABILITY MEASUREMENT PHASE SHIFTER: PHASE-1
OF THE
To observe the phase shifter reliability over a practical environment, a few more tests were adopted in this work. Reliability measurements were performed with a test setup as shown in Fig. 16(a). A phase shifter is diced as a chip form and mounted onto a carrier. After connecting all relevant bias lines, the phase shifter is encapsulated within a module. The module is made of gold coated brass material, as shown in Fig. 16(b). The total size of the module is 15 16 mm . A driver circuit was used in this work, which was capable enough to produce 40–80 V with a 10-V step from a 5-V supply. A. Step 1: Phase-Shifter Testing on a Chip and Within Module Initially, reliability of the phase shifter was measured on the chip at a 17-GHz frequency and then the same measurement process was repeated on the phase shifter within a module.
4004
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 17. (a) Phase-shifter reliability performances on a chip and within a module. (b) Phase-shifter reliability at different temperature at 17 GHz.
Bias was given at the respective bias points and corresponding changes in average loss and phase error were recorded after every 50 cycles with 0.1 W of RF power at room temperature, as shown in Fig. 17(a). Result shows average loss and phase error variation of 3.89–4.83 dB and 1.14 –2.6 , respectively, at 17 GHz. Later, the phase shifter was tested on the package with the same 50-V bias using a driver circuit. The phase shifter takes 15 s times to complete one phase state and 5-s delays were given between two consecutive phase states (one complete measurement taking 12 min). All cable losses were calibrated out from the measurement. Results show 4.13–5.36 dB and 1.26 –3.73 variations on average loss and phase error, respectively; at 17 GHz, up to 10-M cycles [see Fig. 17(a)]. The added bond-wire parasitic and cable loss are reasons for the deviation between the phase shifter in the bare die and in the module form. This variation is limited by the degradation of contact quality from thermal effects due to Joule heating.
Fig. 18. Phase-shifter cold switched reliability performance with 500 mW, 800 mW, and 1 W of RF power.
were recorded at 17 GHz, as shown in Fig. 18. A power amplifier was used during this process, which was capable enough to produce 2.5 W of power until up to 17 GHz. Phase-shifter loss performance degraded from 4.17 to 6.2 dB under 1 W of RF power at the same 25 C over the 10-M cycle period. Although a total of five identical phase shifters were tested under the same power level, a few phase shifters failed after 10 cycles at 1-W power. Results in Fig. 18 show the best case performance of the phase shifter. In most of the cases, failure occurs at the higher bit sections, especially at 101.25 , 168.75 , 281.75 , 292.5 , 337.5 , and 348.75 phase bits. Note that results also show that the phase shifter works satisfactory until up to 0.5–0.8 W of RF power during the cold switched condition. Later, for the sanity check, the phase shifter was tested with 0.1–0.5 W of RF power and it worked 100-M cycles without any self actuations or failure. Maximum power-handling limitation of this kind of phase shifter can be defined by (10)–(12),
B. Step 2: Reliability Under Different Temperatures Phase-shifter reliability was observed under different temperature scales and corresponding change in average loss and phase-error variations were recorded. As similar to the MEMS switch, chuck temperature was varying from 25 C to 70 C and then decreased to room temperature. The result shows average loss and phase error variations at 50 C, 60 C, and 70 C [see Fig. 17(b)] with 0.1 W of RF power. The phase shifter shows average loss variation from 4.13 to 6.56 dB and phase error variation from 1.84 to 4.48 , respectively, after 10-M cycles at 50 C and with 50 V of bias voltage. Phase-shifter performance started to degrade after 10 cycle at 60 C (70 C) with 7.2 dB (8.1 dB) of average loss and 5.8 (5.3 ) of average phase error until up to 10-M cycle. Five phase shifters were tested during this operation, and in most of the cases, maximum loss and phase errors occurs at 101.25 , 191.25 , 168.75 , 236.25 , 281.75 , 292.5 , 337.5 , and 348.75 phase bits over the reliability cycles. Phase-shifter performance degradation at high temperatures is likely due to be the reduction of thermal conductivity of the gold beam (317 W/mK) during a conduction heat transfer process. Conviction and radiation heat transfers are negligible in this case. C. Step 3: Reliability Under Cold Switched Condition A cold switched reliability test was performed on the phase shifter with different RF powers (500 mW, 800 mW, and 1 W) and corresponding changes in average loss and phase errors
(10) (11) (12) where
is the open-state voltage of the dc contact switch, is the closed-state current of the switch, and is the characteristic impedance of the transmission line. In the reported phase shifter, the contact switch can withstand high open-state voltage ( 40 V), and so therefore, the main power-handling limitation comes from the current density in the closed state. For W and , and values are 14.14 V and 0.14 A, respectively. Note that the switch can withstand 14 V of open-state voltage [see Fig. 5(b)], but it fails with 0.14 A of the closed-state current over large cycles where six switches were performing at a time in the phase shifter. Moreover, large ohmic heat dissipation takes place during the contacting period and that also affects the linearity performance of the switch [20]. Latching and self actuations were also observed in some of the cases even at 1 W of RF power after a few million cycles. To improve the reliability of the reported phase shifter, one solution could be the reduction of with higher 50 , but it will increase losses and degrade and matching. Low sensitivity of stress with temperature rise and nonuniform heating on the beam can be
DEY AND KOUL: RELIABILITY ANALYSIS OF KU-BAND 5-bit PHASE SHIFTERS
improved with a thicker beam (thickness 4 m) or stiffer cantilever beam structure. Efficient heat transfer through anchors and medium value spring constant with higher release voltage are very essential facts to improve the phase-shifter reliability for high-power applications. All these aspects were taken care of in the next phase to improve the overall phase-shifter performances up to a reasonable extent. VII. DESIGN MODIFICATION AND MEASUREMENT THE 5-bit PHASE SHIFTER: PHASE-2
4005
Fig. 19. Microphotograph of individual sections of 5-bit phase shifter.
OF
To improve the performance and reliability of the 5-bit phase shifter, a few design modifications were carried out in “phase-2.” The sealant features of the phase shifter in terms of design modifications are listed as follows. 1) In this work, the dc-contact switch has dimensions of 90 m by 30 m with a dimple dimension of 12 m 12 m 1 m. It results in negligible tip-deflection (140 nm upward) after an O -plasma dry release process. It is mostly due to the miniature switch profile, which is less sensitive to stress gradient [25]. The main purpose of using a miniature switch profile in phase-2 is to improve the yield of the switch and that is also to be reflected on the overall phase-shifter performance. 2) The switch is implemented using an 18- m/40- m/18- m (50 ) CPW line. It makes a more symmetric and compact SP4T switch. The SP4T switch was fabricated from “phase-2” and has a total area of 0.55 mm , which is 24% more compact than “phase-1” SP4T switch. It leads to the reduction in the overall phase-shifter area since area is directly proportional to the cost in large-volume manufacturing processes. 3) A few more design parameters like: a) junction capacitance ; b) spoke length; c) inductive bends; and d) bias line resistivity were modified accordingly during this phase to accelerate the phase-shifter performance. 4) In addition, a parasitic inductive effect of the CPW lines between the central junction and switches is significantly improved here with smaller switch and lower CPW (18/ 40/18) dimensions. It permits switches to be placed very close to one another without any fabrication difficulties. It also leads to the improvement on matching over the entire Ku-band. Note that fabrication process steps of “phase-2” are similar to that of “phase-1.” The actuated switch has a measured pull-in voltage of 62 V and a stable contact appears to be at 70 V. Measured switching time was 13–9 s for 65–80 V with a overall settling time of 16 s due to the switch bounce. Switch release time is 5 s with a final settling time of 7.6 s. The present switch gives 52 kHz of mechanical resonance frequency with a -factor of 8.7. The switch demonstrates measured return loss of better than 31 dB, worst case insertion loss of 0.16 dB, and isolation of 30 dB up to 18 GHz. The measured IIP3 of the switch is 46 dBm. The circuit model of the switch is shown in Fig. 22. The port definition of the SP4T switch is similar as in “phase-1.” To eliminate the unwanted off-path resonance and
Fig. 20. (a) Measured S-parameter response of the SP4T switch. Measured S-parameter response of individual sections of 5-bit phase shifter. (b) 0–18-GHz return-loss performance. (c) Insertion loss within 13–18 GHz. (d) Phase versus frequency response over the band of interest.
to improve the matching, a 4.4 fF of was introduced on the input line on the SP4T switch. Furthermore, spoke length was also reduced to 22 m, which leads to the significant improvement in matching. The line length of the signal line and the other four arms were also optimized to achieve good wideband matching. As a result, the SP4T switch demonstrates worst case insertion loss of 0.23 dB and return losses were better than 27 dB for all ports up to 18 GHz, as shown in Fig. 20(a). An average measured isolation of 30 dB was obtained with all of the OFF-port condition, which was 1.8 dB worse than the isolation with the one-port (P-2) ON condition. Note that, Fig. 20(a) shows the average isolation in all of the OFF-port condition. SEM images of “fine-bit” and “coarse-bit” sections of the 5-bit phase shifter is shown in Fig. 19. The total area of the fine-bit section is 2.6 mm and the coarse-bit section is 5.6 mm . The optical profilometer shows very negligible variation (0.092–0.17 m) in tip deflection on the switch profile of the overall 2-bit phase shifters (both fine and coarse bit sections). As a results, variation in and were much less throughout different states on the phase shifters for the same actuation bias (70 V). Inductive sections and 90 CPW bends were also introduced here to overcome the intra-coupling effect and any unwanted resonance. As in “phase-1,” line lengths of different reference and delay lines of two 2-bit phase shifters were also optimized using full-wave simulation in HFSS, as mentioned in Fig. 22. The measured return loss of better than 24 dB up to 18 GHz and insertion loss of 0.7 dB were obtained with 70-V bias voltage between 13–18 GHz from the “fine-bit” section, as shown in Fig. 20(b) and (c). The “coarse-bit” section gives
4006
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 23. Measured: (a) return-loss and (b) insertion-loss performances of the 5-bit phase shifter fabricated from phase-2 up to 18 GHz. Fig. 21. SEM image of the fabricated Ku-band 5-bit phase shifter (Phase-2).
maximum measured group delay of 159 ps with the delay step of 4.06 ps was achieved at 17 GHz. Phase shifter also demonstrates 0.7 dB/bit of FOM at 17 GHz. Detailed phase shift and loss data are tabulated in Table I. VIII. RELIABILITY MEASUREMENT OF SWITCHES: PHASE-2 Similar to “phase-1,” here switch reliability was systematically characterized under different temperatures and RF power levels. Hot and cold switched reliability were also measured and presented in the subsequent sections. A. Temperature Stability of the MEMS Switch
Fig. 22. Schematic of the complete 5-bit phase shifter (PS 2) at 0 state.
return loss better than 25 dB and less than 0.86 dB of insertion loss [see Fig. 20(b) and (c)]. Phase error of less than 0.48 (33.75 ) and 0.33 (45 ) were obtained from fineand coarse-bit sections, respectively, at 17 GHz, as shown in Fig. 20(d). The 1-bit section demonstrates measured return loss of better than 28 dB and worst case insertion loss of 0.98 dB from both of the states [see Fig. 20(b) and (c)] with an excellent phase accuracy (0.26 of phase error) over the band of interest [see Fig. 23(d)]. SEM image of the complete 5-bit phase shifter and its complete schematic are shown in Figs. 21 and 22, respectively. The total size of the phase shifter is 13 mm (including bias pads and bias lines). All three sections were cascaded together and connecting line lengths ( and ) were optimized to be 333 and 298 m, respectively. Return loss was better than 22 dB up to 18 GHz and average insertion loss was less than 2.65 dB from all states over 13–18 GHz with 70 V, as shown in Fig. 23. The maximum average phase error was 0.68 at 17 GHz, which shows 40% improvement compared to “phase-1.” Furthermore, the
The temperature stability was observed on the SPST switch and as a function of temby measuring the change in perature, as depicted in Fig. 24(a). The measured 3-D profile shows negligible difference (114 nm) from 25 C to 85 C on the switch profile, which indicates a robust thermomechanical performance. The switch shows a variation of 6.7 V in their and voltages until up to 85 C. It is due to the temperature-induced plastic deformation when temperature is higher than the critical temperature. It mostly happens in the cooling phase where stress becomes much more tensile in nature. Temperature induced elastic deformation was also observed in some particular cases where the beam deforms elastically even at lower temperature. This may be likely due to higher adhesion in gold–gold contact [10]. B. Power-Handling Measurement on the MEMS Switch Power-handling capability of the switch is significantly improved in phase-2 at different operating temperatures, as shown in Fig. 24(b). A similar measurement process was adopted as in phase-1. Results show that the present switch can handle 0.1–3 W of RF power at four different temperatures with maximum 15.8-V reductions in voltage. In all the cases, V, which is quite good enough for long-time operation. Switch performance started to degrade between 3–4 W after 50 C with a 23.6-V reduction in voltage. Again, it is mostly due to the contact point degradation and contaminations at high RF power and with an elevated temperature [27]. C. Switch Reliability Under Cold Switched Condition was measured periodically using four point probes Switch to ensure the switch performance at different RF powers. During this process, both SPST and SP4T switches underwent up to 10-M cycles and corresponding changes in were recorded at four different RF powers (0.5, 1, 2, 3, and 4 W) at 2 GHz.
DEY AND KOUL: RELIABILITY ANALYSIS OF KU-BAND 5-bit PHASE SHIFTERS
4007
TABLE I PHASE SHIFT AND LOSS DATA OF PHASE-2 AT 17 GHz
Fig. 24. (a) Measured and voltages of SPST switch versus temperatures and (b) switch power-handling response at different temperatures.
Fig. 26. Reliability of the: (a) SPST and (b) SP4T switches for 0.1–1 W of RF power at 50 C and 70 C with 70-V actuation voltage.
Fig. 25. Cold switched reliability of SPST and SP4T switches at 25 C.
All measurements were carried out at room temperature (25 C) with 70 V, as shown in Fig. 25. As similar to phase-1, was recorded after every 100 cycles to ensure the stiction-free condition. Result shows that the SPST switch can handle 10-M cycles until up to 3 W with no contact failure or stiction. However, reliability started degrading over 3–4 W of RF power with an abrupt change in after 10 cycles and failed after 1-M cycles. Finally, the SPST switch can handle 2.5–3 W of RF power until up to 10-M cycles at 25 C. The SP4T switch was also characterized during this process. Each arm of the switch was actuated independently with 0.8–1.1 mN of contact force. During this cold switched reliability process, the reported SP4T switch can withstand up to
1.5–2 W of incident power until up to 10-M cycles and 3 W for 10 cycles without failure of any of the contacts [see Fig. 25]. Again, to ensure the phase-shifter performance, five identical SP4T switches were tested up to 100-M cycles with 0.5–1 W of power and the test was stopped without failure. D. Switch Reliability Under Hot Switched Condition A hot switched reliability was examined on the SPST and SP4T switches. Fig. 26(a) and (b) presents the reliability results of the SPST and SP4T switches with 0.1–1 W at 50 C and 70 C, respectively. The SPST switch shows that for an incident power of 0.1–0.5 W, the reliability is 50-M cycles at 50 C and 20-M cycles at 70 C. At 1 W, reliability was measured 1-M cycles at both temperatures [see Fig. 26(a)], whereas SP4T switch reliability is 1-M cycles with 0.5 W of power at both of the temperatures, but it quickly failed ( 10 cycles) with 1-W power at 70 C [see Fig. 26(b)]. Microwelding
4008
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
TABLE II STATE-OF-THE-ART RELIABILITY COMPARISON OF THE OHMIC CONTACT MEMS SPST SWITCHES OVER THE LAST FOUR YEARS
TABLE III STATE-OF-THE-ART COMPARISON OF MEMS SP4T SWITCHES OVER THE LAST FOUR YEARS
Fig. 27. (a) Reliability performances of individual sections of the 5-bit phase shifter. (b) Performance comparison of the complete 5-bit phase shifter on a chip and on a package at 17 GHz with 0.1 W of RF power.
Fig. 28. Simulated performance variation between chip and module: (a) return and insertion loss and (b) phase at reference state of the phase shifter.
typically limited the switching lifetime under hot switching conditions and especially for the gold–gold contact [10]. Table II presents a state-of-the-art comparison of the SPST switch reliability. Table III gives a state-of-the-art performance comparison of the SP4T switch. IX. RELIABILITY MEASUREMENTS OF THE PHASE SHIFTER: PHASE-2 Phase-shifter reliability was observed on a chip with 0.1 W of power at 25 C. Initially, reliability performances were observed on individual sections (fine bit, coarse bit, and higher bit), prior to starting with the complete 5 bit. All sections were measured up to 100-M cycles to ensure the optimum phase-shifter performance. The reliability performance of this 5-bit phase shifter is entirely driven by the upper limit of higher bit section reliability, as also was observed in phase-1. No failure was observed until up to 100-M cycles of operations in all fundamental blocks of the 5-bit phase shifter. Results show maximum average loss and phase error of 1.64 dB and 1.1 , respectively, at 17 GHz, as shown in Fig. 27(a). Finally phase-shifter reliability was measured on a chip and within a module (module area is 12 10 mm ) and is shown in Fig. 27(b). The results show 20% degradation in average loss and phase errors compared to the bare die results with 0.1 W of RF power at room temperature and at 17-GHz frequency. These changes are mostly due to the added bond wire parasitic and , transitions. Note that all cable losses were calibrated out before the measurements in the module form. In addition to this, variation in loss and phase shift from bare die to module was also validated using a full-wave simulation at the reference state and results show 15%–20% tolerances due to added parasitic, as shown in Fig. 28.
Fig. 29. Reliability of the phase shifter for 0.5–2 W of RF power and (b) reliability of the phase shifter under hot switched condition for 0.5–1 W of RF power and at two different temperatures (50 C and 70 C).
A. Reliability Under Cold Switched Condition Fig. 29(a) shows the cold switched reliability at four power levels (0.1, 0.5, 1, and 2 W) at 25 C. The result shows phase shifter works satisfactorily up to 30-M cycles with a maximum average loss and phase error of 5.34 dB and 2.8 , respectively, with 0.5–1 W of power levels. Furthermore, failure in the phase shifter was observed after 30- and 5-M cycles at 1 and 2 W of power levels, respectively. Most of the cases failure occurs in a higher bit section. At 1–2 W, the total rms current in the switch was 0.14–0.2 A and each contact was handling 35–50 mA . Thus, reliability of the phase shifter at a high power level was limited by the current density in the closed state and due to the effect of electromigration like Joule heating [10]. B. Reliability Under Hot Switched Condition Phase-shifter reliability was checked under a hot switched condition at two different temperatures (50 C and 70 C) with 0.5 and 1 W of RF powers. The phase shifter performs satisfactorily ( 10-M cycles) at 0.5-W power until up to 70 C. Fig. 29(b) shows that for an incident RF power of 0.5 W, reliability is 5-M cycles at both temperatures. At 1 W, reliability is 5 M at 50 C and 1 M at 70 C. Maximum average loss and phase-error variation during this process are 5.8 dB and
DEY AND KOUL: RELIABILITY ANALYSIS OF KU-BAND 5-bit PHASE SHIFTERS
Fig. 30. Measured change in loss and phase error at: (a) 25 C and (b) 50 C; over 6 h of prolonged actuation (ON-state) with 0.1 W of power at 17 GHz.
3.78 , respectively. Note that all power-handling and reliability measurements of the reported phase shifter were carried out under the CW mode of operation. Phase-shifter performance may change under the pulse mode conditions because of different physical failure phenomena. A quick simulation shows that the phase shifter can sustain up to 380 C and average 20%–28% improvement in loss with a 4- m thicker beam and rhodium as a contact material. C. Phase-Shifter Testing Under Prolonged Actuation To observe the phase-shifter performance under a prolonged actuation condition, one more on-wafer testing was performed for completeness. The phase shifter was measured under an ON-state condition at 25 C and 50 C temperatures with 0.1 W of RF power and with 65–70-V bias. The process was continued up to 6 h and corresponding changes in loss and phase error were recorded after every 10 min. Although Fig. 30 shows the measured responses at three different phase states, all but 31 states were observed with respect to the “ref”-state at 17 GHz. During this stress relaxation process, the phase bits show 1.36 dB (3.55–4.91 dB) of loss variation from the initial value and maximum 1.24 (0.87 –2.11 ) change in phase error at 17 GHz and at 25 C. This variation was more at 50 C with an extra 1.88 dB (3.57–5.44 dB) of loss and 1.8 (0.87 –2.68 ) of phase error. These variations can be justified by (13), (13) where is the specific heat of the material (0.129 J/g C at 25 C for gold), is the mass, and is the change in temperature. Equation (13) expresses that the maximum power loss as heat in a given time ( h is this case) is proportional to the heat dissipation from the device-under-test (DUT) ( and are constant here) over a prolonged ON-state condition. It leads to an increase in temperature by and affects the sensitivity of the S-parameter. This measurement is entirely limited by the time where the beam curvature decreases with time. Moreover, sensitivity of the S-parameter can change further with an increase in power and with more time of operation . This effect can be improved further with an appropriate choice of beam material like aluminum alloy and well-suited contact material like rhodium or gold–palladium alloys. D. Three-Axis Vibration Measurement The three-axis vibration testing was performed in phase-2 for the qualification testing. The phase shifter was encapsulated
4009
Fig. 31. PSD versus frequency during shaker table testing under 0.04 g Hz PSD in the -axis.
within a module to measure its performance with externally applied vibration and shock. An Unholtz-Dickie-made electrodynamic shaker table was used during testing. Vibration modes from the shaker table were controlled by a power amplifier and a dc power source. The phase shifter was accelerated over 0.04 g Hz of power spectral density (PSD) and responses were recorded from 20 Hz to 2 kHz of the frequency range in all three axes. The measured response was taken with 20–80 Hz under 3 dB/octave, 80–350 Hz under PSD, and 350 Hz to 2 kHz under 3 dB/octave. Each axis measurement was carried out for 5-min durations. The phase shifter was sustained within a safety limit of 6.47 at 0.04 g Hz PSD. The PSD value is higher in the -axis compared to the other axis and is shown in Fig. 31. Gee-level rms value can be found from Bandwidth [30] and the value is 48.79 g. Phase-shifter performance was observed after a vibration test and it worked satisfactory with no abnormal change in the behavior. Finally, Tables IV and V show performance comparison of the proposed 5-bit phase shifter with the present state-of-the-art CMOS and MEMS phase shifters. Reliability comparison between the two reported phase shifters is tabulated in Table VI. E. Failure Analysis The reliability operation of this reported phase shifter brings a few interesting facts. Here, one switch cycle is defined by only one actuation state (ON and OFF), but in the case of the phase shifter, one cycle counts 32 states of operation where fine and coarse bit switches were individually actuated 8 times per cycle, whereas the higher bit section actuated 16 times per cycle. Thus, the probability of failure is always higher at the higher bit section compared to other sections (fine and coarse bits) over the continuous reliability cycles. Thus, in this proposed 5-bit topology, a nonuniform switch actuation was found on the device throughout the reliability operation. Fig. 32 clearly shows switches and (total of four switches) are actuated 16 times compared to other switches on the phase shifter over one complete cycle. This nonuniform switch actuation is the primary reason for the device failure after tens of millions of cycles of operation and it will definitely not be the common case for an even-bit phase shifter such as 4 bit (with two SP4T) or 6 bit (with two single-pole eight-throw (SP8T) switches). The FOM for this kind of RF MEMS devices is defined by mean time to failure (MTTF) or mean time to the first failure. Here, in this reported 5-bit phase shifter, the lower limit of the reliability is defined by MTTF. The reason of MTTF of the proposed phase shifter is not one, there are multiple reasons of fail-
4010
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
TABLE IV COMPARISON OF STATE-OF-THE-ART PHASE SHIFTERS OVER THE LAST SEVEN YEARS
IL
Insertion Loss, RL
Return Loss TABLE V COMPARISON OF STATE-OF-THE-ART MEMS PHASE SHIFTERS OVER THE LAST SEVEN YEARS
TABLE VI RELIABILITY COMPARISON BETWEEN TWO REPORTED PHASE SHIFTERS AT 17 GHz AFTER 10 CYCLES
where is the cross-section area-dependent constant, is the conduction current density, is the Bolzmann constant, is the effective activation energy, and is the scaling factor (usually is set to 2). The source of the MTTF in the proposed 5-bit phase shifter is due to the affect of current crowding, which gives rise to the contact heating with larger at the operating frequency. Note that mean time to first failure of the device is limited by a factor of over the operation. F. Design Guidelines for a Reliable MEMS 5-bit Phase Shifter With an Alternative Topology
Fig. 32. Schematics of individual switch actuations from the 5-bit phase shifter over one complete cycle.
ures that were encountered during the reliability test, and primarily it is due to the effect from electromigration for contact type switches and it is defined by (14), as given in [10],
(14)
1) Reliability of the proposed 5-bit phase shifter is primarily limited by the number of switch counts per phase state. Moreover, nonuniform actuation of switch per cycle also leads to an early failure. To improve the 5-bit phase-shifter reliability further, a new topology is proposed and shown in Fig. 33. This topology contains two SP8T and two SP4T switches and connecting lines. This design requires only four switches to be actuated at a time to activate one phase state and it leads to a uniform actuation over the cycle. 2) The loss and matching of the phase shifter are entirely limited by the SP8T and SP4T switching networks. The
DEY AND KOUL: RELIABILITY ANALYSIS OF KU-BAND 5-bit PHASE SHIFTERS
Fig. 33. Schematics of a 5-bit MEMS phase shifter using two SP8T and two SP4T switches.
circular type configuration is very much useful for this kind with a 40 and 72 angle between two in-line series switches for the SP8T and SP4T switching network, respectively. 3) This configuration also permits switches to be placed closed together with more compactness without any fabrication difficulties. It leads to the reduction of an overall area of the device up to few micrometers or millimeters square. 4) Matching and loss of the overall phase shifter can be improved by reducing the parasitic inductive effect between the central junction and switches. 5) A few more design parameters like junction capacitance, spoke length, and inductive bends are to be placed at each CPW discontinuity to eliminate the higher order modes. 6) High resistive bias lines should be critically optimized and routed accordingly without affecting the overall device performance with signal leakage and added parasitic. 7) The connecting line length between fine and coarse bit sections needs to be optimized using full-wave simulation to nullify the effect of any off-path resonance over the band. 8) An inline MEMS switch is one of the most favorable options for better matching. In addition, a thicker cantilever beam can significantly improve the reliability of the overall device. 9) Power handling and temperature stability of the reported phase shifter can be drastically improved by proper selection of the contact material with a higher softening temperature. 10) Hermetic packaging of the device can significantly improve the reliability with lower contact contaminants. Note that this kind of topology is very much useful at lower microwave frequency ( 20 GHz). To use the proposed topology at a higher frequency, one needs to critically design the Sp T switching network to improve the performance. X. CONCLUSION In this work, design, development, and characterization of 5-bit MEMS phase shifters are presented using four SP4T and two SPDT switches. Two different stages of design, fabrication, and characterizations have been performed to improve the performance of the overall phase shifter. Finally, the fabricated 5-bit phase shifter demonstrates average return loss of better than 22 dB, average insertion loss of 2.65 dB, and phase error
4011
of 0.68 (at 17 GHz) over the band of interest. Reliability of the SPST and SP4T switches have been extensively investigated and presented with cold and hot switched conditions. Switches performed more than 10-M cycles with 0.1–1 W of RF power with cold and hot switched conditions. Furthermore, phase-shifter reliability measurements have been performed on the chip and within a low-cost module under different temperatures and power variations. Phase shifters have been demonstrated with more than 10-M cycles with 0.1–1 W of RF power. Finally, to the best of our knowledge, the proposed device demonstrates low loss, good matching, excellent phase accuracy, and good reliability performance over the entire Ku-band reported to date. Moreover, the area of the phase shifter is fairly comparable with the present state-of-the-art MEMS phase shifters. To the best of the authors’ knowledge, this is the first reported MEMS 5-bit phase shifter in the literature, which has undergone different reliability and vibration testing. In the future, the authors intend to do experimental justifications of the reported phase shifter within a thin-film packaging environment. ACKNOWLEDGMENT The authors are thankful to U. L. Rohde and A. K. Poddar for providing valuable input and suggestions throughout the development of this research. The authors are jointly working with U. L. Rodhe and A. K. Poddar on filing U.S. patent applications based on the outcome of this research. The authors are also thankful to the Synergy Microwave Corporation, Paterson, NJ, USA, for supporting the collaborative research project on the development of RF MEMS components and providing the measurement facility for carrying out joint research and development work. REFERENCES [1] B. R. Norvell, R. J. Hancock, J. K. Smith, M. L. Pugh, S. W. Theis, and J. Kviatkofsky, “Micro electro mechanical switch (MEMS) technology applied to electronically scanned arrays for spaced based radar,” in Proc. Aerosp. Conf., 1999, pp. 239–247. [2] S. K. Koul and B. Bhat, Microwave and Millimeter Wave Phase Shifter. Norwood, MA, USA: Artech House, 1991, vol. II. [3] D. Parker and D. Zimmermann, “Phased arrays—Part I: Theory and architectures,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 50, no. 3, pp. 678–687, Mar. 2002. [4] D. W. Kang, H. D. Lee, C. H. Kim, and S. Hong, “Ku-band MMIC phase shifter using a parallel resonator with 0.18- m CMOS technology,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 54, no. 1, pp. 294–301, Jan. 2006. [5] K. Kwang-Jin and G. M. Rebeiz, “0.13- m CMOS phase shifters for X-, Ku-, and K-band phased arrays,” IEEE J. Solid-State Circuits, vol. 42, no. 11, pp. 2535–2546, Nov. 2007. [6] B. Min and G. M. Rebeiz, “Single-ended and differential-band BiCMOS phased array front-ends,” IEEE J. Solid-State Circuits, vol. 43, no. 10, pp. 2239–2250, Oct. 2008. [7] K.-J. Koh and G. M. Rebeiz, “A 6–18 GHz 5-bit active phase shifter,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig., Anaheim, CA, USA, May 2010, pp. 792–795. [8] J. Y. Choi, M.-K. Cho, D. Baek, and J.-G. Kim, “A 5–20 GHz 5-bit true time delay circuit in 0.18 m CMOS technology,” J. Semicond. Technol. Sci., vol. 13, no. 3, pp. 193–197, Jun. 2013. [9] S. P. Sah, X. Yu, and D. Heo, “Design and analysis of a wideband 15–35 GHz quadrature phase-shifter with inductive loading,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn, vol. 68, no. 8, pp. 3024–3033, Aug. 2013. [10] S. Lucyszyn, Advanced RF MEMS. Cambridge, MA, USA: Cambridge Univ. Press, Aug. 2010. [11] A. Q. Liu, RF MEMS Switches and Integrated Switching Circuits. New York, NY, USA: Springer, 2010.
4012
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
[12] G.-L. Tan, R. Mihailovich, J. Hacker, J. DeNatale, and G. M. Rebeiz, “Low-loss 2- and 4-bit TTD MEMS phase shifters based on SP4T switches,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 51, no. 1, pp. 297–304, Jan. 2003. [13] Z. Jian, Y.-Y. Weil, C. Chen, Z. Yong, and L. Le, “A compact 5-bit switched-line digital MEMS phase shifter,” in IEEE Int. Nano/Micro Eng. Molecular Syst. Conf., Jan. 2006, pp. 623–626. [14] C. D. Nordquist, C. W. Dyck, G. M. Kraus, C. T. Sullivan, F. Austin, P. S. Finnegan, and M. H. Ballance, “Ku-band six-bit RF MEMS time delay network,” in IEEE Compound Semicond. Integr. Circuits Symp., Oct. 2008, pp. 1–4. [15] M. A. Morton and J. Papapolymerou, “A packaged MEMS-based 5-bit X-band high-pass/low-pass phase shifter,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 56, no. 9, pp. 2025–2031, Sep. 2008. [16] B. Pillans, L. Coryell, A. Malczewski, C. Moody, F. Morris, and A. Brown, “Advances in RF MEMS phase shifters from 15 GHz to 35 GHz,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig., Montreal, QC, Canada, Jun. 2012, pp. 1–3. [17] M. Unlu, S. Demir, and T. Akin, “A 15–40-GHz frequency reconfigurable RF MEMS phase shifter,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 61, no. 8, pp. 2397–2402, Aug. 2013. [18] S. Dey and S. K. Koul, “Design and development of a CPW-based 5-bit switched-line phase shifter using inline metal contact MEMS series switches for 17.25 GHz transmit/receive module application,” J. Micromech. Microeng., vol. 24, no. 1, Nov. 2013, 24 pp. [19] S. Dey and S. K. Koul, “Design, development and characterization of an X-band 5 bit DMTL phase shifter using an inline MEMS bridge and MAM capacitors,” J. Micromech. Microeng., vol. 24, no. 1, Jun. 2014, 15 pp. [20] G. M. Rebeiz, RF MEMS Theory, Design, and Technology. Hoboken, NJ, USA: Wiley, 2003. [21] R. N. Simons, Coplanar Waveguide Circuits, Components, and Systems. New York, NY, USA: Wiley, 2001. [22] S. K. Koul and S. Dey, “RF MEMS single-pole-multi-throw switching circuit,” in Micro and Smart Devices and System. New Delhi, India: Springer, 2014. [23] S. K. Koul and S. Dey, “RF MEMS true-time-delay phase shifter,” in Micro and Smart Devices and System. New Delhi, India: Springer, 2014. [24] S. Gong, H. Shen, and N. S. Barker, “A 60-GHz 2-bit switched-line phase shifter using SP4T RF-MEMS switches,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 59, no. 4, pp. 894–900, Apr. 2011. [25] R. Stefanini, M. Chatras, P. Blondy, and G. M. Rebeiz, “Miniature MEMS switches for RF applications,” J. Microelectromech. Syst., vol. 20, no. 6, pp. 1324–1335, Dec. 2013. [26] H. Zareie and G. M. Rebeiz, “Compact high-power SPST and SP4T RF MEMS metal-contact switches,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 61, no. 8, pp. 2397–2402, Aug. 2014. [27] C. D. Patel and G. M. Rebeiz, “A high-reliability high-linearity highpower RF MEMS metal-contact switch for DC–40-GHz applications,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 60, no. 10, pp. 3096–3112, Oct. 2012. [28] A. Q. Liu, W. Palei, M. Tang, and A. Alphones, “Single-pole-fourthrow switch using high-aspect-ratio lateral switches,” Electron. Lett., vol. 40, no. 18, pp. 1281–1282, Sep. 2008. [29] Z. Peng et al., “Impact of humidity on dielectric charging in RF MEMS capacitive switches,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 19, no. 5, pp. 299–301, May 2009. [30] A. L. Hartzell, M. G. da Silva, and H. R. Shea, MEMS Reliability. New York, NY, USA: Springer, 2011. [31] V. Mulloni, G. Resta, and B. Margesin, “Clear evidence of mechanical deformation in RF-MEMS switches during prolonged actuation,” J. Micromech. Microeng., vol. 24, no. 7, p. 9, May 2014.
Sukomal Dey (S’10) received the B.Tech degree in electronics and communication engineering from the West Bengal University of Technology, Kolkata, India, in 2006, the M.Tech degree (under the joint program in mechatronics engineering) from the Indian Institute of Engineering Science and Technology (IIEST), Shibpur, India, and the Central Electronics Engineering Research Institute (CEERI), Pilani, India, in 2009, and is currently working toward the Ph.D. degree at the Indian Institute of Technology Delhi, New Delhi, India. He is currently with the Centre for Applied Research in Electronics (CARE), Indian Institute of Technology Delhi. His research interests are RF microelectromechanical systems (RF-MEMS) devices and related tunable circuits for microwave and millimeter-wave applications. Shiban K. Koul (S’81–M’83–SM’91–F’10) received the B.E. degree in electrical engineering from the Regional Engineering College, Srinagar, India, in 1977, and the M.Tech and Ph.D. degrees in microwave engineering from the Indian Institute of Technology Delhi, New Delhi, India, in 1979 and 1983, respectively. He is the Dr. R. P. Shenoy Astra Microwave Chair Professor with the Centre for Applied Research in Electronics (CARE), Indian Institute of Technology Delhi, where he is involved in teaching and research activities. He is currently the Deputy Director (Strategy and Planning) of the Indian Institute of Technology Delhi. He is also the Chairman of M/S Astra Microwave Pvt. Ltd., a major private company involved in the development of RF and microwave systems in India. He has authored or coauthored 280 research papers, 7 books, and 3 book chapters. He has successfully completed 34 major sponsored projects, 52 consultancy projects, and 47 technology development projects. He holds 7 patents and 6 copyrights. His research interests include RF microelectromechanical systems (MEMS), high-frequency wireless communication, microwave engineering, microwave passive and active circuits, device modeling, millimeter-wave integrated circuit (IC) design, and reconfigurable microwave circuits including antennas. Dr. Koul is a Fellow of the Indian National Academy of Engineering (INAE) India and the Institution of Electronics and Telecommunication Engineers (IETE) India. He currently serves as an Administrative Committee (AdCom) member and a member of the IEEE Microwave Theory and Techniques Society (IEEE MTT-S)’s Microwave and Millimetre Wave Integrated Circuits (MTT-6) Technical Committee and RF MEMS (MTT-21) Technical Committee. He is a member of the India Initiative Team of IEEE MTT-S, the Membership Services regional co-coordinator Region-10, vice chair of the Sight Adhoc Committee IEEE MTT-S, and the IEEE MTT-S speaker bureau lecturer. He served as a Distinguished Microwave Lecturer of the IEEE MTT-S (2012–2014). He was a recipient of the Gold Medal of the Institution of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Calcutta (1977), the S. K. Mitra Research Award (1986) of the IETE for the best research paper, the Indian National Science Academy (INSA) Young Scientist Award (1986), the International Union of Radio Science (URSI) Young Scientist Award (1987), the top Invention Award (1991) of the National Research Development Council for his contributions to the indigenous development of ferrite phase shifter technology, the VASVIK Award (1994) for the development of Ka-band components and phase shifters, the Ram Lal Wadhwa Gold Medal (1995) of the Institution of Electronics and Communication Engineers (IETE), the Academic Excellence Award (1998) of the Indian Government for his pioneering contributions to phase control modules for Rajendra Radar, the Shri Om Prakash Bhasin Award (2009) in the field of electronics and information technology, the Teaching Excellence Award (2012) of the Indian Institute of Technology Delhi, the award for contributions made to the growth of smart material technology (2012) of the ISSS, Bangalore, India, the Vasvik Award (2012) for contributions made to the area of information, communication technology (ICT), the M. N. Saha Memorial Award (2013) of the IETE for the best application-oriented research paper, and the IEEE MTT-S Distinguished Educator Award (2014).
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
4013
Wideband Balanced Network with High Isolation Using Double-Sided Parallel-Strip Line Wenjie Feng, Member, IEEE, Chaoying Zhao, Wenquan Che, Senior Member, IEEE, and Quan Xue, Fellow, IEEE
Abstract—A new wideband balanced power dividing/combining network with high isolation is proposed in this paper. The differential/common mode equivalent circuits of the balanced network can be easily reduced based on the matrix transformation. Two doublesided parallel-strip line (DSPSL) 180 phase inverters loaded with four isolation resistors are used to realize high isolation for the power division output ports. A planar wideband balanced network with bandwidth 52.7% of (1.68–2.84 GHz, dB) for the differential mode and high isolation for the differential/common mode is designed and fabricated. The measured results show good agreement with the theoretical expectations. Index Terms—Wideband, balanced network, double-sided parallel-strip line (DSPSL), differential/common mode.
I. INTRODUCTION
RF
and microwave circuit and system is becoming a more complicated, more function space, balanced circuits with wideband common-mode rejection capability, and high immunity to the environmental noise are imperatively needed to suppress the electromagnetic mutual interference among the interconnection, and nodes of different dielectric layer circuits in communication system [1]. In the past few years, different balanced filters, balanced driven antennas, balanced amplifiers with high performance are illustrated in [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], [7], [8], [9], [10], [11], [12], [13], [14], [15], [16]. In addition, former in-phase and out-of-phase power dividing/combining networks were mainly focused on single-ended components [17]–[20]. Balanced power dividing/combining networks without single-ended networks are also highly required in balanced networks [1]. In [21], [22], two balanced networks with high isolation are introduced, however, the bandwidths of the differential mode power division is less than 30% ( dB). In our former works,
Manuscript received June 19, 2015; revised October 12, 2015; accepted October 23, 2015. Date of publication November 12, 2015; date of current version December 02, 2015. This work was supported by the 2012 Distinguished Young Scientist awarded by the National Natural Science Foundation Committee of China(61225001), Natural Science Foundation of China(61401206, 61571231) and Jiangsu Province(BK20140791), and the 2014 Zijin Intelligent Program of Nanjing University of Science and Technology. Wenjie Feng, Chaoying Zhao, Wenquan Che are with the Department of Communication Engineering, Nanjing University of Science and Technology, 210094 Nanjing, China (e-mail: [email protected], [email protected], [email protected]). Quan Xue is with the State Key Laboratory of Millimeter Waves, Department of Electronic Engineering, and CityU Shenzhen Research Institute, City University of Hong Kong, China (e-mail: [email protected]). Color versions of one or more of the figures in this paper are available online at http://ieeexplore.ieee.org. Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/TMTT.2015.2495357
two new wideband in/out-of-phase balanced networks with wideband common mode suppression are proposed in [23]. The main advantages of the two balanced networks are the wideband for the differential mode power division (bandwidth over 50%, dB), and wideband common mode suppression (bandwidth over 100%, dB). However, due to the fact that there are no isolation resistors for the two networks, the isolation of the differential/common mode power division cannot be deduced from the equations of the standard matrix [21], so the isolation results are not as good as the ideal mixed-mode -parameters. The double-sided parallel-strip line (DSPSL), as one kind of balanced transmission lines, is quite useful and convenient for the balanced microwave components designs. DSPSL has important advantages of easy realization of low and high characteristic impedance, simple circuit structures of wideband transitions [24], [25]. Using these advantages, some novel doublesided parallel-strip line (DSPSL) passive/active circuits are illustrated in [26], [27], [28]. In this paper, a new wideband balanced power dividing/combining network with high isolation and wideband power division for the differential mode is proposed, and the circuit is shown as Fig. 1. When the differential mode is excited in the balanced input Port 1 (Port ), an equal in-phase power division can be realized in the balanced output Ports 2, 3 (Ports 2 , 3 ); and when the common mode is excited in the balanced input Port 1 (Port 1 ), a bandstop transmission characteristic can be realized due to the two transmission lines for the balanced network. The circuit and structure of the balanced network is simulated with Ansoft Designer v3.0 and Ansoft HFSS v.11.0, and constructed on the dielectric substrate Rogers5880 with mm, and . II. SYNTHESIS DESIGN OF THE BALANCED POWER DIVIDING/COMBINING NETWORKS A. Mixed-Mode Scattering Matrix of Six-Port Balanced Network As discussed in [21], [22], [23], the mixed-mode scattering matrix of a six-port balanced power dividing/combining network can be defined as
0018-9480 © 2015 IEEE. Personal use is permitted, but republication/redistribution requires IEEE permission. See http://www.ieee.org/publications_standards/publications/rights/index.html for more information.
(1)
4014
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 1. Ideal transmission line circuit of the wideband balanced power dividing/ combining network.
and . For the wideband balanced power dividing/combining network, . As an ideal wideband balanced power dividing/combining network, the mixed-mode -parameters can be illustrated as
(2) of the sixTo meet the mixed-mode -parameters port balanced network, the following equations for circuit of Fig. 1 must be needed as
(3) (4) So, for the wideband balanced power dividing/combining network of Fig. 1, when the differential mode is excited from the Port 1 (Port 1 ), Ports 2, 3 (Ports 2 , 3 ) can be seen as an equal in-phase power divider; when the common mode is excited from the Port 1 (Port 1 ), stopband structures must be realized to Ports 2, 3 (Ports 2 , 3 ) for common mode suppression. Next, the analysis and design of the wideband balanced power dividing/combining network will be given. B. Wideband Balanced Power Dividing/Combining Network The equivalent circuit of the wideband balanced network is shown as Fig. 1, two improved wideband power dividers [27] with two 180 phase inverters are connected between Ports 1, 1 , and two transmission lines with characteristic impedance of and electrical length of ( at is the center
Fig. 2. (a) Differential mode circuit of the balanced network and (b) common mode circuit of the balanced network.
frequency of the network) are located in the center of Ports 1, 1 and Ports 2, 2 (Ports 3, 3 ), The characteristic impedances of the transmission lines at the input/output ports are . When the differential mode and common mode signals are excited from Ports 1, 1 in Fig. 1, a virtual short/open appears along the symmetric line of - , as shown in Figs. 2(a)-(b). For the differential mode circuit of Fig. 2(a), the two shorted stubs are all wide passband structures [23], and they can be seen as an ideal open circuit in the center frequency of the network. The input characteristic impedance for Ports 1, 2, and 3 can be given as [27]. For the equal power dividing condition, the design formulas can be summarized as
(5) Based on the relationships of (5), the bandwidth of the differential mode power division is mainly determined by the characteristic impedance of the shorted stubs , the simulated results of Fig. 2(a) versus different are shown in Figs. 3(a)-(c), by properly choose the characteristic impedance of the two shorted stubs , the bandwidth of differential mode power division is almost the same as the power divider as [27], and the bandwidth of the differential mode increases as increases (48.6% to 72.7% ( dB). Due to the factor of the passband for the shorted stub (parallel resonance circuit) is proportional to the susceptance slope parameter , when the factor increases ( decreases), the bandwidth for the passband will become narrower [23]. Moreover, when the signals flowing from Ports 2 to 3, due to the introduced 180 phase inverters, the two transmission paths have same magnitude, but 180 out-of-phase, and the 180 out-of-phase is frequency-independent, so wideband high isolation for Ports 2, 3 can be easily realized with less than dB (0–3.5 GHz) [27]. For the common mode circuit of Fig. 2(b), the two open stubs are bandstop structures [23], and it is very easy to realize common mode suppression of the differential mode passband. The simulated results of Fig. 2(b) versus different are shown in Figs. 4(a)-(b). Due to the two quarter-wavelength open stubs, the transmission poles located at produced by
FENG et al.: WIDEBAND BALANCED NETWORK WITH HIGH ISOLATION USING DOUBLE-SIDED PARALLEL-STRIP LINE
4015
Fig. 4. Simulated frequency responses of the common mode for the balanced versus , (b) network. (a) versus .
Based on the above theoretical analysis, the prototype of the proposed wideband balanced network structure with size of 86 mm 60 mm is shown in Figs. 5(a)-(b). The sections of the 180 phase inverters and double-sided parallel-strip lines are simulated using Ansoft HFSS v.11.0. For the 180 phase inverters, the upper and lower strip lines are connected by two vertical metical via holes. Due to the current signals interchange and reversed between the two the upper and bottom balance transmission lines, it provides 180 phase shift with frequency-independent. The final parameters for the circuit of Fig. 1 and structure Fig. 5 are Fig. 3. Simulated frequency responses of the differential mode for the balanced network. (a) N-without , Y- with (b) versus , (c) versus .
the quarter-wavelength open stubs can be realized to improve the common mode suppression, and high isolation can be also realized for Ports 2, 3 when the common mode is excited from Port 1 ( dB, 0–3 GHz).
mm, mm, mm, mm, mm, mm, mm, mm, mm, mm, mm, mm, mm, mm, mm, and the impedance for each transmission path is calculated from the formula in [29]. The simulated results of structures of the wideband balanced network are shown in Fig. 6, the of the
4016
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 5. Geometry of wideband balanced network (a) Top view and (b) 3-D view.
differential mode is greater than dB from 1.52 to 2.76 GHz (bandwidth 56.3%, GHz) with less than dB (1.68–2.46 GHz), the isolation is less than dB from 0 to 2.8 GHz; the of the common mode is less than dB from 1.78 to 2.6 GHz , and the is less than dB from 0 to 3.2 GHz; in addition, the and between the differential mode and common mode conversion are less than dB and dB from 0 to 7.5 GHz , respectively. III. EXPERIMENT AND RESULTS DISSCUSION The photograph of the proposed wideband balanced network is shown in Fig. 7. For the wideband DSPSL balanced network, the differential/common mode are excited from Ports 1, 1 , the upper metal layer can be seen the signals input ports, and bottom layer can be seen as the ground of the DSPSLs, and it will not affect the balanced signals transmit [28]. In addition, some transitions can be used to realize the DSPSLs to microstrip line, and the SMA connectors can be connected to microstrip line for measurement [27]. For comparison, the measured -parameters of the wideband balanced network are also illustrated in Fig. 6. Good agreements can be observed between the simulation and the experiments. As shown in Figs. 6(a)-(f), for the differential mode, the is greater than dB from 1.68 to 2.84 GHz (bandwidth 52.7%) with less than dB
Fig. 6. Measured and simulated results of the wideband balanced network. (a) , (b) , (c) , (d) , , and (f) (S-Simulation, (e) M-Measurement).
(1.82–2.67 GHz), the isolation is less than 0 to 5 GHz ; for the common mode, the
dB from is
FENG et al.: WIDEBAND BALANCED NETWORK WITH HIGH ISOLATION USING DOUBLE-SIDED PARALLEL-STRIP LINE
4017
tors. Compared with former balanced networks [21], [22], the proposed balanced network has wider suppression bandwidth between differential mode and common mode conversion, and simpler design theory. The theoretical and measured results agree well with each other and show good in-band performances. ACKNOWLEDGMENT
Fig. 7. Photograph of the proposed wideband balanced network. (a) Top view and (b) bottom view. TABLE I COMPARISONS OF MEASURED RESULTS FOR SOME BALANCED NETWORKS
The authors would like to thank Dr. B. Xia, Shanghai Jiao Tong University, Shanghai, China and Dr. F. Lin, Michigan State University, Michigan, USA, for their valuable discussions and help during this work. In addition, the authors would like to thank the editors and reviewers of this paper for their valuable comments and suggestions, which have greatly improved the quality of this paper. REFERENCES
less than dB from 1.73 to 2.65 GHz , and the isolation is less than dB from 0 to 5 GHz ; in addition, the and between the differential mode and common mode conversion are less than dB from 0 to 7.6 GHz and dB from 0 to 7.2 GHz , respectively. For the purpose of comparisons, Table I illustrates the measured results for some wideband balanced networks. Compared with the other balanced networks [21], [22], the fractional bandwidth of the differential mode power division is over 50% ( dB), and the bandwidth of the common mode suppression of the network is a little narrow. While the isolation of the differential/common mode suppression can be extended to 230% ( dB), the suppression bandwidths between differential mode and common mode conversion are greater than 345% , 340% ( dB), respectively. The suppression bandwidths between differential mode and common mode conversion for the proposed wideband balanced network have been further improved. In addition, unequal power division (less than 1:12 ratio) wideband balanced network can be also realized by using the offset double-sided parallel-strip lines [27]. IV. CONCLUSION In this paper, a new wideband balanced power dividing/combining network with high isolation is proposed in this paper. Wideband power division for the differential mode with high isolation can be obtained by two double-sided parallel-strip line (DSPSL) 180 phase inverters loaded with four isolation resis-
[1] W. R. Eisenstant, B. Stengel, and B. M. Thompson, Microwave Differential Circuit Design Using Mixed-Mode S-Parameters. Boston, MA: Artech House, 2006. [2] Y. S. Lin and C. H. Chen, “Novel balanced microstrip coupled-line bandpass filters,” in Proc. URSI Int. Electromagn. Theory Symp., 2004, pp. 567–569. [3] C. H. Wu, C. H. Wang, and C. H. Chen, “Novel balanced coupled-line bandpass filters with common-mode noise suppression,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 55, no. 2, pp. 287–295, Feb. 2007. [4] J. Shi and Q. Xue, “Dual-band and wide-stopband single-band balanced bandpass filters with high selectivity and common-mode suppression,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 58, no. 8, pp. 2204–2212, Aug. 2010. [5] T. B. Lim and L. Zhu, “A differential-mode wideband bandpass filter on microstrip line for UWB application,” IEEE Microw. Compon. Lett., vol. 19, no. 10, pp. 632–634, Oct. 2009. [6] X. H. Wang, Q. Xue, and W. W. Choi, “A novel ultra-wideband differential filter based on double-sided parallel-strip line,” IEEE Microw. Compon. Lett., vol. 20, no. 8, pp. 471–473, Oct. 2010. [7] W. J. Feng and W. Q. Che, “Novel wideband differential bandpass filter based on T-shaped structure,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 60, no. 6, pp. 1560–1568, June 2012. [8] A. M. Abbosh, “Ultra-wideband balanced bandpass filter,” IEEE Microw. Compon Lett., vol. 21, no. 9, pp. 480–482, Sept. 2011. [9] W. J. Feng, W. Q. Che, Y. L. Ma, and Q. Xue, “Compact wideband differential bandpass filter using half-wavelength ring resonator,” IEEE Microw. Compon. Lett., vol. 23, no. 2, pp. 81–83, Feb. 2013. [10] W. J. Feng, W. Q. Che, and Q. Xue, “Balanced filters with wideband common mode suppression using dual-mode ring resonators,” IEEE Trans. Circuits Syst. I: Reg. Papers, vol. 62, no. 6, pp. 1499–1507, June 2015. [11] R. Meys and F. Janssens, “Measuring the impedance of balanced antennas by an S-parameter method,” IEEE Antennas Propag. Mag., vol. 40, no. 6, pp. 65–68, Dec. 1998. [12] W. J. Feng, W. Q. Che, and Q. Xue, “The proper balance: Overview of microstrip wideband balanced circuits with wideband common mode suppression,” IEEE Microw. Mag., vol. 16, no. 5, pp. 55–68, June 2015. [13] H. Y. Jin, K.-S. Chin, W. Q. Che, C.-C. Chang, H.-J. Li, and Q. Xue, “Differential-fed patch antenna arrays with low cross polarization and wide bandwidths,” IEEE Antennas Wireless Propag. Lett., vol. 13, pp. 1069–1072, 2014. [14] J.-D. Jin and S. S. H. Hsu, “A 0.18-m CMOS balanced amplifier for 24-GHz applications,” IEEE J. Solid-State Circuits, vol. 43, no. 2, pp. 440–445, Feb. 2008. [15] S. A. Maas, “Novel single device balanced resistive HEMT mixers,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 43, no. 12, pp. 2863–2867, Dec. 1995. [16] P.-Y. Chiang, C.-W. Su, S.-Y. Luo, R. Hu, and C.-F. Jou, “Wide-IF band CMOS mixer design,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 58, no. 4, pp. 831–840, Apr. 2010. [17] T. Yang, J. X. Chen, and Q. Xue, “Three-way out-of-phase power divider,” Electron. Lett., vol. 44, no. 7, pp. 198–199, Apr. 2008. [18] J. N. Hui, W. Feng, and W. Che, “Balun bandpass filter based on multilayer substrate integrated waveguide power divider,” Electron. Lett., vol. 48, no. 10, pp. 571–572, May 2012.
4018
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
[19] Y. Wu, Y. Liu, and Q. Xue, “An analytical approach for a novel coupled- line dual-band Wilkinson power divider,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 59, no. 2, pp. 286–294, Feb. 2011. [20] S. Z. Ibrahim, A. Abbosh, and M. Bialkowski, “Design of wideband six-port network formed by in-phase and quadrature Wilkinson dividers,” IET Microw. Antennas Propag., vol. 6, no. 11, pp. 1215–1220, June 2012. [21] B. Xia, L.-S. Wu, and J. F. Mao, “A new balanced-to-balanced power divider/combiner,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 60, no. 9, pp. 287–295, Sept. 2012. [22] L. S. Wu, B. Xia, and J. F. Mao, “A half-mode substrate integrated waveguide ring for two-way power division of balanced circuit,” IEEE Microw. Compon. Lett., vol. 22, no. 7, pp. 333–335, July 2012. [23] W. J. Feng, H. T. Zhu, W. Q. Che, and Q. Xue, “Wideband in-phase and out-of-phase balanced power divider and combiner networks,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 62, no. 5, pp. 1192–1202, May 2014. [24] J. X. Chen, C. H. K. Chin, and Q. Xue, “Double-sided parallel-strip line with an inserted conductor plane and its applications,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 55, no. 9, pp. 1899–1904, Sept. 2007. [25] M. E. Bialkowski, A. M. Abbosh, and N. Seman, “Compact microwave six-port vector volmeters for ultra-wideband appications,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 55, no. 10, pp. 2216–2223, Oct. 2007. [26] J. Shi, J. X. Chen, and Q. Xue, “A differential voltage-controlled integrated antenna oscillator based on doubled-sided parallel-strip line,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 56, no. 10, pp. 2207–2212, Oct. 2008. [27] L. Chiu and Q. Xue, “A parallel-strip ring power divider with high isolation and arbitrary power-dividing ratio,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 55, no. 11, pp. 2419–2426, Nov. 2007. [28] W. J. Feng, Q. Xue, and W. Q. Che, “Compact planar magic-T based on the double-sided parallel-strip line and the slotline coupling,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 58, no. 11, pp. 2915–2923, Nov. 2010. [29] W. Q. Che, L. M. Gu, and Y. L. Chow, “Formula derivation and verification of characteristic impedance for offset double-sided parallel strip line (DSPSL),” IEEE Microw. Compon. Lett., vol. 20, no. 6, pp. 304–306, June 2010.
Wenjie Feng (M'13) was born in Shangqiu, Henan Province, China, in 1985. He received the B.Sc. degree from the First Aeronautic College of the Airforce, Xinyang, China, in 2008, and the M.Sc. and Ph.D. degrees from the Nanjing University of Science and Technology (NUST), Nanjing, China in 2010 and 2013, respectively. From November 2009 to February 2010 and March 2013 to September 2013, he was a Research Assistant with the City University of Hong Kong. From October 2010 to March 2011, he was an exchange student with the Institute of High-Frequency Engineering, Technische Universität München, Munich, Germany. He is currently a teacher with the Nanjing University of Science and Technology, Nanjing, China. He has authored or coauthored over 90 internationally referred journal and conference papers. His research interests include ultra-wideband (UWB) circuits and technologies, substrate integrated components and systems, planar microstrip filters and power dividers, and LTCC circuits. Dr. Feng is a reviewer for over 10 internationally referred journal and conferences, including three IEEE Transactions and Letters.
Chaoying Zhao was born in Wuhu, Anhui Province, China, in 1992. She received the B.E. degree from the Shandong University, Weihai, China, in 2014. From October 2014, she went to Nanjing University of Science and Technology (NUST), Nanjing, China, for further study as a postgraduate. Her research interests include ultra-wideband (UWB) circuits and technologies, power dividers and planar microstrip filters.
Wenquan Che (M'01-SM'11) received the B.Sc. degree from the East China Institute of Science and Technology, Nanjing, China, in 1990, the M.Sc. degree from the Nanjing University of Science and Technology (NUST), Nanjing, China, in 1995, and the Ph.D. degree from the City University of Hong Kong (CITYU), Kowloon, Hong Kong, in 2003. In 1999, she was a Research Assistant with the City University of Hong Kong. From March 2002 to September 2002, she was a Visiting Scholar with the Polytechnique de Montréal, Montréal, QC, Canada. She is currently a Professor with the Nanjing University of Science and Technology, Nanjing, China. From 2007 to 2008, she conducted academic research with the Institute of High Frequency Technology, Technische Universität München. During the summers of 2005–2006 and 2009–2012, she was with the City University of Hong Kong, as Research Fellow and Visiting Professor. She has authored or coauthored over 110 internationally referred journal papers and over 60 international conference papers. She has been a reviewer for IET Microwaves, Antennas & Propagation. Her research interests include electromagnetic computation, planar/coplanar circuits and subsystems in RF/microwave frequency, microwave monolithic integrated circuits (MMICs), and medical application of microwave technology. Dr. Che is a reviewer for the IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON ANTENNAS AND PROPAGATION, IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS, and IEEE MICROWAVE AND WIRELESS COMPONENTS LETTERS. She was the recipient of the 2007 Humboldt Research Fellowship presented by the Alexander von Humboldt Foundation of Germany, the 5th China Young Female Scientists Award in 2008 and the recipient of Distinguished Young Scientist awarded by the National Natural Science Foundation Committee (NSFC) of China in 2012.
Quan Xue (M'02-SM'04-F'11) received the B.S., M.S., and Ph.D. degrees in electronic engineering from the University of Electronic Science and Technology of China (UESTC), Chengdu, China, in 1988, 1990, and 1993, respectively. In 1993, he joined UESTC, as a Lecturer and became a Professor in 1997. From October 1997 to October 1998, he was a Research Associate and then a Research Fellow with the Chinese University of Hong Kong. In 1999, he joined the City University of Hong Kong, where he is currently a Professor with the Department of Electronic Engineering. He also serves the City University of Hong Kong as the Associate Vice President (Innovation Advancement and China Office), the Deputy Director of the Shenzhen Research Institute, and the Deputy Director of the State Key Lab of Millimeter Waves (Hong Kong). He has authored or coauthored over 200 internationally referred journal papers and over 80 international conference papers. He is the Editor of the International Journal of Antennas and Propagation. His research interests include microwave passive components, active components, antenna, microwave monolithic integrated circuits (MMICs), RF integrated circuits (RFICs), etc. Dr. Xue is a member of the IEEE Microwave Theory and Techniques Society (IEEE MTT-S) Administrative Committee (AdCom). He is an associate editor for the IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES and an associate editor for the IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS.
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
4019
Expedited Geometry Scaling of Compact Microwave Passives by Means of Inverse Surrogate Modeling Slawomir Koziel, Senior Member, IEEE, and Adrian Bekasiewicz
Abstract—In this paper, the problem of geometry scaling of compact microwave structures is investigated. As opposed to conventional structures [i.e., constructed using uniform transmission lines (TLs)], re-design of miniaturized circuits (e.g., implemented with artificial TLs) for different operating frequencies is far from being straightforward due to considerable cross-couplings between the circuit components. Here, we develop a simple and computationally efficient methodology for dimension scaling of the compact circuits. The proposed approach utilizes an equivalent circuit representation to identify a fast inverse model that determines the relationship between the geometry parameters of the structure at hand and its operating frequency. Upon suitable correction, the inverse model is applied to find dimensions of the scaled design at the highfidelity (electromagnetic (EM) simulation) model level. Owing to reasonable correlations between the low- and high-fidelity models, the circuit geometry scaled to a requested operating frequency can be found using just a single EM simulation of the structure, despite possible absolute discrepancies between the models. The proposed methodology is demonstrated using two exemplary compact couplers scaled in wide ranges from 0.5 to 2 GHz and from 0.5 to 1.8 GHz, respectively. The numerical results are supported by physical measurements of the fabricated coupler prototypes. Index Terms—Circuit scalability, compact microwave circuits, geometry scaling, inverse modeling, miniaturized couplers, simulation-driven design, surrogate modeling.
I. INTRODUCTION
M
INIATURIZED microwave passive components such as couplers [1]–[4], impedance transformers [5], and power dividers [6] play an important role in modern wireless communication systems [7]–[9]. A number of miniaturization strategies have been proposed over the years, the majority of which rely on replacing the uniform transmission lines (TLs) by alternative topologies (most commonly T-shaped [8] [10] or -shaped [5], [8]) that exhibit similar behavior (in terms
Manuscript received March 20, 2015; revised July 13, 2015; accepted October 10, 2015. Date of publication October 26, 2015; date of current version December 02, 2015. This work was supported in part by the Icelandic Centre for Research (RANNIS) under Grant 130450051 and in part by the National Science Centre of Poland under Grant 2014/15/B/ST7/04683. S. Koziel is with the Faculty of Electronics, Telecommunications and Informatics, Gdansk University of Technology, 80-233 Gdansk, Poland, and also with the School of Science and Engineering, Reykjavik University, IS-101 Reykjavik, Iceland (e-mail: [email protected]). A. Bekasiewicz is with the Faculty of Electronics, Telecommunications and Informatics, Gdansk University of Technology, 80-233 Gdansk, Poland, and also with the School of Science and Engineering, Reykjavik University, IS-101 Reykjavik, Iceland (e-mail: [email protected]). Color versions of one or more of the figures in this paper are available online at http://ieeexplore.ieee.org. Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/TMTT.2015.2490662
of their complex scattering parameters), but with a considerably reduced size. The resulting structures are characterized by highly compressed layouts [4], [11], [12]. Their design is a very challenging task. On one hand, the stringent requirements concerning electrical performance parameters have to be satisfied together with maintaining the small size of the structure. On the other hand, densely packed layouts of the compact circuits exhibit significant electromagnetic (EM) cross-couplings between various building blocks of the structure (such as the composite cells [4], [13], [14]). These couplings cannot be adequately represented by equivalent circuit models traditionally utilized in the design of the microwave passives [15]. Consequently, applicability of such models for compact circuit design is very limited [15]. Other design issues that also arise from complexity of the circuit layout include the increased number of geometry parameters to be adjusted and complex (often counter-intuitive) relations between the circuit dimensions and its responses. Accurate performance evaluation requires high-fidelity EM analysis, which is computationally expensive. This poses additional problems, especially from the point of view of automated design optimization through adjustment of geometry parameters of the structure. In particular, the use of conventional numerical optimization algorithms is often computationally prohibitive [16], whereas hands-on methods such as repetitive parameter sweeps are laborious and unable to yield truly optimum designs. Design speedup can be obtained by using, for example, surrogate-based optimization (SBO) techniques (see, e.g., [16] and [17]), where direct optimization of the high-fidelity EM-simulation model is replaced by iterative construction and re-optimization of a cheaper representation of the structure (the so-called surrogate model). Recently reported results indicate that successful compact circuit design can be realized using SBO methods such as space mapping [18], multi-fidelity optimization [19], or SBO methods enhanced by local [15] or global response surface approximation models [20]. Due to the complex geometries of miniaturized passives as well as related issued mentioned above, dimension scaling when re-designing the circuit from one operating frequency to another is far from trivial [21]–[24]. At the same time, it is highly desirable because it considerably simplifies the design process by allowing the designer to reuse the results obtained for a given reference frequency of operation. In this paper, we propose a simple, yet computationally efficient procedure for dimension scaling of compact passive components. Our methodology exploits an inverse nonlinear regression model that determines relationships between the dimensions of the circuit at hand for various operating frequencies.
0018-9480 © 2015 IEEE. Personal use is permitted, but republication/redistribution requires IEEE permission. See http://www.ieee.org/publications_standards/publications/rights/index.html for more information.
4020
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
The inverse model is identified based on the scaled designs obtained at the level of a fast equivalent circuit model, and subsequently enhanced to ensure sufficient alignment with the high-fidelity EM model of the structure. Due to reasonably good correlations between the equivalent circuit and the EM model, application of the inverse surrogate leads to acceptable results even though the absolute differences between the models are considerable. The residual discrepancies are accounted for by a one-step correction procedure. The proposed technique is verified using two examples of compact coupler structures. The numerical results are experimentally validated through physical measurements of the fabricated coupler prototypes. II. DIMENSION SCALING OF COMPACT CIRCUITS: INVERSE SURROGATE MODELING In this section, we formulate the geometry scaling problem and outline the proposed scaling methodology that exploits an inverse surrogate modeling procedure. We also discuss the issue of the design uniqueness given several objectives to be simultaneously fulfilled in the design process.
Fig. 1. Scaling of compact microwave circuits. (a) Responses of a miniaturized GHz. (b) Response of coupler [19] at a reference operating frequency GHz. For scaling purposes, a scaled circuit at the operating frequency the definition of a “good” response should be as unique as possible, which may require some arbitrary choices given multiple specifications.
A. Problem Formulation We will denote by a vector of geometry parameters of a compact microwave structure of interest. We also denote by a corresponding response vector(s) of a high-fidelity EM simulation model of the circuit. Typically, the response is represented by complex -parameters versus frequency. It is assumed that the structure is designed for a certain operating frequency so that given performance specifications are met for this frequency. The design for the frequency will be referred to as a reference design. The task is to scale the structure to a different operating frequency , i.e., to find the dimensions so that the design specifications corresponding to that frequency are met as well. We will use the notation to denote the dimensions of a “good” design at the operating frequency . Thus, the problem can be formulated as follows: given , find for frequencies within a certain range around . It should be emphasized that—contrary to conventional circuits—constructed using TLs—scaling of miniaturized designs (e.g., those implemented using slow-wave resonant structures, etc. [22]) is far from trivial because of nonlinear relations between geometry and resonant frequencies of their building blocks [21]. Clearly, from a practical point of view, it would be desirable to realize the scaling process at a possibly low computational cost.
• equal power split, , at the operating frequency ; • minimization of matching and isolation at ; • maintaining minimum of and at ; • increasing 20-dB bandwidth (i.e., the range of frequencies for which both and are below 20 dB); • making the 20-dB bandwidth symmetric with respect to . Any practical design is a tradeoff between these objectives. Consequently, there are various sets of dimensions that correspond to an acceptable design for any given . From the point of view of the circuit scaling, it is important to reduce the aforementioned nonuniqueness, which can be achieved by a priori preference articulation for the design objectives. For the sake of example, the following set of specifications is used here: • equal power split, i.e., at frequency ; • minimization of and at . Moreover, only the second objective is handled directly (which also ensures that the and minima of the optimum design are at ), whereas the first one is enforced by an equality constraint implemented during the optimization procedure. As shown in Fig. 2, this way of enforcing uniqueness of the optimum designs works well, as shown using the example compact coupler of Section III-B and its optimized equivalent circuit models.
B. Uniqueness of a “Good” Design An important issue of the circuit scaling that has to be addressed is a definition of a “good” design, which should be as unique as possible in order to reduce the uncertainty of the inverse models utilized in the scaling process as formulated in Section II-C. Fig. 1 shows the responses of a compact microwave coupler structure at a certain reference operating frequency and upon scaling to another frequency . Normally, there are several design specifications to be satisfied for the coupler structures, i.e.,
C. Inverse Models for Circuit Scaling The foundation of the proposed scaling procedure is an inverse model of the circuit of interest, i.e., a model of its geometry parameters as a function of frequency, , constructed—for the sake of computational efficiency—at the level of equivalent circuit of the compact structure of interest. The model has an explicit analytical form (1)
KOZIEL AND BEKASIEWICZ: EXPEDITED GEOMETRY SCALING OF COMPACT MICROWAVE PASSIVES
4021
Fig. 3. Extraction of the inverse model . The training data comes from the optimal designs obtained for the equivalent circuit model at the operating , covering the required frequency range of the frequencies , structure scaling. The inverse model parameters are obtained by solving (2).
Fig. 2. Sequence of the equivalent circuit model responses of the compact coupler of Section III-B, redesigned for the operating frequencies from 0.5 to 1.875 GHz with a 125-MHz step. It can be observed that the overall shape of the responses is very similar (note good alignment of the matching and isolation responses and their centering around the operating frequency, as well as equal power split at ) for all operating frequencies as it is enforced by the appropriate objective handling (cf. Section II-B). The operating frequencies are , , , and are marked marked with vertical lines, whereas using (—), (– –), ( ), and (– –), respectively.
where is a model of the th independent geometry parameter with being the model coefficients. is the aggregated coefficient vector for the entire model. The specific analytical form of is decided based on visual inspection of the training data gathered, as described below. The model is obtained as follows. 1) Find the optimum designs of the structure for a set of operating frequencies , , by optimizing its equivalent circuit model. 2) Find, for , the inverse model coefficients by solving nonlinear regression problems (curve fitting), (2) Fig. 3 illustrates the concept of the inverse modeling. Note that directly returns the values of geometry parameters for the structure scaled to the given operating frequency . On the other hand, one should remember that the inverse model (1) is operating at the equivalent circuit model level. The next section shows how it can be used to implement scaling at the high-fidelity EM model level. It should also be noticed that the optimized equivalent circuit model design are only the approximations of the “ideal” geometry parameter values corresponding to any given operating fre-
quency. The actual values obtained by model optimization normally differ from these “ideal” values for various reasons such as the optimization process being not perfect, as well as certain ambiguity concerning the definition of the good design (which has been removed—but only to some extent—by the measures described in Section II-B). This is indicated in Fig. 3 where the sequence of the optimized designs does not follow any smooth curve, but contain some “numerical noise.” Given the above, it is therefore important that the analytical form of the inverse model is relatively simple (i.e., contains just a few degrees of freedom), otherwise, it would not model the actual relationship between the operating frequency and the optimal circuit dimension, but rather the aforementioned numerical “noise.” D. Scaling Algorithm In order to apply the inverse model for scaling of the structure at the high-fidelity (EM simulation) level, one needs to implement suitable correction that accounts for the misalignment between the low- (equivalent circuit) and the high-fidelity (EM) model. Let and denote the optimum designs of the low- and high-fidelity model, respectively, at the reference operating frequency . The high-fidelity model scaling is then defined as follows: (3) The correction term in brackets is used to shift the inverse model so that we have . The model (3) assumes that the correlation between the low- and high-fidelity models is reasonably good. In practice, the actual operating frequency of the design may be slightly different from and equal to ( may be positive or negative). In other words, is a frequency scaling error that normally results from a nonperfect inverse model. The latter comes from the fluctuations of the training data for inverse model construction due to imperfect optimization of the equivalent circuit model or certain degree of nonuniqueness of the optimum design, as explained in Section II-B. In order to accommodate this, the following correction should be made: (4) More specifically, given the scaling error of , the corrected design should be obtained by evaluating the inverse
4022
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 4. Layout of the folded RRC [19].
model (3) at the operating frequency to compensate for . It should be emphasized that the above correction is optional because, in many cases, there is no need to execute it, specifically, when the quality of the design obtained directly from the inverse model is sufficiently good. The computational cost of scaling the structure to an arbitrary operating frequency starting from the reference design at is just one evaluation of the high-fidelity model [including the correction (4)].
Fig. 5. Responses of the low- (gray lines) and high-fidelity (black lines) RRC GHz). model at the reference design (operating frequency
III. VERIFICATION EXAMPLES The geometry scaling procedure formulated in Section II is demonstrated here using two examples of miniaturized coupler structures. In the case of the first coupler, the design is scaled for the operating frequencies varying from 0.5 to 2 GHz with the reference design corresponding to 1.5 GHz. For the second case, the scaling is performed within the 0.5–1.8-GHz band (the reference design at 1 GHz). A. Miniaturized Folded Rat-Race Coupler Our first example is a folded rat-race coupler (RRC) shown in Fig. 4. Miniaturization of the structure is achieved by folding each 70.7- section of a conventional design. The circuit is implemented on Taconic RF-35 dielectric substrate ( , mm, ). We assume 50- port impedance and 1.5-GHz operating frequency for the prototype design. Designable parameters are with , fixed (all dimensions in millimeters). The low-fidelity (circuit) representation of a coupler is implemented in Agilent ADS. The high-fidelity model of a structure is constructed in CST Microwave Studio ( 210 000 mesh cells, simulation time 20 min). The objective is to scale the structure for operating frequencies from 0.5 to 2 GHz. The reference design corresponds to the operating frequency GHz. The inverse model has been extracted using 13 optimum designs obtained for operating frequencies from 0.5 to 2 GHz with a 125-MHz step. The design corresponds to . Fig. 5 shows the discrepancies between the low- and high-fidelity model at . One can observe that these discrepancies are visible, but not very significant, which is because a relatively simple topology of the coupler. The analytical form of the inverse model was assumed to be , where are model parameters. Fig. 6 shows the dimensions of the above-mentioned 13 designs, as well as the plots of the extracted inverse model. It should be noticed that the fluctuations of the “training” designs around the extracted inverse model curves are minor, which not only indicates a very good correlation between the
Fig. 6. Dimensions of the 13 optimum designs of the equivalent circuit coupler and the extracted inverse model (—). model
equivalent circuit and the EM model, but also decent uniqueness of the optimum circuit model designs. One such fluctuation can be observed in Fig. 6 for variable (however, in this case, the relative value of the fluctuation is low: note a small range of variability of , from 0.87 to 0.89). For the sake of verification, the coupler dimensions were scaled for the following six operating frequencies: 0.5, 0.7, 1, 1.2, 1.7, and 2.0 GHz. The high-fidelity model responses of the scaled structure are shown in Fig. 7, indicating that the proposed procedure works correctly. As a matter of fact, the correction step (4) was only necessary for the operating frequency of 1.7 GHz (correction by 50 MHz). B. Compact RRC Consider a compact equal-split RRC composed of two vertical and four horizontal slow-wave resonant structures [25] shown in Fig. 8. The RRC is implemented on a Taconic RF-35 dielectric substrate ( mm, , ); design variables are , whereas dimension is set constant to ensure 50- input impedance. Moreover, variables , , and . All dimensions are in millimeters. The low-fidelity model is prepared in an Agilent ADS circuit simulator, while the high-fidelity one is designed in
KOZIEL AND BEKASIEWICZ: EXPEDITED GEOMETRY SCALING OF COMPACT MICROWAVE PASSIVES
4023
Fig. 9. Responses of the low- (gray lines) and high-fidelity (black lines) RRC GHz). model at the reference design (operating frequency
Fig. 7. Responses of the compact RRC coupler scaled using the proposed methodology for the following operating frequencies of: (a) 0.5 GHz, , (b) 0.7 GHz, (c) 1.0 GHz, (d) 1.2 GHz, (e) 1.7 GHz, and (f) 2.0 GHz. , , and are marked using (—), (– –), ( ), and (– –), respectively.
Fig. 10. Dimensions of the 13 optimum designs of the equivalent circuit couand the extracted inverse model (—). pler model
Fig. 8. Microstrip RRC constructed of slow-wave resonant structures—geometry [25].
CST Microwave Studio and simulated using its frequency-domain solver with 800 000 mesh cells. Its simulation time is 75 min. The objective is to scale the structure for certain frequencies from 0.5 to 1.8 GHz. The reference design corresponds to the operating frequency GHz. The inverse model has been extracted using 13 optimum designs obtained for operating frequencies from 0.5 to 2 GHz with a 125-MHz step. The design corresponds to . Fig. 9 shows the discrepancies between the low- and high-fidelity model at . They are considerable compared to those for the previous example. One can observe a large-frequency shift of about 150 MHz, but also differences in the levels, particularly for .
Fig. 10 shows the plots of the extracted inverse model. The analytical form of the model is the same as for the first example. It should be noted that relations between operating frequency and coupler geometry are highly nonlinear. Also, one can observe fluctuations around the extracted inverse model curves, which are particularly large for variables, , , and . For the sake of verification, the coupler dimensions were scaled for the following six frequencies: 0.5, 0.7, 1.2, 1.5, 1.7, and 1.8 GHz. The high-fidelity model responses of the scaled structure are shown in Fig. 11. It should be noted that the agreement between the required and the actual operating frequencies of the scaled coupler designs is good. All the designs exhibit equal power split although there is a small frequency shift in the minima of and for the designs corresponding to the operating frequencies of 0.5 and 0.7 GHz. IV. EXPERIMENTAL VERIFICATION The inverse surrogate modeling procedure presented in this work has been experimentally validated by fabrication and
4024
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 11. Responses of the compact RRC coupler scaled using the proposed methodology, for the following operating frequencies: (a) 0.5 GHz, (b) 0.7 GHz, (c) 1.2 GHz, (d) 1.5 GHz, (e) 1.7 GHz, and (f) 1.8 GHz. Scattering parameters , , , and are marked using (—), (– –), , and (– –), respectively.
Fig. 12. Photographs of the fabricated prototypes of the compact RRC of Fig. 4, corresponding to the scaled designs as presented in Fig. 7.
TABLE I DIMENSIONS OF SELECTED FOLDED RRC DESIGNS
TABLE II DIMENSIONS OF SELECTED COMPACT RRC DESIGNS
measurements of the scaled coupler structures of Section III. The detailed dimensions of the designs have been collected in Tables I and II. The photographs of the fabricated folded RRC (four out of six scaled designs were fabricated) and compact RRC circuits are shown in Figs. 12 and 13, respectively. Comparisons of the measured and the simulated scattering parameters for both couplers are provided in Figs. 14 and 15. The simulations and measurements of coupler of Fig. 4 (cf. Section III-A) are in excellent agreement. For the compact RRC coupler of Fig. 8 (cf. Section III-B), the misalignments between
Fig. 13. Photographs of the fabricated prototypes of the compact RRC of Fig. 8, corresponding to the scaled designs as presented in Fig. 11(a) and (b) and (e) and (f).
the simulated and measured characteristics are acceptable for the designs operating at 0.5 and 0.7 GHz [see Fig. 15(a) and (b)]. However, the discrepancies for circuits designed to operate on higher frequencies, here, 1.7 and 1.8 GHz [see Fig. 15(c) and (d)] are much more considerable. On the other hand, these kinds of discrepancies have been expected due to
KOZIEL AND BEKASIEWICZ: EXPEDITED GEOMETRY SCALING OF COMPACT MICROWAVE PASSIVES
4025
Fig. 16. Statistical analysis of the compact RRC of Fig. 8 scaled to the operating frequency of 1.8 GHz (gray) versus the nominal response (black) using the statistical model of the manufacturing tolerances described in the text. The deviations from the nominal response are consistent with the observed discrepancies between the simulated and the measured results.
Fig. 14. Comparison of simulated (black lines) and measured (gray lines) frequency responses of the folded RRC designs scaled to the operating frequencies of: (a) 1.0 GHz, (b) 1.2 GHz, (c) 1.7 GHz, and (d) 2.0 GHz (photographs of fab, , , and ricated circuits are shown in Fig. 12). Responses are marked using (—), (– –), , and (– –), respectively.
Fig. 15. Comparison of simulated (black lines) and measured (gray lines) frequency responses of the compact RRC designs scaled to the operating frequencies of: (a) 0.5 GHz, (b) 0.7 GHz, (c) 1.7 GHz, and (d) 1.8 GHz (photographs , , , and of fabricated circuits are shown in Fig. 13). Responses are marked using (—), (– –), , and (– –), respectively.
manufacturing tolerances. The detailed explanations including the results of the statistical analysis are provided in the following paragraph. The fundamental factors that explain relatively large discrepancies between the simulated and the measured responses for the compact RRC of Fig. 8, in particular considerable frequency shifts for higher operating frequencies [cf. Fig. 15(c) and (d)], are manufacturing tolerances as well as high sensitivity of the operating frequency to the fabrication inaccuracies for higher frequencies. In particular, it can be observed in Fig. 10 that the sensitivities are much smaller for the operating frequencies close to the upper end of the considered scaling range
TABLE III STATISTICAL ANALYSIS OF COMPACT RRC SCALED OPERATING FREQUENCY OF 1.8 GHz
TO
than for its lower end (meaning that are much higher there). Below, we illustrate the effect of the manufacturing tolerances for the RRC scaled to the operating frequency GHz [see Fig. 11(f)], and assuming the following simple statistical model: inaccuracies due to under-etching with the maximum deviation of 0.05 mm and the mean of 0.017 mm, described by a non-symmetric Gaussian distributions with the variances of 1/3 and 2/3 of the mean for the deviations lower and higher than 0.017 mm, respectively. The distributions are independent, except those for and (under-etching increases and decreases by the corresponding amount, cf. Fig. 8), similarly for and . Fig. 16 shows the simulated S-parameter plots for the 20 random samples generated with the above distribution. Considerable frequency shifts towards the lower frequencies, as well as other response changes, fully consistent with the measurements, can be observed. As indicated in Table III, the expected shift of the operating frequency is as large as 110 MHz with the standard deviation of 65 MHz. V. CONCLUSION The surrogate-assisted procedure for dimension scaling of miniaturized microwave passives with respect to the operating frequency has been proposed. Our approach relies on the inverse model that determines the relations between the operating frequency and the circuit dimensions, and it is established using the designs obtained—for a set of the training frequencies—through optimization of the equivalent circuit model. Using the correlations between the circuit representation and the high-fidelity EM model, as well as suitable correction techniques, the inverse model is applied to predict the dimensions of the scaled structure at the EM model level. The two most important features of our methodology are rigorous formulation and low computational cost of only one EM simulation of the structure (given the reference design). To
4026
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
the best of our knowledge, this is the first systematic attempt to practical realization of compact component scaling. The performance of the proposed technique has been verified using two exemplary couplers. The numerical results have been confirmed experimentally. The future work will be focused on further improvement of scaling accuracy, including fine tuning of the scaled circuit. ACKNOWLEDGMENT The authors would like to thank Computer Simulation Technology AG, Darmstadt, Germany, for making CST Microwave Studio available. REFERENCES [1] C. Jung, R. Negra, and F. M. Ghannouchi, “A design methodology for miniaturized 3-dB branch-line hybrid couplers using distributed capacitors printed in the inner area,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 56, no. 12, pp. 2950–2953, Dec. 2008. [2] M.-L. Chuang, “Miniaturized ring coupler of arbitrary reduced size,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 15, no. 1, pp. 16–18, Jan. 2005. [3] J.-T. Kuo, J.-S. Wu, and Y.-C. Chiou, “Miniaturized rat race coupler with suppression of spurious passband,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 17, no. 1, pp. 46–48, Jan. 2007. [4] A. Bekasiewicz and P. Kurgan, “A compact microstrip rat-race coupler constituted by nonuniform transmission lines,” Microw. Opt. Technol. Lett., vol. 56, no. 4, pp. 970–974, 2014. [5] H.-R. Ahn, “Modified asymmetric impedance transformers (MCCTs and MCVTs) and their application to impedance-transforming threeport 3-dB power dividers,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 59, no. 12, pp. 3312–3321, Dec. 2011. [6] R. Mirzavand, M. M. Honari, A. Abdipour, and G. Moradi, “Compact microstrip Wilkinson power dividers with harmonic suppression and arbitrary power division ratios,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 61, no. 1, pp. 61–68, Jan. 2013. [7] R. Gilmore and L. Besser, Practical RF Circuit Design for Modern Wireless Systems. Norwood, MA, USA: Artech House, 2003. [8] H.-X. Xu, G.-M. Wang, and K. Lu, “Microstrip rat-race couplers,” IEEE Microw. Mag., vol. 12, no. 4, pp. 117–129, Jun. 2011. [9] H.-R. Ahn and K. Bumman, “Toward integrated circuit size reduction,” IEEE Microw. Mag., vol. 9, no. 1, pp. 65–75, Feb. 2008. [10] S.-S. Liao, P.-T. Sun, N.-C. Chin, and J.-T. Peng, “A novel compactsize branch-line coupler,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 15, no. 9, pp. 588–590, Sep. 2005. [11] C.-H. Tseng and C.-L. Chang, “A rigorous design methodology for compact planar branch-line and rat-race couplers with asymmetrical T-structures,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 60, no. 7, pp. 2085–2092, Jul. 2012. [12] C.-H. Tseng and H.-J. Chen, “Compact rat-race coupler using shunt-stub-based artificial transmission lines,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 18, no. 11, pp. 734–736, Nov. 2008. [13] K.-O. Sun, S.-J. Ho, C.-C. Yen, and D. van der Weide, “A compact branch-line coupler using discontinuous microstrip lines,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 15, no. 8, pp. 501–503, Aug. 2005. [14] C.-W. Wang, T.-G. Ma, and C.-F. Yang, “A new planar artificial transmission line and its applications to a miniaturized Butler matrix,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 55, no. 12, pp. 2792–2801, Dec. 2007.
[15] S. Koziel and P. Kurgan, “Rapid design of miniaturized branch-line couplers through concurrent cell optimization and surrogate-assisted fine-tuning,” IET Microw. Antennas Propag., 2015, to be published. [16] N. V. Queipo, R. T. Haftka, W. Shyy, T. Goel, R. Vaidynathan, and P. K. Tucker, “Surrogate based analysis and optimization,” Progr. Aerosp. Sci., vol. 41, no. 1, pp. 1–28, 2005. [17] J. W. Bandler et al., “Space mapping: The state of the art,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 52, no. 1, pp. 337–361, Jan. 2004. [18] A. Bekasiewicz, P. Kurgan, and M. Kitlinski, “A new approach to a fast and accurate design of microwave circuits with complex topologies,” IET Microw. Antennas Propag., vol. 6, no. 14, pp. 1616–1622, 2012. [19] S. Koziel, A. Bekasiewicz, and P. Kurgan, “Size reduction of microwave couplers by EM-driven optimization,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig., Phoenix, AZ, USA, 2015, pp. 1–3. [20] S. Koziel and A. Bekasiewicz, “Fast multi-objective optimization of narrow-band antennas using RSA models and design space reduction,” IEEE Antennas Wireless Propag. Lett., vol. 14, pp. 450–453, 2015. [21] F. Zhang, “Miniaturized and harmonics-rejected slow-wave branchline coupler based on microstrip electromagnetic bandgap element,” Microw. Opt. Technol. Lett., vol. 51, pp. 1080–1084, 2009. [22] D. La, Y. Lu, N. Liu, and J. Zhang, “A novel compact bandstop filter using defected microstrip structure,” Microw. Opt. Technol. Lett., vol. 53, pp. 433–435, 2009. [23] P. Kurgan and M. Kitlinski, “Novel doubly perforated broadband microstrip branch-line couplers,” Mirow. Opt. Technol. Lett., vol. 51, no. 9, pp. 2149–2152, Sep. 2009. [24] C.-H. Ahn, D.-J. Jung, and K. Chang, “Compact parallel-coupler line bandpass filter using double complementary split ring resonators,” Microw. Opt. Technol. Lett., vol. 55, pp. 506–509, 2013. [25] A. Bekasiewicz, S. Koziel, and B. Pankiewicz, “Accelerated simulation-driven design optimization of compact couplers by means of two-level space mapping,” IET Microw. Antennas Propag., 2015, to be published. Slawomir Koziel (M’03–SM’07) received the M.Sc. and Ph.D. degrees in electronic engineering from the Gdansk University of Technology, Gdansk, Poland, in 1995 and 2000, respectively, and the M.Sc. degrees in theoretical physics and in mathematics and Ph.D. degree in mathematics from the University of Gdansk, Gdansk, Poland, in 2000, 2002, and 2003, respectively. He is currently a Professor with the School of Science and Engineering, Reykjavik University, Reykjavik, Iceland. He is also a Visiting Professor with the Gdansk University of Technology. His research interests include computeraided design (CAD) and modeling of microwave circuits, simulation-driven design, surrogate-based optimization, space mapping, circuit theory, analog signal processing, evolutionary computation, and numerical analysis.
Adrian Bekasiewicz received the M.Sc. degree in electronic engineering from the Gdansk University of Technology, Gdansk, Poland, in 2011, and is currently working toward the Ph.D. degree in wireless communication engineering at the Gdansk University of Technology. He is also a Research Associate with the School of Science and Engineering, Reykjavik University, Reykjavik, Iceland. He has authored or coauthored over 70 peer-reviewed papers. His research interests include multi-objective optimization, metaheuristic algorithms, design of compact microwave antennas, and miniaturization of microwave/RF components.
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
4127
High-Performance Coplanar Waveguide to Empty Substrate Integrated Coaxial Line Transition Angel Belenguer, Senior Member, IEEE, Alejandro L. Borja, Member, IEEE, Hector Esteban, Senior Member, IEEE, and Vicente E. Boria, Senior Member, IEEE
Abstract—Recently, a new empty coaxial structure, entirely built with printed circuit boards, has been proposed. The resulting coaxial line has low radiation, low losses, high-quality factor, and is nondispersive. Up to now, this coaxial line has not been completely integrated in a planar substrate, since a working transition to a traditional planar line has not been defined yet. Therefore, in this paper, a high-quality transition from coplanar waveguide to this new empty coaxial line is proposed. With this transition, the coaxial line is completely integrated in a planar circuit board, so that it truly becomes an empty substrate-integrated coaxial line. The proposed transition has been fabricated. Both full-wave simulated and measured results show an excellent agreement. Therefore, the proposed transition is suitable to develop completely substrate-integrated components for applications in wideband communication systems that require very high quality responses and protection from external interferences. To show this fact, this new transition has been applied to integrate a high-performance empty coaxial filter in a planar substrate. The measured response of this filter is excellent, and proves the goodness of the proposed transition that has enabled, for the first time, the complete integration of an empty coaxial line in a planar substrate. Index Terms—Bandpass filter, empty substrate-integrated coaxial line (ESICL), substrate-integrated coaxial line (SICL), substrate-integrated waveguide (SIW).
I. INTRODUCTION
I
INTEGRATION of microwave/radiofrequency components in communication systems is of key importance to design and fabricate circuits with small size, low weight, low cost, high reliability, easy assembling, and possibility of mass production. Full system integration is, therefore, playing an important role in current telecommunication developments. As a consequence, a great deal of effort has been dedicated to propose novel devices in planar technology. Some years ago, Deslandes and Wu [1] presented in 2001 an initial research Manuscript received May 03, 2015; revised September 23, 2015; accepted October 07, 2015. This work was supported by the Ministerio de Economía y Competitividad, Spanish Goverment under Research Projects TEC2013-47037C5-3-R and TEC2013-47037-C5-1-R. A. Belenguer and A. L. Borja are with the Departamento de Ingeniería Eléctrica, Electrónica, Automática y Comunicaciones, Universidad de Castilla-La Mancha, Escuela Politécnica de Cuenca, Campus Universitario, 16071 Cuenca, Spain (e-mail: [email protected]). H. Esteban and V. E. Boria are with the Departamento de Comunicaciones, Universidad Politécnica de Valencia, 46022 Valencia, Spain (e-mail: [email protected]). Color versions of one or more of the figures in this paper are available online at http://ieeexplore.ieee.org. Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/TMTT.2015.2496271
work that gave and is giving rise to a vast number of new substrate-integrated components. In this paper, a novel concept for substrate-integrated waveguide (SIW) transmission line was presented. The proposed structure employed rods of metallic via holes to confine a propagating wave between the upper and bottom plates of a substrate layer. By this mean, the vertical dimension of a conventional 3-D waveguide transmission line can be reduced. Thereafter and based on this former study, several solutions including filters [1]–[10], antennas [11]–[16], transitions and tapers [17]–[19], baluns [20], [21], couplers [22]–[25], and new transmission lines [26]–[30] were proposed. Among all these works, it is of interest the excellent properties of substrate-integrated coaxial lines (SICL) reported in [30]. This transmission line was shown to have single mode propagation, nondispersion, and low radiation. Due to these properties, this sort of coaxial line can be suitable for applications with wider bandwidth responses and lower losses than other proposed substrate integrated circuits. For instance, wideband filters [31], [32], couplers [33], [34], baluns [35], and power dividers [36] have been designed using SICLs. In all the aforementioned structures, the substrate-integrated design offers a range of benefits in comparison with conventional 3-D waveguide and coaxial transmission lines. However, the losses introduced by the dielectric permittivity of the substrate limit the use of these devices, specially as frequency is increased. This fact was clearly demonstrated in the work presented by Belenguer et al. [37]. In this particular case, the proposed structure, called empty substrate-integrated waveguide (ESIW), showed significantly lower insertion loss than SIW for two bandpass filter designs working at different frequencies. In addition, it was also shown that the quality factor is increased around eight times due to the absence of dielectric material. Following the same idea, in [38] an empty coaxial line is proposed. This coaxial line is entirely built using printed circuit boards (PCBs), but, strictly speaking, it is not integrated in a dielectric substrate, since, in this work, it has not been proposed a transition to, at least, one traditional planar transmission line: microstrip, coplanar waveguide, stripline, etc. [39]. However, the complete integration of this empty coaxial line is of great interest for developing high-quality, low-cost, and shielded integrated microwave devices. Therefore, we present in this paper a transition from grounded coplanar waveguide (GCPW) to this new empty coaxial transmission line. The integration of a coaxial line into a partially empty substrate permits to obtain nondispersive and shielded lines with low loss, low radiation, and suitable for wideband applications. Microstrip or coplanar lines are low cost and straightforward to fabricate, but
0018-9480 © 2015 IEEE. Personal use is permitted, but republication/redistribution requires IEEE permission. See http://www.ieee.org/publications_standards/publications/rights/index.html for more information.
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. 4128
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
are not shielded and exhibit radiation losses and cross-talk problems. On the other hand, striplines present lateral leakage in addition to cross-talk. The proposed coaxial topology solves these drawbacks and combines the advantages of coaxial cables and planar transmission lines. Also, it permits to easily control the dimensions of the coaxial line. As a result, the impedance of the line can be adjusted modifying the widths of the inner and outer conductors, or even loading these conductors with inductive/capacitive elements as well as tunable components to obtain reconfigurable responses. The proposed design has the advantage of fast full-wave simulation as a perfect electric conductor (PEC) background material can be used during calculations. This is not possible for open structures, where a radiation boundary condition is necessary. This fact considerably reduces the computation time, which is of great importance during optimization processes (e.g., for design purposes). To show one possible application of the proposed transition to this new empty substrate-integrated coaxial line (ESICL), a wideband bandpass filter is designed and fabricated. In this regard, it is important to note that this bandpass filter response cannot be obtained with SIW/ESIW structures, and has several advantages compared to microstrip, coplanar, or stripline filters such as nonradiation, nondispersion, noncrosstalk, faster simulation, and lower insertion loss. The proposed coaxial line has a wide range of potential applications. For instance, communication systems incorporating services that operate in a wide band and that requires protection from external electromagnetic interferences. The paper is organized as follows. Section II presents the layout, design, and performance of the coaxial line. Section III presents a high-performance GCPW to ESICL transition. The response of a bandpass filter prototype is shown in Section IV. The experimental results are presented in Section V. Finally, the main conclusions of the work are discussed in Section VI. II. ESICL ASSEMBLING AND PERFORMANCE At least three substrate layers plus two covers, which close the whole structure, are required to fabricate an ESICL (see Fig. 1). One or more inner layers, which must be separated from the covers by, at least, one substrate layer, sustain the internal conductor of the coaxial line as it is shown in Fig. 1. The covers can be manufactured by simply using thin metallic sheets, or they can be built using two additional substrate sheets, which would allow to integrate external circuitry or lumped elements that could interact with the ESICL device. The different layers of this structure can be of different thickness and material, but, in any case, they can be entirely fabricated using standard PCB fabrication processes. Once the different layers have been manufactured, the structure can be easily assembled. In order to prevent misalignment errors, a set of screws has been distributed uniformly along the structure with excellent results (see Section V). These screws can be maintained and used to join the different layers by pressure. Due to the current distribution of the coaxial line, this gives very good results. The different ESICL layers can be also assembled using soldering paste, which is a standard process in PCB fabrication
Fig. 1. Simplest construction of an ESICL (three inner substrate layers plus two covers). (a) Separated layers 3-D view. (b) Cross-section.
TABLE I SIMULATED LOSSES AND UNLOADED FACTORS OF SEVERAL WELL-KNOWN TRANSMISSION LINES AND ESICL. SUBSTRATE (IF APPLIES): ROGERS 4003C mm, , AND ). METALIZATION: ( S/m PLAIN SOLID COPPER
and could be easily automated, providing better metallic contact and lighter devices, since, in this case, the alignment screws can be removed. Both assembling strategies provide excellent results. In order to evaluate the performance of the ESICL, in Table I, the losses of an ESICL are compared, at 15 GHz, with the losses of several transmission lines: microstrip, GCPW, SIW, ESIW, and rectangular waveguide (RWG). These losses have been computed from full-wave simulations using the commercial software CST Studio Suite 2014. The dimensions for all of the compared lines are also shown in Table I. These dimensions have been determined considering the following facts: the planar lines have been devised for a Rogers 4003C substrate of 0.813 mm thickness and m of metallization; the QTEM/TEM lines have been designed to exhibit a characteristic impedance of ; and, finally, the waveguides have been designed to match the desired bandwidth, from 12 to 18 GHz. Additionally, in order to provide a more exhaustive comparison of the performance of these lines, the unloaded factor of a resonator has been also estimated. To perform this analysis, a piece of the lines of Table I, of length approximately equal to , has been tightly coupled to identical feeding lines, so that the desired resonator has been obtained. A capacitive gap has
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. BELENGUER et al.: HIGH-PERFORMANCE COPLANAR WAVEGUIDE TO ESICL TRANSITION
4129
Fig. 2. Three-dimensional detail of a complete GCPW-to-ESICL transition without covers.
been used to couple the feeding lines and the resonator for the QTEM/TEM lines, i.e., microstrip, GCPW, and ESICL, while an inductive iris has been used to couple the feeding lines to the resonator for the waveguides, i.e., RWG, ESIW, and SIW. These resonators have been simulated with CST Studio Suite 2014, and then the unloaded factor has been estimated applying the following formula [40]: (1) is the half-power where is the resonant frequency, bandwidth, and IL is the insertion loss at . The performance of the ESICL is comparable to ESIW, quite close to the performance of the rectangular waveguide, and much higher than the performance of classical planar lines like microstrip or GCPW, or even SIW, which is considered a high-performance planar line. Therefore, very high quality devices can be designed using this novel and promising transmission line. III. GCPW-TO-ESICL TRANSITION Without a proper transition to a traditional planar line, the usefulness of the ESICL is very limited. Therefore, in this section, a high-quality transition to a GCPW line has been designed [41]. In Fig. 2, a 3-D view of this new transition without covers is shown. In this figure it can be seen that, globally, the transition consists of three different sections. The first section is simply the GCPW feeding line. The second section is also a GCPW line, but, in this case, covered with a dielectric and surrounded by a metallic housing. Finally, the third section is the ESICL itself. In Fig. 3, it can be seen the top and bottom view of the transition for the central substrate layer, which sustains the inner conductor of the coaxial line. In this figure, only the separation between the vias surrounding the coplanar waveguide has been
Fig. 3. GCPW-to-ESICL transition in the central layer. Dark gray is metal covering the substrate. White represents holes emptied in the substrate. Light gray stands for substrate without metallic cover. Black represents the metallization along substrate edges. (a) Top. (b) Bottom.
specified, . The other vias simply shield the structure, and they barely affect the response of the transition. Therefore, it is not necessary to give a fixed value for their separation, . Its actual value depends on the width of the substrate layer for the vertical rows of vias, and the length of the ESICL for the horizontal rows. Nevertheless, is always chosen as close as possible to . In Fig. 4, it is shown the layout of the substrate sheet that is placed above the main substrate layer of Fig. 3. In this layer, the transition is quite simpler. A frame around the hole that defines the coaxial line is necessary in order to provide mechanical stability to the whole structure. Due to this necessary frame, the line that crosses below it, in the central layer, becomes a CGPW covered with dielectric and metal, leading to the second section of the transition. In order to keep the same line impedance in this second section of the transition, the central strip of the covered GCPW is slightly narrower than the central strip of the conventional GCPW feeding line. In Fig. 5, one can see the transition in the lower layer, which is the simplest one. In this case, a frame of dielectric material is also necessary to provide the structure with the necessary mechanical stability. However, in this case, the presence of this external frame has no consequence from the electromagnetic point of view.
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. 4130
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 5. GCPW-to-ESICL transition in the lower layer. Dark gray is metal covering the substrate. White represents holes emptied in the substrate. Black represents the metallization along substrate edges.
DIMENSIONS
FOR THE
TABLE II TRANSITION IN ROGERS 4003C , mm
Fig. 4. GCPW-to-ESICL transition in the upper layer. Dark gray is metal covering the substrate. White represents holes emptied in the substrate. Light gray stands for substrate without metallic cover. Black represents the metallization along substrate edges. (a) Top. (b) Bottom.
Finally, a specific transition has been designed. This transition has been optimized for a Rogers 4003C substrate ( , mm thickness, and m of copper metallization). In this case, all of the layers that form this structure have been implemented using the same substrate, although a cheaper substrate, for example FR-4, could have been used to build the lower layer and the covers. The dimensions of the designed transition can be read in Table II. The procedure followed to design this transition is quite simple. In the first place, the lines are designed separately: the feeding GCPW, the covered GCPW, and the ESICL, so that all of them have the same characteristic impedance ( in this case). The dimensions obtained in this first step are translated to the structure. Then, the transition is optimized with a full 3-D electromagnetic simulator for: , , and , so
Fig. 6. Simulated response with a full-wave 3-D electromagnetic simulator of the designed GCPW-to-ESICL transition.
that the return losses are maximized in the band of interest (in this case from 0 to 20 GHz). In Fig. 6, one can see the simulated response for the transition using a full-wave 3-D electromagnetic software and considering losses. This transition exhibits an excellent response in the band of interest (0–20 GHz) and a really low loss level (0.07 dB at 20 GHz). The ESICL and this new transition are quite easy to fabricate, since only standard printed circuit board (PCB) manufacturing processes are involved in its fabrication, i.e., milling, cutting, drilling, and plating. Thanks to this transition, it has
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. BELENGUER et al.: HIGH-PERFORMANCE COPLANAR WAVEGUIDE TO ESICL TRANSITION
4131
Fig. 7. Top view and dimensions for the eight cavity filter in ESICL.
Fig. 9. Custom calibration kit used to de-embed the coaxial connectors from measurements. (a) Thru. (b) Line. (c) Reflect.
Fig. 8. Bandpass filter with shorted stubs.
been possible to completely integrate an actual TEM line (not QTEM) in a planar substrate. Most of the traditional design methods conceived for planar TEM or QTEM lines (microstrip, coplanar, stripline, etc.) are based on the assumption that the line supports the propagation of a pure TEM mode. Therefore, they can be applied to this new transmission line, and, indeed, since this line is actually a TEM line, the results obtained will be even more accurate than the results obtained for QTEM lines. On the other hand, it is necessary to remark that ESICL is a line that exhibits very low losses. Devices implemented in ESICL, mainly those incorporating resonators, will provide very high quality responses, since the ESICL resonators will have very high quality factors. The response of these new ESICL devices will be undoubtedly much better than the responses that could be obtained with any conventional planar line. IV. BANDPASS FILTER In order to show the integration capabilities of the proposed transition, a real device will be fully integrated in a printed circuit board. In parallel, the performance of this real device will be also evaluated, in order to remark the interest of the proposed transition, since it will allow to integrate high-quality and completely shielded devices in a traditional PCB. Specifically, a very wideband filter will be integrated in a Rogers 4003C substrate ( , 0.813 mm thickness, and m of copper metallization). This filter exhibits a fractional bandwidth of 100%, a central frequency, GHz, and a passband ripple of 0.05 dB. In order to design this filter, a traditional configuration for designing wideband bandpass filters with planar lines has been applied [42]. In this configuration, the resonators of the filter have been implemented with shorted stubs of length equal to . These resonators have been coupled through impedance inverters, which have been synthesized with line sections of length equal to (see Figs. 7 and 8).
The dimensions of the filter can be seen in Fig. 7 and Table III. In Fig. 7, one can see that the filter is indeed the direct implementation in ESICL of the filter of Fig. 8. This filter can be analyzed as a closed and empty structure. The size of the problem is electromagnetically small, so that it can be analyzed very fast. In this case, optimization is possible even with a commercial full-wave electromagnetic software. Therefore, it has been possible to tune the response of the filter, which ends up being very close to the response of the filter prototype, as it can be seen in the simulated results of Fig. 12. These results are undoubtedly excellent, since they consider the losses produced by the whole device. These losses are very small, only 0.14 dB at . V. RESULTS In order to experimentally verify the simulated results of the previous sections, the back-to-back configuration for the transition (Fig. 10) and the filter (Fig. 11) has been fabricated. To connect the fabricated prototypes with the vector network analyzer, K coaxial connectors have been used. Since these connectors can degrade the measured results, they have been de-embedded from measurements using a TRL calibration kit. This kit is composed of a GCPW transmission line of 29.4 mm (Line), a shorter transmission line of 26.6 mm (Thru), and a shorted line of 13.3 mm (Reflect). The photographs of these calibration standards are shown in Fig. 9. In Fig. 10, it can be seen a comparison between measurements and the simulated results for the back-to-back of the proposed transition. Although, due to fabrication tolerances, the measured response has deteriorated, the line is still very well integrated in the PCB. Therefore, it can be concluded that the main objective of this work has been accomplished, i.e., the complete integration of the novel ESICL line in a dielectric substrate. In order to determine the extent to which the fabrication tolerances affect the quality of the transition, a yield analysis has been performed using CST Studio Suite 2014. In this analysis, it has been considered that the positions of several key faces of the whole structure admit certain degree of error. In this context, the most sensitive design parameters of the transition are those that affect the impedance of the lines. For example, it has
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. 4132
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 12. Simulated response with CST (FEM solver) and measurements (deembedded to the GCPW) for the eight cavity ESICL filter.
TABLE III DIMENSIONS FOR THE EIGHT CAVITY FILTER IN ESICL
Fig. 10. (a) Simulated response with a full-wave 3-D electromagnetic simulator versus measurements (de-embedded to the GCPW) for the back-to-back of the GCPW-to-ESICL transition. (b) Photograph of the back-to-back.
Fig. 11. (a) Photograph of the manufactured ESICL filter. (b) Detail of the transition which has been used to feed the filter prototype.
been considered that the lateral limits of the central strip, which determine the impedance of the second section of the transition (a covered GCPW), can vary its position following a normal distribution with zero mean (the design position) and a standard deviation of 25 microns (the typical error we have observed for milled geometries). Other sensible faces in this design have been included in the yield analysis: the outer walls that laterally close the ESICL with a standard deviation of 50 microns (cutters are less precise than mills), the lateral walls of the internal conductor of the ESICL with a standard deviation of 50 microns, the upper and lower walls of the inner conductor of the ESICL with a standard deviation of 50 micros, and finally the position of the upper and lower walls that close the ESICL
(the total height of the line) with a standard deviation of 100 microns, since the actual height of the line is affected by many factors: the actual height of the substrates, the actual metallization depth, and imperfections that prevent the different layers to match perfectly. The results of the yield analysis show that: 99.9% of the back-to-back realizations will exhibit return losses greater than 10 dB, 96.7% will exhibit return losses greater than 15 dB, and 79.1% will exhibit return losses greater than 20 dB. Of course, this is a very complex design and it is impossible to perform a full yield analysis considering all the possible errors, but, since the selected dimensions are the most critical ones, the results given by this analysis could be considered a very good approximation of the fabrication process performance. Fig. 11(a) shows a photograph of the filter prototype without the upper cover. Fig. 11(b) shows a detailed view of one of the transitions that feed the aforementioned prototype. Finally, in Fig. 12, one can see a comparison between simulations and measurements. In Fig. 12, both results, experimental and simulated, exhibit a high degree of coincidence, although, again, the adaptation is slightly deteriorated in measurements. Results, simulations without considering the GCPW-to-ESICL transitions, and measurements including both transitions, prove that the new transition barely affects the response of the filter, i.e., both show very similar levels of insertion loss. This fact validates again the transition, and confirms that the main objective of this work has been accomplished, since these new ESICL devices can be easily integrated in a traditional PCB. VI. CONCLUSIONS The ESICL is a novel structure that can be entirely fabricated with standard dielectric substrate layers, and exclusively using PCB standard manufacturing procedures. This structure shows very interesting properties, i.e., low-loss, nondispersion, immunity to interferences or cross-talk, etc., which makes it
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. BELENGUER et al.: HIGH-PERFORMANCE COPLANAR WAVEGUIDE TO ESICL TRANSITION
very attractive for developing high-quality passive or active devices. In this paper, for the first time, a high-performance transition from a traditional planar transmission line, a GCPW, to the novel ESICL has been designed. As a result, the promising ESICL has been, for the first time, successfully and truly integrated in a planar substrate. In order to illustrate this fact, a wide band (100% fractional bandwidth) bandpass eight cavity filter in ESICL has been designed and, using this new transition, integrated in a planar substrate. The filter exhibits a very high quality response in the whole band of interest, with measured insertion losses of 0.23 dB at 11.15 GHz (considering both feeding GCPW-to-ESICL transitions). The results presented in this paper are very promising, and open a wide range of possibilities to develop high-quality PCB-integrated devices in ESICL exhibiting: very low losses, wide working bandwidths, high stability, and immunity to interferences, cross-talk, and dispersion. REFERENCES [1] D. Deslandes and K. Wu, “Integrated microstrip and rectangular waveguide in planar form,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 11, no. 2, pp. 68–70, Feb. 2001. [2] D.-D. Zhang, L. Zhou, L.-S. Wu, L.-F. Qiu, W.-Y. Yin, and J.-F. Mao, “Novel bandpass filters by using cavity-loaded dielectric resonators in a substrate integrated waveguide,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 62, no. 5, pp. 1173–1182, May 2014. [3] P. Chu, W. Hong, L. Dai, H. Tang, J. Chen, Z. Hao, X. Zhu, and K. Wu, “A planar bandpass filter implemented with a hybrid structure of substrate integrated waveguide and coplanar waveguide,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 62, no. 2, pp. 266–274, Feb. 2014. [4] S. W. Wong, K. Wang, Z.-N. Chen, and Q.-X. Chu, “Design of millimeter-wave bandpass filter using electric coupling of substrate integrated waveguide (SIW),” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 24, no. 1, pp. 26–28, Jan. 2014. [5] S. Sirci, J. Martinez, and V. Boria, “Low-loss 3-bit tunable SIW filter with PIN diodes and integrated bias network,” in Proc. Eur. Microwave Conf. (EuMC), Oct. 2013, pp. 1211–1214. [6] L. Xia, J. Xie, and G. Hua, “Design of a novel structure SIW filter,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microwave Workshop Series on Millimeter Wave Wireless Technol. and Applicant. (IMWS), Sep. 2012, pp. 1–4. [7] F. Mira, J. Mateu, S. Cogollos, and V. Boria, “Design of ultra-wideband substrate integrated waveguide (SIW) filters in zigzag topology,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 19, no. 5, pp. 281–283, May 2009. [8] X.-P. Chen, W. Hong, T. Cui, J. Chen, and K. Wu, “Substrate integrated waveguide (SIW) linear phase filter,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 15, no. 11, pp. 787–789, Nov. 2005. [9] H. J. Tang, W. Hong, Z. C. Hao, J. X. Chen, and K. Wu, “Optimal design of compact millimetre-wave SIW circular cavity filters,” Electron. Lett., vol. 41, no. 19, pp. 1068–1069, Sep. 2005. [10] Z.-C. Hao, W. Hong, J.-X. Chen, X.-P. Chen, and K. Wu, “Compact super-wide bandpass substrate integrated waveguide (SIW) filters,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 53, no. 9, pp. 2968–2977, Sep. 2005. [11] T. Y. Yang, W. Hong, and Y. Zhang, “Wideband millimeter-wave substrate integrated waveguide cavity-backed rectangular patch antenna,” IEEE Antennas Wireless Propag. Lett., vol. 13, pp. 205–208, 2014. [12] W. Han, F. Yang, and H. Zhou, “Slotted substrate integrated cavity antenna using TE330 mode with low profile and high gain,” Electron. Lett., vol. 50, no. 7, pp. 488–490, Mar. 2014. [13] H. Zhou and F. Aryanfar, “Millimeter-wave open ended SIW antenna with wide beam coverage,” in Proc. IEEE Antennas and Propagation Soc. Int. Symp.(APSURSI), Jul. 2013, pp. 658–659. [14] L.-R. Tan, R.-X. Wu, C.-Y. Wang, and Y. Poo, “Magnetically tunable ferrite loaded SIW antenna,” IEEE Antennas Wireless Propag. Lett., vol. 12, pp. 273–275, 2013. [15] J. Liu, D. Jackson, and Y. Long, “Substrate integrated waveguide (SIW) leaky-wave antenna with transverse slots,” IEEE Trans. Antennas Propag., vol. 60, no. 1, pp. 20–29, Jan. 2012. [16] H. Hizan, I. Hunter, and A. Abunjaileh, “Integrated SIW filter and microstrip antenna,” in Proc. Eur. Microwave Conf. (EuMC), Sep. 2010, pp. 184–187.
4133
[17] E. Diaz, A. Belenguer, H. Esteban, O. Monerris-Belda, and V. Boria, “A novel transition from microstrip to a substrate integrated waveguide with higher characteristic impedance,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microwave Symp. Dig., 2013, pp. 1–4. [18] E. Diaz Caballero, A. Belenguer, H. Esteban, and V. Boria, “Thru-reflect-line calibration for substrate integrated waveguide devices with tapered microstrip transitions,” Electron. Lett., vol. 49, no. 2, pp. 132–133, Jan. 2013. [19] D. Deslandes, “Design equations for tapered microstrip-to-substrate integrated waveguide transitions,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microwave Sym. Dig., 2010, pp. 704–707. [20] J. Hui, W. Feng, and W. Che, “Balun bandpass filter based on multilayer substrate integrated waveguide power divider,” Electron. Lett., vol. 48, no. 10, pp. 571–573, May 2012. [21] Z.-Y. Zhang and K. Wu, “A broadband substrate integrated waveguide (SIW) planar balun,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 17, no. 12, pp. 843–845, Dec. 2007. [22] A. Ali, H. Aubert, N. Fonseca, and F. Coccetti, “Wideband two-layer SIW coupler: Design and experiment,” Electron. Lett., vol. 45, no. 13, pp. 687–689, Jun. 2009. [23] A. Patrovsky, M. Daigle, and K. Wu, “Coupling mechanism in hybrid SIW-CPW forward couplers for millimeter-wave substrate integrated circuits,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 56, no. 11, pp. 2594–2601, Nov. 2008. [24] T. Djerafi and K. Wu, “Super-compact substrate integrated waveguide cruciform directional coupler,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 17, no. 11, pp. 757–759, Nov. 2007. [25] B. Liu, W. Hong, Y.-Q. Wang, Q.-H. Lai, and K. Wu, “Half mode substrate integrated waveguide (HMSIW) 3-dB coupler,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 17, no. 1, pp. 22–24, Jan. 2007. [26] F. Xu and K. Wu, “Substrate integrated nonradiative dielectric waveguide structures directly fabricated on printed circuit boards and metallized dielectric layers,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 59, no. 12, pp. 3076–3086, Dec. 2011. [27] W. Hong, B. Liu, Y. Wang, Q. Lai, H. Tang, X. X. Yin, Y. D. Dong, Y. Zhang, and K. Wu, “Half mode substrate integrated waveguide: A new guided wave structure for microwave and millimeter wave application,” in Proc. Joint 31st Int. Conf. Infrared Millimeter Waves and 14th Int. Conf. Terahertz Electronics (IRMMW-THz), Sep. 2006, p. 219. [28] Y. Cassivi and K. Wu, “Substrate integrated nonradiative dielectric waveguide,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 14, no. 3, pp. 89–91, 2004. [29] D. Deslandes, M. Bozzi, P. Arcioni, and K. Wu, “Substrate integrated slab waveguide (SISW) for wideband microwave applications,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microwave Symp. Dig., 2003, vol. 2, pp. 1103–1106. [30] F. Gatti, M. Bozzi, L. Perregrini, K. Wu, and R. Bosisio, “A novel substrate integrated coaxial line (SICL) for wide-band applications,” in Proc. 36th Eur. Microwave Conf., Sep. 2006, pp. 1614–1617. [31] P. Chu, W. Hong, L. Dai, H. Tang, Z. Hao, J. Chen, and K. Wu, “Wide stopband bandpass filter implemented with spur stepped impedance resonator and substrate integrated coaxial line technology,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 24, no. 4, pp. 218–220, Apr. 2014. [32] P. Chu, W. Hong, J. X. Chen, and H. J. Tang, “A miniaturized bandpass filter implemented with substrate integrated coaxial line,” Microw. Opt. Technol. Lett., vol. 55, no. 1, pp. 131–132, Jan. 2013. [33] S. Jun-Yu, L. Qiang, W. Yong-Le, L. Yuan-An, L. Shu-Lan, Y. Cui-Ping, and L. Gan, “High-directivity single- and dual-band directional couplers based on substrate integrated coaxial line technology,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microwave Symp. Dig. (IMS), Jun. 2013, pp. 1–4. [34] W. Liang and W. Hong, “Substrate integrated coaxial line 3 dB coupler,” Electron. Lett., vol. 48, no. 1, pp. 35–36, Jan. 2012. [35] F. Zhu, W. Hong, J.-X. Chen, and K. Wu, “Ultra-wideband single and dual baluns based on substrate integrated coaxial line technology,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 60, no. 10, pp. 3062–3070, Oct. 2012. [36] F. Gatti, M. Bozzi, L. Perregrini, K. Wu, and R. Bosisio, “A new wide-band six-port junction based on substrate integrated coaxial line (SICL) technology,” in Proc. IEEE Mediterranean Electrotechnical Conf. (MELECON), May 2006, pp. 367–370. [37] A. Belenguer, H. Esteban, and V. Boria, “Novel empty substrate integrated waveguide for high-performance microwave integrated circuits,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 62, no. 4, pp. 832–839, Apr. 2014. [38] N. Jastram and D. Filipovic, “PCB-based prototyping of 3-D micromachined RF subsystems,” IEEE Trans. Antennas Propag., vol. 62, no. 1, pp. 420–429, Jan. 2014.
This article has been accepted for inclusion in a future issue of this journal. Content is final as presented, with the exception of pagination. 4134
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
[39] D. M. Pozar, Microwave Engineering, 2nd ed. Hoboken, NJ, USA: Wiley, 2005. [40] X.-C. Zhu, W. Hong, K. Wu, K.-D. Wang, L.-S Li, Z.-C. Hao, H.-J. Tang, and J.-X. Chen, “Accurate characterization of attenuation constants of substrate integrated waveguide using resonator method,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 23, no. 12, pp. 677–679, Dec. 2013. [41] A. Belenguer, A. L. Borja, H. Esteban, and V. E. Boria, “Estructura de transición de dos líneas de transmisión de señal en PCB,” Patent Application ES Application No 201530408 03 27, 2015. [42] J.-S Hong and M. Lancaster, Microstrip Filters for RF/Microwave Applications, ser. Wiley in microwave and optical engineering. Hoboken, NJ, USA: Wiley, 2001. Angel Belenguer (M'04–SM'14) received the degree in telecommunications engineering and the Ph.D. degree from the Universidad Politécnica de Valencia (UPV), Valencia, Spain, in 2000, and 2009, respectively. He joined the Universidad de Castilla-La Mancha in 2000, where he is now Profesor Titular de Universidad in the Departamento de Ingenieria Electrica, Electronica, Automatica y Comunicaciones. He has authored or coauthored more than 50 papers in peerreviewed international journals and conference proceedings and frequently acts as a reviewer for several international technical publications. His research interests include methods in the frequency domain for the full-wave analysis of open-space and guided multiple scattering problems, the application of accelerated solvers or solving strategies (like grouping) to new problems or structures, electromagnetic metamaterials, and substrate-integrated waveguide devices and their applications.
Alejandro L. Borja (M'15) received the M.Sc. degree in telecommunication engineering and the Ph.D. degree from the Universidad Politecnica de Valencia, Valencia, Spain, in 2004 and 2009, respectively. From 2005 to 2006, he was with the University of Birmingham, Birmingham, U.K. From 2007 to 2008, he was with the Universite de Lille 1, Lille, France. Since 2009, he has been with the Universidad de Castilla-La Mancha, Spain, where he is an Assistant Lecturer. He has published more than 50 papers in peer-reviewed international journals and conference proceedings, and frequently acts as a reviewer for several technical publications. In 2012, he served as a Lead Guest Editor for a special issue of the International Journal of Antennas and Propagation. His research interests include electromagnetic metamaterials, substrate-integrated waveguides, and reconfigurable devices and their applications in microwave and millimetric bands. Dr. Borja was the recipient of the 2008 Computer Simulation Technology short paper award.
Héctor Esteban González (S'03–M'99–SM'14) received the degree in telecommunications engineering from the Universidad Politécnica de Valencia (UPV), Valencia, Spain, in 1996, and the Ph.D. degree in 2002. He worked with the Joint Research Centre, European Commission, Ispra, Italy. In 1997, he was with the European Topic Centre on Soil (European Environment Agency). He rejoined the UPV in 1998. His research interests include methods for the full- wave analysis of open-space and guided multiple-scattering problems, CAD design of microwave devices, electromagnetic characterization of dielectric and magnetic bodies, and the acceleration of electromagnetic analysis methods using the wavelets and the FMM.
Vicente E. Boria (S'91–A'99–SM'02) was born in Valencia, Spain, on May 18, 1970. He received the Ingeniero de Telecomunicación degree (with first-class honors) and the Doctor Ingeniero de Telecomunicación degree from the Universidad Politécnica de Valencia, Valencia, Spain, in 1993 and 1997, respectively. In 1993 he joined the Departamento de Comunicaciones, Universidad Politécnica de Valencia, where he has been Full Professor since 2003. In 1995 and 1996, he was holding a Spanish Trainee position with the European Space Research and Technology Centre, European Space Agency (ESTEC-ESA), Noordwijk, The Netherlands, where he was involved in the area of electromagnetic analysis and design of passive waveguide devices. He has authored or coauthored seven chapters in technical textbooks, 75 papers in refereed international technical journals, and over 150 papers in international conference proceedings. His current research interests are focused on the analysis and automated design of passive components, left-handed and periodic structures, as well as on the simulation and measurement of power effects in passive waveguide systems. Dr. Boria has been a member of the IEEE Microwave Theory and Techniques Society (IEEE MTT-S) and the IEEE Antennas and Propagation Society (IEEE AP-S) since 1992. He is member of the Editorial Boards of the IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, IEEE MICROWAVE AND WIRELESS COMPONENTS LETTERS, Proceeding of the IET (Microwaves, Antennas and Propagation), IET Electronics Letters, and Radio Science. Since 2013, he has served as Associate Editor of the IEEE MICROWAVE AND WIRELESS COMPONENTS LETTERS. He is also a member of the Technical Committees of the IEEE-MTT International Microwave Symposium and of the European Microwave Conference.
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
4035
Design and Validation of Microstrip Gap Waveguides and Their Transitions to Rectangular Waveguide, for Millimeter-Wave Applications Astrid Algaba Brazález, Eva Rajo-Iglesias, Senior Member, IEEE, José Luis Vázquez-Roy, Member, IEEE, Abbas Vosoogh, and Per-Simon Kildal, Fellow, IEEE
Abstract—The paper describes the design methodology, experimental validation, and practical considerations of two millimeter-wave wideband vertical transitions from two gap waveguide versions (inverted microstrip gap waveguide, and microstrip packaged by using gap waveguide) to standard WR-15 rectangular waveguide. The experimental results show smaller than 10 dB over relative bandwidths larger than 25% and 26.6% when Rogers RO3003 and RO4003 materials are used, respectively. The vertical transition from standard microstrip line packaged by a lid of pins to WR-15 shows measured return loss better than 15 dB over 13.8% relative bandwidth. The new transitions can be used as interfaces between gap waveguide feed networks for 60-GHz antenna systems, testing equipment (like vector network analyzers), and components with WR-15 ports, such as transmitting–receiving amplifiers. Moreover, the paper documents the losses of different gap waveguide prototypes compared with unpackaged microstrip line and substrate integrated waveguide (SIW). This investigation shows that in -band, the lowest losses are achieved with inverted microstrip gap waveguide. Index Terms—Artificial magnetic conductor (AMC), dissipation loss, feed network, gap waveguide, microstrip, millimeter waves, packaging, perfect magnetic conductor (PMC), rectangular waveguide, transition.
I. INTRODUCTION
T
HERE is a growing amount of applications at the millimeter-wave frequency band (30–300 GHz), such as high-data-rate wireless communications (operating over the unlicensed frequency band between 57 and 64 GHz) and automotive radar systems (which operate from 76 to 81 GHz). This has motivated the need for developing new technologies suitable to cost effectively fulfill the stricter tolerance requirements at these frequencies. Manuscript received March 07, 2015; revised July 06, 2015; accepted October 04, 2015. Date of publication November 06, 2015; date of current version December 02, 2015. This work was supported by the next 4 parties: the Swedish Research Council VR, by the Swedish Governmental Agency for Innovation Systems VINNOVA via a project within the VINN Excellence center Chase, the European Research Council (ERC) via the advanced investigator grant ERC-2012-ADG-20120216, and the Spanish Government under project TEC2013-44019-R. A. A. Brazález, A. Vosoogh and P.-S. Kildal are with the Department of Signals and Systems, Chalmers University of Technology, Göteborg SE-412 96, Sweden (e-mail: [email protected]; [email protected]). E. Rajo-Iglesias and J.-L. Vázquez-Roy are with the Department of Signal Theory and Communication, University Carlos III of Madrid, Madrid 28911, Spain. Color versions of one or more of the figures in this paper are available online at http://ieeexplore.ieee.org. Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/TMTT.2015.2495141
Common planar circuit technologies such as microstrip or coplanar waveguide (CPW) are typically used at millimeterwave frequencies for integration of active and passive components and for designing millimeter-wave planar array antennas. A low-cost, lightweight, compact profile and easy manufacturing are the key factors that make planar structures attractive for high-frequency applications. However, they experience high conductive and dielectric losses, radiation leakage, and the presence of surface waves [1]. The losses become especially critical when designing microstrip feed networks [2]. The consequences of all these limitations are a considerable reduction in the gain and antenna efficiency, as well as high sidelobes. On the other hand, hollow waveguide slot arrays show low loss, high gain, and high radiation efficiency. Still, the manufacturing of multilayer waveguide distribution feed networks [3], [4] and the integration of active and passive components becomes very challenging as the operating frequency increases. The reason is the severe tolerances requirements to ensure good conducting joints between the split metal blocks composing the waveguide. Substrate integrated waveguide (SIW) constitutes a planar printed circuit board (PCB) solution by which the substrate has ground planes on both sides, and waveguides are formed between rows of metalized via holes embedded in the substrate [5], [6]. SIW has electromagnetic characteristics similar to standard hollow waveguides, and at the same time, preserving the advantages of PCB technology. An extensive amount of research has been done during the past ten years on the design of passive components and antennas in SIW technology [7]–[9]. However, SIWs suffer from the disadvantage of higher loss than hollow waveguides due to the unavoidable loss tangent of the dielectric. Low loss substrates can become expensive, and they are often mechanically soft, which will increase the cost of providing via holes when mass-produced. Moreover, the design of SIW components may become a complex process due to the need of finetuning of the placement of the large amount of via holes present in the SIW circuits. A new guiding structure called gap waveguide was proposed to overcome the above-mentioned limitations of the traditional technologies used at millimeter-wave frequencies (microstrip, standard waveguides, and SIW). The theoretical background of the gap waveguide technology can be found in [10]–[13], and the verification by measurements of a first ridge gap -band was presented waveguide demonstrator operating in in [14]. The gap waveguide approach is able to merge the benefits of the traditional millimeter-wave technologies. First,
0018-9480 © 2015 IEEE. Personal use is permitted, but republication/redistribution requires IEEE permission. See http://www.ieee.org/publications_standards/publications/rights/index.html for more information.
4036
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
it has low losses [15] because dielectric material is not really needed. In addition, the fields are strictly confined within the air gap, thereby allowing for an increase of the line dimensions, resulting in a reduction of the conductive losses. Another relevant factor is that the gap structure is properly packaged by itself, since the employed periodic structure together with the smooth metal plate removes any possible leakage. Furthermore, the non-conductive assembly of the two metal plates of gap prototypes makes them more flexible and cost-effective to manufacture than hollow waveguides. The integration of active RF parts, passive components, and antennas in the same gap waveguide millimeter-wave module is our overall goal. This integration requires compatibility towards both planar structures (microstrip, CPW) and rectangular waveguides. The reason is that monolithic microwave integrated circuits (MMICs) are substrate-based and their inputs–outputs are typically 50- planar transmission lines. Some good transitions to microstrip–CPW have been already studied in order to integrate MMIC chips into gap waveguides [16]–[18]. On the other hand, millimeter-wave measurement equipment is usually standardized to rectangular waveguides and CPW, the latter for ground–signal–ground probe stations. In [17], a vialess air-bridge transition from CPW to ridge gap waveguide operating at 100 GHz was proposed, showing a return loss smaller than 15 dB over almost 10% bandwidth. In the present paper, we introduce two wideband and compact gap waveguide transitions to standard WR-15 rectangular waveguide operating in the 60-GHz band. Sections II–VI deal with a first transition design that interconnects an inverted microstrip gap waveguide to WR-15. Sections VII–VIII introduce the geometry of a transition from microstrip packaged by a lid of nails, to a WR-15. Section IX presents a millimeter-wave comparative study of loss of the two gap waveguide versions mentioned before. We also include two additional cases in the comparison: an unpackaged microstrip line and a substrate integrated waveguide, both operating in the 60-GHz band. II. INVERTED MICROSTRIP GAP WAVEGUIDE The inverted microstrip gap waveguide technology is based on the presence of a thin substrate that lies over a periodic pin pattern, i.e., a bed of nails [19], [20]. This bed of nails constitutes an artificial magnetic conductor (AMC) material, which, combined with a smooth metal plate, defines a cutoff of all parallel-plate modes and surface waves within an air gap (the distance between the bed of nails and the metal plate, which should be smaller than quarter wavelength). Thereby, all waves are prohibited also in the presence of the dielectric layer. Only local waves are allowed to propagate along strips etched on this substrate. The suppression of parallel-plate modes and surface waves is ensured within a certain frequency band referred to as a stopband [21]. Fig. 1 shows the basic layout of the inverted microstrip gap waveguide. Since our transition needs to cover the whole unlicensed 60-GHz frequency band, the pin dimensions of the inverted microstrip gap waveguide have been suitably chosen to reach a stopband that includes as much as possible of the -band. These dimensions are described in Table I, and Fig. 2(a) shows the corresponding dispersion diagram for the infinite unit cell
Fig. 1. Basic geometry of the inverted microstrip gap waveguide.
without metal strip on the printed circuit board (PCB), whereas Fig. 2(b) illustrates the resulting dispersion diagram for the infinite unit cell considering a metal strip on the top side of the PCB. The dispersion diagram has been obtained by using the Eigenmode solver of CST Microwave Studio. The considered substrate material is Rogers RO3003 with permittivity , loss tangent (specifications are at 10 GHz according to Rogers material data sheet), and thickness 0.25 mm. Fig. 2(a) shows that there is a parallel-plate stopband between 50.55 and 75 GHz, and Fig. 2(b) illustrates that there is a single propagating mode between 52.4 and 68 GHz, which involves the whole 60-GHz frequency band. This is the desired quasi-TEM mode following the strip. The stopband of the parallel-plate modes appears between 50.55 and 75 GHz. The mode appearing at 68 GHz is discussed in more detail in Section IV. The inverted microstrip gap waveguide technology constitutes an attractive alternative to standard microstrip, especially for designing corporate feed-networks of horn/slot antenna array systems [22]. A critical obstacle so far has been the absence of good transitions that allow connection of the inverted microstrip gap prototypes to measurement equipment at millimeter-wave frequencies. A previous transition investigation [23] shows a wideband behavior, but the rectangular waveguide opening extents vertically upwards from the top side of the PCB. The best option for antenna applications would be to use vertical transitions that extent downwards. This means that the rectangular waveguide opening is placed on the bottom side of the PCB, in a similar way as the transition from microstrip ridge gap waveguide to WR-15 presented in [24] used for the gap waveguide feed-network in [25]. In this way, the rectangular waveguide opening is located on the opposite plate compared to that of the radiating elements of the array, and we can allow connection to the transmitting or receiving amplifiers from the back-side of the PCB without affecting the antenna radiation pattern. Reference [26] presents a preliminary downwards transition from inverted microstrip gap waveguide to WR-8, but the performance shows a limited bandwidth (return loss is better than 15 dB over 10.5%). In the next section we will present the design of a new transition that ensures much better compatibility between inverted microstrip gap waveguide and WR-15. III. INVERTED MICROSTRIP GAP WAVEGUIDE TO WR-15 TRANSITION DESIGN We can distinguish between three main types of transitions: 1) inline transitions (positioned along propagation direction of the waveguide) [27], [28];
BRAZÁLEZ et al.: DESIGN AND VALIDATION OF MICROSTRIP GAP WAVEGUIDES AND THEIR TRANSITIONS TO RECTANGULAR WAVEGUIDE
DIMENSIONS
TABLE I GAP WAVEGUIDE LAYER (REFERRED UNIT CELL SHOWN IN FIG. 2)
OF
TO
TABLE II DIMENSIONS OF PCB LAYER (REFERRED LAYOUT SHOWN IN FIGS. 3 AND 4)
4037
TO
Fig. 3. Transition geometry (top view). Substrate is hidden to allow visualization of rectangular waveguide opening details.
Fig. 2. (a) Dispersion diagram for the corresponding infinite periodic unit cell without metal strip. (b) Dispersion diagram for the corresponding infinite periodic unit cell including metal strip on the top of the PCB.
2) vertical transitions (placed transversally to propagation direction of the waveguide) [29]–[32]; 3) aperture-coupled patch transitions: the field/impedance matching is achieved via a resonant patch through an aperture in the ground plane of the transmission line. This usually constitutes a subtype within the vertical transitions group [33], [34].
In [33] and [34], vertical transitions from standard microstrip to rectangular waveguide based on type 3 were described. The main issue of this type of transition is the potential leakage of parallel-plate modes into the substrate due to the presence of different parallel metal layers. The only way to avoid these modes is by adding via holes, which means an increase in the design complexity and manufacturing cost. These metalized via holes are also needed to create the extension of the waveguide walls into the PCB. In this section, we present a wideband vertical transition between inverted microstrip gap waveguide and WR-15. The principle of operation of the here proposed gap waveguide transition is based on well-known -plane probe transitions that have been widely employed to interconnect microstrip lines with rectangular waveguides [29]–[32]. In our design, there is no need to add any via holes to avoid parallel-plate or higher order modes. The reason for this is that any possible excitation of these modes is eliminated by the gap waveguide itself. Moreover, the transition is easily integrated into the rectangular waveguide, and no complex modifications or holes in the walls of the waveguide are needed in order to ensure such integration. The transition presented in [29] shows a small hole in the broad wall of the waveguide that allows the insertion of a microstrip probe. The transition comprises two main parts. First, a PCB is positioned over a bed of pins, and it contains a 50- feeding line terminated by a two-step tapered matching circuit. These tapered-
4038
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 4. (a) Cross section of complete transition geometry. (b) Cavity backshort placed on top metal lid above PCB and opposite to the rectangular waveguide opening (substrate material is hidden to visualize position of strips with respect to cavity backshort).
line sections act as an impedance transformer and are properly placed over the rectangular waveguide opening. A parametric sweep of the position and dimensions of the matching circuit has been carried out in order to achieve optimum return loss within the frequency band under interest. The layout of the transition circuit is shown on Fig. 3, and all parameter values are specified in Table II. On the other hand, the transition geometry is complemented by adding a cavity backshort on the upper metal lid (see cross section of the complete transition geometry illustrated in Fig. 4). Theoretically, this cavity should be from the inverted microstrip placed at a distance equal to probe in order to establish an open boundary condition on the PCB plane. In this way, we force the quasi-TEM fields of the inverted microstrip gap waveguide to propagate down into the mode of WR-15. waveguide and match the fundamental The backshort is positioned opposite to the rectangular waveguide opening, and its transversal dimensions are the same as those of the standard WR-15. The distance between the backand then tuned in short and the substrate was initially set as order to compensate the reactance introduced by the two-step matching probe and optimize the transition behavior. Hereby, the backshort together with the tapered line contained in the PCB contributes to provide field matching as well as impedance matching over a wide bandwidth. IV. SIMULATED RESULTS AND LOSSES IN INVERTED MICROSTRIP GAP WAVEGUIDE This section presents simulation results of three prototypes. First, a transition between inverted microstrip gap waveguide and WR-15 in single configuration (see Fig. 5) is numerically analyzed. Afterwards, a 10-cm (approximately 20 wavelengths) straight inverted microstrip gap waveguide, and another inverted gap prototype that includes two 90 bends, are studied. The second and third prototypes contain the transitions proposed in Section III placed at both sides of a 50- feeding line, i.e., constituting two back-to-back transition configurations. The complete analyzed back-to-back geometries are shown in Fig. 6. The simulations of the -parameters are carried out by
Fig. 5. Simulated single transition from inverted microstrip gap waveguide to rectangular waveguide, with distinction of all different components of the structure.
Fig. 6. Simulated inverted microstrip gap waveguide prototypes (top metal plate containing cavity backshorts is hidden in order to allow visualization of PCB details): (a) straight 10-cm line and (b) line with 90 bends.
using CST Microwave Studio. We should point out that the substrate material employed in our designs is Rogers RO3003, as was mentioned in Section II. In the Rogers Corporation at 10 GHz is given. datasheet, a loss tangent of However, no data of loss tangent as a function of frequency is provided. We did some investigations in order to find further dielectric specifications of Rogers RO3003 material at higher frequencies. In [35], dielectric constant and loss tangent as a function of frequency for different materials are presented. It is stated that the loss tangent of Rogers RO3003 remains below 0.003 between 30 and 67 GHz. Thereby, we have considered this data in the simulations of our -band transitions. The resulted -parameters are illustrated in Fig. 7 for the single configuration case and in Fig. 8 for back-to-back structures. parameter, the mismatch factor In the represented ) has been removed in order to just visualize the ( dissipative contribution of the loss that results from conductive, dielectric, and radiation losses. We can also assume that radiation loss is very small since the gap prototypes are properly packaged and any possible radiation due to discontinuities is
BRAZÁLEZ et al.: DESIGN AND VALIDATION OF MICROSTRIP GAP WAVEGUIDES AND THEIR TRANSITIONS TO RECTANGULAR WAVEGUIDE
Fig. 7. Simulated -parameters of a single transition between inverted microstrip gap waveguide and WR-15.
Fig. 8. Simulated -parameters of two back-to-back configurations: (a) straight 10-cm geometry and (b) prototype with bends.
reduced to a minimum. The expression of dissipation loss is thereby Loss(dB)
(1)
4039
Fig. 9. Transmission coefficient without mismatch factor contribution of a 10-cm-long inverted microstrip gap waveguide (it includes transitions at both sides of the line).
We should point out that in all the plots shown in this paper, parameter the mismatch factor has been removed from the in this way. Simulated results of -parameters for the transition in single configuration (see Fig. 6) show that return loss is larger than 15 dB from 55 to 70.5 GHz, which implies approximately 24.7% relative bandwidth. The dissipation loss attributed to a single transition is smaller than 0.5 dB over the same bandwidth. The simulated reflection coefficient of the back-to-back configuration represented in Fig. 8(a) remains below 10 dB from 53.75 to 70.7 GHz, which means 27.2% relative bandwidth. In the simulated -parameters of the gap prototype with two 90 bends [see Fig. 8(b)], we can appreciate that return loss is larger than 10 dB between 54 and 68.5 GHz (i.e., 23.7% relative bandwidth). The upper limit of the stopband shows up at lower frequency (at around 68.5 GHz) than in the straight inverted microstrip gap waveguide case. The upper limit of the single-mode frequency band can be identified as the frequency at which resonance peaks start to appear. The dispersion diagram presented in Fig. 2(b) establishes a single-mode band between 52.4 and 68 GHz. This dispersion diagram shows a second strip mode appearing at around 68 GHz. This mode shows by further investigations to be asymmetric and causes the ripples of the simulated -parameters of the line with two bends shown in Fig. 8(b). These ripples do not appear in the straight back-to-back line [simulated results presented in Fig. 8(a)] because this geometry is symmetric. In spite of this second mode appearing at around 68.5 GHz, the transition covers the whole unlicensed 60-GHz band with wide margins. Dissipation loss for the back-to-back structures is smaller than 1.9 dB over the previously mentioned bandwidths. The corresponding dissipation loss value at 60 GHz is about 1.3 dB for both prototypes. Fig. 9 shows the simulated dissipation coefficient, i.e., transmission coefficient without the contribution due to the mismatch factor, of the 10-cm straight back-to-back inverted microstrip gap waveguide when considering the combination of different metal and dielectric materials (lossless or lossy materials). The
4040
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
purpose of this study is to examine which is the main contributor to the overall loss of the inverted microstrip gap waveguide. As we can appreciate in Fig. 9, the best case occurs when the conductor material is set as perfect electric conductor (PEC) and the dielectric material is chosen as lossless Rogers RO3003, i.e., the loss tangent is modeled as zero. When the gap waveguide layer is modeled as real silver, and the metal strips of the PCB remain as PEC and the dielectric is lossless, the loss increases around 0.4 dB at 60 GHz. If all metallic parts are real (gap layers are silver and metal strips on the PCB are modeled as copper) and the dielectric material is still considered as lossless, the loss increases by an additional 0.43 dB at 60 GHz. The total loss in the previous situation is larger than if we consider PEC and lossy Rogers RO3003 (setting the real value of loss tangent) where the increase in the dissipation loss with respect to the ideal case is around 0.53 dB. Therefore, we can conclude that the main contributor to the losses of the inverted microstrip gap waveguide is the conductive loss. V. MEASURED RESULTS In order to experimentally validate the transition geometry introduced in Section III, two back-to-back structures as the ones shown in Section IV have been manufactured and measured. The mechanical drawings of the straight inverted microstrip gap waveguide are presented in Fig. 10. These drawings are analogous for the prototype with bends. The fabrication of the pin patterns to compose the gap waveguide interface has been realized by using metallic posts created by a computer numerical control (CNC) milling machine. The rectangular waveguide openings needed to fix the WR-15 flanges on the measurement setup and cavity backshorts are milled out from the lower and upper metal plates, respectively. The different building metal blocks are fabricated on brass and are silver-plated afterwards. On the other hand, the PCB is manufactured by standard etching. The ground plane of the PCB is removed, and all metal strips are made of copper. The mechanical assembling of the complete structure is done by using two guiding pins and six screws. Therefore, the prototypes are easy to assemble and disassemble, and no extra gluing or soldering is needed to hold all the different parts of the geometry together. The required air gap is established by adding two metal rectangular steps of thickness equal to 0.25 mm on the upper metal layer. Measurements were realized by employing a HP8510C vector network analyzer (VNA) and two -band HP V85104A testset modules. A standard thru-reflect-line (TRL) calibration was performed in order to extract the effect of the connectors and be able to move the measurement reference plane to the WR-15 opening created in the lower metal plate of the fabricated gap waveguides. Photographs of the measurement set up and the two manufactured prototypes are shown in Fig. 11(a), (b), and (c), respectively. Fig. 12 presents a comparison between simulations and measurements of -parameters for the straight 10-cm-long inverted microstrip gap waveguide. We can observe that there exists a big shift in frequency of the transition performance (around 7.5 GHz at lower frequencies and 2.5 GHz at higher frequencies). Measured return loss is about 5 dB worse in most of the band with respect to simulations, but there is good agreement regarding response in Fig. 13), showing dissipation loss (see zoomed
Fig. 10. Mechanical drawings of the manufactured gap waveguide prototypes including back-to-back transitions.
Fig. 11. (a) Measurement equipment, (b) 10-cm straight inverted microstrip gap waveguide prototype, and (c) inverted microstrip gap waveguide with bends.
only around 0.17 dB of discrepancy that can be originated from mechanical and assembling tolerances. These measurement results show that dissipation loss is smaller than 2 dB over 19% relative bandwidth, whilst return loss is better than 10 dB over the mentioned bandwidth. The shift in frequency and the degradation of the transition performance are limitations that need to be explained. After some investigations in terms of manufacturing and assembling tolerances, we found that the substrate material (Rogers RO3003) is mechanically too soft and therefore bends easily. A consequence of this is that the PCB does not remain rigidly supported over the bed of pins, and there are some points in
BRAZÁLEZ et al.: DESIGN AND VALIDATION OF MICROSTRIP GAP WAVEGUIDES AND THEIR TRANSITIONS TO RECTANGULAR WAVEGUIDE
4041
Fig. 12. Simulated and measured -parameters of back-to-back transition between inverted microstrip gap waveguide and WR-15 (straight gap waveguide prototype by using Rogers RO3003 as substrate material).
Fig. 15. (a) 10-cm straight inverted microstrip gap waveguide prototype with foam attached to the top metal lid (zoomed area shows the section cut out from the foam), and (b) simulations versus measurements of -parameters of backto-back straight inverted microstrip gap waveguide to WR-15 transition (Rogers RO3003 as substrate and Rohacell HERO71 foam attached to top metal lid). (straight gap waveguide Fig. 13. Zoomed view of simulated and measured prototype with Rogers RO3003 as substrate material).
Fig. 14. Sketch of inverted microstrip gap waveguide showing a curved dielectric profile.
which the pins do not have a good contact with the substrate (see Fig. 14). We verified by simulations that such non-touching pins become electrically shorter, and thereby the stopband in Fig. 2 shifts towards higher frequencies. As a result, unwanted parallel-plate modes appear at frequencies where the transition is supposed to work well according to our simulated results. This “non-contact effect” between pins and PCB will be demonstrated by simulations in Section VI. This effect constitutes a critical limitation for the inverted microstrip gap waveguide technology, but different alternative so-
lutions can help to mitigate it. One option is to employ more rigid dielectrics such as Rogers RO4003, at the expense of some additional loss. A second alternative is to fill up the gap with thin foam material in order to push the PCB down and thereby ensure good contact with the pins. However, the foam may add loss as well, and we found that foam suppliers do not provide dielectric specifications for millimeter-wave frequencies. Another solution would be to estimate the non-contact effect in advance and design the inverted microstrip gap waveguide with longer pins. In this way, we will still get a shift in frequency, but we will cover the desired frequency band. We have performed new measurements of the prototypes by considering the first two alternatives. First, a thin Rohacell HERO71 foam of thickness equal to 0.22 mm is tested to fill the air gap. Dielectric properties of this foam are not available, so we assume that it is similar to Rohacell HF71 since the chemical natures of HF and HERO are the same according to the supplier. The permittivity is , both specified and loss tangent at 26.5 GHz according to the data sheet of HF71 foam. We performed new measurements by filling the gap with the men-
4042
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
tioned foam. Fig. 15(a) shows how the foam is placed in the top metal lid. There is an area that has been cut out from the foam in order to allow the fields to propagate within air and reduce the loss attributed to the foam. In this way, the foam still contributes to push down the PCB and ensure better contact between the substrate and the pins, and, moreover, the additional loss is reduced. A comparison between new simulations and measurements is illustrated in Fig. 15(b). The new measured reflection coefficient is lower than 10 dB, and the experimental dissipation loss is better than 2 dB from 56.6 to 72.8 GHz, which implies 25% bandwidth. These results are better than those we got without using foam, proving that the non-contact effect between pins and PCB is the reason for the discrepancies between measurements and simulations. Moreover, there is good agreement between the measured and simulated insertion loss, as seen in Fig. 16. The dissipation factor at 60 GHz is 1.38 dB for both simulations and measurements. Even though these new experimental results are better than the plotted ones in Fig. 12, there is still a shift in the frequency band. Since the structure is very long (10 cm), it might be difficult to ensure a uniform contact between the bed of pins and PCB in all the points along the geometry. Furthermore, the foam that we use is 0.22 mm thick, since there were no available foams of exactly 0.25 mm, which is the size of the gap. All this can provoke that we do not yet get perfect contact everywhere. Nevertheless, we still observe an important improvement in the measured -parameters. Another way to reduce the non-contact effect between pins and PCB is to replace the soft Rogers RO3003 material by a more rigid substrate. We have chosen Rogers RO4003 mate, loss tangent rial with permittivity (values are specified at 10 GHz), and thickness 0.203 mm. With these values, the dispersion diagram is very similar to that obtained in Fig. 2. Furthermore, since the fields of the inverted microstrip gap waveguide are mainly confined within the air gap, the fact of using a new substrate with similar permittivity and thickness does not affect the dimensions of the circuit. Thereby, the performance of the transition will be the same without redesigning it (the insertion loss will be a bit higher though due to the new value of the loss tangent). New PCBs were manufactured on Rogers RO4003 and tested reusing the same gap waveguide layers. Measurements and simulations of -parameters are plotted together on Fig. 17, as well as a zoomed version of simulated and measured dissipation factors shown in Fig. 18. First of all, we observe a flat frequency re-parameter over a wider frequency bandwidth sponse of the than the results presented in Fig. 12 when Rogers RO3003 was the selected substrate. However, there is about a 1.4-dB discrepancy between simulated and measured dissipation losses. The main reason for this may be that our simulations take into account a loss tangent value for Rogers RO4003 specified by the data sheet at 10 GHz since no available data has been found at 60 GHz. Therefore, this comparison is not perfectly realistic. The measured dissipation loss is better than 3 dB over a 22.65% relative bandwidth (between 58.25 and 73.13 GHz). The reflection coefficient remains below 10 dB over the same frequency band. These values make clear that using a more rigid material instead of RO3003 improves the circuit performance in terms of bandwidth but with a consequent increase in the loss (Rogers RO4003 has higher loss tangent than RO3003).
Fig. 16. Zoomed view of simulated and measured (straight gap waveguide prototype using Rogers RO3003 as substrate and foam material to fill the gap).
Fig. 17. Simulated and measured -parameters of back-to-back transition between straight inverted microstrip gap waveguide and WR-15 by using Rogers RO4003 as substrate material.
Fig. 18. Zoomed view of simulated and measured (straight gap waveguide prototype using Rogers RO4003 as substrate material).
BRAZÁLEZ et al.: DESIGN AND VALIDATION OF MICROSTRIP GAP WAVEGUIDES AND THEIR TRANSITIONS TO RECTANGULAR WAVEGUIDE
Fig. 19. Simulated and measured -parameters of back-to-back transition between straight inverted microstrip gap waveguide and WR-15 by using Rogers RO4003 as substrate material and Rohacell HERO71 foam to fill the gap.
Fig. 20. Zoomed view of simulated and measured (straight gap waveguide prototype using Rogers RO4003 as substrate material and Rohacell HERO71 foam to fill the gap).
As an additional part of this transition study, we also tried to improve the results of Fig. 17 by filling the gap with Rohacell HERO71 foam when using RO4003 substrate. These new measurements are depicted in Fig. 19. The plots of both measured return loss and dissipation loss show improved performance compared with Figs. 17 and 18 where no foam was added. Fig. 20 illustrates a comparison of simulated versus measured results for -parameter, and it is clear that the better contact between the pins and PCB, the lower losses and larger operating bandwidth. Dissipation losses are lower than 3 dB from 56.1 to 73.3 GHz, which means 26.6% bandwidth. There is again certain discrepancy between simulated and measured losses. The explanation is again the fact that we do not simulate the structure with the real loss tangent that RO4003 should have at 60 GHz. Return loss level remains above 10 dB over all the previously specified bandwidths. The last part of our study was to measure an inverted microstrip gap waveguide prototype containing two 90 bends
4043
with Rogers RO3003 substrate and filling the air gap with Rohacell HERO71 foam. We can predict in advance that the non-contact effect will be much more critical on this situation for two reasons. The first is that the PCB is wider than in the straight prototype case so that there will be more points where there is no good contact between pins and dielectric. The second reason is that there is a limited number of rows of only 11 pins each supporting the PCB. This number is more than enough to provide cutoff of fields outside the metal strip that composes the gap waveguide. However, outside the pin area the PCB has no support and bends more easily if we use a soft material such as RO3003. To reduce the consequence of this issue, we added two metal blocks of thickness equal to 1 mm (the closest to the pin height that we could achieve in the workshop) in the empty areas next to the pin patterns, as seen in Fig. 11(c). These metal blocks, together with the foam, are aimed to alleviate the consequences of the non-uniform contact between pins and PCB. Fig. 21(a) shows the inverted microstrip gap waveguide prototype with bends and how the foam is attached into the upper metal lid. There is an area that has been cut out from the foam and has approximately the same shape as the metal strip along which the fields propagate. Fig. 21(b) presents resulting simulated versus measured results of the inverted microstrip gap waveguide with bends including transitions (back-to-back configuration). We observe that there is more discrepancy between simulations and measurements than for the previous situations where we were analyzing a straight geometry. Even by using foam material, there is a large shift in the operating band of the prototype, and there exist some ripples in the lower part of this band. We can conclude that the wider the structure is, the more critical is the non-contact effect. Moreover, it is very probable that the presence of discontinuities combined with the non-contact between pins and PCB at certain points is the main cause for the performance degradations. It would be possible to improve the measured results by employing foams that can fill the gap everywhere to ensure uniform contact. Also, the area that has been cut out from the foam could be realized in a more accurate way in particular around the bends. The best measured dissipation loss is 2.1 dB at 63.45 GHz, and return loss larger than 10 dB over a 18% relative bandwidth (from 58.75 to 70.4 GHz). Table III summarizes the most important results achieved for the straight inverted microstrip gap waveguide prototypes, including the back-to-back transitions to WR-15 analyzed in this section. From the data of this table, we can conclude that by using a more rigid substrate material such as RO4003 and filling at the same time the gap with thin foam, we can reach the best circuit performance (the closest to simulations) in terms of bandwidth and return loss. The drawback is higher insertion loss compared to using Rogers RO3003. VI. SENSITIVITY DUE TO NON-CONTACT BETWEEN PINS AND PCB In this section, we are going to demonstrate by simulations that the deterioration in the circuit performance, as well as the shift in the operating band (both experienced during measurements), are due to the non-contact effect between the bed of pins and the substrate material. For this aim, we generate some curved substrate profiles with a cosine variation along the longitudinal axis, and other profiles with a cosine variation in the
4044
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
TABLE III COMPARISON OF MEASURED DISSIPATION LOSS AND OPERATING BANDWIDTH FOR ALL STRAIGHT INVERTED MICROSTRIP GAP WAVEGUIDE PROTOTYPES ANALYZED (INCLUDING BACK-TO-BACK TRANSITIONS TO WR-15)
Fig. 22. Simulated -parameters by using generated curved PCB (longitudinal variation and good contact in the transition area). Fig. 21. (a) Inverted microstrip gap waveguide prototype with bends, foam is attached to top metal lid (zoomed area shows the section cut out from the foam to allow fields to propagate through air) and (b) simulated and measured -parameters of back-to-back transition between inverted microstrip gap waveguide and WR-15 by using Rogers RO3003 as substrate material and Rohacell HERO71 foam to fill the gap.
transverse direction. In these surfaces, the peak-to-peak value and the number of periods can be controlled. First, we consider longitudinal cosine variation and use a small planar piece of substrate to ensure good contact with the bed of nails at the points where the transitions are operating. There is also contact between the substrate and the bed of nails in those points where the cosine has minima. The microstrip line, which is etched on the substrate, is generated using the same set of equations. Fig. 22 presents the simulated results including nine different cases, corresponding to one, two, and three periods in the cosine variation, for peak-to-peak excursions of 0.065, 0.075, and 0.085 mm. We observe that the performance degrades when there is no uniform contact between pins and substrate. Some low-frequency resonant peaks have appeared (indicated with an arrow in Fig. 22). This means that the stopband where the gap waveguide should work has shifted to higher frequencies (around 5–7 GHz, depending on the case).
Furthermore, there exists a degradation in the -parameter of approximately 5 dB with respect to the initial simulations. Next, we remove the small planar pieces of substrate at the ends of the lines (shown as green flat areas in Fig. 22) and let the whole substrate follow the variation of the cosine function. We consider here two subcases: randomly generated longitudinal cosine variations of the dielectric surface, and variations in the transverse direction, as illustrated in the insets of Fig. 23. This figure presents four simulated results for these two cases with a peak-to-peak excursion of 0.065 mm, and the obtained effect is the same as that observed in Fig. 22, plus an additional one: the upper frequency limit of the parameters moves upwards in the same way as in the measurements. The frequency shift is indicated with arrows in Fig. 23. These results confirm that the observed frequency shift and degradation of the measured -parameters are due to the nonuniform contact between the pin surface and the PCB. The experienced shifts in the lower and upper limits of the band are similar to the measured results (around 7.5 GHz in the lower limit and 2 GHz in the upper one). Some other test with two-dimensional randomly generated surfaces with variations in both longitudinal and transverse directions showed similar results.
BRAZÁLEZ et al.: DESIGN AND VALIDATION OF MICROSTRIP GAP WAVEGUIDES AND THEIR TRANSITIONS TO RECTANGULAR WAVEGUIDE
Fig. 23. Simulated -parameters by using generated curved PCB (transversal/ longitudinal variation and no good contact in the transition area).
4045
Fig. 24. (a) Cross-section of complete transition geometry. (b) Cavity backshort placed on top metal lid above PCB and opposite to the rectangular waveguide opening (red lines), and slot made on ground plane of PCB, blue surface is the substrate material under the ground plane.
This effect is a critical limitation for the inverted microstrip gap waveguide technology, but different alternative solutions can mitigate it, which we already explained thoroughly in Section V. VII. TRANSITION FROM MICROSTRIP PACKAGED BY GAP WAVEGUIDE TO WR-15 We present here the design of a wideband millimeter-wave transition from standard microstrip (being packaged by gap waveguide technology) to WR-15. The purpose is to compare the losses of the inverted microstrip gap waveguide and a standard microstrip line packaged by gap waveguide. The previously manufactured gap waveguide layers could be reused, but the PCB was redesigned and assembled to the gap waveguide structure in a different way (see the next section). The cross section of the complete geometry is shown in Fig. 24(a). We can distinguish two main parts in this structure. A first section composes the gap waveguide layer that contains a pin pattern surrounding the rectangular waveguide opening. This enables connection to rectangular WR-15 waveguide flanges. The second part of the structure consists of a standard microstrip circuit that includes a 50- feeding line terminated by a T-shaped probe which faces the rectangular waveguide opening. A cavity backshort is still needed to be integrated in the upper metal lid. The combination of the T-shaped probe and the cavity backshort ensure field/impedance matching between the local quasi-TEM mode of the microstrip line, and mode of the rectangular waveguide. The ground the plane of the PCB contains a slot that allows the backshort to force the fields to propagate downwards into the waveguide from the microstrip probe. The cavity backshort embedded in the top metal lid and the slot made in the ground plane of the PCB have equal transversal dimensions and are both illustrated in Fig. 24(b). The layout of the microstrip circuit is depicted in Fig. 25, where the specified parameters are referred to in Table IV. The dimensions of the pin surface are the same as shown in Fig. 2 and
Fig. 25. Transition geometry (top view). Substrate layers and ground plane of PCB are hidden to allow visualization of rectangular waveguide opening details.
TABLE IV DIMENSIONS OF PCB (REFERRED TO LAYOUT SHOWN IN FIGS. 24 AND 25)
Table I. Therefore, we can reuse the manufactured gap waveguides for performing measurements of this new transition. It is important to point out that the air gap now is filled with Rogers RO3003 material for two reasons. The first reason is illustrated in Fig. 26. If the gap is filled with air [Fig. 26(a)], the obtained dispersion diagram of the new geometry does not coincide with the 60-GHz band that is covered by the prototypes investigated in Sections II–VI. However, if we fill the gap with
4046
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 26. (a) Dispersion diagram for the corresponding microstrip geometry when gap is filled with air. (b) Dispersion diagram for the corresponding microstrip geometry when gap is filled with substrate material.
Rogers RO3003, the pins are electrically longer, and the stopband is shifted to lower frequencies. Thus, it covers the frequency band from 53 to 68.3 GHz [Fig. 26(b)]. In this way, we can make a fair loss comparison in the same frequency interval, between the obtained measured results of the inverted microstrip gap waveguide circuits and the new designed microstrip prototypes. The second reason is that we take the advantage of fixing the gap by using a substrate of the same thickness and without the need of making any extra step in the metal blocks. In spite of filling the gap with RO3003, the fields still mainly propagate within the corresponding substrate material of the PCB since the geometry is packaged by gap waveguide and there is cutoff of fields between the pin surface and the metal strip of the PCB. VIII. SIMULATED VERSUS MEASURED RESULTS The transition design proposed in Section VII is numerically analyzed in terms of -parameters in single and back-to-back configurations. A sketch of the different parts composing the single transition geometry is presented in Fig. 27(a), and the corresponding simulated -parameters are shown in Fig. 27(b). The simulated return loss is larger than 15 dB over about 28.3% relative bandwidth (from 50.75 to 67.45 GHz), while the resulting dissipation loss is smaller than 0.5 dB over the same bandwidth. The dissipation factor for the presented single transition within the stopband shown in Fig. 26(b) would be smaller than 0.2 dB. As we said, the manufactured gap waveguide prototypes employed to build the inverted microstrip gap waveguide designs investigated in Sections II–VI were reused to constitute the standard microstrip lines packaged by gap waveguide technology. The assembling of the different building blocks is illustrated in Fig. 28. Fig. 29(a) shows the measured prototype, and Fig. 29(b) presents a comparison between simulations and measurements of two back-to-back transitions connected by a 10-cm 50- microstrip line. The plotted parameters show good
Fig. 27. (a) Sketch of simulated single transition from standard microstrip packaged by gap waveguide to rectangular waveguide, with distinction of all different components of the structure. (b) Simulated -parameters of a single transition between standard microstrip packaged by gap waveguide and WR-15.
agreement between measurements and simulations in terms of losses. However, there is again a shift in the operating band of the measured prototype. As before, this is attributed to the non-uniform contact between the pin surface and the substrate layer that fills the gap. Rogers RO3003 material is so soft that it can have a curved profile even when it is used to fill the air gap. Since the structure is quite long, there might be points where the dielectric layer does not make good contact with the pins, thereby shifting to higher frequencies. Fig. 30 presents a zoomed version of the transmission coefficient showing a
BRAZÁLEZ et al.: DESIGN AND VALIDATION OF MICROSTRIP GAP WAVEGUIDES AND THEIR TRANSITIONS TO RECTANGULAR WAVEGUIDE
4047
Fig. 28. Mechanical drawings of the manufactured gap waveguide prototypes including back-to-back transitions from microstrip to WR-15.
smaller value than 5 dB over about 13.8% bandwidth (between 58.6 and 67.3 GHz). The experimental return loss is larger than 15 dB over the mentioned frequency band. IX. LOSS COMPARISON After the validation of the proposed millimeter-wave back-to-back transitions from two different gap waveguide versions to rectangular waveguide, we compare the simulated/measured loss in this section. Four planar back-to-back structures are involved in this comparison: inverted microstrip gap waveguide, standard microstrip packaged by using gap waveguide technology, standard microstrip without including any type of packaging (data obtained from the catalogue of Southwest Microwave, in the corresponding section about end launch connectors), and substrate integrated waveguide (measurements and simulation results are presented in [36]). Table V summarizes the minimum and maximum dissipation over the operating bandwidth (also loss expressed in dB/ specified in the table). In all analyzed cases, the mismatch -parameters in factors have been extracted from the original order to only visualize the dissipative component of the insertion loss and achieve a fair comparison among all prototypes. The microstrip geometry used in the Southwest Microwave catalogue has the same substrate thickness as the Rogers RO4003 material employed on the design of our inverted microstrip gap waveguide prototypes explained in previous sections. This allows us to realize a straightforward comparison between both structures. We can clearly see that the loss attributed to the unpackaged microstrip is much larger than for the inverted microstrip gap waveguide case. One of the reasons for this is a reduction of the conductive loss in the
Fig. 29. (a) Microstrip packaged by gap waveguide, (b) Simulated and measured –parameters of back-to-back transition between standard microstrip packaged by gap waveguide and WR-15 by using Rogers RO3003 as substrate material of PCB and layer to fill the gap.
inverted microstrip gap waveguide compared to microstrip. This is caused by the fact that for achieving same characteristic impedance, the obtained transversal dimensions of the lines in the inverted microstrip gap waveguide become wider than in the microstrip geometry, hence reducing the conductive loss. On the other hand, the fields are propagating within air in the inverted microstrip gap waveguide geometry, thereby reducing the dielectric loss. Furthermore, since the microstrip line is not properly packaged, the radiation loss is also an important additional contributor to the overall loss. The inverted microstrip gap waveguide is inherently packaged and the radiation loss is non-existent. When we package a microstrip circuit with gap waveguide technology (as we did in Sections VII–VIII), the radiation loss is reduced to zero and the fields are completely confined within the substrate. This confirms that the attenuation for a microstrip
4048
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 30. Zoomed view of simulated and measured (back-to-back configuration of transition from standard microstrip packaged by gap waveguide to WR-15).
TABLE V COMPARISON OF DISSIPATION LOSS
been performed in order to get an approximate idea of the corresponding loss with that material. The simulated results show a minimum loss of 0.045 dB/ , which constitutes a smaller value than that obtained for SIW case in [36]. We should remark that we are still using the same transition geometry as proposed in Section III. This design could have been retuned in order to optimize the gap waveguide circuit performance when using RT/duroid 5880 material, and thus obtaining a better loss value. We have also compared the transition geometry presented in [36] and our inverted microstrip gap waveguide transition design in terms of design complexity and fabrication. In such SIW transition, a multilayer structure is required to achieve a wide operating frequency band. Each layer has via holes with different periods and are placed in a non-uniform way. Therefore, there are many design parameters involved in the structure, which implies a more complex and time-consuming design process. However, in our structure, we fix a uniform pattern of pins that we never optimize to attain a good transition performance. The only dimensions we need to optimize are the matching probe sections and the depth of the backshort. Moreover, the SIW transition structure requires via holes to be included around the coupling patch in the upper substrate layer, to avoid potential leakage coming from surface waves. This is not needed in the proposed gap waveguide transitions, since all parallel-plate modes and surface waves are suppressed within the stopband. On the other hand, the manufacturing of a uniform pin pattern is quite simple and can be done in techniques suitable for mass production such as micromachining and molding. The manufacturing of the required PCB in the inverted microstrip gap waveguide can be simply done by standard photolithography technique. However, we should remember that for designing inverted microstrip gap waveguides, rigid substrate materials are needed in order to mitigate the non-contact effect between pins and PCB. We should consequently make a trade off when choosing the substrate type considering loss, rigidness and cost. X. CONCLUSION
packaged with gap waveguide is lower than for an open microstrip geometry as it is mentioned in Table V. On the other hand, the measured loss of SIW is slightly larger than for the inverted microstrip gap waveguide designed with RO3003, and has about the same loss magnitude compared with the gap prototype with RO4003 material. However, it is important to point out that the SIW geometry shown in [36] has been designed with low loss RT/duroid 5880 material that has a loss tangent close to 0.001 at 60 GHz (see material specifications in [37]). Therefore, if the inverted microstrip gap waveguide would have been designed with such material, the resulted insertion loss would be lower than the obtained for SIW. A CST simulation of our inverted microstrip gap waveguide design considering RT/duroid 5880 (with thickness equal to 0.25 mm) has
Two broadband millimeter-wave gap waveguide transitions have been presented. The first geometry acts as an interface between inverted microstrip gap waveguide and standard WR-15. The performance has been determined by simulations (in both single and back-to-back configurations) and measurements of electrically long (around 20 wavelengths) back-to-back smaller than prototypes. The experimental results show 10 dB over relative bandwidths larger than 25% and 26.6% when Rogers RO3003 and RO4003 are employed, respectively. A shift in the operating band appears in all measurements. This reveals a critical limitation of the inverted microstrip gap waveguide technology. The reason for this frequency shift is the non-uniform contact between the PCB and the pins along the gap waveguide, and it is more critical the larger the PCB is. We have proposed different ways to mitigate this effect, and we carried out a numerical study of the circuit performance when the substrate was curved. The simulations confirm our explanation. In spite of the non-contact effect, the proposed transition covers the whole 60-GHz band, and its simple and compact configuration makes it suitable to be integrated into an inverted microstrip gap waveguide feed-network for slot/horn array antenna applications. There is no requirement for any
BRAZÁLEZ et al.: DESIGN AND VALIDATION OF MICROSTRIP GAP WAVEGUIDES AND THEIR TRANSITIONS TO RECTANGULAR WAVEGUIDE
complex geometry modifications in the waveguide structure itself to ensure a good integration with the transition. We only need a waveguide opening milled out in the lower metal plate to attach the rectangular waveguide flange. The second design consists of a transition from standard microstrip packaged by a bed of pins to WR-15. The performance was determined by simulating it in single and back-to-back configuration, and by measuring back-to-back prototypes. There is good agreement between simulated and measured results. However, there is a frequency shift in the performance, caused by the substrate material (Rogers RO3003) filling the gap, being so soft that again it gave non-uniform contact to the pins. The measured return loss is still larger than 15 dB over 13.8% relative bandwidth. Finally, we have studied the losses of the two investigated gap waveguide types in the 60 GHz band, and compared them with unpackaged microstrip and substrate integrated waveguide. Unpackaged microstrip presents the largest attenuation, caused by dielectric, conductive and radiation loss. Inverted microstrip gap waveguide with Rogers RO3003 material has lowest measured losses. The obtained loss of the inverted microstrip gap waveguide with Rogers RO4003 is slightly larger than when using RO3003, and about the same as in the SIW case. However, the comparison is not so straightforward since SIW employs RT/duroid 5880 with lower loss tangent than RO3003 and RO4003 at 60 GHz. Thereby, we could expect even smaller losses in inverted microstrip gap waveguide than SIW if designed with same dielectric material.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT The authors would like to thank Prof. V. Vassilev from the Microtechnology and Nanoscience Department at Chalmers University of Technology, Sweden, for his useful advice on this project as well as help during the setup of the measurement equipment and assembling of the gap waveguide prototypes.
REFERENCES [1] F. Gardiol, “Radiation from microstrip circuits: An introduction,” Int. J. Microw. Millimeter-Wave Comput.-Aide. Eng., vol. 1, no. 2, pp. 225–235, 1991. [2] E. Levine, G. Malamud, S. Shtrikman, and D. Treves, “A study of microstrip array antennas with the feed network,” IEEE Trans. Antennas Propag., vol. 37, no. 4, pp. 426–434, 1989. [3] Y. Miura, J. Hirokawa, M. Ando, Y. Shibuya, and G. Yoshida, “Double layer full-corporate-feed hollow-waveguide slot array antenna in the 60 GHz-band,” IEEE Trans. Antennas Propag., vol. 59, no. 8, pp. 2844–2851, Aug. 2011. [4] S. S. Oh, J. W. Lee, M. S. Song, and Y. S. Kim, “Two-layer slotted waveguide antenna array with broad reflection/gain bandwidth at millimeter-wave frequencies,” Proc. Inst. Electr. Eng.—Microw. Antennas Propag., vol. 51, no. 5, pp. 393–398, Oct. 2004. [5] D. Deslandes and K. Wu, “Accurate modeling, wave mechanisms, and design considerations of a substrate integrated waveguide,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 54, no. 6, pp. 2516–2526, Jun. 2006. [6] F. Xu and K. Wu, “Guided-wave and leakage characteristics of substrate integrated waveguide,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 53, no. 1, pp. 66–73, Jan. 2005. [7] M. Bozzi, F. Xu, D. Deslandes, and K. Wu, “Modelling and design considerations for substrate integrated waveguide circuits and components,” in Proc. 8th Int. Conf. Telecommun. Modern Satellite, Cable, Broadcast. Services , 2007, pp. P-VII–P-XVI.
4049
[8] L. Yan, W. Hong, G. Hua, J. Chen, K. Wu, and T. J. Cui, “Simulation and experiment on SIW slot array antennas,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 14, no. 9, pp. 446–448, Sep. 2004. [9] D.-F. Guan, Z.-P. Qian, Y.-S. Zhang, and Y. Cai, “Novel SIW cavitybacked antenna array without using individual feeding network,” IEEE Antennas Wireless Propag. Lett., vol. 13, pp. 423–426, 2014. [10] P.-S. Kildal, “Artificially soft and hard surfaces in electromagnetics,” IEEE Trans. Antennas Propag., vol. 28, no. 10, pp. 1537–1544, 1990. [11] P.-S. Kildal, E. Alfonso, A. Valero-Nogueira, and E. Rajo-Iglesias, “Local metamaterial-based waveguides in gaps between parallel metal plates,” IEEE Antennas Wireless Propag. Lett., vol. 8, pp. 84–87, 2009. [12] P.-S. Kildal, “Three metamaterial-based gap waveguides between parallel metal plates for mm/submm waves,” presented at the 3rd Eur. Conf. Antennas Propag., Berlin, Germany, Mar. 23–27, 2009. [13] A. Valero-Nogueira, E. Alfonso, J. I. Herranz, and P.-S. Kildal, “Experimental demonstration of local quasi-TEM gap modes in single-hardwall waveguides,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 19, no. 9, pp. 536–538, Sep. 2009. [14] P.-S. Kildal, A. U. Zaman, E. Rajo-Iglesias, E. Alfonso, and A. ValeroNogueira, “Design and experimental verification of ridge gap waveguides in bed of nails for parallel plate mode suppression,” IET Microw., Antennas, Propag., vol. 5, no. 3, pp. 262–270, Mar. 2011. [15] E. Pucci, A. U. Zaman, E. Rajo-Iglesias, P.-S. Kildal, and A. Kishk, “Study of -factors of ridge and groove gap waveguide resonators,” IET Microw., Antennas, Propag., vol. 7, no. 11, pp. 900–908, Aug. 2013. [16] A. U. Zaman, T. Vukusic, M. Alexanderson, and P.-S. Kildal, “Design of a simple transition from microstrip to ridge gap waveguide suited for MMIC and antenna integration,” IEEE Antennas Wireless Propag. Lett., vol. 12, pp. 1558–1561, 2013. [17] A. A. Brazález, A. U. Zaman, and P.-S. Kildal, “Design of a coplanar waveguide-to-ridge gap waveguide transition via capacitive coupling,” presented at the 6th Eur. Conf. Antennas Propag., Prague, Czech Republic, Mar. 26–30, 2012. [18] A. A. Brazález, A. U. Zaman, and P.-S. Kildal, “Investigation of a microstrip-to-ridge gap waveguide transition by electromagnetic coupling,” in Proc. IEEE Antennas Propag. Soc. Int. Symp., 2012, pp. 1–2. [19] E. Pucci, A. U. Zaman, E. Rajo-Iglesias, and P.-S. Kildal, “New low loss inverted microstrip line using gap waveguide technology for slot antenna applications,” presented at the 5th Eur. Conf. Antennas Propag., Rome, Italy, Apr. 11–15, 2011. [20] A. Valero-Nogueira, M. Baquero, J. I. Herranz, J. Domenech, E. Alfonso, and A. Vila, “Gap waveguides using a suspended strip on a bed of nails,” IEEE Antennas Wireless Propag. Lett., vol. 10, pp. 1006–1009, 2011. [21] E. Rajo-Iglesias and P.-S. Kildal, “Numerical studies of bandwidth of parallel plate cut-off realized by bed of nails, corrugations and mushroom-type EBG for use in gap waveguides,” IET Microw., Antennas, Propag., vol. 5, pp. 282–289, Mar. 2011. [22] E. Pucci, E. Rajo-Iglesias, J.-L. Vázquez-Roy, and P.-S. Kildal, “Planar dual-mode horn array with corporate-feed network in inverted microstrip gap waveguide,” IEEE Trans. Antennas Propag., vol. 62, no. 7, pp. 3534–3542, 2014. [23] C. Gahete Arias, M. Baquero Escudero, A. Valero Nogueira, and A. Vila Jiménez, “Test-fixture for suspended-strip gap-waveguide technology on Ka-band,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 23, pp. 321–323, 2013. [24] H. Raza, J. Yang, P.-S. Kildal, and E. Alfonso, “Microstrip-ridge gap waveguide – study of losses, bends and transition to WR-15,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Tech., vol. 62, no. 9, pp. 1943–1952, 2014. [25] S. A. Razavi, P.-S. Kildal, L. Xiang, E. Alfonso, and H. Chen, “2 2-slot element for 60 GHz planar array antenna realized on two doubled-sided PCBs using SIW cavity and EBG-type soft surface fed by microstrip-ridge gap waveguide,” IEEE Trans. Antennas Propag., vol. 62, no. 9, pp. 4564–4573, 2014. [26] A. Algaba Brazález, E. Rajo-Iglesias, and P.-S. Kildal, “Investigation of transitions for use in inverted microstrip gap waveguide antenna arrays,” presented at the 8th Eur. Conf. Antennas Propag., The Hague, Netherlands, Apr. 6–11, 2014. [27] B. Boukari, E. Moldovan, S. Affes, K. Wu, R. G. Bosisio, and S. O. Tatu, “Robust microstrip-to-waveguide transitions for millimeter-wave radar sensor applications,” IEEE Antennas Wireless Propag. Lett., vol. 8, pp. 759–762, 2009. [28] K. Y. Han and C.-K. Pao, “A V-band waveguide to microstrip inline transition,” in IEEE MTT-S Dig., 2012, pp. 1–3. [29] P. Hallbjörner, “Circuit board integrated patch transition between microstrip and rectangular waveguide, optimised for producibility,” Proc. Inst. Electr. Eng.—Microw., Antennas, Propag., vol. 153, no. 4, pp. 330–334, 2006.
4050
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
[30] Y.-C. Shih, T.-N. Ton, and L. Q. Bui, “Waveguide-to microstrip transitions for millimeter-wave applications,” in IEEE MTT-S Dig., 1998, pp. 473–475. [31] Y. Tikhov, J.-W. Moon, Y.-J. Kim, and Y. Sinelnikov, “Refined characterization of -plane waveguide to microstrip transition for millimeter-wave applications,” in Proc. Asia–Pac. Microw. Conf., 2000, pp. 1187–1190. [32] Y.-C. Leong and S. Weinreb, “Full band waveguide-to-microstrip probe transitions,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig., 1999, vol. 4, pp. 1435–1438. [33] A. Artemenko, A. Maltsev, R. Maslennikov, A. Sevastyanov, and V. Ssoring, “Design of wideband waveguide to microstrip transition for 60 GHz frequency band,” in Proc. 41st Eur. Microw. Conf., 2011, pp. 838–841. [34] K. Seo, K. Sakakibara, and N. Kikuma, “Microstrip-to-waveguide transition using waveguide with large broad-wall in millimeter-wave band,” in Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Ultra-Wideband, 2010, vol. 1, pp. 1–4. [35] A. L. Vera-López, S. K. Bhattacharya, C. A. Donado-Morcillo, J. Papapolymerou, D. Choudhury, and A. Horn, “Novel low loss thin film materials for wireless 60 GHz application,” in Proc. 60th IEEE Electron. Compon. Technol. Conf., 2010, pp. 1990–1995. [36] L. Yujian and L. Kwai-Man, “A broadband V-band rectangular waveguide to substrate integrated waveguide transition,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 24, no. 9, pp. 590–592, Sep. 2014. [37] A. Bakhtafrooz and A. Borji, “Novel two-layer millimeter-wave slot array antennas based on substrate integrated waveguide,” Progr. Electromagn. Res., vol. 109, pp. 475–491, 2010.
Astrid Algaba Brazález was born in Alicante, Spain, in 1983. She received the Telecommunication Engineering degree from Miguel Hernández University of Elche, Alicante, Spain, in 2009, and the Licentiate of Engineering and Ph.D. degrees from Chalmers University of Technology, Gothenburg, Sweden, in 2013 and 2015, respectively. She joined Ericsson Research, Ericsson AB, Gothenburg, Sweden, in November 2014. Her main research interests include the development of gap waveguide technology for millimeter and submillimeter-wave applications, microwave passive gap waveguide components, packaging of microstrip filters, design of high-frequency transitions between gap waveguide and other technologies, and metamaterials.
Eva Rajo-Iglesias (SM’08) was born in Monforte de Lemos, Spain, in 1972. She received the M.Sc. degree in telecommunication engineering from the University of Vigo, Spain, in 1996, and the Ph.D. degree in telecommunication engineering from the University Carlos III of Madrid, Spain, in 2002. She was a Teacher Assistant with the University Carlos III of Madrid from 1997 to 2001. She joined the Polytechnic University of Cartagena, Cartagena, Spain, as a Teacher Assistant, in 2001. In 2002, she joined University Carlos III of Madrid as a Visiting Lecturer, where she has been an Associate Professor with the Department of Signal Theory and Communications since 2004. She visited the Chalmers University of Technology, Göteborg, Sweden, as a Guest Researcher, in 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, and 2008, and has been an Affiliate Professor with the Antenna Group, Signals and Systems Department, since 2009. She has coauthored more than 50 papers in JCR international journals and more than 100 papers in international conferences. Her current research interests include microstrip patch antennas and arrays, metamaterials, artificial surfaces and periodic structures, MIMO systems, and optimization methods applied to electromagnetism.
Dr. Rajo-Iglesias was the recipient of the Loughborough Antennas and Propagation Conference Best Paper Award in 2007, the Best Poster Award in the field of Metamaterial Applications in Antennas, at the conference Metamaterials 2009, and the 2014 Excellence Award to Young Research Staff at the University Carlos III of Madrid, and she was the Third Place Winner of the Bell Labs Prize 2014. She is currently an Associate Editor of the IEEE Antennas and Propagation Magazine and of the IEEE ANTENNAS AND WIRELESS PROPAGATION LETTERS.
José Luis Vázquez-Roy (M’00) was born in Madrid, Spain, in 1969. He received the Ingeniero de Telecomunicación and Ph.D. degrees from the Universidad Politécnica de Madrid, Madrid, Spain, in 1993 and 1999, respectively. In 1999, he joined the Teoria de la Señal y Comunicaciones Department, Universidad Carlos III de Madrid, Spain, where he is currently an Associate Professor. His research activities and interests include the analysis and design of planar antennas, artificial surfaces, and periodic structures for microwave and millimeter-wave applications.
Abbas Vosoogh received the B.Sc. degree in electrical engineering from the University of Sistan and Baluchestan, Zahedan, Iran, in 2007 and the M.Sc. degree from the K. N. Toosi University of Technology, Tehran, Iran, in 2011. He is currently working towards the Ph.D. degree with Chalmers University of Technology, Gothenburg, Sweden. His current research interests include millimeter- and submillimeter-wave guiding structures, EBG, soft and hard surfaces, and planar array antennas.
Per-Simon Kildal (M’82–SM’84–F’95) received the M.S.E.E. and Ph.D. degrees from The Norwegian Institute of Technology, Tronheim, Norway. Since 1989, he has been a Professor at Chalmers University of Technology, Götenburg, Sweden, where he now heads the Division of Antenna Systems at Department of Signals and Systems. He has authored an antenna textbook and more than 150 journal articles and letters, most of them in IEEE or IET journals. He has designed two very large antennas, including the Gregorian dual-reflector feed of the Arecibo radiotelescope. He has invented several reflector antenna feeds, the latest being the so-called eleven antenna. He is the originator of the concept of soft and hard surfaces, recently resulting in the gap waveguide, a new low-loss metamaterial-based transmission line advantageous in particular above 30 GHz. His research group has pioneered the reverberation chamber into an accurate over-the-air (OTA) measurement tool for antennas and wireless terminals subject to Rayleigh fading. This has been successfully commercialized in Bluetest AB. Prof. Kildal received two Best Paper Awards for articles published in the IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON ANTENNAS AND PROPAGATION, and he was the recipient of the 2011 Distinguished Achievements Award of the IEEE Antennas and Propagation Society. He has received large individual grants from the Swedish research council VR and from the European Research Council ERC for research on gap waveguides.
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
4051
Highly Efficient Concurrent Power Amplifier With Controllable Modes Yinjin Sun, Member, IEEE, Xiao-Wei Zhu, Member, IEEE, Jianfeng Zhai, Lei Zhang, and Fan Meng
Abstract—This paper presents a controllable mode design method for a concurrent dual-mode power amplifier (PA). The principle of the controllable mode combination is proposed by investigating the characteristics of different highly efficient PA modes, which is analyzed from frequency response of the low-pass matching circuit. Then a dual-mode PA with Classand Class-J mode is taken for example to verify this mode combination concept. A GaN device PA with 10-W output is designed at two frequency ranges of 1.9 2.0 GHz and 2.3 2.6 GHz. Measurement results show an output power of 40.2 42.9 dBm and drain efficiency of 75.6 80.3% and 76.6 68.8% in two frequency bands. It also provides a broadband operation with drain efficiency of 60 80.3% over 1.7 2.8 GHz. To evaluate its modulated signal performance with concurrent multiband and broadband appli20 MHz) with 140- and cations, dual-band signals (20 MHz 300-MHz frequency spacing and 100-MHz long-term evolution advanced (LTE-A) signals at two modes are both employed. With digital pre-distortion algorithm, adjacent channel leakage ratio lower than 47.5, 48.6 and 46.1 dBc are achieved, indicating its excellent performance in mobile communication systems. Index Terms—Class-F , Class-J, concurrent controllable mode, low-pass matching, long-term evolution advanced (LTE-Advanced), multimode combination, PA.
I. INTRODUCTION
T
O meet the Gb/s peak data rate in fourth-generation (4G)/fifth-generation (5G) mobile communication systems, carrier aggregation (CA) technology is employed to support the very high data transmissions over a wide bandwidth. For the CA technology, three different aggregation scenarios of intra-band with contiguous carriers, inter-band, and intra-band with noncontiguous carriers will combine multiple available component carriers that are adjacent or separated along the frequency band. By choosing the unused scattered frequency bands and those already allocated for some legacy systems, CA enables the mobile systems fully utilize their current spectrum resources. Furthermore, different operators adopting different protocols and standards inevitably coexist in modern mobile
Manuscript received March 09, 2015; revised August 16, 2015 and September 15, 2015; accepted September 23, 2015. Date of publication October 26, 2015; date of current version December 02, 2015. This work was supported in part by the National Science and Technology Major Project of China under Grant 2013ZX03001017-003 and NSFC under Grant 61401008. The authors are with the State Key Laboratory of Millimeter Waves, Southeast University, Nanjing 210096, China (e-mail: [email protected]; [email protected]). Color versions of one or more of the figures in this paper are available online at http://ieeexplore.ieee.org. Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/TMTT.2015.2486759
systems which also introduce huge demands for multiple frequency bands operation. A power amplifier (PA) is the key component in mobile communication systems. Therefore, its RF characteristic is required to cover or vary with the specific frequency bands, which always presents the highly efficient broadband and multiband operation [1]–[3]. However, a multiband PA design depends on the passive component in the matching circuit, which places big limitations for the choice of the bandwidth and the frequency ratio in the flexible CA technique. Also, for broadband PAs in working ranges, efficiency peaks cannot vary with the aggregated carrier component or operator channels so that the best performance might not be obtained. To solve this problem, a controllable-modes PA allocating the highly efficient mode to required bands would be a very promising choice for CA or multistandard systems. Supporting high efficiency in the working band, harmonic-tuned PAs have been investigated by many researchers [4]–[7]. In [4], Class-F and Class-F are combined to obtain high efficiency at dual band with a fixed frequency ratio . A multimode transferred PA with Class-F J J B F modes at specific multifrequencies has been designed to fit more communication channels in [5]. Many open stubs are utilized in the output matching circuit to realize required harmonic impedances at harmonic frequencies. Also, the sequence of these modes is carefully arranged to reduce the series of the controlled harmonic impedance. Another broadband PA with dual continuous mode is proposed to achieve high efficiency over wide bandwidth [3]. Series of harmonic impedance up to the third-harmonic frequency are provided by this continuous mode design. However, the principle of combining different modes is not illustrated, nor is how to control the modes in this combination. In this paper, mode controlled PA is proposed and then investigated by detailed analysis between parasitic and low-pass matching circuit. Class-F and Class-J mode are combined together for broadband or concurrent applications. Two modes are designed to work together at two frequency ranges, where a series of harmonic impedance in each mode is decreased compared with the only mode broadband PA design. For the broadband design of [3], the Class-J mode only needs to control the second-harmonic impedance, which greatly reduces the design difficulty. Different from [4] and [5], this proposed design avoids using open stubs in the output matching network, therefore, it simplifies the design complexity. Moreover, there is no fixed frequency ratio of 3:2 in [4] or imposed restrictions on multimode introduced by the associated harmonic impedance [5]. The efficiency peaks of these modes can be controlled to locate at the objective frequency ranges which guarantee
0018-9480 © 2015 IEEE. Personal use is permitted, but republication/redistribution requires IEEE permission. See http://www.ieee.org/publications_standards/publications/rights/index.html for more information.
4052
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
the tunable frequency allocation and the best performance for concurrent or CA application. The remainder of this article is organized as follows. In Section II, mode combination and controllable mode concept is proposed from the study of different highly efficient PA modes. Then, a dual-mode controlled PA is presented from the comprehensive investigation of parasitic and low-pass matching behaviors. In Section III, a PA with Class-F and Class-J modes is clearly illustrated and implemented by low-pass matching circuits. For the verification, this designed dual-mode PA is fabricated and measured in Section IV. In this section, the simulation and experimental results present an excellent performance for concurrent multiband and broadband applications. Finally, a concise conclusion is drawn in Section V. Fig. 1. Engineered harmonic impedance for different highly efficient PA modes.
II. OPERATIONAL PRINCIPLE OF CONTROLLABLE MODES WITH LOW-PASS MATCHING METHOD A. Mode Combination and Control Highly efficient PA modes like Class-F, Class-F , Class-J and Class-J are classified from their engineered different harmonic impedances. From this point of view, different highly efficient PA modes could be combined to work together by engineering their required harmonic impedances in the same matching circuit. By controlling the provided harmonic impedances combinations, the PA will exhibit different modes combination performance. Engineered harmonic impedances for different highly efficient PA modes are illustrated in the Smith chart as shown in Fig. 1. Regions of short and open harmonic impedance can realize the Class-F/F or continuous Class-F/F mode operation. Regions of capacitive and inductive harmonic impedance can perform the Class-J/J mode operation. In terms of the clockwise frequency response of one matching circuit, operational mode of a PA provides clockwise cycles of Class-F, Class-J , Class-F , and Class-J in sequence. By arranging four reactive harmonic regions (i.e., open, capacitive, short, and inductive) into a suitable clockwise alignment, some of the four modes can be combined together at multiple bands in clockwise sequence. Hence, a multiband or broadband highly efficient PA can be realized by this harmonic impedance combination. For example, harmonic impedance combination with shortopen-short alignment can design Class-F and Class-F mode into dual-band operation as in [4]. In this combination, the harmonic impedance as open state is both shared by the third-harmonic frequency of the lower band and the second-harmonic frequency of the upper band. Proper harmonic impedance alignment makes the combination of Class-F, Class-J , Class-J, and Class-F modes at four frequencies [5]. Similar to [4], open impedance is also shared by Class-F and Class-F mode. For a simple harmonic impedance combination, the curve in the upper half plane of Fig. 1 is noted, and it aligns short-inductive-open harmonic impedance in sequence. Short and open harmonic impedance could be assembled for the Class-F mode, and inductive harmonic impedance can be utilized for the Class-J mode. This alignment controls a dual-mode combination. In the
same way, the curve in the lower half plane with open-capacitive-short alignment combines Class-F and Class-J mode together as shown in Fig. 2(a). To control and realize these multimodes into one matching circuit, reactive harmonic impedance is required at specific harmonic frequencies. For this reason, the low-pass matching circuit which presents reactance behavior at higher frequency is considered here. To verify this mode controlled design method, examples of dual-mode PA with Class-F and Class-J modes combination as given below followed by the low-pass matching circuit. B. Short and Capacitive Impedance Realization for Class-F and Class-J Mode by Low-Pass Matching Circuit Impedance behavior of a Chebyshev low-pass matching circuit is analyzed for further investigation. As shown in Fig. 2, output impedance of the low-pass matching circuit with even number elements shows inductive valued response at higher frequency. This frequency response extends to the open state in Smith chart and it is related to the out-of-band restriction of the low-pass behavior. This inductive behavior can also be derived from the first series inductor and second parallel capacitor of Chebyshev low-pass matching circuit in Fig. 2(b). At higher frequency, a small impedance is produced by as (1) Then, the rest of the network behind is shorted by this capacitor, and an inductive reactance is generated by . For a packaged PA device, the entire output matching circuit consists of an internal parasitic and low-pass matching circuit discussed above. Fig. 3 shows the typical equivalent-circuit of a GaN HEMT device (CGH40010) and its extracted parasitic circuit [6]–[8]. Cascaded with this parasitic circuit in Fig. 4, the output impedance at the intrinsic current plane provides a completely different behavior from the original low-pass matching circuit. A parallel structure of and other elements is made by this introduced parasitic circuit. For a 1.5-pF valued , reactance at 9 GHz is calculated as by (1). Thus, a smaller
SUN et al.: HIGHLY EFFICIENT CONCURRENT POWER AMPLIFIER WITH CONTROLLABLE MODES
Fig. 2. (a) Impedance trajectory of the low-pass matching circuit and combined two modes of Class-F matching circuit. (c) Topology of low-pass filter design.
4053
and Class-J. (b) Transmission feature of low-pass
Fig. 3. Equivalent circuit of packaged CGH40010 and the extracted component values.
Fig. 4. Cascaded connection of parasitic and output matching circuit.
reactance is obtained by this parallel structure, whether other elements and low-pass matching circuit give a large inductive value or not. Nearly shorted impedance at intrinsic current plane is obtained in the highest frequency corresponding to the end of low-pass matching trajectory in Fig. 2(a). Moreover, the capacitive impedance at relatively lower frequency is obtained by the . parallel Realization of short and capacitive impedance at the highest and relatively lower frequency makes the possible combination of Class-F and Class-J modes in the same output circuit. C. Open State Realization for Class F Matching Circuit
Mode by Low-Pass
From the above analysis, the small reactance at the 3rd harmonic frequency (highest frequency) for Class-F and the capacitive reactance at the 2nd harmonic frequency (relatively lower frequency) for Class-J can be realized by the parallel structure of and other elements. To obtain the important
at the 2nd harmonic, some derivaopen state for Class-F tions need to be carried out at the middle frequency, which locates between the fundamental and the 3rd harmonic frequency. These derivations are based on the interaction of the low-pass matching and the parasitic circuit. , To simplify the analysis of circuit (a) in Fig. 5, and in the parasitic circuit are all neglected due to is also their small values. Also, the parasitic capacitor neglected since its small value makes high impedance, which is and nearly open to the main circuit. For example, 0.2 nH make j5 and reactance at 4 GHz 0.15 pF by (1) and (2) Therefore, the whole output network can be simplified as the circuit Fig. 5(b) in the middle frequency. From the illustrated characteristic of the low-pass matching circuit at the middle frequency, it provides the inductive behavior as an inductor. So a parallel LC network is built by
4054
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 5. Simplified output matching network for the resonant analysis. (a) Parasitic circuit connecting with low-pass matching circuit. (b) connecting with equivalent inductance. low-pass matching circuit. (c)
Fig. 6. Impedance of the parasitic
and inductor.
Fig. 7. Reactance behavior of parallel LC network with
and the inductive output of the low-pass matching circuit in middle harmonic frequency. A further simplified network (c) is generated from circuit (b) in Fig. 5. As a parallel structure, the resonance will occur at some frequencies. By this resonant characteristic, opened impedance is nearly generated at the intrinsic current plane in the middle harmonic frequency by
connecting with
and different
.
in Fig. 7. Small capacitive impedance at the highest frequency verifies the investigation above about the capacitive and short impedance in Section II-A. Thus, the open harmonic impedance in the middle frequency can be obtained by the resonance of the parasitic and low-pass matching circuit. D. Investigation of Resonant Characteristic
when (3) The reactance of and the inductor of 1.2, 1.4, and 1.6 nH are calculated to illustrate the resonant effect as shown in Fig. 6. It can be noted that two components are with the equivalent magnitude but different signs in the middle frequency. So the resonance must occur and its frequency is related to the different inductive reactance of the low-pass matching circuit. Besides, the impedance of the whole parallel LC network is shown
The required open, capacitive and short harmonic impedances for the combined Class-F and Class-J modes have been achieved from the analysis above, so the dual-mode combination can be realized by this proposed low-pass matching circuit. However, to make a proper alignment of open-capacitive-short impedance and control these two mode combinations, the resonant behavior of the circuit in Fig. 5(c) needs to be studied in depth. The impedance of the low-pass matching in circuit in Fig. 5(b) can be approximately expressed as (4) (5)
SUN et al.: HIGHLY EFFICIENT CONCURRENT POWER AMPLIFIER WITH CONTROLLABLE MODES
4055
where represents the whole reactance produced by the rest component of the low-pass matching except and . represents the whole reactance produced by the low-pass matching excluding , , and . M denotes the reactance of paralleled with . denotes the reactance of paralleled with , which is illustrated in the circuit in Fig. 5(a). By solving (2)–(4) together and using the resonant condition, the resonance occurs when the impedance of the parasitic capacitor and low-pass matching circuit have the same magnitude and reverse signs. Therefore, (2) equals (4) with a minus sign as shown by
(6) Equation (6) can be transformed into a quadratic equation as (7) In terms of the formula giving roots , the resonant frequency can be solved as
(8) The plus sign of the roots is selected to ensure the real resonant frequency. This solution indicates the resonant frequency is determined by values of the inductor and the component . In order to figure out the relationship between two variables and the resonant frequency, the characteristic of M will be analyzed and its scale will be defined. Since ( paralleled with ) is similar to the structure of paralleled with a low-pass matching circuit, a theoretical resonance of should occur at some frequencies as well. Thus, the impedance behavior from the inductive, inductive infinity, capacitive infinity to capacitive is obtained like the parallel LC network in Fig. 7. It can be observed from Fig. 2 that the low-pass matching circuit (impedance of in series with ) never extends to the infinity value, so the reactance of must be capacitive and located at the frequency which is higher than the resonant point. Since the component is a parallel structure ( paralleled with ), its value should be smaller than any of the paralleled element. Generally speaking, is the same or larger scale than pF, so impedance of is smaller than in Fig. 6. Similar to the component , is also a small capacitive reactance and has the weak impact on the impedance of . In summary, impedance of component is mainly determined by and . Given the analysis above, and are quantified in (8) to illustrate their relationship with the resonant frequency. is varied from 0.6 1.4 nH. Also, the component is defined by since reactance of presents from 3.5 to 8.5 GHz in Fig. 6. Then, the resonant frequency is calculated and plotted in Fig. 8. From Fig. 8, it can be noted that the resonant frequency decreases slightly with increased , and the small valued component produces a lower resonant frequency. This can be explained from (6) that the addition of a large and a small
Fig. 8. Resonant frequency calculated by (8).
makes a large inductive reactance, so a lower frequency is required by to generate an equivalent capacitive reactance. It can also be observed in Fig. 8 that the impact of component on the large inductor is depressed. This is because its value is too small compared with the given inductive reactance of large . According to these investigations, high impedance for the second harmonic of Class-F mode can be obtained and tuned by and component M (mainly and ). Then, the required open-capacitive-short impedances are fully achieved and the open state is controllable for the proper alignment in mode combination. III. DESIGN PA WITH CONTROLLABLE MODE OPERATION To design this controllable mode PA with the dual-mode combination, 1.9 2.0 GHz is selected for Class-F mode as a 3G/LTE frequency range. Then the 2nd frequency range of 2.3 2.6 GHz is also selected for LTE communication standards. Since the 2nd frequency region occupies a relative wide bandwidth, Class-J mode is suitable for it. A. Designing a Dual-Mode Output Matching The fundamental impedance with optimal value is obtained by the load-pull procedure at the intrinsic current plane and then transformed by parasitic circuit into package plane, varying around in two frequency ranges. The second- and third-harmonic frequencies for Class-F mode are located at the 3.8 4.0 GHz and 5.7 6.0 GHz regions, and the second harmonic of Class-J ranges from 4.6to 5.2 GHz. Harmonic loadpull results are shown in Fig. 9. Then, the dual-mode output matching is designed by the low-pass matching circuit. 1) Lumped Low-Pass Matching Circuit: In order to make broadband matching covering 1.9 2.6 GHz, a three-stage low-pass prototype of Chebyshev transformer with transformation ratio 5:1 is selected. Then this real-to-real impedance transformer is tuned to achieve a real-to-complex impedance transformer matching to . Parameters of the two matching circuits are listed in Table I. When tuning the low-pass matching circuit, the value of the lumped element is carefully optimized to align the required harmonic impedance at 3.8, 4.9 and 5.9 GHz regions. As shown in Fig. 8, the resonant frequency is lower to about 4 GHz and
4056
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 9. Efficiency contours by harmonic load-pull results. (a) Fundamental, second-, and third-harmonic impedance for Class-F mode at 2 GHz. (b) Fundamental and second-harmonic impedance for Class-J mode at 2.5 GHz.
TABLE I LOW-PASS MATCHING CIRCUIT WITH LUMPED NETWORK FOR DUAL-MODE DESIGN Fig. 10. Lumped output design. (a) Low-pass matching cascaded connection of parasitic circuit. (b) Impedance trajectory from intrinsic current plane. (c) Impedance trajectory from low-pass matching circuit plane.
becomes less sensitive to the component M when gradually increases. For this reason, is tuned to a greater value as 1.2 nH and are also slightly tuned to present open state at the intrinsic current plane of 3.8 GHz. Finally, the optimization of the whole matching circuit is required to keep the fundamental matching with the suitable harmonic alignment. Impedances at the intrinsic current and the package plane are both simulated to indicate this dual-mode operation. As shown in Fig. 10, impedance at package plane gives a nearly inductive reactance of starting from 3.8 GHz. Connected with the parasitic circuit, the output matching circuit presents a high impedance of at 3.8 GHz for the second harmonic of Class-F mode due to the resonance effect. To the shorted state of the 3rd harmonic impedance for Class-F , it is clearly obtained by the parasitic which is illustrated as well in Fig. 10. A capacitive impedance of is performed at the second-harmonic frequency of 4.9 GHz for Class-J mode. 2) Transformation and Optimization: Completing the dualmode matching, lumped inductor and capacitor values in the prototype are translated into transmission lines (TLs) with highimpedance and open stubs with low-impedance respectively by the equivalent transformation [8] (9) where and denote the lumped inductor and capacitor values, and denote the high and low characteristic impedance of TLs, and is the transformed electrical length of TLs in radian. Taking the fabrication tolerance into account, high and low characteristic impedances of TLs are set as 74.5 and 15 separately. Thus, the corresponding widths are 0.8 and 8.5 mm. The transformed low-pass matching circuit with TLs is shown in the second row of Table II. The transformed matching network is then cascaded with the parasitic circuit and optimized to align the required harmonic
TABLE II LOW-PASS MATCHING CIRCUIT WITH DISTRIBUTED NETWORK DUAL-MODE DESIGN
FOR
impedance at their frequency region. Optimal results are listed in the third row of Table II. In Fig. 11, the frequency responses of the impedance behavior are simulated at the intrinsic current and package plane. Similarly, harmonic impedances for Class-F mode at 3.8 and 5.9 GHz present high impedance of and low reactance of , respectively, as shown in Fig. 11(b). The required impedance for the second harmonic of Class-J is also shown as at 4.9 GHz in Fig. 11(b). The impedance behavior verifies that Class-F mode at 1.9 2.0 GHz and Class-J mode at 2.3 2.6 GHz is well performed by this low-pass matching design. B. Designing Input Matching Circuit and Bias Network For the input matching circuit design, a two-stage low-pass matching circuit with transformation ratio 20:1 is used with the same procedure. Lumped matching circuit is obtained from the Chebyshev prototype and then transformed into TLs elements. Without introducing extra interference to the main matching circuit, bias networks are designed to present high impedance over two frequencies. A series inductor of 12 nH and 7.5 pF bypass capacitor is utilized as output bias circuit with high impedance about . For the input bias circuit, 100 resistor in series with 22 nH inductor is used to ensure stability of the PA. Impedances of input bias circuit give high impedance of and at 2.0 and 2.3 GHz.
SUN et al.: HIGHLY EFFICIENT CONCURRENT POWER AMPLIFIER WITH CONTROLLABLE MODES
4057
Fig. 13. Photograph of the fabricated controllable mode PA.
Fig. 11. Distributed output design. (a) Distributed matching network cascaded connection of parasitic circuit. (b) Impedance trajectory from intrinsic current plane. (c) Impedance trajectory from low-pass matching circuit plane.
Fig. 14. Simulated and measured small-signal performance of this PA.
A. Small- and Large-Signal Measurements
Fig. 12. Schematic of this controllable mode PA.
C. Post-Optimization Finally, input and output circuits are connected to the actual PA device model, and the post-optimization is executed to achieve better performance in full schematic simulation. For the input circuit, the transmission line of TL1 is removed and TL5 is added to make a flat gain response. In order to reduce the fabrication difficulty, single open stub of OTL6 in output matching is utilized to replace the parallel two-stub structure. The final schematic is shown in Fig. 12.
IV. SIMULATION AND EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS This proposed controllable mode PA is fabricated on RF35 substrate with and 30 mil thickness as shown in Fig. 13. It is biased at a gate voltage of 3.3 V and drain voltage of 28 V with quiescent current 50 mA. Small, large, and modulated signals are both adopted to evaluate its performance.
Simulated and measured -parameters are plotted in Fig. 14, which shows a small-signal gain of 14.3 16.9 dB over two frequency ranges. Continuous-wave (CW) tests have been carried out to evaluate large-signal characteristic of this PA. Fig. 14 shows the measured output power of 40.2 42.9 dBm over 1.7 2.8 GHz. It indicates the effective broadband matching including the Class-F and Class-J modes. Measured large-signal gain gives 14.3 16.8 dB over 1.9 2.6 GHz on Class-F and Class-J mode. The obtained overall drain efficiency ranges from 60.3% 80.3% at 1.7 2.8 GHz, and it gives two maximum efficiency points with 80.3% and 76.6% corresponding to the controllable dual-mode, where Class-F mode locates at 1.9 2.0 GHz and Class-J mode is at 2.3 2.6 GHz. Efficiencies in these two modes are 75.6 80.3% and 68.8 76.6% respectively. It can be noted from Fig. 15 that the simulation agrees well with the experimental results. However, efficiency at the end of the Class-J mode does not maintain a continuous high behavior as 2.3 GHz, which is mainly due to the inaccuracies in the modeling and fabrication. A summary of some highly-efficient multimode researches are listed in Table III. Compared to the dual-mode operation in [4], this work provides a controllable mode combination with higher efficiency and a tunable modes alignment. And compared to [3], this work has controllable efficiency peaks which can be tuned to locate at required frequencies and Class-J only needs the second-harmonic impedance engineering. Also, compared with the multimode transferred design [5], this work
4058
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 15. Simulated and measured results of proposed PA over 1.7 2.8 GHz.
TABLE III SUMMARY OF MULTIMODE OPERATIONAL PA
Fig. 16. Measured spectrum density of dual-band signals with and without DPD for concurrent application.
TABLE IV LINEARIZATION PERFORMANCE WITH CONCURRENT OPERATION FOR THIS PA
Calculated from the diagram.
presents a simplified matching method avoiding open stubs and fixed frequency ratio on multimode introduced by associated harmonic impedance. B. Modulated Signal Performance for Concurrent Application For the future multistandard communication systems, multiband signals will be produced and processed in one system as the concurrent application. So signals with 300-MHz frequency spacing and 9-dB PAPR is employed to evaluate concurrent application of this PA which is located at 2.0 and 2.3 GHz as Class-F and Class-J mode. A baseband board that can handle dual-band and broadband data processing and digital pre-distortion (DPD) is adopted in this research. The DPD algorithm is then applied to verify the linearity of the proposed PA. Different from the conventional DPD techniques, 2-D-DPD is employed to compensate for the distortion in each band separately and the effect of cross modulation [12]–[14]. Output signals are coupled to construct the independent inverse models for different signals. By passing through inverse models, the input signals are pre-distorted and combined together. Then the synthesized dual-band signals are used to linearize this PA. The generalized formulation of the eighth-order nonlinearities and the second-order memory depth is selected to construct the model. The measured output power spectral density with/without DPD is shown in Fig. 16. Adjacent channel leakage ratio (ACLR) lower than 46.1 dBc in each band is achieved as shown in Table IV. The output power at Class-F and Class-J mode is measured as 30.3 and 30.9 dBm with the entire drain
Fig. 17. Measured spectrum density of dual-band signals with and without DPD at 1.88 and 2.02 GHz.
TABLE V LINEARIZATION PERFORMANCE WITH DUAL-BAND SIGNAL FOR THIS PA
efficiency of 34.3%. This linearization results predict excellent performance of the dual-mode PA for the concurrent application at Class-F and Class-J mode. C. Dual-Band Signal Characteristic Dual-band signals (20 MHz 20 MHz) with 140-MHz frequency spacing and 8-dB PAPR are also employed for this PA to evaluate its dual-band characteristic in Class-F mode, where
SUN et al.: HIGHLY EFFICIENT CONCURRENT POWER AMPLIFIER WITH CONTROLLABLE MODES
4059
Fig. 18. Measured efficiency and ACLR with 100 MHz LTE-A signals. (a) At 1.9 GHz. (b) At 2.55 GHz.
Fig. 19. Measured spectral density with/without DPD. (a) At 1.9 GHz. (b) At 2.55 GHz.
the two carriers locate at 1.88 GHz and 2.02 GHz corresponding to the designed Class-F mode. The linearization result of dual-band signals at Class-F mode is shown in Fig. 17 and listed in Table V. It can be noted that ACLR of dual-band signals are both linearized to better than 49.4 dBc, which verifies the in-band concurrent operation in Class-F mode. The measured output powers at each band are 30.2 and 31.3 dBm with the average drain efficiency of 35.7% for total dual-band signals.
D. Broadband Modulated Signal Characteristic To evaluate the modulated signal characteristics in Class-F and Class-J mode, broadband 100 MHz long-term evolution advanced (LTE-A) signals with 7 dB PAPR are used to excite this dual-mode PA at 1.95 and 2.55 GHz, respectively. Efficiency and ACLR performance of this PA is also investigated and plotted in Fig. 18. The proposed PA is tested around an average output power of 31 dBm with the efficiency of 28% and 27%. Measured output power spectral density at Class-F and Class-J mode with/ without DPD are both plotted in Fig. 19. Table VI shows ACLR of the 100 MHz LTE-A signals are both linearized to lower than 47.5 dBc with DPD algorithm at 1.95 and 2.55 GHz, indicating that the performance meets the broadband mobile communication application.
TABLE VI LINEARIZATION PERFORMANCE WITH LTE-A SIGNAL FOR THIS PA
V. CONCLUSION This paper introduces a mode combination principle for the dual-band or broadband application. In terms of this concept, a controllable mode PA with dual Class-F and Class-J mode is proposed by the comprehensive investigation of the low-pass matching and parasitic circuit. From this design method, this controllable mode PA is simulated and designed as Class-F at 1.9 2.0 GHz and Class-J at 2.3 2.6 GHz. Drain efficiency in two modes ranges from 75.6 80.3% and 76.6 68.8% and measured output power is achieved as 42.9 40.2 dBm over 1.7–2.8 GHz. To the designed Class-F and Class-J mode, the concurrent performance is evaluated by dual-band signals with 300 MHz frequency spacing at 2.0 GHz and 2.3 GHz. ACLR lower than 46.1 dBc in two modes can be achieved with the drain efficiency of 34.3% by employing the 2-D-DPD program. Moreover, for the in-band concurrent application in the single Class-F mode, dual-band signals with 140 MHz frequency spacing are employed to excite the dual-mode PA. Well performed ACLR at 1.88 and 2.02 GHz are obtained which is lower than 48.6 dBc with the summed output power of 33.8 dBm and
4060
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
the drain efficiency of 35.7%. Modulated signal characteristics in Class-F and Class-J mode are also tested by the broadband 100 MHz LTE-A signals at 1.95 and 2.55 GHz. DPD results show an excellent ACLR better than 47.5 dBc at two modes. All experimental results of this proposed PA indicate its excellent performance for multiband and concurrent application.
REFERENCES
[1] P. Saad, P. Colantonio, L. Piazzon, F. Giannini, K. Andersson, and C. Fager, “Design of a concurrent dual-band 1.8–2.4-GHz GaN-HEMT Doherty power amplifier,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 60, no. 6, pp. 1840–1849, Jun. 2012. [2] W. Chen, S. A. Bassam, X. Li, Y. Liu, K. Rawat, M. Helaoui, F. M. Ghannouchi, and Z. Feng, “Design and linearization of concurrent dual-band Doherty power amplifier with frequency-dependent power ranges,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 59, no. 10, pp. 2537–2546, Oct. 2011. [3] K. Chen and D. Peroulis, “Design of broadband highly efficient harmonic-tuned power amplifier using in-band continuous Class-F/F mode-transferring,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 60, no. 12, pp. 4107–4116, Dec. 2012. [4] Y. Ding, Y. X. Guo, and F. L. Liu, “High-efficiency concurrent dualband class-F and inverse class-F power amplifier,” IET Electron. Lett., vol. 47, no. 15, pp. 847–849, Jul. 2011. [5] C. Liu, X. W. Zhu, Y. J. Sun, and J. Xia, “High efficiency broadband multi-Mode transferred power amplifier for LTE and 3G applications,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig., Jun. 2014, pp. 1–4. [6] K. Chen and D. Peroulis, “Design of highly efficient broadband Class-E power amplifier using synthesized lowpass matching networks,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 59, no. 12, pp. 3162–3173, Dec. 2011. [7] J. H. Kim, S. J. Lee, B.-H. Park, S. Hyun Jang, J.-H. Jung, and C.-S. Park, “Analysis of high-efficiency power amplifier using second harmonic manipulation: Inverse class-f/j amplifiers,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 59, no. 8, pp. 2024–2036, Aug. 2011. [8] K. Chen and D. Peroulis, “Design of broadband high-efficiency power amplifier using in-band class-F1/F mode-transferring technique,” in IEEE MTT-S Int. Microw. Symp. Dig, Jun. 2012, pp. 1–3. [9] K. Chen and D. Pertoulis, “A 3.1-GHz class-F power amplifier with 82% power-added-efficiency,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 23, no. 8, pp. 436–438, Aug. 2013. [10] D. M. Pozar, Microwave Engineering, 3rd ed. Boston, MA, USA: Wiley, 2005. [11] G. L. Matthaei, “Tables of Chebyshev impedance-transformation networks of low-pass filter form,” Proc. IEEE, vol. 52, no. 8, pp. 939–963, 1964. [12] S. A. Bassam, M. Helaoui, and F. M. Ghannouchi, “2-D digital predistortion (2-D-DPD) architecture for concurrent dual-band transmitters,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 59, no. 10, pp. 2547–2554, Oct. 2011. [13] S. A. Bassam, W. Chen, M. Helaoui, F. M. Ghannouchi, and Z. Feng, “Linearization of concurrent dual-band power amplifier based on 2D-DPD technique,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 21, no. 12, pp. 685–687, Dec. 2011. [14] S. A. Bassam, A. Kwan, W. Chen, M. Helaoui, and F. M. Ghannouchi, “Subsampling feedback loop applicable to concurrent dual-band linearization architecture,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 60, no. 6, pp. 1990–1999, Jun. 2012. [15] P. Wright, J. Lees, J. Benedikt, P. J. Tasker, and S. C. Cripps, “A methodology for realizing high efficiency Class-J in a linear and broadband PA,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 57, no. 12, pp. 3196–3204, Dec. 2009. [16] Y. Sun, X. Zhu, M. Yang, and J. Xia, “Design of 100 MHz wideband Doherty amplifier for 1.95 GHz LTE-advanced application,” in Proc. Int. Conf. Microw. Millimeter Wave Technol., 2012, vol. 1, pp. 1–4.
Yinjin Sun (M’15) received the B.S. degree in electronic and information engineering from Xidian University, Xi'an, China, in 2009. He is currently working toward the Ph.D. degree in information science and engineering at Southeast University, Nanjing, China. His current research interests include highly efficient and linear microwave PA design, highly efficient and broadband Doherty PA design, and linearization techniques.
Xiao-Wei Zhu (S'88–M'95) received the M.E. and Ph.D. degrees in radio engineering from Southeast University, Nanjing, China, in 1996 and 2000, respectively. Since 1984, he has been with Southeast University, Nanjing, China, where he is currently a Professor with the School of Information Science and Engineering. He has authored or coauthored over 90 technical publications. He holds 15 patents. His research interests include RF and antenna technologies for wireless communications, as well as microwave and millimeter-wave theory and technology, and power amplifier (PA) nonlinear character and its linearization research with a particular emphasis on wideband and high-efficiency GaN PAs. Dr. Zhu is president of the Microwave Integrated Circuits and Mobile Communication Sub-Society, the Microwave Society of CIE, and the secretary of the IEEE MTT-S/AP-S/EMC-S Joint Nanjing Chapter. He was the recipient of the 1994 First-Class Science and Technology Progress Prize presented by the Ministry of Education of China and the 2003 Second-Class Science and Technology Progress Prize of Jiangsu Province, China.
Jianfeng Zhai received the B.S. degrees in radio engineering from the Southeast University, Nanjing, China, in 2004, where he is currently working toward the Ph.D. degree at the School of Information Science and Engineering. His current research interests include digital signal processing, neural networks, nonlinear modeling, microwave circuits design, power amplifier linearization, and embedded systems.
Lei Zhang received the M.S. degree in signal and information processing and Ph.D. degree in electromagnetic field and microwave technology from Southeast University, Nanjing, China, in 1999 and 2009, respectively. He is currently with the School of Information Science and Engineering, Southeast University, Nanjing, China. His current researches include highly linear and efficient RF/microwave PA design, nonlinear modeling, linearization techniques, and microwave and millimeter-wave circuits design.
Fan Meng received the B.S. degree in information science and engineering from Southeast University, Nanjing, China, in 2011, where he is currently working toward the Ph.D. degree in information science and engineering. His current research interests include highly linear and efficient microwave PA design and highly efficient envelope tracking PA design
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
4061
A Post-Matching Doherty Power Amplifier Employing Low-Order Impedance Inverters for Broadband Applications Jingzhou Pang, Songbai He, Member, IEEE, Chaoyi Huang, Zhijiang Dai, Jun Peng, and Fei You, Member, IEEE
Abstract—This paper presents a modified Doherty configuration with extended bandwidth. The narrow band feature of the conventional Doherty amplifier is discussed in the view of the broadband matching. To extend the bandwidth, the post-matching architecture is employed in the proposed design. Meanwhile, broadband low-order impedance inverters are adopted to replace the quarterwavelength transmission lines. Low-pass filter topologies are used to realize both the post matching network and the impedance inverters. A modified Doherty Power amplifier was designed and fabricated based on commercial GaN HEMT devices to validate the broadband characteristics of this configuration. The 6-dB backoff efficiencies of 47%–57% are obtained from 1.7 to 2.6 GHz (41.9% fractional bandwidth) and the measured maximum output power ranges from 44.9 to 46.3 dBm in the designed band. In particular, more than 40% efficiencies are measured at 10-dB backoff throughout the operation band. Index Terms—Broadband, Doherty, low-order impedance inverter, low-pass filter, post matching.
I. INTRODUCTION
I
N ORDER to save the rare and expensive spectrum resources, the high order modulation schemes are widely adopted in the modern communication systems. The accompanying signal characteristics with large peak-to-average power ratio (PAPR) create a demand for transmitter architectures with high efficiency performance at output power backoff (OBO). A wide variety of transmitter architectures have been presented to meet this demand. In the past, architectures like envelope elimination and restoration (EER) [1], envelope tracking (ET) [2], [3], polar transmitters [4], linear amplification with nonlinear components (LINC) [5] and Doherty techniques [6] have been proven to be useful to enhance the efficiency performance for large PAPR applications. It is interesting that all these architectures adopt two-way structures. From the perspective of the signal transmission,
Manuscript received March 09, 2015; revised September 07, 2015; accepted October 18, 2015. Date of publication November 19, 2015; date of current version December 02, 2015. This work was supported in part by the National Natural Science Foundation of China under Grant 61271036 and Grant 61001032 and by the Fundamental Research Funds for the Central Universities under project ZYGX2010Z005. The authors are with the School of Electronic Engineering, University of Electronic Science and Technology of China, Chengdu 611731, China (e-mail:[email protected]; [email protected]; [email protected]). Color versions of one or more of the figures in this paper are available online at http://ieeexplore.ieee.org. Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/TMTT.2015.2495201
these architectures can be divided into two different types. The first type includes EER, polar transmitters, and LINC; they change the signal characteristics by transferring the high PAPR signals to constant envelope ones. The other type includes ET and Doherty transmitters, which keep the signal characteristics unchanged. With the development of the wireless communication systems, wider and wider signal bandwidths are adopted to meet the increasing demand of high data transmission rates. Unfortunately, the bandwidths of the separated signals in the former type systems will be tremendously extended [7], making the design of these kinds of systems difficult. Relatively, Doherty and ET are more able to adapt to the future wireless applications. Meanwhile, wider operation bands are also required to support multiband/multimode standards. During the narrow band era, the Doherty configuration was the most widely used architecture for the base-station applications. By employing Class E, F and saturation mode amplifiers, Doherty power amplifiers (DPAs) show excellent efficiency performance [8]–[10]. Recently, broadband PA design techniques have been discussed in many published papers [11]–[15]. However, it is still difficult to design broadband DPAs because of the load modulation. Some efforts to extend the DPA's bandwidth have been done. Extending the bandwidth of the conventional LMNs ( -impedance inverter) [16], [17], exploiting compensation stages to reduce the bandwidth restrictions from the -impedance inverter [18] or using wideband harmonicstuning to match the required loads in a wide operation band [19], different kinds of techniques have been used to improve the bandwidth performance of DPAs. However, without changing the conventional structure shown in Fig. 1, these efforts can not keep a good Doherty operation over their entire operation bands. Real frequency technique was used to modify the original Doherty structure [20], while resulting in a complicated design method. Post-matching architecture was introduced in some modified structures, achieving good bandwidth performance [21]–[23]. In fact, the conventional Doherty structure has its inherent defects in broadband applications, while employing the post-matching configuration is a good way to extend the bandwidth. Moreover, modified impedance inverters with broadband characteristics are required to adapt to the post-matching architecture. In this paper, we present a modified Doherty configuration which includes the post-matching architecture and low-order impedance inverters. In Section II, the bandwidth limitation of the conventional Doherty configuration is discussed again
0018-9480 © 2015 IEEE. Personal use is permitted, but republication/redistribution requires IEEE permission. See http://www.ieee.org/publications_standards/publications/rights/index.html for more information.
4062
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 1. Block diagram of the conventional Doherty amplifier.
in the view of broadband matching and the necessity of the post-matching is pointed out. Then, we use the low-order filter topologies to expand the category of impedance-inverters in Section III. In Section IV, the implementation of the modified Doherty amplifier is explained and all the measured results are presented in Section V. With the modified configuration, an overall operation band of 1.7–2.6 GHz was measured with 6-dB backoff efficiency of 47%–57% and kept higher than 40% at 10 dB backoff.
II. POST MATCHING DOHERTY ARCHITECTURE A conventional DPA's output network normally includes output matching networks (OMNs) of the carrier and peaking PAs and a load modulation network (LMN), as shown in Fig. 1. The output current of the peaking PA changes in different input power levels, making the LMN ports present different impedance values. The Doherty operation is realized through the impedance-inverter in the LMN [6]. To get a broadband Doherty configuration, it seems like employing broadband OMNs and LMNs is the most direct method. However, simply extending the bandwidths of these two networks can not achieve the goal. In a broadband PA design, the OMN normally employ high-order topologies to realize a certain impedance ratio in the operation band. For high power amplifiers, high-order topologies are necessary because of the high impedance ratio. Meanwhile, these high-order topologies are often constructed with filter structures, providing an appropriate pass band with impedance ratio and enough out-of-band rejection to ensure the transmission of the power. For a conventional DPA, the matching impedances are supposed to follow the variation of the LMN ports. Because of the use of the high-order filter matching networks, this assumption can not be simply generalized in the broadband DPA designs. Fig. 2 shows the most common filter topologies to realize the broadband matching networks, including stepped transmission-line (TL) impedance transformers and two kinds of multistage filter networks. The attenuation functions of these kinds of networks are described based on the same class of formulas (for
Fig. 2. Summaries of broadband matching networks. (a) Multistage low-pass matching network. (b) Stepped TL transformer. (c) Multistage band-pass matching network.
example Butterworth and Chebyshev), resulting in similar characteristics although they employ different circuit topologies. In the conventional Doherty operation, the impedance of the load modulation point (LMP) shown in Fig. 1 will change from to (assuming that the impedance inverter can work at any frequency), but this variation can not be transferred by the matching networks. This phenomenon is shown in Fig. 3. A 6-order low-pass Chebyshev matching network with impedance ratio of 5:1 and 40% matching band is presented in Fig. 3(a), the corresponding parameters are calculated based on the method introduced in [24]. The center frequency of the pass-band is normalized to 1. When the load of the network changes from to , the matching impedance does not follow the variation trend over the matching band. This feature tremendously limits the bandwidth of the conventional DPA. Because of the similar characteristics mentioned above, this phenomenon widely exists for the high-order topologies. In order to avert this restriction, the post-matching architecture shown in Fig. 4 is presented. In this modified configuration, all of the high-order matching topologies mentioned above can be employed as the post matching networks, providing an appropriate impedance ratio in a broadband design. How to decide the impedance ratio of the post-matching network is illustrated in Section III. In the proposed post-matching DPA, the modulated impedances at LMP can be calculated as (1) (2) In these equations, is the output current transferred to the post-matching network. and are the output currents of the carrier and peaking branches, respectively. Like the conventional DPA, the carrier device is biased for class-AB operation and the peaking device for class-C operation. For the symmetrical Doherty operation, we have at
PANG et al.: POST-MATCHING DPA EMPLOYING LOW-ORDER IMPEDANCE INVERTERS FOR BROADBAND APPLICATIONS
4063
At saturation, the carrier and peaking devices are now required to generate equal power to keep this operation. This means, the inverters in the carrier and peaking branches should provide appropriate matching from to the required impedances. On the other hand, at BO region, in order to achieve high efficiency performance, the carrier low-order impedance inverter is required to match to appropriate impedances which can make the carrier device saturated in advance. The power level of this saturation in advance is suggested to be 3 dB less than that at saturation region compared to conventional symmetrical Doherty PAs, which means the proposed DPA will also achieve high efficiency performance at 6-dB OBO region. The detailed design method of the impedance inverters are discussed in Section III. In the proposed DPA, the post-matching network would not limit the DPA's bandwidth anymore, because it is in the rear of the LMP, avoiding the influence of the load modulation. The LMN becomes the critical part limiting the post-matching DPA's bandwidth. Broadband impedance inverter is needed for the carrier branch to provide appropriate matching impedances at both saturation and backoff regions. Moreover, the output impedance of the peaking branch has big influence on the carrier matching at the backoff region. An offset line might be needed to reduce the bad influence from the peaking branch. On the other hand, the peaking inverter is required to provide appropriate impedance matching for the class-C biased peaking device at saturation. This also means the characteristic impedance of the offset line is suggested to be set as . III. LMNS BASED ON LOW-ORDER IMPEDANCE INVERTERS
Fig. 3. 40% bandwidth 5:1 6-order low-pass impedance transformer in a impedance and 1 rad/s angular frequency [24]. normalized system with 1 (a) Schematic. (b) Real part of impedances in different load conditions. (c) Imaginary part of impedances in different load conditions.
Fig. 4. Block diagram of the post-matching DPA.
backoff (BO) region and at saturation, which means the corresponding modulated impedances at BO and saturation are Saturation BO
(3)
Saturation BO
(4)
Quarter-wave TLs are used to realize the conventional impedance inverters. Because we employ the post-matching structure, the characteristic impedances of the -impedance inverters would become small if they were still used, sometimes making these TLs too wide to implement. Meanwhile, the -impedance inverters also restrict the bandwidth of the Doherty operation, many published papers have already illustrated this defect (e.g., [16]–[18]). Moreover, impedance inverters are directly connected to the transistors in the proposed DPA, which means they should provide not only impedance inverse but also appropriate matching. However, the -impedance inverters can only realize real to real impedance transfer. Additional offset lines are needed to provide appropriate matching impedances, which would make the DPA system more complex and restrict the bandwidth more. In order to find other structures to realize the applicable impedance inverters, we should discuss the optimal impedances of the power transistors in different output power levels. Fig. 5 shows the load-pull simulation results of Cree's GaN HEMT CGH40025F at 2.15 GHz (the center frequency of a 40% bandwidth from 1.7 to 2.6 GHz). It can be seen that different matching conditions should be set at saturation and 3-dB output backoff, which corresponds to the required matching impedances of the carrier amplifier in the two different power levels of the Doherty operation. The two shadow areas are the overlapping regions of the Pout and PAE contours. In order to show the changing trend of the impedance in different power levels clearly, the reference impedance for the smith chart in
4064
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 5. Simulated load-pull results (PAE and Pout contours) of CGH40025F in different output power levels at 2.15 GHz.
TABLE I OPTIMAL IMPEDANCES FROM LOAD-PULL SIMULATIONS DIFFERENT INPUT POWER LEVELS
IN
Fig. 5 is chosen to be 10 . The blue arrow exhibit the variation trend of the optimal impedances required by the carrier PA when the input power increases. In this case, the optimal impedance changes from the area around to . This indicates that the Doherty operation requires a kind of impedance transformation which keeps the real part nearly invariant while making the value of the imaginary part decrease. This phenomenon is observed over a wide frequency range (more than 40% bandwidth), Table I shows the optimal impedances in different power levels over the 1.7–2.6-GHz band. This feature is caused by the nonideal parasitic and packaging parameters of the transistors. Load-pull results from Cree's CGH40010F in 1.2–1.8-GHz band are also presented in Table I showing similar feature. All the load-pull simulations are on the condition of open harmonic loads. The above discussion only indicates the needed features of the impedance inverters in the proposed DPA, but what structure can be used to realize those inverters is still unknown. The two-point matching technique provided in [25] presents a way for designing a matching network for changing loads, in which the conventional narrow band LMN can be removed. In the proposed DPA, we introduce a kind LMN based on low-order impedance inverters, which have simple topology to run the broadband Doherty operation.
Fig. 6. Normalized low-order low-pass impedance transformer. (a) Schematic. (b) Real part of impedances in different load conditions. (c) Imaginary part of impedances in different load conditions.
Fig. 6(a) shows the schematic of a normalized low-order lowpass impedance transformer. The transformed impedance is expressed as (5) This expression can be expanded to its real and imaginary parts as (6) From expression (6), we can know that the imaginary part of will become smaller as become larger and the real part will not change in a certain frequency . Considering when changes to and it is required that the real part of does not change at , we have (7) from (7),
is calculated as (8)
PANG et al.: POST-MATCHING DPA EMPLOYING LOW-ORDER IMPEDANCE INVERTERS FOR BROADBAND APPLICATIONS
Therefore, the real part of the matching impedance at puted as
4065
is com-
(9) Fig. 6(b) and (c) shows the variations of the impedance values when becomes . In these figures, the abscissa and we normalize and to 1. We can find that the real part values of changed a little (less than 16%) in a 40% bandwidth, and all the imaginary part values become smaller. These trends are just the same as the impedance conditions which are needed for running the Doherty operation mentioned above. Besides, the imaginary part of can be easily adjusted by changing the value of the inductor . From what has been discussed above, we can summarize the basic method to design a low-order low-pass impedance inverter. Besides, because is determined by the impedance inverter, the impedance ratio of the post matching networks can be calculated as , is normally the 50- load of the whole DPA system. The main steps to design the proposed DPA are described as follows. Step 1: Determine the basic parameters and . is determined by the center frequency of the preconceived DPA system while comes from the loadpull data of the active devices. is normally an average value of the load-pull results over the expected band. Step 2: Calculate all the parameters of the post-matching network and impedance inverters. These parameters are: the impedance value of the LMP , the impedance ratio of the post-matching network , the parameters of the inverters and . is calculated from (9) and then is decided by . For the carrier impedance inverter, is determined by (8) and should be tuned to an appropriate value based on the load-pull data. For the inverter in the peaking branch, the design method is different. The should be recalculated from the load pull data of the peaking device and has been already decided by the carrier branch, so (9) is not correct anymore. Because the main feature of the peaking inverter is to provide the required matching impedances for the peaking device at saturation, so for the peaking inverter can be calculated from (6) and should also be tuned to an appropriate value based on the load-pull data for the peaking device. The tuning procedure of design is to change its value to ensure that the final matching impedances are all in the load-pull contours. We will present the tuning method in detail in Section IV. Step 3: An offset line with characteristic impedance of is required to be added to the peaking inverter, reducing bad influence from the output impedances of the peaking branch on the carrier matching. Step 4: Design a high-order network to realize the post-matching network in the expected band and transfer the low-pass prototypes of the impedance inverters to physical circuits.
Fig. 7. Tuning procedure of design
for the carrier branch.
IV. PA IMPLEMENTATION A. Carrier Impedance Inverter Design In the proposed design, low-pass structures are chosen to realize both the post-matching network and the low-order impedance inverters. A 41.9% bandwidth from 1.7 to 2.6 GHz is set as the basic goal to achieve. Cree's GaN HEMTs CGH40025F are chosen as the active devices. From the simulated load-pull results shown in Table I, optimal impedances are observed within a range of 7–11.4 . Therefore, we set to the average value 9.2 . The impedance value of the LMP and parameters of the low-order impedance inverters are calculated using the method illustrated in Section III. The calculated parameters of the proposed DPA are presented as follows: , . The next step is tuning to an appropriate value based on the load-pull data. As shown in Fig. 7, different values of have direct influence on the matching results. To ensure a balanced performance for the DPA at backoff region, in the carrier branch was finally set as 1.6 nH. Fig. 8 shows the simulated load-pull results and matching impedances of this low-pass impedance inverter over the designed band. The results at 3-dB output backoff and saturation are presented in Fig. 8(b) and (c), respectively. The imaginary part of can not match the optimal impedance over the entire band, resulting in efficiency decrease in the proposed design. Despite this mismatch, the matching impedance curves are still in the 45% and 60% PAE contours’ region at the two different power levels as shown in Fig. 8(b) and (c). B. Peaking Impedance Inverter and Offset Line Design For the peaking impedance inverter design, the load-pull data of the peaking device need to be refreshed because of the different gate bias condition. The load-pull results for CGH40025F with Class-C operation are shown in Fig. 9. An average value of 11 is chosen as the matching goal of the peaking inverter at the center frequency . So the peaking inverter is required to realize the real part matching from to 11 at 2.15 GHz. As presented in (6), for the peaking inverter can be calculated as and for the peaking inverter is tuned to 1 nH. The tuning method is just the same as the carrier branch tuning design. These parameters are then transferred to a TL structure shown in Fig. 9. The matching results are also shown in Fig. 9.
4066
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
Fig. 10. Schematic of the LMN.
Fig. 8. Simulated results of the low-pass impedance inverter. (a) Schematic of the proposed impedance inverter. (b) Simulated matching impedances and load-pull results plotted in smith chart in the operation band at 3-dB output backoff. (c) At saturation.
Fig. 11. Simulated output impedances of the peaking branch with and without the designed offset line.
Fig. 12. Simulated carrier matching impedances and load-pull results plotted in smith chart with and without the impact from peaking output impedance.
Fig. 9. Simulated peaking matching impedances and load-pull results plotted in smith chart.
Fig. 10 presents the schematic of the proposed LMN. As mentioned in Section II, the output impedance of the peaking branch ( shown in Fig. 10) has crucial influence on the carrier matching at backoff region. As shown in Fig. 11, is now close to the zero point. An offset line should be added to the peaking inverter, providing large output impedances to avoid this influence. Meanwhile, in order not to affect the peaking
matching at saturation, the characteristic impedance of the offset line is suggested to set as 28 . It is difficult for the offset line to provide large output impedances for a broadband design. In practice, the offset line's length should be set to keep the carrier PA's high-performance running at the backoff region. In this design, a 60 offset line has been chosen. The simulated impedance of the peaking branch with a 60 offset line is shown in Fig. 11. It can be seen that the output impedance in the lower operation band is small (the value of the imaginary part at 1.7 GHz is only 19). Fortunately, the post-matching topology can reduce the bad influence from the peaking output impedance. That is because the post-matching network provide a small , while the is parallel with it. Fig. 12 shows the simulated carrier matching
PANG et al.: POST-MATCHING DPA EMPLOYING LOW-ORDER IMPEDANCE INVERTERS FOR BROADBAND APPLICATIONS
Fig. 14.
Fig. 13. Schematics.(a) Schematic of the proposed DPA. (b) Schematic of the input matching network. (c) Schematic of the uneven broadband power divider.
impedances in smith chart with and without the impact from peaking output impedance, the load-pull results are also plotted. It can be seen that the matching impedance curves are still in the 45% PAE contours at the backoff region.
C. Entire DPA Implementation Fig. 13(a) shows the schematic of the entire DPA, which was realized on the Rogers Duroid 5880 substrate with and . To realize the impedance matching from 50 to 14 in the 1.7–2.6 GHz band, a 6-order low-pass Chebyshev matching network, which is designed through the method introduced in [26], is used as the post-matching network. Meanwhile, the lumped in the impedance inverters are transferred to distributed circuits using the same method. The input matching networks(IMNs) of the carrier and peaking PAs are designed with three-stage TL networks, and they have similar topologies. The electrical length and impedance of each TL are calculated based on the synthesis theory in [24]. High-impedance TLs are used as the
4067
-parameters of the post-matching network.
supply lines to keep the low-order inverters' characteristics. Stabilization networks consisting of an RC-tank and a resistor at the gate bias are included in the IMNs. The resulting circuit is depicted in Fig. 13(b). Besides, in order to divide the input power in the designed operation band, a two-stage broadband power divider is designed based on the method introduced in [27]. Moreover, because the gain of the peaking PA is less than the carrier PA’s, this power divider is optimized to an uneven one to compensate the peaking PA's gain using the method illustrated in [28]. Fig. 13(c) shows the resulting schematic of this power divider. This uneven power divider is not necessary for the modified DPA system, while employing it would improve the DPA performance in the author's opinion. In the proposed design, the designed gain of the peaking branch is lower than that of the carrier branch at saturation, which means keeping an equal power input can not drive the peaking device to saturation while the carrier device has already been driven to. This means the load-modulation is imperfect at this situation. Increasing the input power can drive the peaking device to saturation also, but this means the gain will compress more, making the linearity deteriorate. By using the uneven power divider, more power can be transferred to the peaking device, which can release this defect. All the above mentioned circuits are simulated using Agilent ADS. In order to get the optimum performance, all the circuit parameters were optimized to a certain extent. Fig. 14 shows the simulated amplitude of the -parameters of the post-matching network. This network is nearly symmetrical which means and , so and are not plotted. From Fig. 14, we can see that is very close to zero and is below which implies the matching from 50 to 14 is realized successfully. The -parameters of the uneven broadband power divider are shown in Fig. 15, only the amplitudes are plotted versus the frequency. There is 0.4-dB difference between and . The reflections ( , , and ) and the isolation( ) are all below . The fabricated DPA circuit is shown in Fig. 16, all the testing ports (RF input, output, and dc supplies) use the SMAs. The size of the entire DPA is 12 cm 8 cm.
4068
Fig. 15.
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
-parameters of the broadband power divider.
Fig. 18. Measured gain versus single-tone output power of the Doherty PA over 1.7–2.6 GHz.
Fig. 16. Fabricated DPA circuit.
Fig. 19. Measured gain and max output power over the entire band.
Fig. 17. Measured efficiency versus single-tone output power of the Doherty PA over 1.7–2.6 GHz.
V. MEASUREMENT RESULTS A. Continuous Wave Testing Single-tone large-signal measurements were first performed over the designed band from 1.7 to 2.6 GHz. In the measurement, the gate of the carrier PA was biased at and the peaking PA at , while the drain biases were both 28 V. Fig. 17 presents the measured drain efficiency with respect to the output power and the measured gain on dependence of the output power is presented in Fig. 18. It is obvious that the Doherty operation is successfully realized over the entire band. The gain of the carrier and peaking PA changes with the frequency, making the peaking PA turn on in different output power levels at different operation frequencies. This frequency-dependent turn-on timing results in different backoff
Fig. 20. Measured efficiency performance at different output power levels over the entire band.
efficiency performances. Meanwhile, although the gain presents different compressions as frequency changes, a gain fluctuation within was still obtained at the 6–9-dB backoff region. The DPA's performance on dependence of frequency is also presented. Fig. 19 shows the measured maximum output powers from 1.7 to 2.6 GHz, which ranges from 44.9 to 46.3 dBm. The measured power gain of this DPA is also plotted in Fig. 19, which is within the range of 10.2–11.6 dB at 8–9-dB backoff
PANG et al.: POST-MATCHING DPA EMPLOYING LOW-ORDER IMPEDANCE INVERTERS FOR BROADBAND APPLICATIONS
Fig. 21. Measured output power, efficiency, and ACPR levels over the operation band, using a single-carrier 5 MHz WCDMA signal with .
4069
Fig. 22. Measured drain efficiency and ACPR levels using a single-carrier 5 MHz WCDMA signal with at 2.3 GHz.
and 8.6–10.5 dB at saturation. Fig. 20 shows the drain efficiency at the saturation and different backoff levels measured in 100 MHz steps in the operation band. A good backoff efficiency performance was achieved showing 47%–57% drain efficiency from 1.7 to 2.6 GHz at 6-dB backoff. In the deep OBO region (10-dB backoff), the measured drain efficiency was still kept above 40%. B. Modulated Signal Testing To evaluate the performance of the DPA in modern wireless communication systems, modulated signal measurements have been performed in the operation band. Signals with different bandwidths and PAPRs were used to measure the DPA performance in different conditions. The DPA was first tested using a 5-MHz WCDMA signal with PAPR of 6.5 dB. In the experiment, the bias condition was the same as that used in the single-tone measurements. Fig. 21 shows the measured average output power and drain efficiency (higher than 45%) , as well as the adjacent channel power ratio (ACPR) ( to ) across the entire band. The ACPRs in upper and lower bands are exactly similar to each other, so only one of them is plotted. Fig. 22 shows the drain efficiency and ACPR at 2.3 GHz when the output power is swept from 31 to 42 dBm. Digital predistortion (DPD) technique has been performed to evaluate that the DPA has the potential to be linearized. The measured DPA output spectrum at 2.3 GHz, for an average output power of 40 dBm, with and without DPD, are shown in Fig. 23. Better than ACPR was obtained after DPD, more than 15-dB improvement was achieved compared to the original ACPR. In the above measurements, the modulated signal is generated by the vector signal generator while the output spectrum and ACPRs are measured by the vector signal analyzer. Indirect learning approach is used to realize the DPD function. A memory polynomial model with nonlinear order 9 and memory depth 3 is chosen to build the DPD structure. All the model parameters are estimated through the least mean square algorithm. A 20-MHz long term evolution (LTE) signal with 10.5-dB PAPR was also used in the experiment, to evaluate the DPA performance when driven by high PAPR and wide-band signals.
Fig. 23. Measured DPA output signal spectrum of a 5-MHz WCDMA signal at 2.3 GHz with and without DPD.
Fig. 24. Measured output power, efficiency and ACPR levels over the opera. tion band, using a single-carrier 20 MHz LTE signal with
The high PAPR implies that the DPA operates in deep backoff state, and the wide signal bandwidth results in linearization deteriorating. Fig. 24 shows the measured performance on dependence of frequency with drain efficiency still higher than 40% and ACPR from to . The corresponding output powers are also plotted in this figure. The upper and lower ACPRs become asymmetric as the signal bandwidth extends. A summary of state-of-the-art broadband DPAs performances is shown in Table II. In Table II, BW, and represent
4070
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES, VOL. 63, NO. 12, DECEMBER 2015
TABLE II PERFORMANCE OF RECENTLY PUBLISHED BROADBAND DPAS
the bandwidth, peak drain efficiency, and 6-dB backoff drain efficiency of these PAs, respectively. From Table II we can see that the proposed DPA presents good performance on all the indicators. VI. CONCLUSION A new configuration for designing broadband DPAs by employing the post-matching network and low-order impedance inverters is presented in this paper. By employing the proposed architecture, a broadband Doherty PA with good performance can be easily designed. Calculation method of the circuit parameters is illustrated in this paper. A modified DPA using this configuration is designed and implemented with commercial GaN transistors. An overall 41.9% bandwidth (1.7–2.6 GHz), around 11-dB gain and higher than 47% efficiencies at 6-dB OBO are measured. In the deep OBO region (10-dB backoff), the measured drain efficiency still keeps above 40% over the entire operation band. Moreover, the modulated measurements using WCMDA and LTE signals show good potential for applications in nonconstant-envelope communication systems. ACKNOWLEDGMENT The authors would like to thank Q. Wei, Y. Wang, and Q. Wang from the Huawei Technologies Company for providing measurement support. The authors would also like to thank G. Naah from our laboratory for helping us with the grammatical checking. REFERENCES [1] F. Wang et al., “An improved power-added efficiency 19-dBm hybrid envelope elimination and restoration power amplifier for 802.11g WLAN applications,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 54, no. 12, pp. 4086–4099, Dec. 2006. [2] F. Wang, A. H. Yang, D. F. Kimball, L. E. Larson, and P. M. Asbeck, “Design of wide-bandwidth envelope-tracking power amplifiers for OFDM applications,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 53, no. 4, pp. 1244–1255, Apr. 2005. [3] F. You, B. Zhang, Z. Hu, and S. He, “Analysis of a broadband high-efficiency switch-mode - supply modulator based on a class-E amplifier and a class-E rectifier,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 61, no. 8, pp. 2934–2948, Aug. 2013. [4] M. R. Elliott et al., “A polar modulator transmitter for GSM/EDGE,” IEEE J. Solid-State Circuits, vol. 39, no. 12, pp. 2190–2199, Dec. 2004. [5] D. C. Cox, “Linear amplification with nonlinear components,” IEEE Trans. Commun., vol. COM-22, pp. 1942–1945, Dec. 1974. [6] W. H. Doherty, “A new high efficiency power amplifier for modulated waves,” Proc. IRE, vol. 24, pp. 1163–1182, Sep. 1936.
[7] M. S. Alavi, R. B. Staszewski, L. C. N. de Vreede, A. Visweswaran, and J. R. Long, “All-digital RF modulator,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 60, no. 11, pp. 3513–3526, Nov. 2012. [8] Y. S. Lee, M. W. Lee, and Y. H. Jeong, “Highly efficient Doherty amplifier based on class-E topology for WCDMA applications,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 18, no. 9, pp. 608–610, Sep. 2008. [9] P. Colantonio, F. Giannini, R. Giofr, and L. Piazzon, “Theory and experimental results of a class F–Doherty power amplifier,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 57, no. 8, pp. 1936–1947, Aug. 2009. [10] J. Kim, J. Son, J. Moon, and B. Kim, “A saturated Doherty power amplifier based on saturated amplifier,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 20, no. 2, pp. 109–111, Feb. 2010. [11] P. Saad, C. Fager, H. Cao, H. Zirath, and K. Andersson, “Design of a highly efficient 2–4-GHz octave bandwidth GaN-HEMT power amplifier,” IEEE Trans. Microw. Theory Techn., vol. 58, no. 7, pp. 1677–1685, Jul. 2010. [12] C. Huang, S. He, F. You, and Z. Hu, “Design of broadband linear and efficient power amplifier for long-term evolution applications,” IEEE Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett., vol. 23, no. 12, pp. 653–655, Dec. 2013. [13] Z. Dai, S. He, F. You, J. Peng, P. Chen, and L. Dong, “A new distributed parameter broadband matching m